Skip to main content

Full text of "Thucydides book VI"

See other formats


This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 
to make the world’s books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that’s often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book’s long journey from the 
publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 

We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google’s system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attribution The Google “watermark” you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can’t offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book’s appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google’s mission is to organize the world’s information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world’s books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 

atthtto: // 


i Ἦν 
= as 
. ‘Bi j 

ΚΣ me 


ι 3 


: Ἢ Ἂ ar ἰ 
a) fo F i 


- πὶ κι αν 2 Ss Tr = 
Sen A cA LATTRGORLOWEEVLr iw iaasab “ἢ 195 Φὰ ἘΠ ΠῚ ἐδ α δ πα itil 










CoPpYRIGHT, 1913, BY 



Zhe Athenzum Press 





abs. = absolute, absolutely. 

acc. = accusative. 

acc. to = according to. 

act. = active, actively. 

. adj. = adjective, adjectively. 

adv.= adverb, adverbial, adverbially. 

Aeol. = Aeolic. 

antec. = antecedent. 

aor. = aorist. 

apod. = apodosis. 

App. = Appendix. 

appos. = apposition, appositive. 

art. = article. 

Att. = Attic. 

attrib. = attributive. 

aug. = augment. 

c., cc. = chapter, chapters (when nu- 
merals follow). 

ef. = compare. 

chap. = chapter. 

comp. = comparative. 

cond. = condition, conditional. 

conj. = conjunction. 

const. = construe, construction. 

contr. = contraction, contracted. 

co-ord. = co-ordinate. 

dat. = dative. 

decl. = declension. 

def. = definite. 

dem. = demonstrative. 

dep. = deponent. 

dim. = diminutive. 

dir. = direct. 

disc. = discourse. 

Dor. = Doric. 

edit. = edition, editor. 

editt. = editions, editors. 

e.g. = for example. 

encl. = enclitic. 

Eng. = English. 

Ep. = Epic. 

epith. = epithet. 

equiv. = equivalent. 

esp. = especial, especially. 

etc. = and so forth. 

excl. = exclamation. 

f., ff. = following (after numerical 

fem. = feminine. 

fin. = sub fine. 

frey. = frequently. 

fut. = future. 

G. = Goodwin’s Greek Grammar. 

gen. = genitive. 

GMT.= Goodwin’s Moods and Tenses. 
H. = Hadley’s Greek Grammar, re- 
vised by F. D. Allen (1884). 

hist. pres. = historical present. 
ibid. = in the same place. 

id. = the same. 

i.e. = that is. 

impers. = impersonal, impersonally. 
impf. = imperfect. 

imv. = imperative. 

in, = ad initium. 

indef. = indefinite. 

indic. = indicative. 

indir. = indirect. 

inf, = infinitive. 

interr. = interrogative, interroga- 

intr. = intransitive, intransitively. 

Introd. = Introduction. 

Ion. = Ionic. 

Kr. Spr. = Kriiger’s Sprachlehre, 
Erster Theil, fifth edition. 

Kr, Dial. = Kriiger’s Sprachlehre, 
Zweiter Theil, fifth edition. 

xré. = καὶ τὰ ἑξῆς. 

κτλ. = καὶ τὰ λοιπά. 
Kiihn. = Ktihner’s Ausfiihrliche 
Grammatik, second edition. 
Kiihner-Blass = third edition of the 
first part of the Grammatik, re- 
vised by F. Blass. 

Kihner-Gerth = third edition of the 
second part of the Grammatik, 
revised by B. Gerth. 

Lat. = Latin. 

L. &S. = Liddell and Scott’s Lexicon, 
seventh and eighth editions, 

l.c. = loco citato. 

lit. = literal, literally. 

masc. = masculine. 

mid. = middle. 

M.= Monro’s Grammar of the Ho- 
meric Dialect. 

Ms., Mss. = manuscript, manuscripts. 

N. = note. 

neg. = negative. 

neut. = neuter. 

nom. = nominative. 

obj. = object. ; 

obs. = observe, observation. 

opp. to = opposed to. 

opt. = optative. 

p-, Pp. = page, pages. ee 

part. gen. = partitive genitive. 

partic. = participle. 

pass. = passive, passively. 

pers. =person, personal, personally. 

pf. = perfect. 

pl. = plural. 

plpf. = pluperfect. 

pred. = predicate. 

prep. = preposition. 

pres, = present. 

priv. = privative. 

prob. = probable, probably. 

pron. = pronoun. 

prop. = proper, properly. 

prot. = protasis. 

quot. = quoted, quotation. 

q.v. = which see. 

refl. = reflexive, reflexively. 

rel, = relative, relatively. 

Rem. = remark. 

S. = Schmidt’s Rhythmic and Metric. 

sc. = scilicet. 

SCG. = Gildersleeve’s Syntax of 
Classical Greek, First Part. 

Schol. = scholiast. 

sent. = sentence. 

sing. = singular. 

subj. = subject. 

subjv. = subjunctive. 

subord. = subordinate. 

subst. = substantive, substantively. 

sup. = superlative. 

5.0. = sub voce. 

trans. = transitive, transitively. 

viz. = namely. 

v.l. = varia lectio. 

voc. = vocative. 

§, §§ = section, sections. 
Plurals are formed generally by add- 
ing 8. 

Generally small Roman numerals 
(lower-case. letters) are used in 
referring to the books of an 
author; but A, B, I, etc. in re- 
ferring to the books of the Tliad, 
and a, 8, y, etc. in referring to 
the books of the Odyssey. 

In abbreviating the names of Greek 
authors and of their works, Lid- 
dell and Scott’s practice is gener- 
ally followed. 


This edition of the Sixth Book of Thucydides is based upon 
Steup’s revision of Classen’s edition, Berlin, 1905. The vari- 
ations from the text of the Classen-Steup edition — chiefly res- 
torations of Ms. readings— are explained in the notes. The 
exegetical notes of the German edition have been followed for 
the most part, but with a more independent attitude than was 
maintained in Books III and VII. Next to the Steup-Classen 
notes, those of Stahl, Boehme-Widmann, and Krueger have been 
most often drawn upon, but Mueller, Bloomfield, and Arnold 
have also been regularly consulted, and Marchant’s and Spratt’s 
commentaries, which have been at hand in the last stages of the 
work, would have proved more helpful had they been always 
‘consulted from the outset. Valuable suggestions have come 
from Jowett’s translation and notes as well as from other 
sources. Hude’s text has been consulted at every step. Per- 
haps the tendency has been to regard more and more matter as 
common property, but the editor has been at least always ready 
to acknowledge especial indebtedness where it was due. 

On a proof sheet last December, Christmas greetings were sent 
“to the best proof reader and typesetter I have ever worked with.” 
More public acknowledgment is hereby made to the same effi- 
cient coworkers on this book, with congratulations to the pub- 
lishers that employ such workmen. Especial thanks are due to 
Professors Gulick and Laird, who have read all the proofs with 

critical but kindly eyes. 


In 427 B.c., the celebrated rhetorician, Gorgias of Leontini, 
headed a mission to Athens. His native city, then in conflict with 
Syracuse and getting the worst of it, sent him to persuade the 
Athenians to take their part. The result was the first expedi- 
tion to Sicily, under Laches and Charoeades, to help Leontini 
against Syracuse, and to make a reconnoissance of the region with 
a view to a greater expedition later. The expedition (427-426) 
spent itself from the beginning in minor undertakings. Charoe- 
ades was killed in conflict with the Syracusans (426), and Laches 
was superseded by Pythodorus and recalled to Athens to face 
prosecution by Cleon. Pythodorus was only the forerunner of a 
larger expedition to be sent in response to renewed calls for 
help from the Leontines and their allies against Syracuse. This 
expedition of 60 ships was to sail in the spring of 425 under 
Sophocles and Eurymedon to Sicily. Pythodorus failed in an 
attack upon a fort in the territory of the Epizephyrian Locrians, 
and the other operations of this preliminary expedition amounted 
to little. The larger fleet under Sophocles and Eurymedon was 
detained under way, first at Sphacteria; then, after that was 
taken, at Corcyra to aid the popular against the aristocratic 
party, arriving in Sicily late in 425. Meanwhile the Athenian 
allies among ¢he Sicilian cities had become lukewarm toward 
Athens; at a peace congress Hermocrates, appealing to the 
Sicilian patriotism of the opponents of Syracuse, induced the 
congress to look with disfavor upon calling in powerful out- 
siders to interfere in Sicilian affairs, and peace was concluded 

among the Sicilians, to which the Athenians had to consent. 


On the return of the expedition to Athens, Pythodorus and 
Sophocles were banished and Eurymedon was fined. The gen- 
eral result of this first expedition — if we may call the several 
enterprises one — was only to unite the Siceliotes. It was largely 
the work of Hermocrates, and the Siceliotes now felt themselves 
representatives of all Sicily, where Sicels and Phoenicians counted 
for little and the Athenians were strangers. 

The feud between the cities of Egesta and Selinus was the 
occasion of the second and great expedition to Sicily. A quarrel 
had started from disputes about marriage rights and boundaries. 
The Selinuntians, crossing the boundary river Mazaras, ravaged 
the fields of the Egestaeans; the latter drove them back, but in 
a later battle were defeated by the Selinuntians, reénforced by 
the Syracusans, and their city was invested. The Egestaeans 
appealed for help first to Agrigentum, then to Carthage; refused 
in both places, they resorted to Athens. Early in the spring of 
416 B.c. an embassy from Egesta arrived at Athens. Reminding 
the Athenians of the alliance concluded with themselves during 
the former Leontine war, they begged now for a fleet to be sent 
to their aid, calling attention to the depopulation of Leontini by 
the Syracusans, and adding that if the Syracusans were allowed 
to secure complete domination in Sicily they would be likely 
some day, as Dorians and as colonists, to send aid to the Pelo- 
ponnesians, and help pull down the Athenian Empire. The 
Athenians would do well, then, to unite with the allies still left 
them in Sicily and oppose the Syracusans, especially as the Eges- 
taeans were prepared to furnish money sufficient for the war. 
The immediate result of the embassy was a vote on the part of 
the assembly at Athens to send envoys to Egesta to see if the 
money talked of was really on hand, and at the same time to 
ascertain the state of the war with Selinus. 

When the envoys reached Egesta, they were the victims of a 
clever stratagem. The Egestaeans took them to the temple of 


Aphrodite at Eryx and showed them the seemingly rich treas- 
ures deposited there, privately entertaining at the same time 
not only the envoys but the crews of their triremes at ban- 
quets, using therefor the gold and silver vessels that could be 
found in Egesta, and borrowing others from neighboring Hel- 
lenic and Phoenician cities, transferring this dazzling display — 
of plate from house to house for the successive banquets. The 
trick was not discovered; both envoys and sailors were com- 
pletely duped, and accordingly gave at Athens glowing reports 
of the wealth of Egesta. Besides, the Egestaean envoys that 
returned with them brought 60 talents of uncoined silver as a 
month’s pay for 60 ships, which they asked the Athenians to 
send to Sicily. On the strength of this report, the Athenian 
assembly voted to send 60 ships, under the command of Alci- 
biades, Nicias, and Lamachus. These were to help the Egestae- 
ans against the Selinuntians, restore Leontini, and order matters 
otherwise in Sicily as they should deem best for mes interests 
of Athens. 

Four days later a second assembly was held to determine 
about the equipment of the fleet. Nicias, who as head of the 
aristocratic party was opposed to the expedition, asked for a re- 
consideration and moved to abandon the whole scheme, remind- 
ing the Athenians that it was unwise before they had recovered 
their old power — referring especially to the Thracian posses- 
sions — to engage in new undertakings, and attacking openly 
the ambition and the motives of the prime mover in the whole 
enterprise, Alcibiades. The latter defended himself with spirit, 
and so appealed to the imagination of the Athenian Demos that 
it was more than ever inclined to plans of expansion. There is 
no doubt that Alcibiades was then planning — though he did 
not express his full views until he had gone over to the Spartans 
some time afterward — to extend the Athenian Empire by win- 
ning first all Sicily, then Italy, and even Carthage; and in the 


popular assembly he found a ready audience for so much of 
his schemes as he thought it wise then to unfold. 

Finding it impossible to dissuade the Athenians from the 
undertaking, Nicias next attempted to frighten them by the size 
and cost of such an expedition, and being questioned as to its 
magnitude he said at least 100 triremes and 5000 hoplites with 
proportionate light-armed troops were required. But to his sur- 
prise the Demos was only the more eager for the enterprise, 
voting the generals full powers as to numbers and equipment 
and whatever they judged best to do for the interests of Athens. 

Preparations were immediately begun and all Athens was 
astir, when one morning tle people awoke to find that all the 
Hermae, or stone pillars surmounted with the head of the god 
Hermes, had been defaced. The excitement was extraordinary. 
It was clearly an act of the grossest sacrilege, and the opinion 
spread rapidly that it meant a conspiracy against the democracy. 
The enemies of Alcibiades did not fail to implicate him, inasmuch 
as tales were told of mocking imitations of the Eleusinian mys- 
teries of which he and other young men had been guilty in their 
carousals in private houses. If guilty of such profanation, why 
not of the mutilation of the Hermae? He indignantly demanded 
immediate trial, but his enemies, wanting time to work up thie 
case, insisted that the expedition should not be delayed, and 
that the trial should be postponed. 

So it was determined, and soon the day of departure came, 
about midsummer. The state furnished 100 triremes — 60 swift 
sailers and 40 transport ships — with whatever was most neces- 
sary for the equipment of the ships, and as pay a drachma a 
day for the sailors. The trierarchs completed the equipment in a 
spirit of rivalry, hiring the best oarsmen, adding bounty in addi- 
tion to the state’s pay, and spending money lavishly upon orna- 
ments for the ships as well as upon completer equipments with 
a view to splendor as well as to efficiency. The land forces were 


picked from the best muster-rolls. The hoplites had to equip 
themselves, but they, too, vied with each other in paying atten- 
tion to arms and personal accouterments. The whole outfit was 
on so magnificent a scale that it made the impression on the rest 
of the Hellenes rather of a display of power and resources than 
of an armament against an enemy. 

Most of the allies, with the provision transports and the 
smaller craft, and the rest of the expedition, had been ordered 
to muster at Corcyra, so as to cross from there over the Ionian 
Sea; and now the triremes with the home troops sailed from the 
Peiraeus. The historian gives a wonderfully vivid and pathetic 
description of the embarkation of this armament, which eclipsed 
in costliness and magnificence all others that ever sailed from a 
single Greek city. The scene attracted to the Peiraeus the whole 
population of the city, both citizens and foreigners. When all 
was ready, “the trumpet commanded silence, the prayers cus- 
tomary before putting out to sea were offered, not ship by ship, 
but all together, to the voice of a herald; bowls of wine were 
mixed throughout the armament, and libations made by the 
soldiers and their officers with gold and silver goblets, the 
crowds on shore — citizens and all others that wished them well 
— joining in the prayers. Then, the hymn sung and the liba- 
tions finished, they put to sea, and first sailing out in column 
raced each other as far as Aegina.” It was a great holiday spec- 
tacle. In the great expedition, beginning apparently so auspi- 
ciously, were involved all the wealth and glory of Athens, but 
the historian says not a word here with reference to the disas- 
trous end of it all; for that he waits till the final summary in 
Chapter 87 of Book VII. 

At Rhegium the Athenian generals learned for the first time 
that there was no money at Egesta, and how the deception had 
been effected ; whereupon they took counsel what was to be done. 
Nicias proposed to sail to Selinus and get from the Egestaeans 


what money and provisions they could furnish, to settle mat- 
ters between them and the Seliuntians by force or agreement, 
then, coasting past the other cities and displaying the power of 
Athens, to sail home. Alcibiades urged that so great an expedi- 
tion must not disgrace itself by returning without accomplish- 
ing anything, that heralds must be sent to all the cities except 
Syracuse and Selinus, efforts made to win over the Sicels so as 
to get provisions and troops, especially to gain Messene which 
lay right in the passage and entrance to Sicily; then, knowing 
what allies to depend on, they must attack Syracuse and Seli- 
nus, unless the latter came to terms with Egesta and the for- 
mer allowed the restoration of Leontini. Lamachus was for 
sailing straight to Syracuse and fighting while the Syracusans 
were unprepared and the dismay was at its height; but as there 
had to be a choice among the three plans, he gave his adhesion 
to that of Alcibiades. 

Before Alcibiades’ plan could be fully tried, he was recalled ; 
under Nicias’ direction the whole expedition became a stupen- 
dous failure. Meantime, though reports had been reaching Syra- 
cuse of the proposed Athenian expedition, the Syracusans were 
much divided in opinion, many denouncing the reports as a 
hoax, others and especially Hermocrates insisting on the truth 
of the matter, and urging immediate: preparation to forestall 
the danger. As the sequel showed, little was actually done in - 
anticipation, and Syracuse would have been at the mercy of the 
Athenians if Lamachus’ plan had been adopted. 

Alcibiades, being recalled to Athens for trial, started ostensibly 
homeward in his own boat, accompanying the state galley Sala- 
minia, but at Thurii he slipped away and went to Peloponnesus. 
Nicias and Lamachus made an expedition as far as Egesta, but 
without accomplishing anything worthy of note. The spirits of 
the Syracusans rose as they noted the Athenians’ delay in attack- 
ing their city, and the futility of their undertakings generally. 


When the Athenians finally by a successful ruse sailed into the 
Great Harbor and effected’ a landing unopposed, then defeated 
the Syracusans in the first engagement in open field, they threw 
away all their advantage by retiring again to Catana for the 
winter. An intrigue by which they expected to gain possession 
of Messene failed, and negotiations with Camarina were unsuc- 
cessful. In all this time Hermocrates was the brains of the Syra- 
cusan cause; but Alcibiades on reaching Sparta gave advice 
which proved more potent for harm to the Athenian cause than 
anything Hermocrates could do: namely, to send help at once 
to Syracuse under a Spartan commander, and to carry on the 
war at home with Athens more openly; especially to fortify 
Decelea, the result of which would be to put Attic territory at 
their mercy and cause the loss of the revenues from the silver 
mines at Laurium and of the tribute from the allies. 

The chief cause of the fateful expedition was Alcibiades, and 
his advice to the Spartans was most hurtful; but the chief instru- 
ment of fate in the disaster was the unhappy Nicias. The nar- 
ration and grouping of events show unmistakably the historian’s 
condemnation of the unfortunate general, whom he never blames 
in word. The one excuse that could have been urged for Nicias 
was that he was suffering from an incurable disease. But as 
Thucydides does not accuse, so he does not excuse; he simply 
mentions the facts. 

The cardinal mistakes of Nicias in the Sicilian expedition, as 
gathered from the historian’s narration of facts, may be summa- 
rized as follows: 

(1) Nicias rejects Lamachus’ advice to sail direct to Syracuse 
and fight as soon as possible under the walls. Formidable at 
first, by wasting the winter at Catana he falls into contempt and 
allows time for succor to come from Peloponnesus. (2) Learn- 
ing of Gylippus’ approach and despising the small number of 
his ships, at first he sets no watch (6.104); then, when he does 


send four ships to intercept him, he is too late (7.1). (8) He 
allows Gylippus to get into Syracuse by way of Euryelus (7. 2), 
(4) and to surprise and take the fort Labdalum (7.3). (5) He 
sends twenty ships to waylay at the Porthmus the Corinthian 
reénforcements for Syracuse, but too late (7.4, 7). (6) He al- 
lows Gylippus to build at night the Syracusan cross-wall past 
the Athenian wall of circumvallation (7. 6). (7) He permits 
Gylippus to surprise and capture Plemmyrium, with the result 
that the Syracusans are henceforth masters of the mouth of 
the harbor on both sides, so that not a single store ship can 
enter without a convoy and a battle (7. 22, 28). (8) He allows 
Gylippus and the Syracusans to send to southern Italy and cut 
off a supply fleet meant for the Athenians (7. 25). (9) He is 
deceived by a ruse and drawn into a sea-fight when the men are 
unprepared and hungry (7. 89-41). (10) He rejects the prop- 
osition of Demosthenes and Eurymedon to leave Sicily immedi- 
ately after the failure of the attack on Epipolae (7. 48, 49). 
(11) Having finally consented, in view of matters getting worse 
and worse, to lead off the army, he is frightened by an eclipse 
of the moon, and gives orders, obeying the injunction of the 
soothsayers, to wait twenty-seven days (7. 50). (12) Fooled 
by the messengers of Hermocrates on the night after the great 
sea-fight, he postpones immediate departure (7. 73, 74). 

As Thucydides’ history of the Peloponnesian war is the recital 
of a great tragedy which crippled the most gifted race of ancient 
times, so the historian shows a remarkably dramatic instinct in 
his grouping and contrasting of events. The story of the Melian 
episode, a shameless display of Athenian arrogance and unblush- 
ing assertion that might makes right, is immediately followed by 
the account of the Sicilian disaster. Again, when the defeated 
and disheartened Athenian army breaks camp at last, he points 
another striking contrast: ‘‘ Moreover, their disgrace generally 
and the universality of their sufferings, although having some 


alleviation in being shared with many, not even thus seemed a 
light matter in the present circumstances, especially considering 
with what brilliancy and boastfulness they had set out, and to 
what a humiliating end they had come.” ᾿ 

On the retreat Nicias behaved heroically, but it availed nothing. 
The catastrophe, made inevitable by the night-battle and panic 
on Epipolae (7. 48, 44), and the sea-fight in the Great Harbor 
(7. 70, 71), came in the awful butchery at the River Assinarus 
(7. 84). “ Nicias had hoped,” says Thucydides, “ to leave behind 
him to other ages the name of a man who in all his life had never 
brought disaster on the city.” There is Sophoclean irony in 
those other words with which the same -historian sums up the 
disaster of the last expedition which Nicias led, in which he 
was the chief factor, though Thucydides does not name him 
as such. ‘Of all the Hellenic actions in this war, or indeed 
cf all Hellenic actions which are on record, this was the great- 
est,!— the most glorious to the victors, the most ruinous to the 
vanquished ; for they were utterly and at all points defeated, 
and their sufferings were prodigious. Fleet and army perished 
from the face of the earth; nothing was saved, and of the many 
who went forth few returned home.” 

1 Not less than 60,000 men had been sent, first and last, to Sicily. 


01.91,1; 416-415 B.c. 

δ᾽ αὐτοῦ χειμῶνος ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐβούλοντο αὖθις pei- 1 

A A Q ’ Ἁ 9 , 9. 
Cov. παρασκενῃ τῆς μετὰ Λάχητος καὶ “Εὐρυμέδοντος ἐπι 

a 4 ld 9 ’ ¥ 
Σικελίαν πλεύσαντες καταστρέψασθαι, εἰ δύναιντο, ἄπειροι 
οἱ πολλοὶ ὄντες τοῦ μεγέθους τῆς νήσον καὶ τῶν ἐνοικούντων 
δ τοῦ πλήθους καὶ Ἑλλήνων καὶ βαρβάρων, καὶ ὅτι οὐ πολλῷ 
τινι ὑπόδεέστερον πόλεμον ἀνῃροῦντο ἢ τὸν πρὸς Πελοποννη- 

») ’ Ν a ld 3 ε Ud 3 “A 
σίους. Σικελίας yap περίπλους μέν ἐστιν ὁλκάδι οὐ πολλῷ 

1. At Athens there is ἃ reawakened 
desire to conquer Sicily, but a lack of 
exact knowledge of the size and popu- 
lation of the island. Remarks on the 
magnitude of Sicily.—1. ἐβούλοντο 
αὖθις. .. καταστρέψασθαι : the earlier 
unsuccessful expeditions from 427 B.c. 
(8. 86. 1), under Laches and Charoe- 
ades, until 424 B.c., under Pythodorus, 
Sophocles, and Eurymedon (3. 86, 88, 
90, 99, 108, 115; 4.1, 2, 24, 25, 46, 48, 
65), are here comprised in τῆς μετὰ Λάχη- 
ros καὶ Εὐρυμέδοντος (rapackevijs). That 
even before this the conquest of Sicily 
had been contemplated is clear not 
only from 8. 86.18 πρόπειραν ποιούμε- 
νοι εἰ σφίσι δυνατὰ εἴη τὰ ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ 
πράγματα ὑποχείρια γενέσθαι, but also 
from the charge against the last-named 
generals 4. 65.13 ὡς ἐξὸν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἐν Σι- 
κελίᾳ καταστρέψασθαι δώροις πεισθέντες 
ἀποχωρήσειαν. --- μείζονι ris: -- ἢ Τῇ, 

οἵ. 1.85.5; 8.83.7; see on 16. 1.— 
8. ἄπειροι of πολλοί : as appos. to Ἀθη- 
vato. restricting the whole to the des- 
ignated part.— 5. τοῦ πλήθους : alien 
element inserted in the closely con- 
nected words τῶν ἐνοικούντων... Bap- 
Bdpwy, as freq. in Thuc.— καὶ ὅτι 
. . . ἀνῃροῦντο : note change of const. 
from ἄπειροι With gen. to ὅτι clause. — 
οὐ πολλῷ τινι: as in 7 below; not else- 
where in Thuc.; in Hdt. 1. 181.2; 2. 48. 
8, 67.8. Elsewhere in Thuc. οὐ πολλῷ 
or οὐ πολύ serves to limit the comp. 
(5. 59.5; 7.19.8; freq. in the formula 
οὐ πολὺ ὕστερον, ὕστερον οὐ πολλῷ, 866 
on 1.45.8). The modifying τις with οὗ 
πολύς also 7.1.20.— 6. ἀνῃροῦντο: were 
about to take up. For the thought, 
cf. 7. 28. 28. 

7. Σικελίας γὰρ περίπλους μὲν xré.: 
amplification of the two first points 
designated above as unknown to most 


ὅᾺ 9 \ e A Ἁ 4 > 9 ¥ 
τινι ἔλασσον ἢ ὀκτὼ ἡμερῶν, Kal τοσαύτη οὖσα ἐν εἴκοσι 
σταδίων μάλιστα μέτρῳ τῆς θαλάσσης διείργεται τὸ μὴ 
¥ > 9. 2 θ δὲ 35 YS os toa \ 5 ¥ 
ἤπειρος εἶναι. ὠκίσθη δὲ ὧδε τὸ ἀρχαῖον καὶ τοσάδε ἔθνη 

» Ν ’ 
ἔσχε τὰ ξύμπαντα. 

Παλαιότατοι μὲν λέγονται ἐν μέρει τινὶ τῆς χώρας Κύκλω- 
 Ἂ Ὄ A 
πες καὶ Λαιστρυγόνες οἰκῆσαι, ὧν ἐγὼ οὔτε γένος ἔχω εἰπεῖν 

Athenians of that time, the rest of this 
chapter discussing the size of Sicily, 2-5 
the barbarian and Hellenic inhabitants 
of the island. To περίπλους μέν corre- 
sponds ᾧκίσθη δέ 2. 1. --- ὃ. οὐκ ἔλασ- 
σον: in statements of time or space 
freq. adv. Cf. 25.7, 67.16, 95. 5.— 
ὀκτὼ ἡμερῶν : acc. to Strabo, p. 266c, 
the circumnavigation required five 
days and nights. To-day a steamer 
would require at most 60 hours to 
sail round. See Holm, Gesch. Sizi- 
liens I, 380f., where all the statements 
of ancient writers are found.— καὶ 
τοσαύτη οὖσα. ... εἶναι : the narrow- 
ness of the strait geographically con- 
trasted with the extent of the island. 
Thuc. can hardly have meant to inti- 
mate, as Stein thinks, that Sicily as 
almost belonging to the mainland was 
esp. difficult to conquer.—év εἴκοσι 
σταδίων μάλιστα μέτρῳ... διείργεται: 
in Greek the stretch of sea is conceived 
as the point wherein a hindrance con- 
sists. Cf. ἐν with κωλύεσθαι 2. 8. 17, 
64.10; 4.14.18. With διείργειν, an 
emphasized εἴργειν, cf. διακωλύειν. --- 
9. τὸ μὴ ἤπειρος εἶναι: so nearly all 
recent editors for οὖσα of the Mss. 
The impossible ptc. seems to be due 
to dittography from οὖσα in 8. For 
the const., cf. 8.1.7; GMT. 811; 
Kihner-Gerth 479, 1, and 514, n.9, 1. 
The inf. without τό, 1.62.17; 8. 6. 7. 
See App. 

On the settlements of barbarians and 
Hellenes in Sicily (2-5) 

2. Non-Hellenicsettlements.—1.x(- 
σθη δὲ xré.: see on 1. 7. οἰκίζειν used 
here, contrary to Thuc.’s usual habit, 
universally and not simply of Hellenes. 
See on 7. For the sources used by 
Thuc. for the matter of 2-5, see App. 
—oSe: for the reading, see App.— 
2. ἔσχε: acquired. Cl. thought that, 
acc. to the usage of Thuc. (see on ἔσχον 
1.12.11), not Σικελία but τοσάδε ἔθνη 
must be subj. of ἔσχε, and αὐτήν the 
obj. understood. But, apart from the 
harshness of this const., there would 
be an analogy with 1. 12. 11 and simi- 
lar passages only if the different ἔθνη 
mentioned in what follows had all 
occupied the whole of Sicily, which 
was not the case. On the other hand 
Σικελία ἔσχε τοσάδε ἔθνη differs really 
only in tense from 2. 68. 10 ἡ πόλις 
αὕτη. .. τοὺς δυνατωτάτους εἶχεν οἰκή- 
Topas, and St. very aptly compares 
Soph. Phil. 1147 ἔθνη θηρῶν ois ὅδ᾽ ἔχει 
χῶρος. ----τὰ ξύμπαντα : all together. Ct. 
1. 4 τῶν ἐνοικούντων καὶ Ἑλλήνων καὶ 
βαρβάρων, θ. 1 τοσαῦτα ἔθνη Ἑλλήνων καὶ 
βαρβάρων Σικελίαν ᾧκει. For the expres- 
sion, cf. 2.78.14; 3.92.3; 7. 87. 17. 

8. παλαιότατοι: in 1. 4. 1, 18. 13, 
we have the shorter form παλαίτατος ; 
see St., Qu. Gr.? p. 56. —Aé€yovrar : of 
mythical or poetical tradition, as 
2. 102. 27,84; 8, 96.2; 4. 24. 18. -- 


» ε , 3 ”~ A 9 9 ’ 3 ,’ Ἁ e 
5 οὔτε ὁπόθεν ἐσῆλθον ἢ ὅποι ἀπεχώρησαν: ἀρκείτω δὲ ὡς 
A ¥ Ἁ ε 9 4 
ποιηταῖς TE εἴρηται καὶ WS EKATTOS πῃ γιγνώσκει περὶ 
“A ‘ N 3 Ἁ ~ , , 
αὐτῶν. Σικανοὶ δὲ μετ᾽ αὐτοὺς πρῶτοι φαίνονται ἐνοικισά- 2 
ε Ἁ Ν 
μενοι, ὡς μὲν αὐτοί φασι, καὶ πρότεροι διὰ τὸ αὐτόχθονες 
3 ε Ve 9y 2 ε»ὔ » »” ee en A 
εἶναι, ws δὲ ἡ ἀλήθεια εὑρίσκεται, Ἴβηρες ὄντες καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ 
“A ~ wa 3 ’ e ‘\ > 4 
Σικανοῦ ποταμοῦ τοῦ ἐν Ἰβηρίᾳ ὑπὸ Λιγύων ἀναστάντες. 
N “ “Ὁ A 
Kal ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν Σικανία τότε ἡ νῆσος ἐκαλεῖτο, πρότερον Τρι- 
> “A N » Ἁ A 
vaxpia καλουμένη" οἰκοῦσι δὲ ἔτι Kal νῦν τὰ πρὸς ἑσπέ 


ραν τὴν Σικελίαν. Ἰλίον δὲ ἁλισκομένου τῶν Τρώων τινὲς 3 

4, οἰκῆσαι : settled. Cf. φκήσαμεν 2. 64. 
20.— 5. ἀρκείτω xré.: as authentic in- 
formation is not to be had, one must be 
content either with the account of the 
poets (here esp. Homer, as also 1. 10. 4, 
11.19, 21. 8), or with one’s own judg- 
ment about these peoples (ws ἕκαστος 
γιγνώσκει, cf, 2. 48. 10).— 6. ποιηταῖς : 
dat. of agent with pass. See on 1. 125. 
6; 3.64.15; and Steup, Thuk. Stud. II, 
65f.; C. F. Smith, Trans. Amer. Phil. 
Assoc. XXV, 71.--- περὶ αὐτῶν: Cl. 
renders ‘‘about these matters,’’ re- 
ferring to 1.1.10; but the following 
per’ αὐτούς points to a personal sense. 

7. Σικανοί: see Holm I, 58 ff., 350 ff., 
and Busolt, Gr. Gesch.? I, 378 f. — φαί- 
vovrat: presumably of written testi- 
mony rather than, as λέγονται, of myth- 
ical or poetical tradition. Cf. 1.9. 22, 

13.9. Still more definitely the following’ 

ὡς ἡ ἀλήθεια εὑρίσκεται (this word of his- 
torical inquiry; seeon 1.1.11) pointstoa 
credible source.—évouxodpevor: Which 
Dion. H. 1. 22 seems also to have used 
of the same occurrence; to be preferred 
to ἐνοικησάμενοι of most Mss., whose 
authority in such cases is questionable. 
Only from οἰκίζειν, not from οἰκεῖν, are 
found mid. aor. forms in compounds: 

ἀνοικίσασθαι 1. 58. 18, κατοικίσασθαι 2. 
102.31. See App.—8. καὶ πρότεροι: 
even before, sc. τῶν Κυκλώπων καὶ Aat- 
στρυγόνων.---9. Ἴβηρες ὄντες : before 
these words Kr. missed, and Stein has 
inserted, ὕστεροι, which is clearly what 
Thuc. meant; but ὕστεροι would only 
repeat what is already contained in 
per’ αὐτοὺς πρῶτοι. As to the credibil- 
ity of Thuc.’s view of the origin of the 
Sicanians, see esp. Holm I, 58f., 356f., 
and Freeman, Hist. of Sicily I, 474 ff. 
--- τοῦ Σικανοῦ ποταμοῦ τοῦ ἐν Ἰβηρίᾳ: 
the river generally called later Sucro 
(now Xucar) seems to be meant, not 
the tributary of the Iberus, Sicoris 
(now Segre), nor the Seine (Σηκοά- 
vas, Sequana). See K. Miillenhoff, 
Deutsche Altertumskunde I, 164 f.— 
11. Tptvaxpla: Hom. Θρινακίη, of un- 
certain derivation. See Holm I, 329.— 
12. τὰ πρὸς ἑσπέραν : adv. Cf. τὸ πρὸς 
βορέαν, 99.1. For the matter, οὗ, 1. 27 
πρὸς τὰ μεσημβρινὰ καὶ ἑσπέρια and see 
Holm I, 59 ff. and 357 ff.—13. τὴν Σικε- 
λίαν: see Weidner, Parerga Dinarch. et 
Thuc. p. 20 (in Giefener Gymn. Progr. 
1875), who considers this, as well as 
πρὸς τὴν Σικελίαν (14), interpolated. 
ἁλισκομένου : with force of pf., as 


9 ; A 
διαφυγόντες ᾿Αχαιοὺς πλοίοις ἀφικνοῦνται πρὸς THY Σικελίαν, 
15 καὶ ὅμοροι τοῖς Σικανοῖς οἰκήσαντες ξύμπαντες μὲν Ἔλυμοι 
ἐκλήθησαν, πόλεις δ᾽ αὐτῶν "Epv€ τε καὶ Ἔγεστα. προσ- 
’ Ν 9 ~ ἃ ’ \ “ 9 \ ,’ ld 
ξυνῴκησαν δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ Φωκέων τινὲς τῶν ἀπὸ Τροίας τότε 

~ 3 , ~ 4 9 ’ 3 3 4 A 
χειμῶνι ἐς Λιβύην πρῶτον, ἔπειτα ἐς Σικελίαν ἀπ᾽ αὐτῆς 
κατενεχθέντες. Σικελοὶ δ᾽ ἐξ ᾿Ιταλίας (ἐνταῦθα γὰρ @xovv) 

in 1. 28. 8. GMT. 27.— 14. πρὸς τὴν 
Σικελίαν: cf. similar consts. 5.2.11, 
65.12; 7. 80. 19.—15. ὅμοροι rots Σι- 
κανοῖς οἰκήσαντες : on account of the 
statement below (16) προσ ξυνῴκησαν 
xré., Steup thinks some words have 
fallen out here, perhaps καὶ αὐτῶν τισι 
ξυνοικήσαντες. He holds that with the 
traditional text ξύμπαντες can mean 
only the whole of the Trojans who 
came to Sicily. Better St., who says 
that more probably the Trojans and 
Sicani united are meant.—”EAvpot : 
for their origin, see Holm I, 86 ff. 
and 374f.; Freeman I, 198 ff. and 
542 ff.; Busolt? I, 375 ff.— 16. ἐκλή- 
θησαν: (aor.) received the name. Cf. 4. 
29; 1.3. 20.—"Eyeora: the form used 
everywhere by Thuc.; also the people 
᾿Εγεσταῖοι, as in Hdt. 5. 46.5, 47.8; 
7. 158. 8. In. later writers the form 
Alyeora also occurs. Inscriptions of 
the oldest coins of the city have Zey— 
(or Zay-), the form later adopted by the 
Romans. See Holm I, 90, 375; III, 
598f.—mportuvwxynoav: the compound 
only here.—17. Φωκέων τινές : Pausa- 
nias (5. 25. 6) also mentions Hel- 
lenes τοῦ Φωκικοῦ γένους in Sicily. 
Holm (I, 87) and others have sug- 
gested that the Hellenic immigrants 
here mentioned were really Phocaeans, 
and that the mention of Phocians is 
due to the Phocaeans calling themselves 

descendants of the Phocians (Paus. 7.3. 
10; cf. Hdt. 1. 146). Scholars have 
even tried to find in the inscriptions of 
the coins of Egesta the dialect of Pho- 
caea (but cf. Holm III, 599f.). The 
immigration of Phocians seems to have 
been introduced here in a chapter 
treating otherwise exclusively of bar- 
barian immigrations (cf. the conclud- 
ing words, 1.89) and not where Hellenic 
settlements are mentioned, because 
the Phocians were not able to Hellenize 
the barbarians with whom they coa- 
lesced as second or third component. 
The fact that the mention of the Pho- 
cians occurs after the name of the 
whole people and the two chief places 
indicates that this is a side remark. 
To the otherwise improbable conjec- 
ture of W. Ridgeway (Class. Rev. II, 
180 (1888)), Φρυγῶν for Φωκέων, is op- 
posed the fact that from the whole 
context it is clear that only Hellenes 
returning from Troy are in mind. — 
τότε: of a time assumed as known, 
as 1.101.8. For the matter, cf. 4. 120. 
§ 1.—19. κατενεχθέντες : cf. 1. 137.8; 
8. 69. δ; 4. 120. 5. 

Σικελοί: see Holm I, 62 ff. and 
360 ff.; Busolt 2 I, 380 ff.; Freeman I, 
124 ff. and 472 ff. — ἐξ Ἰταλίας : the 
term is used by Thuc. only of the 
peninsula south of the river Laus and 

-Metapontum. Οἱ, 1. 12.14; 7.88, 21. 


10 διέβησαν ἐς Σικελίαν φεύγοντες Ὄπικας, ὡς μὲν εἰκὸς καὶ 
λέγεται, ἐπὶ σχεδιῶν τηρήσαντες τὸν πορθμὸν κατιόντος 

aA 9 , , A A \, »# 3 4 2 AN 
τοῦ ἀνέμου, τάχα av δὲ καὶ ἄλλως πως ἐσπλεύσαντες.. εἰσὶ 

Q Q A » 9 aA: ’ὔ 4 Ἁ ε ’ 3 \ 3 
δὲ καὶ νῦν ἔτι ἐν τῇ Ἰταλίᾳ Σικελοί, καὶ ἡ χώρα ἀπὸ ‘Ira- 

λοῦ, βασιλέως τινὸς Σικελῶν τοὔνομα τοῦτο ἔχοντος, οὕτως 
25 Ἰταλία ἐπωνομάσθη. ἐλθόντες δὲ ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν στρατὸς 5 
πολὺς τούς τε Σικανοὺς κρατοῦντες μάχῃ ἀνέστειλαν πρὸς 
Q Ν x ¢ , 3: A Ἁ 9 Ἁ 4 
τὰ μεσημβρινὰ καὶ ἑσπέρια αὐτῆς καὶ ἀντὶ Σικανίας Σικε- 
λίαν τὴν νῆσον ἐποίησαν καλεῖσθαι, καὶ τὰ κράτιστα τῆς 
γῆς ᾧκησαν ἔχοντες, ἐπεὶ διέβησαν, ἔτη ἐγγὺς τριακόσια 
πρὶν Ἕλληνας ἐς Σικελίαν ἐλθεῖν ἔτι δὲ καὶ νῦν τὰ μέσα 

--- 20. φεύγοντες "Omuxag: cf. Dion. H. 
1. 22 βιασθέντες ὑπὸ Οἰνώτρων καὶ ᾽Οπι- 
κῶν. The reading of Vat. and other 
good Mss. “Omxas is hardly due to a 
slip of copyists, even though acc. to 
all later writers the form should be 
᾽Οπικούς. --- as εἰκὸς καὶ λέγεται : refer- 
ring to διέβησαν ἐπὶ σχεδιῶν. This for- 
mula ws λέγεται always stands within 
or after the words it qualifies. Cf. 1. 
24.10, 118.21; 3.79.10; 7.86.17; 8. 
50. 16.— 21. τηρήσαντες : after waiting 
Sor. — τὸν πορθμόν : i.e. the favorable 
time for the passage. Cf. Soph. Trach. 
571. — κατιόντος τοῦ ἀνέμον : i.e. when 
the wind blew seaward (different from 
2. 25. 19). Cf. Dion. H. 1. 22 xara- 
σκενασάμενοι σχεδίας ἐπὶ τῷ πορθμῷ καὶ 
φυλάξαντες κατιόντα τὸν ῥοῦν. --- 22. τάχα 
ἂν δέ: sc. διέβησαν. Order asin 10. 18. 
For pot. indic. with ἄν expressing past 
possibility, see GMT. 244; Kiihner- 
Gerth 392, 4.— εἰσὶ δὲ... ἐπωνομάσθη: 
two circumstances supplementarily 
mentioned in confirmation of the Italic 
origin of the Sicels. — 23. ἀπὸ ᾿Ιταλοῦ, 
βασιλέως τινὸς Σικελῶν : cf. Dion. H.1. 

85 ᾿Ιταλία ὠνομάσθη ἐπ᾽ ἀνδρὸς δυνάστου 
ὄνομα ᾿Ιταλοῦ, who acc. to Antiochus 
had made himself master of South- 
ern Italy. — 24. οὕτως : emphasizes 
summarily the reason just given in 
ἀπὸ "Iradod .. . ἔχοντος. See on 1.22. 
7.—25. ἐπωνομάσθη: cf. 1.18.21; 2. 
29. 165. 

στρατὸς πολύς: appos. in explanation 
of the general subject. Cf. 2.47.5; 4. 58. 
4.— 26. ἀνέστειλαν : forced back, Bk.’s 
emendation (for ἀπέστειλαν of the Mss.), 
now generally adopted (cf. 70.14; 8. 
98. 3), except by Steup, who compares 
ἀποστέλλειν 3. 89. 20. — πρὸς τὰ μεσημ- 
βρινὰ καὶ ἑσπέρια αὐτῆς : only the west 
of Sicily is mentioned above (12) as 
still occupied by the Sicanians. — 
28. ἐποίησαν: caused, with acc. and 
inf., as 2. 5. 6.—29. ἐπεί: after, like 
ἐπειδή. Cf. 2.78.10 ἀφ᾽ οὗ ξύμμαχοι ἐγε- 
νόμεθα. --- ἔτη ἐγγὺς τριακόσια : belongs 
to the complexive aor. ᾧκησαν. For 
ἐγγύς and ἐγγύτατα (cf. 4.19; 5.8. 10), 
see App. on 2-5.— 30. πρὶν “EAAn- 
νας ἐς Σικελίαν ἐλθεῖν : i.e., acc. to 8. 2, 
before the founding of Naxos, which 



Q \ δ , A , ¥ ¥ \ Υ 
καὶ τὰ πρὸς βορέαν τῆς νήσον ἔχουσιν. ᾧκουν δὲ καὶ 6 
’ N A A \ ’ ¥ > N A 
Φοίνικες περὶ πᾶσαν μὲν τὴν Σικελίαν ἄκρας τε ἐπὶ TH θα- 
Ud 3 ld N A 3 4 , 
λάσσῃ ἀπολαβόντες καὶ τὰ ἐπικείμενα νησίδια ἐμπορίας 
ἕνεκα τῆς πρὸς τοὺς Σικελούς. ἐπειδὴ δὲ οἱ Ἕλληνες πολλοὶ 
δ , 3 ‘4 > , Ν , a 
κατὰ θάλασσαν ἐπεσέπλεον, ἐκλιπόντες τὰ πλείω Μοτύην 
Ἁ , N\ a 3 Ἀ “A 3 ᾽ ? 
καὶ Σολόεντα καὶ Πάνορμον ἐγγὺς τῶν ᾿Ελύμων ξυνοική- 
σαντες ἐνέμοντο, ξυμμαχίᾳ τε πίσυνοι τῇ τῶν ᾿Ἐλύμων καὶ 

occurred a year before that οὗ Syra- 
cuse.— 31. Bopéav: for the Mss. read- 
ing βορρᾶν, see App. on 2-5. 

82. Φοίνικες: their settlements in Sic- 
ily, as on all coasts of the Mediterranean 
(see Curtius, Peloponnesos II, 10), are 
well characterized here περὶ πᾶσαν... 
γησίδια. Of these ἄκραι Pachynos (from 
pachun, lookout) and Lilybaeum 
(opposite Libya) kept their Phoeni- 
cian names throughout all antiquity. 
For detailed investigations concerning 
individual settlements, see Movers, 
Die Phoénizier II, 809-362. Cf. Holm 
I, 79 ff. and 870 ff.; III, 747f. The 
correctness of the statement that the 
Phoenicians came to Sicily before 
the: Hellenes is doubted by Beloch, 
Rh. Mug. XLIX, 117 ff. — περὶ πᾶσαν 
μὲν τὴν Σικελίαν : in consideration of 
the antithesis below (84) ἐπειδὴ δὲ 
... ἐπεσέπλεον, Steup suggests the loss 
of some temporal modifier, like πρίν, 
πάλαι, ποτέ, or ἐπὶ πολύ, after πᾶσαν 
pév. — 83. ἀπολαβόντες : i.e. from the 
rest of Sicily. Cf. 1. 7. 4; 4. 46. 7; 
7. 60. 9.— 384. ἕνεκα : for the Mss. éve- 
κεν, see App. on 2-5. — 35. ἐπεσέπλεον : 
sailed in afterwards, i.e. after the Phoe- 
nicians. Cf. ἐπικατάγεται 3.49.18. As 
κατὰ θάλασσαν adds nothing to the 
force of the verb, Steup suspects that 
a pte. like μετανιστάμενοι has dropped 

out after πολλοί. St., who explains 
ἐπι- aS insuper, ad veteres inco- 
las, thinks the addition of κατὰ θάλασ- 
σαν was due to contrast with the 
crossing of the strait by the Sicels, 
described in § 4.— Μοτύην καὶ Σο- 
λόεντα καὶ Πάνορμον: Motye (prob. 
spinnery) on the little island S. 
Pantaleo near the promontory of Lily- 
baeum. Soloeis(Phoen. name Kafara, 
village) east of Palermo, now Solanto; 
for us ἃ * little Pompeii ’’ on account 
of the important remains from the time 
of the Roman Empire unearthed there. 
See Holm ITI, 250 ff. Σολόεντα uncon- 
tracted, like Μαλόεις 3.38.18, 25. Pa- 
normus, now Palermo (Phoen. name 
unknown). The city names include 
also the territory belonging thereto. 
— 86. ξυνοικήσαντες : i.e. after they 
had restricted themselves to narrower 
bounds (no longer περὶ πᾶσαν τὴν Σικε- 
λίαν). The compound, used in 63. 14; 2. 
68. 15 of the joining of new settlers 
with older, designates here the union 
of scattered communities. ξυνοικίσαν- 
res, the reading of some good Mss., is 
inadmissible, since here it is not a 
matter of the new settlement of the 
three places (see on 5.3).—37. ἐνέμοντο: 
for the idiom νέμεσθαι πόλιν, cf. 1. 84. 
4; 2.80.4; 4.52.11, 56.13.— mlevvor: 
poetical word, found in Attic prose 



gy 9 A 
ὅτι ἐντεῦθεν 

ἐλάχιστον πλοῦν Καρχηδὼν Σικελίας ἀπέχει. 

Βάρβαροι μὲν οὖν τοσοίδε Σικελίαν καὶ οὕτως ᾧῴκησαν. 

Ἑλλήνων δὲ 

πρῶτοι Χαλκιδῆς ἐξ Εὐβοίας πλεύσαντες μετὰ 1 

Θουκλέους οἰκιστοῦ Νάξον ᾧκισαν καὶ ᾿Απόλλωνος ᾿Αρχη- 
, , ea aA ¥ A , , 9 ε , 
γέτου βωμόν, ὅστις viv ἔξω τῆς πόλεώς ἐστιν, ἱδρύσαντο, 
ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, ὅταν ἐκ Σικελίας θεωροὶ πλέωσι, πρῶτον θύουσι. 
, Q A 3 , ¥ 9 , aA ¢ A 
Συρακούσας δὲ τοῦ ἐχομένον ἔτους Apxias τῶν Ἡρακλειδῶν" 9 

only in Thuc. (2. 89. 21; 5. 14. 19), 
though freq. in Hdt. It is common in 
the poets. See C. F. Smith, Traces of 
Epic Usage in Thuc. (Trans. Amer. 
Phil. Assoc. XX XI, 80). — 38. ἐλάχι- 
στον πλοῦν ἀπέχει: cf. 49. 20, 97.4. — 
39. βάρβαροι τοσοίδε: partial resump- 
tion of τοσάδε ἔθνη τὰ ξύμπαντα above 
(1). Cf. 6.2; 7.57. 63, 58.25, where 
also τοσόσδε looks backward. For like 
use of τάδε, cf. 1.41.1, 48. 9, and τοιάδε 
7. 78.1.— καὶ οὕτως ῴᾧκησαν : and thus 
they fixed their settlements in Sicily. 
3-5. Hellenic settlements in Sicily. 
— The summary here given from 3-5 
of the Hellenic colonies in Sicily, in the 
order of the date of settlement, follows 
Holm (I, 118 ff., 381 ff., 390f., 393); see 
per contra Busolt, Rh. Mus. XL, 466 ff. 
Naxos (8. § 1) Ol. 11,2; 735 B.c. 
Syracuse (8. ὃ 2) ΟἹ. 11,3; 734 B.c. 
Zancle-Messene (4. §§ 5, 6) Ol. 12,3; 
730 B.C. 
Leontini and Catana (8. ὃ 8) Ol. 12, 
4; 729 b.c. 
Megara (4. ὃ 1) Ol. 18,1; 728 B.c. 
Gela (4. ὃ 8) Ol. 22,4; 689 B.c. 
Acrae (5. § 2) Ol. 29,1; 664 B.c. 
Himera (5. ὃ 1) Ol. 38,1; 648 B.c. 
Casmenae (5. § 2) Ol. 34,1; 644 B.c. 
Selinus (4. ὃ 2) Ol. 38,1; 628 B.c. 
Camarina (5. ὃ 8) Ol. 45,2; 599 Β.Ο. 
Acragas (4. ὃ 4) Ol. 49,4; 581 B.c. 

1. πρῶτοι: after the part. gen. to 
be preferred to the adv. πρῶτον of 
most good Mss. See App. on 8. 101. 6. 
— Χαλκιδῆς : on the relation of Eu- 
boean Chalcis to Hellenic colonization, 
see Curtius, Gr. Gesch.° I, 417 ff., 425 ff. 
— 2. Θουκλέους : from Athens, acc. to 
Ephorus (apud Strab, 6. 2. 2).— Νάξον: 
at the best point for first landing from 
Greece, near Tauromenium (Taor- 
mina).—’Apxnyérov: epithet of Apollo 
(esp. the Delphian Apollo), as protector 
of new settlements, occurring also in 
Pindar (P. 5.66). His statue in Sicilian 
Naxos is mentioned by Appian (Bell. 
Civ. 5. 109).— 8. ὅστις : referring toa 
concrete noun only here in Thuc. See 
App. on 2-5.— νῦν ἔξω τῆς πόλεως: Which 
had, then, earlier a wider compass. The 
destruction of the city in 408 B.c. (see 
Holm II, 105) was evidently not yet 
known to Thuc. — 4. θεωροί : delegates 
to festivals or to oracles. Cf. 5.16.24. 

5. Lupdkoveat: form adopted by 
most editors. The Mss. vary, Vat. 
having generally Συρακοῦσαι, and Σν- 
ρακούσσιοι for the people. See Butt- 
mann, Ausf. Sprachl. ὃ 21, n. 9. — éxo- 
μένου: = ἐπιγιγνομένον, in Thuc. only 
here; elsewhere local (2. 96. 22; 5. 67. 
15; 8.90. 31), orin the sense of keeping 
(1. 22. 7).— Apx las τῶν ἩΗἩρακλειδῶν ἐκ 
Κορίνθου: cf. 1. 24. 4 Φαλίος, Κορίνθιος 


3 , ¥ Ἁ 3 Ud a) 9 ~ 4 
ἐκ Κορίνθου ᾧκισε, Σικελοὺς ἐξελάσας πρῶτον ἐκ τῆς νήσου 
3 ae A 39. 9 , ε , ε 3 / 3 ν 
ἐν ἢ νῦν οὐκέτι περικλυζομένῃ ἡ πόλις ἡ ἐντός ἐστιν" ὑστε- 

ρον δὲ χρόνῳ καὶ ἡ ἔξω προστειχισθεῖσα πολυάνθρωπος 

ἐγένετο. Θουκλῆς δὲ καὶ of Χαλκιδῆς ἐκ Νάξον ὁρμηθέντες 

» ,’ N 4, 9 4 , 
10 ἔτει πέμπτῳ μετὰ Συρακούσας οἰκισθείσας Λεοντίνους τε. 

id ‘\ δ. 3 , > 9 Ν 9 4 ‘\ 
πολέμῳ τοὺς Σικελοὺς ἐξελάσαντες οἰκίζουσι καὶ μετ᾽ αὐτοὺς 

. a 3 N de 3 Ν “ 3 ’ ¥ 
Κατανην᾽ οἰκιστὴν 0€ avrot Καταναιοι ἐποιήσαντο Evapyov. 

Ν A δ 9 ἃ ’ Ἁ , 3 , 9 , 
κατὰ δὲ τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον καὶ Λάμις ἐκ Μεγάρων ἀποικίαν 

γένος, τῶν ἀφ᾽ Ἡρακλέους. Both, desig- 
nated by Thuc. merely as Heraclidae, 
prob. belonged to the ruling clan of 
Bacchiads. Plutarch, Narrat. Amat. 2, 
relating the occasion for the founding 
of Syracuse, says it was ordered by 
the oracle in atonement for crime. The 
mythical character of the story is evi- 
dent in that acc. to it Ortygia and 
Syracusa were daughters of Archias. 
— 6. ἐκ τῆς νήσου : named Ortygia, and 
later connected with the mainland, 
first by a mole (οὐκέτι περικλυζομένῃ, 
with Bk. for περικλυζομένη), later by a 
bridge. See Strabo 1.3.18.—8. καὶ 
ἣ ἔξω... ἐγένετο : also the outer city, 
being joined on by a wall, became popu- 
lous. There is no need, with Kr. and 
Bm., to make the whole city subj. of 
ἐγένετο, and καὶ ἡ ἔξω προστειχισθεῖσα 
a sort of part. ἃρὈΟΞ. --- ἢ ἔξω : the spe- 
cial name for the mainland part of 
Syracuse was Achradina or ‘* place 
of the wild pear-tree’’ (from dxpds). 
See Holm I, 126. Modern Syracuse is 
again limited to the island. — προστει- 
χισθεῖσα : elsewhere only in late writ- 
ers; cf. Dion. H. 3. 1 προσετείχισε τῇ 
πόλει TOY καλούμενον Καίλιον λόφον. 

10. μετὰ Συρακούσας οἰκισθείσας: 
= μετὰ Συρακουσῶν οἴκισιν 4. 16, or μετὰ 
Συρακουσῶν κτίσιν 5.10. For const. of 

the ptc., see GMT. 829b. The year of 
settlement of the chief city of Sicily 
Thuc. could assume to be known. See 
App. on 2-5.— Λεοντίνους : Leontines, 
though like Ἁλιῆς, Δελφοί, Οἰνιάδαι, the 
name designates the place as well as 
the people. But in Thuc. only once 
(4. 4) do we have certainly the name 
of place (cf. ἡ πόλις ἡ Λεοντίνων 5. 4. 12), 
whereas in numerous other passages 
Λεοντῖνοι is unquestionably. an ethnic 
term (6. 12,15; 50.8; 68.15; 77.6; 79. 
7; 3.86. 4,9, 11,12; 4. 25. 34, 42, 49; 
5. 4.3, 21). Hence it is better to regard 
it as ethnic here, esp. in view of μετ᾽ αὖ- 
τούς. Cf. Μεγαρέας ᾧκισαν 4. 7; Ἴωνας 
᾿Αθηναῖοι ᾧκισαν 1.12.13. The city lay 
ina fruitful region south of Aetna, some 
three or four miles from the sea. See 
Polyb. 7.6and HolmI, 130.—12. Kara- 
νὴν : on its favored site, which, in spite 
of the constant danger from the neigh- 
boring Mt. Aetna, makes it to the pres- 
ent day the only great city on that coast, 
see Holm I, 1801. On the various ex- 
planations of the name, see Holm I, 389. 
- οἰκιστὴν δὲ αὐτοὶ... Hiapxov: i.e. 
from themselves they chose the oecist 
(with a name of good omen, Evapxos), 
thus avoiding subordination to Naxos. 

4 1. κατὰ δὲ τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον: i.e. 
at about the time when Leontini and 



¥ 3 ’ 9 ’, εν 4 “~ 
ἄγων ἐς Σικελίαν ἀφίκετο, καὶ ὑπὲρ Παντακύου τε ποταμοῦ 

V4 A 
Τρώτιλόν τι ὄνομα χωρίον οἰκίσας καὶ ὕστερον αὐτόθεν τοῖς 

Χαλκιδεῦσιν ἐς Λεοντίνους ὀλίγον χρόνον ξυμπολιτεύσας καὶ 

ε Ν 98 A 3 Ἁ N 4 > 9 393. \ 9 a 
ὑπὸ αὐτῶν ἐκπεσὼν καὶ Θάψον οἰκίσας αὐτὸς μὲν ἀποθνήσκει, 

οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι ἐκ τῆς Θάψον ἀναστάντες, Ὕβλωνος βασιλέως 

Σικελοῦ παραδόντος τὴν χώραν καὶ καθηγησαμένου, Meya- 

ρέας ᾧκισαν τοὺς ὙὝβλαίους κληθέντας. καὶ ἔτη οἰκήσαντες 2 

, \ , ‘ , εν , , 
πέντε καὶ Τεσσαράκοντα Και διακόσια υποῖέ λωνος τυβραννον 

[4 9 ’ 9 ΝᾺ , Ἁ a Ν δ 
Συρακοσίων ἀνέστησαν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως καὶ χώρας. πρὶν δὲ 

9 »“ »Ψ» 9 e \ A 3 Ν 2: A , 

Catana were founded. — 2. ὑπὲρ Παν- 
τακύου ποταμοῦ: cf. 1. 46. 10 ἔστι δὲ 
λιμήν, καὶ πόλις ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ κεῖται ἀπὸ 
θαλάσσης. For omission of the art., 
see Gild.; Syn. II, 559.— 3. Τρώτιλόν 
τι ὄνομα χωρίον: the site is uncer- 
tain; see Holm I, 181, 390. The un- 
natural order is as in 1. 106.3. For 
ὄνομα, by name, cf. 4. 1388.11; 8. 85. 7. 
—4. ἐς Λεοντίνους : see on 3.10. For 
particulars of the treachery by which 
Thucles expelled from Leontini first 
the Sicels by means of the Megarians, 
then the latter also, see Polyaen. 5. 
5.— ὀλίγον xpévov: six months, acc. 
to Polyaen. 5. 5. 2. ----ξυμπολιτεύσας : 
i.e. μετοικήσας és Λεοντίνους καὶ ἐκεῖ ξυμ- 
πολιτεύσας τοῖς Χαλκιδεῦσι.--- 5. Θάψον: 
peninsula just north of Syracuse (now 
called Isola di Magnisi). Cf. 97. 6.— 
6. ἀναστάντες : with pass. force, as in 
1. 11 and freq. Possibly they were 
ousted by hostile Sicels.— βασιλέως Σι- 
κελοῦ: for adj. use of Σικελός, see on 

᾿ Ἕλλην 8.103. 2.— 7. παραδόντος... καὶ 

καθηγησαμένονυ : i.e. he gave them the 
land and himself led them in. Cl.’s 
παραδόντος, for προδόντος of the Mss., 

seems necessary, since from the con- 
text there could be no idea of treachery. 
— Μεγαρέας ᾧκισαν τοὺς Ὑβλαίους : 
the personal acc. with οἰκίζειν, as in 
1.12.14; rare in prose. Megara Hy- 
blaea (sometimes simply Megara, 49. 
19, 75. 5, 97. 26; 7. 25. 15) was the 
name of the new Hellenic city, beside 
which the Sicel Hybla (Ὕβλα ἡ Γελεᾶ- 
τις 62. 21) still existed. The name Hy- 
blaean is still given to the neighboring . 
heights. See Holm I, 182.—8. κληθέν- 
ras: 20r., because when Thuc.wrote the 
Hyblaean Megarians had long ceased 
to exist. See App. on 2-5. 

ἔτη οἰκήσαντες κτέ. : Ol. 74. 2; 
488 Β.ο0.---9. ὑπὸ Γέλωνος: ruler in 
Syracuse from 488 Β.6. --- 10, ἀνέστη- 
σαν: Sc. Μεγαρῆς οἱ Ὑβλαῖοι κληθέντες. 
---11. ὕστερον ἢ αὐτοὺς οἰκῆσαι : the 
inf. as with πρότερον ἤ 1. 69. 21 and 
freq. The antithesis to αὐτούς is Σελι- 
voovra: “ἃ hundred years after they 
themselves had settled, they founded 
Selinus.’’ For οἰκῆσαι, see App. — 
Πάμμιλον : for the form (not Πάμιλ- 
λον with most of the Mss.), see He- 
rodian 1. 162; 2. 446; and Lobeck, 



πέμψαντες Σελινοῦντα κτίζουσι, καὶ ἐκ Μεγάρων τῆς μη- 

τροπόλεως οὔσης αὐτοῖς ἐπελθὼν ξυγκατῴκισε. Τέλαν δὲ 
᾿Αντίφημος ἐκ Ῥόδου καὶ Ἔντιμος ἐκ Κρήτης ἐποίκους 

9 , ~ » » ? Ν ἴων 
16 ἀγαγόντες κοινῇ ἔκτισαν ἔτει πέμπτῳ καὶ τεσσαρακοστῷ 

Q A » Q QA A 
era Συρακουσῶν οἴκισιν. Kal TH μὲν πόλει ἀπὸ Tov Γέλα 

i A » 9. 9 N \ a i A e ’ 
ποταμου Τουνομα έγένετο, ΤΟ δὲ χώριον OU νυν Ἶ πόλις 

3 Ἁ \ ὁ A 3 , , A 4 N 
ἐστὶ καὶ ὃ πρῶτον ἐτειχίσθη Λίνδιοι καλεῖται: νόμιμα δὲ 

ν. 2 6 9. ἡ ¥ δὲ 3 , 2 \ \ ε Ν 

20 ὰ τὴν σφετέ οἵκ Γελῷοι ᾽Ακρά if ὴ 
μετὰ τὴν σφετέραν οἴκισιν go. ᾿Ακράγαντα ᾧκισαν, τὴν 

\ , Ἁ A 3 4 A , 
μὲν πόλιν ἀπὸ τοῦ ᾿Ακράγαντος ποταμοῦ ὀνομάσαντες, 

Pathol. s. Gr. Proleg. 117.— 12. Σελι- 
votvra: in the Mss. és precedes, which 
Duker rejected as originally due to an 
unconscious repetition of the final let- 
ters of πέμψαντες... On the uncertain 
derivation of this name,— acc. to Steph. 
Byz. s.v. Axpdéyavres from a river, acc. 
to others from σέλινον, parsley, — see 
Holm I, 894. --- καὶ ἐκ Μεγάρων .. 
ξυγκατῴκισε: co-ord. for rel. connec- 
tion, and he had come from Megara, the 
mother-state, to take part in the colony. 
For the custom, see 1. 24. ὃ 2 ταύτην 
ἀπῴκισαν μὲν Κερκυραῖοι, οἰκιστὴς δ᾽ ἐγέ- 
vero Φαλίος. . . Κορίνθιος. .. κατὰ δὴ 
τὸν παλαιὸν νόμον ἐκ τῆς μητροπόλεως 

14. ᾿Αντίφημος . .. καὶ “Evripos: 
for the oracle which they obeyed, see 
Diod. 8.28.1. On the uncertain site 
of Gela, near the present Terranova, 
see Holm I, 892. --- 16. μετὰ Συρακου- 
σῶν οἴκισιν: as 5.10 μετὰ Συρακουσῶν 
κτίσιν. The preceding gen. takes the 
place of the article. See on 1.1.11. 
— πὸ τοῦ Γέλα ποταμοῦ: cf. |. 21. 
Duris apud Steph. Byz. s.v. ᾿Ακράγαν- 
τες: al πλεῖσται τῶν Σικελῶν πόλεων ἐκ τῶν 
ποταμῶν ὀνομάζονται. The Doric gen. as 

in 1. 103. 6; 5, 25. 8; 8. 58. 2.— 
17. ἢ πόλις: = ἡ ἀκρόπολις. Cf.2.15.§ 6. 
But Steup remarks that Thuc. has 
nowhere himself used this general des- 
ignation for the Acropolis (5. 18. 55, 
23. 28, 47. 65 being documentary), 
and that he could not in such a passage 
contrast ἡ πόλις (in the sense of the 
whole city) and τὸ χωρίον οὗ viv ἡ πόλις 
ἐστί without any explanation. He 
suggests therefore ἡ πόλις ἡ ἐντός (cf. 
3.8). Wan Herw., Mnem. N.S. VIII 
(1880), 146, would write ἡ ἀκρόπολις. --- 
18. καὶ ὅ : the rel. pron. expressed here 
in the second clause because of its im- 
portance ; besides, to supply it from the 
adv. would bea harsh const. Cf. 89. 23, 
101. 3.— Λίνδιοι : evidently from Lin- 
dus in Rhodes. Cf. Hdt. 7.1538 κτιζομέ- 
νης Γέλης ὑπὸ Λινδίων τε τῶν ἐκ ‘Pddov καὶ 
᾿Αντιφήμον. --- καλεῖται : van Herw. and 
St. write καλοῦνται With Cod. B, though 
that has -ecrac in rasura. 

19. ἐγγύτατα : see on 2. 29. — 20. 
᾿Ακράγαντα: Agrigentum (Girgenti) ; 
on the situation and history of this 
important city, see Schubring, Hist. 
Topographie von Akragas, Leipz. 1870. 
- 21. ὀνομάσαντες, ποιήσαντες, δόντες: 



9 Ν \ ? 9 4 Ἁ ’, ’ 
οἰκιστὰς δὲ ποιήσαντες ᾿Αριστόνουν καὶ Πυστίλονμῳ νόμιμα 

δὲ τὰ Γελῴων δόντες. Ζάγκλη δὲ τὴν μὲν ἀρχὴν ἀπὸ Κύ- 

μης τῆς ἐν ᾿Οπικίᾳ Χαλκιδικῆς πόλεως λῃστῶν ἀφικομέ. 

νων ῳφκίσθη, ὕστερον δὲ καὶ ἀπὸ Χαλκίδος καὶ τῆς ἄλλης 

Εὐβοίας πλῆθος ἐλθὸν ξυγκατενείμαντο τὴν γῆν" καὶ οἶκι- 
σταὶ Περιήρης καὶ Κραταιμένης ἐγένοντο αὐτῆς, ὁ μὲν ἀπὸ 
Κύμης, ὁ δὲ ἀπὸ Χαλκίδος. ὄνομα δὲ τὸ μὲν πρῶτον Ζάγκλη 

ἦν ὑπὸ τῶν Σικελῶν κληθεῖσα, ὅτι δρεπανοειδὲς τὴν ἰδέαν τὸ 

χωρίον ἐστί, τὸ δὲ δρέπανον οἱ Σικελοὶ ζάγκλον καλοῦσιν. 

ν QA 3 Ἁ A e a ’ Ἁ ¥ τ 9 9 ’ 
ὕστερον δὲ αὐτοὶ μὲν ὑπὸ Σαμίων καὶ ἄλλων Ἰώνων ἐκπί- 

Δ ’ὔ ’ , ,’ ‘ Α 
πτουσιν, οὗ Μήδους φεύγοντες προσέβαλον Σικελίᾳ, τοὺς δὲ 

aor. ptcs. synchronous with ᾧκισαν. Cf. 
γενόμενος 5.15; also 1. 86.2; 2.68.10; 
3. 20. 21.— 28. τὰ Γελῴων: where τὰ 
ἑαυτῶν would be expected. Cf. 5.36. 
11 μετὰ Βοιωτῶν for μεθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν, and 
5. 18. 29 αὐτοὺς ᾿Αθηναίοις for ἑαυτοῖς. 
Ζάγκλη : on old coins Δάγκλη. For 
divergent, but little credible, traditions 
about the origin and fortunes of this 
city, see Strabo 6, p. 268c and Paus. 4. 
23. 6 ff.— dro Κύμης: ‘acc. to uni- 
form tradition the oldest Greek city on 
Italian soil.’’? See Curtius, Gr. Gesch.® 
I, 426. Acc. to more recent researches, 
however, Cumae is hardly much older 
than the earliest Greek cities of Sicily. 
See Busolt, Gr. Gesch.? I, 391 f., and 
Freeman, Hist. of Sicily I, 311f£.— 
24. ἐν Oma: the later Latium and 
Campania are meant. See Niebuhr, 
Rom. Gesch.? 1, 71 ff.— 26. Evyxa- 
τενείμαντο τὴν γῆν : shared the land with 
them. The pl. with collective noun as 
in 1.125.4. The word seems to occur 
elsewhere only in late writers. Cf. 
κατανέμεσθαι 2. 17. 18.— 28. ὄνομα: 
explan. acc. with pass. verb of naming, 

as 1.122.265. Kr. Spr. 50, 7,5.— Ζάγ- 
KAn AV... κληθεῖσα : was called Zan- 
cle by the Sicels. See App. on 2-5. For 
the periphrasis ἣν κληθεῖσα = ἐκλήθη, 
cf. ἦσαν γενόμενοι 4. 54, 12.— 29. Spe- 
πανοειδὲς τὴν ἰδέαν : somewhat pleo- 
nastic, like ὄνομα κληθεῖσα. In the sense 
of form, ἰδέα is used only here by 
Thuc., who is fond of the word. See 
on 1.109. 2. “ΤΊ harbor of Zancle 
is one of the finest and safest in the 
world; thesickle-shaped tongue of land 
which forms it extends northward.”’ 
See Holm I, 133.— 30. of Σικελοί: B. 
Heisterbergk, Fragen d. altest. Gesch. 
Siziliens, p. 98 ff. (Berl. Stud. ΙΧ, H.3), 
attempts to prove that not the Sicels, 
but the Siceliotes, called the sickle 
ζάγκλον. Acc. to Diod. 4. 85 Ζάγκλη 
was named after a King Zanklos, — 
81.. αὐτοί: i.e. the former Chalcidian 
inhabitants.—twd Σαμίων... ἐκπί- 
πτουσὶν κτὲ. : for particulars, see Hat. 
6. 22 ff.— Kal ἄλλων ᾿Ιώνων : besides 
the Samians Hdt. 6.22 mentions Μιλη- 
σίων οἱ ἐκπεφευγότες. --- 82. MfSovus φεύ- 
yovres: after the sea fight αὖ Lade. 


, 3 , e , , 3 γιὸς Ὁ 
Yaptous® Αναξίλας Ῥηγίνων τύραννος οὐ πολλῷ ὕστερον 

3 Ἁ ‘ ᾿ 4 3. ἃ 4 9 , > 2 
ἐκβαλὼν καὶ τὴν πόλιν αὐτὸς ξυμμείκτων ἀνθρώπων οἰκίσας 

4 9 Ν ~ e A ἃ 9 A ’ 9 4 
35 Μεσσήνην ἀπὸ τῆς ἑαυτοῦ τὸ ἀρχαῖον πατρίδος ἀντωνό- 

5 μασεν. καὶ Ἱμέρα ἀπὸ Ζάγκλης φκίσθη ὑπὸ ἙἘῤκλείδου καὶ 

Σίμον καὶ Σάκωνος, καὶ Χαλκιδῆς μὲν οἱ πλεῖστοι ἦλθον 

3 ‘ > , 4 b > A \ 3 “ 
ἐς τὴν ἀποικίαν, ξυνῴκησαν δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ ἐκ Συρακουσῶν 

φυγάδες στάσει νικηθέντες, of Μυλητίδαι καλούμενοι: καὶ 

φωνὴ μὲν μεταξὺ τῆς τε Χαλκιδέων καὶ Δωρίδος ἐκράθη, 

νόμιμα δὲ τὰ Χαλκιδικὰ ἐκράτησεν. ἴΑκραι δὲ καὶ Κασμέναι 

88. ᾿Αναξίλας “Pnylvav τύραννος: 
acc. to Hdt. 6. 28 it was this very 
Anaxilas who had first caused the 
Samians to take Zancle. — 34. αὐτός: 
correctly restored by Dobree for αὐτοῖς. 
Cf. 5. 15. — ξυμμείκτων ἀνθρώπων olkl- 
σας: having colonized it with men of 
mized nationality. Gen. of material as 
with πληρώσας. G. 1118; H. 743.— 
35. ἀπὸ τῆς ἑαυτοῦ τὸ ἀρχαῖον πατρίδος: 
cf. Paus. 4. 28.6 τέταρτος ἀπόγονος ἣν 
᾿Αλκιδαμίδου - μετῴκησε δὲ ᾿Αλκιδαμίδας ἐκ 
Μεσσήνης ἐς Ῥήγιον μετὰ τὴν ᾿Αριστοδή- 
μου τελευτήν. The adv. τὸ ἀρχαῖον is un- 
usual for ἀρχαίας. See on 4. 8. 18. -- 
ἀντωνόμασεν: with Bk. for αὐτὸ ὠνό- 

μασεν of most of the better Mss.; for . 

αὐτό would be superfluous, and so near 
τὴν πόλιν would seem strange in spite 
of τὸ χωρίον in 1. 80. St. thinks this 
would require μετωνόμασεν. But cf. 
Dio C. 55. 6 τὸν μῆνα τὸν Σεξτίλιον 
ἐπικαλούμενον Αὔγουστον ἀντ ωνόμασεν. 
The statement of Hdt. 7. 164 παρὰ 
Σαμίων ἔσχε τε καὶ κατοίκησε πόλιν Ζάγ- 
κλὴν τὴν ἐς Μεσσήνην μεταβαλοῦσαν τὸ 
ὄνομα does not make it necessary to 
refer the change of name to the Sami- 
ans. See Unger, Rh. Mus. XXXVII, 
184 n.— The complete destruction by 


earthquake and tidal wave of Messina 
and Reggio on December 28, 1908, has 
recently drawn the attention of the 
whole world to this region. 

5 1. ‘Ipépa: see Holm I, 136, 393.— 
2. ot πλεῖστοι: i.e. the most that came 
were Chalcidians. — 3. ξυνῴκησαν δὲ 
αὐτοῖς : and there settled with them, i.e. 
with the Chalcidians. So Steup reads 
with Bk. and Kr. and the majority of 

the Mss. against ξυνῴκισαν of most 

editors. Cf. προσξυνῴκησαν 2. 16, and 
see on ξυνοικήσαντες 2. 836. He would 
restore ξυνῴκησαν also in 1. 24. 6.— 
4, στάσει νικηθέντες : overcome by an 
opposing faction. Cf. Hdt. 1. 150. 2 
στάσι ἑσσωθέντας. For const. of the 
dat., see on 2. 6 and 13. 125. 6.— οἱ 
MvaAnrtlda: καλούμενοι: the definite 
statement that these were φυγάδες ἐκ 
Συρακουσῶν shows that Strabo’s notice 
(6. p. 272 c) τὴν Ἱμέραν of ἐν Μυλαῖς 
ἔκτισαν Ζαγκλαῖοι rests on a misunder- 
standing. The name Μυλητίδαι has not 
been explained.—5. μεταξὺ... ἐκράθη: 
peculiar const. for ἐκ... . ἐκράθη. --- τῆς 
Χαλκιδέων : i.e. τῆς ᾿Ιάδος. ---- καὶ Awpl- 
δος: cf. Δωρὶς γλῶσσα 8. 112. 14. 

6. "Axpat: not far from the sources 
of the Anapus. See Holm I, 141f., 396. 


€ NN > ’ > » θ "A Ν EBS 4 ¥ 
ὑπὸ Συρακοσίων φκίσθησαν, Ακραι μὲν ἑβδομήκοντα ἔτεσι 
Ν v4 2 \ 3 ‘ ¥ δ» ᾿ 
μετὰ Συρακούσας, Κασμέναι δὲ ἐγγὺς εἴκοσι μετὰ ἴΑκρας. 
καὶ Καμάρινα τὸ πρῶτον ὑπὸ Συρακοσίων κίσθη, ἔτεσιν 
10 ἐγγύτατα πέντε καὶ τριάκοντα καὶ ἑκατὸν μετὰ Συρακουσῶν 
’ 3 Ἁ \ 3 ’ 3 A , ‘ 4 
κτίσιν οἰκισταὶ δὲ ἐγένοντο αὐτῆς Δάσκων καὶ Μενέκωλος. 
᾿ἀναστάτων δὲ Καμαριναίων γενομένων πολέμῳ ὑπὸ Συρακο- 
σίων δι᾽ ἀπόστασιν, χρόνῳ Ἱπποκράτης ὕστερον, Γέλας τύ- 
4 3 ~ ’ > 4 Ἁ Ν 
ραννος, λύτρα ἀνδρῶν Συρακοσίων αἰχμαλώτων λαβὼν τὴν 
16 γῆν τὴν Καμαριναίων, αὐτὸς οἰκιστὴς γενόμενος κατῴκισε 
Καμάριναν. καὶ αὖθις ὑπὸ Γέλωνος ἀνάστατος γενομένη τὸ 
τρίτον κατῳκίσθη ὑπὸ Γελῴων. 
A ¥ ε ’ ‘ 4 4 ¥ Ν 
6 Τοσαῦτα ἔθνη Ἑλλήνων καὶ βαρβάρων Σικελίαν ᾧκει, καὶ 
A 9 
ἐπὶ τοσήνδε οὖσαν αὐτὴν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι στρατεύειν ὥρμηντο, 
Die ἐν τῇ ἀληθεστάτῃ προφάσει τῆς πά ἄρξε 
ἐφιέμενοι μὲν τῇ ἀλη  πρ τῆς πάσης ἀρξειν, 

The situation of Casmenae is less cer- 
tain. See Holm I, 148, 396.— 8. pera 
Συρακούσας: possibly κτισθείσας has 
fallen out. 

9. Καμάρινα: between the outlets 
of the rivers Oanis (Frascolaro) and 
Hipparis (Camarana). See Holm], 148. 
— 10. pera Σνρακουσῶν κτίσιν : see on 
4, 16.— 13. Ἱπποκράτης : tyrant of 
Gela 498-491, followed by Gelon, who 
in 485 brought Syracuse also under his 
rule.—14. λύτρα. . . Καμαριναίων: 
the cession of Camarina to Hippocrates 
is mentioned also by Hdt. 7. 154. — 
15. γενόμενος : for force of aor. ptc., see 
on 4, 21.— 17. ὑπὸ Γελῴων : for Γέλω- 
vos of the Mss., correctly restored by 
Dodwell, acc. to Diod. 11. 76. This 
last settlement was made about 461. 

From the foregoing general state- 
ment we gather the following facts, 
which are of importance for the history 
of the great war to follow, namely, 

that of the Hellenic settlements in 
Sicily Naxos, Leontini, and Catana be- 
longed to the Ionian race; to the Do- 
rian belonged Syracuse, Gela, Acrae, 
Casmenae, Selinus, Camarina, and 
Acragas; of mixed race were Zancle- 
Messene and Himera. Since 483 Me- 
gara Hyblaea had been deserted, and 
its territory was in the hands of the 

6. A plea for help from the Eges- 
taeans causes the Athenians to make 
investigations as to the state of affairs 
in Sicily. —1. τοσαῦτα ἔθνη : refers to 
τοσάδε ἔθνη 2. 1 (with division into 
βάρβαροι c.2 and “Ἕλληνες cc. 3-5).— 
2. ἐπὶ τοσήνδε οὖσαν αὐτήν : referring, 
per chiasmum, to 1. ὃ 2. See on 2. 89. 
-- ὥρμηντο : were eager. See on 3. 92. 
18.—8. ἐφιέμενοι... ἄρξειν : eagerly 
desiring in simple truth to attain to the 
empire of the whole island. The dat. is 
causal, the sense being that desire for 


A \ ὦ 9 A , A e A , 
βοηθεῖν δὲ ἅμα εὐπρεπῶς βουλόμενοι τοῖς ἑαυτῶν ξυγγενέσι 
5 καὶ τοῖς προγεγενημένοις ξυμμάχοις. μάλιστα δ᾽ αὐτοὺς 
9 ’ 3 ’ ’ . 9) N 4 
ἐξώρμησαν ‘Eyeotaiwy τε πρέσβεις παρόντες καὶ προθυμό- 
τερον ἐπικαλούμενοι. ὅμοροι γὰρ ὄντες τοῖς Σελινουντίοις ἐς 
πόλεμον καθέστασαν περί τε γαμικῶν τινων καὶ περὶ γῆς 
9 ’ ν ε 4 , 3 4 
ἀμφισβητήτου, καὶ ot Σελινούντιοι Συρακοσίους ἐπαγαγό- 
10 μενοι ξυμμάχους κατεῖργον αὐτοὺς τῷ πολέμῳ καὶ κατὰ 
ynv καὶ κατὰ θάλασσαν: ὦστε τὴν γενομένην ἐπὶ Λάχητος 

‘ A ’ ’’ 4 e 3 aA 
καὶ τοῦ προτέρου πολέμου Λεοντίνων οἵ ἜἬ γεσταῖοι ξυμμα- 
χίαν ἀναμιμνήσκοντες τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἐδέοντο σφίσι ναῦς 

the sway of the whole island was the 
truest ground of their eagerness. For 
“πρόφασις Meaning real ground or cause, 
see on 1, 28. 23. St. writes ἄρξαι for 
ἄρξειν of the Mss., considering (see 
Qu. Gr.? p. 18 ff.) the fut. inf. inad- 
missible after ἐφίεσθαι, as after δεῖσθαι 
1. 27. 9, βούλεσθαι 6. 57. 11, πείθειν 2. 
29. 26, δυνατὸν εἶναι 3. 28.1. But Cl. 
considers the fut. appropriate, even 
after verbs that do not usually take it, 
where the result is postponed to a 
more distant (as here) or a conditional 
future time, and refers to St.’s defense, 
on like grounds, against Cobet, of the 
fut. inf. after διανοεῖσθαι in five pas- 
sages of Thuc. and one of Hdt. The 
force of the fut. here is attain to rule, 
for ἄρξειν is fut. of ἄρξαι as well as of 
ἄρχειν. In1.§1@Bovdovro. . . καταστρέ- 
ψασθαι comprehends the conquest in a 
single act. See also on 4. 27. 20 and 
8.2.10.— 4. εὐπρεπῶς : in fair-seeming 
wise, as in 4. 60.8. Cf. 8.19 προφάσει 
εὐπρεπεῖ. --- τοῖς ἑαντῶν ξυγγενέσι : i.e. 
the Hellenes of Ionic stock. — 5. προ- 
γεγενημένοις : with Mss. αὶ and M and 
Valla for προσγεγενημένοις, as St., 
Cl., and others have recognized to be 

necessary ; for not new, but only old, 
allies can be meant. 

6. ᾿Εγεσταίων re: Cl. assumes with 
Bm. an anacoluthon, the regular const., 
interrupted by a long parenthetical 
statement which ends with ἱκανά in 
23, being resumed with ὧν ἀκούοντες 
xré., Where we have τῶν re ᾿Εγεσταίων 

. kal τῶν ξυναγορευόντων. Perhaps 
the simplest remedy would be to omit 
re, With three inferior Mss. — προθυ- 
μότερον : not essentially different from 
the positive προθύμως (eagerly, earnestly) 
here and in 77.7; 80.2. See on 54. 2. 
— 8. περὶ γαμικῶν τινων : particulars 
not known. Proximity easily gave oc- 
casions for such difficulties. — 9. ἐπα- 
yayopevor: to be preferred to érayé- 
μενοι here and in 3.84.8. See App. on 
the latter passage.— 10. κατεῖργον : 
pressed. Cf. 91.7; 1. 76.12; 4. 98. 18; 
7.57. 34.—11. τὴν γενομένην... Ac- 
ovt(vev... ξυμμαχίαν : i.e. the alliance 
concluded by the Egestaeans with the 
Leontines at the time of Laches and 
the former war of the Athenians in 
Sicily. See App.— 12. of ᾿Εἰγεσταῖοι: 
subj. incorporated in the obj. clause. 
— 18. ἀναμιμνῃσκοντες : with double 






πέμψαντας ἐπαμῦναι, λέγοντες ἄλλα TE πολλὰ καὶ κεφάλαιον, 
εἰ Συρακόσιοι Λεοντίνους τε ἀναστήσαντες ἀτιμώρητοι γενή- 
σονται καὶ τοὺς λοιποὺς ἔτι ξυμμάχους αὐτῶν διαφθείροντες. 
αὐτοὶ τὴν ἅπασαν δύναμιν τῆς Σικελίας σχήσουσι, κίνδυνον 
εἶναι μή ποτε μεγάλῃ παρασκενῇ Δωριῆς τε Δωριεῦσι κατὰ 
τὸ ξυγγενὲς καὶ ἅμα ἄποικοι τοῖς ἐκπέμψασι Πελοποννησίοις 
4 Ἁ Ἁ 3 ’ ’ a, ~ 
βοηθήσαντες καὶ τὴν ἐκείνων δύναμιν ξυγκαθέλωσι σῶφρον 
δ᾽ εἶναι μετὰ τῶν ὑπολοίπων ἔτι ξυμμάχων ἀντέχειν τοῖς Συ- 
ρακοσίοις, ἄλλως τε καὶ χρήματα σφῶν παρεξόντων ἐς τὸν 
4 “ @ Vd 4 9 4° e 3 A 3 : A 9 
πόλεμον ἱκανά. ὧν ἀκούοντες οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλη- 
’ A 3 , , ’ »" A 
σίαις, Tov Te Eyeortaiwy πολλάκις λεγόντων καὶ τῶν Evva- 
, > OA 9 , , , A 3 
γορενόντων αὐτοῖς, ἐψηφίσαντο πρέσβεις πέμψαι πρῶτον ἐς 
τὴν Eyeoray περί τε τῶν χρημάτων σκεψομένους εἰ ὑπάρχει, 
9 A ἴω] Q A A Ὺ A 
ὥσπερ φασίν, ἐν τῷ κοινῷ καὶ ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς, καὶ TA τοῦ πο- 
λέμον ἅμα πρὸς τοὺς Σελινουντίους ἐν ὅτῳ ἐστὶν εἰσομένους. 
Ἁ ε \ 4 “A 3 ? 3 4 3 
Καὶ οἱ μὲν πρέσβεις τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἀπεστάλησαν ἐς 
‘N a , A ~ 9 ~ ”~ ‘ e 
τὴν Σικελίαν. Λακεδαιμόνιοι δὲ τοῦ αὐτοῦ χειμῶνος Kal oi 

acc., whereas in 2. 54. 4; 3.59.15 we 
have the gen. of thething. Both consts. 
are in use elsewhere. — 14. ἄλλα τε 
“πολλὰ Kal κεφάλαιον κτέ. : cf. 4. 50. 8 
πολλῶν ἄλλων γεγραμμένων κεφάλαιον 
ῆἣν.--- 15. Λεοντίνους ἀναστήσαντες : as 
related in ὅ. 4. ὃ 8. --- ᾿16. αὐτῶν: sc. τῶν 
Λεοντίνων. --- διαφθείροντες : pres. ptc. 
indicating the means by which the 
Syracusans can, acc. to the speaker, 
gain τὴν ἅπασαν δύναμιν τῆς Σικελίας, --- 
for σχήσουσι is ingressive (Kr.),— and 
hence there is no need to change to 
διαφθείραντες, aS some editors do.— 
18. κατὰ τὸ Evyyevés: = κατὰ τὴν ξυγ- 
γένειαν. See on 1. 6. 12.—19. τοῖς 
ἐκπέμψασι Πελοποννησίοις : referring 
esp. to Corinth, the mother-city of 
Syracuse. — 20. τὴν ἐκείνων: i.e. τῶν 

᾿Αθηναίων. --- σῶφρον εἶναι: was pru- 
dent. Cf. 1. 42. 10.— 22. σφῶν : sc. 
τῶν ᾿Εγεσταίων. 

28, ὧν ἀκούοντες : i.e. τούτων τῶν 
λόγων; for const., cf. τοῦ κηρύγματος 
ἀκούσαντες 4. 37. 5, τῆς ἀγγελίας ὅ. 44.1, 
τῆς ἐπιστολῆς 7.16.2. The pres. pte. 
here with reference to the repeated 
ἐκκλησίαι and the πολλάκις λέγειν. ---- 
25. πέμψαι: for the unintelligible 
πέμψαντες Of the Mss.— πρῶτον : i.e. 
before making a definite decision. — 
27. ὥσπερ φασίν: sc. οἱ ᾿Εγεσταῦῖοι. --- 
τὰ τοῦ πολέμου: proleptic obj. acc. 
οὗ εἰσομένους. For nonrepetition of 
τοῦ before πρὸς τοὺς Σελινουντίους, cf. 
76.17.; 1.55.11; 7.48.12; 8.6.9. 

7%. Invasion of the territory of the 
Argives by the Lacedaemonians. The 




ξύμμαχοι πλὴν Κορινθίων στρατεύσαντες ἐς τὴν ᾿Αργείαν 

A A » 9 δ νΝ A 3 ’ 4 
TNS TE γῆς ἔτεμον οὐ πολλὴν καὶ σῖτον ἀνεκομίσαντό τινα 

’ , a ee Y , \ 93 72 
ζεύγη κομίσαντες, καὶ ἐς Opveas κατοικίσαντες Tous Αργείων 

φυγάδας καὶ τῆς ἄλλης στρατιᾶς παρακαταλιπόντες αὐτοῖς 

9Χλ9 \ , 4 4 9 ᾽ν 3 A > 
ὀλίγους καὶ σπεισάμενοί τινα χρόνον, ᾧστε μὴ ἀδικεῖν Ὃρ- 

(4 s 3 ,’ Ἁ 3 ’ 9 ’ ; ~ A. 
νεάτας καὶ Apyetous τὴν ἀλλήλων, ἀπεχώρησαν τῷ στρατῳ 

ἐπ᾽ οἴκου. ἐλθόντων δὲ ᾿Αθηναίων οὐ πολλῷ ὕστερον ναυσὶ 

id ‘ ε ,’ ε 4 e 3 “Ὁ δ ~ 
τριάκοντα καὶ ἑξακοσίοις ὁπλίταις οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι μετὰ τῶν 

Argive refugees are settled in Orneae, 
but must soon again leave this place 
in consequence of an attack of the 
Argives and Athenians. The Atheni- 
ans, with their base at Methone, dev- 
astate the land of Perdiccas, whom 
the Lacedaemonians vainly seek to 
help through the Thracian Chalcidi- 
ans. — 8. πλὴν Κορινθίων : these had, 
since the alliance of Argos, Mantinea, 
and Elis (420 s.c.), held rather with 
Sparta (5. 48. ὃ 21.) ; though their rela- 
tions with Sparta were by no means 
80 close as before the fifty years’ peace 
of 421 B.c. In the summer of 418 B.c. 
2000 Corinthians had taken part in the 
first expedition of King Agis against 
the Argives (5. 57. § 2), and later the 
Corinthians had bestirred themselves 
to aid the Spartans after Mantinea (5. 
64.§4, 75.§2). Butin the account of 
the winter of 417-416 (5. 83. ὃ 1) we read 
Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἐστράτευσαν és τὸ “Apyos 
αὐτοί τε καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι πλὴν Κορινθίων, 
and in 5.115. §38°separate dealings of 
the Corinthians with the Athenians 
are reported.— στρατεύσαντες ἐς τὴν 
᾿Αργείαν : continuing the hostilities (5. 
83, 116) caused by the democratic 
revolution in Argos in the summer of 
4173.c.— 4. τῆς γῆς οὐ πολλήν: for 

assimilation of gender of articular adj. 
to that of part. gen., see on 1. 2. 18. — 
σῖτον. .. κομίσαντες : carried off some 
corn, having brought along wagons. As 
dva- can signify off, away (cf. ἀναιρεῖν, 
ἀναλαμβάνειν, ἀνασκευάζειν»). Lude’s con- 
jecture dmexouloavro is unnecessary. 
Cl. would take τινά with ζεύγη, but 
thus it would be meaningless, whereas 
σῖτον requires some modifier to offset 
ov πολλήν in the first clause. It is not 
likely that τινά is dittography for τινά 
with χρόνον in 7, as Cl. doubtingly 
suggested.— 5. ᾽Ορνεάς : whose inhabit- 
ants were on the Argive side at Man- 
tinea (δ. 67.§2, 72.§4, 74. ὃ 8), prob. 
first came through the expedition here 
reported into the power of the Spar- 
tans. — τοὺς ᾿Αργείων φυγάδας : of the 
oligarchic party, who had first found 
refuge in Phlius and hitherto had re- 
mained there. Cf. 5. 88. 8 3, 115.§1.— 
6. παρακαταλιπόντες : elsewhere only 
in late authors, as also προσκαταλείπειν 
2.36.8; 4.62.16.—7. σπεισάμενοί τινα 
χρόνον : sc. τοῖς ᾿Αργείοις. The acc. of 
the duration of the time for which the 
truce was to last, as 4.63.7; 5.41.12, 
60.6. Cf. 3.114. 13.— ὥστε : on condi- 
tion that. See on 1.28.18. GMT. 587, 2. 

9. ἐλθόντων: i.e. to Argos and its 

#01.91.1; March, 415 B.c. 



᾿Αθηναί σ x ἐξελθόντες τοὺς ἐν Opveats μίαν ἡμέ- 
ναίων πανστρατιᾷ όντες τοὺς ἐν Opveais μίαν ἡμ 
ραν ἐπολιόρκουν: ὑπὸ δὲ νύκτα, αὐλισαμένου τοῦ στρατεύ- 
ματος ἄπωθεν, ἐκδιδράσκουσιν οἵ ἐκ τῶν ᾽᾿Ορνεῶν. καὶ τῇ 
ε ’ ε«9Ψ “A ε » Ud δ 9 N 
ὑστεραίᾳ οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι, ὡς ἤσθοντο, κατασκάψαντες τὰς Ὀρνεὰς 
16 ἀνεχώρησαν, καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ὕστερον ταῖς ναυσὶν ἐπ᾽ οἴκου. 
Καὶ ἐς Μεθώνην τὴν ὅμορον Μακεδονίᾳ ἱππέας κατὰ θά- 
λασσαν κομίσαντες ᾿Αθηναῖοι σφῶν τε αὐτῶν καὶ Μακεδόνων 
‘ Ν ’ 4 3 ’ Ἁ ,’ 
τοὺς παρὰ σφίσι φυγάδας ἐκακούργουν τὴν Περδίκκου. Λα- 
a Α id Ν ’ \ 9. ἃ ’ 
κεδαιμόνιοι δὲ πέμψαντες παρὰ Χαλκιδέας τοὺς ἐπὶ Θράκης, 
20 ἄγοντας πρὸς ᾿Αθηναίους δεχημέρους σπονδάς, ξυμπολεμεῖν 
> 3 , ε > 9 ¥ Xe \ 3 v4 
ἐκέλευον Tlepdixxa: οἱ δ᾽ οὐκ ἤθελον. καὶ ὁ χειμὼν ἐτελεύτα, 

‘ ν ‘ 4 » 9 4 A ’ “A a 
καὶ ἕκτον καὶ δέκατον ἔτος ἐτελεύτα τῷ πολέμῳ τῷδε ὃν 

Θουκυδίδης ξυνέγραψεν. 

*Tod δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους ἅμα ἦρι οἵ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων 

’ 4 3 “A 4 N ε9 A 3 49ΦΨ “(ἡ 
πρέσβεις ἧκον ἐκ τῆς Σικελίας καὶ οἵ Ἐγεσταῖοι μετ᾽ αὐτῶν 
ἄγοντες ἑξήκοντα τάλαντα ἀσήμου ἀργυρίου ὡς ἐς ἑξήκοντα 

harbor Nauplia.—11. ἐξελθόντες : re- 
stored by Haacke, following Valla, for 
ἐξελθόντων of all the Mss.— τοὺς ἐν 
᾿Ορνεαῖς: Cod. Laur. has τοὺς μὲν ἐν 
᾽Ορνεαῖς, but as here neither persons 
nor actions are contrasted, μέν is inad- 
missible.— 12. ὑπὸ νύκτα: by night. 
See on 64. 3.— 13. of ἐκ τῶν ᾿Ορνεῶν: 
the prep. phrase attached proleptically 
- tothe subj.,as1.8.9.—14. ὡς ἤσθοντο: 
without expressed obj.; see on 1. 95. 21. 

16. ἐς Μεθώνην τὴν ὅμορον Maxe- 
δονίᾳ: to distinguish from Μεθώνη τῆς 
Λακωνικῆς 2.25.4 and Μεθώνη ἡ μεταξὺ 
᾿Επιδαύρου καὶ Τροιζῆνος 4. 45.6. The 
place belonged to the Athenian alli- 
ance. See on 4. 129. 18. —17. σφῶν 
αὐτῶν : dependent on ἱππέας, as Maxe- 
δόνων is On rods... φνγάδας, the two 
part. gens., as corresponding chief 
factors, being correlated by re... καὶ. 

—18. rots... φυγάδας : the followers 
of the princes hostile to Perdiccas. 
Cf. 1.57.6, 59.8, 61.17; 2.95. 8, 18, 
100. 10. 

29. ἄγοντας. .. δεχημέρους σπονδάς: 
i.e. a truce to be renewed every ten 
days. Cf. 6. 26. 14. 

Seventeenth Year of the War (8-93) 

8. In view of the favorable report 
of the ambassadors sent to Sicily the 
Athenians vote to send thither sixty 
triremes under Alcibiades, Nicias, and 
Lamachus. In an ecclesia called five 
days later to discuss the equipment 
Nicias tries to effect the abrogation of 
the vote.— 2. ἧκον: as freq. with the 
force of came back. Cf. 5.34.1; 7.21. 
2; 8.92.6.—3. ἄγοντες : of transport 
by ship, as 7. 16. 12, 31. 12. — es: with 
μισθόν, as pay. The estimate is for 



A Ἃ a » 4 4 Ν ε 
ναῦς μηνὸς μισθόν, ἃς ἔμελλον δεήσεσθαι πέμπειν. καὶ οἱ 3 

3 “ 9 ’ ’ \ 93 4 ~ 3 
Αθηναῖοι ἐκκλησίαν ποιήσαντες καὶ ἀκούσαντες τῶν τε Ἔγε- 

’ . A ’ ld 4 ¥ 3 δ 
σταίων καὶ τῶν σφετέρων πρέσβεων τὰ τε ἄλλα ἐπαγωγὰ 
καὶ οὐκ ἀληθῆ καὶ περὶ τῶν χρημάτων, ὡς εἴη ἑτοῖμα EV τε 
τοῖς ἱεροῖς πολλὰ καὶ ἐν τῷ κοινῷ, ἐψηφίσαντο ναῦς ἑξή- 

κοντα πέμπειν ἐς Σικελίαν καὶ στρατηγοὺς αὐτοκράτορας 

᾿Αλκιβιάδην τε τὸν Κλεινίον καὶ Νικίαν τὸν Νικηράτου καὶ 
Λάμαχον τὸν Ξενοφάνους, βοηθοὺς μὲν Ἔ γεσταίοις πρὸς 
Σελινουντίους, ξυγκατοικίσαι δὲ καὶ Λεοντίνους, Hy τι περι- 

ω A ων 4 me 
γένηται αὐτοῖς τοῦ πολέμου, Kat τἄλλα τὰ ἐν TH Σικελίᾳ 

a drachma per day for each man — 
reckoning 200 men for each trireme 
(see Boeckh-Friankel, Staatshaush.? I, 
344 ff.), i.e. twice as much as usual 
(60 x 200 x 30 = 360,000 drachmas, 
or 60 talents). See on 31. 19. 

6. ἐπαγωγά : enticements, as 4. 88. 
8; 6.111. 14.— 8. ἐν τῷ κοινῷ : for the 
traditional ἐν τοῖς κοινοῖς, correctly re- 
stored by van Herw. (Stud. Thuc. p.46), 
following early editions, and Haacke, 
as seems to be required by ἐν τῷ κοινῷ 
6.27. Cf. also 1. 80.19, 141.11; @. 1. 
15. It is the sort of miscopying that 
has been corrected in 3. 65. 2; 5. 27. 
2, 48.1. W. E. Heitland (Journal 
of Phil. XXIV, 8) calls attention to 
the fact that, acc. to 46. § 3, the Athe- 
nian ambassadors were led also into 
the sanctuary of Aphrodite in Eryx, 
but that proves nothing for τοῖς κοινοῖς, 
since our passage has direct reference 
to 6. 8 3.—9. αὐτοκράτορας : within the 
limits of the instructions implied in 
βοηθοὺς μὲν... ᾿Αθηναίοις the generals 
were to have free hand in Sicilian mat- 
ters. Later (26. ὃ 1) they were given 
unlimited authority also to determine 
the strength and equipment of the 

forces to be sent to Sicily.— 11. Adpa- 
xov: cf. 4. 75.5.—12. ξυγκατοικίσαι, 
(14) πρᾶξαι : infs. of purpose after πέμ- 
me, a8 in 4.182.15. Cf. 50.14. For the 
correlation of these infs. with βοηθοὺς 
μέν, cf. 1. 72. 6, 128. 14.— ξυγκατοι- 
κίσαι δὲ kal . . . πολέμου : bul also to 
join in restoring Leontini in case they 
should have any success in the war. So 
Bm. and Pp.-St. explain. St. renders 
si quid ex bello commodi nacti - 
essent. τοῦ πολέμου depends on τι or 
rather on the subst. idea derived from 
its connection with περιγένηται. On the 
fortunes of the Leontines, cf. 5. 4. 
§ 4 ff.; 6.6.§ 2. For Steup’s view, see 
App.— 18. καὶ radda .. . πρᾶξαι: cf. 
1.95.7 τἄλλα καταστησόμενοι ἢ φαίνοιτο 
ἄριστα αὐτοῖς. Here we have the more 
general πράσσειν, since there could be 
no question of a complete establish- 
ment (καθίστασθαι). Cf. also 26.2 περὶ 
στρατιᾶς πλήθους καὶ περὶ τοῦ παντὸς πλοῦ 
τοὺς στρατηγοὺς πράσσειν ἣ ἂν αὐτοῖς δοκῇ 
ἄριστα. εἶναι ᾿Αθηναίοις, 1. 126. 26 τὸ πᾶν 
διαθεῖναι 7 ἂν ἄριστα διαγιγνώσκωσι. Cf. 
also 9. 12, 10. ὅ.---τάλλα τὰ ἐν τῇ 
Σικελίᾳ : art. repeated, as in 8. 64. 6, 
84.18; but only one art. in 1. 44. 16, 


πρᾶξαι ὅπῃ av γιγνώσκωσιν ἄριστα ᾿Αθηναίοις. μετὰ δὲ 8 
15 τοῦτο ἡμέρᾳ πέμπτῃ ἐκκλησία αὖθις ἐγίγνετο, καθ᾽ ὅ τι χρὴ 
τὴν παρασκευὴν ταῖς ναυσὶ τάχιστα γίγνεσθαι, καὶ τοῖς 
A » 4 ~ 3 Ν » 
στρατηγοῖς, εἴ τον προσδέοιντο, ψηφισθῆναι ἐς τὸν ἔκπλουν. 
καὶ ὁ Νικίας ἀκούσιος μὲν ἡρημένος ἄρχειν, νομίζων δὲ τὴν 4 
πόλιν οὐκ ὀρθῶς βεβουλεῦσθαι, ἀλλὰ προφάσει βραχείᾳ 
S93 A A , ε»ὕὔ , ¥ 4.32 
20 καὶ εὐπρεπεῖ τῆς Σικελίας ἁπάσης, μεγάλου ἔργου, ἐφίεσθαι 
Α 9 Ud 3 4 Ἁ 4 A ϑ ? 
παρελθὼν ἀποτρέψαι ἐβούλετο καὶ παρῇνει τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις 
εεε \ 3 , \ Ἶ A A .e , 9 ; 
9 Η μὲν ἐκκλησία περὶ παρασκενῆς τῆς ἡμετέρας ἥδε 1 
ξυνελέγη, καθ᾽ ὅ τι χρὴ ἐς Σικελίαν ἐκπλεῖν - ἐμοὶ μέντοι 
δοκεῖ καὶ περὶ αὐτοῦ τούτου ἔτι χρῆναι σκέψασθαι, εἰ ἄμει- 
νόν ἐστιν ἐκπέμπειν τὰς ναῦς, καὶ μὴ οὕτω βραχείᾳ βουλῇ 
‘N 4 , > , > 4, , 
δ περὶ μεγάλων πραγμάτων ἀνδράσιν ἀλλοφύλοις πειθομένους 

δ6. 11, 91. 8; 8. 101. 7.—14. γιγνώ-. - 

σκωσιν: judge. Cf. 9.12 ; 8. 67. 18, and 
διαγιγνώσκειν 1. 126. 26. 

15. καθ᾽ ὅ τι χρὴ κτέ.: to be taken 
directly with ἐκκλησία, something like 
wore βουλεύεσθαι being understood. For 
καθ᾽ ὅ τι, in what way, cf. 9.2; 8. 67. 5, 
and see on 1.35.16; 4. 84. 28. ---- 17. εἴ 
του προσδέοιντο : in case they should 
need anything further (besides the 
equipment voted), containing the subj. 
of ψηφισθῆναι, inf. of purpose after 
ἐκκλησία ἐγίγνετο (cf. 38.25, 80.10; 4. 
114. 9). Hude unnecessarily inserts 
τοῦ before rots στρατηγοῖς, but is right 
in denying that ψηφισθῆναι depends on 
καθ᾽ ὅ τι χρή, a8 Cl. and others explain. 

19. προφάσει βραχείᾳ καὶ εὐπρεπεῖ: 
on a slight and (only) fair-seeming pre- 
text. The first adj. has reference to 
the insignificance of Egesta, the second 
to 6. 4 βοηθεῖν δὲ dua εὐπρεπῶς βουλόμενοι 
Tots ἑαυτῶν tuyyevéo. xré. Cf. 79. 9 

εὐλόγῳ προφάσει. --- 20. μεγάλον ἔργου: 
a great thing, matter, as in 8. 8. 8. 
μεγάλου is esp. antithetic to βραχείᾳ. 
9. My advice is to reconsider the 
whole question of the expedition to 
Sicily, and I do this although a position 
of honor is accorded me in the enter- 
prise and fear of personal danger in- 
fluences me lessthan others. Following 
solely my conviction of the- public 
interest, I will show that the under- 
taking is untimely and the object in 
view not easy to attain. —1. ἢ μὲν 
ἐκκλησία... ἐκπλεῖν " ἐμοὶ μέντοι δοκεῖ: 
cf. the similar introduction to the ér- 
τάφιος λόγος 2. 88. --- 2. καθ᾽ ὅ τι... 
ἐκπλεῖν : explanatory of περὶ παρασκευῆς 
τῆς ἡμετέρας. On the matter, cf. ἃ. 8 8. 
- 8. εἰ ἄμεινόν ἐστιν: formula used 
esp. in questions put to the oracle. See 
on 1.118. 21.—4. καὶ pn... ἄρασθαι: 
dependent on χρῆναι. --- ὃ. ἀνδράσιν 
ἀλλοφύλοις: cf. 11. 27 τῶν ᾿Εγεσταίων, 


, 9 ’ ¥ 4 Ὁ Q “A 
πόλεμον OV προσήκοντα ἄρασθαι. καίτοι ἔγωγε καὶ τιμῶμαι 3 
ἐκ τοῦ τοιούτου καὶ ἧσσον "ἑτέρων περὶ τῷ ἐμαντοῦ σώματι 
Φ ~ a, e , 9 \ ’ φ é a Ἁ ~ 
ὀρρωδῶ, νομίζων ὁμοίως ἀγαθὸν πολίτην εἶναι ὃς ἂν καὶ τοῦ 
σώματός τι καὶ τῆς οὐσίας προνοῆται: μάλιστα γὰρ ay ὃ 

A A A ~ , ze . ’ 9 ~ 
10 τοιοῦτος Kal τὰ τῆς πόλεως Su ἑαυτὸν βούλοιτο ὀρθοῦσθαι. 
ὅμως δὲ οὔτε ἐν τῷ πρότερον χρόνῳ διὰ τὸ προτιμᾶσθαι 
ὦ Q , ¥ aA 9 . Pa , , 
εἶπον παρὰ γνώμην οὔτε νῦν, ἀλλὰ ἢ ἂν γιγνώσκω βέλτιστα 

8 A Ἁ A N δ ld a e , > ‘\ » 
ἐρῶ. καὶ πρὸς μὲν TOUS τρόπους TOUS ὑμετέρους ἀσθενὴς av 
μον ὁ λόγος εἴη, εἰ τά τε ὑπάρχοντα σῴζειν παραινοίην καὶ 

ἀνδρῶν BapBdpwv.— 6. οὐ προσήκοντα: 
that does not concern us. 

καίτοι: anticipating the objection 
(see on 4. 18. 5) that he speaks from 
personal motives: these would rather 
lead to the opposite advice; the orator 

will nevertheless (ὅμως δέ 11), as here- _ 

tofore, speak solely acc. to conviction. 
— τιμῶμαι ἐκ τοῦ τοιούτου : cf. 5. 16. 
4 τιμᾶσθαι ἐκ τοῦ πολεμεῖν. The refer- 
ence is to Nicias’s election as one of 
the three generals (8.10). ἐκ τοῦ τοιού- 
του, a8 8. 51. 10, referring to something 
definite or already mentioned. — 
7. ἧσσον ἑτέρων: = ἥκιστα. See on 1. 
84.7.— περὶ τῷ ἐμαυτοῦ σώματι ὀρρωδῶ: 
the dat. with verbs meaning to fear, 
be concerned about (timere de); 
otherwise rare and only in local sense. 
σῶμα of personal security, as 1.17. 2. 
—8. νομίζων : although convinced. In 
this and the following clause we have 
merely a side remark, in self-defense 
against the possible reproach of timid- 
ity (cf. 18. 81). ὅμως δέ (11), opp. to 
ἔγωγε καὶ τιμῶμαι xré., resumes the 
main thought. — ὁμοίως ἀγαθὸν πολί- 
τὴν: just as good a citizen.—9. μάλι- 
ora γὰρ... ὀρθοῦσθαι : for similar 

\ aA εν VV _A_ 9 A Ν , ὃ , 
15 μὴ τοῖς ἑτοίμοις περὶ τῶν ἀφανῶν καὶ μελλόντων κινὸουνεύειν" 

thought, cf. 2. 60. ὃ 8. For ὀρθοῦσθαι 
(subj. τὰ τῆς πόλεως) = εὐτυχεῖν, see on 
3. 37. 260.--- 11. οὔτε ἐν τῷ πρότερον 
χρόνῳ. .. οὔτε viv: parataxis, though 
the first clause is really subord. to the 
second. For similar cases of parataxis, 
cf. 10.17, 16. 10, 40. 10. --- 12. εἶπον 

᾿παρὰ γνώμην: cf. 3. 42. 29. — οὔτε viv: 

sc. λέγω, as contrarily in 1.86.7 and 
8. 40. 5 with καὶ τότε a pret. is sup- 
plied from the following καὶ νῦν and 
pres.— ἀλλὰ ἡ ἂν γιγνώσκω βέλτι- 
στα: as 8.14 ὅπῃ ἂν γιγνώσκωσιν ἄριστα. 
566 ΑΡΡ. 

18. πρὸς : against, See on 8. 48. 15. 
- τοὺς τρόπους: ways. Cf. 2. 36. 16, 
41.7. On the matter, cf. 1. 70. § 2 ff., 
where the Athenians are denominated 
παρὰ δύναμιν τολμηταὶ καὶ παρὰ γνώμην 
κινδυνευταί, while the characteristics of 
the Spartans are given as οἴεσθαι τῷ 
ἐπελθεῖν καὶ τὰ ἑτοῖμα ἂν βλάψαι. ---- 
15. μὴ τοῖς ἑτοίμοις κινδυνεύειν : not to 
hazard present possessions. The dat. as 
10. 17, 47. 12; 2. 65. 24; 4. 117. 14; 
8.45. 27. τὰ ἑτοῖμα, a strengthened 
ὑπάρχοντα, a8 1.70.16; 4.61.2, to which 
are opposed τὰ ἀφανῆ καὶ μέλλοντα of the 
distant objects of passionate desire. 



e QA »” 9 ~ , ¥ e ἢ rd 9 A 
ws δὲ οὔτε ἐν καιρῷ σπεύδετε οὔτε ῥᾷδιά ἐστι κατασχεῖν 

ἐφ᾽ ἃ appnobe, ταῦτα διδάξω. 

ee ‘\ Ν ε A a δ 3 ’ ε ’ 
Φημὶ γὰρ ὑμᾶς πολεμίους πολλοὺς ἐνθάδε ὑπολιπόντας 
καὶ ἑτέρους ἐπιθυμεῖν ἐκεῖσε πλεύσαντας δεῦρο ἐπαγαγέσθαι. 
Ἁ » » Ν ’ὔ ea Q » ’ 
καὶ οἴεσθε ἴσως τὰς γενομένας ὑμῖν σπονδὰς ἔχειν τι βέβαιον, 
at ἡσυχαζόντων μὲν ὑμῶν ὀνόματι σπονδαὶ ἔσονται (οὕτω 

Ν 9 »’ » » 9 ‘N N 3 ~ 3 ’ 
γὰρ ἐνθένδε τε ἄνδρες ἔπραξαν αὐτὰ καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἐναντίων), 
σφαλέ δέ ἰξιόχρεῳ δυνάμει. tay τὴν ἐπιχείρη- 

ἀλέντων δέ που ἀξιόχρεῳ δυνάμει ταχεῖαν τὴν ἐπιχείρη 

A Α A 
ow ἡμῖν ot ἐχθροὶ ποιήσονται, οἷς πρῶτον μὲν διὰ ξυμφο- 
ρῶν ἡ ξύμβασις καὶ ἐκ τοῦ αἰσχίονος ἢ ἡμῖν κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην 

Cf. ὅ. 118. 4, ὅ. -- 16. ῥάδια κατασχεῖν: 
cf. pdous ἄρχειν 42.8; ῥᾷστοι ἀμύνεσθαι 
4.10.15. κατασχεῖνΞ- κτήσασθαι(ϑ.}0].). 
See on 11.1, 39.12.—17. ἐφ᾽ ἃ ὥρμησθε: 
what you are striving for. Somewhat 
different is ἐπὶ ταῦτα ὥρμησθε 78. 26. 

10. For if you meet with any con- 
siderable reverse in Sicily, your ene- 
mies here will surely renew the war; 
indeed it is likely that they will unite 
with the Siceliotes if they find your 
forces divided. It is bad policy to seek 
new dominion in Sicily before we 
have firmly established our sway at 
home.— 1. φημί: emphatically put 
first in an explanation, as 39.1, 87. 
4; Dem. 2. 11]. --- γάρ : see on 88. 7.— 
ὑμᾶς, δεῦρο: universally accepted cor- 
rections of the Mss. readings (ἡμᾶς, 
δεύτερον). --- 2. ἐπαγαγέσθαι : bring upon 
you, as 5. 98. 10. 

3. τὰς... σπονδάς: cf. 5. 18,19. — 
4. af: rel. with adversative force. See 
on 1. 85. 15; 4. 17. 18.— ὀνόματι: 
merely in name, μέχρις ὀνόματος (Schol.). 
— 5. ἄνδρες : for τίνες, with intentional 
omission of name. Cf. 88. 8, 50.11; 
1,107.19; 4. 132.16. Under ἐνθένδε 
are meant esp. Alcibiades, under ἐκ τῶν 

ἐναντίων e.g. Cleobulus and Xenares 
(5. 86. § 1). — ἔπραξαν αὐτά: negotiated 
them, i.e. the relations between Athens 
and the Peloponnesians (αὐτά with all 
good Mss., not atrds). See on τἄλλα 
πρᾶξαι 8.18. ἘῸΥ αὐτά of matters under 
discussion, see on 1.1. 10.— 6. σφαλέν- 
των δέ πον ἀξιόχρεῳ δυνάμει : bul should 
you fail perchance with a considerable 
force. For same const. of dat. with 
σφαλῆναι, cl. 2.65.51. Note gen. abs., 
for greater emphasis, notwithstanding 
ἡμῖν in leading clause. See on 1.114. 
2. GMT. 850; Kr. Spr. 47, 4, 2.— 
ἐπιχείρησιν ποιήσονται: periphrasis for 
simple verb.—7. διὰ ξυμφορῶν: in 
consequence of misfortunes. —8. ξύμ- 
Baois .. . ἐγένετο : = pass. of ξύμβασιν 
ποιεῖσθαι (see on 6). — ἐκ τοῦ atoy lovos 
ἡ ἡμῖν : with less credit than to us. Cf. 
11. 23 διὰ τὸ αἰσχρόν. Steup follows 
Naber (Mnem. N.S. XIV, 824) in 
bracketing ἢ ἡμῖν, on the ground that 
Nicias could not have said in the 
Kcclesia that the Athenians at the con- 
clusion of the fifty years’ peace were in 
a discreditable condition, and sees in 

‘these words a mistaken explanation of 

ἐκ τοῦ aloxlovos.— κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην : under 





3 2 » 3 ϑ A 4 Ν δ 9 [4 ᾿ 
ἐγένετο, ἔπειτα ἐν αὐτῃ ταύτῃ πολλὰ τὰ ἀμφισβητούμενα 

» > AN > ἃ Oe 4 \ ε ’,ὔ 206, 
ἔχομεν. εἰσὶ δ᾽ οἱ οὐδὲ ταύτην πω THY ὁμολογίαν ἐδέξαντο, 

N 3 ε 5 ’,’ 3 3 ε A ¥ ~ e 
καὶ οὐχ οἱ ἀσθενέστατοι. ἀλλ᾽ οἱ μὲν ἄντικρυς πολεμοῦσιν, οἵ 

Ἁ ἃ Ν Ν 4 ¥ ε 4 , 
δὲ καὶ διὰ τὸ Λακεδαιμονίους ἔτι ἡσυχάζειν δεχημέροις σπον- 

A Ἁ 9 Ἁ ’ Ud aA 3: ¥ 9 , e “A 
dats Και αυτοι κατέχονται. ταχα αν ὃ LOWS, ει δίχα ἡμων 

᾿ 4 , 9 “A 4 \ 4 A 
τὴν δύναμιν λάβοιεν, ὅπερ νῦν σπεύδομεν, καὶ πάνυ av ξυνε- 

A Ν ~ A Ν Ὁ aA 3 ’ 
πιθοῖντο μετὰ Σικελιωτῶν, OVS πρὸ πολλῶν ἄν ἐτιμήσαντο 

»“ ν A 
ξυμμάχους γενέσθαι ἐν τῷ πρὶν χρόνῳ. ὥστε χρὴ σκοπεῖν 

> ΙΝ ‘ ‘ , “A , 3 A 4 Ἃ 
τινα αὐτὰ καὶ μὴ μετεώρῳ τῇ πόλει ἀξιοῦν κινδυνεύειν καὶ 

compulsion, defined by διὰ ξυμφορῶν and 
ἐκ τοῦ aloxlovos. Weidner (Parerga Di- 
narch. et Thue. p. 20) would reject the 
words. —9. ἔπειτα ἐν αὐτῇ xré.: inde- 
pendent sent. tacked on to rel. Cf. 
2.41.15. Kr. Spr. 59, 2, 6.— τὰ ἀμφι- 
σβητούμενα : disputed points, for which 
see 5, 35, 42. 

11. of μὲν ἄντικρυς πολεμοῦσιν : the 
Corinthians (cf. 5. 80, ὃ 2), who, after 
having an ἀνοκωχὴ ἄσπονδος with the 
Athenians (5. 32. 30), had again, at 
least in the summer of 416, been 
openly at war with them (5.115. 8 8; 
see on 7.3).— of δὲ καὶ... κατέχονται: 
esp. the Boeotians (5. 26.14) and the 
Thracian Chalcidians (7. ὃ 4).— 18. καὶ 
αὐτοὶ κατέχονται: as the Lacedaemo- 
nians ἡσυχάζουσιν, so these too refrain 
from hostilities within the conditions 
of the δεχήμεροι σπονδαί (5. 26.14). 

τάχα ἂν δ᾽: so, not τάχα δ᾽ ἄν, all 
Mss. except Laur. Cf.2.22. τάχα with 
tows to express what is quite possible, 
as 34.9, 78.15. See on 1. 77. 21.— 
δίχα: διῃρημένην eis δύο μέρη Schol. 
Cf. 100. 4; 1. 64. 6.—14. λάβοιεν: in 
the sense of deprehendere, as 33. 
18. — ὅπερ viv σπεύδομεν : just what we 
are now striving for. σπεύδειν with acc., 

as 79. 18; 1. 141. 27; 5. 16. 7.— καὶ 
wavudv... Σικελιωτῶν : they would even 
eagerly join with the Siceliotes in attack- 
ing us. For xal, see Kr. Spr. 69, 32, 18. 
For ἄν repeated, see GMT. 228; H. 
862. In view of the fact that we have 
here a stronger assertion than above 
(6), σφαλέντων δέ που. . . ποιήσονται, 
Steup, feeling the need of a word of 
intensification, suggests that παραχρῆμα 
has fallen out, before πάνυ. --- 15. ots 
++ Χρόνῳ: an alliance with whom on 
Sormer occasions they would have prized 
beyond many other things. Cf. 1.33. 8; 
8. 40. 33. 

16. χρὴ σκοπεῖν τινα αὐτά : one must 
consider these matters. For τινά thus 
used in admonitions, cf. 4.62.10. For 
αὐτά, cf. 5 above; here referring to the 
Sicilian expedition. — 17. καὶ μὴ pere- 
ώρῳ τῇ πόλει... ὀρέγεσθαι: and not 
demand that we run hazards for the ship 
of state in mid-ocean and reach out after 
another empire. Kr.’s conjecture τῇ, 
for re of the Mss., approved by Cl., 
has been almost universally adopted, 
partly because the Schol. (see below) 
seems to support the art., partly be- 
cause the second member does not add 
something new or different, as would 




> ΄Ν ¥ 9 ig ‘ ὡ » ’ 3 
ἀρχῆς ἄλλης ὀρέγεσθαι, πρὶν ἣν ἔχομεν βεβαιωσώμεθα, εἰ 
Χαλκιδῆς γε οἵ ἐπὶ Θράκης, ἔτη τοσαῦτα ἀφεστῶτες ἀφ᾽ ἡμῶν, 
» 9 ’ ’ 3 Ἁ ν \ N N\ 3 ’ 3 

ἔτι ἀχείρωτοί εἰσι καὶ ἄλλοι τινὲς κατὰ τὰς ἠπείρους ἐνδοια- 

στῶς ἀκροῶνται. ἡμεῖς δὲ ᾿Ἐγεσταίοις δὴ οὖσι ξυμμάχοις 

ὡς ἀδικουμένοις ὀξέως βοηθοῦμεν, ὑφ᾽ ὧν δ᾽ αὐτοὶ πάλαι ἀφε- 
4 3 ’ ν ’ 9 4 
στώτων ἀδικούμεθα ἔτι μέλλομεν ἀμύνεσθαι. 

be expected with re . . . καί. But 
Steup retains re, urging that a general 
statement (πόλει, a state) is quite allow- 
able here (see on 14. 10. 11), though the 
reference is plainly to Athens, and for 
te... καί, where the second member 
merely amplifies the first, citing such 
passages as 103.20; 1.132. 8.—peredpy: 
figure of a ship on the high seas, as 2.8. 
6. Schol. τῆς πόλεως ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐν τῷ 
ἀσφαλεῖ ὁρμούσης. μετενήνεκται δὲ τὸ 
ὄνομα ἀπὸ τῶν πλοίων τῶν μήπω ὠὡρμι- 
σμένων. See Smyth, Melic Poets, p. 215. 
— κινδυνεύειν : with dat., as in 9. 15. 
— 18. βεβαιωσώμεθα : subjv. (with C; 
Mss. mostly βεβαιωσόμεθαλ) after πρίν, as 
29. 7, 38.8; 8.9.3,14. Cf. πρότερον 7 
7.68.3. See St., Qu. Gr.? p. 26.—el 
Χαλκιδῆς ye xré.: Cl. suggests that after 
the preceding admonition, ‘* not to run 
hazards for the state’’ etc., we must 
supply in thought before εἰ, ‘'as we 
shall be doing.’? He makes all that 
follows one sent. dependent on εἰ, as 
the warning against ambitious foreign 
expeditions before the sway of Athens 
has been fully reéstablished at home 
is based upon the εἰ clauses, which are 
apparently hypothetical (see on 1. 88. 
8), but really set forth the situation 
not only of the unruly allies (Χαλκιδῆς 
... ἀκροῶνται) but also of the Athenians 
themselves (ἡμεῖς δὲ... ἀμύνεσθαι). Most 
editors make an independent sent. of 

ἡμεῖς δὲ... ἀμύνεσθαι, contrasting what 
is being done with what ought to be 
done.—et... ye: si quidem.—19. ἔτη 
τοσαῦτα: the Chalcidians had revolted 
from Athens along with Potidaea in 
the winter of 483-482 (1.58).— 20. κατὰ 
τὰς ἠπείρους : on the coasts of Thrace, 
Asia, and western Greece, whither acc. 
to 2.9.§4 the Athenian ἀρχή extended. 
What places Nicias had in mind is hard 
to determine (cf., however, 2. 69; 3. 
19). ---ἐνδοιαστῶς : dubia fide. Cf. 
8. 87.26; Hdt.7.174.5. For the verb 
ἐνδοιάζειν, see on 91. 19. — 21. “Eyeoral- 
ots δὴ οὖσι ξυμμάχοις : ironical δή (cf. 
54.17, 80.18, and see on 8.10.17) placed 
before the words einphasized, as δῆθεν 
1,127.2. Strictly speaking, the Iges- 
taeans were only allies of the Leon- 
tines. See App. on 6. 12. --- 22. ὑφ᾽ ὧν 
πάλαι ἀφεστώτων : for the pred. ptc. 
with force of a verbal subst., cf. ὑπὸ 
τῶν Θηβαίων ἐφεπομένων 4.96.25; ὑπὸ 
τῆς Δεκελείας πολλὰ βλαπτούσης 7.28. 25; 
διὰ τὴν Δεκέλειαν τειχιζομένην 7. 42. 10. 
See App. on 4. 68. 2.--- αὐτοί : correctly 
restored by Reiske for αὐτῶν of the 
Mss. The important thing is the an- 
tithesis in αὐτοὶ ἀδικούμεθα to ws ἀδικου--: 
μένοις. Such contrasted phrases (cf. 
οὖσι ξυμμάχοις and πάλαι ἀφεστώτων, Bon- 
θοῦμεν and ἀμύνεσθαι) are good examples 
of antithesis in the enthymeme, which 
is common in the speeches.* 





ee > A 7 ~ 
Καίτοι τοὺς μὲν κατεργασάμενοι κἂν κατάσχοιμεν. τῶν 1 

> 3 Ν , Ν A \ A 3 
δ᾽ εἰ καὶ κρατήσαιμεν, διὰ πολλοῦ γε καὶ πολλῶν ὄντων χα- 

λεπῶς ἄν ἄρχειν δυναίμεθα. ἀνόητον δ᾽ ἐπὶ τοιούτους ἰέναι 

ὧν κρατήσας τε μὴ κατασχήσει τις καὶ μὴ κατορθώσας μὴ 

ἐν τῷ ὁμοί ἱ- πρὶν ἐ ἢ Ξ Σικελιῶται δ᾽ ἂν g 
ἐν τῷ ὁμοίῳ καὶ- πρὶν ἐπιχειρῆσαι ἔσται. Σικελιῶται ν 

A . Ὁ A Ἁ «ἡ 4 Ἁ 
μοι δοκοῦσιν, ὡς γε νῦν ἔχουσι, καὶ ἔτι ἂν ἧσσον δεινοὶ 

ἡμῖν γενέσθαι, εἰ ἄρξειαν αὐτῶν Συρακόσιοι, ὅπερ οἵ Ἔγε- 
ὑ ων 46: 4 ρ ρ ΠΕΡ 

A 4 e A 9 A A \ N A » 
σταῖοι μάλιστα ἡμας ἐκφοβοῦσι. νυν μεν yap Kav ἔλθοιεν 

¥ , Ψ , > » > 5 2 8 3 
ισως Λακεδαιμονίων εκαστοι χάριτι, EKELYWS ὃ ουκ εικος αρ- 

χὴν ἐπὶ ἀρχὴν στρατεῦσαι: ᾧ γὰρ av τρόπῳ τὴν ἡμετέραν 

11. Even after a victory we could 

not hold what we had won. There 

would be no danger for us, however, if 
the Syracusans should obtain dominion 
over the rest of the Siceliotes. It would 
be best if we merely showed our 
power for a little while to the Siceliotes 
or did not go thither at all. But we 
must be on the watch against the 
Lacedaemonians, who unquestionably 
are minded to wipe out their humilia- 
tion by defeating us.—1. τοὺς μέν: 
i.e. τοὺς πάλαι ἀφεστῶτας τῶν ξυμμάχων. 
--- κατεργασάμενοι : cf. 88. 20, 86. 8. --- 
κατάσχοιμεν: Sometimes even in aor, = 
hold fast. Cf. 89.12, 86.10; 1.6.18, 91. 
9.-- τῶν δέ: 1.6. τῶν Σικελιωτῶν. For the 
thought, cf. 86. § 3.—2. διὰ πολλοῦ: 
at a distance. Cf.1.15; 2.97.10; 4.115. 
16.— 8. ἐπὶ τοιούτους ἱέναι : of hostile 
advance, as 03. 8, 82.17, 92.12, and 
freq. —4. μὴ ἐν τῷ ὁμοίῳ καί: not in 
the same condition as, but far worse 
off. For τῷ ὁμοίῳ καί, see on 8. 14. 2. 
II. 1042 a; Kiihn. 423, wn. 18. 

5. Σικελιῶται δ᾽... Συρακόσιοι : the 
sense intended here seemns to be that 
of Valla’s translation: Sicilienses, 
ut nunc saltem se habent, mihi 

videntur parum formidabiles, 
multoque minus formidabiles 
fore, si Syracusani ipsis im- 
peritent. See App.— 6. ὥς ye νῦν 
ἔχουσι: except Leontini all Hellenic 
cities of Sicily were at that time auton- 
omous.— 7. ὅπερ... ἡμᾶς ἐκφοβοῦσι : 
neut. cogn. acc. besides pers. obj., the 
very thing with which they are trying to 
Srighten us. 

8. viv: i.e. ws ye viv ἔχουσι, while 
ἐκείνως (9) stands for εἰ ἄρξειαν αὐτῶν 
Συρακόσιοι. ΟἹ. 8. 46. ὅ, 8. ---- κἂν ἔλθοιεν: 
Cf. 40.9. St.’s 
ἐπέλθοιεν iS UNNeCessary.—9. ἕκαστοι: 
only separate action of individual cit- 
ies not united by a common bond was, 
acc. to the orator, to be anticipated. 
---χάριτι: out of regard for, with gen., 
as 3. 95. 1.— οὐκ εἰκὸς ἀρχὴν ἐπὶ 
ἀρχὴν στρατεῦσαι: it is not likely that 
an imperial city would proceed against 
an imperial city. Schol. οὐκ εἰκὸς ἐπὶ τὴν 
τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἀρχὴν στρατεῦσαι rods 
Συρακοσίους Σικελιωτῶν ἄρξαντας. For 
εἰκός with inf. without ἄν, see GMT. 
415, 416, and see on 1. 81.13.—10. ᾧ 
ἂν τρόπῳ... ἀφέλωνται : supply as 
subj. οἱ Συρακόσιοι Σικελιωτῶν ἄρξαντες. 

sc. δεῦρο ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς. 





’ > A 
μετὰ Πελοποννησίων ἀφέλωνται, εἰκὸς ὑπὸ τῶν αὐτῶν καὶ 

᾿ », Ν Le) 3 “ ~ ε “A 9 ἡ ε 5» “A 
τὴν σφετέραν διὰ Tov αὐτοῦ καθαιρεθῆναι. ἡμᾶς δ᾽ ἂν οἱ ἐκεῖ 
ἝἜλλ aN A 3 λ ’ 4 3 Ἁ 9 ’ θ 

ηνες μάλιστα μὲν ἐκπεπληγμένοι εἶεν, εἰ μὴ ἀφικοίμεθα, 
3, Ν ’ > ’ Ά 4 9.59 ’ 3 , 
ἔπειτα δὲ Kai, εἰ δείξαντες τὴν δύναμιν Ov ὀλίγον ἀπέλθοιμεν . 

Ν δ Ν ,’ 4 » 4, Α ‘N “A 
τὰ yap διὰ πλείστου πάντες ἴσμεν θαυμαζόμενα καὶ τὰ πεῖ: 
Φ 9 “~ 4 4 3 A A 4 4, > ἃ 
pav ἥκιστα τῆς δόξης δόντα. εἰ δὲ σφαλεῖμέν τι, τάχιστ᾽ ἂν 
€ 4 δ “ 3 ld 3 Ἂ 9 ~ ε A 4 
ὑπεριδόντες μετὰ τῶν ἐνθάδε ἐπιθοῖντο. ὅπερ νῦν ὑμεῖς, @ 

"AG A 9 Δ ὃ Vd δ δ ξ 4 ’ θ ᾿ 
ηναῖοι, ἐς Λακεδαιμονίους καὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους πεπόνθατε 
διὰ τὸ παρὰ γνώμην αὐτῶν πρὸς ἃ ἐφοβεῖσθε τὸ πρῶτον 

Aor. subjv. here = Lat. fut. pf. For 
ἀφελέσθαι, take away, despoil, cf. ἀφε- 
λομένης νυκτὸς τὸ ἔργον 4. 184. 8; τὸ 
᾿Αθηναίων κράτος τῆς θαλάσσης ἀφελέσθαι 
8. 76. 16.—11. ὑπὸ τῶν αὐτῶν: i.e. 
τῶν Πελοποννησίων.---12, τὴν σφετέραν : 
referring to subj. of preceding clause. 
Cf. σφίσι 82. 9.---διὰ τοῦ αὐτοῦ: 
through the same means. Cf. δ᾽ αὐτοῦ 
15. 7, It seems most natural to supply, 
with the Schol., τρόπου from τρόπῳ just 
above, though διὰ τρόπου seems not to 
occur.— καθαιρεθῆναι : cf. 5.14.14 κα- 
θαιρήσειν τὴν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων δύναμιν, and 
see on 1. 77. 20. 

ἡμᾶς δέ: put first to sharpen the 
contrast: ‘*The Egestaeans want to 
frighten us with the Syracusans; these 
will rather have respect for us.’’— 
14, ἔπειτα δὲ καί: sc. ἂν ἐκπεπληγμένοι 
εἶεν. Nicias’ real wish is expressed in the 
first alternative, but the second would 
at least insure the respect of the Sicel- 
iotes. — δείξαντες τὴν δύναμιν: cf. 47. 
8. --- δι ὀλίγον : ajter a little. Cf. 5.14. 
δ; 7. 39. 18. See on 47. 10.—15. ra 
yap διὰ πλείστον. .. δόντα: Steup, 
St., Hude, and the Oxford text follow 
Rauchenstein (Philol, XXXVI, 242) 
in transposing this clause, which stands 

in the Mss. after ef δὲ σφαλεῖμεν. .. 
ἐπιθοῖντο, on the ground that it serves 
in no way to explain this latter clause 
and must be regarded as parenthetical 
if left as in the Mss., since ὅπερ must 
refer to ὑπεριδόντες ἐπιθοῖντο. For the 
sentiment, cf. Tac. Ann. 1.47 maior 
e longinquo reverentia; Agr. 30 
omneignotum pro magnifico est; 
Agr. 25 maiore fama, uti mos est 
de ignotis; Liv. 28. 44. 3 maior 
ignotarum rerum est terror,— 
διὰ πλείστου: see on 2 above.— 
πεῖραν δόντα : giving a test or proof, as 
1.188. 9.— 16. el Be σφαλεῖμέν τι: (on 
form of opt., see on 1. 38. 4, and St., 
Qu. Gr.? p. 62) presupposes εἰ δ᾽ és φανε- 
ρὸν πόλεμον κατασταῖμεν, and therefore 
is opp. to ef δι᾿ ὀλίγου ἀπέλθοιμεν, as to 
el μὴ ἀφικοίμεθα. The possibility of the 
victory of the Athenians Nicias does 
not consider, and thus leaves a break 
in his argument. — 17. ὑπεριδόντες : xa- 
ταφρονήσαντες ἡμῶν Schol. ‘Cf. 5.6.15, 

18. πεπόνθατε. .. éplerOe: (restored 
for ἐφίεσθαι of Mss.) for the asynde- 
ton, cf. 2. 60.183 dpare . . . ἀφίεσθε. 
—19. πρὸς ἃ ἐφοβεῖσθε τὸ πρῶτον : in 
comparison with what you feared at first. 



20 περιγεγενῆσθαι καταφρονήσαντες ἤδη καὶ Σικελίας ἐφίεσθε. 
χρὴ δὲ μὴ πρὸς τὰς τύχας τῶν ἐναντίων ἐπαίρεσθαι, ἀλλὰ 


Ἁ 4 , A N 4 
Tas διανοίας κρατήσαντας θαρσεῖν, μηδὲ Λακεδαιμονίους 

¥ e 4 a Ἁ . > “ A 9 ’ » 
ἄλλο τι ἡγήσασθαι ἢ διὰ τὸ αἰσχρὸν σκοπεῖν ὅτῳ τρόπῳ ἔτι 

‘ A a , . e a Ν , 3 Ν 
καὶ νῦν, ἣν δύνωνται, σφήλαντες ἡμᾶς τὸ σφέτερον ἀπρεπὲς 

εὖ θήσονται, ὅσῳ καὶ περὶ πλείστου καὶ διὰ πλείστου δόξαν 
4 A wn 9 9 Q A 9 ’ > a 
ἀρετῆς μελετῶσιν. ὥστε οὐ περὶ τῶν ἐν Σικελίᾳ ᾿Εγεσταίων 
ε “A 9 ~ a e > a > a > 39 
ἡμῖν, ἀνδρῶν βαρβάρων, 6 ἀγών, εἰ σωφρονοῦμεν, ἀλλ᾽ ὅπως 

πόλιν δι᾿ ὀλιγαρχίας ἐπιβουλεύουσαν ὀξέως φυλαξώμεθα. 

21. χρὴ δὲ μὴ πρὸς τὰς τύχας. .. 
θαρσεῖν : cf. the similar admonition of 
King Archidamus 1. 84. ὃ 3, where τύχη 
is characterized as the always uncer- 
tain element and chief stress is laid 
upon διάνοιαι. And as there διάνοιαι of 
opponents are represented as like one’s 
own, that one may not count upon 
enemies’ mistakes, so here confidence 
(θαρσεῖν) is based only upon τὰς δια- 
volas κρατῆσαι, i.e. on being superior 
to the enemy in well-considered plans. 
With this view τὰς διανοίας is not ob- 
ject (see on 1. 108. 19) but limiting 
acc. The sense of the passage is: ‘‘ You 
must not be elated at the mishaps of 
your opponents, but only when you 
have got the better of them (sc. av- 
τῶν) in your calculations and plans, 
should you be confident.’’ διάνοιαι in 
Nicias’ sense are then set forth in μηδὲ 
Λακεδαιμονίους... μελετῶσιν.---- 23. ἄλλο 
τι 4: for this elliptical const., see on 
2.16.10; 3.39.10. H.612; Kr. Spr. 
62, 3, 7; Κύμη. 587, 18.— διὰ τὸ αἱσ- 
χρόν: on account of their humiliation. 
Cf. 10.8 ἐκ τοῦ aloxlovos. On Thuc.’s 
fondness for the neut. adj. or ptc. = 
abstract noun, see Trans. Amer. Phil. 
Assoc. XXV, 75.— 24. τὸ σφέτερον 

ἀπρεπὲς εὖ θήσονται : retrieve their own 
discredit. Οἱ. 5.46.7 ἐν τῷ ἐκείνων ἀπρε- 
πεῖ. For εὖ θήσονται, cf. 1. 75. 16. — 
25. ὅσῳ: much as. Cf. 78. 5, and 
see on 1.68.11. — περὶ πλείστον καὶ διὰ 
πλείστου: in the highest degree and for 
the longest time. Cf. 1. 124.12 διὰ πλεί- 
ovos, in a longer period. 

26. doreod . . εἰ σωφρονοῦμεν : for 
a perfect parallel, cf. 3. 44. 2. On 
such brachylogy, see Steup, Thuk. 
Stud. 11, 18. — ἐν Σικελίᾳ, ἀνδρῶν Bap- 
βάρων: in disdainful rejection of an 
occasion at once far off and unworthy. 
Cf. ἀνδράσιν ἀλλοφύλοις 9. 5.—28. πόλιν 
δι᾿ ὀλιγαρχίας ἐπιβουλεύονσαν : a state 
(i.e. Sparta) under an oligarchy in- 
triguing against us. The emphasis is 
on the antithesis in the political con- 
stitution. διά with gen. to indicate the 
conditions under which a thing hap-~ 
pens, as 4. 8.39; 7.40.10, and freq. 
---ὀξέως φυλαξώμεθα: keep a sharp 
watch upon. The aor. subjv. with the 
majority of the Mss., for φυλαξόμεθα. 
Where the form of the verb does not 
remove all doubt (as ἀποστήσονται 1. 
57.21; ἀντίσχῃ 1. 65.6; εὕρωσι 8. 49. 
6; ὀφθῶσι 3. 81. 4), in most cases only 
Mss. authority can decide between 


ee ‘ a L € A_ ¢ τ᾿ S39 4 , , 
12 Kat μεμνῆσθαι χρὴ ἡμᾶς ὅτι νεωστὶ ἀπὸ νόσου peya- 1 
λης καὶ πολέμου βραχύ τι λελωφήκαμεν, ὥστε καὶ χρή- 
μασι καὶ τοῖς σώμασιν ηὐξῆσθαι: καὶ ταῦτα ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν 
’, 9 ld > > ~ ‘\ “\ e A 9 ~ 4 
δίκαιον ἐνθάδε εἶναι ἀναλοῦν, καὶ μὴ ὑπὲρ ἀνδρῶν φυγάδων 
~ 3 ’, a, Ὄ ’ ~ ’ 

5 τῶνδε ἐπικουρίας δεομένων, οἷς τό τε ψεύσασθαι καλῶς χρή- 
σιμον, καὶ τῷ τοῦ πέλας κινδύνῳ, αὑτῶν λόγους μόνον 
παρασχομένους, ἢ κατορθώσαντας χάριν μὴ ἀξίαν εἰδέναι 
A ’ 4 A , ’ ν v4 
ἢ πταίσαντάς πον τοὺς φίλους ξυναπολέσαι. εἴ TE τις 2 

See St., 

fut; indic. and aor. subjv. dependent on 'μεμνῆσθαι, or rather on a 

Qu. Gr.? p, 25 f. 

12. It would be foolish if we risked 
our strength, just recovered, for stran- 
gers whom we cannot trust, and from 
whom even under the most favorable 
conditions we should receive no proper 
thanks; or sacrificed it to the selfish 
plans of an ambitious young man not 
yet old enough to command an army. 
—1. νεωστὶ... λελωφήκαμεν : cf. 26.6. 
Away, recover, rather rare, and used 
by Thuc. with reference to sicknesses 
and grave misfortunes. Cf. 2. 49.16; 
1. 77.13.— 2. βραχύ τι: a little, some- 
what. Cf. 1. 68. 11.— Kal χρήμασι καὶ 
τοῖς σώμασιν: in such combinations 
of χρήματα and σώματα Thuc. usually 
puts the art. with both (1. 121. 12; 
2.53.7; 8.45.27, 65. 16), whereas in 
1. 141.18 the art. is omitted with both. 
Cl. suggests that the art. emphasizes 
σώμασι here as the more important 
word. For art. similarly placed with 
σώματα, cf. 1. 148.29 τήν re ὀλόφυρσιν 
μὴ οἰκιῶν καὶ γῆς ποιεῖσθαι, ἀλλὰ τῶν 
σωμάτων, and Dem. 22. 55.—3. καὶ 
ταῦτα... ἀναλοῦν: and these things 
we must consider it right to expend for 
ourselves here. ταῦτα, i.e. these recov- 
ered resources in money and men, put 
first for emphasis. δίκαιον εἶναι still 

word like νομίζειν that was before the 
mind instead of μεμνῆσθαι, with transi- 
tion from ὅτε const. toinf. ἐνθάδε put for 
esp. emphasis between δίκαιον and εἶναι. 
Cl. and Steup construe the clause as 
independent (δίκαιον sc. ἐστι) and take 
ἐνθάδε εἶναι as an adv. phrase, ‘' within 
our own sphere of action.’? See App. 
—4, φυγάδων: in his aversion to the 
Egestaeans (cf. 10. 21, 11. 27, 21. 6) 
Nicias transfers the situation of the 
Leontines to the former (cf. 8. ὃ 2; 19. 
§1). On the word, see App. — φυγάδων 
τῶνδε: without art. before rel. sent., as 
2.74.11, and freq.— 5. τὸ ψεύσασθαι 
καλῶς : καλῶς, dexterously, aS in καλῶς 
τοῦτο δρᾶν 1. ὅ. 11.---Α. τῷ τοῦ πέλας 
κινδύνῳ: αὐ their neighbor's risk. Cf. 
1.12. The sing. rod πέλας as 1. 32.16: 
2.37.12. Fordat. expressing attendant 
circumstances, cf. 85. 8. --- αὑτῶν : put 
forward with pregnant emphasis, for 
themselves, on their own part. αὑτῶν, 
Bk.’s emendation for αὐτῶν of nearly 
all the Mss., has been generally adopted. 
For the matter, cf. 22. 18 f.— 8. Evva- 
πολέσαι : correctly restored by Reiske 
for ξυναπολέσθαι of the Mss. 

εἴ τέ τις xré.: new point emphati- 
cally introduced by re. In what fol- 
lows Alcibiades is designated clearly 





» »¥ e ἃ A ean 9 ἴω Q e A 
ἄρχειν ἄσμενος αἱρεθεὶς παραινεῖ ὑμῖν ἐκπλεῖν, TO ἑαυτοῦ 

A ἣν Ἁ ’ » a ¥ 
μόνον σκοπῶν, ἄλλως TE καὶ νεώτερος ETL ὧν ἐς TO ἄρχειν, 

ὅπως θαυμασθῇ μὲν ἀπὸ τῆς ἱπποτροφίας, διὰ δὲ πολυτέλειαν 

καὶ ὠφεληθῇ τι ἐκ τῆς ἀρχῆς, μηδὲ τούτῳ ἐμπαράσχητε τῷ 
“A ᾽ , 2Q 7 3 4 ’ A “ 

τῆς πόλεως κινδύνῳ ἰδίᾳ ἐλλαμπρύνεσθαι, νομίσατε δὲ τοὺς 

’ AQ A ὃ 4 LO A \ Se ὃ 4 λ ~ Q 
TolouTovs Τα μεν ἡμοσια QOLKELY, TA OE LOLA AVAAOVY, Και 

Q A , 4 N \ a , , , 
τὸ πρᾶγμα μέγα εἶναι καὶ μὴ οἵον νεωτέρους βουλεύσασθαί 

\ 093 ’ , 
TE Και ὀξέως μεταχέειρισαι. 

enough without his name. — 9. ἄρχειν 
ἄσμενος αἱρεθείς : in contrast with 
Nicias 8.18. Aor. ptc. here on acc. of 
the reference to the conduct of Alcibi- 
ades immediately described.—10. veo- 
τερος : too young. He was born about 
450 B.c. See on 5, 43.4.—11. ὅπως θαν- 
μασθῇ μὲν κτέ.: explains τὸ ἑαυτοῦ μόνον 
σκοπῶν, the first ὅπως clause expressing 

the ultimate object of his striving (to 

be admired for the raising of fine race 
horses; cf. 15.11) without immediate 
reference to the Sicilian expedition ; 
the second indicating, and that too 
even by its well-considered order of 
words (διὰ πολυτέλειαν put forward), 
the connection with that expedition 
(but because that is very expensive, [hop- 
ing] that he may get some advantage too 
from his command). ‘' Generalships 
were usually the road to wealth.” 
Boeckh, Staatshaushaltung® I, 569. — 
12. μηδὲ τούτῳ ἐμπαράσχητε. . . ἐλλαμ.- 
πρύνεσθαι: and do not even to this man 
afford opportunity, at the risk of the 
state, to make a personal display. μηδέ 
adds the warning against Alcibiades to 
that against the Egestaeans. ἐν- in 
both verbs refers to the matter in hand 
and not to τῷ κινδύνῳ. The question is 
not of display through military glory, 

but of the satisfaction of the lust for 
ἱπποτροφία which Nicias ascribes to 
him, For similar compounds, cf. ἐν δια- 
τρίβειν 2.18.8; ἐνστρατοπεδεῦσαι 2. 20. 
10; ἐνευδαιμονῆσαι καὶ ἐντελευτῆσαι 2. 
44.5; ἐναγωνίσασθαι 2. 74. 18. ἐμπαρα- 
σχεῖν occurs also 7. 56.21, elsewhere 
only in late writers; λαμπρύνομαι in 16. 
12.— 18. τοὺς τοιούτους : people of this 
sort, after ris, as 2. 63. 10.—15. τὸ 
πρᾶγμα μέγα εἶναι: cf. περὶ μεγάλων 
πραγμάτων ϑ. ὅ. --- καὶ μὴ οἷον νεωτέ- 
ρους... μεταχειρίσαι : and not such 
as younger people may determine and 
hastily (rashly) execute. Cl., St., Bm., 
and Hude read, with Pluygers (Mnem. 
XI, 92), νεωτέρους for νεωτέρῳ of the 
Mss. The sing. between the plurals 
τοὺς τοιούτους and οὖς would be strange, 
and the const. of the dat. νεωτέρῳ with 
οἷον has no satisfactory explanation (7. 
14. 4 οἷόν τε... ἐμοί is quite a different 
const.). The pl. νεωτέρους is supported 
by the reply of Alcibiades 18. 27 ἡ 
Neuxlov . . . διάστασις τοῖς νέοις és τοὺς 
πρεσβυτέρους. Steup writes, with H. 
Stein, νεωτέρων, as nearer the Mss. read- 
ing. For βουλεύεσθαι with acc. of neut. 
pron. or adj., cf. 23.8; 1.48.10, 85. 
11. peraxeploa: used only in act. by 
Thuc, See on 1,138. 7. 


ee ἃ 9 Ve “A A 9 , “ 9 aA » Ν Ν 
Ovs ἐγὼ ὁρῶν νῦν ἐνθάδε τῷ αὐτῷ ἀνδρὶ παρακελευστοὺς 1 


2 ΄΄ Ἁ A 4 9 
καθημένους φοβοῦμαι καὶ τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις ἀντιπαρακε- 

λεύομαι μὴ καταισχυνθῆναι, εἴ τῴ τις παρακάθηται τῶνδε, 
: a A 
ὅπως μὴ δόξῃ, dv μὴ ψηφίζηται πολεμεῖν, μαλακὸς εἶναι, 
9 A 
μηδ᾽, ὅπερ ἂν αὐτοὶ πάθοιεν, δυσέρωτας εἶναι TOV ἀπόντων, 

9 , A 4 “A 
γνόντας ὅτι ἐπιθυμίᾳ μὲν ἐλάχιστα κατορθοῦται, προνοίᾳ δὲ 

A 9 95ε N ~ ’ ε ’ A “Ὁ ἃ 
πλεῖστα, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὲρ τῆς πατρίδος, ὡς μέγιστον δὴ τῶν πρὶν 
», 9 ’ 3 ~ A 4 A 
κίνδυνον ἀναρριπτούσης, ἀντιχειροτονεῖν Kat ψηφίζεσθαι τοὺς 
μὲν Σικελιώτας οἷσπερ νῦν ὅροις χρωμένους πρὸς ἡμᾶς, οὐ 

18. In opposition to this man and 
his youthful following, I beg you 
earnestly for the good of the father- 
land to vote against this dangerous 
enterprise, and let the Siceliotes settle 
their affairs for themselves; especially 
to declare to the Egestaeans that as they 
began the feud with the Selinuntians 
without us, so they may fight it out 
without us; and in future to avoid all 
alliances in which only sacrifice and no 
advantage can be foreseen. —1. ots: 
referring to νεωτέρους above. It would 
be hard to justify the plural here with 
νεωτέρῳ there.—t@ αὐτῷ ἀνδρὶ παρα- 
κελευστούς : urged on by the same man 
(i.e. Alcibiades) to the support of his 
plans. παρακελευστούς = παρακεκλημέ- 
vous (Schol.), as shown by the antithesis 
τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις ἀντιπαρακελεύομαι μὴ 
xré. — 3. μὴ καταισχυνθῆναι : not to be 
shamed into fear.—4. ὅπως μὴ δόξῃ 
μαλακὸς εἶναι : lest he may seem to be 
weak. Sing. on account of ris in εἰ 
clause. For obj. clause after verb of 
fear or caution, see GMT. 370. Of the 
better Mss. only Laur. reads δόξει. ---- 
ἄν: = ἐάν, as 18.34; 4.46.18, and in 
some Mss. 8.75.19. St. writes every- 
where édv.— 5. αὐτοί: i.e. the νεώτεροι 

just designated by τῶνδε (3). — δυσέ- 
potas εἶναι τῶν ἀπόντων : to be sick in 
love with; as second member depend- 
ing On ἀντιπαρακελεύομαι, and with 
resumption of the plural. δύσερως (so 
accented acc. to Herodian 1. p. 244) in 
Attic prose elsewhere prob. only in 
Xen. Oec. 12. 18 and Lys. 4. 8. Cf. 

- Eur. Hipp. 198; Theocr. 1. 85. For 

the thought, cf. Pind. P. 8. 20 ff.— 
6. κατορθοῦται : so for κατορθοῦνται of 
the Mss. (1) because neither in Thuc. 
nor elsewhere have we a certain ex- 
ample of the middle of this compound, 
and (2) because in a proverbial sent. 
of this kind the omission of ol ἄνθρωποι 
with the plural verb is strange. For 
the pass., cf. 1.120. 25; 2.65. 28; 4. 76. 
21.—7. μέγιστον δὴ τῶν πρίν : the gen. 
prob. felt as part., though the limited 
word does not belong to the sphere of 
the gen. See on ἀξιολογώτατον τῶν 
προγεγενημένων 1.1.4. Kr. Spr. 47, 28, 
10; Kiihn. 349 Ὁ, 4. — 8. κίνδυνον dvap- 
ριπτούσης : running the risk; as 4. 85. 
18, 95.5. Cf. δ. 108. 8. The figure is 
from the game of dice.—9. οἷσπερ 
viv ὅροις χρωμένους: = χρωμένους τοῖς 
ὅροις οἷσπερ νῦν χρῶνται. ----οὐ μεμπτοῖς : 
not to be found fault with (ironical). — 


A ~ Ἶ ,’ aN ἃ “A »ν λέ Q 
10 μέεμπτοις, τῳ TE. loviw κολπῳ Tapa γὴν HY τις πλέῃ, και 

΄-ᾳ- A \ , Q enw ’ 9 ε 
τῷ Σικελικῷ διὰ πελάγους, τὰ αὑτῶν νεμομένους καθ᾽ αὖ- 

τοὺς καὶ ξυμφέρεσθαι: τοῖς δ᾽ Ἐγεσταίοις ἰδίᾳ εἰπεῖν, ἐπειδὴ 

ἄνευ ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ ξυνῆψαν πρὸς Σελινουντίους τὸ πρῶ- 

4 Ν ~ 2 A Ν , “ “ 
Tov πόλεμον, μετὰ σφῶν αὐτῶν καὶ καταλύεσθαι καὶ τὸ 

15 λοιπὸν ξυμμάχους μὴ ποιεῖσθαι ὥσπερ εἰώθαμεν, οἷς κα- 

κῶς μὲν πράξασιν ἀμυνοῦμεν, ὠφελίας δ᾽ αὐτοὶ δεηθέντες 

οὐ τευξόμεθα. 

ee \ , S , ἴω » e A Q , 
Και συ. W@W πτρβυτανι, Ταῦτα, εὐΤέρ Nyce σοι Τροσῆκειν 

κήδεσθαί τε τῆς πόλεως καὶ βούλει γενέσθαι πολίτης ἀγαθός, 

10. παρὰ γῆν : for emphasis before the 
verb. With this order the nonrepeti- 
tion of ἤν τις πλέῃ With διὰ πελάγους is 
more natural.—11. τῷ Σικελικῷ : sc. 
κόλπῳ from 1. 10, though this sea is 
called πέλαγος in 4. 24. 20, 53.15. So 
we have Tuponuxdy πέλαγος 4. 24. 19; 
Τυρσηνικὸς πόντος 7. 58. 6, as well as 
Tuponuxds κόλπος 62. 7.— διὰ πελά- 
yous: i.e. through the open sea without 
touching at intervening islands. See 
on 3. 4. 20. — τὰ αὑτῶν νεμομένους : ρο8- 
sessing their own territory, as 1. 2. 6; 
2.15.13, 72.10.— Kae’ αὑτοὺς καὶ ξυμφέ- 
ρεσθαι : to settle also their differences 
among themselves. Cf. 4. 65.2 αὐτοὶ 
κατὰ σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ξυνηνέχθησαν γνώμῃ. 
12. τοῖς 8 Εἰγεσταίοις ἰδίᾳ εἰπεῖν : still 
dependent, as is also μὴ ποιεῖσθαι (15), 
On ἀντιπαρακελεύομαι. So editors gener- 
ally construe, but Steup governs εἰπεῖν 
by ψηφίζεσθαι, though he agrees that 
μὴ ποιεῖσθαι ust depend on ἀντιπαρα- 
κελεύομαι. --- 13. καὶ Evvfpav . . . Kal 
καταλύεσθαι: correlation of the depend- 
ent and leading clauses. Cf. 1. 83. 7. 
— 14, μετὰ σφῶν αὐτῶν : sarcastic repe- 
tition of ἄνευ ᾿Αθηναίων.---- καταλύεσθαι: 
to settle differences. See on 1. 81. 9.— 

15. ols: supply as antecedent τούτους or 
τοιούτους. --- κακῶς πράξασιν: faring ill. 
Cf. 75.17; 2.64.8; ὅ. 0. 86.----16. ὠφε- 
Alas δ᾽... τευξόμεθα : supply wap ὧν 
with τευξόμεθα, or possibly ὦν, depend- 
ent along with ὠφελίας on δεηθέντες (cf. 
1. 82. 28). 

14. Therefore I call upon the pryt- 
anis, as his civic duty demands, even 
though the law forbids, again to put 
the matter to a vote.—1. πρύτανι: who 
as ἐπιστάτης presided on this day. The 
full title was ἐπιστάτης τῶν πρυτάνεων. 
See Hermann, Gr. Staatsalt.6 p. 491, 
Nn. 4.— ratra: with ἐπιψήφιζε, bring 
these matters to a vote. Cf.1.87.1; 2. 
24.6; 8.15. 7.— ἡγεῖ : this form of the 
second sing. mid. is rightly preferred 
by St. (Qu. Gr.? p. 62) to ἡγῇ. Cf. 1. 
129. 16 ὑπισχνεῖ, the only other instance 
in Thuc. of this person.—ool: em- 
phatic, hence orthotone.— 2. κήδεσθαι: 
always of especially thoughtful sym- 
pathy. Cf. 76.9, 84.1.— βούλει: added 
in second clause, although the preceding 
τε looked to a dependence of both inf, 
clauses on ἡγεῖ col προσήκειν. --- πολίτης 
ἀγαθός: pregnant, u good citizen, i.ewa 
true patriot. Cf. 9. 8; 8. 42. 22,— 


ἐπιψήφιζε καὶ γνώμας προτίθει αὖθις ᾿Αθηναίοις, νομίσας, εἰ 
3 A \ 5 , Ν ἃ ’ Ν , \ Ἁ 

ὀρρωδεῖς τὸ ἀναψηφίσαι, τὸ μὲν λύειν τοὺς νόμους μὴ μετὰ το- 

5 σῶνδ᾽ dy μαρτύρων αἰτίαν σχεῖν, τῆς δὲ πόλεως βουλευσαμέ. 

9 Ν a 4 θ ΟΝ λῶ wo Aa > 4 ἃ Ἂ 

νης ἰατρὸς ἂν γενέσθαι, καὶ τὸ καλῶς ἄρξαι τοῦτ᾽ εἶναι, ὃς av 

τὴν πατρίδα ὠφελήσῃ ὡς πλεῖστα ἢ ἑκὼν εἶναι μηδὲν βλάψῃ." 
ε Ν , “ εὐ ~ \ 3 , , 

Ο μὲν Νικίας τοιαῦτα εἶπε- τῶν δὲ ᾿Αθηναίων παριόντες 

ε Q A , , Ἁ \ 93 , Ν 

οἱ μὲν πλεῖστοι στρατεύειν παρήνουν καὶ τὰ ἐψηφισμένα μὴ 

λύειν, οἱ δέ τινες καὶ ἀντέλεγον - ἐνῆγε δὲ προθυμότατα τὴν 

8. γνώμας προτίθει αὖθις ᾿Αθηναίοις : 
lay the question once more before the 
Athenians. Cf. 3.36.21. For the dat., 
ef. 1.189. 18.— 4. ἀναψηφίσαι : to put 
again to vote. Our passage indicates 
that this was illegal, although the 
same course in the Mytilenaean affair 
(3. 86. 21, 49. 1) seems to meet with 
no objection. Perhaps it had been 
made illegal in the meanwhile. — τὸ 
μὲν λύειν τοὺς νόμους : considered by 
Cl. and Steup a sort of abs. acc. (cf. 
1,141.8, 142.6; 4.62.1, 63.3), as to 
breaking the laws, and not the subj. of 
αἰτίαν σχεῖν, since Thuc. uses this only 
of persons (46. 26; 1. 89. 11, 83. 8; 
3.13.34; 4.114. 26). With this const. 
σύ must be understood from νομίσας as 
subj. of αἰτίαν σχεῖν. But it seéms 
most natural, with St., F. Miiller, and 
Widmann, to construe τὸ λύειν τοὺς 
νόμους as subj. of αἰτίαν σχεῖν (cf. Plato 
Phileb. 23 a ἡδονὴ ἄν τινα καὶ ἀτιμίαν 
σχοίη), notwithstanding the force of 
Kr.’s objection that with a change of 
subj. we should expect in the second 
clause αὐτὸς δὲ τῆς πόλεως.---μή: for μή 
with inf. instead of οὐ after a verb of 
thinking, see GMT. 685; Gildersleeve, 
A.J. of Phil. I, 49. — 5. τῆς δὲ πόλεως 
βουλευσαμένης ἰατρὸς ἂν γενέσθαι: and 

of the state that has made a decision you 
could become a physician, i.e. the decree 
of the Athenians with reference to 
Sicily is, acc. to Nicias, a disease 
which requires healing from the ém- 
στάτης as physician (cf. 5.65.7 κακὸν 
κακῷ ἰᾶσθαι), Steupconsidersris πόλεως 
βουλευσαμένης dependent on ἰατρός, a 
further example of the const. of noun 
with pred. ptc. discussed in App. to 
4.63.2. That the decree was bad need 
not be emphatically reasserted, hence 
κακῶς, found in some inferior Mss. 
after πόλεως, may be regarded as a 
gloss, though the Schol. (καὶ τῆς πόλεως 
ἰατρὸς γενήσῃ κακῶς βουλευσαμένης) Seems 
to support that reading. — 6. τοῦτ᾽ et- 
vat, Os ἂν... ὠφελήσῃ: free connec- 
tion of pers. rel. pron. with neut. 
dem. as 2. 44.4; 7.68.3. Kr. Spr. 51, 
13, 11; Kitihn. 563, 8 ἃ. Cf. 16. 15; 
2. 62. 80. --- 7. ἑκὼν εἶναι: willingly. 
For the abs., seemingly pleonastic, inf., 
see GMT. 780; Kr. Spr. 55,1,1. Cf. 
2.89.29; 4.98.14; 7.81.14. 

15. Nicias is opposed especially by 
Alcibiades. Reflections follow on the 
latter’s motives in urging the Sicilian 
expedition and on hislawlesslife, which 
later became so dangerous to the state. 
— 3. ἐνῆγε: with obj. of the thing, as 


: ’ ϑ 4 ε , 4, ~ a 
στρατείαν ᾿Αλκιβιάδης 6 Κλεινίου, βουλόμενος τῷ τε Νικίᾳ 
3 ~ “Δ \ 3 δ ¥ a “ “ Ἁ 
5 ἐναντιοῦσθαι, ὧν καὶ ἐς τὰ ἄλλα διάφορος τὰ πολιτικὰ καὶ 
9 9 A 4 3 ld \ 4 A a 
ὅτι αὐτοῦ διαβόλως ἐμνήσθη, καὶ μάλιστα στρατηγῆσαΐ τε 
3 θ A Ν aN , > λί ὃ 3 9 a) Ν Κ ὃ , 
ἐπιθυμῶν καὶ ἐλπίζων Σικελίαν τε δι᾽ αὐτοῦ Kat Καρχηδόνα 
λήψεσθαι καὶ τὰ ἴδια ἅμα εὐτυχήσας χρήμασί τε καὶ δόξῃ 
9 a A Ν 3 9 ’ ε “\ ων 9 ~ ~ 9 
ὠφελήσειν. ὧν γὰρ ἐν ἀξιώματι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀστῶν, ταῖς ἐπιθυ- 8 
10 μίαις μείζοσιν ἢ κατὰ τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν οὐσίαν ἐχρῆτο ἔς τε 
Ν ε ,ὔ Ν ἃ ¥ 4 9 \ A 
Tas ἱπποτροφίας καὶ Tas ἄλλας δαπάνας. ὅπερ καὶ καθεῖλεν 
9 N a 3 , , 9 4 ’, 
ὕστερον τὴν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων πόλιν οὐχ ἥκιστα. φοβηθέντες 4 
γὰρ αὐτοῦ οἱ πολλοὶ τὸ μέγεθος τῆς τε κατὰ τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σῶμα 
a 3 Ν δί ΑἉ A ὃ , ae θ᾽ a 9 
παρανομίας ἐς THY δίαιταν καὶ τῆς διανοίας ὧν καθ᾽ ἕν ἕκα- 

e “~ 
15 στον ἐν ὅτῳ γίγνοιτο ἔπρασσεν, ws τυραννίδος ἐπιθυμοῦντι 

1. 67.8; 2.21.20. See on 4. 21. 8.— 
4. βουλόμενος τῷ τε Νικίᾳ κτέ. : correl. 
to τε is καὶ μάλιστα (6). From the 
arrangement in the first member ἐπιθυ- 
μῶν καὶ ἐλπίζων was not to be expected 
after βουλόμενος. See on 14.2.—5. ov 
καὶ és τὰ ἄλλα διάφορος τὰ πολιτικά: 
being also in general his political oppo- 
ment, which is emphasized by the ad- 
dition of καὶ ὅτι... ἐμνήσθη. τὰ πολιτικά 
belongs to διάφορος (cf. 8.96.24 διάφοροι 
τὸν τρόπον), hence is not to be bracketed 
with Weidner (Parerga Dinarch. et 
Thuc. p. 21) as unnecessary with és τὰ 
ἄλλα. --- 6. διαβόλως : invidiously ; with 
reference to 12. 8 2. --- στρατηγῆσαι: 
ingressive.— 7. ἐλπίζων... λήψεσθαι: 
cf. 90. 82.---- Σικελίαν re... καὶ τὰ ἴδια 
ἅμα: for the correlation freq. in Thuc., 
see on 8. 102. 24.— δι’ αὐτοῦ: i.e. τοῦ 
στρατηγεῖν. Seeon 11:12.— 8. rat&a... 
ὠφελήσειν : will help his private fortunes. 
—etruxfoas: cond., in case of success. 

9. av ydp.. . ὑπὸ τῶν ἀστῶν : being 
held in high consideration by the citizens. 
For the const., see on 1. 130.3. For 

the matter, cf. 5.43.§2.—10. ἢ κατὰ 
«ον οὐσίαν : than was appropriate to his 
means. Cf. 1.76.17; 2.50.2; 5: 102.2. 
His property was considerable, but not 
more than 100 talents, acc. to Lys. 
19.52. See Boeckh, Stsh.? I, 568 £.— 
és τὰς ἱπποτροφίας : i.e. for chariot- 
racing. Cf.12.11.—11. ὅπερ: and that 
very thing, i.e. his uncontrolled dispo- 
sition and extravagant ways. 

13. τῆς... παρανομίας és τὴν δίαι- 
ταν: his personal lawlessness (self- 
indulgence).in his manner of living. 
Cf. 28.12 τὴν αὐτοῦ és τὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα 

. παρανομίαν. Note the omission of 
the art. with the second modifier (és 
τὴν δίαιταν) οἱ τῆς παρανομίας, as 55. 5. 
- 14. καὶ τῆς διανοίας. .. ἔπρασσεν: 
and the greatness of purpose in all that 
he set before himself in every matter 
wherein he was active. τῆς διανοίας is 
still dependent upon τὸ μέγεθος, and 
ὧν = τούτων ἅ. γίγνοιτο is iterative 
apt.— 15. ὡς τυραννίδος... ἀχθεσθέν- 
tes: on the ground that he was aiming at 
a tyranny, and because, though publicly 


4 a ν id 4 4 Ν “A 
πολέμιοι καθέστασαν καὶ δημοσίᾳ κράτιστα διαθέντι τὰ τοῦ 

’ 98. .9 aA > ’ 9 a 59 , 
πολέμου ἰδίᾳ ἕκαστοι τοῖς ἐπιτηδεύμασιν αὐτοῦ ἀχθεσθέντες, 

καὶ ἄλλοις ἐπιτρέψαντες οὐ διὰ μακροῦ ἔσφηλαν τὴν πόλιν. 

τότε δ᾽ οὖν παρελθὼν τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις παρήνει τοιάδε" 

“A Φ' OA 
“Kal προσήκει ἐμοὶ μᾶλλον ἑτέρων, ὦ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ἄρχειν 

(ἀνάγκη γὰρ ἐντεῦθεν ἄρξασθαι, ἐπειδή μον Νικίας καθή- 

ἃ ¥ 9 ld > a δ , 9 , , 
ψατο) καὶ ἄξιος ἅμα νομίζω εἶναι. ὧν γὰρ πέρι ἐπιβόητός 

he had managed military matters ex- 
cellently, privately they had as individ- 
uals been offended at his practices, they 
had become hostile. πολέμιοι καθέστασαν 
is inserted between the two causal 
clauses, correlated by xal (ws . 

ἐπιθυμοῦντι and δημοσίᾳ... ἀχθεσθέν- 
res), Which depend on it. Cf. 17. 9, 
68.18; 1,121.1; 4.15.6. St. takes καί 
(before δημοσίᾳ) = καίπερ and separates 
the clause ἰδίᾳ. . ἀχθεσθέντες by 
commas. But there is no reason why 
καί may not be and, the ptc. διαθέντι 
being still construed ‘as concessive. — 
16. διαθέντι : the correct reading from 
a single inferior Ms. (H.), for διαθέντα 
of the rest. See App.—17. ἕκαστοι: 
the plural arouses suspicion here where 
neither states nor groups can be thought 
of; van H.writes ἕκαστος. See on 46.20. 
— τοῖς ἐπιτηδεύμασιν αὐτοῦ : on account 
of his manner of life (cf. 28. 12). For 
causal dat. in addition to obj. dat., see 
on 4. 87. 18. --- 18. ἄλλοις ἐπιτρέψαντες: 
τὴν πόλιν is common obj. of the ptc. 
and of ἔσφηλαν. ἄλλοις refers above all 
to the successors of Alcibiades in the 
position of foremost citizen (τοῦ δήμον 
προστασία 2.65. 49). --- οὐ διὰ μακροῦ: 
as 91. 12, = δι’ ὀλίγου (see on 11. 14), 
speedily. The position of οὐ is due to 
reluctance to separate the prep. from 
its case. Cf. ws οὐ περὶ βραχέων 1. 78. 1. 

19. δ᾽ οὖν : common in resumption 
after a digression. See on 1. 8. 19.— 
παρελθὼν τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις : for dat. with 
παρελθών, οἵ. 19. 7, 82. 19, 35.7, 72. 3. 

Speech of Alcibiades (16-18) 

16. It is my right above that of 
others to be at the head of an army; 
for the magnificence of my public ap- 
pearance has often been a benefit to the 
state. Nor is it unjust if I have not 
esteemed every one my equal. People 
of my stamp may be burdensome while 
they live, but to posterity they become 
a boast. Furthermore, I manage public 
affairs as well as any other man. By 
the alliances in Peloponnesus and even 
by the lost battle of Mantinea I won 
respect for you from the Lacedae- 
monians.— 1. καὶ προσήκει ἐμοί: (the 
emphatic form of the pron. seems 
necessary as opp. to ἑτέρων) referring 
to family prestige, καὶ ἄξιος dua νομίζω 
to personal merit. As only the second 
claim is dwelt upon in what follows, 
kal. .. καὶ... ἅμα is like our ‘tas... 
so also.’? See on 72. 22, 79.1, and 4. 
64. 18.— ἑτέρων : = ἢ ἑτέροις, as 1. 85. 
6; 2.15.1, 60.24. H.648b; Kiihn. 
543, 2c.— 2. ἐντεῦθεν : from that point, 
i.e. with a personal matter. — ἐπειδὴ 

. καθήψατο: 12.§2. καθάψασθαι, at- 

ἕασκ, also 82. 2. --- 3. ἐπιβόητός εἰμι: 1 



3 “Ὁ δ ’ \ 3 ‘\ 4 , A al 
εἰμι, τοῖς μὲν προγόνοις μου καὶ ἐμοὶ δόξαν φέρει ταῦτα, TH 

δ δὲ πατρίδι καὶ ὠφελίαν. οἱ γὰρ Ἕλληνες καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν 


μείζω ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν ἐνόμισαν τῷ ἐμῷ διαπρεπεῖ τῆς Ὀλυμ- 

a . , 4 3 ’ 9 ᾿ »-ἪΝἮ 
πίαζε θέωρίας, πρότερον ἐλπίζοντες αὐτὴν καταπεπολεμῆ- 

4 ea,” J N ε Ν ~ 9 > ’ > a 
σθαι, διότι ἅρματα μὲν ἑπτὰ καθῆκα, ὅσα οὐδείς πω ἰδιώτης 

, > 9 δὲ ἃ ὃ , Ν ΄ 3 4 
TT POTEPov, EVLKNOa € Kat €UTEPOS Και τέταρτος εἐγέμνομν 

Ἁ Φ 95 9’ ~ ,ὕ , ‘4 \ δ 
καὶ τἄλλα ἀξίως τῆς νίκης παρεσκευασάμην. νόμῳ μὲν γὰρ 

Ν Ν A 9 δὲ aA 5 , Ν ὃ , 9 ε 
Τιμὴ Τα Τοίαντα, εκ O€ TOU ὁρωμένου Και υναμις αμα UTO- 

A . 9» a 93 A , ’ a » 
νοεῖται. Kal ὅσα av ἐν TH πόλει χορηγίαις ἢ ἄλλῳ τῳ 

am railed at. Cf. ἐπιβοώμενος below (28). 
—4, ταῦτα: at the end for emphasis. 

5. καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν... ἐνόμισαν: 
they formed an idea of our state even 
greater than tts actual power. The aor. 
is ingressive. Note the pleonasm in 
ὑπὲρ δύναμιν peltw.— 6. τῷ ἐμῷ διαπρεπεῖ 
τῆς... θεωρίας: neut. adj. for abstr. 
subst. = τῇ διαπρεπεῖ θεωρίᾳ μου. Cf. 2. 
61. 8 τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἀσθενεῖ τῆς γνώμης. 
— τῆς ᾿Ολυμπίαζε θεωρίας : ᾿ἊΟλυμπίαζε 
due to the usual const. of θεωρεῖν. Cf. 
θεωρεῖν és τὰ ᾿Εφέσια 3.104.175; θεωρεῖν 
ἐς τὰ Ἴσθμια 8.10.2. The date of the 
festival here mentioned must be as- 
sumed to be ΟἹ. 91 = 416 B.c. (see G. II. 
Forster, Die Ol. Sieger bis z. Ende 
des 4, Jhdts., Progr. v. Zwickau, 1891, 
p.20f.). πρότερον... καταπεπολεμῆσθαι 
is decidedly against Ol. 89 = 424, since 
the Athenians at that time had the 
upper hand of their enemies (cf. 4. 65. 
§ 4, 79.§ 2). In Ol. 90 = 420, the date 
suggested by Cl. and Grote, Lichas, 
the Lacedaemonian, was victor (5. 50. 
§ 4). As Alcibiades speaks first of his 
private life, the battle of Mantinea 
(fought in 418) could not well be men- 
tioned before the Olympic victory. — 
7. ἐλπίζοντες αὐτὴν καταπεπολεμῆσθαι: 

hoping that it had been exhausted by war 
(cf. 90.16). This hope was, even if 
thought of as lasting till 416, quite in- 
telligible in the light of 12.§ 1 and 26. 
§2.—8. καθῆκα: misi in certamen. 
Cf. Isocr. 16. 84. --- ἰδιώτης : as opp. to 
a βασιλεύς or πόλις. --- θ. δεύτερος καὶ 
τέταρτος ἐγενόμην : in the Euripidean 
ἐπινίκιον (apud Plut. Alcib. 11) we read 
ἅρματι πρῶτα δραμεῖν καὶ δεύτερα καὶ 
τρίτα, and in Isocr. l.c. ὦστε καὶ πρῶτος 
καὶ δεύτερος γενέσθαι καὶ τρίτος. Possibly 
the deviation in our passage from these 
statements may be due to corruption in 
the text,— though, if so, the corrup- 
tion antedated Plutarch’s time, — to be 
remedied by changing τέταρτος to rpl- 
ros or by inserting καὶ τρίτος before καὶ 
rérapros.—10. radAa.. . παρεσκενασά- 
μὴν: for particulars, see Isocr. l.c., Plut. 
Alcib. 12, and Athen. 1. 8 Ε.--νόμῳ: 
according to custom.— 11. τυμῆ: 50. ἐστι. 
In the thought the clause νόμῳ... 
τοιαῦτα is subord. to the second mem- 
ber, which alone contains proof for of 
Ἕλληνες καὶ ὑπὲρ' δύναμιν xré. (5£.). See 
on 9.11. ---Οπἰκ δὲ τοῦ δρωμένου... ὗπο- 
νοεῖται: and from that which is done an 
impression of power also is gained. 

12. ὅσα... λαμπρύνομαι : in whatever 




λαμπρύνομαι, τοῖς μὲν ἀστοῖς φθονεῖται φύσει, πρὸς δὲ τοὺς 

» ἃ 9 3 ἃ ,’ὕ Ν 9 ¥ σῷ" ε 
ξένους καὶ αὕτη ἰσχὺς φαίνεται. καὶ οὐκ ἄχρηστος ἠδ᾽ ἡ 

¥ ἃ A A ἰδί “λ Ἁ ε Ν ’ Ἰλλὰ ᾿ 
ἄνοια, OS ἂν τοις LOLOLS τέλεσι μὴ EaUTOY μόνον, ἀλλα. και 

τὴν. πόλιν ὠφελῃ, οὐδέ γε ἄδικον ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτῷ μέγα φρονοῦντα 

, » 5 3 Ν Ne A , \ 50. 2 A 
μὴ ἴσον εἶναι, ἐπεὶ Kal ὁ κακῶς πράσσων πρὸς οὐδένα τῆς 

ξυμφορᾶς ἰσομοιρεῖ- ἀλλ᾽ ὥσπερ δυστυχοῦντες οὐ προσαγο- 

A Ν A 
ρευόμεθα, ἐν τῷ ὁμοίῳ τις ἀνεχέσθω καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν εὐπραγούντων 

ε , A NY , Ve A 9 , 
ὑπερφρονούμενος, ἢ Τα LOA νέμων TA OMOLA ἀνταξιούτω. οἶδα 

‘ δ . 9 » 
δὲ τοὺς τοιούτους, καὶ ὅσοι ἕν τινος λαμπρότητι προέσχον, 

respects I distinguish myself (cf. ἐλ- 
λαμπρύνεσθαι used by Nicias 12. 18). 
This furnishes the subj. of φθονεῖται. 
—138. τοῖς ἀστοῖς : for dat. of agent 
with pass., see on 8. 64. 15, and Steup, 
Thuk. Stud. II, 55 f., C. F. Smith, 
Trans. Amer. Phil. Assoc. XXV, 71 f. 
— 14. καὶ αὕτη : this too, i.e. as well 
as the Olympic θεωρία. The pron. is 
assimilated in gen. and number to the 
pred. — ἥδ᾽ ἣ ἄνοια : so with M alone of 

’ the better Mss. for ἡ διάνοια. That ἄνοια 

is correct is shown not only by the 
context but also by the Schol. elpwvev- 
eras λέγων ὅτι, εἰ καὶ ἀνόητος φαίνομαί 
τισιν, ἀλλ᾽ οὖν τῇ πόλει οὐκ ἄχρηστός ἐστί 
μου ἡ ἄνοια, and by the repetition in 
17. 1 ἡ ἐμὴ νεότης καὶ ἄνοια. Even 
though Nicias did not use the word in 
12. § 2, it was clearly implied there.— 
4 ἄνοια͵ ὅς ἄν: for the loose connec- 
tion of the rel., see on 14. 6 and cf. 7. 
68.3.—15. τέλεσι : = δαπάναις (Schol.). 
Cf. 4. 60. 12. 

16. οὐδέ ye ἄδικον xré.: blunt ex- 
pression of aristocratic self-assertion, 
and it is not unfair that one who has a 
great opinion of himself is not on an 
equality, etc. —17. ph ἴσον εἶναι: as 
ἰσομοιρεῖ (18) rather of view or feeling 

than of actual condition: the one does 
not consider himself on an equality, 
the other does not claim to share his 
misfortune with others. —18. ὥσπερ 
δυστυχοῦντες οὐ προσαγορενόμεθα: as 
when pursued by fate we are not spoken 
to, i.e. our society is avoided. δυστυ- 
χοῦντες iS stronger than κακῶς πράσ- 
govres, the latter of a transitory stage, 
the former of persistent pursuit by 
τύχη. Thesense here assumed for προσ- 
αγορευόμεθα 18 so natural that neither 
Kr.’s προσηγορεύμεθα nor Madvig’s προσ- 
αρκούμεθα Would be an improvement. 
— 20. ὑπερφρονούμενος : for the suppl. 
pte. with ἀνεχέσθω, cf. 1. 77.18; 2. 
74. 8: 5. 69. 8. GMT. 879; H. 988. --- 
71... ἀνταξιούτω: the stress is on ra 
ἴσα νέμων: otherwise (n = εἰ δὲ μή) let 
him give equality and then claim the like 
in turn. ἀνταξιοῦν elsewhere only in 
post-classical writers. See App. on 
4. 80. 4. 

21. τοὺς τοιούτους: i.e. men of my 
spirit; perhaps not without parodying 
reference to 12. 14, since it is the same 
persons that are represented, there in 
the worst, here in the best light. — καὶ 
ὅσοι: and all others that. Cf. 71. 16, 
76.14; 1.95. 8. ---- τινος : sc. πράγματος 




3 A A 9 3 ‘ ’ λ “ ¥ A ε 4 

ἐν μὲν τῷ κατ᾽ αὐτοὺς βίῳ λνπηρους οντας, τοῖς ομοίοις 
δ 4 » λῚ ἃ A ¥ 4 ~ Ν 

μὲν μάλιστα, ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ξυνόντας, τῶν δὲ 

» 3 ’ ig ’ 4 ‘ ‘ ᾽ν > 
ἔπειτα ἀνθρώπων προσποίησίν τε Evyyeveias τισὶ καὶ μὴ οὖ- 

λ 4 \ 4 a εν (ὃ , ¥ 
25 σαν κατα LTOVTAS, Και ἧς ἂν WOL TATPLOOS, Ταντῃ αὐυχήῆσιν, 

ε 9 \ 9 , 5.39 ε , 3 > ε ἃ 4 
ὡς οὐ περὶ ἀλλοτρίων οὐδ᾽ ἁμαρτόντων, GAN ὡς περὶ σφετέ 

Ν ΔῊΝ Ud κι > Ἁ > 4 ἃ ὃ δ 
ρων τε καὶ καλὰ πραξάντων. ὧν ἐγὼ ὀρεγόμενος καὶ διὰ 

» δ 3 ’ Ἁ 4 A ¥ ~ 
ταῦτα τὰ ἴδια ἐπιβοώμενος Ta δημόσια σκοπεῖτε EL TOU χεῖρον 

,ὔ ’,ὔ Ν Ν ’ ’ 
μεταχειρίζω. Πελοποννήσου yap τὰ δυνατώτατα ξυστήσας 

80 ἄνευ μεγάλου ὑμῖν κινδύνου καὶ δαπάνης Λακεδαιμονίους ἐς 

’ ε , , b 4 Ν a) e 4, 9 
μίαν ἡμέραν κατέστησα ἐν Μαντινείᾳ περὶ των ἀπάντων ἀγω- 

, 3 a νι 4 ‘a , 90. 9 Ἁ A 
νίσασθαι: ἐξ ov καὶ περιγενόμενοι TH μάχῃ οὐδέπω καὶ νῦν 

βεβαίως θαρσοῦσιν. 

ee Ν A e 3 A 4 \, » δ ’ ὃ A 
Kat ταῦτα ἡ ἐμὴ νεότης Kal ἄνοια Tapa φύσιν δοκοῦσα 

(Schol.).— 22. ἐν τῷ κατ᾽ αὐτοὺς Bly: 
in their own ἰἰϊείϊηιοα. ---- ἀυπηρούς : give 
offense, excite envy. ΟἿ. 1. 76.5, 99. 4. 
For the thought, cf. 2. 45. ὃ 1.--- 
28. ξυνόντας : so long as they are with 
them, cum versentur cum eis(Pp.). 
The word seems unnecessary and is 
suspected by Steup to be a gloss.— 
τῶν... ἀνθρώπων: part. gen. depend- 
ent on τισι. ----24, προσποίησιν Evyye- 
νείας : claim of kinship. — καὶ μὴ οὖσαν : 
even when not existing, the ptc. agreeing 
formally with προσποίησιν, but in sense 
with gvyyevelas. St. and Steup write ov- 
ons.— 25. αὔχησιν : exulting pride, i.e. 
occasion for boasting. The word only 
here in Thuc.; elsewhere only in post- 
classical writers. Cf. αὔχημα 2.62.28; 
7. 66. 15, 75.37; αὐχεῖν 2. 39. 18. --- 
26. ws οὐ περὶ ἀλλοτρίων : for ὡς περὶ οὐ 
from reluctance to separate the prep. 
from its case. Cf. 1.78.1. 

27. ὧν: neut. (as διὰ ταῦτα shows), 
summing up what precedes, i.e. a posi- 
tion like this, which in life excites 

envy, but after death admiration. — 
28. τὰ ἴδια ἐπιβοώμενος : assailed in my 
private life. Cf. 3 above.— 29. pera- 
xepl{w: doubtless intentional repeti- 
tion of Nicias’ word in 12. 16.— Iledo- 
ποννήσον τὰ δυνατώτατα: i.e. Argos, 
Mantinea, and Elis.— 80, ὑμῖν: note 
the emphatic position, as 1. 47.5; 3. 
61.7; 7. 78. 26.—és μίαν ἡμέραν. . . 
ἀγωνίσασθαι: and upon a single day I 
forced the Lacedaemonians to stake all 
at Mantinea. és μίαν ἡμέραν, under the 
influence of κατέστησα for ἐν μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ, 
which v. H. would write. Cf. 4.89.6; 
8.67.5. For κατέστησα with inf., cf. 
2. 84. 24.— 31. ἐν Μαντινείᾳ: 5. 66 ff. 
— 32. καὶ περιγενόμενοι τῇ μάχῃ: Lhough 
victorious on the field (418 B.c.). — οὐ- 
δέπω καὶ viv: i.e. after three years, 
17. Use both my fresh young vigor 
and the tried luck of Nicias, and do 
not abandon the Sicilian expedition 
out of baseless fear. We shall not have 
there to contend with a great power; 
besides, against the Syracusans we 




4 9 N λ ᾿ ’, ὃ ,ὕ , , 
ειναῖὶ ἐς THY Ile OTOVVNO LWV υναμιν λόγοις TE πρέπουσιν 

ὠμίλησε καὶ ὀργῇ πίστιν παρασχομένῃ ἔπεισε: καὶ νῦν μὴ 

πεφόβησθε αὐτήν, ἀλλ᾽ ews ἐγώ τε ἔτι ἀκμάζω μετ᾽ αὐτῆς καὶ 

e , 3 Ν “~ » > ’ ~ e , 
O Νικίας εἐντυχὴς δοκεῖ εἰναι. ἀποχρήσασθε TH εκατέβου 

€ ~ > 4 Ν Ν 3 ᾿ ’, A Ἁ 
ἡμῶν ὠφελίᾳ. καὶ τὸν ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν πλοῦν μὴ μεταγι- 

γνώσκετε ὡς ἐπὶ μεγάλην δύναμιν ἐσόμενον. ὄχλοις τε γὰρ 

ξυμμείκτοις πολυανδροῦσιν αἱ πόλεις καὶ ῥᾳδίας Evo ῶ 
μμ ς ροῦ ἱ ς καὶ ῥᾳδίας ἔχουσι τῶν 

πολιτῶν τὰς μεταβολὰς καὶ ἐπιδοχάς. καὶ οὐδεὶς δι᾽ αὐτὸ ὡς 

shall find allies in the Sicels. And for 
the enemies whom we leave behind 
here, we shall be more than a match 
by reason of our fleet.—1. καὶ ταῦτα 
... €maoe: thus did my youthful folly, 
which is thought to be abnormal, deal 
with (consort with) the power of the 
Peloponnesians in fitting words and with 
an impetuosity that inspired fuith win 
assent. This is substantially St.’s ren- 
dering; for Cl.’s and Steup’s views, 
see App.— ταῦτα: cognate acc. with 
wpulryynoe (= ταύτην τὴν ὁμιλίαν ὡμίλησε, 
cf, 2.37.14 τὰ ἴδια προσομιλοῦντες), as 
with ἔπεισε. --- παρὰ φύσιν δοκοῦσα 
εἶναι: i.e. transcending the bounds of 
even youthful folly.— 2. ἐς τὴν Πελο- 
ποννησίων δύναμιν: either (1) the power 
of the Peloponnesians in general, i.e. 
the Lacedaemonian power as well as 
the confederacy, or (2) the states re- 
_ ferred toin 16.29 Πελοποννήσον τὰ δυνα- 
τώτατα. For δύναμις, cf. 2. 7. 7 ὅσοι 
ἦσαν ἐκτὸς τῆς ἑαυτῶν δυνάμεως. --- λόγοις 
“πρέπονσιν: i.e. suitable to the occasion. 
— 3. ὀργῇ πίστιν παρασχομένῃ: Kr.’s 
correction, with three good Mss., 
adopted by most editors for the Vulg. 
παρασχομένη.---4. πεφόβησθε: necessary 
correction of Reiske for πεφοβῆσθαι of 
the Mss. — αὐτήν : i.e. τὴν ἐμὴν νεότητα 
καὶ ἄνοιαν.---ὅ. ὁ Νικίας εὐτυχής : cf. 

5.16.4; 7. 717.1.--- ἀποχρήσασθε: make 
the most of. Cf. 1.68.20; 7.42. 27. 

6. μὴ μεταγιγνώσκετε: as 8. 40. 5.— 
7. ὄχλοις... ξυμμείκτοις : with motley 
crowds, i.e. of various race and so 
without community of feeling or inter- 
ests.— ὃ. πολνανδροῦσιν : swarm with 
inhabitants. ‘The word found elsewhere 
only in late writers. — τῶν πολιτῶν τὰς 
μεταβολὰς καὶ ἐπιδοχάς : πολιτῶν of E 
with Stahl, Steup, Hude, and the Ox- 
ford text, for πολιτειῶν of the rest of 
the Mss., which fits neither with ἐπιδο- 
χάς (which can only mean the reception 
of something additional) nor with the 
foll. sent., which clearly looks only to 
inhabitants here. Cf.1.2.12 μάλιστα τῆς 
γῆς ἡ ἀρίστη αἰεὶ τὰς μεταβολὰς τῶν οἰκη- 

τόρων εἶχεν. ἐπιδοχάς only here in Thuc. 

9. Sv adrd: on this account, i.e. (the 
idea of the preceding sent.) because 
of mixed population and easy changes 
of condition. — ὡς περὶ οἰκείας πατρί- 
Sos: as for his own fatherland, such con- 
ditions not tending to rouse a true 
fatherland-feeling. The order — for 
one would expect these words after 
οὔτε ---- ἰδ. prob. due to the fact that 
the correlating of τὰ περὶ τὸ σῶμα and 
τὰ ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ was an afterthought. 
Some editors take οὐδείς zeugmatically 
with the second οὔτε clause = no state. 



10 περὶ οἰκείας πατρίδος οὔτε τὰ περὶ τὸ σῶμα ὅπλοις ἐξήρτυται 


οὔτε τὰ ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ νομίμοις κατασκευαῖς: 6 τι δὲ ἕκαστος 

ἢ ἐκ τοῦ λέγων πείθειν οἴεται ἢ στασιάζων ἀπὸ τοῦ κοινοῦ 

λαβὼν ἄλλ ἣν, μὴ θώ ἱκή ὕτα ἑτοιμάζ 
ν ἣν γὴν; μὴ κατορθωσας, οἰκήσειν, ταυτα ἐτοιμαζε- 

Ἁ 9 > ON ἃ les 9 ¥ , os ’ 
ται. καὶ οὐκ εἰκὸς τὸν τοιοῦτον ὄμιλον OUTE λόγον μιᾳ γνώμῇῃ 4 

9 “~ » 9 \ sy» “A a “ +e) e 
ἀκροᾶσθαι οὔτε ἐς τὰ ἔργα κοινῶς τρέπεσθαι. ταχὺ δ᾽ ἂν ὡς 

4 ¥ se N ’ A ¥ 
ἕκαστοι, εἴ τι καθ᾽ ἡδονὴν λέγοιτο, προσχωροῖεν, ἄλλως TE 

\ 9 ’ ν 4 ‘ ᾽ν 9 9 © aA 
καὶ εἰ στασιάζουσιν, ὥσπερ πυνθανόμεθα. Kat μὴν οὐδ᾽ ὅπλ: 

¥ 39 ? 9 A ¥ εν 9 
TOL OUT ἐκείνοις ὁσοιπερ κομποῦνται, οὔτε OL ἄλλοι EAANVES 

But οὐδείς must unquestionably mean 
the same for both clauses, and that in- 
dividual persons are meant is proved 
not only by the expression τὰ περὶ τὸ 
σῶμα, but also by ἕκαστος (of the foll. 
sent.), which is the positive antithesis 
to the negative here.—10. τὰ περὶ rd 
σῶμα: in matters pertaining to personal 
protection.—téfprurar: placed between 
its two dependent clauses. Cf. 15. 16. 
For the sense of the passage, cf. 1. 80. 
10 καὶ rots ἄλλοις ἅπασι ἄριστα ἐξήρτυνται, 
πλούτῳ τε ἰδίῳ καὶ δημοσίῳ xré.— 11. vo- 
μίμοις κατασκεναῖς: with regular (or 
proper) equipments, buildings etc. 
The Schol. explains νομίμοις by οὐ ταῖς 
νομιζομέναις, ἀλλὰ ταῖς ἱκαναῖς - 
νόμιμον ῥήτορα τὸν ἱκανὸν καὶ νόμιμον ἀθλη- 
τήν φαμεν. St. and Cl. adopt the emen- 
dation of Dukas — μονίμοις, permanent. 
—6 τι δὲ... ταῦτα ἑτοιμάζεται: but 
whatever each man thinks that he can 
obtain from the common stock by per- 
suasive speech or by sedition, and settle 
with it elsewhere, in case of failure, that 
he provides for himself. ‘* The obscurity 
of the latter part of the sentence arises 
from the principal idea being expressed 
by the participle and the subordinate 
idea by the verb’’ (Jowett). ἐκ τοῦ λέγων 

οὕτω καὶ 

πείθειν (lit. ‘from persuading byspeech’) 
is parallel to στασιάζων. The reference 
is to colonization in consequence of 
popular decree or of sedition. For the 
epanaleptic ταῦτα in plural after the col- 
lective 8 τι, cf. Xen. Cyrop. 1.6.11 8 τι 
δ᾽ ἂν πρὸς τοῖς εἰρημένοις λαμβάνῃ Tis, ταῦτα 
τιμὴν νομιοῦσι. Υ. ὅργ. ὅ8,4,ὅ. See App. 

14. τὸν τοιοῦτον ὅμιλον : a rabble of 
this kind. For Thuc.’s use — 16 times 
in all —of the Ionic and poetic ὅμελος, 
see C. F. Smith, Trans. Amer. Phil. 
Assoc. XXXI, 80.—15. ὡς ἕκαστοι: 
severally. See on 1. 8. 19. --- 16. εἴ τι 
καθ᾽ ἡδονὴν λέγοιτο: i.e. by Athenian 
ambassadors. — προσχωροῖεν : 80. ἡμῖν. 

17. καὶ μὴν... ὠπλίσθη : the whole 
section, suspected by Cl. on the ground 
that it has nothing to do with the 
matter in hand, is bracketed by Steup 
and Miiller. See App. It is generally 
agreed that it is at least an observation 
of Thuc. rather than of Alcibiades, 
who could hardly use ἐν τῷδε τῷ πολέμῳ 
when there had been at least a nominal 
peace for six years.— 18. οὔτ᾽ ἐκείνοις 
ὅσοιπερ κομποῦνται, οὔτε of ἄλλοι “EA- 
Anves xré.: parataxis, though the second 
is really subord. to the first. — xop- 
ποῦνται: only here in Thuc., and rare 




, A ” 9 -¥ A 9 “ 3 4 
διεφάνησαν τοσοῦτοι ὄντες ὅσους ἕκαστοι σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ἠρίθ- 
20 μουν, ἀλλὰ μέγιστον δὴ αὐτοὺς ἐψευσμένη ἡ Ἑλλὰς μόλις 
9 A “A , e A e , , 3 a 93 i 
ἐν τῷδε τῷ πολέμῳ ἱκανῶς ὠπλίσθη. τά τε οὖν ἐκεῖ ἐξ ὧν 

A Ν 
ἐγὼ ἀκοῇ αἰσθάνομαι τοιαῦτα καὶ ἔτι εὐπορώτερα ἔσται (βαρ- 
’ Ν “ σν͵ A , a 
βάρους [τε] yap πολλοὺς ἕξομεν οἱ Συρακοσίων μίσει Evve- 
θ , 3 a ‘ \ 3 θ (ὃ 3 3 λ , a ε A 
πιθήσονται αὐτοῖς), καὶ Ta ἐνθάδε οὐκ ἐπικωλύσει, ἢν ὑμεῖς 
9 “A , e δ ’ ‘e “A “ 9 “ ’ 
ὀρθῶς βουλεύησθε. οἱ γὰρ πατέρες ἡμῶν τοὺς αὐτοὺς τού- 
τους οὕσπερ νῦν φασι πολεμίους ὑπολιπόντας ἂν ἡμᾶς πλεῖν 
N 4 ν ἰὴ 3 θ ‘ ¥ ᾽ν 9 ᾿ν 9 , 
καὶ προσέτι Tov Μῆδον ἐχθρὸν ἔχοντες τὴν ἀρχὴν ἐκτή- 
aA “Ὁ A A 
σαντο, οὐκ ἄλλῳ τινὶ ἢ τῇ περιουσίᾳ τοῦ ναυτικοῦ ἰσχύ- 

‘ A ¥ > / a A , 
οντες" Kal νῦν ouvTE ἀνέλπιστοί πω μᾶλλον Πελοποννήσιοι 
aA ¥ Ἁ ’, » A 
ἐς ἡμᾶς ἐγένοντο, εἴ TE Kal πάνυ ἔρρωνται, TO μὲν ἐς THY γῆν 

in prose. Cf. κόμπος 2. 40. 8, 41.5; 
κομπώδης 2.62.7; ὅ. θ8. 6. --- 20. μέγι- 
στον: cogn. acc. with ἐψευσμένη. 

22. ἔτι εὐπορώτερα: explained by 
the parenthetical sent. (βαρβάρους. .. 
αὐτοῖς). --- βαρβάρους [τε] yap πολλούς : 
i.e. many Sicels. Cf. 88. § 8 ff.; 3. 
103.§1. Haacke was the first to bracket 
the inexplicable re.— 24. ἐπικωλύσει: 
rare word. Cf. Xen. Oec. 8.4; Soph. 
Phil. 1242. 

25. of yap πατέρες . . . THY ἀρχὴν 
ἐκτήσαντο : the stress is on καὶ προσέτι 
τὸν Μῆδον ἐχθρὸν ἔχοντες, the argument 
being that the Athenians had at the 
time when they acquired their suprem- 
acy a foreign as well as a domestic 
foe.— 26. φασι: i.e. Nicias and his fol- 
lowers. — ὑπολιπόντας : the Mss. ABE 
give ὑπολείποντας, which Bk. and Cl. 
adopt, but most of the rest rightly adopt 
the aor. Cf. 36.13; 8.82.8; and esp. 
10. 1, to which our passage refers. 

29. καὶ viv: paratactically corre- 
lated with οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν. Cf. καὶ νῦν 
above (8). The argument is: ‘as our 

fathers established their sway even 
against a double enemy, so our enemies 
havenothingserious to hope(wenothing 
material to fear); irruptionsinto Attica 
they may still make without great harm 
to us.’— οὔτε ἀνέλπιστοι . . . ἐγένοντο: 
never were the Peloponnesians more hope- 
less against us. ἀνέλπιστοι act. as 8. 30. 
6; 8.1.15. Cf. τὸ ἀνέλπιστον 2. 51. 18. 
Elsewhere in Thuc. pass. 38. 22; 4. 55. 
8. Kr. suggests that the passive force 
would suit the sense better, — ‘and so 
even now the Peloponnesians were 
never less to be expected against us,”’ 
— but that contradicts the foll. remark 
that nothing stands in the way of their 
irruptions by land. — 30. εἴ re: correl. 
to ovre. The argument is: ‘on the one 
hand, they never had less hope against 
us; on the other, even if they are ever 
so confident, they can do no consider- 
able harm.’ In the paratactic arrange- 
ment (τὸ μὲν... ἐσβάλλειν... ἱκανοί εἰσι, 
τῷ δὲ ναυτικῷ... βλάπτειν) the stress is 
on the second clause.—éppevrar: in 
moral sense. See on 2. 8. 1.--- τὸ μὲν 


e ~ 9 (λλ A \ 9 λ ’ ε 4 5 “A de 
ἡμῶν ἐσβάλλειν, κἂν μὴ ἐκπλεύσωμεν, LKAVOL εἰσι, τῷ OE VAT- 

A 4 A ὃ , Br , e aN \ ς A 3 

9 ’ td 
ἀντίπαλον ναυτικόν. 

ey a, , 2 A a 9 \ 5» A A Ν 
Ὥστε τί dv λέγοντες εἰκὸς ἢ αὐτοὶ ἀποκνοῖμεν ἢ πρὸς 
τοὺς ἐκεῖ ξυμμάχους σκηπτόμενοι μὴ βοηθοῖμεν ; οἷς χρεών, 
ἐπειδή γε καὶ ξυνωμόσαμεν, ἐπαμύνειν, καὶ μὴ ἀντιτιθέναι 

ν 2QN 39 OA e A 3 Ν ν ὃ A 9 A 
ὅτι οὐδὲ ἐκεῖνοι ἡμῖν. οὐ yap ἵνα δεῦρο ἀντιβοηθῶσι προσε- 

θέμεθα αὐτούς, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα τοῖς ἐκεῖ ἐχθροῖς ἡμῶν λυπηροὶ ὄντες 

... ἐσβάλλειν : to be taken as accus. of 
specification with ἱκανοί, as τὸ μὲν προσ- 
ταλαιπωρεῖν With πρόθυμος 2. 53. 9. 

18. There is, therefore, no reason 
for not fulfilling our treaty obligations 
to our Sicilian allies. Nor can we, if 
we would remain an imperial state, 
refrain from the expedition. Let us 
go, then, not only that we may abase 
the arrogance of the Peloponnesians, 
but also that we may either by the 
subjugation of Sicily win empire over 
all Hellenes or at least injure the 
Syracusans. Do not let yourselves be 
deterred by Nicias’ advice, but in the 
spirit of your fathers allow scope to 
every period of life, and by stirring 
activity exercise and strengthen your 
powers. For an energetic state inac- 
tivity is ruin, and holding firmly to 
customs and laws is under all circum- 
stances the greatest safety.—1. ὥστε 
τί ἂν λέγοντες... μὴ βοηθοῖμεν : what 
reasonable thing then can we say why 
we ourselves should shirk (the enter- 
prise), or to our allies there by way of 
excuse why we should refuse to aid them. 
There is something incongruous in the 
arrangement of the sent. As it stands, 
τί λέγοντες εἰκός belongs to both mem- 
bers. We should have expected in the 

second member σκηπτοίμεθα μὴ βοηθεῖν, 
but as the main idea οὗ the second clause 
is expressed in a finite verb (βοηθοῖμεν) 
to balance the main idea of the first 
(ἀποκνοῖμεν), SO σκηπτόμενοι is felt as the 
antithesis to λέγοντες, as if the first 9 
stood before that ptc.—avrol: anti- 
thetic to πρὸς τοὺς ἐκεῖ ξυμμάχους σκηπτό- 
μενοι. --- 2. μὴ βοηθοῖμεν : μή because a 
neg. answer is implied. Kr. compares 
Dem. 23. 75 πῶς ἂν δίκαια ταὐτὰ καὶ μὴ 
γένοιτο; Xen. Mem. 3.1.10 τί οὐ σκο- 
ποῦμεν πῶς ἂν αὐτῶν μὴ διαμαρτάνοιμεν; 
—yxpeov: without ἐστι as in 9; 1.77. 
13; 2.61.17; 7. 78.5.—8. ἐπειδή ye 
καὶ ξυνωμόσαμεν : especially as we have 
actually sworn to do so. For this inten- 
sive force of καί, see Kr. Spr. 69, 82, 17. 
At least with the Leontines the Athe- 
nians had a sworn treaty. Cf. 19. §1, 
and see App. on 6.12.— ἀντιτιθέναι : to 
hold against, retort, in 2.85.8 and 3. 56. 
16, with gen., to set against, contrast. — 
4. ὅτι οὐδὲ ἐκεῖνοι: Sc. ἐπήμυναν.----πτροσ- 
εθέμεθα αὐτούς : altuched them, nobis 
eos adiunximus, with accus. only 
here in Thuc., with dat. (se alicui 
adiungere) frey. Cf. 80.12; 3.11. 
20; 8. 48. 29, 87. 25.— 5. τοῖς ἐκεῖ ἐχθροῖς 
ἡμῶν: 1.6, τοῖς Συρακοσίοις, who were 
ἐχθροί, even if not in open war πολέμιοι. 




δεῦρο κωλύωσιν αὐτοὺς ἐπιέναι. τήν TE ἀρχὴν οὕτως EKTY- 2 
4 \ e A , 9 “\ ¥ 4 ’ 
σάμεθα καὶ ἡμεῖς καὶ ὅσοι δὴ ἄλλοι ἦρξαν, παραγιγνόμενοι 
’ A + i | 4 “Ὁ 3 , 
προθύμως τοῖς αἰεὶ ἢ βαρβάροις ἢ Ἕλλησιν ἐπικαλουμένοις, 
3 A ν ε ’ Ud A A e \ 
ἐπεὶ εἰ ye ἡσυχάζοιεν πάντες ἡ φυλοκρινοῖεν οἷς χρεῶν Bor- 
θεῖν, βραχὺ ἄν τι προσκτώμενοι αὐτῇ περὶ αὐτῆς ἂν ταύτης 
΄ΝΝ 4 N Ν 4 > , > ’ 
μᾶλλον κινδυνεύοιμεν. τὸν γὰρ προύχοντα οὐ μόνον ἐπιόντα 
> 4 > Ν N Α 9g 4 Ud 
τις ἀμύνεται, ἀλλὰ καὶ μὴ [ὅπως] ἔπεισι προκαταλαμβά- 
Α 9 y. e Aa 4 3 9 , 
νει, καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ἡμῖν ταμιεύεσθαι ἐς ὅσον βουλόμεθα 
¥ 3 3 93 4 3 ’ 3 “A ’ “A \ 
ἄρχειν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀνάγκη, ἐπειδήπερ ἐν τῷδε καθέσταμεν, τοῖς μὲν 

6. οὕτως : looks forward here, being 
explained by the ptc. clause rapayryvé- 
μενοι κτὲ.---Ἶ. ἦρξαν : ingressive—dpyh» 
ἐκτήσαντο.----8. τοῖς... ἐπικαλουμένοις : 
the attrib. ptc. placed after noun at- 
tended by other modifiers. See on 1. 
11.19. G. 969; Kiihn. 464, 8.— ἢ Bap- 
βάροις : referring to Nicias’. reproach 
11. 27 ᾿Εγεσταίων, ἀνδρῶν BapBdpwr. — 
9. ἐπεί: whereas. Cf. 2.51.21; 7. 80. 
8. --φυλοκρινοῖεν ols χρεὼν βοηθεῖν: 
distinguish by race whom we should aid. 
Cf. Bk.’s Anecd. I, p. 71 (referring 
prob. to our passage) κυρίως τὸ rds φυλὰς 
(perhaps τὰ φῦλα) τὰς ἐν ταῖς πόλεσι 
διακρίνειν. ---- 10. βραχὺ ἄν τι προσκτώ- 
μενοι. .. κινδυνεύοιμεν : some editors 
consider that ἄν is here not merely 
repeated (see on 4. 18. 17), but that the 
first ἄν belongs to the ptc., the second 
only to the verb. But for the thought 
one ἄν would have sufficed, since only 
the verb requires it. See on 5. 9. 16. 
-- περὶ αὐτῆς ravrns: i.e. τῆς ὑπαρχού- 
σης ἀρχῆς. --- 11. κινδυνεύοιμεν : from 
third to first: person in transition from 
general remark to special condition. 
Steup adopts Hude’s attractive con- 
jecture in 1.9 ἡσυχάζοιμεν πάντως and 
φυλοκρινοῖμεν, thus avoiding transition 

here.— 12. μὴ [ὅπως] ἔπεισι mpoxara- 
λαμβάνει: takes precaution lest he shall 
come on. GMT. 370. For προκαταλαμ- 
βάνειν, see on 1. 57.15; 8.2.15. Pp. 
was first to bracket ὅπως. Cl. thought 
μὴ ὅπως might be understood as = ὅπως 
μή, but free as Thuc. is in placing 
strongly emphatic words before the 
conjunction (see on 14. 10. 5) there is 
no parallel in Thuc. or elsewhere for 
such an inversion as μὴ ὅπως. Besides 
μὴ ὅπως elsewhere (Xen. Cyrop. 1.3. 
10), like οὐχ ὅπως, means not only not. 
Some editors (e.g. Kr., Hude) transpose 
(ὅπως μή), Others (e.g. St., Bm.) adopt 
Haacke’s conjecture μή πως. But ὅπως 
was prob. a marginal explanation 
added to μή which crept into the text. 

18. ταμιεύεσθαι ἐς ὅσον βουλόμεθα 
ἄρχειν : to calculate, reckon accurately, 
to what extent we will rule. ταμιεύεσθαι, 
a term from the counter, only here in 
Thuc., but cf. ταμίαν γενέσθαι 78. 14. 
Cf. Xen. Cyrop. 8. 8. 47 παραδόντες 
ἑαυτοὺς ἡμῖν ταμιεύεσθαι, wo’ ὁπόσοις ἂν 
βουλώμεθα μάχεσθαι. Strabo, 4. 196 c, 
prettily applies the action to the cau- 
tious warfare of the Iberians, éraplevoy 
καὶ κατεκερμάτιζον τοὺς ἀγῶνας. --- 14. ἐν 
τῷδε: Cl. remarks not merely = ἐν τῳ 



15 ἐπιβουλεύειν, τοὺς δὲ μὴ ἀνιέναι, διὰ τὸ ἀρχθῆναι ἂν vd ἑἕτέ 


ρων [αὐτοῖς κίνδυνον εἶναι], εἰ μὴ αὐτοὶ ἄλλων ἄρχοιμεν. καὶ 

9 3 ~ 9 Δ 9 ’ en A ¥ ον 9 9 
οὐκ ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἐπισκεπτέον ὑμῖν τοῖς ἄλλοις τὸ NOVYO?, εἰ 

νΝ Ἁ ΔΝ 9 ὃ , 3 x ε A λ , θ 
μὴ Kal τὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα ἐς τὸ ὁμοιον μεταλήψεσθε. 

ε κι 9 A Δ 
“Λογισάμενοι οὖν τάδε μᾶλλον αὐξήσειν, ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνα ἣν 4 

¥ 4 N a  Y¢ , 4 
ἴωμεν, ποιώμεθα τὸν πλοῦν, ἵνα Πελοποννησίων τε στορέσω- 

μεν τὸ φρόνημα, εἰ δόξομεν ὑπεριδόντες τὴν ἐν τῷ παρόντι 

ἡσυχίαν καὶ ἐπὶ Σικελίαν πλεῦσαι, καὶ ἅμα ἢ τῆς Ἑλλάδος, 

ἄρχειν (Schol.), but more pregnant ἐν 
τῷδε THs ἀρχῆς, ‘at the point of sway 
that we have reached,’’ as expressed 
also by the pf. καθέσταμεν. But that is 
implied in the Schol. ἐν τῷ ἄρχειν. --- 
15. ἀνιέναι : let go, turn loose. Though 
Thuc. does not use the verb elsewhere 
with accus. of pers., the const. is com- 
mon enough in other Attic writers. — 
διὰ τὸ ἀρχθῆναι ἂν ὑφ᾽ ἑτέρων : because 
we might come under the domination of 
others. Cf. 7.62. 8 διὰ τὸ βλάπτειν ἂν 
τὸ τῆς ἐπιστήμης τῇ βαρύτητι τῶν νεῶν. 
For the bracketed words [αὐτοῖς κίνδυνον 
εἶναι], see App.—16. καὶ οὐκ... τὸ 
ἥσυχον : and you must not regard in- 
action in the same light as others. — 
17. ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ: cf. ἐκ τοῦ ὁμοίον 78. 
24, 87.23; ἐκ τοῦ ἴσου 2. 8. 19.— ἐπι- 
σκεπτέον : cf. Schol. τὸ ἐπισκεπτέον ἀντὶ 
τοῦ ἐπιτηδευτέον τέθεικεν. The verb only 
here in Thuc. — τοῖς ἄλλοις : dat. with 
ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ. G. 1175; H. 778 a; S. 
1500.—+é ἥσυχον: neut. adj. stronger 
than the abstract τὴν ἡσυχίαν. See 
C.F. Smith, Trans. Amer, Phil. Assoc. 
XXV, 75.—el μὴ. . . μεταλήψεσθε: 
unless you will change your conduct also 
to the like. Cf. és τὸ ἴσον καθιστάναι 1. 
121.15. See on μεταλάβετε 87. 98, and 
cf, μεταλαμβάνειν, take in exchange, 1. 
120. 16. τὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα, lit. practices, 

the sum or consistent carrying out of 
which individual acts is ἐπιτήδευσις. 
See on 1.32.10; 2.37.11. 

19. τάδε: τὰ ἐνταῦθα πράγματα Schol. 
— ἐπ᾿ ἐκεῖνα : for emphasis before conj. 
See on 14, 10. 5.— 20. στορέσωμεν τὸ 
φρόνημα: the Schol. remarks τῶν παρὰ 
Θουκυδίδῃ τροπικῶν ὀνομάτων τὸ σκληρό- 
τατον τοῦτό ἐστι, ἀλλὰ κατὰ ᾿Αλκιβιάδην 
φησίν. The figure is taken from the 
stilling of stormy waves. ἐστόρεσεν δὲ 
θεὸς μεγακήτεα πόντον Hom. γ 158 (cf. 
Hdt. 7. 198. 2). Cf. στορέσαι τὴν ὀργήν 
Aesch. Prom. 190; ᾿Αθηναῖοι Μαραθῶνι 
χρυσοφόρων Μήδων ἐστόρεσαν δύναμιν (in- 
scription apud) Lycurg. c. Leocr. 109; 
sternet Poenos Gallumque re- 
bellem Verg. Aen. 6. 858; stratis, 
iam militum odiis Tac. Hist. 1.58. 
Imitations in Plut. Lucull. 5; Caes. 
25. See C. F. Smith, Trans. Amer. 
Phil. Assoc. XX XI, 75.—21. εἰ δόξομεν: 
if we shall seem, i.e. if it shall be said 
of us. — ὑπεριδόντες : see on 11. 17. — 
τὴν ἐν τῷ παρόντι HoVXlav: our present 
quiet; directed esp. against the re- 
proach of Nicias 11. 20 καταφρονήσαντες 
non καὶ Σικελίας ἐφίεσθε. What Nicias 
condemns, Alcibiadescommends. Note 
kal (even) ἐπὶ Σικελίαν here as καὶ Σικε- 
Alas there. — 22. καὶ ἅμα ἢ τῆς “EAAG- 
δος... ἄρξωμεν, ἢ κακώσωμέν ye κτὲ.: 




va) A , ¥ A 
TOV ἐκεῖ προσγενομένων, πάσης τῷ εἰκότι ἄρξωμεν, ἢ κακώ- 

, id 3 ® Ν 9 Ἁ ἘΝ ε ’ > 
σωμέν ye Συρακοσίους, ἐν @ καὶ αὐτοὶ καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι ὠφε- 

λησόμεθα. τὸ δὲ ἀσφαλές, καὶ μένειν, ἦν τι προχωρῇ, καὶ 

3 »“" ε “A ld 4 ‘\ > , Ἁ 
ἀπελθεῖν, αἱ νῆες παρέξουσι- ναυκράτορες γὰρ ἐσόμεθα καὶ 

ξυμπάντων Σικελιωτῶν. καὶ μὴ ὑμᾶς ἡ Νικίου τῶν λό 
μπάντων Σικελιωτῶν. καὶ μὴ ὑμᾶς ἡ Νικίου τῶν λόγων 

ἀπραγμοσύνη καὶ διάστασις τοῖς νέοις ἐς τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους 

3 , “Ὁ A > f- ’ ν Ἁ ε , ε Ὁ. 
ἀποτρέψῃ; τῷ δὲ εἰωθότι κόσμῳ, ὠσπερ καὶ οἵ πατέρες ἡμῶν 

still dependent on ἵνα (20). For the 
correlation re... καὶ dua, see App. on 
4.27.4. Cl.’s restoration of the subjv. 
for the fut. (ἄρξομεν and κακώσομεν) is 
approved by Steup and Hude. Most 
editors accept the future and explain it 
as anacoluthic transition to independ- 
ent const. But it seems more natural 
to continue the sentence as it began and 
express the chief goal of Alcibiades’ 
ambition as something aimed at.— 
23. τῷ εἰκότι : in all probability. Found 
only here; elsewhere Thuc. useselkérws, 
ἐκ τοῦ εἰκότος, κατὰ τὸ εἰκός.--- 24. ἐν ᾧ: 
i.e. τῷ κακῶσαι Συρακοσίους (Schol.).— 
οἱ ξύμμαχοι: i.e. the allies in Sicily. 
— ὠφελησόμεθα : fut. mid. as pass., as 
7. 67. 16. 

25. τὸ δὲ ἀσφαλές : Obj. of παρέξουσι 
and explained by καὶ μένειν, καὶ ἀπελθεῖν. 
Kr. renders (on the analogy of τὸ δὲ 
μέγιστον) what however is (or assures) 
security. Steup, satisfied with neither 
explanation, commends Gertz’s con- 
jecture τὸ δὲ ἀσφαλῶς .--- ἦν τι προχωρῇ: 
Reiske’s correction, with three inferior 
Mss., for προσχωρῇ. The question can 
only be of success in general here, not 
of the adhesion of new allies. For 
the expression, cf. 74.11; 2.5.2; and 
Sall. Jug. 35.4 sin id parum pro- 
cedat.— 26. παρέξουσι" vauxpdropes: 
Valckenaer’s correction for rapétovew- 

αὐτοκράτορες of all the Mss. Cf. 5. 97. 
5, 109.7. For gen. dependent on vav- 
κράτορες St. compares Hat. 5. 86. 11 vav- 
κρατέες τῆς θαλάσσης. 

27. % Νικίον κτέ.: the art. covers 

both ἀπραγμοσύνη and διάστασις. ---- Ni-- ᾿ 

κίον τῶν λόγων: i.e. implied in Nicias’ 
speech. — 28. διάστασις... πρεσβυ- 
tépovs: pulling the young at variance 
with the older men. The unusual dat. 
(for τῶν νέων) Kr. explains as due to 
the desire to avoid another gen., along 
with Νικίου τῶν λόγων, dependent on 
διάστασις. --- 29. ἀποτρέψῃ : so nearly 
all recent editors for ἀποστρέψῃ, which, 
‘tin fig. sense is prob. nowhere per- 
missible’’ (Kr.). Cf. 8.21, 19.6, and 
see on 4. 80. 2. — ol πατέρες ἡμῶν... 
és τάδε ἦραν αὐτά: it is doubtless in- 
tentional on the part of Thuc. to put 
into the mouth of Alcibiades, who 
would play the role of successor in 
Pericles’ policy, aliost the very words 
with which the latter just before the 
Peloponnesian War encourages the 
Athenians (1. 144. § 4): οἱ γοῦν πατέρες 
ἡμῶν ὑποστάντες Miyjdous .. . és τάδε προή- 
yayovaird: ὧν οὐ χρὴ λείπεσθαι. Alcibi- 
ades, however, puts the merit of the 
fathers'(i.e. of Pericles and his contem- 
poraries) esp. in the fact that they, as 
the then young men, took counsel along 
with the older men (ἅμα νέοι yepacrépors 


9 id 4 4 3 4 4 9 4 Ἁ A 
80 ἅμα νέοι γεραιτέροις βουλεύοντες ἐς τάδε ἦραν αὐτά, Kal νῦν 


τῷ αὐτῷ τρόπῳ πειρᾶσθε προαγαγεῖν τὴν πόλιν, καὶ νομίσατε 
’ Ν Ἁ A ¥ 9 , A 4 e ~ 
νεότητα μὲν Kal γῆρας ἄνευ ἀλλήλων μηδὲν δύνασθαι, ὁμοῦ 
A , “A N Ν ’ Ἁ N 4 9 5 A 
δὲ τό Te φαῦλον καὶ τὸ μέσον Kal τὸ πάνυ ἀκριβὲς av EvyKpa- 
A 4 95 ἃ > , Ν Ἁ , A A e - 9 ’ 
θὲν μάλιστ᾽ ἂν ἰσχύειν, καὶ τὴν πόλιν, ἂν μὲν ἡσυχάζῃ: τρίψε- 
σθαΐί τε αὐτὴν περὶ αὑτήν, ὥσπερ καὶ ἄλλο τι, καὶ πάντων τὴν 
9 ’ 9 ’ 9 ’ Ν 95 ἃ , 
ἐπιστήμην ἐγγηράσεσθαι, ἀγωνιζομένην δὲ αἰεὶ προσλήψε- 

’ “N 3 4 »' N > ’ 9 , 3 93). ¥ 
bai τε τὴν ἐμπειρίαν καὶ τὸ ἀμύνεσθαι οὐ λόγῳ, ἀλλ᾽ ἔργῳ 

μᾶλλον ξύνηθες ἕξειν. 

βουλεύοντες), and uses this against the 

assertion of Nicias, 12.15 τὸ πρᾶγμα 

μέγα εἶναι καὶ μὴ οἷον νεωτέρους βουλεύσα- 
σθαί τε καὶ ὀξέως μεταχειρίσαι. Cf. also 
the thoughts of Pericles 2. 36 with 
those of Alcibiades here.— 30. ἅμα νέοι 
γεραιτέροις βουλεύοντες : as young men 
counseling with older men, the véo as 
part of the πατέρες taking same case. 
See on 31.16. Note the separation, as 
often, of the gram. connected words. 
— és τάδε ἦραν αὐτά : raised our power 
to this point. Cf. 1. 144. 25 és τάδε 
προήγαγον αὐτά. ---88, τότε φαῦλον... 
καὶ τὸ πάνν ἀκριβές : Alcibiades ironi- 
cally takes the standpoint of Nicias, as 
if youth in its thoughtlessness were of 
little use, while age has the advantage 
of most careful reflection.— ἂν Evyxpa- 
θὲν μάλιστ᾽ ἂν ἰσχύειν : ἄν repeated as 
in 1.10 above.—34. ἂν μὲν ἡσυχάζῃ: for 
ἄν = ἐάν, see on 13. 4.— τρίψεσθαι αὐ- 
τὴν περὶ αὑτήν : will wear out of itself, 
i.e. without influence from outside. 
The verb as in 7, 42. 35. Cf. 8.46.18 
αὐτοὺς περὶ ἑαντοὺς τοὺς Ἕλληνας κατα- 
τρῖψαι. For the thought of the sent., 
cf. Liv. 30. 44 nulla magna civi- 
tas quiescere potest. si foris 

hostem non habet, domi inve- ° 

παράπαν τε γιγνώσκω πόλιν μὴ 

nit.— 85. ὥσπερ καὶ ἄλλο τι: just as 
also anything else. Cf. 1. 142. 24.— πάν- 
των τὴν ἐπιστήμην ἐγγηράσεσθαι : sc. 
τὴν πόλιν, will grow old in knowledge of 
everything. So with St. and others. 
Cf. Liv. 1.22.2 senescere civita- 
tem otio ratus undique mate- 
riam excitandi belli quaerebat. 
ἐγγηράσεσθαι, i.e. will grow old ἐν τῷ 
τρίβεσθαι. . 886 on ἐλλαμπρύνεσθαι 12. 
18. Steup takes ἐπιστήμην as subj., 
explaining ἐγγηράσεσθαι i.e. ἐν αὐτῇ (τῇ 
πόλει), ald ἀγωνιζομένην he then makes 
agree with τὴν πόλιν as if no new 
subj. had intervened. — 37. τὸ ἀμύνε- 
σθαι... μᾶλλον ξύνηθες ἕξειν : will have 
self-defense more as a habit, opp. to 

‘the caution only theoretically recom- 

mended by Nicias (10. ὃ 5, 11. § 7, 18. 
§ 2). Cf. Sall. Jug. 85.7 ita ad hoc 
aetatis a pueritia fui, ut omnes 
labores et pericula consueta 

38. παράπαν τε γιγνώσκω: cf. the 
similar conclusion 37.17 τό re ξύμπαν 

. . ἡγοῦμαι. --- γιγνώσκω... μοι δο- 
κεῖν: J declare that in my opinion. γιγνώ- 
oxw being thus understood (= censeo), 
the pleonasm is relieved. — ph ἀπρά- 
γμονα: not inactive in foreign politics.— 



ἀπράγμονα τάχιστ᾽ ἄν μοι δοκεῖν ἀπραγμοσύνης μεταβολῇ 
A ἃ A > 4, > ld , > ~ 
40 διαφθαρῆναι, καὶ Tov ἀνθρώπων ἀσφαλέστατα τούτους οἰκεῖν 
“A A - 9 9 
οἱ ἂν τοῖς παροῦσιν ἤθεσι καὶ νόμοις, ἣν καὶ χείρω ἡ, ἥκιστα 

διαφόρως πολιτεύωσιν.᾽" 

Τοιαῦτα μὲν ὁ ᾿Αλκιβιάδης εἶ εἶπεν. οἵ δ' ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀκούσαν- 
τες ἐκείνον τε καὶ τῶν ᾿Εγεσταίων καὶ Λεοντίνων φυγάδων, 
ot παρελθόντες ἐδέοντό τε καὶ τῶν ὁρκίων ὑπομιμνήσκοντες 
e » θ A 4 λλ A αλλ A , 9 
ἱκέτευον βοηθῆσαι σφίσι, πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἢ πρότερον wp- 
μῆντο στρατεύειν. καὶ ὁ Νικίας γνοὺς ὅτι ἀπὸ μὲν τῶν αὐτῶν 
λόγων οὐκ ἂν ἔτι ἀποτρέψειε, παρασκενῆς δὲ πλήθει, εἰ πολ- 
λὴν ἐπιτάξειε, τάχ᾽ ἂν μεταστήσειεν αὐτούς, παρελθὼν αὐτοῖς 

αὖθις ἔλεγε τοιάδε: 

89. ἀπραγμοσύνης μεταβολῇ: by achange 
to political inactivity, recommended, 
acc. to Alcibiades (cf. 27 above) by 
Nicias for Athens. Cf. ἡ ἐναντία pera- 
Body, a change to the opposite, 2. 48. 26. 
In 76. 21 μεταβολή is exchange. Alci- 
biades is consciously using Pericles’ 
terms with regard to the danger of 
an imperial state in keeping clear of 
foreign complications, though the situ- 
ation is quite different. Cf. 2. 62. § 2, 
3.— 41. of ἂν τοῖς παροῦσιν ἤθεσι... 
ἥκιστα διαφόρως πολιτεύωσιν : who in 
their politics are as little as possible at 
variance with established customs and 
laws, even when these are inferior. This 
view agrees in form and content with 
that of Cleon 8.87. ὃ 8. The dat. with 
‘the adv. διαφόρως as with the adj. Cf. 
διαφέρεσθαί τινι. 

19. As the Athenians after Alci- 
biades’ speech are more than ever in 
favor of the expedition, Nicias tries to 
frighten them by a strong picture of 
the efforts and the sacrifices that will 
be required.—1. τοιαῦτα pév: Bk. 

expects τοιαῦτα δέ, doubtless after the 
analogy of 88.1; 1.44.1, 79.1; 3.49. 
1, 68.1. But here and in 41. 1 excep- 
tions are made to the rule that after a 
speech in reply narration is resumed 
with δέ, because in both these cases a 
further speech follows. — 2. τῶν "Bye- 
oralwv: it is quite natural that the 
ambassadors of the Egestaeans (8. ὃ 1, 
2) were present also in the ecclesia 
which was to determine about the 
equipment (8. ὃ 8) of the fleet to be 
sent to Sicily. — Δεοντίνων : dependent 
on φυγάδων, and only to Λεοντίνων 
φυγάδων belongs of. For the relations 
of the Leontines to Athens, cf. 3. 86. 
12, and see App. on 6. 12; on the for- 
tunes of the Leontines, cf. 5. 4. § 4 ff. ; 
6.6.§2. See App.— 4. πολλῷ μᾶλλον 

. στρατεύειν: cf. 15. § 1. 

5. ἀπὸ τῶν αὐτῶν λόγων : for ἀπό, 
by means of, cf. 1.91.28; 3.48.38; 7. 
29. 6. Cf. ἐκ τῶν λόγων 1. 72. 11.— 
7. ἐπιτάξειε: cf. 8. ὃ 3.— παρελθὼν 

αὐτοῖς αὖθις ἔλεγε τοιάδε: αὐτοῖς, as well ΄ 

as αὖθις, belongs to παρελθών, see App. 



ec > 


Επειδὴ πάντως ὁρῶ ὑμᾶς, ὦ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ὡρμημένους 1 

’ E , A ~ ε β λό θ > AN de ~ 
OT PQATEevely, VVEVEYKOL μεν Ταῦυτα WS ουλομέσα, ἐπι € T ῳ 

A A ΝῊ ἴω. 
παρόντι ἃ γιγνώσκω σημανῶ. ἐπὶ γὰρ πόλεις, ὡς ἐγὼ ἀκοῇ 3 

9 U4 a, > 3 4 Ἁ ¥> e ’ > ld 
αἰσθάνομαι, μέλλομεν ἱέναι μεγάλας Kat ov ὑπηκόους ἀλλή- 
5 λων οὐδὲ δεομένας μεταβολῆς, ἡ av ἐκ Biaiov τις δουλείας 
ἄσμενος ἐς ῥάω μετάστασιν χωροίη, οὔτ᾽ ἂν τὴν ἀρχὴν τὴν 

ἡμετέραν εἰκότως ἀντ᾽ ἐλευθερίας προσδεξαμένας, τό τε πλῆ- 

Bos, ὡς ἐν μιᾷ νήσῳ, πολλὰς τὰς Ἑλληνίδας. πλὴν γὰρ 8 

ἃ ld e a 
Νάξου καὶ Κατάνης, ἃς ἐλπίζω ἡμῖν κατὰ τὸ Λεοντίνων Evy 

Q 2 » 9 Ἁ ε »’ Ἁ 4 
10 yeves προσέσεσθαι, ἄλλαι εἰσὶν ἑπτά, Kal παρεσκευασμέναι 

Second Speech οὗ Nicias (20-23) 

20. May your undertaking be suc- 
cessful; but make up your minds to 
this, that you will find in Sicily itself 
only weak support, your enemies on 
the contrary numerous and well- 
equipped, especially in cavalry supe- 
rior to you, and not dependent on 
imports of supplies from abroad. — 
1. πάντως: under all circumstances. 
Cf. 5. 41. 19. ---- 2. ξυνενέγκοι : act., as 
freq. in Hdt., in the sense of ξυμφέρε- 
σθαι (1.23.4; 7.44.3; 8. 88. 4, 84.1). 
- ἐπὶ τῷ παρόντι: in view of present 
circumstances, as 2. 86. 18. See on πρὸς 
τὸ παρόν 2,22.1, and ἐπὶ τοῦ παρόντος 
2. δ4. 8.---8. σημανῶ: as 2. 45.8 and 
freq. in Thuc. ; not common elsewhere 
in Attic prose. 

ἐπὶ yap πόλεις xré.: for introductory 
γάρ, see on 838. 7. The exposition from 
here to the end of the chap. is directed 
against the argument of Alcibiades 
(17. ὃ 2 ff.) that in Sicily they will not 
have to deal with a μεγάλη δύναμις. Cf. 
21.1.— ὡς ἐγὼ ἀκοῇ αἰσθάνομαι : cf. 
Alcibiades’ words 17. 22.— 4. μεγάλας: 
cf. 7. 58. 20 of Σικελιῶται αὐτοὶ... dre 
μεγάλας πόλεις olkoivres.— οὔθ᾽ ὑπηκόους 

ἀλλήλων οὐδὲ δεομένας : the first mem- 
ber of the neg. sent., as οὔτ᾽ av. . . προσ- 
δεξαμένας (6) is the second, the former 
of the internal conditions of the Sicil- 

᾿ jan cities, the latter of their foreign 

relations. This becomes clearer with 
Bk.’s correction — ovéé for οὔτε in 5 and 
οὔτ᾽ for οὐδ᾽ in 6. See L. Herbst, Philol. 
XVI, 329 ff.—6. ἐς ῥάω μετάστασιν: into 
an easier change of lot, i.e. into another 
condition more tolerable. Cf. 4. 74. 18. 
- οὔτ᾽ dv... προσδεξαμένας : i.e. οὔθ at 
ἂν προσδέξαιντο. Cf. 5.15.10; 7. 67. 26. 
In all three passages the Mss. vary be- 
tween aor. and fut. ptc. The latter is 
preferred by L. Herbst (on ἄν with 
fut. ptc. in Thuc. p. 35 ff.); but cf. 
Stahl, Qu. Gr.? p. 22 ff. —8. ὡς ἐν μιᾷ 
γήσῳ: for a single island. For ws cf. 
1.10. 34; 2. 65. 44; 8. 118. 25; 4. 34. 
10; 7. 80. 20.— τὰς “EAAnvidas: opp. 
to the ὄχλοις ξυμμείκτοις of Alcibiades in 
17.7, and emphatically put at the end 
to lead over to what follows. See App. 

9. κατὰ τὸ Λεοντίνων ξυγγενές : cf. 8. 
ὃ 8.---10. προσέσεσθαι : will be with us, 
answering to προσγίγνεσθαι, attach one- 
self to. — ἄλλαι ἑπτά : Συράκουσαι, Σελι- 
νοῦς, Γέλα, ᾿Ακράγας, Μεσσήνη, ἹἽἹμέρα, 



A ἴω e ’ ’ ἴω e ld , Ἁ 
τοῖς πᾶσιν ὁμοιοτρόπως μάλιστα τῇ ἡμετέρᾳ δυνάμει, καὶ 

9 9 2 VN A A id A Q 4 
οὐχ ἤκιστα ἐπι ἃς μᾶλλον πλέομεν, Σελινοῦς καὶ Συράκουσαι. 

N A Ν ε A ἂν» Ἁ ’ Ἁ 9 la 
πολλοὶ μὲν yap ὁπλῖται ἔνεισι καὶ τοξόται καὶ ἀκοντισταΐ, 

πολλαὶ δὲ τριήρεις καὶ ὄχλος ὁ πληρώσων αὐτάς: χρήματά 

te N A δ A \ 3 A e A ¥ 
τ᾽ ἔχουσι, τὰ μὲν ἴδια, τὰ δὲ καὶ ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς ἔστι [Σελινουν- 

’ ’ Ἁ \ 3A 4 . ΗΝ > 3.9 ~ 
τίοις]- Συρακοσίοις δὲ καὶ ἀπὸ βαρβάρων τὶνῶν ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς 

id a A , e ἰὴ 4 9 Ἁ 
φέρεται. ᾧ δὲ μάλιστα ἡμῶν προέχουσιν, ἵππους τε πολλοὺς 

’ N 3 ’ Ἁ > “~ 
κέκτηνται καὶ σίτῳ οἰκείῳ καὶ οὐκ ETAKT@ χρῶνται. 

Καμάρινα (Schol.). Acrae and Cas- 
menae, which might be thought of 
(acc. to 5. ὃ 2), did not attain to inde- 
pendent importance.— καὶ παρεσκευ- 
ασμέναι xré.: and indeed equipped with 
everything.—11. ὁμοιοτρόπως: only here 
in Thuc., the adj. 1. 6. 24; 3. 10. 5; 
7.55.6; 8.96.27; both very rare else- 
where in Attic writers. Cf. duérpora 
Hat. 8. 144. 16.—12. μᾶλλον : sc. ἢ 
ἐπὶ τὰς ἄλλας, i.e. especially. 

18. πολλοὶ μὲν... αὐτάς" χρήματά 
τ᾿ ἔχουσι κτέ.: after the words above 
(10) καὶ rapeoxevacpévar. . . δυνάμει, ref- 
erence is here doubtless made again to 
all seven Sicilian cities thought of by 
Nicias as opponents of the Athenians, 
not alone to Selinus and Syracuse. Cf. 
also 7. 58.21, where it is said of the 
contingents of the Siceliotes against 
Athens, ὁπλῦται πολλοὶ καὶ νῆες καὶ ἵπποι 
καὶ ὁ ἄλλος ὅμιλος ἄφθονος ξυνελέγη. --- 
14. ὁ πληρώσων αὐτάς: to man them 
= Lat. qui with subjv., as 2.51.18; 
4. 78. 29, 98.18; 7. 85. 12.—15. ἐν 
τοῖς ἱεροῖς : surprising as opp. to τὰ μὲν 
ἴδια, the usual antithesis in money mat- 
ters being κοινός (1. 80.19, 141.11) or 
δημόσιος (1.80.11). It is strange, too, 
that there is no express mention here, 
along with temple treasures, of the 
public moneys freq. kept in temples, 

as Kr. noted suggesting the loss of ra 
δὲ κοινά before τὰ δὲ καί. --- [Σελινουν- 
τίοις] : bracketed as an interpolation, 
with Weidner (Parerg. Dinarch. et 
Thuc. p.12f.). Itrestson the erroneous 
assumption that from πολλοὶ μὲν γὰρ 
ὁπλῖται (18) on only Selinus and Syra- 
cuse were under consideration and 
that the fact was to be emphasized that 
the Selinuntians, as opp. to the Syra- 
cusans, possessed only the resources 
treated under χρήματα. .. ἔστι. That 
actually only the temples of Selinus 
served for the deposit of moneys is 
incredible. —16. Σνρακοσίοις δὲ. .. 
φέρεται: and to the Syracusans from 
some barbarians also money has been 
paid from the beginning (or from of old). 
For ἀπὸ βαρβάρων... φέρεται, cf. 4. 
87.14 rots ἀπὸ ὑμῶν χρήμασι φερομένοις. 
By βαρβάρων τινῶν Sicels are meant. 
Cf. 45.4, 88.18. On this much dis- 
cussed passage, see App.—17. ᾧ δὲ... 
προέχουσιν : and wherein they have the 
advantage over us. For sing. rel. refer- 
ring to members correlated by re... 
καί, cf. μέγιστον 1.35.19; δεινότατον 2. 
51. 11; ἀπορώτατον 7. 14. 4. Cobet 
(Mnem. N.S. XIV, 18) proposed δύο δὲ 
xré.— 18, σίτῳ... ἐπακτῷ : = ἐπείσα- 
κτος σῖτος Dem. 18.87; 20.31. To re- 
quire no imported food is emphasized 


“ Πρὸς οὖν τοιαύτην δύναμιν ov ναντικῆς καὶ φαύλον στρα- 1 
“~ ’ A 9 Ἀ N N = ᾽ν »“ ν 
τιᾶς μόνον δεῖ, ἀλλὰ καὶ πεζὸν πολὺν ξυμπλεῖν, εἴπερ Bov- 

λόμεθα ἄξιον τῆς διανοίας δρᾶν καὶ μὴ ὑπὸ ἱππέων πολλῶν 
¥ A A ¥ . 9 A ε ’ : 
εἴργεσθαι τῆς γῆς, ἄλλως τε καὶ εἰ ξυστῶσιν αἱ πόλεις φοβη- 

~ N ‘ 3 ’ e A bY ‘4 
5 θεῖσαι Kai μὴ ἀντιπαράσχωσιν ἡμῖν φιλοι τινὲς γενόμενοι, 

ἄλλοι ἢ ᾿Εγεσταῖοι, ᾧ ἀμυνούμεθα ἱππικόν (αἰσχρὸν δὲ βια- 

3 A a 9 3 , Ν a 
σθέντας ἀπελθεῖν ἢ ὕστερον ἐπιμεταπέμπεσθαι τὸ πρῶτον 

> , id 9 ’ A “a » 4 
ἀσκέπτως βουλευσαμένους), αὐτόθεν δὲ παρασκενῇ ἀξιόχρεῳ 

9 , ’ ἦν 2 > δ A e , > A , 
ἐπιέναι, YVOVTAS OTL πολύ TE ἀπὸ τῆς ἡμετέρας αὐτῶν με λλομεν 

for Athenians, who acc. to Demosthe- 
nes depend of all men most upon for- 
eign grain. 

21. Therefore we must from the 
start take the field with unusual equip- 
ment, especially as the theater of war is 
so far away.—1. φαύλον : elsewhere 
in Thue. (31. 14; 4.9.6) of three ter- 
minations; in its real sense, ordinary, 
common, from which comes the prevail- 
ing meaning, unsatisfactory, worthless. 
Cf. English mean. — 2. ξυμπλεῖν : note 
the change to inf. dependent on δεῖ, 
as also ἐπιέναι (9), the words αἰσχρὸν 
(sc. ἢν) . . . βουλευσαμένους (6-8) being 
an independent parenthesis.—3. ἄξιον: 
without τι. See on σαφές 4. 50. 11.— 
διανοίας : here, as freq., the plan con- 
ceived; see Introd.‘ p: xlvii.— 4. etpye- 
σθαι τῆς γῆς: as 3. 86. 15; 5.82.22; more 
freq. εἴργειν τῆς θαλάσσης (1. 141. 16; 
2.85.4; 8.115. 10).— εἰ ξυστῶσιν : the 
only undoubted case in Thuc. of εἰ with 
subjv., after the older poetic usage 
See St., Qu. Gr.? p. 26 f.—5. ἀντι- 
παράσχωσιν : for this verb, see on 4. 
80. 4 App.—6. ἄλλοι τ᾽ ᾿Εγεσταῖοι: 
injected contemptuously. From the 
Egestaeans Nicias expected (12. § 1; 
22.14) no actual support. We read, 

however, of Egestaean cavalry with 
the Athenians 62. 18, 98.2.—@ dpv- 
νούμεθα: answering to ὁ πληρώσων 20. 
14. The rel. with fut. indic. to ex- 
press purpose, as 3. 16. 15; 4. 22. 8; 
1. 49. 11; 8. 1. 28. GMT. 565; Kr. 
Spr. 538, 7,8; Κύμη. 387, 4. 
βιασθέντας : i.e. forced by superior 
power. See on 4. 15.6.—8. αὐτόθεν: 
from right here. A large levy of troops 
having been already designated as nec- 
essary, here it is emphasized that the 
requisite force must be got together 
beforehand, not after reaching the 
theater of conflict.— 9. γνόντας ὅτι 
.. προσέδει : recognizing that we are 
about to sail far from our own land 
and shall not wage war in like manner 
as when, in the capacity of allies to sub- 
ject states here, you went against an 
enemy whence it was easy to get what- 
ever you further needed out of friendly 
territory. See App. Stahl’s view, that 
we have in καὶ οὐκ... στρατευσόμενοι 
an anacoluthon, i.e. suppl. pte. de- 
pendent, like ὅτι... μόλλομεν πλεῖν, ON 
γνόντας, seems Most natural, though the 
position of re favors the St.-Cl. view 
that πολύ and στρατευσόμενοι are co-ord. 
and both dependent on μέλλομεν πλεῖν. 


a 4 9 9 A e ’ ’ὔ λν A "ὃ 
10 πλεῖν καὶ οὐκ ἐν τῳ ὁμοίῳ στρατευσόμενοι καὶ OTE τοῖς Τῃδε 

e ’ ’ » : 9 , 4 eA e A 
ὑπηκόοις ξύμμαχοι ἤλθετε ἐπί τινα, ὅθεν padiar ai κομιδαὶ 
9 -~ a 4. ’ 9 Ν, 9 9 ’ A 9 

ἐκ τῆς φιλίας ὧν προσέδει, ἀλλὰ ἐς ἀλλοτρίαν πᾶσαν ἀπαρ- 

τήσαντες, ἐξ ἧς μηνῶν οὐδὲ τεσσάρων τῶν χειμερινῶν ἄγγε- 

λον ῥάδιον ἐλθεῖν. 

““Ὁπλίτας τε οὖν πολλούς μοι δοκεῖ χρῆναι ἡμᾶς ἄγειν 

A A ἴω , aA Q 
καὶ ἡμῶν αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων, Tov τε ὑπηκόων Kal 

— 10. ἐν τῷ ὁμοίῳ... kal: see App. — 
στρατευσόμενοι : the reading of Laur. 
(for στρατευσάμενοι) adopted by most 

recent editors. — rots τῇδε ὑπηκόοις. 

ξύμμαχοι: for the dat. with ξύμμαχοι, 
ef. 1. 102.20; 2. 99. 5; 3. 86.5; and 
esp. 8. 65. 3.—11. ὅθεν : referring toa 
person, as 59.19. Cf. ἔνθα 45.4. Kr. 
Spr. 66, 8, 2.— xopidal: importation of 
supplies. Cf. 4.27.5. For the omission 
of ἦσαν, see on 14. 14. 12 and 1. 16. 4.— 
12. ἀλλὰ és ἀλλοτρίαν πᾶσαν ἀπαρτή- 
σαντες: but removed into an utterly alien 
land. ἀπαρτήσαντες (for which the Mss. 
CEM read dwraprioovres) is not parallel 
to στρατευσόμενοι, but opp. to οὐκ ἐν τῷ 
ὁμοίῳ καὶ ὅτε ἤλθετε. The meaning as- 
sumed above for ἀπαρτᾶν (intr.) does 
not occur, it seems, elsewhere in ear- 
lier Greek, but cf. Dio C. 40. 15.6 és 
ἀλλοτριωτάτην σφίσι καὶ τῆς γῆς καὶ Tod 
οὐρανοῦ κατάστασιν ἀπαρτῶντες and 51. 
4.2 θορυβησάντων αὐτῶν ἐν τούτῳ φανερῶς 
ἅτε καὶ πολὺ ἀπὸ σφῶν ἀπαρτῶντος αὐτοῦ. 
The Schol., too, recognizes the act. as 
intr.: ἀπαρτήσαντες" ἀντὶ τοῦ ἀπαρτη- 
θέντες, ἀπελθόντες καὶ πολὺ τῆς οἰκείας 
χωρισθέντες. Pp.’8 conjecture ἀπάραν- 
τες would emphasize esp. the time 
of departure, and against Meineke’s 
ἀπαντήσαντες is the fact that ἀπαντᾶν 
everywhere (also in Lys. 2. 52) implies 
** going to meet.’’ és ἀλλοτρίαν πᾶσαν 

is manifestly an overstatement (cf. 37. 
14 ἐν πάσῃ πολεμίᾳ Lixedla).— 18, ἐξ ἧς 
«ον ἐλθεῖν : from which not even in four 
winter months could a messenger easily 
come, i.e. to ask for help or supplies ; 
much less then could these be sent 
thither in that time. —Tév χειμερινῶν : 
cf. Hdt. 2.68.1 τοὺς χειμεριωτάτους μῆνας 
τέσσερας. These months are Μαιμακτη- 
ριών, Ποσειδεών, Τ'αμηλιών, ᾿Ανθεστηριών. 
For the position of τῶν χειμερινῶν, cf. 
ras Ἑλληνίδας 20.8. Nearly all editors 
take οὐδέ as belonging to ἄγγελον, from 
which it is separated for emphasis; but 
it belongs naturally, where it stands, 
with μηνῶν τεσσάρων, as Steup takes it, 
with Kr. and Marchant. For Steup’s 
view that τῶν χειμερινῶν is part. gen., 
see App. 

22. Provide, then, a large army well 
equipped with hoplites, as well as with 
bowmen and slingers, also a superior 
fleet, abundant provisions, and espe- 
cially plenty of money; for as to that 
promised by the Egestaeans, you may 
consider that to be ready mainly in 
talk.—1. ὁπλίτας τε: which is con- 
tinued by καὶ τοξότας (4), is defined by 
kal ἡμῶν αὐτῶν and καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων, 
the latter again explained by τῶν τε 
ὑπηκόων (see on 69. 28) and καὶ ἤν τινα 
ἐκ Πελοποννήσου δυνώμεθα, with the two- 
fold mode of gaining these —7 πεῖσαι 




¥ Ν Πελ , ὃ ΄, θ a ee a θ Ἧς Ξ 
nv τινα ἐκ Πελοποννήσου δυνώμεθα ἡ πεῖσαι ἣ μισθῷ προσα 
id A ’ BY Ἁ ’ 4 N 
γαγέσθαι, καὶ τοξότας πολλοὺς καὶ σφενδονήτας, ὅπως πρὸς 
Ἁ “\ A 
TO ἐκείνων ἱππικὸν ἀντέχωσι, ναυσΐ τε Kal πολὺ περιεῖναι, 

᾽ν \ \ 3 “ὃ ea 9 ’ θ Ν δὲ N 9 40 ‘ 
Wa Και TA ΕΠΙΤΉ εια βᾷον ἐσκομιζώμε a, TOV € Καὶ AvUTOVEV 

~ > e ’ “ Ν , 4 ¥ Ἁ 
σῖτον ἐν ὁλκάσι, πυροὺς καὶ πεφρυγμένας κριθάς, ἄγειν καὶ 
σιτοποιούς, ἐκ τῶν μυλώνων πρὸς μέρος ἠναγκασμένους, 
9 ’ -ὖ » ε Ἀ 9 4 9 : » ¥ 
ἐμμίσθους, iva, nv πον ὑπὸ ἀπλοίας ἀπολαμβανώμεθα, ἔχῃ 
ε Ν δ 3 ’ὕ Ἁ Ν > > 4 ¥ 
ἡ στρατιὰ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια (πολλὴ yap οὖσα οὐ πάσης ἔσται 

(by persuasion) 7 μισθῷ προσαγαγέσθαι 
(by pay). The results of these counsels 
are found in c. 48 and 7. 57. ὃ 9, and we 
must therefore refer πεῖσαι esp. to the 
Argives, μισθῷ προσαγαγέσθαι to Ar- 
cadian mercenaries. — 8. ἥν τινα: for 
sing., when pl. is in mind, cf. 21.11.— 
δ. ναυσί τε: third member as so freq. 
in Thuc. The νῆες are warships (τρι- 
hpes), which besides their other duties 
were to keep the sea open for bringing 
in supplies. — 6. τὸν δὲ καὶ αὐτόθεν 
σῖτον. .. ἄγειν : Jowett’s explanation 
of this much discussed passage seems 
reasonable, as well as simple. ‘* The 
supplies taken out from Athens are 
contrasted by δέ with the supplies 
which would have to be procured by 
plunder or otherwise in Sicily itself. 
αὐτόθεν is to be explained as a confusion 
of two notions, αὐτόθεν ἄγειν and ἄγειν 
τὸν αὐτόθι σῖτον." Kr., followed by 
Bm. and Mueller, explains τὸν δέ as 
preparatory to the foll. epexegetical 
σῖτον, somewhat like Eur. apud Lycurg. 
c. Leocr. 100. 42 ἄρξουσιν ἄλλων, τὴν 
δ᾽ ἐγὼ σώσω πόλιν. Cf. Stahl’s render- 
ing: aliud autem etiam hinc fru- 
mentum in navibus onerariis 
advehere. Steup objects to taking 
αὐτόθεν with τὸν σῖτον, because Nicias 
is not speaking of all the grain in 

Athens; also to καὶ αὐτόθεν with ἄγειν 
(1) because such an interposition be- 

_ tween τὸν and girov is not Thucydi- 

dean, (2) because thus τὸν σῖτον would 
be in contradiction with καὶ αὐτόθεν, 
which would clearly imply importa- 
tions from other regions besides Attica. 
For Stahl’s τὸν δὲ σῖτον, aliud autem 
frumentum, Steup knows no Thucy- 
didean parallel. He thinks, therefore, 
the passage corrupt, and that perhaps 
πολὺν δὲ καὶ xré. was to be expected. — 
7. πεφρυγμένας κριθάς : parched barley, 
which kept better. The verb φρύγω or 
φρύσσω is rare.—8. σιτοποιοὺς. . . 
ἐμμίσθους : to be closely connected, 
slaves to make bread for pay.—é« τῶν 
μυλώνων πρὸς μέρος ἠναγκασμένους : 
designates how these slaves were pro- 
cured, drafted from the mills in propor- 
tion to their size, i.e. acc. to the 
number of slaves employed in each. — 
9. ἤν πον. . . ἀπολαμβανώμεθα: if 
perchance we be kept from sailing by 
unfavorable weather. Cf. ὑπὸ ἀνέμων 
ἀπολαμφθέντες Hdt. 2.115. 14; 9.114. 
8. For ἀπλοία, impossibility of sailing, 
which in case of triremes (with oars) 
would be only in case of storms or 
contrary winds, see 2. 85. 24; 4. 4. 23; 
8.99. 20.—10. πολλὴ γὰρ. . . ὗπο- 
δέξασθαι: a peculiar form of pers. 


πόλεως ὑποδέξασθαι), τά τε ἄλλα ὅσον δυνατὸν ἑτοιμάσασθαι 
Α ᾿ 9 C¢ 2 ’ 4 A ’ 9 ’ 
καὶ μὴ ἐπὶ ἑτέροις γίγνεσθαι, μάλιστα δὲ χρήματα αὐτόθεν 
ε A » Ν A 9.9 lA a », 9 -~ 
ws πλεῖστα ἔχειν: τὰ δὲ παρ᾽ Ἐγεσταίων, ἃ λέγεται ἐκεῖ 
ἑτοῖμα, νομίσατε καὶ λόγῳ av μάλιστα ἑτοῖμα εἶναι. 
CoA Ν 3 ν»ν 3 , Ἁ 9 ,ὔ , 
Hv γὰρ αὐτοὶ ἔλθωμεν ἐνθένδε μὴ ἀντίπαλον μόνον 
παρασκευασάμενοι, πλήν γε πρὸς τὸ μάχιμον αὐτῶν, τὸ 
ε ’ 9 Ν Α ε , A A ’ ν 
ὁπλιτικόν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὑπερβάλλοντες τοῖς πᾶσι, μόλις ου- 
τως οἷοί τε ἐσόμεθα τῶν μὲν κρατεῖν, τὰ δὲ καὶ διασῶσαι. 

const. for neut. = οὐκ ἔσται πάσης πόλεως 
αὐτὴν πολλὴν οὖσαν ὑποδέξασθαι. For 
sintilar cases, cf. 1. 40. 18, 98. 2; 8. 

11.1; 4, 17.17; 8.91. 4. For act. inf., - 

cf. 9.16 ῥᾷάδιά ἐστι κατασχεῖν. --- 11. τά 
τε ἄλλα xré.: conclusion of whole fore- 
going admonition. Cf. 71. 18. --- 12. μὴ 
ἐπὶ ἑτέροις γίγνεσθαι: not to be at the 
mercy of others. Cf. 2.84.11; 3.12.14; 
4.29.18. γίγνεσθαι as in 1.37.13; 3.53. 
4.—13. λέγεται : cf. 6. ὃ 2,3; 8. ὃ 2.— 
14. λόγῳ : ironical repetition of λέγεται. 
The sense of the passage is: and as to 
the money from the Egestaeans which is 
said to be ready there, you may assume 
that it is mostly ready only in talk. For 
the thought, cf. 12. 5ff. That Nicias 
was right is seen in 46. § 1. 

23. In view of the great difficulty 
of the expedition, which must be re- 
garded as an attempt to found a new 
city in hostile territory, I am willing 
to assume leadership only if furnished 
with quite sufficient means, and will 
gladly give place to another who thinks 
differently.— 1. ἦν γὰρ αὐτοὶ ἔλθωμεν 
ἐνθένδε κτὲ. : the substantiation with 
γάρ follows upon the urgent admoni- 
tion of the whole preceding chapter, 
that by Athens herself most is to be 
provided, in provisions and money: 

*t for even if we set out with means in 
every way superior, victory will still 
be not easy.’’ Everything is calculated 
to excite doubt. — ἢν αὐτοί: if we our- 
selves, i.e. not depending on allies like 
the Egestaeans. — ἀντίπαλον... 
ρασκενασάμενοι : (cogn. acc., like vav- 
μαχήσαντες ἀντίπαλα 7. 84. 23) limited 
immediately by the parenthetical self- 
evident admission, πλήν ye πρὸς τὸ 
μάχιμον αὐτῶν, τὸ ὁπλιτικόν, except indeed 
as regards their available force of hop- 
lites, i.e. there can be no thought of 
our opposing them with an equally 
numerous hoplite force. See App. — 
2. τὸ μάχιμον : as collective only here 
in Thuc., but freq. in Hdt. (2. 165. 6; 
7. 186.1). Cf. Xen. Cyrop. 5. 4. 46. — 
τὸ ὁπλιτικόν : epexegetical to τὸ μά- 
χίιμον; i.e. “in so far as it consists in 
hoplites.’? — 4. τῶν μὲν κρατεῖν : neut., 
i.e. supremacy in Sicily. Cf. 80. 12.— 
τὰ δὲ καὶ διασῶσαι: the reference is 
not to their rule at home (Schol. τὰ 
οἰκεῖα), for their activity in Sicily was 
not to preserve this; nor yet, as most 
editors assume, to their Siceliote allies, 
for Nicias had the fate of these little 
at heart; but to the Athenian army 
in Sicily. Cf. 24. ὃ 8. καί not at least, 
as 90.7; 1.1.7, but also, emphasizing 

e Twa- 




5 πόλιν TE νομίσαι χρὴ ἐν ἀλλοφύλοις καὶ πολεμίοις οἰκιοῦντας 2 


9.2 ἃ , "Ὁ , ε » δ ἃ , > 
ἰέναι, OUS πρέπει TH πρώτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἣ av κατάσχωσιν εὐθὺς 

A A A A γὼ ν᾿ Δ , , , 
κρατεῖν τῆς γῆς ἢ εἰδέναι ὅτι ἣν σφάλλωνται πάντα πολέμια 
σ΄͵ 9 > Ἁ 4 \ > A A Ν ε ~ 
ἕξουσιν. ὅπερ ἐγὼ φοβούμενος καὶ εἰδὼς πολλὰ μὲν ἡμᾶς 8 
δέον εὖ βουλεύσασθαι, ἔτι δὲ πλείω εὐτυχῆσαι (χαλεπὸν δὲ 

9 a, »” 9g 3 4 “~ 4 Ν 9 N 
10 ἀνθρώπους ὄντας) ὅτι ἐλάχιστα TH τύχῃ παραδοὺς ἐμαυτὸν 
’ 9 ~ ~ A 3 Ν ῪὋὉ > , > ’ 
βούλομαι ἐκπλεῖν, παρασκενῇ δὲ ἀπὸ τῶν εἰκότων ἀσφαλής 
[ἐκπλεῦσαι]. ταῦτα γὰρ τῇ τε ξυμπάσῃ πόλει βεβαιότατα 4 
ἡγοῦμαι καὶ ἡμῖν τοῖς στρατευσομένοις σωτήρια. εἰ δέ τῳ 
A “Ὁ Ἁ « 
ἄλλως δοκεῖ, παρίημι αὐτῷ τὴν ἀρχήν." 
A κὺ “A 
Ὁ μὲν Νικίας τοσαῦτα εἶπε, νομίζων τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους τῷ 1 

διασῶσαι by the side οὗ κρατῆσαι. Cf. ᾿ 

οἱ δὲ καί 10.12; τὰ δὲ καί 88. 20. 

5. πόλιν τε νομίσαι χρὴ. .. οἰκιοῦν- 
τας ἱέναι: with ἰέναι goes the general 
subj. implied in οἰκιοῦντας, as St. ex- 
plains: and you must consider that men 
will set out to found a city amid alien and 
hostile peoples.— 6. κατάσχωσιν : land, 
as 4.42.13, 20; 57.10; 8.23.12.—7. κρα- 
τεῖν τῆς γῆς : to dominate the open coun- 
try. See on 3. 85. 18.--- ἣν σφάλλωνται: 
Steup would bracket these words as an 
interpolated explanation of 7, on the 
ground (1) that as placed the cond. be- 

longsonly to ἕξουσιν, against the thought - 

of the passage, and (2) that transposi- 
tion would not help, since ἢ εἰδέναι ὅτι 
xré, alone is much stronger. But these 
reasons are far from convincing. — 
πολέμια ἕξουσιν : for this favorite idiom 
of Thuc. (= πάντα ἔσται πολέμια), see 
on 1.120. 9. 

9. εὖ βουλεύσασθαι: εὖ, though 
omitted by good Mss., indispensable as 
antithesis to εὐτυχῆσαι. ---- πλείω : cogn. 
acc. with εὐτυχῆσαι aS πολλά With βου- 
λεύσασθαι (see on 12. 15). — χαλεπὸν 
.. . ὄντας: SC. πολλὰ εὐτυχῆσαι ἡμᾶς. 

Better taken, with Pp., as independent 
sent., than construed with εἰδώς, as Cl. 
does. — 10. ὅτι ἐλάχιστα . . . ἐμαντόν: 
guiding motive of Nicias also in 5. 16. 
16. --- 11. ἀπὸ τῶν εἰκότων : in accord- 
ance with human calculations, as Plato, 
Legg. 941 E ; 950 p. —12. [ἐκπλεῦσαι] : 
bracketed as a gloss with Kr., as after 
the preceding ἐκπλεῖν neither the repe- 
tition nor the change of tense is explica- 
ble. Cl., retaining ἐκπλεῦσαι, emended 
ἀσφαλής to ἀσφαλεῖ, and rendered: ‘* but 
only with an equipment which in all 
human probability is assured of suc- 
cess to sail out.”’ 

ταῦτα: i.e. the precautions rec- 
ommended in all the foregoing. — 
14. παρίημι αὐτῷ τὴν ἀρχήν: cf. the 
similar offer οὗ Nicias to Cleon with 
reference to Sphacteria 4. 28. 

24. The effect of the speech was 
only to increase in the majority the 
eagerness for the enterprise; the few 
who felt otherwise suppressed their 
views. —1. ὁ μὲν Νικίας : without 
regard to what has gone before (see 
on 19. 1), opp. only to of δέ (3).— 
τοσαῦτα : only so much (see on 2. 12. 


’ “A ld A 9 ld ¥ 9.95 , 
πλήθει τῶν πραγμάτων ἡ ἀποτρέψειν ἤ; εἰ ἀναγκάζοιτο στρα- 
4 ’ 4 3 “~ 3 ~ ε A ἣ A 
τεύεσθαι, μάλιστα οὕτως ἀσφαλῶς ἐκπλεῦσαι οἱ δὲ TO μὲν 2 
> ~ A aA . 3 3 4 ε NX Aa 9 ’ ~ 
ἐπιθυμοῦν τοῦ πλοῦ οὐκ ἐξῃρέθησαν ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀχλώδους τῆς 
aA A 9 , 
παρασκευῆς, πολὺ δὲ μᾶλλον ὠρμηντο, Kal τοὐναντίον περι- 

4 > “A Ψ Ν », ¥ \ 393 , A 
ἔστη αὐτῷ- εὖ τε yap παραινέσαι ἔδοξε καὶ ἀσφάλεια νῦν 

Α N \ ἂν 9. 9 aA A ε 4 
δὴ καὶ πολλὴ ἔσεσθαι. καὶ ἔρως ἐνέπεσε τοῖς πᾶσιν ὁμοίως 8 
-9 ἴω A N a ε A 
ἐκπλεῦσαι, τοῖς μὲν yap πρεσβυτέροις ὡς ἢ καταστρεψομένοις 

1; 8. 81. 1), for he had spoken much 
more briefly than in his first speech. 
-τῷ πλήθει τῶν πραγμάτων: by the 
multitude of difficulties (lit. things to be 
done) which he brought forward. Cf. 
8. 48. 29, 39.—2. ἢ ἀποτρέψειν : the 7 
is misplaced, for clearly the words 
τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους. . . πραγμάτων do not 
belong also to the second clause; but 
it is hardly to be bracketed with Cobet 
and St., since misplacements of this 
kind are freq. in Thuc. See on 18.1. 
Because part of the Mss. omit (as so 
often in similar cases) εἰ after 7, Weid- 
ner (Parerg. p. 10) would bracket εἰ 
ἀναγκάζοιτο στρατεύεσθαι as an interpo- 
lation. ἀναγκάζεσθαι is clearly used, 
not of physical force, but of moral 
compulsion (after his wishes should 
have been complied with). Certainly 
μάλιστα οὕτως ἀσφαλῶς (i.e. with the 
equipment which he demanded, ‘at least 
securely’; cf. παρασκευῇ ἀπὸ τῶν εἰκότων 
ἀσφαλής 23.11) ἐκπλεῦσαι can refer only 
to Nicias. Weidner finds no difficulty, 
after bracketing the words indicated, 
in taking ᾿Αθηναίους with both clauses ; 
but the const. as obj. with ἀποτρέψειν 
and subj. with ἐκπλεῦσαι would be too 
harsh.— 8. ἐκπλεῦσαι : aor. inf., de- 
pendent on νομέζων, of the fut., because 
of the definite limitation by the inter- 
vening clause εἰ ἀναγκάζοιτο orpareve- 

σθαι, whereas without such a limitation 
the fut. ἀποτρέψειν is correct ; just as in 
12 after the general ἀργύριον οἴσειν the 
aor. προσκτήσασθαι follows, because it 
is limited by δύναμιν ὅθεν... ὑπάρξειν to 
a definite object. St. writes μάλιστ᾽ ἂν 
.. . ἐκπλεῦσαι and προσκτήσεσθαι. 

τὸ ἐπιθυμοῦν : for neut. ptc. as ab- 
stract noun, see on 1. 86.38; 3. 80. 4. 
—4. οὐκ ἐξῃρέθησαν : were not freed 

JSrom, const. aS ἀφαιρεῖσθαι 1. 120. 21; 

2.41.19; 5.69. 6.---ὑ πὸ τοῦ ὀχλώδους τῆς 
παρασκενῆς : by reason of the burden-- 
someness of the equipment (on account 
of its magnitude, cf. 19. § 2). With rd 
ὀχλῶδες, cf. δι᾽ ὄχλον εἶναι 1. 78. 138. — 
5. ὥρμηντο : sc. πλεῖν or ἐς τὸν πλοῦν. 
For the thought, cf. 19. § 1.— τοὐναν- 
τίον περιέστη αὐτῷ : turned out the op- 
posite for him. See on 1. 76. 21.— 
6. viv δή: now certainly, i.e. with such 
an outfit. 

7. rots πᾶσιν ὁμοίως : to all alike. 
See on 1. 98. 8. --- ὃ. τοῖς μὲν yap πρε- 
σβυτέροις xré.: before this epexegetical 
explanation, with which ἔρως ἐνέπεσε is 
to be supplied, as in 68.14 with ol μὲν 
γάρ and ἐγὼ δέ the corresponding verbs, 
only a comma is to be placed. See 
Vahlen on Arist. Poet.? p. 100 and K. 
Hude, Hermes XXXVI, 313 ff. — ws: 
followed first by the regular dat. (xara- 
στρεψομένοι5), then by the acc. abs. (ἂν 



ἐφ᾽ ἃ ἔπλεον ἢ οὐδὲν adv σφαλεῖσαν μεγάλην δύναμιν, τοῖς 

10 δ᾽ ἐν τῇ ἡλικίᾳ τῆς τε ἀπούσης πόθῳ ὄψεως καὶ θεωρίας, 

καὶ εὐέλπιδες ὄντες σωθήσεσθαι, 6 δὲ πολὺς ὅμιλος καὶ 

στρατιώτης ἔν τε τῷ παρόντι ἀργύριον οἴσειν καὶ προσκτή- 

σασθαι δύναμιν ὅθεν ἀΐδιον μισθοφορὰν ὑπάρξειν. ὥστε διὰ 

\ ¥ A λ , 3 θ , ¥ ¥ \ \ » 
TYHV ayav τῶν πλειονῶὼν ETLUVILLAV, EL TM apa καὺ μὴ NPEOKE, 

16 δεδιὼς μὴ ἀντιχειροτονῶν κακόνους δόξειεν εἶναι τῇ πόλει 

25 ἡσυχίαν ἦγε. καὶ τέλος παρελθών τις τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ 

, \ , 9 ¥ rs , 

παρακαλέσας τὸν Νικίαν οὐκ ἔφη χρῆναι προφασίζεσθαι 
> A ld 9 > 9 ld ε ’ ¥ a gy 

οὐδὲ διαμέλλειν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐναντίον ἁπάντων ἤδη λέγειν ἥντινα 

A Α 3 “Ὁ 
αὐτῷ παρασκενὴν ᾿Αθηναῖοι ψηφίσωνται. ὁ δὲ ἄκων μὲν εἶ: 

9 N \ ~ , > ε 4 w~ 
πεν ὅτι καὶ μετὰ τῶν ξυναρχόντων καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν μᾶλλον 

λ , 9 , +o ὃ A 9 A , Ν 
βουλεύσοιτο, ὁσα μέντοι NON ὃοκεῖν avT@, τριήρεσι μὲν 

σφαλεῖσαν... δύναμιν). The same const. 
in reverse order 4. 5. 3.—9. ἐφ᾽ ἃ 
ἔπλεον: i.e. the states against which 
they were sailing. Cf. 20. 12.— οὐδὲν 
av σφαλεῖσαν : could suffer no failure. 
—10. τῆς ἀπούσης... θεωρίας : through 
desire for a far-off sight and spectacle, 
i.e. to see and gaze upon something 
far away. — 11. εὐέλπιδες ὄντες : ana- 
coluthon; const. as if ἐπεθύμησαν. .. 
ἐκπλεῦσαι had gone before. For similar 
anacolutha, see on 2. 53. 18.—6 δὲ πολὺς 
ὅμιλος καὶ στρατιώτης κτέ. : SC. εὔελπις 
wv, and the great multitude being in good 
hope also as soldiers (i.e. besides the 
inducements esp. in the minds of old 
and young, namely, trade) at the present 
time to earn money. στρατιώτης is thus 
taken as pred. to ἀργύριον οἴσειν. For 
the force = στρατευόμενος, cf. 1. 60. 9, 
95.15. Kr. says: ‘The Schol. correctly 
explains with ἤγουν τὸ στρατιωτικὸν 
πλῆθος, accordingly ὁ στρατιώτης ὅμιλος 
is the military mass.’ But this leaves 
καί unexplained. — 12. προσκτήσασθαι 

δύναμιν xré.: (0 acquire power besides (i.e. 
to increase the supremacy of Athens), 
with the result that there would always 
be wage-earning (in military service). 
προσκτήσασθαι Opp. to ἐν τῷ παρόντι. 
For aor. inf., see on 8.—13. ὅθεν... 
ὑπάρξειν : for inf. in rel. sent. in indir. 
disc., see on 1. 91. 24. 

15. κακόνους τῇ πόλει: i.e. unpatri- 
otic. Cf. τῇ πόλει οὐκ εὔνους 86. ὃ: τῇ 
πόλει δύσνους 2. 60. 21. 

25. Nicias, in response to a demand 
for it, states more specifically the land 
and naval armaments which he deems 
necessary.— 1. παρελθών τις : Demos- 
tratus by name, acc. to Plut. Nic. 12. 
—2. παρακαλέσας : calling on, appeal- 
ing to. Cf. Lys. 22.8 παρακαλέσαντες 
τοὺς ἄρχοντας ἠρωτῶμεν .--- 8. διαμέλλειν: 
freq. in Thuc., but elsewhere only in 
late writers. — ἤδη : right now, as 29. 
6, 9.—4. ψηφίσωνται : delib. subjv., 
as 1.107.25. Kr. Spr. 54, 7,1. 

ἄκων μὲν εἶπεν : brachylogy for ἄκων 
μὲν εἶπεν, εἶπε 5€.—6. ὅσα... δοκεῖν: 





οὐκ ἔλασσον ἢ ἑκατὸν πλευστέα εἶναι (αὐτῶν δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων 
» e ‘ 9 A A \, » 9 a) 
ἔσεσθαι t ὁπλιταγωγοὺς ὅσαι av δοκῶσι, καὶ ἄλλας ἐκ τῶν 
ξυμμάχων μεταπεμπτέας εἶναι), ὁπλίταις δὲ τοῖς ξύμπασιν 
> » N A a a A 9 9 [4 
Αθηναίων καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων πεντακισχιλίων μὲν οὐκ ἐλάσ- 
“Ἅ , : , Ἁ 4 Ἁ Ἂν 
σοσιν, ἦν δέ τι δύνωνται, καὶ πλείοσι: τὴν δὲ ἄλλην παρα- 
σκενὴν ὡς κατὰ λόγον καὶ τοξοτῶν τῶν αὐτόθεν καὶ ἐκ 
΄ \ : A , » ¥ , A  Α' 
Κρήτης καὶ σφενδονητῶν καὶ nv τι ἄλλο πρέπον δοκῇ εἶναι 
e ’ » 9 a > es a) > a 
ἑτοιμασάμενοι ἄξειν. ἀκούσαντες δ᾽ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐψηφίσαντο 
εὐθὺς αὐτοκράτορας εἶναι καὶ περὶ στρατιᾶς πλήθους καὶ 
περὶ τοῦ παντὸς πλοῦ τοὺς στρατηγοὺς πράσσειν ἧ av αὐ- 
τοῖς δοκῇ ἄριστα εἶναι ᾿Αθηναίοις. καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα ἡ πα- 
ρασκενὴ ἐγίγνετο, καὶ ἔς τε τοὺς ξυμμάχους ἔπεμπον καὶ 
9 4θ ’Ὄ 9 ων Ν δ᾽ 9 FAL e ’ 

αὐτόθεν καταλόγους ἐποιοῦντο. ἄρτι ὃ ἀνειλήφει ἢ πόλις 
ἑαυτὴν ἀπὸ τῆς νόσον καὶ τοῦ ξυνεχοῦς πολέμου ἔς τε ἡλικίας 

so far, however, as it now seemed to him. 
For inf., cf. 1.2.8; 3.49.16. GMT. 
759; Kr. Spr. 55, 3,5.— 7. οὐκ ἔλασ- 
σὸν: see on 1. 8. --- πλευστέα: for 
Thuc.’s use of neut. pl., see on 1. 7. 2, 
and C. F. Smith, Trans. Amer, Phil. 
Assoc. XXV, 73f.— αὐτῶν δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων 
xré.: the sense is clearly that of 100 
Athenian triremesas many asmay seem 
necessary shall be used for transports 
— 40 acc. to 81. 88; 48. § 1 —and that 
other triremes besides the 100 shall 
be called for from the allies. Kr. sug- 
gests αὐτῶν [δ᾽] ᾿Αθηναίων, (dr) ἔσεσθαι 
xré., Which Hude adopts. Steup thinks 
there is a lacuna after ἔσεσθαι to be 
filled in with ταχείας ἑξήκοντα καί. ---- 
αὐτῶν δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων: for proper name 
without art. when joined with αὐτός, 
see on 1.27.15.—11. ἤν τι δύνωνται: 
if in any way they can, a8 7.29. 5.— 
12. ὡς κατὰ λόγον: in proportion (i.e. 
with the hoplites). ws as with καθ᾽ &a- 

στα. --- τῶν αὐτόθεν καὶ ἐκ Κρήτης: cf. 
c. 48, and see on 2. 18. 54.— 18. σφεν- 
δονητῶν: 700 Rhodian slingers were 
taken, acc. to 48. 15.— πρέπον εἶναι: 
see App. on 14. 1.5.—14. ἑτοιμασάμενοι 
ἄξειν : grammatically belonging to el- 
wev, but really with the three strategi 
in mind. ᾿ 

26. Nicias and his colleagues are 
voted full power to do as may seem 
best. The equipping of the expedition 
is pushed vigorously. —1. ἐψηφίσαντο: 
again on motion of Demostratus, acc. 
to Plut. Nic. 12; Alcib. 18.—2. atro- 
κράτορας εἶναι : acc. to Plutarch, Alcib. 
18, with the addition καὶ τῆς παρασκευῆς 
καὶ τοῦ πολέμου wavrés.—4. ἄριστα: adj. 
with implied general subj., as in 8. 14. 

6. καταλόγους ἐποιοῦντο: made levies. 
Cf. 31. 26.— 7. τοῦ Evvexots πολέμου : 
i.e. the ten years’ war. See App. on 
2.1.2.—é .. . ἐπιγεγενημένης : as to 
the youth that had grownup. For és, cf. 





πλῆθος ἐπιγεγενημένης καὶ ἐς χρημάτων aOpoow διὰ τὴν 

ἐκεχειρίαν, WOTE ῥᾷον πάντα ἐπορίζετο. 

Καὶ οἱ μὲν ἐ Keun ἦσαν. ἐν δὲ τούτῳ, ὅσοι Ἕρμαῖ 1 
αι οἱ MEV ἐν παρασκενῃ σαν" ἐν οὕτῳ, ὁσοι ἴζρμαι 

ἦσαν λίθινοι ἐν τῇ πόλει τῇ ᾿Αθηναίων (εἰσὶ δὲ κατὰ τὸ 

3 4 e 4 3 4 Ἁ \ 9 3Q7 
ἐπιχώριον, ἡ τετράγωνος ἐργασία, πολλοὶ καὶ ἐν ἰδίοις προ- 

θύροις καὶ ἐν ἱεροῖς) μιᾷ νυκτὶ οἱ πλεῖστοι περιεκόπησαν τὰ 

πρόσωπα. καὶ τοὺς δράσαντας ἥδει οὐδείς, ἀλλὰ μεγάλοις 3 

4 4 Ὄ ’ 3 A Ἁ ἐ id 9 ’ 
μηνύτροις δημοσίᾳ οὗτοί τε ἐζητοῦντο καὶ προσέτι ἐψηφί- 

, ¥ ¥ > > 7 ΄ , 
σαντο, καὶ εἴ τις ἄλλο τι οἷδεν ἀσέβημα γεγενημένον, μηνύειν 

ἀδεῶς τὸν βουλόμενον καὶ ἀστῶν καὶ ξένων καὶ δούλων. καὶ 

Ν “Ὁ 4 9 4 A Ν » > Ν 
τὸ πρᾶγμα μειζόνως ἐλάμβανον - τοῦ τε γὰρ ἔκπλου οἰωνὸς 

38. 4 > ae Ν ἕ , ψ , , 
€COOKEL εἰναι. Και E7TL υνωμοσιᾳ αμα νεωτέρων πραγμάτων 

1, 41. 8; 8. 14. 1.---8. ἅθροισιν : only 
herein Attic prose.—8a τὴν ἐκεχειρίαν: 
gives reason for ἀνειλήφει ἑαυτήν. 

27. Suddenly there was great com-, 

motion in the city over the mutilation 
of the Hermae, done in one night, and 
fear arose of secret designs for the over- 
throw of the democracy. — 1. ἐν παρα- 
σκευῇ ἦσαν : periphrasis as in 2. 80. 17, 
101. 10.—év τούτῳ: it is clear from 
29.3 ἤδη τὰ τῆς παρασκευῆς ἐπεπόριστο 
that preparations were far advanced. 
For the abundant literature on the 
mutilation of the Hermae and the con- 
sequent legal processes, see K. F. Her- 
mann, Gr. Antiq.® I, 716 f.— ὅσοι 
"Eppat ἦσαν λίθινοι : "ἡ the marble Her- 
mae which enclosed a part of the 
agora and were placed before resi- 
dences and sanctuaries.’’ Curtius, Gr. 
Gesch.® II, 633. On the shape, see O. 
Mueller, Arch. § 67, and Chr. Scherer in 
Roscher’s Lex. d. Mythologie I, 2392 ff. 
—2. κατὰ τὸ ἐπιχώριον : δηλονότι ἔθος, 
Schol.—3. ἡ τετράγωνος ἐργασία: ap- 
positive, the art. indicating the figure 

familiar to the Athenians. Note the 
unusual abstract for concrete. — 4. οἱ 
πλεῖστοι: cf. πάντων ἀκρωτηριασθέντων 
πλὴν ἑνός Plut. Nic. 18; τῶν πλείστων 
ἀκρωτηριασθέντων τὰ πρόσωπα Plut. 
Alcib. 8; accidit αὖ una nocte 
omnes Hermae deicerentur prae- 
terunum Nep. Alcib. 8. 

5. μεγάλοις μηνύτροις : cf. Andoc. 
1.27 ἦσαν κατὰ τὸ Κλεωνύμου ψήμισμα 
χίλιαι δραχμαί, κατὰ δὲ τὸ Πεισάνδρου 
μύριαι. Cf. also Andoc. 1. 40. --- 7, εἴ 
τις. .. οἶδεν: in the words of the 

9. μειζόνως ἐλάμβανον : took very 
seriously. μειζόνως as 1. 1380.10; 4. 19. 
16. Cf. ὑπόπτως λαμβάνειν 538.18; χα- 
λεπῶς λαμβάνειν 61. 2; λαμβάνειν μὴ 
πολεμίως 4.17.9. See on 8. 59.6. Cf. 
Tac. Hist. 2.7 res maius 
accipitur.— olwvés: a bad sign (omi- 
nous).— 10. ἐπὶ ξυνωμοσίᾳ : based on, in 
consequence of, a conspiracy, the prep. 
as in 60.4. The foll. gens. depend on 
ξυνωμοσίᾳ, just as in 8. 82. 45 ξυναλλαγῆς 

on ὅρκοι (conspiracy for). 


‘\ ὃ ’ 4 ~ , 4 9 Ἁ ,’ὕ 
28 καὶ δήμον καταλύσεως γεγενῆσθαι. μηνύεται οὖν ἀπὸ μετοῖί- 1 

», Ἁ 3 ’ ‘\ b “~ ε ~ 9 4 
κων TE τινων καὶ ἀκολούθων περὶ μὲν τῶν Ἑρμῶν οὐδέν, 
ἊΝ . 
ἄλλων δὲ ἀγαλμάτων περικοπαί τινες πρότερον ὑπὸ νεωτέρων 

\ “~ ‘ 
μετὰ παιδιᾶς καὶ οἴνου γεγενημέναι, Kal τὰ μυστήρια ἅμα 
ε A 
5 ὡς ποιεῖται ἐν οἰκίαις͵ ἐφ᾽ ὕβρει: ὧν καὶ τὸν ᾿Αλκιβιάδην 
3 “A Ἁ 9 δ ε ’ ε ’ “59 
ἐπῃτιῶντο. καὶ αὐτὰ ὑπολαμβάνοντες οἱ μάλιστα τῳ Αλκι- 
(ὃ 3 ’ 3 Ἁ ἃν 4 \ 3 “A ~ 4 
Biddy ἀχθόμενοι ἐμποδὼν ὄντι σφίσι μὴ αὐτοῖς τοῦ δήμου 
βεβαΐως προεστάναι, καὶ νομίσαντες, εἰ αὐτὸν ἐξελάσειαν, 
“A aA > 3 , \ 399 2 ε 9. oN 4 
πρῶτοι av εἶναι, ἐμεγάλυνον καὶ ἐβόων ws ἐπὶ δήμου κατα- 
10 λύσει τά τε μυστικὰ καὶ ἡ τῶν Ἑρμῶν περικοπὴ γένοιτο 
N 9 δὲ » 98 A 9 3 9.9 ’ 9 ᾽ 3 . 9 
καὶ οὐδὲν εἴη αὐτῶν O τι οὐ μετ᾽ ἐκείνου ἐπράχθη, ἐπιλέγοντες 
τεκμήρια τὴν ἄλλην αὐτοῦ ἐς τὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα ov δημοτικὴν 

’ ε >» A 
29 παρανομίαν. ὁ δ᾽ ἔν TE τῷ παρόντι πρὸς τὰ μηνύματα ἀπε- 

λ “A \ e aA 3 Ἁ 9 λ A , 6 ¥ , 
ογέιτο και €TOLLOS ἣν πριν ΕΚΊΛΕειν κρινεσ Ql, ει TL Τούτων 

28. On receipt of further denuncia- 
tions of profanation of the mysteries 
in private houses, in which Alcibiades 
is named as participator, his adver- 
saries proceed against him, and, accus- 
ing him likewise of the mutilation of 
the Hermae, charge that the object of 
both crimes is the overthrow of the 
democracy.— 1. ἀπό: on the part of. 
See on 8. 36. 24.—2. ἀκολούθων : prob. 
servants enjoying closer relations to 
their masters and cognizant of their 
secret doings. —4. μετὰ παιδιᾶς καὶ 
οἴνου: in drunken sport, the effect stated 
first in Greek.— τὰ μνστήρια as: 80 
placed for emphasis, as 29. 9 and freq. 
— 5. ἐφ᾽ ὕβρει: in mockery. Cf. Eur. 
Or. 1581. 

6. αὐτά: i.e. the charges against 
Alcibiades of profanation of the mys- 
teries. It is obj. both of ὑπολαμβάνοντες 
(Schol. προσδεχόμενοι wore πιστεύειν) and 
ἐμεγάλυνον. --- 7. ἐμποδὼν ὄντι σφίσι ph 

.. προεστάναι: for const. with verb 
of hindrance, see GMT. 807 c; 815, 1. 
—11. per ἐκείνου : in collusion with 
him. See on 8. 30. 10.— ἐπιλέγοντες 
τεκμήρια : citing as further proofs (i.e. 
besides the testimony of the μέτοικοί τό 
τινες καὶ ἀκόλουθοι (1). Cf. ἐπ εῖπον 1. 67. 
18. --- 12. τὴν ἄλλην αὐτοῦ... παρα- 
γομίαν : cf. 15.18. The pl. τεκμήρια 
prob. points to various manifestations 
of παρανομία. --- οὐ δημοτικήν : Schol. 
τὴν ἔξω τοῦ ἔθους τῆς δημοκρατίας. 

29. Alcibiades’ urgent demand for 
an immediate investigation is rejected 
and his speedy departure voted. — 
2. κρίνεσθαι : fo be tried. εἴ τι... ἦν: 
as to whether he had done any of these 
things. This, as well as εἰ μὲν. .. 
εἴργαστο (4), said from standpoint of 
the historian, as the plpf. shows, i.e. 
not in indir. disc., but εἰ δ᾽ ἀπολυθείη 
(4) from that of Alcibiades. There is 
no good reason for changing to opt., 




εἰργασμένος ἦν (ἤδη yap Kal Ta τῆς παρασκενῆς ἐπεπό- 
ριστο), καὶ εἰ μὲν τούτων τι εἴργαστο, δίκην δοῦναι, εἰ δ᾽ ἀπο- 

λυθείη, ἄρχειν. καὶ ἐπεμαρτύρετο μὴ ἀπόντος περὶ αὐτοῦ 

διαβολὰς ἀποδέχεσθαι, ἀλλ᾽ ἤδη ἀποκτείνειν, εἰ ἀδικεῖ, καὶ 

ὅτι σωφρονέστερον εἴη μὴ μετὰ τοιαύτης αἰτίας, πρὶν δια- 
ρονέστερον εἴη μὴ μ urn , πρ 

A , 2 \  9-N , , ε Ng > θ Ν 
γνῶσι, πέμπειν AUTOV ETL τοσούτῳ στρατευματι. Ou εχ βοι 

’ 4 4 Ἁ ¥ » Ἃ » 9 ’ 
δεδιότες, τό τε στράτευμα μὴ εὔνουν ἔχῃ, ἣν ἤδη ἀγωνίζηται, 

9 on N , θ , 9 ὃ 3 3 A ν 
ὁ τε ὄημος μὴ μαλακίζηται, θεραπεύων ὅτι OL ἐκεῖνον οἱ 

9.9 A V4 ον “Aw 4 , 9 ld 
τ᾽ ᾿Αργεῖοι Evveotparevov καὶ τῶν Μαντινέων τινές, ἀπέτρε- 

\ 93 ’ » » 3 lg ἂν “A 
πον Kat ἀπέσπευδον, ἄλλους ῥήτορας ἐνιέντες ol ἔλεγον νῦν 

μὲν πλεῖν αὐτὸν καὶ μὴ κατασχεῖν τὴν ἀναγωγήν, ἐλθόντα 

with Cobet, or bracketing the clause, 

with v. H., St., and others. —3. ἤδη 

yap... . ἐπεπόριστο: explanation re- 
ferring to πρὶν ἐκπλεῖν. ---- τὰ τῆς παρα- 
σκενῆς : as θὅ. 8.--5. ἄρχειν: as 12.9; 
8.64.8. Sc. ἠξίου from ἑτοῖμος ἣν. 
ἐπεμαρτύρετο : wjth the infs, in the 
sense appealed to, with the ὅτι clause 
(cf. 80. 17) admonished. — ἀπόντος περὶ 
αὐτοῦ : the prep. belongs to αὐτοῦ and 
hence does not suffer anastrophe. Cf. 

Schol. A on Hom. B 889 ᾿Αρίσταρχος 

Tots κυριωτέροις συνέταττε Tas προθέσεις. 
For position of ἀπόντος, tf. 1.3.18 ἀντί- 
παλον és ἕν ὄνομα. ---. ἤδη : as 25. 3. — 
7. πρὶν διαγνῶσι : Cobet would bracket 
because implied in μετὰ τοιαύτης αἰτίας. 
But αἰτία is perhaps not so much the 
legal charge, as blame which might not 
cease with legal acquittal. The const. 
too, unusual in prose, is against the 
assumption of an interpolation.— 8. ἐπὶ 
τοσούτῳ στρατεύματι: αἱ the head of 
so great an army. Cf. Dinarch. 1. 74 ἐπὶ 
τοῖς ξένοις ἐγένετο. See Kiihner-Gerth 
II, 1, 500f. 

9. τό τε oTpdrevpa ... ὅ τε δῆμος: 
the two uouns brought by emphatic 

position (cf. 28. 4) and by re... τε (see 
on 1. 8. 14) into closest relation. — 
10. μαλακίζηται: cf. 3. 37. 8, 40. 34. 
— θεραπεύων Sti: favoring him because. 
Severity toward him might result in 
the Argives and Mantineans abandon- 
ing the campaign. Cf. 61. § 5, where 
fear is expressed of the effect of his 
arrest upon these allies. — δι᾿ ἐκεῖνον: 
because of him. Cf. 61.24 δι’ ἐκείνου 
πεισθῆναι. --- οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι: cf. 43.11, 61. 
24; for the relations of Alcibiades with 
the Argives, 61. §8.—11. τῶν Mavn- 
νέων τινές : these were mercenaries; cf. 
7.57. 48, and see on 438.12. Mantinea 
belonged from the winter of 418-417 
(5. 81. ὃ 1) again to the Spartan sym- 
machy, but Alcibiades must from an 
earlier time (cf. 16. § 6) have had great 
influence there. — ἀπέτρεπον καὶ ἀπέ- 
σπευδον : Schol. ἀπερρίπτουν μετὰ σπου- 
δῆς. For the conative impf., see GMT. 
36.— 12. ἐνιέντες : subornantes, not 
elsewhere in Attic in this sense. — &e- 
γον: = ἐκέλευον, as 1.78.10; 2. ὅ. 21. --- 
18. τὴν ἀναγωγήν : for ἀγωγήν of most of 
the better Mss. Οἱ. 80.1, and see App. 
on 4, 29. 3, — ἐλθόντα : = ἐπανελθόντα. 



\ | 4 9 ε ’ e A ’ 9 4 
δὲ κρίνεσθαι ἐν ἡμέραις ῥηταῖς, βουλόμενοι ἐκ μείζονος δια- 
15 βολῆς, ἣν ἔμελλον ῥᾷον αὐτοῦ ἀπόντος ποριεῖν, μετάπεμ- 
’ > A 9 ’ Ν Ὗ ἴω \ 
πτον κομισθέντα αὐτὸν ἀγωνίσασθαι. Kai ἔδοξε πλεῖν τὸν 


Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα θέρους μεσοῦντος ἤδη ἡ ἀναγωγὴ ἐγίγνετο 
ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν. τῶν μὲν οὖν ξυμμάχων τοῖς πλείστοις καὶ 
ταῖς σιταγωγοῖς ὁλκάσι καὶ τοῖς πλοίοις καὶ ὅση ἄλλη 

Ἁ ? lé » 3 , »’ 
παρασκενὴ ξυνείπετο πρότερον εἴρητο ἐς Κέρκυραν ξυλλέ. 
e 3 ἴω ε ’ > NOY b 4 δ 37 2 
γεσθαι, ws ἐκεῖθεν ἀθρόοις ἐπὶ ἄκραν ᾿Ιαπυγίαν τὸν ᾿Ιόνιον 
~ 3 Ἁ 393 A \ » ~ 4 
διαβαλοῦσιν αὐτοὶ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ εἴ τινες τῶν ξυμμάχων 
παρῆσαν ἐς τὸν Πειραιᾶ καταβάντες ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ῥητῇ ἅμα 
9 3 λ ὔ Ν A ε 9 Eo E β δὲ νε 
ἕῳ ἐπλήρουν τὰς ναῦς ὡς ἀναξόμενοι. ξυγκατέβη δὲ καὶ ὃ 
» 9 9 ε 9 A e 93 ‘on / \ 93 io) N 
ἄλλος Gptros ἅπας ws εἰπεῖν ὁ ἐν TH πόλει καὶ ἀστῶν Kal 

See on 1.117.6.— 14. ἐν ἡμέραις ῥη- 
ταῖς : cf. 30.7, 64.20; 4. 76. 19.—& 
μείζονος διαβολῆς : with μετάπεμπτον, 
summoned as the result of more seri- 
ous defamation. Schol. ἔμελλον αὐξή- 
σειν τὴν διαβολὴν ἀπόντος αὐτοῦ. The 
relation of μετάπεμπτον to κομισθέντα 
as to ἀπήει in 74.8. Van H. and St. 
bracket κομισθέντα unnecessarily. The 
narrative here interrupted is resumed 
in 53 ff. 

30-82, § 2. Departure for the cam- 
paign in Sicily. The whole population 
of Athens goes down to the Peiraeus, 
partly to take leave of friends, partly 
to view the magnificent spectacle ; for 
never had a military expedition been 
sent off in such splendor from a single 
state. Fleet and land force were alike 
well equipped. The length of the jour- 
ney, too, and the greatness of the ob- 
ject aimed at excited wonder. Before 
sailing the usual prayers and sacrifices 
were offered.—1. θέρους μεσοῦντος ἤδη: 
when tt was already midsummer. The 

art. omitted as with dua ἦρι and πρὸς 
ἔαρ ἤδη. Steup prefers to take ἤδη with 
ἐγίγνετο, comparing 7. 75.1 μετὰ δὲ 
τοῦτο. .. kal ἡ ἀνάστασις ἤδη τοῦ στρα- 
τεύματος... ἐγίγνετο. ----ἢ ἀναγωγὴ ἐγί- 
yvero: introductory impf. of the whole, 
the details following; so 3.92.2 καθί- 
cravro.— ὃ. τοῖς πλοίοις : Schol. τοῖς 
μικροῖς, ἅ δὴ καὶ λεπτὰ ἄλλοθι εἶπεν. --- 
ὅση. .. ξυνείπετο : i.e. ἑπάσῃ τῇ ἄλλῃ 
παρασκευῇ ἢ ξυνείπετο. --- 4. πρότερον εἴ- 
ρητο: the ὁλκάδες and πλοῖα needed 
more time to get to Corcyra, and for 
most of the allies it was easier to sail 
directly thither. Cf. also 32. 18. --- ἐ- 
ρητο : = éveréradro, as in 42. 10, 61. 
20, 67. 7, 102. 16, and freq.— 5. ἐπὶ 
ἄκραν ᾿Ιαπυγίαν : promontory in Cala- 
bria. — τὸν ᾿Ιόνιον : sc. κόλπον. See on 
3.107. 4.—6. τῶν ξυμμάχων : for not 
all of the allies were ordered to Cor- 
cyra; cf. τῶν ξυμμάχων rots πλείστοις 
above (2). 

8. EvyxaréBy: anaphora, emphati- 
cally put first. —9. ὡς εἰπεῖν: with 



, ε \ 3 ’ “ ’ >. “A 9 
10 ξένων, οἱ μὲν ἐπιχώριοι τοὺς σφετέρους αὐτῶν ἕκαστοι TPO- 

, ε Ν ε , ε δ A ε δὲ ea ‘N 
πέμποντες οἱ μὲν ἑταίρους, οἱ δὲ ξυγγενεῖς, ot δὲ υἱεῖς, καὶ 
> 93 , 9 37 \ 9 “~ \ \ ε 4 
μετ᾽ ἐλπίδος τε ἅμα ἰόντες Kal ὀλοφυρμῶν, τὰ μὲν ὡς κτή- 
Ἁ 3 » ad 3 ’ ν oe) 3 

σοιντο, τοὺς δ᾽ εἴ ποτε ὄψοιντο, ἐνθυμούμενοι ὅσον πλοῦν ἐκ 

΄-ς ~ e 
81 τῆς σφετέρας ἀπεστέλλοντο. καὶ ἐν τῷ παρόντι καιρῷ, ὡς 1 

ἤδη ἔμελλον μετὰ κινδύνων ἀλλήλους ἀπολιπεῖν, μᾶλλον 

αὐτοὺς ἐσήει τὰ δεινὰ ἢ ὅτε ἐψηφίζοντο πλεῖν - ὅμως δὲ τῇ 
’ es ‘\ ‘ Ὁ ε 4 2 es a 3 
παρούσῃ ῥώμῃ διὰ τὸ πλῆθος ἑκάστων ὧν ἑώρων TH ὄψει ἀνε- 

θάρσουν. οἱ δὲ ξένοι καὶ 6 ἄλλος ὄχλος κατὰ θέαν ἧκεν ὡς 

2 N 96 » . »¥ ΄ ‘ Ν 9 
εΤι ἀξιόχρεων Και ATTLOTOV διάνοιαν. TAPATKEVY yap QUT?) 

ἅπας, to modify a seemingly extrava- 
gant statement, as often. See on 1.1. 
9.—10. of μὲν ἐπιχώριοι : the antithesis 
is of δὲ ξένοι in 31.5. The subj. here 
still has reference to ξυγκατέβη with 
the explanatory ptcs. προπέμποντες, 
ἰόντες, ἐνθυμούμενοι, but in the further 
description of dominant feelings (ἐσήει 
τὰ δεινά, ὅμως δὲ ἀνεθάρσουν) not only 
the attendant ἐπιχώριοι but the whole 
body of the Athenians are in mind, and 
so of δὲ ξένοι takes independently a new 
finite verb. —wpowépwovtes: dedu- 
centes, prosequentes.—11. υἱεῖς : 
on this form offered here in all Mss., see 
Kitihner-Blass I, 1,507f.; Meisterhans? 
144; and on 1. 18. 26. --- καὶ : correlat- 
ing ἰόντες with προπέμποντες, the two 
nouns being united closely by re dua and 
the following καί. ---- 12. τὰ μὲν os κτή- 
σοιντο: explanatory of ἐλπίδος (cf. 3. 
40.1; 8.94.11). τὰ μέν = τὰ ἐν Σικελίᾳ. 
— 18. τοὺς δ᾽ εἴ ποτε ὄψοιντο : explana- 
tory of ὀλοφυρμῶν, and τοὺς δέ refers to 
their friends. Cf. 28. 3 μόλις οὕτως οἷοί 
τε ἐσόμεθα τῶν μὲν κρατεῖν, τὰ δὲ καὶ δια- 
σῶσαι. For position of the conjunctions 
(ὡς, el), see On 28.4. For ὁρᾶν, see again, 
cf. Soph. O.R. 824; Phil. 1892; Xen. 

Anab. 8.2.39. Cf. ἐφορᾶν 7.61.5, 77. 
37.— ὅσον πλοῦν : acc. of measure. 
811. καὶ ἐν τῷ παρόντι καιρῷ. .. 
(4) τῇ ὄψει ἀνεθάρσουν : conclusion of 
the statement beginning with (80. 10) 
of μὲν ἐπιχώριοι. From this point the 
subject is not οἱ προπέμποντες, but the 
whole body of Athenians.—2. μετὰ 
κινδύνων : under (impending) dangers. 
-μᾶλλον αὐτοὺς ἐσηει τὰ δεινά: the 
dangers came closer home to them, i.e. 
made them more anxious. Cf. 4. 30.2 
οὐχ ἥκιστα αὐτὸν ταῦτα ἐσήει. --- 3. ὅμως 
δὲ... ἀνεθάρσουν : but still by reason of 
their present strength on account of the 
multitude of all whom they saw before 
them they were encouraged by the sight. 
The words διὰ τὸ πλῆθος ἑκάστων wy ἑώ- 
ρων, explanatory of τῇ παρούσῃ ῥώμῃ, 
are omitted by St. ἃΒ unnecessary. For 
τῇ ὄψει ἀνεθάρσουν, cf. 4.34.5 τῇ ὄψει τοῦ 
θαρσεῖν τὸ πλεῖστον εἰληφότες. For the 
views of Cl. and Steup, see Αρρ. -- 
5. κατὰ θέαν: to look on. See on 5. 7. 
11. — ὡς ἐπὶ... διάνοιαν : in the feel- 
ing that the undertaking was stupendous 
and scarcely credible.—6. παρασκευὴ 
yap αὕτη... ἐγένετο: for this arma- 
ment sailing out as the first from a single 




πρώτη ἐκπλεύσασα μιᾶς πόλεως δυνάμει Ἑλληνικῇ πολυτε- 
λεστάτη δὴ καὶ εὐπρεπεστάτη τῶν ἐς ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον 
3 ld 3 θ ϑὶ δὲ ~ Ne “A Ἁ ε 9 9 (ὃ 
ἐγένετο. ἀριθμῳ o€ νεῶν καὶ ὁπλιτῶν καὶ ἡ ἐς Enidaupov 
Ν ? Ἁ ε 3 Ἁ 3 ’ , 
μετὰ Περικλέους καὶ ἡ αὐτὴ ἐς Ποτείδαιαν pera “Ayvavos 
9 \ 2 “, ’ Q , ε A >. A 9 
οὐκ ἐλάσσων ἦν. τετράκις yap χίλιοι ὁπλῖται αὐτῶν ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων καὶ τριακόσιοι ἱππῆς καὶ τριήρεις ἑκατὸν καὶ Λεσβίων 
\ ’ a Ἁ ’ » \ , 

καὶ Χίων πεντήκοντα Kat ξύμμαχοι ἔτι πολλοὶ ξυνέπλευσαν. 
ἀλλὰ ἐπί τε βραχεῖ πλῷ ὡρμήθησαν καὶ σκευῇ φαύλ 

ραχεῖ πλῷ ὡρμήθησαν καὶ παρασκενῇ φαύλῃ, 


οὗτος δὲ ὁ στόλος ὡς χρόνιός τε ἐσόμενος καὶ κατ᾽ ἀμφότερα, 
@ ἃ , Ἁ \ \ aA 9 4 \ A Ν 
οὗ ἂν δέῃ, καὶ ναυσὶ καὶ πεζῷ ἅμα ἐξαρτυθείς, τὸ μὲν ναυτικὸν 
μεγάλαις δαπάναις τῶν τε τριηράρχων καὶ τῆς πόλεως ἐκ- 
πονηθέν, τοῦ μὲν δημοσίου δραχμὴν τῆς ἡμέρας τῷ ναύτῃ 
ἑκάστῳ διδόντος καὶ ναῦς παρασχόντος κενὰς ἑξήκοντα 

city with a Hellenic force was the cost- 
liest and finest of those up to that time. 
For the const., see on 1.1.8. Here the 
pred. noun placed first has besides the 
sup. a further modifier (ἐκπλεύσασα ... 
ἙλληνικὮ) With the effect of a gen. pl. 
πρώτη ἐκπλεύσασα κτὲ. means ‘such as 
had sailed out from no single city be- 
fore.’’ ἡ πρώτη was to be expected, as 
Dobree says. See App. 

9. ἣ és "EnlSavpov . . . μετὰ “Ayvo- 
vos: cf. 2. 56. §1ff., 58.—13. καὶ Evp- 
μαχοι ἔτι πολλοί : these additional al- 
lies, which seem to have been with the 
Attic forces on the 100 Athenian tri- 
remes, are not mentioned in 2. 56. § 2. 

14. ἐπί: for, with dat. of object. 
See on 4. 86.2.— φαύλῃ : see on 21.1: 
—15. οὗτος δὲ ὁ στόλος: SC. ὡρμήθη. 
Cl. unnecessarily follows Kr. in think- 
ing the sent. anacoluthic. He objects 
to supplying ὡρμήθη as “ποὺ answer- 
ing to the moment of the narrative.” 
But between ἐγένετο in 9 and 42 the 
aor. ὡρμήθη is quite in place.— 16. οὗ 

Gv δέῃ : of whichever there might be need, 

i.e. whether they had to proceed by 
water or by land. — τὸ μὲν vaurixdv... 
éxrrovnOév . . . τὸ δὲ πεζὸν... ἐκκριθέν: 
part. appos. as freq. in Thuc.— 17. ἐκ- 
πονηθέν : built up with effort. Cf. 3.38. 
13.— 18. τοῦ μὲν δημοσίον κτὲ. : on the 
contributions of the state on the one 
side and of the trierarchs on the other, 
see Boeckh, Staatshaushaltung® I, 
639 ff. The pay of the sailors, usually 
three obols per day, was this time dou- 
bled. See on 8.3.— 19. κενάς : acc. to 
Ar. Eq. 912 ff., the state furnished at 
other times in the Peloponnesian War 
besides the body or hull of the ship also 
at least a part of the equipment. See 
Boeckh, ibid., with note 858 of M. Fran- 
kel. That ἀνδρῶν is not to be supplied 
here with νῆες xeval, as in 1.27.15 and 
freq. (cf. 7. 77. 40), is clear from the 
context, and esp. from καὶ ὑπηρεσίας — 
ταύταις ras κρατίστας. Naber (Mnem. 
N.S. XIV, 326 ἢ.) would write καινάς. 
But if the Athenians had built at that 


20 μὲν ταχείας, τεσσαράκοντα δὲ ὁπλιταγωγοὺς Kal ὑπηρεσίας 

’ Ἁ ’ὕ ~ Ἁ , 3 4 
ταύταις Tas κρατίστας, τῶν (δὲ) τριηράρχων ἐπιφοράς τε 

πρὸς τῷ ἐκ δημοσίου μισθῷ διδόντων τοῖς θρανίταις τῶν 
ρὸς τῷ ἐκ δημοσίου μισθᾷ ρ 

ἊΝ . A A > ’ N 
ναντων καὶ TALS ὑπηρεσίαις καὶ τάλλα σημείοις Kal κατα- 

σκεναῖς πολυτελέσι χρησαμένων, καὶ ἐς τὰ μακρότατα προ- 

ld e nN ε ’ 9 9 “" 9 ld ε 
25 θυμηθέντος ἑνὸς ἑκάστον ὅπως αὐτῷ τινι εὐπρεπείᾳ τε ἡ 

A Ud id ἃ “ ~ Ν Ν Ν 
ναῦς μάλιστα προέξει καὶ τῷ ταχυναυτεῖν, τὸ δὲ πεζὸν κατα- 

λόγοις τε χρηστοῖς ἐκκριθὲν καὶ ὅπλων καὶ τῶν περὶ τὸ 

σῶμα σκευῶν μεγάλῃ σπουδῇ πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἁμιλληθέν. 

time such an unusual number of new 
. triremes (cf. Diod. 11. 48), Thuc. must 
surely have mentioned the fact in his 
reference to the Athenian preparations 
26. § 2.—20. ὑπηρεσίας: here, 1. 23, and 
8.1.15, and the sing. ὑπηρεσία 1.148. 
7, the technically trained seamen, who 
were on the triremes along with the 
marines (ἐπιβάται) and oarsmen (ναῦται 
in a narrower sense), and were regarded 
as assistants of the trierarchs. Acc. to 
1. 148. 6, the κυβερνήτης belonged to 
the ὑπηρεσία, and in (Xen.) De Rep. 
Athen. 1. 2 οἱ κυβερνῆται καὶ οἱ κελευσταὶ 
καὶ οἱ πεντηκόνταρχοι καὶ οἱ πρῳρᾶται καὶ 
οἱ ναυπηγοί the whole or nearly the 
whole of the ὑπηρεσία seem to be in- 
cluded. See A. Kirchhoff, Abhdl. d. 
Berl. Akad. 1865, 81 f.; U. Kohler, 
Mitt. d. dtsch. arch. Instituts in Athen 
VIII, 177 f.; G. Gilbert, Handb. d. gr. 
Staatsalt.2 I, 865 f.—21. τῶν (δὲν 
τριηράρχων: the δέ, due to the Schol. 
of Patmos, was first adopted by Heil- 
mann. — ἐπιφοράς : bounties in addition 
to the pay of the state. — 23. καὶ rats 
ὑπηρεσίαις : these words, bracketed by 
BL, Cl., St., and most other recent 
editors, offer no difficulty if the ὑπη- 
ρεσίαι (see on 20) are not included in 

the ναῦται, as 1.148.§ 1 requires they 
should not be. The correct under- 
standing of the term ὑπηρεσίαι makes 
unnecessary the assumption that the 
Schol. (οἱ Opavirac . . 
ἔχουσι τῶν ἄλλων" 

. πλείονα κόπον 
διὰ τοῦτο τούτοις 
μόνοις ἐπιδόσεις ἐποιοῦντο οἱ τριήραρχοι, 
οὐχὶ δὲ πᾶσι τοῖς épéras) did not have 
before him the words καὶ ταῖς ὑπηρεσίαις. 
-- τἄλλα: adv. as 3.3.26; 4.55.6; 8. 
86. 32.— σημείοις : figures or other 
outer ornaments by which the ships 
were distinguished and named. Schol. 
σημεῖα λέγει Tas ἔξωθεν καταγραφὰς τῶν 
τριήρων. Cf. Ar. Ranae 988 (of thelrma- 
ExT wp) σημεῖον ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶν ἐνεγέγραπτο. 
---κατασκεναῖς : inner equipments of 
the ships, as elsewhere of houses (2. 
14.3, 88. 8, 65. 9).— 24. és τὰ μακρό- 
vara: Schol. ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖστον. Unusual 
for és τὰ μέγιστα, which also occurs 
only once in Thuc. (4. 86. 24), but 
freq. in Hdt.— 25. ἑνὸς ἑκάστου : sc. 
τῶν τριηράρχω». --- αὐτῷ τινι: for each 
one himself. Cf. 77.17; 1. 37. 12, 40. 
21, 48. 2.— 26. καταλόγοις χρηστοῖς: 
i.e. καταλόγοις τῶν χρηστῶν, levies of the 
best.— 27. τῶν... oKevdv: accouter- 
ments for the body. σκεύη of equipment 
outside of the regular arms, as in 7. 


, δὲ ’ ~ 9 Ἁ 9 ¥ , * 
ξυνέβη δὲ πρός τε σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ἅμα ἔριν γενέσθαι, @ τις 4 
80 ἐκαστος προσετάχθη, καὶ ἐς τοὺς ἄλλους Ἕλληνας ἐπίδειξιν 
ΣᾺλλ 4 An A ὃ ’ \ 9 , a 39 A ’ 
μάλλον εἰκασθῆναι τῆς δυνάμεως καὶ ἐξουσίας ἡ ἐπὶ πολεμῖ- 
ους παρασκευήν. εἰ γάρ τις ἐλογίσατο τήν τε τῆς πόλεως 
ἀνάλωσιν δημοσίαν καὶ τῶν στρατευομένων τὴν ἰδίαν, τῆς 5 
μὲν πόλεως ὅσα τε ἤδη προετετελέκει καὶ ἃ ἔχοντας τοὺς 
N39 _ A δὲ ἐδ nA ΖΓ ΙΝ ον 
85 στρατηγοὺς ἀπέστελλε, τῶν δὲ ἰδιωτῶν a τε περὶ τὸ σῶμά τις 
καὶ τριήραρχος ἐς τὴν ναῦν ἀνηλώκει καὶ ὅσα ἔτι ἔμελλεν 
9 λ ’ἤ : Ἁ δ᾽ a > AN > , A 93 A ὃ 
ἀναλώσειν, χωρὶς δ᾽ ἃ εἰκὸς ἦν καὶ ἄνευ τοῦ ἐκ τοῦ δημο- 
σίου μισθοῦ πάντα τινὰ παρασκευάσασθαι ἐφόδιον ὡς ἐπὶ 

84. 14. ----28. ἁμιλληθέν: active in force 
as everywhere else in Attic, Plato, 
Legg. 9688; Eur. Suppl. 195; Hel. 
165, 887: Cycl. 628. Cf. ἐξαμιλλήσασθαι 
Eur. Hel. 1471. (Kr.) 

29. ξυνέβη δέ: and it came to pass. 
See on 5.10.33.— πρός re σφᾶς αὐτοὺς 
ἅμα. .. προσετάχθη : that both among 
themselves there was rivalry in that 
whereto each was assigned. Here ἔρις 
= ἀγαθὴ ἔρις. Stein rightly understands 
τούτου before ᾧ. Cf. Hom. o 366 εἰ 
γὰρ νῶιν ἔρις Epyou γένοιτο. ---- ris ἕκα- 
oros: order as 7.75.29; but ἕκαστός ris 
8. 45. 18; 4.4. 7, 68. 4.— 30. προσε- 
τάχθη : of military assignment; see on 
2. 87.32. — καὶ ἐς τοὺς ἄλλους Ἕλληνας 
κτὲ.: and it seemed rather a display of 
power and wealth before the rest of the 
Greeks than an undertaking against 
enemies. The subj. implied with elxa- 
σθῆναι is τοῦτο or the preparations just 
described. For the meaning of ἐξουσία, 
cf. 3.45.17 and Schol. περιουσίαν ἐξου- 
clay φησί. Cl. understood δυνάμεως of 
Athens’ strength at home, ἐξουσίας of 
her outward supremacy. But the dis- 
tinction seems arbitrary, and acc. to 
30. § 1 the allies were only slightly 

represented in the παρασκευή in question 
here, most having sailed direct to Cor- 
cyra. On the other hand, in § 5 is with- 
out doubt described the enormous cost 
of that rapacxevy to the state of Athens 
and the individual Athenians. 

88. δημοσίαν: Cl. and most recent 
editors follow Kr. in bracketing the 
word, because it is omitted by Valla, 
is unnecessary after τῆς πόλεως, and 
requires the art. But Steup, referring 
to 1. 51.11 and 4. 43. 15 for like omis- 
sions of the art., argues that if δημοσίαν 
is superfluous, then in the second clause 
καὶ τὴν τῶν στρατενομένων, or merely 
καὶ τῶν στρατευομένων, would have suf- 
ficed without ἐδίαν. --- 34. προετετελέ- 
κει: correctly restored by Reiske for 
προσετετελέκει of the Mss. ὅσα ἤδη προε- 
τετελέκει is Opp. to a ἔχοντας τοὺς στρα- 
τηγοὺς ἀπέστελλε. --- 35. Tig: every one, 
collective opp. to rpujpapyxos.—37. χωρὶς 
δέ: and besides, as 1. 61.15; 2. 97. 16. 
See on 3.17.6.— 38. πάντα τινά: every 
one. See on 2. 41. 21; 3. 18. 38.— 
παρασκενάσασθαι : aor. inf. after εἰκὸς 
ἣν referring to the past. For const. 
see on 8. 10. 20.— ἐφόδιον: pred., as 
money for the journey. Cf. 2. 70. 16.— 



χρόνιον στρατείαν, καὶ ὅσα ἐπὶ μεταβολῇ τις ἢ στρατιώτης 

40 ἢ ἔμπορος ἔχων ἔπλει, πολλὰ ἂν τάλαντα ηὑρέθη ἐκ τῆς 

’ QN 4, 3 ’ Ve 4 9 μὰ 4 
πόλεως τὰ πάντα ἐξαγόμενα. Kal ὁ στόλος οὐχ ἧσσον TOALNS 6 

4 \ » , ’ > »9 a 
τε θάμβει καὶ ὄψεως λαμπρότητι περιβόητος ἐγένετο ἢ στρα- 
τιᾶς πρὸς οὗς ἐπῇσαν ὑπερβολῇ; καὶ ὅτι μέγιστος ἤδη διά- 
3 Ἁ ~ 3 ’ 9. N ld 3 a, ”~ ’ 
πλους ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκείας καὶ ἐπὶ μεγίστῃ ἐλπίδι τῶν μελλόντων 

45 δ Le + 3 , 3 . Or ες a , ᾿ 
49 πρὸς τὰ ὑπάρχοντα ἐπεχειρήθη. ἐπειδὴ δὲ αἱ νῆες πλήρεις 1 

4 Ἁ 9 ᾽ὔ ’ὔ ro 9 » » 9 , 
σαν Kal ἐσέκειτο TAVTA NON OTA ἔχοντες ἔμελλον ἀνα- 

“ ’ Ἁ ε , 9. N \ Ν 
ἕξεσθαι, τῇ μὲν σάλπιγγι σιωπὴ ὑπεσημάνθη, εὐχὰς δὲ τὰς 
νομιζομένας πρὸ τῆς ἀναγωγῆς οὐ κατὰ ναῦν ἑκάστην, Evp- 
παντες δὲ ὑπὸ κήρυκος ἐποιοῦντο, κρατῆράς τε κεράσαντες 

9 a 
Tap ἅπαν τὸ στράτευμα καὶ ἐκπώμασι χρυσοῖς τε Kal apyv- 
; A ¥ 
pots ot τε ἐπιβάται καὶ of ἄρχοντες σπένδοντες. ξυνεπηύ- 
χοντο δὲ καὶ ὁ ἄλλος ὄμιλος ὁ ἐκ τῆς γῆς τῶν τε πολιτῶν 

39. ἐπὶ μεταβολῇ : for barter and sale. 
See on 14. --- ἢ στρατιώτης ἢ ἔμπορος: 
cf. 7. 18. 16. 

41. τόλμης θάμβει: on account of 
astonishment at the daring. θάμβος only 
here in Thuc., rare in Plato. Cf. Plut. 
Caes. 32 θάμβει τόλμης. --- 43. πρὸς οὖς 
... ὑπερβολῇ : Sc. τούτων dependent on 
ὑπερβολῇ, by superiority of force over 
those whom they went against. Cf. Lys. 
14.38 ὑπερβολὴν ποιησάμενος τῆς προτέρας 
πονηρίας. In agreement with what is 
here said is 86. 6 δυνάμει μείζονι πρὸς τὴν 
τῶνδε ἰσχὺν πάρεσμεν, and 2. 65. 11 ff. 
-,Ἔμέγιστος ἤδη... οἰκείας: a very 
long journey then from home. On ἤδη 
Bk. remarks “ἢ usitatius 5%,’’ but the 
particle does not belong to the superla- 
tive. The relatively unimportant first 
Sicilian expedition (see Steup, Rh. Mus. 
LVI, 488 ff.) is disregarded here; the 
Egyptian expeditions of 1.104. ὃ 2, 110. 
. §4, 112. ὃ 3, were undertakings of the 

Delian Alliance, not of the Athenians 
alone. — 44. ἐπὶ μεγίστῃ ἐλπίδι... ἐπε- 
χειρήθη : and was undertaken in (i.e. on 
the basis of) very great hope for the future 
as compared with the present, i.e. what 
they now possessed. On the expecta- 
tions entertained at the time, cf. 90.§ 2f. 

82 1. πλήρεις ἦσαν: were manned. 
Cf. ἐπλήρουν 80. 8.— 2. ἐσέκειτο : plipf. 
pass. of ἐστίθημι. Cobet (Mnem. N.S. 
XIV, 14) would restore ἐνέκειτο. --- 
3. ὑπεσημάνθη: by a conventional signal 
easy to be understood. Cf. 1. 82. 15.— 
τὰς νομιζομένας πρὸ τῆς ἀναγωγῆς : Lhose 
customary before departure.— 5. ὑπὸ 
κήρνκος : i.e. following the loud tones 

of the herald. Cf. Hdt. 9. 98.— κερά- 

σαντες : goes with the general subj., 
whereas with σπένδοντες we have οἱ éxc- 
βάται καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες as limiting apposi- 
tives; the ἐρέται were already in place. 

7. ξυνεπηύχοντο: after εὐχὰς ἐποι- 
οὔντο, as ξυγκατέβη 80. 8 after καταβάντες. 


. » ¥ ¥ A , pes \ δ 
καὶ εἴ τις ἄλλος εὔνους παρὴν σφίσι. παιανίσαντες δὲ καὶ 
10 τελεώσαντες τὰς σπονδὰς ἀνήγοντο, καὶ ἐπὶ κέρως τὸ πρῶτον 

> , 9 » , > » 3 a 
ἐκπλεύσαντες ἅμιλλαν ἤδη μέχρι Αἰγίνης ἐποιοῦντο. 
Καὶ οἱ μὲν ἐς τὴν Κέρκυραν, ἔνθαπερ καὶ τὸ ἄλλο στρά- 
; A , , ». “ 9 , 2 
τευμα τῶν ξυμμάχων ξυνελέγετο, ἠπείγοντο ἀφικέσθαι. ἐς 
Ἁ δ ’ 3 ’ ‘\ 4 δ Ἁ ζω 
δὲ τὰς Συρακούσας ἠγγέλλετο μὲν πολλαχόθεν τὰ περὶ τοῦ 
3 ,’ 9 ’ 3 4 > AN Ν l4 3 ? 9 Ν 
16 ἐπίπλου, οὐ μέντοι ἐπιστεύετο ἐπὶ πολὺν χρόνον οὐδέν. ἀλλὰ 
‘\ , : 3 4 9 ’ ’ 4 9 4 
καὶ γενομένης ἐκκλησίας ἐλέχθησαν τοιοίδε λόγοι ἀπό τε 
ἄλλων τῶν μὲν πιστευόντων τὰ περὶ τῆς στρατείας τῆς τῶν 

> ’ “ Ἁ \. 3 ’ 4 ve 4 ε 
Αθηναίων, τῶν δὲ τὰ ἐναντία λεγόντων καὶ Ἑρμοκράτης ὃ 
9 \ 3 “A ε ~ 97 90. 7 Ν 
Ἑρμωνος παρελθὼν αὐτοῖς, ὡς σαφῶς οἰόμενος εἰδέναι τὰ 
20 περὶ αὐτῶν, ἔλεγε καὶ παρήνει τοιάδε" 

ecy \ » 9 Ἁ ¥ ’ 4 en 
Amora μὲν ἴσως, ὥσπερ καὶ ἄλλοι τινές, δόξω ὑμῖν 

For Ὁ]. verb with collective noun, cf. 
1. 89. 15; 3.80.2, 110. 6.—9. εἴ τις 
ἄλλος: = ὅσοι τῶν ἄλλω». --- σφίσι: i.e. 
τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, referring to the subj. of 
the preceding sent. See on 11. 12.— 
παιανίσαντες: for παιωνίσαντες of the 
Mss., see on 3. 50. 20.— 10. ἐπὶ κέρως: 
in column. Cf. 2.90.16 κατὰ μίαν ἐπὶ 

xépws.— 11. ἅμιλλαν ἐποιοῦντο: periph- ᾿ 

rasis for ἡμιλλῶντο, sc. ἐρέσσοντες. 

12. és τὴν Κέρκυραν : cf. 80. 4. --- τὸ 
ἄλλο στράτευμα τῶν ξυμμάχων : as opp. 
to the few allies who acc. to 80. 6 sailed 
from Peiraeus.— 13. ἠπείγοντο ἀφι- 
κέσθαι: impf. in view of the goal to 
be reached 42. § 1. 

§ 3. In Syracuse the reports that 
came in of the approach of the Athe- 
nians are for a long time discredited. 
Hermocrates seeks in an assembly to 
win over the people to his contrary 
views. — 16. τοιοίδε λόγοι : i.e. as those 
of Hermocrates and Anaxagoras. St. 
brackets τοιοίδε as an interpolation. — 
ἀπὸ ἄλλων: for the prep., cf. 28. 1.— 


17. τῶν μὲν... λεγόντων: bracketed 
by Steup; see App. — 18. ἙΙρμοκράτης : 
cf. 4. 58 ff. — 19. παρελθὼν αὐτοῖς : see 
on 15. 19.— ὡς οἰόμενος : in the belief, 
as 4.114. 19; 7. 40. 7. Cf. 33. 6.— 
σαφῶς: belongs to εἰδέναι. Cf. 8.12. 
11; 17.14.17. --- τὰ περὶ αὐτῶν: i.e. τὰ 
περὶ τοῦ ἐπίπλου (14). See on 1. 1. 10. 

Speech οὗ Hermocrates (33, 34) 

88. Incredible as it sounds, I know 
from a sure source that the Athenians 
are advancing against us with a large 
fleet and land force. Prepare therefore 
to ward them off. Their audacity and 
power need not frighten you; rather 
have you every prospect of winning 
victory and fame. 

As to the decision and energy dis- 
played in the speeches of Hermocra- 
tes, see App. on 4. 58 ff.—1. ὥσπερ 
καὶ ἄλλοι τινές : as also some others, 
referring to those who besides Hermoc- 
rates believed the reports of the com- 
ing of the Athenians. Cf. 32.17. C1. 



. ~ 3s ἢ λ ΝᾺ ur. A ’ λέ QA ᾽ 9 e 
περι Του E€LTAOU THS QA) ειας eyeuv, Και γιγνωσκω ΟΤι Ol 

\ \ δ aA 3 a , a 3 , 3 
τὰ μὴ πιστὰ δοκοῦντα εἶναι ἢ λέγοντες ἢ ἀπαγγέλλοντες οὐ 

’ 9 θ λλὰ \, » ὃ A > 9 
μόνον ov πείθουσιν, ἀλλὰ Kat ἄφρονες δοκοῦσιν εἶναι" ὅμως 
ὅ δὲ οὐ καταφοβηθεὶς ἐπισχήσω κινδυνευούσης τῆς πόλεως, 

, 9 ‘\ 4 , e Ss 3 Ἁ ’ 
πείθων γε ἐμαυτὸν σαφέστερόν τι ἑτέρου εἰδὼς λέγειν. 

“᾿Αθηναῖοι γὰρ ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς, ὃ πάνν θαυμάζετε, πολλῇ - 

ηναῖοι γὰρ ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς, υμάζετε, πολλῇ στρα 

A F . Ὁ Ἁ Ὃ“)Ἤ , 3 , 
τιᾷ ὥρμηνται καὶ ναντικῇ καὶ πεζῇ, πρόφασιν μὲν Ἐγεσταίων 

ξυμμαχίᾳ καὶ Λεοντίνων κατοικίσει, τὸ δὲ ἀληθὲς Σικελίας 

rendered, as much as any others, citing 
18. 35 and 1. 142. 24; but in that case 
the singular ἄλλος ris was to be ex- 
pected. See R. Oehler, Animadv. in 
Hermocr. Or. (Homburg Progr., 1885, 
p. 5).—2. τοῦ ἐπίπλον τῆς ἀληθείας : 
obj. gen. placed first as often. See on 
1. 82. 8; 7. 42. 80. --- 8. λέγοντες ἢ 
ἀπαγγέλλοντες : the first of statements 
made on their own judgment, the latter 
of reports based on what others say. 
— δ. od: negatives both ptc. and verb. 
Cf. 4. 126. 24. ---πισχήσω : abs., hold 
back, as 1. 90. 20, 181. 8; 4. 78. 29. -- 
6. πείθων ἐμαυτόν: = πεπεισμένος, in 
Thuc. only here, freq. in Plato and 
the orators. — σαφέστερόν τι ἑτέρου: 
ἑτέρων might have been used, as 9. 7, 
16.1. Hermocrates compares himself 
with all who thought they knew some- 
thing of the expedition of the Athe- 
nians, whether accepting it as actual 
or not. 

7. γάρ: introducing the promised 
exposition. Cf. 10.1, 20. 3, 34. 18, 
54.5, 76.4, 87.4.—é ἡμᾶς : so with 
almost all recent editors for ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς of 
the better Mss. It would be strange if 
Hermocrates did not include himself 
among those threatened by the danger ; 
besides, the Mss. all read ἡμετέρας in 
10 and ἡμᾶς in 16.— 8. ὥρμηνται : have 

set out. Cf. 1. 82. 20 and see on 2.9. 
1.— πεζῇ: all good Mss. have here 
πεζικῇ, and all except Vat. πεζικήν in 
7.7.7, 16.7. But as in Thuc. only 
πεζός, πεζόν, πεζοί, πεζά, occur as sub- 
stantives, and even πεζός as adj. is the 
reading of all or nearly all Mss. in a 
larger number of passages (1. 141. 14; 
2.84.6; 4.8.10; 5.2.10; 6.108. 5; 7. 
12.4, 15.8, 22.2, 48.8, 79.3), it 
seems certain that Bk. and others cor- 
rectly restore everywhere the shorter 
form. Cl. accepted πεζικῇ here because 
it is so cited for this passage by 


Thomas Mag. p. 809 R., but this testi- © 

mony of the late grammarian is not 
conclusive. — πρόφασιν : on the pretext, 
as 8.111.2; 5.80.17. Cf. dat. 76.5; 5. 
53.2. On the matter, cf. 8. ὃ 2.—9. Evp- 
pay la, κατοικίσει: dats. of purpose. See 
on κακώσει 8. 82.8. For ξυμμαχία mean- 
ing ‘* help of allies,’’ cf. 73.5; 1. 82. 2, 
42.12; 8. 82. 7. If we took ξυμμαχίᾳ as 
dat. of cause, as many do, we should 
have next a transition to dat. of pur- 
pose in κατοικίσει, then back to dat. 
of cause in ἐπιθυμίᾳ Van H. unneces- 
sarily inserts ἐπί before ‘Eyeoralwp. 
On the relations of the Athenians to 
Egesta, see App. on 6. 1]. ---- τὸ δὲ 
ἀληθές : but in truth, antithesis to wpé- 




2 , , δὲ A e 4 , e , 3 
ἐπιθυμίᾳ, μάλιστα δὲ τῆς ἡμετέρας πόλεως, ἡγούμενοι, εἰ 
, A e , Ἁ εχ yg, € 4. 9 4 
ταύτην σχοῖεν, ῥᾳδίως Kal τἄλλα ἕξειν. Ws οὖν ἐν τάχει παρε- 
σομένων ὁρᾶτε, ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων ὅτῳ τρόπῳ κάλλιστα 
ἀμυνεῖσθε αὐτοὺς καὶ μήτε καταφρονήσαντες ἄφρακτοι λη- 
φθήσεσθε μήτε ἀπιστήσαντες τοῦ ξύμπαντος ἀμελήσετε. 
“Ei δέ τῳ καὶ πιστά, τὴν τόλμαν αὐτῶν καὶ δύ ὴ 
, κα , Τὴ μαν αὐτῶν καὶ δύναμιν μὴ 
ἐκπλαγῃ. οὔτε γὰρ βλάπτειν ἡμᾶς πλείω οἷοί τε ἔ ἢ 
αγῇ. οὔτε γὰρ πτειν ἡμᾶς πλείω οἷοί τε ἔσονται ἡ 
’ ν»νΔ9 9 4 ’ 3 , 9 ’ 3 ‘\ 
πάσχειν, οὔθ᾽ ὅτι μεγάλῳ στόλῳ ἐπέρχονται, ἀνωφελές, ἀλλὰ 
’ Ἁ » ’ Ἁ » A Ἁ 
πρός τε τοὺς ἄλλους Σικελιώτας πολὺ ἄμεινον (μᾶλλον γὰρ 
9 ’ 3 a e A A Q “a Ψν aA 
ἐθελήσουσιν ἐκπλαγέντες ἡμῖν ξυμμαχεῖν), καὶ ἣν dpa ἢ 
κατεργασώμεθα αὐτοὺς ἢ ἀπράκτους ὧν ἐφίενται ἀπώσωμεν 
3 Ἁ Ἁ \ , , ® ὃ , A md 
(οὐ yap δὴ μὴ τύχωσί ye ὧν προσδέχονται φοβοῦμαι), KaA- 

Q » e wan 4 Ἁ 9 9 ’ 
λιστον δὴ ἔργων ἡμῖν ξυμβήσεται. καὶ οὐκ ἀνέλπιστον 

11. ὡς... παρεσομένων : on the as- 
surance that they will soon be here. — ἐν 
τάχει: soon, with all speed, freq. in 
Thuc., e.g. 91.18, 92.1; 1.79.7, 86.18, 
90.31; 2. 86. 22, 101.21; 3.29.2; 4. 
106. 8, 123.19; 5.57.5, 64.2; 8. 95. 
7.—12. ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων : placed 
first for emphasis.— ὅτῳ τρόπῳ : for 
more usual ὅπως with fut. indic., as 
11. 28, 44.21. See on 1. 107. 18.— 
13. καταφρονήσαντες : because you have 
despised them. Cf. 11. 20, 34. 54.— 
ἄφρακτοι ληφθήσεσθε: be caught un- 
guarded, i.e. without sufficient means 
of defense. Cf. 3.39.8. λαμβάνειν as 
10. 14.—14. τοῦ ξύμπαντος: as compre- 
hensive as possible, everything threaten- 
ing the state’s existence. 

15. εἰ δέ τῳ Kal πιστά : sc. δόξω 
λέγειν from |. 1. So Cl., but most edi- 
tors, on account of the distance from 
the beginning, supply with the Schol. 
τὰ τῆς ἐφόδου τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, or some- 
thing similar(raira,atrd). Steuprefers 

kal δύναμιν͵ ‘if, however, to any one 
they are even credible, still he need 
not be in terror at their audacity and 
power.’’— 16. πλείω : cogn. acc. with 
βλάπτειν, as 64.9. So with ὠφελεῖν 2. 
60.5. See on 1. 81. 8. --- ἢ πάσχειν: 
sc. εἰκός ἐστι (from οἷοί τε ἔσονται). --- 
17. ἀνωφελές : correction of Faber and 
Dobree for ἀνωφελεῖς of the Mss., which 
some editors retain and explain as due 
to Thuc.’s partiality for the pers. const. 
(cf. δίκαιοί ἐστε 1.40.13; βεβαιότεροι ἃν 
ἦσαν 8.11.1). But ἄμεινον in the adver- 
sative clause makes the neut. here 
highly probable.— 20. κατεργασώμεθα: 
see on 11. 1.--- ἀπράκτους : act., as 
always in Thuc.— 21. οὐ γὰρ δή : con- 
fidently rejecting, as 1. 122. 28; 5.111. 
11.— κάλλιστον δὴ ἔργων: δή empha- 
sizing the sup., as 81]. 8. The pl. is 
¥arer but more emphatic than ἔργον. 
Cf. κινδύνων 2. 42.17; 7. 68. 17. --- 
22. καὶ οὐκ ἀνέλπιστον ἔμοιγε: sc. αὐτό, 
i.e. κάλλιστον ἔργων, Our success ; and to 

πιστά to the following τὴν τόλμαν αὐτῶν - me at least it is not improbable. 


ἔμοιγε. ὀλίγοι yap δὴ στόλοι μεγάλοι ἢ Ἑλλήνων ἢ Bap- δ 


4 Ἁ 9 Ν ~ ε A 9 , 4, ¥ 
βάρων πολὺ ἀπὸ τῆς ἑαυτῶν ἀπάραντες κατώρθωσαν. οὔτε 

‘ , aA 3 , \ 9 , ¥ 
25 yap 7 λείους των ἐεἐνοικουντωὼν Και ἀστΤυγέειτονων ερχονται 

4, Ἁ ε Ἁ ’ ’ ¥ 9.9 ’ ~ 
(πάντα yap ὑπὸ δέους Evviorarat), ἦν τε δι’ ἀπορίαν τῶν 

ἐπιτηδείων ἐν ἀλλοτρίᾳ γῇ σφαλῶσι, τοῖς ἐπιβουλευθεῖσιν 

» A N , 3 A δ , , 9 
Ovopa, Καν περι σφίσιν αυτοις Τα πλείω TTALTWOLV, ομως 

9 ae) a N * 
καταλείπουσιν. ὅπερ καὶ ᾿Αθηναῖοι αὐτοὶ οὗτοι, τοῦ Μήδου 

δ 4 δ ld 9 ἃ Aa 9 4 e #9 99 ’ 
80 παρὰ λόγον πολλὰ σφαλέντος, ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι ὡς ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αθή- 

¥ ye 14, Ἁ e a 9 9 aN Ν A 
vas ye ηὐξήθησαν, καὶ ἡμιν οὐκ ἀνέλπιστον TO τοιοῦτο 


εε “A > ’ 9 A , Q 3 
Θαρσοῦντες οὖν TA TE αὕτου παρασκευαζώμεθα καὶ ἐς 

τοὺς Σικελοὺς πέμποντες τοὺς μὲν μᾶλλον βεβαιωσώμεθα, 

τοῖς δὲ φιλίαν καὶ ξυμμαχίαν πειρώμεθα ποιεῖσθαι, ἔς τε 

τὴν ἄλλην Σικελίαν πέμπωμεν πρέσβεις, δηλοῦντες ὡς κοινὸς 

24, πολὺ ἀπὸ τῆς ἑαυτῶν: sc. γῆς, 
cf. 21.9; 1.1.9. --- κατώρθωσαν : em- 
piric (gnomic) aor. GMT. 154; Gild., 
Syn. 255; Kiihn. 386, 7.— 26. πάντα 
γὰρ... ξυνίσταται: in support of οὐ 
πλείους. For ξυνίσταται, cf. 21.4, 37.15, 
79.18; 7.15.4.— Rv re: correl. to οὔτε 
above (24): on the one hand, there is 
every prospect that we shall win by 
superior force; but on the other, if 
they fail through lack of supplies, we 
shall get the glory of it.— 27. rots 
ἐπιβουλευθεῖσιν : sc. ἡμῖν, the objects of 
the attack. — 28. ὄνομα: = δόξα. Cf. 
2.64.12; 4. 87. 25; 5. 16.14; 7. 64. 
14.— wept σφίσιν αὐτοῖς : by their own 
Sault. Cf. περὶ αὑτῷ τὰ πλείω σφαλέντα 
1. 690. 27; μὴ περὶ Μαρδονίῳ πταίσῃ ἡ 
Ἑλλάς Hat. 9. 101. 18. --- τὰ πλείω : cf. 
16, and see on 1. 81. 8.— πταίσωσιν: 
the Mss. ABFM all read πταίωσιν, but 
after σφαλῶσι above the aor. (C’s read- 
ing) is clearly preferable here. 

29. ὅπερ: as if ἔπαθον were to follow, 
but construed with ηὐξήθησαν = ἥνπερ 
αὔξησιν ηὐξήθησαν. But it is practically 
adv. here (= ὥσπερ). --- 30. ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνό- 
ματι ws: on the repute that. Cf. 5. 16. 
14 καταλιπεῖν ὄνομα ws.— 31. καὶ ἡμῖν 
.. . ξυμβῆναι : and that to us something 
of the sort will happen is not beyond hope. 

34. Above all seek outside alliances, 
in Italy, in Carthage, in Greece. But 
the threatened attack you will most 
surely ward off if you go to meet the 
enemy’s fleet at the gulf of Tarentum. 
Possibly they would then turn back at 
Corcyra; at any rate you will have the 
favor of circumstances and the advan- 
tage of timely resistance.—2. τοὺς 
μέν : i.e. the ὑπήκοοι of 88.19, and 
described 8. 108. 8 ὅσοι Σικελῶν κατὰ 
κράτος ἀρχόμένοι ὑπὸ Συρακοσίων καὶ ξύμ-- 
paxot ὄντες. --- 3. τοῖς δέ: i.e. τοῖς αὐτονό- 
pos (88. 20). ----ς τὴν ἄλλην Σικελίαν : 
BC. πρὸς τοὺς Σικελιώτας. Schol. οὐχὲ 



5 ὁ κίνδυνος, καὶ és τὴν ᾿Ιταλίαν, ὅπως ἢ ξυμμαχίαν ποιώμεθα 
a ba Ἁ δέ 3 θ ὃ A 5 , \ 3 
[ἡμῖν] ἢ μὴ δέχωνται ᾿Αθηναίους. δοκεῖ δέ μοι καὶ és Kap- 
χηδόνα ἄμεινον εἷναι πέμψαι. οὐ γὰρ ἀνέλπιστον αὐτοῖς, 
ἀλλ᾽ αἰεὶ διὰ φόβου εἰσὶ μή ποτε ᾿Αθηναῖοι αὐτοῖς ἐπὶ τὴν 
’ » ν ΄ 9 ἃ » ’ 9 , ’ 
πόλιν ἔλθωσιν, ὦστε τάχ᾽ ἂν ἴσως νομίσαντες. εἰ τάδε προή- 

10 σονται, κἂν σφεῖς ἐν πόνῳ εἶναι, ἐθελήσειαν ἡμῖν, ἤτοι κρύφα 

aA -~ A 3 e + , ’ 9 ~ N 

γε ἢ φανερῶς, [ἢ] ἐξ ἑνός γέ τον τρόπου ἀμῦναι. δυνατοὶ 
δ᾽ > δ Xx “A a Xr θ ’ Ν Ν ν» 

εἰσὶ μάλιστα τῶν νῦν βουληθέντες - χρυσὸν γὰρ καὶ ἀργνυ- 

ρον πλεῖστον κέκτηνται, ὅθεν ὅ τε πόλεμος καὶ τἄλλα εὐπορεῖ. 

πέμπωμεν δὲ καὶ ἐς τὴν Λακεδαίμονα καὶ ἐς Κόρινθον, δεό- 
~ Ἁ ’ “A Ἁ Ν 9 ~ 4 ~ 
15 μενοι δεῦρο κατὰ τάχος βοηθεῖν καὶ τὸν ἐκεῖ πόλεμον κινεῖν. 


wacav, ἀλλὰ τὴν ὑπὸ Ελλήνων οἰκουμένην. 
προεῖπε γὰρ περὶ τῶν βαρβάρων .---. ὅπως 
ἢ ξυμμαχίαν ποιώμεθα [ἡμῖν] ἢ μὴ δέχων- 
ra. Αθηναίους: note change of subject. 
See App. — 6. δέχωνται : sc. οἱ ᾿Ιταλιῶ- 
ται. Cf. αὐτοῖς below (7) after Καρχη- 
δόνα, and see on 1. 24. 9. 

7. ἀνέλπιστον : 8c. τὸ ᾿Αθηναίους ἐπελ-. 

θεῖν to be supplied from the context 
(μή wore ᾿Αθηναῖοι. . . ἔλθωσιν). ---- 8. διὰ 
φόβον εἰσί: they are in constant fear, 
as 59.5. Cf. δι ἀσφαλείας 1. 17. 4; 
δι᾿ ὄχλου εἶναι 1.73.18; δι᾿ ἡσυχίας 2. 
22.6; δ ὀργῆς 2. 81. 12, 64.2; ὅ. 29. 
18; δι’ αἰτίας 2.60.16.—9. τάχ᾽ ἂν ἴσως: 
seeon 10. 18. ἄν belongs to ἐθελήσεια» .---- 
τάδε: Schol. τὰ καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς, i.e. Sicily.— 
10. καὶ σφεῖς : with inf., taking the 
place οὗ καὶ αὐτοί in dir. disc. — ἤτοι 
κρύφα ye ἢ φανερῶς: either secretly at 
least or openly, i.e. secretly at least, if 
‘not openly. The more probable sup- 
position is put first. Cf. 88. 4, 40.3; 2. 
40. 8.— 11. [ἢ] ἐξ ἑνός γέ τον τρόπου: 
in some way certainly, as ἑνί γέτῳ τρόπῳ 
Plat. Phaedr. 2428; Meno 96pv. Cf. 

O δὲ μάλιστα ἐγώ τε νομίζω ἐπίκαιρον, ὑμεέϊς τε διὰ TO 

ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου 92.15. [7] is rightly 
bracketed, after Baehr, as already the 
Schol. had recognized that the disjunc- 
tive expression ἤτοι κρύφα ye 7 φανερῶς 
admits no third. The reference is 
merely to the manner of rendering 
assistance (troops, ships, money). — 
12. βονληθέντες : the emphasis is en- 
hanced by the position at the end ("‘ as 
soon as they will to do so,”’ aor.). — 
13. ὅθεν. . . εὐπορεῖ : πόλεμος is personi- 
fied, as in 1,122.4. For the thought 
cf. 1. 88. ὃ καὶ ἔστιν ὁ πόλεμος οὐχ ὅπλων 
τὸ πλέον, ἀλλὰ δαπάνης, δι᾿ ἣν τὰ ὅπλα 
ὠφελεῖ, and 2. 18. 21 τὰ δὲ πολλὰ τοῦ 
πολέμου γνώμῃ καὶ χρημάτων περιουσίᾳ 

15. τὸν ἐκεῖ πόλεμον κινεῖν: sel in 
motion the war there; for it had not 
completely quieted down (36. 14). Cf. 
1. 82. 3 ὅπλα μήπω κινεῖν. 

16. διὰ τὸ ξύνηθες ἦσνχον : on account 
of your characteristic love of ease. Cf. 
τὸ πρότερον ξύνηθες... φοβερόν 55.14; τὸ 
εὐπρεπὲς ἄσπονδον]. 87. 10; τὸ ἀνθρώπειον 
κομπῶδες 5. 68.6. The substantivized 


4 9 9 2 ἃ 3 , ’ 9 3 , 
ξύνηθες ἥσυχον ἥκιστ᾽ ἂν ὀξέως πείθοισθε, ὅμως εἰρήσεται. 
Σικελιῶται γὰρ εἰ θέλοιμεν ξύμπαντες, εἰ δὲ μή, ὅτι πλεῖστοι 

θ᾽ ε ζω A λ ’ὔ 9 \ ε a Q Ν 
με μων, καῦὔελκυσαντΤες ATaAV TO υπαρχον VQAUTLKOV μετ α 

20 δυοῖν μηνοῖν τροφῆς ἀπαντῆσαι ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐς Τάραντα καὶ 

» > , V Qa κι 2 A 9 VN 5 
ἄκραν ᾿ἰαπυγίαν, και δῆλον ποιῆσαι αὐτοῖς ὅτι οὐ περὶ τῆς 

4 ,’ 4 e 55 Ἁ KH a 93 , A 
Σικελίας πρότερον ἔσται ὁ ἀγὼν ἡ TOU ἐκείνους περαιωθῆναι 

Ἁ 919 ’ 9 ἃ ϑ Ἁ 3 , \ 93 Ν 
τὸν Ἰόνιον, μάλιστ᾽ ἂν αὐτοὺς ἐκπλήξαιμεν καὶ ἐς λογισμὸν 

4 9 ε ’ A 3 ’ ’ 4 
καταστήσαιμεν OTL ὁρμώμεθα μὲν Ex φιλίας χώρας φύλακες 

adj. is a favorite usage with Thuc., 
expressing as it were the abstract idea 
in concrete form and so more effec- 
tively. See C. F. Smith, Trans. Amer. 
Phil. Assoc. XX V, 76-79.—17. ἥκιστα: 
opp. to μάλιστα, not without irony, and 
the effect is enhanced by the paratacti- 
cally opposed ἐγώ re... ὑμεῖς re and the 
‘contrasting pred. modifiers ἐπίκαιρον 
and ὀξέως. ---- 18. Σικελιῶται: put first 
with emphasis, ‘t we Greeks in Sicily.”’ 
See on 14. 10. 5.— ydp: as 38. 7.— 
θέλοιμεν: the form θέλειν for ἐθέλειν 

seems to occur in Thuc. only after - 

long vowels, esp. 7, unless 7. 18. 15 be 
an exception. See on 2. 61. 17.— 
19. μετὰ Svotv μηνοῖν τροφῆς : depend- 
ent gen. before the governing gen., as 
in 388.2. Cf. Caes. B.G. 7. 74 dierum 
triginta pabulum frumentum- 
que habere.—21. ἄκραν ᾿Ιαπυγίαν: 
see on 80. 5.— δῆλον ποιῆσαι : cf. δεῖξαι 
11. 1.--- τερὶ τῆς Σικελίας : so Cl., with 
Dobree and Stahl, for περὶ τῇ Σικελίᾳ of 
the Mss., as required by the articular 
inf. (περὶ) τοῦ ἐκείνους περαιωθῆναι. Thuc. 
might have written περὶ Σικελίᾳ follow- 
ing Homeric and other precedent, but 
not the single preposition with different 
cases in the same sent. See App. — 
23. τὸν ᾿Ιόνιον : see on 30. 5.— ἐκπλή- 
ξαιμεν: cf. καταπλήξαντες 38.5, and és 

ἔκπληξιν καθιστάναι 86. 6.— ἐς λογισμὸν 
καταστήσαιμεν: forcethemto a consider- 
ation. Cf. és ἔκπληξιν καθιστάναι 86.6; 
és ὑποψίαν καθίστην 5, 29.18; ἐς ἐλπίδας 
καθίστη 8. 81. 11.--- 24. ὅτι ὁρμώμεθα 
μὲν xré.: explanation οὗ λογισμός which 
extends to ἀθυμοῖεν (85). The thing tobe 
considered is twofold: (1) ὅτι ὁρμώμεθα 
μὲν ἐκ φιλίας χώρας φύλακες ‘awaiting 
the Athenians at the Iapygian promon- 
tory, we have behind us a friendly 
land, which we must protect, and 80 
need not venture far out into the open 
sea’; (2) τὸ δὲ πέλαγος αὐτοῖς πολὺ 
περαιοῦσθαι μετὰ πάσης τῆς παρασκευῆς 
‘for them on the contrary the sea is a 
large place to cross with their whole 
fleet.’ Each of these clauses is then 
explained by a parenthetical addition: 
φιλίας χώρας by ὑποδέχεται yap ἡμᾶς 
Τάρας, and τὸ πέλαγος πολὺ περαιοῦσθαι 
by χαλεπὸν δὲ... μεῖναι. From these 
conditions results an alternative: either 
the Athenians myst advance with un- 
divided fleet or come on with only the 
part ready for battle leaving behind 
their transports. The consequence of 
the first possibility is expressed in 
καὶ ἡμῖν ἂν everlOeros εἴη βραδεῖά re καὶ 
κατ᾽ ὀλίγον προσπίπτουσα, and it (i.e. 
the fleet undivided so as not to break 
its order) coming up slowly and few at 



25 (ὑποδέχεται yap ἡμᾶς Τάρας), τὸ δὲ πέλαγος αὐτοῖς πολὺ 
περαιοῦσθαι μετὰ πάσης τῆς παρασκευῆς (χαλεπὸν δὲ διὰ 
πλοῦ μῆκος ἐν τάξει μεῖναι)" καὶ ἡμῖν ἂν εὐεπίθετος εἴη 
βραδεῖά τε καὶ κατ᾽ ὀλίγον προσπίπτουσα: εἰ δ᾽ αὖ τῷ ταχυ- 
ναυτοῦντι ἀθροωτέρῳ κουφίσαντες προσβάλοιεν, εἰ μὲν κώ- 
παις χρήσαιντο, ἐπιθοίμεθ᾽ ἂν κεκμηκόσιν, εἰ δὲ μὴ δοκοίη, 
» re A ea 3 , e \ 9 9\ 2 
ἔστι καὶ ὑποχωρῆσαι ἡμῖν és Τάραντα, οἱ δὲ per ὀλίγων 
ἐφοδίων ὡς ἐπὶ ναυμαχίᾳ περαιωθέντες ἀποροῖεν ἂν κατὰ 
χωρία ἐρῆμα, καὶ ἢ μένοντες πολιορκοῖντο av ἢ πειρώμενοι 
“A 4 ¥y \ 3 , A Ν Ν 
παραπλεῖν τήν τε ἄλλην παρασκενὴν ἀπολίποιεν ἂν καὶ τὰ 
“Ὁ 4 9 A ’ »ν» 9ε ’ 9 ~ 
τῶν πόλεων οὐκ ἂν βέβαια ἔχοντες, εἰ ὑποδέξοιντο, ἀθυμοῖεν. 
WOT ἔγωγε τούτῳ τῷ λογισμῷ ἡγοῦμαι ἀποκλῃομένους αὐτοὺς 6 



atimewould be αἱ ourmercy. ΤῊΘ second 
part of the alternative (εἰ δ᾽ αὖ) admits 
again of two possibilities: either we 
could attack them tired out with row- 
ing (and so with prospect of victory) 
or we could draw back before their 
superior force into the harbor of Taren- 
tum ; and they would then, in lack of 
supplies on a coast which offered no 
support, either while awaiting (uévovres) 
their transports be surrounded and shut 
in by us (πολιορκοῖντο ---- possibly Thuc. 
wrote ταλαιπωροῖντο reduced to straits) 
or, attempting to sail along the coast, in 
constant uncertainty whether the coast 
cities would receivethem (el ὑποδέξοιντο), 
would be disheartened.— 25. ὑποδέ- 
xerat: vivid pres. for fut. Cf. 80.18; 
1.121.183; 4.61.27.—26. περαιοῦσθαι : 
limiting inf. after πολύ. GMT. 763. 
See on 42. 8.— χαλεπὸν δὲ... μεῖναι: 
rightly taken parenthetically by Cl., 
partly for the sake of parallel sentence- 
structure, partly that ἡ παρασκευή may 
more readily be supplied as subj. of 
even Oeros etn. — 28. κατ᾽ ὀλίγον : neces- 

sary for κατὰ λόγον of all the better 
Mss.; and so was evidently read by 
the Schol. βραδέως re πλέουσα διὰ τὸν ἐν 
τῷ πελάγει κάματον καὶ οὐκ ἀθρόα. 

τῷ ταχυναντοῦντι: sc. μέρει. --- 29. 
ἁθροωτέρῳ : i.e. ἑθροωτέρῳ ὄντι or γενο- 
μένῳ. ---- κονφίσαντες : i.e. after loading 
all heavy baggage upon the transport 
vessels, thus lightening the others. Cf. 
Dio C. 33. 4 ὅπως κουφίσαντες διαφύγωσι. 
— 80. εἰ δὲ μὴ δοκοίη: sc. ἡμῖν ἐπιθέσθαι. 
- 81. ἔστι: supposed case stated as ἃ 
present possibility. Weidner suggested 
ἔσται.--- per ὀλίγων ἐφοδίων : in conse- 
quence of the κουφίσαντες. --- 88. πολι- 
ορκοῖντο ἄν: would be blockaded by us, 
and so cut off from supplies. — 34. τήν 
τε ἄλλην παρασκευὴν ἀπολίποιεν ἄν: 
would abandon the part of the fleet left 
behind.— καὶ τὰ τῶν πόλεων... εἰ ὑπο- 
δέξοιντο : Schol. καὶ οὐκ εἰδότες βεβαίως 
εἰ αἱ πόλεις ὑποδέξονται αὐτοὺς ἀθυμοῖεν 
ἄν. ---- 35. ἀθυμοῖεν : the ἄν of the ptc. 
clause belongs to the verb, as Arn. and 
Pp. explain. 

36. ἀποκλῃομένους : exclusos, held 




οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἀπᾶραι ἀπὸ Κερκύρας, ἀλλ᾽ ἢ διαβουλευσαμένους Kat 
κατασκόπαῖϊς χρωμένους ὅπόσοι T ἐσμὲν καὶ ἐν ᾧ χωρίῳ, 
ἐξωσθῆναι dv τῇ wpa ἐς χειμῶνα, ἢ καταπλαγέντας τῷ 
ἀδοκήτῳ καταλῦσαι ἂν τὸν πλοῦν, ἄλλως τε καὶ τοῦ ἐμπειρο- 

A A \ 
τάτου τῶν στρατηγῶν, ὡς ἐγὼ ἀκούω, ἄκοντος ἡγουμένον Kal 
9 a xa , 4 ¥ 3 , 9 > ε ων 
ἀσμένον dv πρόφασιν λαβόντος, εἴ τι ἀξιόχρεων ἀφ᾽ ἡμῶν 

Ss > A a 
ὀφθείη. ἀγγελλοίμεθα δ᾽ av εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖον - TOVT 

δ᾽ ἀνθρώπων πρὸς τὰ λεγόμενα Kal ai γνῶμαι ἵστανται, καὶ 
τοὺς προεπιχειροῦντας ἢ τοῖς γε ἐπιχειροῦσι προδηλοῦντας 
ὅτε ἀμυνοῦνται μᾶλλον πεφόβηνται, ἰσοκινδύνους ἡγούμενοι. 
ὅπερ ἂν νῦν ᾿Αθηναῖοι πάθοιεν. ἐπέρχονται γὰρ ἡμῖν ὡς 8 

οὐκ ἀμυνουμένοις, δικαίως κατεγνωκότες ὅτι αὐτοὺς οὐ μετὰ 

back, as 2.76.4; 4.34.22.—37. διαβον- 
λευσαμένους: (aor.) after long considera- 
tion this way and that.— 38. χρωμένους: 
pres. of frequency. — 39. ἐξωσθῆναι 
.. ἐς χειμῶνα : would through the late- 
ness of the season be overtaken by win- 
ter. Cf. Hdt. 1.31.11 ἐκκλγόμενοι τῇ 
ὥρῃ; Caes. B. G. 7.11 diei tem- 
pore exclusus in posterum op- 
pugnationem differt.—r@ ἀδο- 
κήτῳ: as below 50, 47.11; 4.36.11; 
5. 10. 88; 7. 29. 30, 48. 39. Cf. ἀδο- 
κήτως 8.45.25; 4.17.16. Not found 
elsewhere in Attic prose, but freq. in 
tragedy and late writers. Cf. ἀπροσ- 
δόκητον 2.61.18; ἀπροσδοκήτως 4. 29. 
17; 7.21.19.—42. πρόφασιν: sc. τοῦ 
τὸν πλοῦν καταλῦσα. . ---- εἴ τι ἀξιόχρεων 

. . ὀφθείη : if any considerable demon- 
stration on our part were seen. For 
ἀφ᾽ ἡμῶν, cf. 4. 126. 32. 

43. ἀγγελλοίμεθα δ᾽ ἂν... ἐπὶ τὸ 
πλεῖον : pers. const., as 37. 1. -- εὖ 
οἶδ᾽ ὅτι: διῖν., like δῆλον ὅτι, as below 
58, 38.2, 68. 14.— ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖον : with 

exaggeration, as ἐπὶ τὸ μεῖζον 1. 10. 20. 
Cf. Dio C. 41. 21. 4 ἐπὶ τὸ μεῖζον ἀγγέλ- 
λεσθαι and 47, 24.1 ἐπὶ τὸ φοβερώτε- 
ρον ἀγγέλλεσθαι. ---- τῶν δ᾽ ἀνθρώπων... 
ἵστανται : opinions of men veer accord- 
ing to what they are told. The figure is 
nautical, taken from the wind and sails. 
Ci. πρὸς τὴν ἐκείνων γνώμην αἰεὶ ἔστασαν 
4.56.17; πρὸς τὰς ξυμφορὰς καὶ τὰς γνώ- 
μας τρεπομένους 1. 140. 4.---4δ. τοὺς προε- 
πιχειροῦντας... πεφόβηνται : fear more 
those who commence an attack, or who 
at any rate show betimes to aggressors 
that they will defend themselves. For the 
thought, cf. 4. 92.§ 5. προεπιχειρεῖν else- 
where only in late writers. γε, put for- 
ward for emphasis, affects the whole 
clause. —46. ἰσοκινδύνους : equal to the 
risk, i.e. able to defend themselves. 
Elsewhere only in late Greek. Cf. Dio 
C.41. 55 ἰσόρροποι ἀλλήλοις Kal ἰσοκίνδυνοι 
éylyvovro.—47. ὅπερ ἂν νῦν... πάθοιεν: 
i.e. εἰ πεισθέντες ἐμοὶ ἀπαντήσαιτε αὐτοῖς. 
The idea is more fully expressed below 
(49) εἰ δ᾽ ἴδοιεν xré. 



Λακεδαιμονίων ἐφθείρομεν. εἰ δ᾽ ἴδοιεν Tapa γνώμην τολμή- 
50 σαντας, τῷ ἀδοκήτῳ μᾶλλον ἂν καταπλαγεῖεν ἢ τῇ ἀπὸ τοῦ 

ἀληθοῦς δυνάμει. 

“Πείθεσθε οὖν, μάλιστα μὲν ταῦτα τολμήσαντες, εἰ δὲ μή, 

9 ’ “4 3 N , ε , A A 
ὅτι τάχιστα τάλλα ἐς TOY πόλεμον ἑτοιμάζειν, καὶ παραστῆναι 

παντὶ τὸ μὲν καταφρονεῖν τοὺς ἐπιόντας ἐν τῶν ἔργων τῇ ἀλκῇ 
55 δείκνυσθαι, τὸ δ᾽ ἤδη τὰς μετὰ φόβου παρασκενὰς ἀσφαλε- 
στάτας νομίσαντας ὡς ἐπὶ κινδύνου πράσσειν χρησιμώτατον 
a A e . » ὃ \ 3.7 \ 3 a = 
dv ξυμβῆναι. οἱ δὲ ἄνδρες καὶ ἐπέρχονται καὶ ἐν πλῷ εὖ] 
> 9 » 9 A , g ¥ ’ 95 
οἷδ᾽ ὅτι ἤδη εἰσὶ καὶ ὅσον οὕπω πάρεισιν. 
86 Καὶ ὁ μὲν Ἑρμοκράτης τοσαῦτα εἶπε, τῶν δὲ Συρακοσίων 

48. δικαίωφ κατεγνωκότες: justly judg- 
ing meanly (xara-) of us.— 49. ἐφθεί- 
popev: conative.— mapa γνώμην : with 
reference to carey νωκότες. Schol. rapa 
τὴν δόξαν airadv.— 50. τῷ ἀδοκήτῳ... 
δυνάμει: for the thought, cf. 2. 89. 24 
τῷ οὐκ εἰκότι πλέον πεφόβηνται ἡμᾶς ἢ τῇ 
κατὰ λόγον παρασκευῇ. --- τῇ ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ἀληθοῦς δυνάμει: -- τῇ ἀληθεῖ δυνάμει. 

52. μάλιστα μὲν.... εἰ δὲ μή: as 1. 
82. 4, 35. 28, 40. 18; 2. 72. 8; 8. 88. 
24. 4. 104. 20; 5. 21. 15; 8. 91. 18. --- 
μάλιστα μὲν ταῦτα τολμήσαντες : (with 
πείθεσθε) if possible by the execution of 
this bold plan, i.e. to go to meet the 
Athenians at the Iapygian promontory 
and fight them from there. The follow- 
ing infs. are grammatically dependent 
on πείθεσθε, though this gives way per- 
haps in thought to some more general 
word like δεῖ. Hence it is unnecessary 
to explain even παραστῆναι = imv. (see 
5. 9. 26), as some do. — 53. παραστῆ- 
vas... δείκνυσθαι : if must be brought 
home to every one that contempt of in- 
vaders is shown in active defense. For 

παραστῆναι in this sense, cf. 68. 11, 
78.1; 4.61.8, 95.3. It has dependent 
on it the infs. δείκνυσθαι and ἂν ξυμβῆ- 
vat, and of these infs. in turn the subjs. 
are the articular infs. τὸ καταφρονεῖν 
and τὸ rpdocev.— 54. τὸ καταφρονεῖν : 
(cf. 88. 18) with pers. acc., as 8. 82. 6. 
- τῶν ἔργων τῇ ἀλκῇ: i.e. defense 
manifested by deeds. For position of 
gen., cf. 1. 9. 25; 5. 47. 65; 7. 24. δ. 
ἀλκή in this old poetical sense, see on 
8. 30. 7, and C. F. Smith, Proc. Amer. 
Phil. Assoc. XXII, xviii.— ὅδ. ἤδη: 
at once (cf. 25. 6, 29. 6), belongs with 
πράσσειν.--- Tas μετὰ φόβου trapackevds: 
i.e. preparations made in full sense of 
the danger. Cf. δεδιότας παρεσκευάσθαι 
2.11. 21.— 56. ὡς ἐπὶ κινδύνου: as in 
the face of danger, with πράσσει». ---- 
χρησιμώτατον dv ξυμβῆναι: cf. 5. 92. 
1.—58. ὅσον οὕπω πάρεισιν: are all 
but present, as 4.125.9; 8.92.45. Cf. 
ὅσον οὐ παρεῖναι 1. 36.8 and freq. 

35. The speech of Hermocrates has 
little effect. Athenagoras replies, — 
1. τοσαῦτα: esp. after short speeches, 



ὁ δῆμος ἐν πολλῇ πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἔριδι ἦσαν, οἱ μὲν ws 
οὐδενὶ dv τρόπῳ ἔλθοιεν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι οὐδ᾽ ἀληθῆ ἐστιν ἃ 
λέγει, οἱ δέ, εἰ καὶ ἔλθοιεν, τί dv δράσειαν αὐτοὺς 6 τι οὐκ ἂν 
A 9 , ¥ δὲ \ , ὍΝ 3 
μεῖζον ἀντιπάθοιεν; ἄλλοι δὲ καὶ πάνν καταφρονοῦντες ἐς 
γέλωτα ἔτρεπον τὸ πρᾶγμα᾽ ὀλίγον δ᾽ ἣν τὸ πιστεῦον τῷ 
Ἑρμοκράτει καὶ φοβούμενον τὸ μέλλον. παρελθὼν δ᾽ αὐτοῖς 3 
᾿Αθηναγόρας, ὃς δήμου τε προστάτης ἦν καὶ ἐν τῷ παρόντι 

πυιθανώτατος τοῖς πολλοῖς, ἔλεγε τοιάδε" 

*€so much and no more.”’ Cf, 24.1 and 
see on 2.12.1; 3.31.1.— 2. 6 δῆμος ἐν 
πολλῇ ... ἔριδι ἦσαν, οἱ μὲν... of δέ: cf. 
κατὰ ξυστάσεις γιγνόμενοι ἐν πολλῇ ἔριδι 
ἦσαν, οἱ μὲν κελεύοντες ἐξιέναι, οἱ δέ τινες 
οὐκ ἐῶντες 2.21.15; also ἐγένετο οὖν ἔρις 
τοῖς ἀνθρώποις μὴ λοιμὸν ὠνομάσθαι 2.54.6. 
For collective noun with pl. verb, see 
on 82. 7. — οἱ μέν : sc. λέγοντες. --- 8. a 
λέγει: sc. ὁ ἙἭρμοκράτης, referring to 
the assertions made by him in 88. ὃ 2 
with reference to the undertaking of 
the Athenians, to which passage refers 
also τὸ πιστεῦον τῷ ‘Epyoxpdre (6). Cl., 
St., and Hude adopt the conjecture 
of Madvig (Advv. I, 326) λέγεται, as 
reported.— 4. οἱ δέ: adopted by nearly 
all recent editors, following Portus, 
for rots δέ of the Mss.; for the latter, 
with which must be supplied ἣν ἔρις 
(= λόγος ἐριστικός, ἐρώτησις ἐριστική), is 
too hard an anacoluthon between οἱ μέν 
and ἄλλοι δέ. Such transitions do occur, 
in longer periods, from an oblique 
case to nom., as 24. 11, but not from 
nom. to oblique case. Steup retains 
τοῖς δέ, ‘‘ however harsh the anacolu- 
thon, until a satisfactory emendation 
is found.’’ — εἰ καὶ ἔλθοιεν : καί express- 
ing skeptical doubt, as in 33.15. See 
on 1.15.7.—l...3rvovK: = οὐδὲν 8 

τι οὐκ. Cf. 3.81.24; 7.87. 14,25. See 
on 8.39.38. Kr. Spr. 51, 10,11; Kthn. 
555, 5.— 5. καὶ πάνυ καταφρονοῦντες: 
just what Hermocrates had urged them 
not to do, 33. 18.— és γέλωτα ἔτρεπον: 
cf. Hdt. 7.105.1; Ar. Vesp. 1260.— 
6. τὸ moredov: Thuc. freq. uses the 
neut,. ptc. or adj. in personal collective 
sense. Cf. τὸ ἀντίπαλον 2. 45.5; τὸ 
θεραπεῦον, τὸ μὴ ὑπεῖκον 8. 39. 29; τὸ 
εἶκον, τὸ ἐπιόν 4.61. 20; τὸ μαχόμενον 4. 
96.17; τό τε φαῦλον καὶ τὸ μέσον καὶ τὸ 
πάνυ ἀκριβές 6.18.35; τὸ ὑπήκοον 6. 69. 
25. See C. F. Smith, Trans. Amer. 
Phil. Assoc. XXV, 76-79. 

7. παρελθὼν αὐτοῖς : see on 15. 19. 
— 8. Shpov προστάτης: as 3. 75. 9, 
82.4; 4.46.15, 66.10; 8.89.31. Cf. 
προστασία τοῦ δήμου 2.65.49; προστασία 
τοῦ πλήθους 6. 89. 17; προεστάναι τοῦ 
δήμον 8. 70.12; 6. 28.8; 8. 65.6; προ- 
στῆναι τῆς πόλεως 2.65.17. See on 4. 
21.9. It was not a state office, Mit ἃ 
position of influence and confidence. 
See Arist. Ath. Pol. 28 and Holm, 
Gesch. Siziliens II, 420.—9. πιθανώτα- 
Tos τοῖς πολλοῖς : cf. the remark about 
the demagogue Cleon ὧν καὶ és τὰ ἄλλα 
βιαιότατος τῶν πολιτῶν τῷ τε δήμῳ παρὰ 
πολὺ ἐν τῷ τότε πιθανώτατος 8. 36. 26; 
also 4, 21. 9, 





“Τοὺς μὲν ᾿Αθηναίους ὅστις μὴ βούλεται οὕτω κακῶς 1 
φρονῆσαι καὶ ὑποχειρίους ἡμῖν γενέσθαι ἐνθάδε ἐλθόντας, 

ἢ δειλός ἐστιν ἢ τῇ πόλει οὐκ εὔνους: τοὺς δ᾽ ἀγγέλλοντας 

Ν le) Ἁ , e Aa ~ A A , 
τὰ τοιαῦτα καὶ περιφόβους ὑμᾶς ποιοῦντας τῆς μὲν τόλμης 

οὐ θαυμάζω, τῆς δὲ ἀξυνεσίας, εἰ μὴ οἴονται ἔνδηλοι εἶναι. 

οἱ γὰρ δεδιότες ἰδίᾳ τι βούλονται τὴν πόλιν ἐς ἔκπληξιν κα- 

θιστάναι, ὅπως τῷ κοινῷ φόβῳ τὸν σφέτερον ἐπηλυγάζων- 

ἃ “ Φ ε 9 , a ? A 9 > A 
TaL* καὶ νῦν αὗται αἱ ἀγγελίαι τοῦτο δύνανται, (αἷ) οὐκ ἀπὸ 

Speech οὗ Athenagoras (36-40) 

86. However much we might wish 
the Athenians to attack us, the reports 
of their approach are only senseless 
fabrications of people who are always 
exciting disquiet. The insight and ex- 
perience of the Athenians make such 
folly on their part incredible. —1. τοὺς 
μὲν ᾿Αθηναίους. . . οὕτω : accidental 
hexameter, as 2. 49. 18. For accidental 
trimeters, cf. 1.80.6; 3.40.39; 4.17. 
6. The ancients disliked such occur- 
rences in prose ; cf. Cic. De Orat. 3. 47. 
182; Quint. 9.4.72. rods μὲν ᾿Αθηναί- 
ous, aS antithesis to τοὺς δ᾽ ἀγγέλλοντας, 
placed before the rel. Cf. 1. 5.11; 
3. 89. ὅδ. --οὕτω κακῶς φρονῆσαι: i.e. 
as is alleged, with the result expressed 
in καὶ ὑποχειρίους ἡμῖν γενέσθαι ἐνθάδε 
ἐλθόντας, where chief stress is on ἐλθόν- 
τας. The sent. is colloquial, as indeed 
the tone of the whole speech. — 3. οὐκ 
εὔνους : = κακόνους 24. 15.— 4. τῆς μὲν 
τόλμης οὐ θαυμάζω, τῆς δὲ ἀξυνεσίας: I 
am astonished not at their audacity but 
at their simplicity (cf. τολμήσαντες 34. 
52). τῆς μὲν τόλμης said mockingly, as 
Cl. explains ; for Athenagoras ascribes 
the whole alarm to the scare of his op- 
ponents. But Steup thinks it clear from 
38. ὃ 2 that Athenagoras considers that 
those who are spreading these reports 

are not acting sincerely and hence 
does not ascribe fear to them. For the 
gens. of cause with θαυμάζειν, cf. ἀλγεῖν 
2.65.14; ὀνειδίζειν 3.62.15; χαλεπῶς φέ- 
ρειν 2.62.18. See on 4.11. 17. ---- ὅ. εἰ 
μὴ οἴονται ἔνδηλοι εἶναι: if they fancy 
their object is not transparent. Steup 
thinks the orator means that those 
who spread the reports would use the 
general panic to get control of the 
state (τῆς πόλεως ἄρχειν 38. 6). 

6. οἱ yap δεδιότες ἰδίᾳ τι: for those who 
have any private grounds of alarm. — és 
ἔκπληξιν καθιστάναι : see on 84. 23. — 
7. ὅπως. .. ἐπηλυγάζωνται: that with 
the general fear they may hide their own. 
So Cl. and most recent editors, reading, 
for τὸ σφέτερον of the Mss., τὸν σφέ- 
τερον. Cf. Schol. ὅπως κοινῇ φοβήσαντες 
ἅπαντας τὸν ἴδιον φόβον ἀποκρύψωνται, 
and Valla, ut publico metu suum 
occultent. Cf. also Dexippus (Hist. 
Gr. Min., Dind. I, p. 196) imitating 
this passage, ὅπως ἂν τὸ σφέτερον δέος 
ἐπηλυγάζησθε. See ΑΡΡ.---ἐπηλνγάζων- 
ται: rare word, derived from ἠλύγη 
(= oxla, σκότος). See Hesych. s.v. ἠλυ- 
γισμένος. ---- 8. καὶ νῦν... τοῦτο δύναν- 
ται: so now these rumors (mean this) 
have this object. For δύνασθαι = valere, 
cf. 1.141. δ; 3.46. 10.— dat): which, 
first added by Cl., is now generally 


9 4 3 YN 232. Q_ A 9 3 Ν 4 a ᾿ 
ταὐτομάτου, ἐκ δὲ dvi ρῶν, οἵπερ αἰεὶ τάδε κινοῦσι, ξύγκεινται. 
10 ὑμεῖς δὲ ἦν εὖ βουλεύησθε, οὐκ ἐξ ὧν οὗτοι ἀγγέλλουσι σκο- 8 

A ‘ a \ 9 2” 9 > 3 ΘῈ ἃ od Ν 
ποῦντες λογιεῖσθε τὰ εἰκότα, ἀλλ᾽ ἐξ ὧν ἂν ἄνθρωποι δεινοὶ 

δ aA» ν > v2 , ς᾽ A , 
καὶ πολλῶν ἔμπειροι, ὥσπερ ἐγὼ ᾿Αθηναίους ἀξιῶ, δράσειαν. 

9 δ 9 Ἁ > AN 4 e , Ἃ 
οὐ γὰρ αὐτοὺς εἰκὸς Πελοποννησίους τε ὑπολιπόντας καὶ 4 
δ 3 ~ 4 a, a ’ > 3 ¥ 
τὸν ἐκεῖ πόλεμον μήπω βεβαίως καταλελυμένους em ἀλλον 
, 9 9 Ud ε 4, 3 A 9 QA »ν» 9 ~ 
15 πόλεμον οὐκ ἐλάσσω ἑκόντας ἐλθεῖν, ἐπεὶ ἔγωγε ἀγαπᾶν 
οἴομαι αὐτοὺς ὅτι οὐχ ἡμεῖς ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνους ἐρχόμεθα, πόλεις 

a Ἁ 9 ’ 
τοσαῦται καὶ οὕτω μεγάλαι. 

“Ei δὲ δή, ὥσπερ λέγονται, ἔλθοιεν, ἱκανωτέραν ἡγοῦμαι 

adopted, was prob. lost owing to the 
final letters of δύνανται. The rel. seems 
necessary to show that the following 
clause is explanatory of ἀγγελίαι and 
not epexegetical of τοῦτο. If (at) be 
not inserted, we must put a semicolon 
(7) after δύνανται and regard the follow- 
ing sent. as an asyndetical explanation 
of ἀγγελίαι. --- ἀπὸ ταὐτομάτον: of them- 
selves, sua sponte, as 2. 77.17. With 
this, ξύγκεινται, Which as pf. pass. of συν- 
τίθημι means have been invented, has the 
special force of ἀρχὴν εἰλήφασι. ----9. ἐκ 
δὲ ἀνδρῶν : stronger than ὑπὸ ἀνδρῶν. 
See on 2.49.1: 8.69. 8: and Ο. F. Smith, 

Trans. Amer. Phil. Assoc. XXV, 66f. | 

—olrep αἰεὶ τάδε κινοῦσι: who are always 
stirring up things here, i.e. disturbing 
the public mind, as explained by the or- 
ator himself 38. ὃ 2. Cf. the pass. κινεῖ- 
σθαι 3.82.3; 4.76.21; and κίνησις 1.1.8. 

10. οὐκ ἐξ ὧν... σκοποῦντες: not 
forming your judgment from what these 
men report. Cf. 5. 68.7 ἐκ τοιοῦδε λογι- 
σμοῦ ἔξεστί τῳ σκοπεῖν. ---- 11. δεινοί : 
Schol. συνετοί, φρόνιμοι. Cf. Isocr. 12. 
229 ἄνδρα δεινὸν καὶ πολλῶν ἔμπειρον». ---- 
12. ὥσπερ ἐγὼ ᾿Αθηναίους ἀξιῶ : just as 
I hold the Athenians, sc. δεινοὺς καὶ πολ- 

λῶν ἐμπείρους εἶναι. Kr., who 80 ex- 
plains with Cl., suggests οἵονσ περ ἐγὼ 
᾿Αθηναίους ἀξιῶ, comparing 8.14. 7 ylyve- 
σθε δὲ ἄνδρες οἵουσπερ ὑμᾶς of τε Ἕλληνες 
ἀξιοῦσι καὶ τὸ ὑμέτερον δέος βούλεται. St. 
supplies ἂν δρᾶσαι. ---- δράσειαν : poten- 
tial, as ἄν in ἐξ ὧν ἄν belongs to the 
verb. Cf. 7. 48. 22. 

13. Πελοποννησίους ὑπολιπόντας: 
comparison with 10.1 (πολεμίους πολ- 
ods ἐνθάδε ὑπολιπόντα) and 17, 26 
(οὕσπερ viv φασι πολεμίους ὑπολιπόνταΞ) 
suggests the loss here of πολεμίους. But 
the modifier here needed is sufficiently 
implied in the following closely cor- 
related ptc. clause, καὶ τὸν ἐκεῖ πόλεμον 
μήπω βεβαίως καταλελυμένους, before they 
have completely ended the war there.— 
14. τὸν ἐκεῖ πόλεμον : see on 84. 18. --- 
μήπω : not οὔπω since καταλελυμένους is 
part of the inf. clause dependent on 
εἰκός.---καταλελυμένους : of settling hos- 
tilities, as 1.24.19 and freq. Cf. Hat. 
7. 146. 2 καταλυσάμενοι τὰς ἔχθρας. See 
on 1. 81. 9.— 16. αὐτοὺς... ἐκείνους: 
both referring to the Athenians. Cf. 
61. 18, 20, and see on 1. 182. 31. 

87. If however they should risk an 
attack, with their relatively inferior 



, ? ~ 9 Ν , ¥ 
Σικελίαν Πελοποννήσον διαπολεμῆσαι ὅσῳ κατὰ πάντα ἀμει- 
νον ἐξήρτυται, τὴν δὲ ἡμετέραν πόλιν αὐτὴν τῆς νῦν στρα- 

A 9 9 ᾽ Ν 9 \ , » “\ 
τιᾶς, ὡς φασιν, ἐπιούσης, καὶ εἰ Sis τοσαύτη ἔλθοι, πολὺ 
Τὰ » es > 9 9 ¥f>? 9 3 ’ὔ 
κρείσσω εἶναι. οἷς γ᾽ ἐπίσταμαι οὐθ᾽ ἵππους ἀκολουθήσον- 
τας, οὐδ᾽ αὐτόθεν πορισθησομένους εἰ μὴ ὀλίγους τινὰς παρὰ 
9 v4 »Δ93 ε ’ 9 la A ε , > ἃ ~ 
Ἐγεσταίων, ov? ὁπλίτας ἰσοπλήθεις τοῖς ἡμετέροις, ἐπὶ νεῶν 
9 , ’ bs) ἃ Ἁ b ~ ~ ‘\ 4 
ye ἐλθόντας (μέγα yap τὸ καὶ αὐταῖς ταῖς ναυσὶ Kovdats 
τοσοῦτον πλοῦν δεῦρο κομισθῆναι), τήν τε ἄλλην παρα- 

᾽ν 9 a 2d N , 4 ~ 9 9 4 
σκευὴν ὅσην δεῖ ἐπὶ πόλιν τοσήνδε πορισθῆναι οὐκ ὀλίγην 
οὖσαν. ὦστε (παρὰ τοσοῦτον γιγνώσκω) μόλις ἄν μοι δοκοῦ- 

- 9 ’ e 9 ’ 9 4 ’ 3 » 
σιν, εἰ πόλιν ἑτέραν τοσαύτην ὅσαι Συράκουσαΐί εἰσιν ἔλθοιεν 

forces, they would surely be destroyed. 
—2. ὅσῳ: after, as well as before, a 
comp., in so far as (because). Cf. 1.82. 
19, and see on 1. 68. 11.— 3. αὐτήν: 
antithesis to Σικελίαν, Syracuse alone. 
Cf. 1.189. 16; 3.27. 9.— τῆς νῦν orpa- 
τιᾶς : governed by κρείσσω. The attrib. 
ptc. may stand after the noun, since 
there is another modifier (νῦν). See on 
1.11. 19.— 5. οὔθ᾽ ἵππους : has its cor- 

_Telative in οὔθ᾽ (correctly restored by 

Haacke for οὐδ᾽) ὁπλίτας ἰσοπλήθεις, both 
to ‘be construed with ἀκολουθήσοντας. 
The clause οὐδ᾽ αὐτόθεν πορισθησομένους 
modifies ἵππους alone. As to ἵπποι, cf. 
43.16, 98.2.—7. ἰσοπλήθεις: rare word. 
For similar formations, cf. looxivduvos 
84, 46; ἰσοπαλής 2.39.9; ἰσόρροπος 2. 
42.7; 7.71. 2.— πὶ νεῶν ye ἐλθόντας : 
in sense of fut. pf. belonging to ὁπλίτας 
and explaining why the Athenian lead- 
ers would not have a hoplite force equal 
in numbers to the Syracusan.— 8. péya 
γὰρ. .. κομισθῆναι: for it is a great 
thing to be brought so long a sail with 
actually their ships only, unladen as 
they are, i.e. with crew only, without 
hoplites or provisions. τοσοῦτον πλοῦν, 

const. as ὅσον πλοῦν 30.18. Abresch’s 
suggestion that the whole sent. is par- 
enthetical has been generally approved. 
—9. τήν τε ἄλλην παρασκενήν. . . 
οὖσαν : third member dependent on οἷς 
γ᾽ ἐπίσταμαι, and that all the rest of the 
equipment which must be provided against 
so large a city is not small, and there- 
fore not easy to be procured by them. 
τὴν ἄλλην παρασκευήν refers prob. to 
provisions, arms, and implements. To 
take τήν re ἄλλην παρασκευήν with πορι- 
σθῆναι construed also with μέγα, as has 
usually been done, would weaken the 
force of καὶ αὐταῖς ταῖς ναυσὶ κούφαις and 
make the connection τήν τε ἄλλην un- 
intelligible. See App. 

11. παρὰ τοσοῦτον γιγνώσκω : by 80 
much do I decide otherwise, i.e. so much 
do I differ from those who spread these 
reports. Schol. παρὰ τοσοῦτον διαφέρο-: 
μαι τοῖς τὰ ἕτερα διαγγέλλουσι. See on 
8. 49. 18. This expression is parenthet- 
ical here, just as εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι in 34: 48, 57. 
-- μόλις ἄν: ἄν, which belongs to δια- 
φθαρῆναι, is there repeated. See on 4. 
18.17. GMT. 223; Gild., Syn. 467. --- 
12. εἰ πόλιν ἑτέραν τοσαύτην. .. τὸν 



ἔχοντες Kal ὅμορον οἰκήσαντες τὸν πόλεμον ποιοῖντο, οὐκ ἂν 
, A . , . 9 , , 

παντάπασι διαφθαρῆναι, 7 πού γε δὴ ἐν πάσῃ πολεμίᾳ Σικε- 

15 λίᾳ (ξυστήσεται yap) στρατοπέδῳ τε ἐκ νεῶν ἱδρυθέντι καὶ ἐκ 

σκηνιδίων καὶ ἀναγκαίας παρασκευῆς οὐκ ἐπὶ πολὺ ὑ ὑπὸ τῶν 

ἡμετέρων ἱππέων ἐξιόντες. τό τε ξύμπαν οὐδ᾽ av κρατῆσαι 

αὐτοὺς τῆς γῆς ἡγοῦμαι" 
κρείσσω νομίζω. 

τοσούτῳ τὴν ἡμετέραν παρασκενὴν 

Αλλὰ ταῦτα, ὥσπερ ἐγὼ λέγω, ot τε ᾿Αθηναῖοι γιγνώ- 

σκοντες τὰ σφέτερα αὐτῶν εὖ O10 ὅτι σῴζουσι, καὶ ἐνθένδε 

πόλεμον ποιοῖντο: the condition as- 
sumed by the speaker as most favor- 
able for the Athenians is made clear 
from its opposite, the real state of the 
case: that in a land entirely hostile 
they would have their base only in an 
ill-provided camp and would be with- 
out freedom of movement owing to the 
enemy’s cavalry. The opp. condition 
is expressed by πόλιν ἑτέραν τοσαύτην 
ὅσαι Συράκουσαί εἰσιν ἔχοντες καὶ ὅμορον 
οἰκήσαντες, i.e. if they had in possession 
another city (in Sicily) as large as Syr- 
acuse and had settled therein contiguous 
(to Syracuse). εἰ ἔλθοιεν means here 
merely if they should come (against us), 
and we have here a case of the opp. 
character to ἐπὶ νεῶν ἐλθεῖν (cf.1.7 ἐπὶ 
νεῶν γε ἐλθόντας, and 1.15 στρατοπέδῳ 
τε ἐκ νεῶν ἱδρυθέντι). Hence it is un- 
necessary to bracket, with Cl., ἔλθοιεν, 
or with v. H., St., etc., ἔλθοιεν ἔχοντες. 
L. Herbst (on 2. 101 f.) explained 
πόλιν ἑτέραν ἔχοντες, “ΠῚ another 
city on board.’’ But the real meaning 
of Athenagoras is exactly that the 
Athenians ἐκ νεῶν would not be in any 
way dangerous in their advance upon 
the Syracusans. Cf. also 86. § 3.— 
14. ἦ πού ye δή: much less then would 
they not be entirely destroyed. Cf. 

1. 142. 7.—év πάσῃ πολεμίᾳ Σικελίᾳ : 
cf. ἐς ἀλλοτρίαν πᾶσαν 21. 12. --- 1δ. ξυ- 
στήσεται: οἵ. 21. 4, 88. 26, 79. 18 ; 7. 15. 
4͵ --στρατοπέδῳ τε ἐκ νεῶν ἱδρυθέντι: 
and in a camp pitched right from the 
ships (and therefore lacking in much). 
— καὶ ἐκ oxnviBlov .. . ἐξιόντες : third 
member. σκηνίδιον found only here.— 
16. ἀναγκαίας παρασκενῆς : i.e. from 
meagre equipment and war materials; 
what was absolutely necessary rather 
than sufficient. For dvayxatas in this 
sense, cf. 2.70.5; 5.8.10; 7. 69. 21.— 
ὑπὸ τῶν ἡμετέρων ἱππέων : by reason of 
our cavalry, as 7. 18. 80.--- 17, τό τε ξύμ- 
παν: for τὸ δὲ ξύμπαν of the Mss., as 
Haase emended, acc. to Thuc.’s usage 
for such comprehensive formulas. See 
on 3. 82.34. It is only when a gen- 
eral remark is expressly opposed to 
what went before, as in 8. 116. 6, that 
Thuc. uses 5¢.— οὐδ᾽ ἂν κρατῆσαι τῆς 
γῆς : would not even effect alanding. Cf. 
23.7, and see on 8. 85. 18. 

88. The Athenians, too, are aware of 
this. But ambitious men from here 
wish, by exciting fear of dangers from 
without, to help themselves into power; 
these I oppose with word and deed. — 
1, ταῦτα: with γιγνώσκοντες. ---- 2. τὰ 
σφέτερα αὐτῶν... σῴζουσι: cf. 86. 





¥ ὃ » » ¥ a , A ἃ 3 Ν 
αν Pes OUTE OVTA OUTE AV γένομενα λογοποιοῦσιν, ους έγω 9 

9 A A 9 ϑ > \ 9 » » , A 
ov νῦν πρῶτον, GAN αἰεὶ ἐπίσταμαι ἤτοι λόγοις γε τοιοῖσδε 
καὶ ἔτι τούτων κακουργοτέροις ἢ ἔργοις βουλομένους κατα- 

, . » A > A - ’ Ψ 
πλήξαντας τὸ ὑμέτερον πλῆθος αὐτοὺς τῆς πόλεως ἄρχειν. 
καὶ δέδοικα μέντοι μήποτε πολλὰ πειρῶντες καὶ κατορθώ- 
σωσιν: ἡμεῖς δὲ κακοί, πρὶν ἐν τῷ παθεῖν ὦμεν, προφυλά- 

, Ν 9 , 3 A peel. 9 29 x ε 
ξασθαί τε καὶ αἰσθόμενοι ἐπεξελθεῖν. τοιγάρτοι dv αὐτὰ ἡ 

l4 e ~ > Ud \ e 4 , A Ν Ἁ 

πόλις ἡμῶν ὀλιγάκις μὲν ἡσυχάζει, στάσεις δὲ πολλὰς καὶ 

9 ~ 9 N A ’ ’ A N e A 9 
ἄγωνας οὗ πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους πλείονας 7 πρὸς αὑτὴν ἀναι- 

A a , » 9 Ν ’ 9 ’ 4. 3 A 

ρεῖται, τυραννίδας δὲ ἔστιν ὅτε καὶ δυναστείας ἀδίκους. ὧν ἐγὼ 
’ »ν ε A 3 ’ 9 ’ 9139 ε “A 

πειράσομαι, ἦν ye ὑμεῖς ἐθέλητε ἔπεσθαι, μήποτε ἐφ᾽ ἡμῶν 

A Yd ε A A ‘ Ν ’ Ἁ Q 

τι περιιδεῖν γενέσθαι, ὑμᾶς μὲν τοὺς πολλοὺς πείθων τοὺς δὲ 

15 ἀγαπᾶν οἴομαι αὐτοὺς ὅτι οὐχ ἡμεῖς 
ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνους ἐρχόμεθα. The pres. is cona- 
tive. —e} οἶδ᾽ ὅτι: as 34. 43. — ἐνθένδε 
ἄνδρες: see on 10. 5.—3. οὔτε ὄντα 
οὔτε ἂν γενόμενα: = a οὔτε ἔστιν οὔτε ἂν 
γένοιτο. --- λογοποιοῦσιν : cf. Theophr. 
Char. 8 ἡ λογοποιία ἐστὶ σύνθεσις ψευδῶν 
λόγων καὶ πράξεων. 

4, Aro... γε... ἤ: see on 84. 10. --- 
λόγοις. . . ἔργοις: instrumental dats. 
‘with καταπλήξαντας. --- 5. βουλομένους : 
suppl. ptc. with ἐπίσταμαι and limited 
by ἄρχειν. --- καταπλήξαντας : cf. 36. 6 
τὴν πόλιν és ἔκπληξιν καθιστάναι. The 
ptc. belongs as means to ἄρχειν. --- 
7. μέντοι: confirmatory, to be sure. — 
πολλὰ πειρῶντες kal κατορθώσωσιν: by 
repeated attempts they may finally suc- 
ceed. xal (etiam) of purposed result. — 
8. ἡμεῖς δὲ κακοί: sc. ἐσμέν, i.e. inde- 
pendent, not depending on μήποτε. The 
orator makes emphatic the reproach 
that the Syracusans do not know how 
to take timely precautions. For κακός 
with inf. (GMT. 763; Kr. Spr. 55, 3, 3), 
Kr. cites Hdt. 6. 108.15 τιμωρέειν ἐοῦσι 

οὐ κακοῖσι, and Soph. O. R. 445 μανθάνειν 
ἐγὼ κακὸς σοῦ. For the like const. ἄριστοι 
ἀπατᾶσθαι, see on 8. 88. 21.— πρὶν... 
ὦμεν : 566 on 10.18, 29. 7.—9. αἰσθό- 
μενοι: 80. τὰς ér:Bouhds.—étreEeNOetv : sc. 
τοῖς ἐπιβουλεύουσιν, bring to account (the 
plotters). Cf. 3.38.5; 5.89.3. 

τοιγάρτοι δι᾽ αὐτά : τοιγάρτοι (only 
here in Thuc.) referring to ἡμεῖς δὲ... 
ἐπεξελθεῖν, and δι᾿ αὐτά to the persistent 
plots against the state. — ἣ πόλις... 
ἡσυχάζει: cf. 36. 9 οἵπερ αἰεὶ τάδε κινοῦσι. 
— 12. τυραννίδας δέ: i.e. of Gelon and 
Hiero (485-467 8.c.).— καὶ δυναστείας 
ἀδίκους : 1.6. ὀλίγων ἀνδρῶν (cf. 3. 62. 
11; 4. 78. 15), referring to the unquiet 
time following the expulsion of the 
tyrants. Cf. Diod. 11. 72f., 76. With 
both nouns sc. ἀναιρεῖται in the sense of 
ὑπομένει, πάσχει. 

av: depends on τι (14). --- 14. περι- 
ιδεῖν γενέσθαι: for inf. after περιιδεῖν, 
see GMT. 908, 6. --- ὑμᾶς τοὺς πολλούς : 
as Dem. 8. 1 (cf. τὸ ὑμέτερον πλῆθος 1. 6); 
opp. to ὀλίγους in 1. 19. — τοὺς δὲ τὰ τοι- 
αῦτα μηχανωμένους κολάζων : either, as 



A A ? , A 4 9 a 
15 τὰ τοιαῦτα μηχανωμένους κολάζων, μὴ μόνον αὐτοφώρους 

(χαλεπὸν γὰρ ἐπιτυγχάνειν), ἀλλὰ καὶ ὧν βούλονται μὲν 

δύνανται δ᾽ ov (τὸν γὰρ ἐχθρὸν οὐχ ὧν δρᾷ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ 
τῆς διανοίας προαμύνεσθαι χρή, εἴπερ καὶ μὴ προφυλαξά- 
μενός τις προπείσεται), τοὺς δ᾽ αὖ ὀλίγους τὰ μὲν ἐλέγχων, 

20 τὰ δὲ φυλάσσων, τὰ δὲ καὶ διδάσκων: μάλιστα yap δοκώ 

» 9 . ~ . 
ἄν μοι οὕτως ἀποτρέπειν τῆς κακουργίας. 

“ Καὶ δῆτα, ὃ πολλάκις ἐσκεψάμην, τί καὶ βούλεσθε, ὦ 

, , ¥ ¥ 9)\2 ᾽ν» » ε \ 
νεώτεροι; πότερον ἄρχειν ἤδη; ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ Evvopov: ὁ δὲ 

νόμος ἐκ τοῦ μὴ δύνασθαι ὑμᾶς μᾶλλον ἢ δυναμένους ἐτέθη 

Cl. explains, democratic leaders am- 
bitious for the tyranny, or, as Pp., a 
set of disturbers belonging to the oli- 
garchs. See App. — 15. μὴ μόνον : not 
᾿ οὗ because the ptc. belongs to the inf. 
clause (περιιδεῖν). ---- 16. av: gen. of the 
thing for which, with κολάζειν, as 2. 74. 
16; so with προαμύνεσθαι 1. 18 below, 
and ἀμύνασθαι 1.96.5. See on 4.11.17. 
—18. εἴπερ... τις προπείσεται : since 
indeed the man who is not first to guard 
will be first to suffer. — 19. τοὺς δ᾽ αὖ oXl- 
yous: opp. to ὑμᾶς μὲν τοὺς πολλούς (14). 
Cf. 2.44.16; 5.14.12, 68.6; 8. 78. 10, 
104. 7.— ra μὲν ἐλέγχων... διδάσκων: 
of these three means to be used against 
the aristocrats the two first are actual 
precautions: ἐλέγχειν, to convict them 
of guilt in dangerous plots, φυλάσσειν, to 
watch them in all their conduct. Only 
the third, διδάσκειν, is the orator’s task, 
which is immediately carried out in 
what follows. Pp. wrongly finds the 
ἐλέγχειν in the conclusion of this chap- 
ter and in the next, the διδάσκειν in 
c. 40. καί. before διδάσκων represents 
this teaching as not yet hopeless, and to 
this alone refers the foll. hope of suc- 
cess — δοκῶ ἄν μοι οὕτως (i.e. διδάσκων) 

ἀποτρέπειν τῆς κακουργίας. καὶ δῆτα, and 
now, ironical, a vivid transition to the 
διδάσκειν, While both ὃ πολλάκις ἐσκεψά- 
μὴν (a question which I have often con- 
sidered) and καί in τί καὶ βούλεσθε make 
the effort of these people appear en- 
tirely unjustified. 

22. ὦ νεώτεροι : from this address it 
is clear that the majority of the ὀλίγοι, 
at least as described here by the orator, 
were younger men. Hermocrates in- 
deed was no longer young, as he had 
represented Syracuse at the peace con- 
gress at Gela in 424 n.c. (4. 58ff.); cf. 
also 72.§2. In 39.11 also the orator 
puts the δυνάμενοι by the side of the νέοι. 
— 23. πότερον: we have in this and the 
foll. ἀλλὰ δή (25) the same form of refu- 
tation by means of questions as in 1.80. 
16, only that there the second question 
is introduced by simple ἀλλά. --- ἤδη: 
already, i.e. before you have reached 
the required age for office. — ὁ δὲ νόμος 
... ἀτιμάζειν : Schol. λέγει περὶ τῶν νέων 
ὅτι εἴργονται τῆς ἀρχῆς διὰ νόμον οὐκ ἀτιμα- 
ζόμενοι, ἀλλὰ κωλυόμενοι διὰ τὴν ἡλικίαν. 
— 24. ἐκ : with causal force, as not sel- 
domin Thuc., esp. with pass. verb forms, 
Cf. 40. 16.— μᾶλλον ἤ : the comparison 



25 ἀτιμάζειν. ἀλλὰ δὴ μὴ μετὰ πολλών ἰσονομεῖσθαι; καὶ πῶς 
89 δίκαιον τοὺς αὐτοὺς μὴ τῶν αὐτῶν ἀξιοῦσθαι; φήσει τις 
5 , ¥ ‘ ¥o¥ ΕῚ ‘ δὲ ¥ ‘ 
ἡμοκρατίαν οὔτε Evverov ovT ἴσον εἶναι, τοὺς δὲ ἔχοντας τὰ 
, , » ¥ ’΄ ο- > A ’ : “Ὁ 

χρήματα καὶ ἄρχειν ἄριστα βελτίστους. ἐγὼ δέ φημι πρῶτα 

\ δὴ dd 9 , 0 9 λ , δὲ , » 
μὲν δῆμον ξύμπαν ὠνομάσθαι, ὀλιγαρχίαν δὲ μέρος, ἔπειτα 

5 φ “Ὰ Ἢ . A 2 ’ Ly (4 \ λ ’ 

ύλακας μὲν ἀρίστους εἶναι χρημάτων τοὺς πλουσίους, βου- 

λ aA δ᾽ a ‘\. ‘ , aA δ᾽ a 9 , 
evoat δ᾽ av βέλτιστα τοὺς ξυνετούς, κρῖναι δ᾽ ἂν ἀκούσαν- 

¥ Ἁ Le) 

τας ἄριστα τοὺς πολλούς, καὶ ταῦτα ὁμοίως καὶ κατὰ μέρη 

is only in form, the second member be- 
ing practically denied. See on 1.73.11; 
8. 87. 12.— 25. μετὰ πολλῶν ἱἰσονομεῖ- 
σθαι: cf. Schol. ἰσότιμοι εἶναι μετὰ τῶν 
πολλῶν. He prob. had therefore in his 
text τῶν πολλῶν, which would answer 
very well to ὀλίγοι (19), and is adopted 
by Hude. ἰσονομεῖσθαι found elsewhere 
only in late writers. —26. τοὺς αὐτούς: 
i.e. the citizens of the same state. The 
democratic principle here expressed 
(δίκαιον. . . ἀξιοῦσθαι) is in direct op- 
position to the view of Alcibiades in 
16. 16 οὐδέ ye ἄδικον ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτῷ μέγα φρο- 
νοῦντα μὴ ἴσον εἶναι. 

39. The democratic form of govern- 
ment is wrongly reproached with an un- 
just distribution of power; ratherwould 
an oligarchy restrict all the advantages 
of government to a small number. — 
1. φήσει τις : introducing an objec- 
tion, as [Xen.] Ath. Pol. 8.7. For 
position, see on 10. 1.— 2. ξυνετόν, 
ἴσον: for neut. pred. adj. with fem. 
subj., see G. 925; 5. 617. Cf. 3.37.1, 
16.—toov: Schol. δίκαιον. --- τὰ xph- 
para: wrongly suspected by Kr. and 
v. H. and supported by its repetition 
below (5).—8. ἄρχειν ἄριστα : depends 
on βελτίστους. See on ἀπατᾶσθαι ἄριστοι 
3. 88. 21 and κακοὶ προφυλάξασθαι 88. 8. 

Cf. also infs. with κράτιστος 1. 188. 19; 
2. 81.9; 8. 68. 6. ἄριστα is unneces- 
sarily rejected by v. H., as βελτίστους 
by Cobet. The-reading of Laur. βελ- 
τίους seems certainly a copyist’s slip, 
esp. in .the light of the following su- 
perlatives ἀρίστους, βέλτιστα, ἄριστα. ---- 
πρῶτα μέν : for the usual πρῶτον μέν. --- 
4, ξύμπαν : the whole.— 5. βουλεῦσαι : 
give advice (act.), a8 8.42. 25; 4. 68. 30; 
8. 76. 33. — 6. κρῖναι : give decisions (of 
the popular assembly), as 1.87.2; 2. 
40.8; 3.48.17.—7. ταῦτα: to be under- 
stood, with the Schol., of the three 
classes named (τοὺς πλουσίους, τοὺς ξυνε- 
τούς, τοὺς πολλούς), NOt, with Grote (‘‘in 
a democracy these functions, one and 
all, find their proper place’’), of the 
threefold activity (φυλάσσειν, βουλεύειν, 
κρίνειν); for ἰσομοιρεῖν is, as in 16.18, per- 
sonal and active, to have an equal part, 
i.e. in the duties as in the advantages 
of public life. The sense is then: ‘‘and 
these classes alike both separately (i.e. 
according to the indicated difference 
of station) and all together (i.e. in the 
popular assembly) ina democracy share 
equally.’’ For ταῦτα (neut.) of classes 
of citizens, cf. Alcibiades in 18. 88 
τό τε φαῦλον καὶ τὸ μέσον καὶ τὸ πάνυ 



Ἁ ’ 3 4 3 A > ’ A ~ 
καὶ ξύμπαντα ἐν δημοκρατίᾳ ἰσομοιρεῖν. ὀλιγαρχία δὲ τῶν 2 
μὲν κινδύνων τοῖς πολλοῖς μεταδίδωσι, τῶν δ᾽ ὠφελίμων οὐ 

A , 3 Ν Ν , > 5 / ¥ a 
10 πλεονεκτεῖ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύμπαντ᾽ ἀφελομένη ἔχει: ἃ 
ὑμῶν οἵ τε δυνάμενοι καὶ οἱ νέοι προθυμοῦνται, ἀδύνατα ἐν 

μεγάλῃ πόλει κατασχεῖν. 

ee 9 

A 4 , > ? 9 ‘ 
Αλλ᾽ ἔτι καὶ νῦν, ὦ πάντων ἀξυνετώτατοι, εἰ μὴ par- 

Ἄ Φ 
θάνετε κακὰ σπεύδοντες, [ἢ ἀμαθέστατοί ἐστε] ὧν ἐγὼ οἶδα 
Ἑλλήνων, ἡ ἀδικώτατοι εἰ εἰδότες τολμᾶτε, ἀλλ᾽ ἤτοι μαθόντες 

8. ὀλιγαρχία δὲ κτὲ. : transition to 
direct discourse for the sake of vivid- 
ness and intensity. — 9. τῶν δ᾽ ὠφελί- 
pov: part. gen. with πλεονεκτεῖ, answer- 
ing to τῶν μὲν κινδύνων μεταδίδωσι. --- 
10. ξύμπαντ᾽ : (i.e. ξύμπαντα τὰ ὠφέλιμα) 
so with v. H. for ξύμπαν of the Mss. — 
ἀφελομένη exer: takes and holds. For 
this periphrasis for the perf., cf. 76. 10; 
1.38.15. Freq. in tragic poets, esp. 
Soph. See GMT. 47; Gild., Syn. 295.— 
&: the just indicated objects of oligar- 
chiceffort. For the acc. with προθυμοῦν- 
rat, cf.5.17.6; 8.90.9.—11. οἱ δυνάμενοι: 
= ol ὀλιγαρχικοί, with whom are placed 
their pupils οἱ νέοι. See on 38. 22. Cf. 
[Xen.] Ath. Pol. 2.18 ἢ πλούσιος ἢ γεν- 
γαῖος ἢ δυνάμενος. --- ἀδύνατα: in the 
sense Of καίπερ ἀδύνατα ὄντα.---12. κατα- 
σχεῖν: hold fast, as in 11.1, 86. 9, not 
attain, as in 9.16; 2.62.25. For the 
act. inf., see GMT. 768; Gild., Syn. 143. 

40. Whoever has the common weal 
at heart will beware of oligarchic in- 
trigues and not be deceived by false 
reports of danger. Our city will know 
how to ward off the Athenians if they 
come, and to preserve its freedom 
against machinations from within. — 
1. GAN ἔτι καὶ. . . αὔξετε: if the 
bracketed words [ἢ ἀμαθέστατοί ἐστε], 

which all the Mss. give, be retained, we 
may explain, with Jowett, that ‘tthe 
words ἀλλ᾽ ἔτι καὶ νῦν were intended to 
be followed more closely by αὔξετε, but 
Thuc. has gone off upon the word déupe- 
rwraro.’’ The clause εἰ μὴ pavOdvere 
κακὰ σπεύδοντες is then prot. to ἢ ἀμα- 
θέστατοί ἐστε ὧν. . . Ἑλλήνων, as el 
εἰδότες τολμᾶτε is to ἢ ἀδικώτατοι. After 
this practical parenthesis, the admoni- 
tory const. is resumed with ἀλλ᾽ ἤτοι. 
But it seems better, with Dobree and 
Madvig, to reject 7 ἀμαθέστατοί ἐστε as 
the gloss of a copyist, meant doubtless" 
to balance ἢ ἀδικώτατοι and supply a 
government for ὧν... Ἑλλήνων. With 
the words ἢ ἀμαθέστατοί ἐστε removed, 
wy... Ἑλλήνων becomes a limitation 
of πάντων all the more emphatic after 
the intervening clause εἰ μὴ... σπεύ- 
dovres. After the extended address, ex- 
pressed in two corresponding members 
(ὦ ἀξυνετώτατοι, εἰ μὴ . . . σπεύδοντες 

.. ἢ ἀδικώτατοι, εἰ εἰδότες τολμᾶτε), 
the repetition οὗ ἀλλά (8), to resume 
the intended admonition, is natural. 
—pavOdvere κακὰ σπεύδοντες: for suppl. 
pte. in indir. disc., see GMT. 904. κακά 
is cogn. acc.— 3. frou. . . ye H: 566 
on 34. 10. — μαθόντες : removes the re- 
proach of ἀξυνετώτατοι, aS μεταγνόντες 


aA 4 ‘ ΄Ν 4 ’ Ν » ε 
γε ἢ μεταγνόντες τὸ τῆς πόλεως ξύμπασι κοινὸν αὔξετε, ἡγη- 
ὅ σάμενοι τοῦτο μὲν ἂν καὶ ἴσον καὶ πλέον οἱ ἀγαθοὶ ὑμῶν 
ἥπερ τὸ τῆς πόλεως πλῆθος μετασχεῖν, εἰ δ᾽ ἄλλα βουλή- 
σεσθε, καὶ τοῦ παντὸς κινδυνεῦσαι στερηθῆναι. καὶ τῶν 

~~ 3 “~ e Q 9 ’ Ἁ Ἁ 9 , 
τοιῶνδε ἀγγελιῶν ὡς πρὸς αἰσθομένους καὶ μὴ ἐπιτρέψοντας 
> , e \ ’ 9 A 9 »ν» 9 A 
ἀπαλλάγητε. ἢ yap πόλις ἥδε καὶ εἰ ἔρχονται ᾿Αθηναῖοι 
10 ἀμυνεῖται αὐτοὺς ἀξίως αὑτῆς (καὶ στρατηγοί εἶσιν ἡμῖν 
A , 9 , Ἁ 9 ’ > A 3 a ϑ 9 
ot σκέψονται αὐταὶ καὶ εἰ μή τι αὐτῶν ἀληθές ἐστιν, ὥσπερ 

that of ἀδικώτατοι. --- 4. ξύμπασι: pleo- 
nastic after κοινόν, to emphasize the com- 
munity of interest; to which further 
expression is given in the participial 
clause (ἡγησάμενοι xré.), where the good 
results are promised esp. to the dya- 
Gol. — 5. τοῦτο : sc. τὸ κοινὸν τῆς πόλεως, 
i.e. the whole that is shared with others 
(μετασχεῖν). The more natural const. 
would be the gen. (τούτου), which Steup 
adopts after νυ. H. and Badham. — καὶ 
ἴσον καὶ πλέον : in equal or larger meas- 
ure. For καί allowing a choice, see on 1. 
82. 12.---πλέον ἤπερ τὸ τῆς πόλεως: ἥπερ 
only here in Thuc., rare in Attic prose, 
found esp. in Hdt. and Hom. See App. 
-- οἱ ἀγαθοὶ ὑμῶν : with ἡγησάμενοι, in 
explan. appos. Cf. 32. 7.—6. εἰ δ᾽ ἄλλα 
βουλήσεσθε: as Opp. to τὸ τῆς πόλεως ξύμ- 
πασι κοινὸν αὔξειν, pointing to ἃ contin- 
uation of oligarchical machinations. — 
7. τοῦ wavrés στερηθῆναι : i.e. by death 
or banishment, in case of defeat in con- 
flict with the opp. party.—x.vSuvetoa: 
sc. ἄν from the first member, as Kr. 
explains. St. and Hude write cay... 
κινδυνεῦσαι. Cl. and Steup consider that 
by the hypothetic ef ἄλλα βουλήσεσθε 
the inf. is sufficiently justified even 
without dy. See on 24.3.— καὶ τῶν τοι- 
ὥνδε ἀγγελιῶν.... ἀπαλλάγητε: havedone 
with such reports, understanding that 

you are dealing with those who perceive 
(your objects) and will not permit them. 
For πρός, against, in relation to, see on 
8. 48.15. αἰσθανομένους, which Laur. 
offers, would suit the context here; 
but αἰσθομένους has the support of all 
the other Mss., and seems justified by 
38. 8 ἡμεῖς δὲ κακοὶ. . . αἰσθόμενοι 
ἐπεξελθεῖν. The aor. was evidently be- 
fore the Schol., who seems, moreover, 
to have read ws πρὸς προαισθομένους 
(cf. Schiitz, Ztschr. f. ἃ. Gymnasialw. 
XXXIII, 1879, p.94.—8. μὴ ἐπιτρέψον- 
vag: abs.,asin17 below. Seeon 1.71.5. 

9. καὶ εἰ ἔρχονται ᾿Αθηναῖοι: to this 
corresponds καὶ εἰ μή τι... ἐστιν. ΑΒ 
only the second clause has to do with 
the idea contained in ws πρὸς αἰσθομένους 
kal μὴ ἐπιτρέψοντας, the first clause is in 
thought subordinate to the second, the 
sense being, ‘* as this city, if the Athe- 
nians really come, will ward them off, 
so also etc.’’ For similar cases of para- 
taxis, see on 9.11.— 10. καὶ στρατη- 

“yol...atrd: as a side remark, to be 

indicated as a parenthesis.—11. of 
σκέψονται αὐτά: οἵ. τὸ ἑαυτοῦ μόνον σκο- 
πῶν 12.9; τὸ σεαυτοῦ σκοτῶν Plat. 
Phaedr. 232». αὐτά of the matters in 
hand or under discussion, as 10. 5. See 
on 1.1.10. So αὐτῶν (11), of them, i.e. 
the reports. — ὥσπερ οὐκ οἴομαι : 80. τι 




οἴομαι, ov πρὸς τὰς ὑμετέρας ἀγγελίας καταπλαγεῖσα 
ε , e “Ὁ ¥ 3 4 ‘4 3 »“" 
ἑλομένη ἡμᾶς ἄρχοντας αὐθαίρετον δουλείαν ἐπιβαλεῖ: 
9 N > 943 ε ~ “Ὁ ’ ’ 9 > e ~ 
αὐτὴ ὃ ἐφ᾽ αὑτης σκοποῦσα τούς τε λόγους ad ὑμῶν 

ε » , a Ἁ Ά 4 , 3 ’ 
15 ὡς ἔργα δυναμένους κρινεῖ καὶ τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν ἐλευθερίαν 
9 N 3 ἴω 9 ’ 9 [ά 9 A n~ » 
οὐχὶ ἐκ τοῦ ἀκούειν ἀφαιρεθήσεται, ἐκ δὲ τοῦ ἔργῳ φυλασ- 
σομένη μὴ ἐπιτρέπειν πειράσεται σῴζειν.᾽" 
Τοιαῦτα μὲν ᾿Αθηναγόρας εἶπε, τῶν δὲ στρατηγῶν εἷς 1 
9 Ἢ ¥ ‘ 207 ¥ ¥ A 28 Α 
ἀναστὰς ἄλλον μὲν οὐδένα ἔτι εἴασε παρελθεῖν, αὐτὸς δὲ 
πρὸς τὰ παρόντα ἔλεξε τοιάδε- “Διαβολὰς μὲν οὐ σῶφρον 
» a Ν 3 9 l4 ¥ “\ 9 , 9 ’ 
οὔτε λέγειν τινὰς ἐς ἀλλήλους οὔτε τοὺς ἀκούοντας ἀποδέ. 
Ν \ \ 3 4 A eA 9 ἐν 
χεσθαι, πρὸς δὲ τὰ ἐσαγγελλόμενα μᾶλλον ὁρᾶν ὅπως εἷς 
τε ἕκαστος καὶ ἡ ξύμπασα πόλις καλῶς τοὺς ἐπιόντας 


αὐτῶν ἀληθὲς εἶναι.---- 12. πρὸς τὰς ὑμετέ- 
ρας ἀγγελίας καταπλαγεῖσα: frightened 
αἱ your reports. So πρός with κατα- 
πλαγῆναι, aS With χαλεπαίνειν 2. 22. 1, 
59. 10; with ἀθυμεῖν 2. 88. 11; with 
δεῖσαι 3. 60. 2; with λυπεῖσθαι 2. 64. 32. 
Cf. also 58. 4 and 7. 74. 1.—14. αὐτὴ 
ἐφ᾽ αὑτῆς : itself of itself, i.e. without 
allowing interference from outside, 
esp. from you. Cf. ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν 8. 8.5; 
ἐπὶ σφῶν αὐτῶν 2.63.11; 5. 67.3; 8. 
68. 20. — rots re λόγους ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν: the 
speeches that come from you. Cf. 1.37. 
5; 7.77.17. For art. not repeated, see 
on 1.51.11; 4. 9. 5.—15. ὡς ἔργα Suva- 
μένους : as meaning deeds. For force of 
δυναμένους, cf. 36.8. βουλομένους of Laur. 
isclearly aslip of the copyist and cannot 

be supported by βουλόμενον εἶναι 5. 65.9. ᾿" 

— 16. ἐκ τοῦ ἀκούειν : sc. τὰς τοιάσδε ἀγ- 
γελίας. For ἐκ, see on 88. 24.— 17. μὴ 
ἐπιτρέπειν : as above (8), in reference 
to the hostile designs of opponents, 
41. After the vehement speech of 
Athenagoras one of the strategi for- 
bids further speeches, but callsupon all, 

in view of the reports, to be ready to 
repel the enemy, and promises for the 
government watchfulness and energy. 
—1. τοιαῦτα μέν: see on 19. 1.— τῶν 
στρατηγῶν: fifteen, acc. to 72. 12, 
constituting the highest executive au- 
thority.—2. ἀναστάς : rising to speak, 
as ἀνιστάμενοι 8.76.9. Generally Thuc. 
uses παριέναι, come forward-— 3. πρὸς 

Ta παρόντα : with reference to present 

circumstances, aS 46.27. See on 2. 22.1. 

διαβολάς: personal imputations, such 
as Athenagoras had indulged in against 
the oligarchs. — 4. τινάς: the orators 
as contrasted with τοὺς ἀκούοντας, the 
assembly as a whole.—é ἀλλήλους: 
against one another, as és τοὺς ἄλλους 1. 
68.2. See on 4. 28. 2.—5. πρὸς τὰ ἐσαγ- 
γελλόμενα: in view of the reports that are 
coming in (pres.).—épav ὅπως: with fut. 
indic., as 3.46.16; 5.27.9. GMT. 889. 
For ὅτῳ τρόπῳ with fut., cf. 38.12, and 
see on 1. 107. 18.—els τε ἕκαστος καὶ 4 
ξύμπασα πόλις : appos. to implied ἡμεῖς. 
— 6. καλῶς τοὺς ἐπιόντας... ἀμύνε- 
σθαι: cf. κάλλιστα ἀμυνεῖσθε αὐτούς 38.12. 




, 3 a VA ¥ \ , 3 
παρασκευασόμεθα ἀμύνεσθαι. καὶ ἣν apa μηδὲν δεήσῃ, οὐ- 8 

ὃ ’ λ 4 A ἃ \ An \, g¢ A 
εμία βλάβη τοῦ τε TO κοινὸν κοσμηθῆναι καὶ ἵπποις Kal 

ὅπλοις καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις οἷς ὁ πόλεμος ἀγάλλεται (τὴν δ᾽ ἐπι- 

»"» ~ 9 A 
μέλειαν καὶ ἐξέτασιν αὐτῶν ἡμεῖς EEopev), καὶ τῶν πρὸς τὰς 

, A 9 » 4 ᾽ν Γ᾽ 
πόλεις διαπομπῶν ἅμα ἔς τε κατασκοπὴν καὶ ἦν τι ἄλλο 

φαίνηται ἐπιτήδειον. τὰ δὲ καὶ ἐπιμεμελήμεθα ἤδη καὶ ὅ τι 

dv αἰσθώμεθα ἐς ὑμᾶς οἴσομεν." 

Ἁ A 9 [οὶ A 
Καὶ οἱ μὲν Συρακόσιοι τοσαῦτα εἰπόντος τοῦ στρατηγοῦ 

7. ἣν ἄρα: if indeed, as 8. 56. 15, 67. 
4, indicating a doubt, as the speaker, 
in contrast with Athenagoras, consid- 
ers the approach of the Athenians 
probable. — δεήσῃ : sc. ἀμύνεσθαι. ---- οὐ- 
δεμία βλάβη τοῦ τε τὸ κοινὸν κοσμηθῆ- 
vat κτὲ.: Cl. marks off τὴν δ᾽ ἐπιμέλειαν 
καὶ ἐξέτασιν αὐτῶν ἡμεῖς ἕξομεν aS ἃ par- 
enthetical explanation introduced by 
epexegetical δέ, thus making καὶ τῶν 
. . . διαπομπῶν correl. to τοῦ re τὸ κοινὸν 
κοσμηθῆναι and dependent on οὐδεμία 
βλάβη. Inagreement with Hermocrates 
(84. 1 τά τε αὐτοῦ παρασκευαζώμεθα καὶ és 
τοὺς Σικελοὺς πέμποντες κτὲ.) the strate- 
gus here refers to the most important 
means of defense, equipment at home 
and securing of assistance from outside, 
and rightly declares that neither will 
do harm if there shall be no need to 
defend themselves. ἐξέτασις, the regu- 
lar expression for military reviews (cf. 
45.7, 96.16, 97.11; 4. 74. 11), suits 
τῶν διαπομπῶν ill; whereas the appen- 
dix dua ἔς re κατασκοπὴν... ἐπιτήδειον 
has its proper effect only as based on 
the assumption ἣν μηδὲν δεήσῃ. Cl.’s 
view and arrangement have met with 
general adoption. But see App. — 
8. καὶ ἵπποις καὶ ὅπλοιξ : connected as 
in 1.80.12; 2. 100. 7.—9. οἷς ὁ πόλε- 

μος ἀγάλλεται : οἷς χαίρει ὁ πόλεμος, ὧν 

χρήζει, Schol. War is personified here, 
as in 84.18; 1. 122.4; 2.36.18; 3. 82. 
18; 4.18. 18. 

10. ἡμεῖς : of the strategi, ὑμᾶς (18) 
of the popular assembly.—rév.. . 
διαπομπῶν : as Hermocrates had rec- 
ommended 84,81. The word is found 
elsewhere only in App. Bell. Civ. 5. 71. 
-11. ἔς τεκατασκοπήν : with a view to 
Jinding out, i.e. ‘their readiness for 
war’? (Cl.), or ‘‘ their state of mind in 
the present condition of things’? (St.), 
or ‘about the coming and the designs 
of the enemy ”’ (Valla, etc.).— καὶ qv 
τι ἄλλο φαίνηται ἐπιτήδειον : 1.6. about 
the prospect of help or the seeking of 
future alliances. — 12. τὰ δὲ καὶ ἐπιμε- 
μελήμεθα : and this care we have in part 
already taken. τὰ 6écogn. acc. with ém- 
μεμελήμεθα, Which refers to ἐπιμέλειαν. ᾿ 
--- καὶ 6 τι ἂν αἰσθώμεθα : and whatever 
we find out, referring to κατασκοπήν. ---- 
13. ἐς ὑμᾶς οἴσομεν : we will bring before 
you, i.e. for action by decree or other- 
wise. Schol. μηνύσομεν ὑμῖν. So φέρειν, 
nuntiare, referre, Dem. 6. 28 rods 
ἐνεγκόντας τὰς ὑποσχέσεις, and freq. in 
the tragic poets (Aesch. Sept. 40, Eur. 
Phoen. 1072). Hence neither ἀνοίσομεν 
(the usual word), which Kr. conjec- 
tures, nor ἐσοίσομεν (v. H.) is neces- 
sary here.— 14. τοσαῦτα : used esp. of - 



15 , 9 “A 4 ε 9.9 A » 4 ἴω 
go διελύθησαν ἐκ τοῦ EvddAdyov. οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἤδη ἐν τῇ Kep- 1 
’ Ν ε 4 ν “ 

κύρᾳ αὐτοί Te καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι ἅπαντες ἦσαν. Kal πρῶτον 
A 3 , A ’ Ἁ 4 ν y 

μὲν ἐπεξέτασιν τοῦ στρατεύματος καὶ ξύνταξιν ὥσπερ ἔμελλον 

ὁρμιεῖσθαί τε καὶ στρατοπεδεύσεσθαι οἱ στρατηγοὶ ἐποιή- 

σαντο, καὶ τρία μέρη νείμαντες ἕν ἑκάστῳ ἐκλήρωσαν, ἵνα 


‘ , ν , 3 aA if) ‘ , x A 
μήτε apa πλέοντες ἀπορῶσιν voaTos καὶ λιμένων Kal TOV 

3 , 3 A a , s 9 , 
ἐπιτηδείων ἐν ταῖς καταγωγαῖς, πρός τε τἄλλα εὐκοσμότεροι 
4 A 
Kal ῥᾷους ἄρχειν ὦσι, κατὰ τέλη στρατηγῷ προστεταγμένοι. 

» A ’ \ 93 Ἁ 3 ld A ’ ἴω 
ἔπειτα δὲ προύπεμψαν καὶ ἐς τὴν ᾿Ιταλίαν καὶ Σικελίαν τρεῖς 3 
ναῦς εἰσομένας αἵτινες σφᾶς τῶν πόλεων δέξονται. καὶ εἴρητο 

short speeches. See on 35.1; 2.12.1. 
-ἥ1ὅ. διελύθησαν ἐκ τοῦ ξυλλόγον : as 
Ηάΐ. 8. 78. 11, and διελύθησαν ἐκ τοῦ 
συνεδρίον Ἠάΐ. 8. δ6.8. Cf. διελύθησαν ἐκ 
τῶν λόγων 6.118. 2. 

42. The Athenian generals make for 
the fleet assembled at Corcyra the 
necessary preparation to cross over to 
Italy and Sicily.—1. ot δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι 
ἤδη... ἦσαν: continuation of 32. ὃ 2. 
— 3. ἐπεξέτασιν : after-muster, found 
only here. It means the final review of 
the united fleet following that made of 
the separate divisions on setting out. — 
4, στρατοπεδεύσεσθαι: Kr.’s conjecture, 
adopted by v. H. and Hude, for orpa- 
τοπεδεύεσθαι Of the Mss. The two infs. 
are closely connected and express ac- 
tions that are naturally closely related, 
and no good reason can be assigned for 
a change in tense. L. Herbst, Gegen 
Cobet, p. 17, explains orparomedever Oat, 
be encamped, as expressing esp. dura- 
tion; but it was quite uncertain how 
long the individual dispositions would 
continue. St. cites in defense of the 
pres. 99.9, 10, and Dem. 21, 55; but 
in both these passages the infs. do not 

stand so close together. — 5. τρία μέρη 
ve(pavres: 80. τὸ στράτευμα OF τοῦ στρα- 

«τεύματος. See Kiihner-Gerth II, 1, 828. 

Cf. δύο μέρη ποιήσαντες Θ2. 2. --- ἕν... 
ἐκλήρωσαν : cf. 62.2; 8. 80. ὅ.---6. ἅμα 
πλέοντες : Valckenaer’s necessary cor- 
rection of ἀναπλέοντες of the Mss. — 
λιμένων : very few, of course, could ac- 
commodate the combined fleet. — 7. ἐν 
ταῖς καταγωγαῖς : means pulting in at 
various seaports. The corresponding 
verb is καταίρειν, for Thuc. does not, 
like Hom., Hdt., and others, use κατά- 
γεσθαι, corresponding to ἀνάγεσθαι. ---- 
8. ῥᾷους ἄρχειν : for limiting inf., see 
Gild., ὅγη.148; GMT.768. Cf. ῥάδια κα- 
τασχεῖν 6.9.17; ἀδύνατα κατασχεῖν 6. 890. 
12; ῥᾷστοι ἀμύνεσθαι 4.10.15; χαλεπαὶ 
ἄρξαι 7.14.5; ἄξιος θαυμάσαι 1. 188. 11: 
ἄξιον φοβηθῆναι 1. 142. θ; δίκαια καὶ πρέ- 
ποντα ἀποκρίνασθαι 1. 144.16-: πολὺ πε- 
ραιοῦσθαι 6.34.27. Pass. infs. are rare 
in this const. in Thuc.: 3.40.8 δίκαιος 
ἀντιδίδοσθαι; 3.94.22 χαλεπὸς καταστρα- 
φῆναι. --- τέλη : of divisions of ships, as 
1. 48. 7.— προδτεταγμένοι : as 5. 8. 14. 

10. εἰσομένας : fut. ptc. of the object 
in view as 6.28; 1.29.8; 7. 88. 4. --- 


48 αὐταῖς προαπαντᾶν, ὅπως ἐπιστάμενοι καταπλέωσι. μετὰ δὲ 
ταῦτα τοσῇδε ἤδη τῇ παρασκενῇ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἄραντες ἐκ τῆς 
Κερκύρας ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν ἐπεραιοῦντο- τριήρεσι μὲν ταῖς 
πάσαις τέσσαρσι καὶ τριάκοντα καὶ ἑκατὸν καὶ δνοῖν Ῥοδίοιν 

’ 4 9 Ἀ ἣ 4 ε ’ Ό ε A 
6 πεντηκοντόροιν (τούτων ᾿Αττικαὶ μὲν ἦσαν ἑκατόν, ὧν ai μὲν 
ε 4 A e > » 4 Q , » 
ἑξήκοντα ταχεῖαι, ai δ᾽ ἄλλαι στρατιώτιδες, TO δὲ ἄλλο vav- 
τικὸν Χίων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ξυμμάχων), ὁπλίταις δὲ τοῖς ξύμ- 
πασιν ἑκατὸν καὶ πεντακισχιλίοις (καὶ τούτων ᾿Αθηναίων 

μὲν αὐτῶν ἦσαν πεντακόσιοι μὲν καὶ χίλιοι ἐκ καταλόγου, 
ε 4 ‘ ἰοὺ 3 4 “A ΩΝ 4 Ν ε 
10 ἑπτακόσιοι δὲ θῆτες ἐπιβάται τῶν νεῶν, ξύμμαχοι δὲ οἱ 

ἄλλοι ξυνεστράτευον, οἱ μὲν τῶν ὑπηκό LO ᾿Αργεί 
,»οἱμ πηκόων, οἱ ργείων 

εἴρητο: as 30.4.—11. προαπαντᾶν: 
i.e. before the fleet had reached the 
coast (καταπλεῖν). The word is found 
also 1. 69.22; 4.92.28; and in late 
writers, ᾿ 

43, 44. Enumeration of all divisions 
of the fleet. Voyage from Corcyra to 
the coast of Italy. The attitude of the 
cities of Italy is little friendly. The 
Athenians encamp in the territory of 
Rhegium to await news from Sicily.— 
2. τοσῇδε: pred. put forward; cf. 44. 
1 τοσαύτη after the enumeration. The 
whole = τοσήδε ἣν ἡ παρασκενή, ἣ μετὰ 
ταῦτα... ἐπεραιοῦντο. --- τῇ παρασκενῇ : 
dat. of the whole followed by the parts 
in appos.— 8. ἐπεραιοῦντο: impf. of 
the events in progress; so also διέπλει 
44.1 and ξυνδιέβαλλε 44.7. Cf. 1.114. 
9; 3.111.11; 4. 25. 43. — rats πάσαις: 
in all. Cf. 1. 18, and see on 1. 60. 6.— 
4. ‘PoSlow: masc. ending in the most 
and best Mss. Elsewhere Thuc. in 
ethnic terms has also the fem.: 104. 11; 
5. 84.7. The relation of the Rhodians 
at that time to Athens was not just 
that of the Methymnaeans and Chians, 

(νεῶν παροκωχῇ αὐτόνομοι 85. 8); the 
Rhodians paid rather tribute, as ap- 
pears from the tribute lists. — 5. αἱ μὲν 
ἑξήκοντα : art. with numerals as parts 
of a whole. So 14 and freq.—6. orpa- 
τιώτιδες : = ὁπλιταγωγοί 25.8, 31.20. 
See on 1.116. 8.—7. καὶ τῶν ἄλλων 
ξυμμάχων: the Methymnaeans and Cor- 
cyraeans seem to be esp. meant. — 
τοῖς ξύμπασιν : cf. 2. 2.---9. ἐκ κατα- 
λόγον : from the list of citizens of the 
three upper property-classes liable to 
military service.—10. θῆτες : citizens 
of the lowest property-class, who served 
usually as oarsmen, but in extraordi- 
nary cases, as here, served as mariners 
(ἐπιβάται) with hoplite-armor.—11. τῶν 
ὑπηκόων: see on 69.21. They were, 
as the enumeration shows, 2150, i.e. 
5100 — 2950 (1500 + 700 + 500 + 250). 
Kr.’s suggestion to insert the number 
in the text is unnecessary, since any 
observant reader could easily figure it 
out, just as the sum total (2900) of non- 
Athenian hoplites, which is not given. 
The mention, too, of the contingents 
of the different places (cf. 2. 9. § 4) 




4 \ 4 \ 4 9 \ 
πεντακόσιοι Kat Μαντινέων Kat μισθοφόρων πεντήκοντα Kal 

, , \ A n 2 “, \ 
διακόσιοι), τοξόταις δὲ TOLS TACGLV ὀγδοήκοντα και ΤέΤρακο- 

gious (καὶ τούτων Κρῆτες οἱ ὀγδοήκοντα ἦσαν), καὶ σφενδο- 
15 νήταις Ῥοδίων ἑπτακοσίοις, καὶ Μέγαρεῦσι ψιλοῖς φυγάσιν 
εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατόν, καὶ ἱππαγωγῷ μιᾷ τριάκοντα ἀγούσῃ ἱπ- 
πέας. τοσαύτη ἡ πρώτη παρασκενὴ πρὸς τὸν πόλεμον διέπλει, 
τούτοις δὲ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἄγουσαι ὁλκάδες μὲν τριάκοντα σιτα- 

4 Ἁ δ ‘ » Α θ 4 \ 4 
γωγοΐ, καὶ TOUS σιτοποιοὺς ἔχουσαι καὶ λιθολόγους καὶ TE 

λννῪ 3 Q 3 ἴω : A \ e 4 ἃ 
κτονας και οσα ἐς τειχισμον ἐργαλεῖα, πλοῖα δὲ ἑκατὸν ἃ 

would have little value. —12. Νῖαντι- 
véwy καὶ μισθοφόρων: of Mantineans and 
other mercenaries (for καί, see on 4. 5. 6), 
if the text is sound. But since the 
source of the non-Athenian hoplites, 
so far as these are not from the ὑπήκοοι, 
is given in the context, and we have in 
7. 57, 48 Μαντινῆς καὶ ἄλλοι ᾿Αρκάδων 
μισθοφόροι, Cl.’s conjecture that ἄλλων 
᾿Αρκάδων before μισθοφόρων has dropped 
out meets with favor from recent edi- 
tors. The fact that acc. to 29.11 τῶν 
Μαντινέων τινές Shared for the sake of 
Alcibiades the expedition to Sicily (cf. 
61.§5 and 1. 60. § 2) can as little be 
urged against the Mantineans being 
mercenaries, as the fact that acc. to 5. 
81. § 1 the state of Mantinea could 
hardly have participated in that expe- 
dition. Cf. further Nicias’ remark 22.3 
καὶ ἣν τινα ἐκ Πελοποννήσου δυνώμεθα ἢ πεῖ- 
σαι ἢ μισθῷ προσαγαγέσθαι. --- 14. Kpf- 
τὲς : cf. 25. 18.--1ὅ. Μεγαρεῦσι ψιλοῖς 
φυγάσιν εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατόν : see App. on 
19.2. These Megarians were doubtless 
of those who, acc. to 4. 74. ὃ 2, in 424 B.c. 
after the departure of the Athenians, 
secretly withdrew (ὑπεξῆλθον) in fear 
of the opposing faction.— 16. twa- 
γωγῷ: cf. 2.56.6; 4.42.4. — τριάκοντα 
ἱππέας : these 30 cavalrymen are not 

mentioned again. At the beginning of 
the winter of 415-414 the Athenians 
are said to have no horsemen (σφίσιν 
ov παρόντων ἱππέων 64, 8), and in 98. § 1 
650 horsemen are mentioned as got to- 
gether from various sources, but with 

no allusion to these 80. Hence G. 

Osberger (Festgruf fiir Heerwagen, Er- 
langen, 1882, p. 74ff.) plausibly conjec- 
tures that ἱππέας was miscopied for 
ἱπποτοξότας (94.18; cf. 2.18.54; 5.84.9). 

44 1. ἣ πρώτη παρασκενὴ πρὸς τὸν 
πόλεμον : as opp. to the ἄλλῃ στρατιά 
voted in 7. 16.6 and referred to 7, 42. 
10 στρατὸν ἴσον καὶ παραπλήσιον τῷ προ- 
τέρῳ ἐπεληλυθότα. Cf. also θ4. ξ4. 7.16. 
8. 2.—2. τούτοις : referring per syne- 
sin to παρασκενή, which consequently 
means here only the troops. — ὃ. τοὺς 
σιτοποιούς: acc. to Nicias’ advice 22. 
8.---λιθολόγους: here and 7.48.15 about 
equal to the general term λιθουργοί (4. 
69.6; 5.82.28). It indicates the im- 
portance of choice of stones for forts 
and other structures indicated by λογά- 
δην in 66. 10; 4. 4. 6, 81. 18. ---4, ἐς 
τειχισμὸν ἐργαλεῖα : cf. 7.18.28. It was 
the tools that were wanting at Pylos 
4.4.§ 2.— πλοῖα δὲ ἑκατόν : with σιτα- 
γωγοὶ ὁλκάδες, as 80. 38.—a.. . ξυνέ- 
πλεῖ: most recent editors, including 






ἐξ ἀνάγκης μετὰ τῶν ὁλκάδων ξυνέπλει πολλὰ δὲ καὶ ἄλλα 
“Ὁ Xe ’ ε ’ ’ ~ a 3 
πλοῖα καὶ ὁλκάδες ἑκούσιοι ξυνηκολούθουν TH στρατιᾷ ἐμπο- 
4 9 a 4 ’ 3 ~ , ὃ 4 Nr “ 
ρίας ἕνεκα: ἃ τότε πάντα ἐκ τῆς Κερκύρας ξυνδιέβαλλε τὸν 
ἃ A A 
Ἰόνιον κόλπον. Kal προσβαλοῦσα ἡ πᾶσα παρασκενὴ πρός 
τε ἄκραν ᾿Ιαπυγίαν καὶ πρὸς Τάραντα καὶ ὡς ἕκαστοι ηὐπό- 
pyoav παρεκομίζοντο τὴν ᾿Ιταλίαν, τῶν μὲν πόλεων ov δε- 
᾿ ld ϑ ‘ 9 ~ "δὲ ¥ ᾽ ὃ δὲ Ν 9 
χομένων αὐτοὺς ἀγορᾷ οὐδὲ ἄστει, ὕδατι δὲ Kal ὅρμῳ, 
’ Ἁ Ν “ ε 
Τάραντος δὲ καὶ Λοκρῶν οὐδὲ τούτοις, ἕως ἀφίκοντο €s Ῥή- 
a9 , 3 , N93 A ¥ e , 
γιον τῆς Ἰταλίας ἀκρωτήριον. καὶ ἐνταῦθα ἤδη ἡθροίζοντο, 
καὶ ἔξω τῆς πόλεως, ὡς αὐτοὺς ἔσω οὐκ ἐδέχοντο, στρα- 
τόπεδόν τε κατεσκενάσαντο ἐν τῷ τῆς ᾿Αρτέμιδος ἱερῷ, οὗ 
αὐτοῖς καὶ ἀγορὰν παρεῖχον, καὶ τὰς ναῦς ἀνελκύσαντες 
ἡσύχασαν, καὶ πρός τε τοὺς Ῥηγίνους λόγους ἐποιήσαντο, 

Cl., follow Duker in bracketing ἅ and 
putting a full stop after διέπλει, con- 
struing ὁλκάδες with ξυνέπλει. But with 
this const. μετὰ τῶν ὁλκάδων is disturb- 
ing, whereas placing a comma, with 
Kr., after διέπλει removes all difficulty. 
—5. ἐξ ἀνάγκης: = ἠναγκασμένα (cf. 22. 
8).— μετὰ τῶν ὁλκάδων : as well as the 
merchantmen. These 80 merchantmen 
also went ἐξ ἀνάγκης, as is clear from 
the following sentence.— ξυνέπλει : sc. 
τῇ πρὸς τὸν πόλεμον παρασκευῇ .---θ. ἑκού- 
σιοι: with ὁλκάδες, as 7.57.44 ἑκούσιος 
with στρατιά. Cf. καθ᾽ ἑκουσίαν 8. 27.16. 
--7. ἃ πάντα: includes both ὁλκάδες 
and πλοῖα.---ξυνδιέβαλλε: 80. τῇ στρατιᾷ. 
Schol. ξυνδιετεραιώθη. In this sense 
prob. only here. Cf. διαβάλλειν 80. 6. 
8. ἢ πᾶσα παρασκενή: i.e. the στρα- 
rid With ὁλκάδες and πλοῖα.---πρὸς ἄκραν 
᾿Ιαπυγίαν : see on 80. 5.—9. καὶ ὡς 
ἕκαστοι ηὐπόρησαν : SC. προσβαλεῖν, as 
(where and how) they severally found 
opportunity to land. Finite verb with 

ὡς ἕκαστοι as 4. 96. 29. --- 10. τὴν Ἴτα- 
λίαν : for the restricted use of the term 
in Thuc., see on 1. 12. 14. — οὐ Sex opeé- 
νων. .. ἄστει: explained by 50.§1. 
δέχεσθαι ἀγορᾷ = ἀγορὰν παρέχειν. The 
same explanation also ἔΟΥ ὕδατι καὶ ὅρμῳ, 
the latter meaning only an open anchor- 
place, not a secure harbor (λιμήν). -- 
12. Aoxpév: i.e. the Epizephyrian Lo- 
crians or those near the promontory 
Zephyrium.— Ῥήγιον... ἀκρωτήριον: 
ef. 4.24.18. On the earlier Sicilian 
expedition of the Athenians Rhegium 
had been their chief base (8. 86. 20, 
88. 18, 115.6; 4. 25. 58). 

14. οὐκ ἐδέχοντο : sc. οἱ ‘Pyyivo. — 
15. ἐν τῷ... ἱερῷ : i.e. ἴῃ sacred ground 
belonging to the temple.— 17. καὶ πρός 
τε τοὺς Ῥηγίνους: and to the Rhegians 
also. τε, which adds a third clause 
after κατεσκενάσαντο and ἡσύχασαν, is 
bracketed by Kr., St., and others. For - 
kal... τε, a8 here, cf. 1.9.20; 2. 68. 
19; 8.68.12, 76.19. See on 108. 21. 





A ¥ A 

ἀξιοῦντες Χαλκιδέας ὄντας Χαλκιδεῦσιν οὖσι Λεοντίνοις βοη- 
θεῖν: οἱ δὲ οὐδὲ μεθ᾽ ἑτέρων ἔφασαν ἔσεσθαι, ἀλλ᾽ ὅ τι ἂν 
20 καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις Ἰταλιώταις ξυνδοκῇ, τοῦτο ποιήσειν. ot δὲ 
πρὸς τὰ ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ πράγματα ἐσκόπουν ὅτῳ τρόπῳ ἄριστα 
προσοίσονται: καὶ Tas πρόπλους ναῦς ἐκ τῆς Ἐγέστης ἅμα 
προσέμενον, βουλόμενοι εἰδέναι περὶ τῶν χρημάτων εἶ ἔστιν 
a ¥ 3 a 9 , εὖ 
ἃ ἔλεγον ἐν ταῖς ᾿Αθήναις οἱ ἀγγελοι. 

Τοῖς δὲ Συρακοσίοις ἐν τούτῳ πολλαχόθεν τε ἤδη καὶ ἀπὸ 

΄Ν ’ A 3 , 9 3 ε 4 e and 3 
τῶν κατασκόπων σαφὴ ἠγγέλλετο OTL ἐν Ῥηγίῳ αἱ ves εἰσι, 
καὶ ὡς ἐπὶ τούτοις παρεσκενάζοντο πάσῃ τῇ γνώμῃ καὶ 

9 ’ 9 , \ » \ δ ’ » 
οὐκέτι ἠπίστουν. καὶ ἔς τε τοὺς Σικελοὺς περιέπεμπον, ἔνθα 

Ν 4 4 ὃ Ἁ -N 4 \ 9» \ 4 
μὲν φύλακας, πρὸς δὲ τοὺς πρέσβεις, καὶ ἐς τὰ περιπόλια 

\ 3 ~ 4 Ν 3 ’ ’ > “A , 9 
τὰ ἐν TH χώρᾳ φρουρὰς ἐσεκόμιζον, τά TE ἐν TH πόλει ὅπλων 
3 ’ λν 3 ’ > 9 Aa 3 A Ψ ε 
ἐξετάσει καὶ ἵππων ἐσκόπουν εἰ ἐντελῆ ἐστι, καὶ τάλλα ὡς 
ἐπὶ ταχεῖ πολέμῳ καὶ ὅσον οὐ παρόντι καθίσταντο. 

---18. Χαλκιδέας ὄντας : as 79.6. Cf. 
Strabo δ. p. 257 c κτίσμα ἐστὶ τὸ ἹΡήγιον 
Χαλκιδέων». --- Χαλκιδεῦσιν οὖσι Acov- 
τίνοις : see 8, ὃ 8. --- 19. οὐδὲ μεθ᾽ ἑτέρων: 
see on 2. 67. 84. ----ὅ τι av. . . ξυνδοκῇ: 
for the form, cf. 8. 84. 14 ξυνεδόκει δὲ 
καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ξυμμάχοις ταῦτα. ΑΒ ἃ 
fact all the Italiote cities held aloof 
for the moment from the war. 

21. πρὸς τὰ. . . πράγματα: with 
προσοίσονται. Cf. 5. 105. 17. --- ὅτῳ 
τρόπῳ: for the more usual ὅπως, with 
fut. indic., as 11.28, 33.12; 1.107.18; 
and freq. — 22. τὰς πρόπλους vats: cf. 
42.§2. It is to be inferred that these 
ships after completing their first task 
were sent to Egesta (cf. 46. 1). The 
rare word πρόπλους also 46.1; Isocr. 
59 p, and later.—28. εἰ ἔστιν: pregnant, 
whether it really exists.—24. ἃ ἔλεγον 
... οἱ ἄγγελοι : cf. 8.§2. For impf. 

with the force of plpf., see on 4. 24. 3. 
Gild., Syn. 224; Kr. Spr. 53, 2, 8. 
45. Meanwhile news comes to Syra- 
cuse of the arrival of the Athenians at 
Rhegium ; and now measures for de- 
fense are pushed with zeal.—1. ἀπὸ 

᾿ τῶν karackérev... ἠγγέλλετο: cf. 41. 

ὃ 4. πολλαχόθεν ἠγγέλλετο a8 82. 14. 
For ἀπό, see on 28. 1. --- 8. ὡς ἐπὶ τού- 
tog: with a view to this. For ἐπί here 
and 8 below, cf. 1. 65.7; 7. 62. 14. --- 
4. οὐκέτι ἠπίστουν : as before, 82. § 3, 
35. ὃ 1. ----ἔνθα μέν : = πρὸς μὲν rods, i.e. 
τοὺς ὑπηκόους. Cf. ὅθεν 21. 11. --- 5. πρὸς 
δὲ rots: i.e. τοὺς αὐτονόμους. For the 
order, cf. 66.6. On the matter, cf. 34. 
81.--- τὰ περιπόλια: Schol. τὰ ἐν τῇ 
χώρᾳ φρούρια. Cf. 8. 99. 4: 7. 48. 82. -- 
6. τὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει : proleptic obj. of ἐσκό- 
πουν. --- ὅπλων ἐξετάσει καὶ ἵππων: see 
on 41. 10. ---8. ὅσον οὐ παρόντι: (sc. 






Αἱ δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς ᾿Εγέστης τρεῖς νῆες at πρόπλοι παραγίγνον- 1 
aA 9 , 9 ν᾿. Cr” 9 , 9 ΕῚ 
ται τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐς τὸ Ῥήγιον, ἀγγέλλουσαι ὅτι τἄλλα 
μὲν οὐκ ἔστι χρήματα ἃ ὑπέσχοντο, τριάκοντα δὲ τάλαντα 
, , δ ε \ 9f 2 9 ,» 4 9 
μόνα φαίνεται... καὶ ot στρατηγοὶ εὐθὺς ἐν ἀθυμίᾳ ἦσαν ὅτι 
“ A A ‘\ ε A 
αὐτοῖς τοῦτό TE πρῶτον ἀντεκεκρούκει καὶ οἱ Ῥηγῖνοι οὐκ ἐθε- 
ἃ ἴω »ν 
λήσαντες ξυστρατεύειν, oVs πρῶτον ἤρξαντο πείθειν καὶ εἰκὸς 
4 4 4 A » Q 4 oN 
ἣν μάλιστα, Λεοντίνων τε ξυγγενεῖς ὄντας καὶ σφίσιν αἰεὶ 
ἐπιτηδείους. καὶ τῷ μὲν. Νικίᾳ προσδεχομένῳ ἦν τὰ παρὰ 
A a’ ’ A δὲ ε A Ἁ aN a ε δὲ 3 5 
τῶν Ἐγεσταίων, Tow ὃε ἐτέροιν καὶ ἀλογώτερα. οἱ 0€ Kye 
σταῖοι τοιόνδε τι ἐξετεχνήσαντο τότε ὅτε οἱ πρῶτοι πρέ-: 
A 3 4 4 3 “~ 9 ‘\ Ἁ ΄Ὁ 
σβεις τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἦλθον αὐτοῖς ἐς τὴν κατασκοπὴν τῶν 

πολέμφ) also 1.86.8. For ὅσον οὐ, all 
but, tantum non, see on 2. 94. 6. 

46. Those who had been sent to in- 
vestigate the matter announce to the 
Athenians that the reports of the Eges- 
taeans as to their resources are untrue. 
Story of the deception practiced upon 
the former Athenian envoys in Egesta. 
—1. ἐκ τῆς “Eyéorns: attached pro- 
leptically to the subj. See on 1.8.9. 
For the matter, οἵ, 44.§ 4.—3. ἃ tré 
oxovro: cf. 6. 82, 8; 8.§2.—4. φαί- 
νεται: are to be found. 

5. ἀντεκεκρούκει : Schol. rapa γνώμην 
ἀπηντήκει, ἀπεβεβήκει. Cf. Dem. 18.198 
ἀντέκρουσέ τι καὶ γέγονεν οἷον οὐκ ἔδει. 
The verb agrees in number with the 
nearest subj. (τοῦτο), in spite of the 
directly following pl. οἱ ἹΡηγῖνοι οὐκ ἐθε- 
λήσαντες. ΤῸ both subjects belongs πρῶ- 
tov: because to them at the start not only 
this (the disappointment at Egesta) had 
come in the way, but the refusal of the 
Rhegians. This const. of πρῶτον is un- 
avoidable because the second circum- 
stance antedated the other. πρῶτον 
here, as 1. 103. 16 and freq., strength- 

ens ἄρχεσθαι. Van H.’s conjecture πρώ- 
τους would introduce an unusual sort 
of pleonasm.— οἱ ‘Pnyivor οὐκ ἐθελή- 
σαντες : for the subst. force of the ptc., 
see App. on 4. 63. 2.— 6. πείθειν καὶ el. 
κὸς ἦν : Sc. ξυστρατεύειν. ---- 8. προσδεχο- 
μένῳ ἦν : for this peviphrasis see GMT. 
900; Kr. Spr. 48, 6, 4. See on 2.3.10; 
7, 385.8. On the matter, cf. 12.5, 22. 
14.—9. τοῖν érépow: Alcibiades and 
Lamachus. — καὶ dAoyérepa : rather in- 
comprehensible (or unexpected). ‘‘ Some- 
what disconcerting,’? W. E. Heitland 
(Jour. of Philol. XXIV, 8). For the 
force of the comp., cf. βιαιότερον ἀναγα- 
γόμενοι 2.33.14; ἀναχώρησις βιαιοτέρα 
4.31.15; αὐθαδέστερόν τι ἀπεκρίνατο 8. 
84. 5. 

οἱ δὲ ᾿Εἰγεσταῖοι : the epexegetical δέ 
introduces an added explanation of the 
whole occurrence, the aorists from ἐξε- 
τεχνήσαντο to διεθρόησαν (28) with the 
force of plpfs. Cf. 2.2.11; 4.1.4.— 
10. of πρῶτοι πρέσβεις τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων: . 
cf. 6. ὃ 8, 8.§2.— 11. ἦλθον αὐτοῖς : for 
the dat., see on 1.18.12. Kiihn. 428, 
δ. 5666. F. Smith, Trans. Amer. Phil. 






4, »ν “ > » ε Ν ~ 3 4 9 
χρημάτων. ἔς τε τὸ ἐν Ἔρυκι ἱερὸν τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης ἀγα- 
’ 3 ‘ 3 , N 3 4 4 “ 3 
yovtes αὐτοὺς ἐπέδειξαν τὰ ἀναθήματα, φιάλας τε καὶ οἰνο- 

4 \ l4 N » Ν 9 3 4 a 
χόας καὶ θυμιατήρια καὶ ἄλλην κατασκενὴν οὐκ ὀλίγην, a 
ΝΜ 9 σι λλῶ λ , Q ” 9 9 ὁλί ὃ 4 
OovTa apyupa πολλῳ πλείω THY οψιν ἀπ OALyNS ὀννάμεως 
χρημάτων παρείχετο, καὶ ἰδίᾳ ξενίσεις ποιούμενοι τῶν τριη- 
ριτῶν τά τε ἐξ αὐτῆς ᾿Εγέστης ἐκπώματα, καὶ χρυσᾶ καὶ 
9 “A , Ν \ 3 ““ > Ν , Ν 
ἀργυρᾶ, ξυλλέξαντες καὶ τὰ ἐκ τῶν ἐγγὺς πόλεων, καὶ Φοινι- 

“~ ve ,’ 2 3 4 3 4 3 Ν e 4 
κικῶν καὶ Ἑλληνίδων, αἰτησάμενοι ἐσέφερον ἐς Tas ἑστιά- 
σεις ὡς οἰκεῖα ἕκαστοι. Kal ἡάντων ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ τοῖς 4 
αὐτοῖς χρωμένων καὶ πανταχοῦ πολλῶν φαϊνομένων μεγάλην 
τὴν ἔκπληξιν τοῖς ἐκ τῶν τριήρων ᾿Αθηναίοις παρεῖχε, καὶ 
9 4 3 .Ν .9 ld , e 4 Ν 
ἀφικόμενοι ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας διεθρόησαν ὡς χρήματα πολλὰ 

\ e ‘ 3 ’ 9 4 δ δ Ἂ 
ἴδοιεν. καὶ οἱ μὲν αὐτοί τε ἀπατηθέντες καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους 
, , 9 Ἁ ~ e ’ 9 ϑ » > “a > 4 
τότε πείσαντες, ἐπειδὴ διῆλθεν ὁ λόγος ὅτι οὐκ εἴη ἐν TH “Eye 
στῃ τὰ χρήματα, πολλὴν τὴν αἰτίαν εἶχον ὑπὸ τῶν στρατιω- 

ae) e Ν Ν Ν Ν 4 3 4 Ν 
τῶν: οἱ δὲ στρατηγοὶ πρὸς τὰ παρόντα ἐβουλεύοντο. καὶ 

Assoc. XXV, 69 f.—12. ἔς τε τὸ ἐν 
"Epuxt ἱερόν: τε correl. with καὶ ἰδίᾳ 
(16). The sent. itself, as part of τοιόνδε 
τι, follows, as generally, without γάρ 
or other copula. See on 1. 89. 2.— 
14. dédvradpyupa .. . παρείχετο: which 
being silver made, with a small money 
value, a much greater show. It seems 
that the envoys, dazed by the number 
of silver consecrated vessels, without 
estimating their value imagined the 
treasures to be much more than what 
they saw. One must remember that it 
was a question of monthly subsiclies of 
60 talents (about $75,000). See 8. §1. 
As to the form of expression, cf. 1. 10. 
15 διπλασίαν dy τὴν δύναμιν εἰκάζεσθαι ἀπὸ 
THs φανερᾶς ὄψεως τῆς πόλεως. --- 16. ξενί- 
σεις ποιούμενοι : periphrasis for ξενίζον- 
τες. ξένισις, Which is found only here, 
Pollux (6. 7) calls τραχύ. See Lobeck 

ad Phryn. p. 351.— 17. καὶ χρυσᾶ καὶ 
ἀργυρᾶ : cf. 32.6.—19. ἐσέφερον : impf. 
of repeated occurrences.—20. ἕκαστοι:. 
v. H. writes ἕκαστος here as in 16. 17. 

ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ : for the most part; 80 
with most of the best Mss. for ὡς ἐπὶ 
πολύ (see on 14,12, 4).— 22. παρεῖχε: 
Sc. ταῦτα general subj. to be supplied 
from the context. See on 31.30; 2.3. 
14. — 23. διεθρόησαν : had spread the re- 
port. Cf. 8.91.1 (where blame is im- 
plied) and Xen. Hell. 1. 6. § 4. 

24. καὶ οἱ μὲν xré.: return to main 
narrative, of μέν referring to the first 
envoys of the Athenians. — 26. atrlav 
εἶχον : as 14.5; 3.138.384; here pass. 
with ὑπό. Cf. Plato, Apol. 88c; Hat. 5. 
73.17.—27. πρὸς τὰ παρόντα : cf. 41. 
8, and see on 2. 22.1. 

47. In the council of generals Nicias 
declared for bringing Selinus to terms 







Νικίου ἱμὲν ἦν γνώμη πλεῖν ἐπὶ Σελινοῦντα πάσῃ τῇ στρα- 
~ 8913 9 aN : 9 4 θ Ν a N 4 

Tia, ἐφ᾽ ὅπερ μάλιστα ἐπέμφθησαν, καὶ ἣν μὲν παρέχωσι 

χρήματα παντὶ τῷ στρατεύματι ᾿Εγεσταῖοι, πρὸς ταῦτα βου- 

δ λεύεσθαι, εἰ δὲ μή, ταῖς ἑξήκοντα ναυσίν, ὅσασπερ ἠτήσαντο, 

3 “A 4 9 ‘ 4 Ν ’ 

ἀξιοῦν διδόναι αὐτοὺς τροφήν, καὶ παραμείναντας Σελινουν- 

τίους ἢ Bian ξυμβάσει διαλλάξαι αὐτοῖς, καὶ οὕτω, παραπλεύ- 
“ » 4 \ 9 ’ A Ν A ᾿ 

σαντας τὰς ἄλλας πόλεις καὶ ἐπιδείξαντας μὲν τὴν δύναμιν 

τῆς ᾿Αθηναίων πόλεως, δηλώσαντας δὲ τὴν ἐς τοὺς φίλους καὶ 

’ ’ 3 A » a ’ > 9\ 7 
ξυμμάχους προθυμίαν, ἀποπλεῖν οἴκαδε, ἣν μή τι δι᾿ ὀλίγου 
ν, 39. 8 A 3 , A ΄ Δ᾽, » Φ 3 a A 
καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀδοκήτον ἢ Λεοντίνους οἷοί τε ὦσιν ὠφελῆσαι ἡ 
aA ¥ “ ’ ‘4 \ ~ ’ 
τῶν ἄλλων τινὰ πόλεων προσαγαγέσθαι, καὶ τῇ πόλει δαπα- 

νῶντας τὰ οἰκεῖα μὴ κινδυνεύειν. ᾿Αλκιβιάδης δὲ οὐκ ἔφη χρῆ- 

ναι τοσαύτῃ δυνάμει ἐκπλεύσαντας αἰσχρῶς καὶ ἀπράκτους 

with Egesta either peaceably or forci- 
bly, but before the other cities to make 
a display of Athens’ power, then with- 
out further operations return home. — 
2. ἦν γνώμη: with inf., as 1. 62. 8. -- 
8. ἐφ᾽ ὅπερ: for which very purpose, 
as 1.59.6. On the matter, cf. 8. §2.— 
5. ὅσασπερ ἡτήσαντο : referring to 8. 
4,—7. διαλλάξαι αὐτοῖς : Schol. τοῖς 
᾿Εγεσταίοις. Codex Laur. gives αὐτοῖς, 
inost Mss. αὐτούς owing to misconcep- 
tion. For const., cf. 2. 95. 7.— καὶ 
οὕτω : and so, 1.6. when that is done, 
as 6. 38.5, 55.8. Cf. 48. 10, 49. 15.— 
παραπλεύσαντας : generally used abs., 
with acc. also 62.7, 104.14; 7.56.2; 
8. 56. 21, 94.4, 101.9. wap αὐτὴν τὴν 
γῆν 8. 104, 2. --- 8. ἐπιδείξαντας. .. 
πόλεως : cf. 11. 14. --- 90. ἐς τοὺς φίλους 

- καὶ ξυμμάχους : even Nicias can no 

longer avoid recognizing the Egestae- 
ans as real allies of the Athenians. 
See App. on 6. 11.—10. δι᾿ ὀλίγον : 
διὰ ταχέων, Schol. See on 11. 14. --- 

11. ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀδοκήτον : periphrasis for 
adv., aS ἀπὸ τοῦ προφανοῦς 1. 35. 17, 
66. 7; ἀπὸ τοῦ εὐθέος 3.48.5. See on 
34. 50.—12. τῇ πόλει: with μὴ κινδυ- 
νεύειν, not to imperil the safety of the 
state (οἷ. 9.15, 10.17), which is made 
still worse by δαπανῶντας τὰ οἰκεῖα, ex- 
pending their own resources.—138. τὰ 
οἰκεῖα : as opp. to the resources of the 

48. Alcibiades, on the contrary, ad- 
vises to win over to the Athenian alli- 
ance not only the other Hellenic cities, 
except Selinus and Syracuse, ‘but also 
the Sicels and then to attack Syracuse 
and Selinus, unless these cities should 
yield to the Athenian demands. — 
2. ἀπράκτους: Pp.’s and Kr.’s conjec- 
ture for ἀπράκτως of the Mss. Cl. re- 
tained the adv.; but as Thuc. uses the 
adj. often, while the adv. occurs else- 
where only in late writers (e.g. Plut. 
Arist. 18, Cato M. 1), it seems best to 
adopt the adj., as most recent editors 



ἀπελθεῖν, ἀλλ᾽ ἔς TE τὰς πόλεις ἐπικηρυκεύεσθαι πλὴν Σελι- 
νοῦντος καὶ Συρακουσῶν τὰς ἄλλας, καὶ πειρᾶσθαι καὶ τοὺς 
Ν Ν ‘ 3 4 9 “ “ 4 “ \ 
Σικελοὺς τοὺς μὲν ἀφιστάναι ἀπὸ τῶν Συρακοσίων, τοὺς δὲ 
φίλους ποιεῖσθαι, ἵνα σῖτον καὶ στρατιὰν ἔχωσι, πρῶτον δὲ 
πείθειν Μεσσηνίους (ἐν πόρῳ γὰρ μάλιστα Kat προσβολῃ 
ιν nvious (cv πορῷ yap μ ρ ἢ 
Ν ~ Ν ’ \ “Ὁ 
εἶναι αὐτοὺς τῆς Σικελίας, καὶ λιμένα καὶ ἐφόρμησιν τῇ στρα- 

᾿χιᾷ UK 4 ἔσεσθαι) έ δὲ τὰ λε 
a ἱκανωτάτην ἔσεσθαι), προσαγαγομένους δὲ τὰς πόλεις, 



3 ’ 9 4 9 ¥ 4 ‘ 
εἰδότας μεθ᾽ ὧν τις πολεμήσει, οὕτως ἤδη Συρακούσαις Kal 
A ΝΕ A a \ ε Ν 3 4 , 
Σελινοῦντι ἐπιχειρεῖν, HY μὴ οἱ μὲν "Ἐγεσταίοις ξυμβαίνωσιν, 

ε \ , 2A , ᾿ , \ »¥ ¥ 
ot δὲ Λεοντίνους ἐῶσι κατοικίζειν. Λάμαχος δὲ ἄντικρυς ἔφη 1 

do. For correlation of adv. and adj., 
see on 8. 4. 4. --- 8. ἐς τὰς πόλεις ἐπι- 
κηρνκεύεσθαι: this verb with és only 
here in Thuc., with πρός and pers. subj. 
4, 108. 16: 7. 49.5; 8. 70.12; with ws 
7.48.14; freq. with dat. (Kr.).—4. τὰς 
ἄλλας : referring clearly to the other 
Siceliote cities, which Nicias also refers 
to as ἄλλαι in 20.10. Cf. 41. 10.— 
τοὺς Σικελοὺς τοὺς μὲν xré.: see on 
84. 2.—6. ἔχωσι : sc. οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, i.e. 
may have always at disposal (ἀπὸ τού- 
των τῶν πόλεων Schol., perhaps also, as 
Pp. suggests, καὶ τῶν Σικελῶν). St. 
writes in his text edition σχῶσι (so 
Bm.), and several recent editors adopt 
Dobree’s conjecture παρέχωσι (de Si- 
culis). Even if the Athenians had 
brought along not only troops but pro- 
visions (cf. 44. § 1), additions in both 
directions would be welcome. For the 
provisioning, cf. e.g. 88. § 4, 1038. § 2, 
and for troops 62. ὃ 5, 108. § 2.—7. Μεσ- 
onvlovs: already previously allies of 
the Athenians for a short time (3. 90. 
84. 4,1. ὃ 1). ---ἐν πόρῳ... καὶ προσ- 
βολῇ εἶναι αὐτοὺς τῆς Σικελίας : for they 
are most conveniently situated for the 
passage to and landing in Sicily. The 

expressions ἐν πόρῳ κατῳκῆσθαι (1. 120. 
8) and προσβολὴν ἔχειν (4.1.5) are here 
united with strengthened meaning. 
For the obj. gen. with προσβολή, cf. 4. 
1.5; 7.4.88.—8. ἐφόρμησιν: i.e. means 
of watching and opposing every hos- 
tile movement. This meaning is clear 
from 8. 15. § 1, where of the ἐφορμοῦσαι 
νῆες first eight ἀπολείπουσι τὴν φυλα- 
κήν, then the remaining twelve like- 
wise τὴν ἐφόρμησιν. See on 49. 18. --- 
10. τις : one, with tacit but unmistak- 
able reference. Cf. 4.68.24, 28; 5.14. 
22.— ovras ἤδη: 80 now, after ptc. as 
1.87. 4.—11. of μέν, of δέ: the former 
οἱ Σελινούντιοι, the latter of Συρακόσιοι, 
in chiastic order as 1. 120. 20; 2.64. 
28: 3.63.15; 5.16.3.— 12. Λεοντίνους 
ἐῶσι κατοικίζειν : subj. of inf. is τοὺς 
᾿Αθηναίους. Cf. 8. 12. 

49. Lamachus, however, was for 
immediate attack on Syracuse, which 
would insure to the Athenians all the 
advantages of a surprise and would win 
over the rest of the Siceliotes. Megara 
he claimed would be the most suitable 
ship-station.— 1. ἄντικρυς πλεῖν: to sail 
direct. Cf. 2.4.26. ἄντικρυς elsewhere 
in Thuc. in fig. sense. See on 1. 122.15. 


χρῆναι πλεῖν ἐπὶ Συρακούσας καὶ πρὸς TH πόλει ὡς τάχιστα 

δ , A θ .ν»ν»}»͵΄Ὦ.»ὕἥ͵ ,».»,» 5 \ aN 

ἐκπεπληγμένοι. τὸ γὰρ πρῶτον πᾶν στράτευμα δεινότατον 
> a A , Ν 3 ” 3 A A , 9 

ὅ εἶναι" ἣν δὲ χρονίσῃ πρὶν ἐς ὄψιν ἐλθεῖν, τῇ γνώμῃ ἀναθαρ- 
A 9 v4 Ν ἌΝ A aA 9 ’ 

σοῦντας ἀνθρώπους καὶ τῇ ὄψει καταφρονεῖν μᾶλλον. aidvi- 

ὃ δὲ a , y ¥ 5 A δὲ 
LOL O€ ἣν προσπέσωσιψν, EWS ETL πέριόοέεεις προσ ἔχονται, 

rd 95 <A A la A Q 4 a 3 A 
μάλιστ᾽ ἂν σφᾶς περιγενέσθαι καὶ κατὰ πάντα ἂν αὐτοὺς 
ἐκφοβῆσαι, τῇ τε ὄψει (πλεῖστοι γὰρ av νῦν φανῆναι) καὶ 
10 τῇ προσδοκίᾳ ὧν πείσονται, μάλιστα δ᾽ ἂν τῷ αὐτίκα κιν- 

dive τῆς μάχης. εἰκὸς δὲ εἶναι καὶ ἐν τοῖς ἀγροῖς πολ- 
λοὺς ἀποληφθῆναι ἔξω διὰ τὸ ἀπιστεῖν σφᾶς μὴ ἥξειν, 

—2. πρὸς τῇ πόλει: near the city (i.e. 
under the walls). Cf. Plut. Nic. 14 μά- 
xnv ἔγγιστα τῆς πόλεως τιθέναι. ---- ὃ. τὴν 
μάχην ποιεῖσθαι : cf. ὅ. θὅ. 17. 

5. χρονίσῃ: delay, lose time. Also 
8. 16. 12.—6. καὶ τῇ ὄψει καταφρονεῖν : 
also on sight despise. The simple dat. 
is induced by antithesis to τῇ γνώμῃ 
ἀναθαρσοῦντας, hence v. H.’s conjecture 
κἀν τῇ ὄψει is unnecessary. Cf. 2.11. 
21 τῇ μὲν γνώμῃ θαρσαλέους στρατεύειν, 
τῷ δὲ ἔργῳ δεδιότας παρεσκευάσθα. . ---- κα- 
ταφρονεῖν : Opp. to ἐκπεπληγμένοι (4). 
Cf. 11. 20, 88. 18, 35.5. The inf. pres. 
(not fut.) to éxpress generality. See 
St., Qu. Gr.? p. 6.— aloviSvor: prefer- 
able to αἰφνίδιον of the Mss., acc. to 
Thucydidean usage (4. 75.18; 8. 14. 6, 
28.9). For the emphatic position, cf. 
13.10 and see on 14. 10.5. From ἕως 
. . προσδέχονται, it is clear that αἰφνί- 
διοι refers only to the immediate ad- 
vance without further preparations (cf. 
ἄντικρυς πλεῖν 1.1 and τῷ αὐτίκα κινδύνῳ 
τῆς μάχης 1.10), not to an unexpected 
attack. That the Syracusans expected 
an immediate attack is confirmed by 

63. § 2.—8. σφᾶς περιγενέσθαι : this is 
the reading of all Mss., but Bk.’s con- 
jecture σφεῖς, on account of πλεῖστοι (9), 
has been adopted by St., Hude, and 
Bm. (not in text edition). But the 
accus. is sufficiently protected by 96.5; 
8.111. 18; 7.21.17; 8. 82. 15.— κατὰ 
πάντα: explained by the following 

12. ἀποληφθῆναι: without ἄν after 
εἰκὸς εἶναι. GMT. 416, 421. See on 1. 
81.18. The Mss. vary between ἀπο- 
ληφθῆναι and ἀπολειφθῆναι, but only 
the former suits the context (διὰ 7d... 
ἥξειν). --- διὰ τὸ ἀπιστεῖν... ἥξειν : on 
account of disbelief in our coming, not 
referring to present conditions and the 
advance proposed by Lamachus (now 
the Syracusans expect an immediate 
attack), but to the past and the coming 
of the Athenians to Sicily, which the 
Syracusans had so long not credited. 
Of the sentiments dominant in Syra- 
cuse till quite recently (cf. 45. 4 οὐκέτι 
ἠπίστουν) Lamachus might very well 
have got knowledge. On ἀπιστεῖν μή 
with dependent inf., cf. 4.40.5 and 



‘ A 4 
καὶ ἐσκομιζομένων αὐτῶν THY στρατιὰν οὐκ ἀπορήσειν χρημά- 

των, ἦν πρὸς τῇ πόλει κρατοῦσα καθέζηται. τούς τε ἄλλους 4 

16 Σικελιώτας οὕτως ἤδη μᾶλλον καὶ ἐκείνοις οὐ ξυμμαχήσειν 

‘ , 4 Ν > 4 “A 
Kat σφίσι προσιέναι καὶ ov διαμελλήσειν περισκοποῦντας 

ὁπότεροι κρατήσουσι. ναύσταθμον δὲ ἐπαναχωρήσαντας καὶ 
41 4 2 ¥ A A A 4 2 A 
ἐφόρμησιν τὰ Μέγαρα ἔφη χρῆναι ποιεῖσθαι, a ἦν ἐρῆμα, 
ἀπέχοντα Συρακουσῶν οὔτε πλοῦν πολὺν οὔτε ὁδόν. 

4 N A 9 Ἁ 9 ld 9 ἃ “aA > 
Λάμαχος μὲν ταῦτα εἰπὼν ὅμως προσέθετο αὐτὸς TH ᾿Αλκι- 
’ ’ δ Ἁ “~ 3 ’ ~ ε “~ N 
Biddov γνώμῃ. pera δὲ τοῦτο ᾿Αλκιβιάδης τῇ αὑτοῦ νηὶ 

see on 8. 82.18. GMT. 807.— 18. καὶ 
ἐσκομιζομένων αὐτῶν.... καθέζηται : and 
while they were attempting to carry in 
(their property) the army would not 
lack supplies, if it encamped under the 
walls victorious. Against this explana- 
tion of Cl.’s Steup objects that the ἀπο- 
ληφθῆναι must have put a stop to the 
ἐσκομίζεσθαι, and he conjectures some- 
thing like ἐσβαλοῦσαν ἔτι to have fallen 
out before ἐσκομιζομένων». ---- ἐσκομιζομέ- 
νων: used abs., cf. 2. 18. 18. --- χρημά- 
των: supplies, not merely money. Cf. 
97.27; 1.49.21; 8.74.10; 7.24.7, 265. 
7.—14. κρατοῦσα: victorious, i.e. in the 
μάχη mentioned in 8 and 11. 

15. οὕτως : see on 47. 7.— ἤδη μᾶλ- 
λον: cf. 59. 5, 105. 14.— 16. περισκο- 
ποῦντας ὁπότεροι κρατήσουσι: cf. 4.73. 
5 περιορωμένους ὁποτέρων ἡ νίκη ἔσται. ---- 
17. ἐταναχωρήσαντας: returning thither 
(from their first attack on Syracuse), 
i.e. with the fleet, for the land army 
would be encamped before the city 
(πρὸς τῇ πόλει ἐκαθέζετο). --- 18. ἐφόρμη- 
σιντὰ Μέγαρα: on the reading, see App. 
Against Alcibiades, who had praised 
the advantages of Messene as λιμένα 
καὶ ἐφόρμησιν ἱκανωτάτην (48. 8), Lama- 
chus recommends the nearer Megara 

i.e. Hyblaea (4.8), which the Syracu- 
sans under Gelon had destroyed (4. § 2, 
θ4. ὃ 1), as ναύσταθμον (ship and supply 
station, see on 8.6.10) and ἐφόρμησιν 
(watch station against the enemy, see 
on 48.8). For the art., cf. 75.4, 97. 
25; 7.25. 15.—19. ἀπέχοντα... οὔτε 
πλοῦν πολὺν οὔτε ὁδόν: cf. 97.8 οὔτε 
πλοῦν οὔτε ὁδὸν πολλὴν ἀπέχει. 

50. Still Lamachus accepts the view 
of Alcibiades. The latter thereupon ne- 
gotiates in vain with the Messenians; 
then all three generals undertake with 
60 ships a voyage of reconnoissance 
to Naxos, where they are received, to 
Catana, where they are rejected, and 
to Syracuse, where through 10 ships 
sent into the Great Harbor they an- 
nounce their intentions with reference 
to Leontini and get information about 
preparations at Syracuse; whereupon 
they return to Catana.—1. προσέθετο 
αὐτός: so all the better Mss. except 
M, not καὶ αὐτός, which would indicate 
adhesion from others. It is only em- 
phasized that Lamachus, although of 
a different opinion, for himself adopts 
the view of Alcibiades, to avoid a split. 
Therewith the divergent view of Nicias 
is implied, which however did not 




διαπλεύσας ἐς Μεσσήνην καὶ λόγους ποιησάμενος περὶ Evp- 

μαχίας πρὸς αὐτούς, ὡς οὐκ ἔπειθεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπεκρίναντο πόλει 

6 μὲν ἂν οὐ δέξασθαι, ἀγορὰν δ᾽ ἔξω παρέξειν, ἀπέπλει ἐς τὸ 


1 4 N 9 δ 4 e ? A 3 A 
Pyytov. Kat εὐθὺς ξυμπλη ρώσαντες ἑξήκοντα ναῦς ἐκ πασων 

ol στρατηγοὶ καὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια λαβόντες παρέπλεον ἐς Νάξον, 

ὴν ἄλλην στρατιὰν ἐν Ῥηγίῳ καταλιπόντες καὶ ἕνα σφῶν 
mH | ρ Ὦγιᾳ 

αὐτῶν. Ναξίων δὲ δεξαμένων τῇ πόλει παρέπλεον ἐς Κατάνην. 

\ ε 9 “\ ε A 9 9. 9 9 A Ν > 9) 
καὶ ὡς αὐτοὺς οἱ Καταναῖοι οὐκ ἐδέχοντο (ἐνῆσαν γὰρ αὐτόθι 

» Ν 4 , > 4 > A δ 
ἄνδρες τὰ Συρακοσίων βουλόμενοι), ἐκομίσθησαν ἐπὶ τὸν 

4 4 ‘ 3 ’ “A ε ’ 9 ON 
Τηρίαν ποταμόν, Kat αὐλισάμενοι TH ὑστεραίᾳ ἐπὶ Συρα- 

τ» ν 45 N 4 » Ν » A 4 A 
κούσας ἔπλεον, ἐπὶ κέρως ἔχοντες τὰς ἄλλας ναῦς, δέκα δὲ 

“Ἢ. “A 4 3 νι 4 ες - A la Ν 
τῶν νεῶν προύπεμψαν ἐς τὸν μέγαν λιμένα πλεῦσαΐ τε καὶ 

prevent, as shown in what follows, a 
start being made on the plan of Alcibia- 
des.—2. τῇ αὑτοῦ νηί: i.e. with the tri- 
reme which as trierarch he had fitted 
out and commanded ; so 61. 25 ἔχων τὴν 
ἑαυτοῦ ναῦν .--- 3. ἐς Μεσσήνην : the win- 
ning of Messene had been designated by 
Alcibiades (48. 7) asthe next task of the 
Athenians, — 4, ἔπειθεν : impf. of con- 
tinued effort. See on 4. 4. 1. --- πόλει : 
in the city, dat. as 4. 108. 15. — 5. ἂν οὐ 
δέξασθαι... παρέξειν : transition from 
aor. inf. with ἄν to fut. inf.; see on 1. 
127.6. The refusal is not so definite 
as the concession: ‘‘in the city they 
could not receive them, they would 
however provide them with provisions 
outside.’’ For the unusual order ἂν οὐ 
—for which v. H. writes οὐκ ἄν --- Kr. 
compares from Attic prose Xen. Anab. 
2.8.18 and Dem. 9.9. See Kr. Spr. 
59, 7, 5. 

6. ξυμπληρώσαντες : 1.6. manning 
the squadron of 60 ships from the three 
divisions in common (42. 5). —8. ἕνα: 
most prob. Nicias, who had opposed 

the whole plan of Alcibiades. Cer- 
tainly it could not have been Alcibiades 
(61. 4). 

11. ἄνδρες : see on 10. 5. — τὰ Σνυρα- 
κοσίων βουλόμενοι: more freq. φρονοῦντες 
(51. 8; 3. 68. 18; 5. 84. 5; 8.81. 7). See 
on 2.79. 8.—12. Τηρίαν : now Fiume 
di S. Leonardo, near which Leontini 
was situated. Holm, Gesch. Siz. I, 
28.—13. ἐπὶ κέρως ἔχοντες τὰς ἄλλας 
ναῦς : i.e. the 50, after 10 of the 60 had 
been sent off, remained in the line in 
which they had sailed out. For ἐπὶ 
κέρως, see on 32.10. It is necessary to 
punctuate with comma before δέκα, 
since also the 10 ships ἐπὶ Συρακούσας 
ἔπλεον. For transition from ptc. to fin. 
verb, see on 1.57.10; 4.69. 11, 106. 4. 

14. ἐς τὸν μέγαν λιμένα πλεῦσαι : this 
and the foll. infs. to execute the task 
indicated in προύπεμψαν. Cf. similar 
infs., after προτάσσειν 100. 18; after 
πέμπειν 4. 182.15; 6. 8. 18, 15; after 
περιπέμπειν 5.2.11; after ὑπεκπέμπειν 
4.8.12; after κομίζειν 5.56.12. For 
the position of τε, see on 34. 17.— 




15 κατασκέψασθαι εἴ τι ναυτικόν ἐστι καθειλκυσμένον, καὶ 
A A “ 9 A 9 

κηρῦξαι ἀπὸ τῶν νεῶν προσπλεύσαντας ὅτι ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἤκουσι 

A A \ “ 

Λεοντίνους ἐς THY ἑαυτῶν κατοικιοῦντες κατὰ ξυμμαχίαν καὶ 

», ε 

ξυγγένειαν: τοὺς οὖν ὄντας ἐν Συρακούσαις Λεοντίνων ὡς 

ON , ‘ 3 , 3 θ , 3 ὃ a 9 ’ > Ν 

παρὰ φίλους καὶ εὐεργέτας ᾿Αθηναίους ἀδεῶς ἀπιέναι. ἐπεὶ 
3 9 4 Ἁ ld 4 4 \ δ Ld 

δ᾽ ἐκηρύχθη καὶ κατεσκέψαντο τήν τε πόλιν Kal τοὺς λιμένας 

\ Ν Ν \ 4 3 i > “A ε 4 4 
καὶ τὰ περὶ THY χώραν, ἐξ ἧς αὐτοῖς ὁρμωμένοις πολεμητέα 
4 9 4 4 3 , \ 9 4 4 
ἦν, ἀπέπλευσαν πάλιν ἐς Κατάνην. Kat ἐκκλησίας γενομένης 
τὴν μὲν στρατιὰν οὐκ ἐδέχοντο οἱ Καταναῖοι, τοὺς δὲ στρα- 

“ 9 ’ 9 9 » 4 > a) “ 
τηγοὺς ἐσελθόντας ἐκέλευον, εἴ τι βούλονται, εἰπεῖν. Kal 
λέγοντος τοῦ ᾿Αλκιβιάδον καὶ τῶν ἐν τῇ πόλει πρὸς τὴν 
ἐκκλησίαν τετραμμένων οἱ στρατιῶται πυλίδα τινὰ ἐνῳκο- 
ὃ , A ¥ ὃ / Ν 3 , > 9 

ομημένην κακῶς ἔλαθον διελόντες καὶ ἐσελθόντες ἠγό- 
> δ 4 “A δὲ ’ e \ Ν La) 
palov [ἐς τὴν πόλιν]. τῶν δὲ Καταναίων οἱ μὲν τὰ τῶν 

15. ἐστι καθειλκυσμένον: for the periph- 
rasis, see App. on 1. 1. 5.—17. éav- 
τῶν: emphasizing the esp. important 
Obj. Λεοντίνους. Cf..1. 17. 5 ἐπράχθη 
ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν οὐδὲν ἔργον εἰ μή τι πρὸς περι- 
olxous τοὺς αὑτῶν ἑκάστοις. Kr. Spr. 51, 
2, 6.— 18. τοὺς ὄντας ἐν Σνρακούσαις 
Λεοντίνων... ἀπιέναι: οὗ. ὅ. 4.10. The 
inf. after κηρύσσειν (as 4.37.8; 5.115. 
7; and after ἀνεῖπεν ὁ κῆρυξ 2.2.27) be- 
cause it is here not, as before (ὅτε... 
évyyéveav), an announcement, but a 
demand. — 19. ᾿Αθηναίους : in most 
Mss. miswritten ᾿Αθηναίων. The prep. 
is not repeated, as 1. 84.19; 4. 41. 6. 

21. πολεμητέα : see on 1. 7. 2. 

51. While the Catanaeans are hold- 
ing a popular assembly a part of the 
Athenian army break into the city; 
thereupon the adherents of the Syra- 
cusans withdraw and the remaining 
citizens declare for the Athenians, who 
then betake themselveswith their whole 

fleet from Rhegium to Catana.— 1. ἐκ- 
κλησίας : τῶν Καταναίων Schol.—2. τὴν 
μὲν στρατιὰν... εἰπεῖν : Pp. compares 
the bearing of the Acanthians toward 
Brasidas 4. 84. ὃ 2. — 3. εἴτι βούλονται: 
See App. on 14. 91. 18. --- 
4, πρὸς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τετραμμένων: 
their attention wholly occupied with the 
assembly. See on 2. 40.6.—5. ἐνῳκοδο- 
μημένην κακῶς : sc. τῷ τείχει. κακῶς = 
ἀτέχνως, σαθρῶς (Schol.).—6. διελόντες: 
breaking through. Cf. 4.48.11, 110. 18, 
111. 8. --- ἠγόραζον : Schol. dvr? τοῦ ἐν 
ἀγορᾷ διατρίβειν. Freq. in Hdt. (2.35.9; 
8. 187. 8, 189.10; 4. 78. 21, 164. 21), 
rare in Attic (Ar. Eq. 1878; Lysist. 
638; Xen. Hell. 2.4.14; Resp. Lac. 
9.4). Ci. 2.2.21 θέσθαι és τὴν ἀγορὰν 
τὰ ὅπλα (under similar circumstances). 
—7. ἐς τὴν πόλιν: rightly bracketed 
by v. H. and most recent editors. ἐσελ- 
θόντες alone is quite as intelligible here 
as ἐσελθόντας in ὃ ; besides, if expressed, 

50. εἰπεῖν. 




> ? A e Τὸ Ν 4 ¥ ὃ Ov 
πυρακοσίων φρονοῦντες, ὡς εἶδον TO στράτευμα ἐνὸον, εὐθὺς 

περιδεεῖς γενόμενοι ὑπεξῆλθον οὐ πολλοί τινες, οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι 

10 ἐψηφίσαντό τε ξυμμαχίαν τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις καὶ τὸ ἄλλο στρά- 
> 2 > ε ΄, , Lan A , 
τευμα ἐκέλευον ἐκ Ῥηγίον κομίζειν. μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο διαπλεύ- 


ς 3 A 3 NS Cr 2 , »¥ A ; A 
σαντες οἱ Αθηναῖοι ες ΤΟ Ρὴήγιον πασῃ ἤδη TY στρβρατιᾳ 

» 3 ‘ , 3 ᾿ > 4 , 
ἄραντες ἐς τὴν Κατάνην, ἐπειδὴ ἀφίκοντο, κατεσκενάζοντο 

Ν 4 3 4 A 9 “ » ’ 
τὸ στρατόπεδον. ἐσηγγέλλετο δὲ αὐτοῖς ἔκ τε Καμαρίνης, 

ε > Κ A ¥ , g , A 
ws, εἰ ἔλθοιεν, προσχωροῖεν ἂν, καὶ OTL Συρακόσιοι πληροῦσι 

ναυτικόν. ἁπάσῃ οὖν τῇ στρατιᾷ, παρέπλευσαν πρῶτον μὲν 

> AN , Q ε 90... & N 2 
ἐπι Συρακούσας" καὶ ὡς οὐδὲν NU Pov ναντικον πληρούμενον, 

, a 2 A , N , 3 \ 
παρεκομίζοντο αὖθις ἐπὶ Kapapivns καὶ σχόντες ἐς τὸν 

3 N 3 4 e > 3 3 , 4 4 
αἰγιαλὸν ἐπεκηρυκεύοντο. οἱ δ᾽ οὐκ ἐδέχοντο, λέγοντες σφίσι 

ἐς τὴν πόλιν must surely have come 
before or right after ἐσελθόντες. 

τὰ τῶν Συρακοσίων φρονοῦντες : see 
on 50.11.—8. ἔνδον: it is not necessary 
to add 8», with v. H. and others. Cf. 
5. 56. 5, where Cl., it is true, thought 
of adding ὄντας before rdvras.— 9. ὑπ- 
εξῆλθον : of the same thing also 4. 74. 
7. — οὐ πολλοί τινες : see on 1.5. 

11. διαπλεύσαντες : this reading of 
Vat. is, with Bk., Kr., and Cl., to be 
preferred to πλεύσαντες of the rest of 
the Mss. διαπλεῖν is the proper term 
for crossing a sea, as 44.1, 50.3. Cf. 
also διάπλους 81. 48. --- 12. πάσῃ ἤδη 
τῇ στρατιᾷ: no more with only a part 
as 50. § 2.— 138. κατεσκενάζοντο : were 
arranging, i.e. set about arranging; 
meanwhile came the following an- 
nouncements (ἐσηγγέλλετο). On the 
camp, cf. 64. ὃ 8, 75. § 2, 88. § 5. 

52. Vain attempt of the Athenian 
fleet to win over the Camarinaeans, 
First hostilities after landing in the 
territory of the Syracusans. Return 
to Catana.—1. ἔκ τε Kapaplvns: cor- 

related with καὶ ὅτι Συρακόσιοι κτὲ. (2) ; 
the announcements came simultane- 
ously from different quarters.— 5. αὖ- 
Os: further, after πρῶτον (3) implying 
advance not retrogression. Cf. 90.4; 
δ. 36. 11, 76.9; 8. 22. 18, and see on 1. 
70. 9.— σχόντες ἐς : see on ὃ. 29. 5 and 
7.1.14. — és τὸν αἰγιαλόν : on the open 
coast, as Opp. to λιμήν, in which they 
were not received. — 6. σφίσι τὰ ὅρκια 
εἶναι xré.: accordingly the Athenians 
must have based their call to the Ca- 
marinaeans to join them on a sworn 
agreement between Camarina and 
Athens. But this compact was hardly, 
as Cl. supposed, the peace of Gela (4. 
65. § 1,2). For we have no warrant 
for assuming that this peace had regu- 
lated also the relations of the Atheni- 
ans to the Sicilian cities to which they 
had lent assistance against Syracuse, 
i.e. Leontini, Camarina, etc. On the 
other hand, the passage in 75. § 3 πυν- 
θανόμενοι τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους és τὴν Καμάριναν 
κατὰ τὴν ἐπὶ Λάχητος γενομένην ξυμμα- 
χίαν πρεσβεύεσθαι, εἴ πως προσαγάγοιντο 




τὰ ὅρκια εἶναι μιᾷ νηὶ καταπλεόντων ᾿Αθηναίων δέχεσθαι, 

a \ 3 N / 4 ¥ δὲ , 
ἣν μὴ avToL πλείους μεταπέμπωσιν. ἄπρακτοι ὃὲ γενόμενοι 

3 », \ 9 ’ 4 ~ 4 x ¢ 
ἀπέπλεον - καὶ ἀποβάντες κατά τι τῆς Συρακοσίας καὶ ἄρπα- 2 

10 γὴν ποιησάμενοι καὶ τῶν Συρακοσίων ἱππέων βοηθησάντων 

καὶ τῶν ψιλῶν τινας ἐσκεδασμένους διαφθειράντων ἀπεκο- 

68 μίσθησαν ἐς Κατάνην. καὶ καταλαμβάνουσι τὴν Σαλαμι- 

A A 3 “A 9 > 4 ε 
νίαν ναῦν ἐκ τῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν ἤκουσαν ἐπί τε ᾿Αλκιβιάδην, ὡς 

, 3 A 3 9 , * ε , 3 , 
κελεύσοντας ἀποπλεῖν ἐς ἀπολογίαν ὧν ἡ πόλις ἐνεκά- 

λ \ > > » λ δ A A A 9 4 A 
ει, Και ΕἾ ar OVS TLYAS Τῶν στρατιωτων ΤΩΡ μέτ αὐυτου 

αὐτούς (οἷ. 82. ὃ 1 ἀφικόμεθα ἐπὶ τῆς πρό- 
τερον οὔσης ξυμμαχίας ἀνανεώσει) makes 
strongly for an alliance concluded be- 
tween Athens and Camarina at the 
time of the command of Laches (8. 86. 
§ 1 ff.).— 7. μιᾷ νηί: 1.6. coming with 
only one ship and asking admittance. 
Cf. 2.7.18; 3.71.4.—8. μεταπέμπωσιν: 
used by Thuc. in both act. and mid. 
with same force. See on 1. 112.6. 

9. ἀποβάντες : on the return to Cat- 
ana.— κατά τι τῆς Συρακοσίας : αὐ some 
point of Syracusan territory on the coast. 
—10. ποιησάμενοι καὶ... βοηθησάν- 
των: for combination of ptcs. concord- 
ant and absolute, cf. 4. 54.16, 183. 3. 
GMT. 876.— 11. τινας ἐσκεδασμένους : 
of the Athenians who had scattered 
ἁρπαγὴν ποιούμενοι. 

δ8. They find the Salaminia just 
arrived from Athens to summon to 
trial Alcibiades, on charges preferred 
against him by the state, as well as 
some others, accused partly with him 
of profanation of the mysteries, partly 
of mutilation of the Hermae. For at 
Athens prevailed now the greatest fear 
and mistrust in recollection of the tyr- 
anny of the Peisistratids.— 1. τὴν Za- 
λαμινίαν ναῦν : one of the two Athenian 

state triremes. See on 8. 33.2. ναῦν, 
which might have been omitted, is 
found also 61.19. Cf. 8.74.1 τὴν Πά- 
parov ναῦν. --- 2. ws κελεύσοντας : after 
τὴν Σαλαμινίαν ναῦν, for the synesis, see 
on 1.52.4. Cobet suspects ὡς κελεύσον- 
τας ἀποπλεῖν, St. ws κελεύσοντας, both un- 
necessarily.— 3. ἀποπλεῖν : sail back, as 
often: 1.89.12; 2.94.19; 3.79.7, 85. 
8, 88.13; 4.56.9, 65. 9.— ὧν % πόλις 
ἐνεκάλει: 61. § 1 reference is here 
made not only to the profanation of the 
mysteries, but also to a plot against the 
democracy (cf. 28.§2). The expres- 
sion implies that in the interim a for- 
mal charge against Alcibiades had been 
brought before the people.—4. τῶν 
στρατιωτῶν τῶν per αὐτοῦ: Cl.explains, 
dependent on ἐπ᾽ ἄλλους τινάς (cf. 2. δ]. 
4 ἄλλο οὐδὲν τῶν εἰωθότων). Steup ob- 
jects that thus μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ is strange, since 
Alcibiades as one of the three generals 
commanded only the third of the army 
that fell to him by lot (42. § 1), and 
that the gens. μεμηνυμένων ὡς ἀσεβούν- 
των cannot be explained. He suggests 
ἐπ᾽ ἄλλους τινάς, τῶν στρατιωτῶν τινων 
μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ xré. Hude writes τῶν στρα- 
τιωτῶν, τῶν ζμὲνν μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ xré., which 
is doubtless just what Thuc. intended, 




, Ν A ’ὕ ε 9 4 “A A A 
5 μεμηνυμένων περὶ τῶν μυστηρίων ὡς ἀσεβούντων, τῶν δὲ καὶ 

περὶ τῶν Eppov. 

Οἱ γὰρ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ἐπειδὴ ἡ στρατιὰ ἀπέπλευσεν, οὐδὲν 

4. A A \ Q ἴων 
ἧσσον ζήτησιν ἐποιοῦντο τῶν περὶ τὰ μυστήρια καὶ τῶν 

Q N ε “A , \ 3 ’ δ 
περὶ τοὺς Ἑρμᾶς δρασθέντων, καὶ οὐ δοκιμάζοντες τοὺς 

, . 3 Ν 4 e ’ 9 ὃ 4 ὃ Ν ἴω 
10 μηννυτάς, ἀλλὰ TavTa ὑπόπτως ἀποδεχόμενοι διὰ πονηρῶν 
9 , , , Q A ww ~ Sf 
ἀνθρώπων πίστιν πάνυ χρηστοὺς τῶν πολιτῶν ξυλλαμβά- 
νοντες κατέδουν, χρησιμώτερον ἡγούμενοι εἶναι βασανίσαι 
τὸ πρᾶγμα καὶ εὑρεῖν ἢ διὰ μηνντοῦ πονηρίαν τινὰ καὶ χρη- 
δ a 5 9 , > 2 A 9 
, στὸν δοκοῦντα εἶναι αἰτιαθέντα ἀνέλεγκτον διαφυγεῖν. ἐπι- 


A A Q ~ 
στάμενος yap ὁ δῆμος ἀκοῇ τὴν Πεισιστράτον καὶ τῶν 

παίδων τυραννίδα χαλεπὴν τελευτῶσαν γενομένην καὶ προσ- 

έτι οὐδ᾽ ὑφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν καὶ “Appodiov καταλυθεῖσαν, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὸ 
, 3 ~ 3 AN ἃ ’ ε 4 9 ld 
Λακεδαιμονίων ἐφοβεῖτο αἰεὶ καὶ πάντα ὑπόπτως ἐλάμβανε. 

as Kr. also understands. — per αὐτοῦ: 
cf, 28.5 ὧν καὶ τὸν ᾿Αλκιβιάδην ἐπῃτιῶντο 
and 61.4 τὰ μυστικὰ, ὧν ἐπαίτιος Fv. — 
5. τῶν δὲ καὶ περὶ τῶν Ἑ!ρμῶν: of the 
mutilation of the Hermae Alcibiades 
had not been accused, acc. to 28.§1 
and 61.§ 1. 

7, οὐδὲν ἧσσον ζήτησιν ἐποιοῦντο κτέ.: 
cf. 27. ὃ 2.---θ. οὐ δοκιμάζοντες τοὺς μη- 
γυτάς: i.e. without satisfying them- 
selves of their credibility. — 10. πάντα 
ὑπόπτως ἀποδεχόμενοι : in their state of 
suspicion accepting everything. Cf. δια- 
βολὰς ἀποδέχεσθαι 41.4. Lindau’s con- 
jecture ἀ νυπόπτως does not agree with 
the context. — πονηρῶν ἀνθρώπων : Obj. 
gen. with πίστιν. --- 12. βασανίσαι : sift 
to the bottom, examine closely; elsewhere 
of persons (7. 86. 18; 8. 92. 10).—13. καὶ 
χρηστὸν δοκοῦντα εἶναι : even though re- 
puted worthy.— 14. αἰτιαθέντα : once ac- 
cused.—dvédeyxrov: Schol. ἀνεξετάστως, 
i.e. without close investigation. 

15. ἀκοῇ: (= ἐξ ἀκοῆς) with ἐπίστα- 
σθαι also 60.2; 4.126. 16: with εἰδέναι 
1.4.1; 6.55.2; 7.87.21; with αἰσθά- 
νεσθαι 6. 17. 22, 20. 3; with voultey 
4. 81. 12.— 16. χαλεπήν: harsh, severe; 
cf. 59.4.— τελευτῶσαν : adv. Schol. ἐν 
τοῖς τελευταίοις χρόνοις.---17. οὐδ᾽ ὑφ᾽ éav- 
τῶν: not even by themselves (i.e. the 
Athenians), οὐδέ emphasizing the sec- 
ond and strongest ground, fear of re- 
turn of a tyranny.— ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὸ Aaxe- 
δαιμονίων : under Cleomenes, 510 B.c. 
Thue. adds in 59. 17 καὶ Ἀλκμεωνιδῶν 
τῶν φευγόντων. Cf. Hdt. 6. 128. 8 οἱ μὲν 
γὰρ ἐξηγρίωσαν τοὺς ὑπολοίπους Πεισι- 
στρατιδέων Ἵππαρχον ἀποκτείνοντες, οὐδέ 
τι μᾶλλον ἔπαυσαν τοὺς λοιποὺς τυραν- 
vevovras: ᾿Αλκμεωνίδαι δὲ ἐμφανέως ἠλευ- 
θέρωσαν, εἰ δὴ οὗτοί γε ἀληθέως ἦσαν οἱ 
τὴν Πυθίην ἀναπείσαντες προσημαίνειν 
Λακεδαιμονίοισι ἐλευθεροῦν τὰς ᾿Αθήνας. 
--18. ὑπόπτως ἐλάμβανε: see on !.10; 
3.59.6; 4.17.8. 



Td yap ᾿Αριστογείτονος καὶ ᾿Αρμοδίον τόλμημα δι᾽ ἐρω- 1 
τικὴν ξυντυχίαν ἐπεχειρήθη, ἣν ἐγὼ ἐπὶ πλέον διηγησάμενος 

Episode on the end of the Tyranny of 
the Peisistratidae (54-59) 

54. The bold deed of Aristogeiton 
and Harmodius was committed under 
the Tyranny of Hippias, eldest son of 
Peisistratus, and occasioned by an 
amour of Hipparchus, a younger son. 
Character of the rule of the Peisistrati- 
dae until the murder of Hipparchus.— 
1. τὸ γὰρ᾿Αριστογείτονος καὶ ᾿Αρμοδίον 
τόλμημα: a digression introduced by 
γάρ, as 1.89.1. The episode is due to 
the mention made 58. § 3 that recollec- 
tion of the issue of the Tyranny of the 
Peisistratidae had been the cause of 
the feeling then prevailing among the 
Athenian Demos. Acc. to the words 
ἣν ἐγὼ ἐπὶ πλέον διηγησάμενος κτὲ. (2 ff.), 
Thuc.’s motive, in our view, was to 
oppose prevalent popular errors with 
regard to the sons of Peisistratus and 
the deed of Harmodius and Aristogei- 
ton. He had already done this more 
briefly in 1. 20. § 2, where he gives an 
exainple of the widespread ignorance 
among the Hellenes concerning impor- 
tant events of their own history. As 
to the relation of the two episodes, see 
on 14, 20.5. The conjecture of Miiller- 
Striibing, Aristophanes 6543 ff., that 
Thuc.’s special interest in the fates of 
the house of the Peisistratidae was due 
to kinship is prob. correct (see Einleit.4 
p. xiii, x. 6). But M.-S. is doubtless 
wrong (Thuk. Forsch. 58 ff.) in finding 
in Thuc.’s double treatment of the 
Peisistratid question a proof of the 
separate publication of the history of 
the Ten Years’ War. (See KEinleit.4 
p. xxxvii). As indicated at 14, 20. 5, 

nothing isin the wayof believingthatwe 
should have had only one treatment of 
the matter if Thuc.’s work had received 
a final revision. Wrong, too, is the 
view of G. Friedrich (N. Jhbb. CLV, 
p. 177) that at 1. 20the Athenian Demos 
is °‘ represented as in entire ignorance 
of the state of affairs,’’ while in 6. 53 
it has a suspicion of what was really 
going on. From 1. 20. ὃ 2 it cannot be 
rightly inferred that Thuc. there as- 
cribed to the Demos the belief that the 
deed of Harmodius and Aristogeiton 
had restored freedom to Athens. The 
accountin Aristotle’s’ Αθηναίων πολιτεία 
of the issue of the Tyranny of the 
Peisistratidae (c. 17 ff.) differs in many 
points from Thuc., but apparently of- 
fers nothing more correct.— 2. ξυντυ- 
xlav: affair, matter. Cf. 1.83.1; 3. 
112.26.— qv . . . διηγησάμενος ἀπο- 
φανῶ: by a full discussion of which I 
will prove. L. Herbst (Philol. XL, 
306 ff.), assuming ἐπὶ πλέον always ex- 
presses or implies a definite compari- 
son, connects ἐπὶ πλέον ἀποφανῶ and 
argues a more definite reference to 1. 
20.§ 2. But even in Thuc. are found 
comparatives not essentially differing 
in force from positives. See on 6.6; 
1. 122.8; and further διὰ πλείονος 1. 
124.12; βιαιότερον 2. 33.14; μακρότερα 
3.52. 22; τοὺς λόγους μακροτέρους μηκύ- 
vev 4.17.5; ἐπὶ πλέον 2.58.1. Besides, 
if Thuc. had really meant to refer here 
to something said earlier, he must have 
expressed himself more clearly ; to say 
nothing of the improbability that he 
would have left in a final revision 1. 
20. §2 and 6.54 ff. as we have them. — 



ϑ ΝΆ » Ἀ ¥ ¥ 3 Ἁ 3 a \ A 
ἀποφανῶ οὔτε τοὺς ἄλλους οὔτε αὐτοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους περὶ τῶν 

, 4 sQA ‘\ “A 4 3 A SQA 
σφετέρων τυράννων οὐδὲ περὶ τοῦ γενομένον ἀκριβὲς οὐδὲν 

’ 4 Ν A , 9 ~ 
5 λέγοντας. Πεισιστράτου yap γηραιοῦ τελευτήσαντος ἐν Τῇ 

τυραννίδι οὐχ Ἵππαρχος, ὥσπερ οἱ πολλοὶ οἴονται, ἀλλ᾽ ἹἽπ- 

’ ’ a ¥ ‘ 3 , 4 x ¢ 
πίας πρεσβύτατος ὧν ἔσχε τὴν ἀρχήν. γενομένου δὲ ‘Appo- 

, 9 e a a 9 ’ὔ 9 Q A 9 A 
δίου wpa ἡλικίας λαμπροῦ ᾿Αριστογείτων, ἀνὴρ τῶν ἀστῶν, 

4 4 3 ᾿ A > 9 4 N Ν ε 
μέσος πολίτης, ἐραστὴς ὧν εἶχεν αὐτόν. πειραθεὶς δὲ ὁ 

e ΄-ᾳ-ἢ ᾿ 
10 ᾿Αρμόδιος ὑπὸ Ἱππάρχου τοῦ Πεισιστράτον καὶ οὐ πεισθεὶς 

2 A 59 7 e de 9 A , 
καταγορεύει τῷ ᾿Αριστογείτονι. ὁ δὲ ἐρωτικῶς περιαλγήσας 

Ν Ν N ε , , Ν, , , 
kat φοβηθεὶς τὴν Ἱππάρχου δύναμιν, μὴ Bia προσαγάγηται 
3 4 > a 3 “ ε 9 Ν a e ’ 9 4 
αὐτόν, ἐπιβουλεύει εὐθὺς ὡς ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης ἀξιώσεως 

, A , \ 9 , εν ε > 
κατάλυσιν τῇ τυραννίδι. Kat ἐν τούτῳ ὁ ἵππαρχος ὡς αὖθις 

15 πειράσας οὐδὲν μᾶλλον ἔπειθε τὸν ᾿Αρμόδιον, βίαιον μὲν 

οὐδὲν ἐβούλετο δρᾶν, ἐν τρόπῳ δέ τινι ἀφανεῖ ὡς οὐ διὰ 

3. οὔτε τοὺς ἄλλους : to emphasize the 
second member: neither the other Hel- 
lenes, nor even the Athenians themselves, 
corresponding to the positive of τε ἄλλοι 
xré.— 4. ἀκριβὲς οὐδὲν λέγοντας : of his- 
torical questions, as ἀκριβές τι εἰδέναι 5. 
26.24. See on 55.1. 

5. Πεισιστράτον γὰρ xré.: for γάρ, 
see on 33. 7.— γηραιοῦ τελευτήσαντος: 
prob. 528-527 B.c.— 6. ὥσπερ οἱ πολ- 
Aol οἴονται : so also Pseudo-Plato, Hip- 
parch. 228 8.--- 7. ἔσχε τὴν ἀρχήν: 
acquired the sovereignty, = ἦρξε 55.1. 
—8. ὥρᾳ ἡλικίας λαμπροῦ : Schol. ἐν 
τῇ ἀκμῇ ἐπιφανεστάτου, i.e. in the 
flower of youth and beauty. — ἀνὴρ 
τῶν ἀστῶν: cf. ἀνὴρ ᾿Αθηναῖος τῶν πά- 
hac 1. 126.6. ἀστός referring to his 
home, πολίτης to his political station. 
—9. μέσος πολίτης : Schol. οὔτε ἐπι- 
φανὴς οὔτε ἄδοξος. Cf. μέσου ἀνδρὸς Μή- 
δου Hdt. 1. 107. 13.— εἶχεν αὐτόν : same 
term that is used of the marital 

relation. Cf. 2.29. 2 οὗ εἶχε τὴν ἀδελφὴν 

πειραθείς : Schol. ἐρωτικὴν πεῖραν δεξά- 
μενος. ----11. καταγορεύει : informs, as 4. 
68. 24. --- περιαλγήσας : greatly pained, 
περι-- intensive, see on 4. 14. 10. --- 
18. ἐπιβονλεύει. . . κατάλυσιν τῇ τυ- 
ραννίδι: forsimilar turns of expression, 
see on 8. 109. 21.— ὡς ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρ- 
χούσης ἀξιώσεως: quantum pro sua 
auctoritate poterat; restrictive, 
an open attack was out of the question 
for a μέσος πολίτης. 

14. καὶ ἐν τούτῳ ὁ Ἵππαρχος xré.: 
see App. — 16. ἐν τρόπῳ δέ τινι ἀφανεῖ: 
so recent editors, with Levesque, for 
τόπῳ of the Mss. It prob. does not 
mean that the act was done secretly, 
but that the manner of the insult did 
not betray the real motive. Cf. the 
same idiom in Dio C. 48.18. The Schol. 
also read τρόπῳ: ἐμηχανᾶτο κρύφα προ- 
πηλακίσαι τὸν ᾿Αρμόδιον ὡς δί ἄλλην αἰτίαν 





τοῦτο δὴ παρεσκευάζετο προπηλακιῶν αὐτόν. οὐδὲ yap THY 5 
ἄλλην ἀρχὴν ἐπαχθὴς ἦν ἐς τοὺς πολλούς, ἀλλ᾽ ἀνεπιφθόνως 

’ Ἁ > , > A - A Ἁ a 
κατεστήσατο: Kal ἐπετήδευσαν ἐπὶ πλεῖστον δὴ τύραννοι 

κα 3 Ἁ S , \ 9: , 9 \ , 
οὗτοι ἀρετὴν καὶ ξύνεσιν, καὶ ᾿Αθηναίους εἰκοστὴν μόνον 

4 ~ ’ , ’ὔ 9 ζω] αλῶ ὃ 
πρασσόμενοι τῶν γιγνομένων τὴν τε πόλιν αὑτῶν καλῶς ὁιε- 

, ‘ “ , , \ 93 \ ε Αι» 
κόσμησαν καὶ τοὺς πολέμους διέφερον καὶ ἐς τὰ ἱερὰ ἔθυον. 

SN , » 9 Ἁ ε 4 “ Ἁ 4, 4 9 “Ὁ 
τὰ δὲ ἄλλα αὐτὴ ἡ πόλις τοῖς πρὶν κειμένοις νόμοις ἐχρῆτο, 

‘\ > g¢ >’ » 9 ’ὔ’ ΄ᾳᾳἃ 7 “" 4 A 
πλὴν καθ᾽ ὅσον αἰεί τινα ἐπεμέλοντο σφῶν αὐτῶν ἐν ταῖς 

~ ¥ A 3 
ἀρχαῖς εἶναι. καὶ ἄλλοι τε αὐτῶν ἦρξαν τὴν ἐνιαυσίαν ᾿Αθη- 

ε ἴω 
ναίοις ἀρχὴν καὶ Πεισίστρατος ὁ Ἱππίου τοῦ τυραννεύσαντος 

εν» “A 4 » ¥ a ~ ’ ~ Ν 
vids, τοῦ πάππου ἔχων τοὔνομα, ὃς τῶν δώδεκα θεῶν βωμὸν 

tid.— 17. δή: scilicet. See on 10. 
21.— προπηλακιῶν : for fut. ptc. after 
παρασκευάζομαι, see on 2. 18. 4. 

τὴν ἄλλην ἀρχήν: see App. on 14. 
—18. ἀνεπιφθόνως κατεστήσατο: had 
established it so as not to give offense 
(aor. in subord. clause) ; Schol. ἀνεπιφθό- 
νως, ob μεμπτῶς. --- 19. καὶ ἐπετήδευσαν 
xré,: this aor., a8 also διεκόσμησαν (21), 
complexive (see on 2.29; 1. 7. 6) with 
comprehensive subj. οὗτοι (i.e. the Pei- 
sistratidae). The pred. τύραννοι is put 
before the subst., acc. to the usage ex- 
plained at 1.1.8 (cf. 31.6); only here 
the plural — representing the Peisis- 
tratidae — and the preceding sup. (ἐπὶ 
πλεῖστον δή) give a Somewhat different 
turn to the sentence: as tyrants (= of 
all tyrants) these for the longest time (at 
last even they too fell into other ways) 
laid stress upon noble sentiment and men- 
tal culture. On ἀρετή see Introd. to 1*. li, 
and on ξύνεσις (usually clear insight), see 
Xlviii. ἀρετὴ καὶ ξύνεσις are emphasized 
also in 4.81.11 by Brasidas as compre- 
hending the highest moral and intel- 
lectual qualities.— 20. εἰκοστὴν μόνον: 
acc. to Arist. Ath. Pol. 16 Peisistratus 

levied a δεκάτη. But cf. Busolt, Griech. 
Gesch.? II, 828 n.1.—21. τῶν γιγνομέ- 
νων: i.e. all the fruits of the earth. — 
διεκόσμησαν : the best-known of these 
ornanients was the Enneakrunos (2. 15. 
§ 5).— 22. τοὺς πολέμους διέφερον : impf. 
of persistent prosecution. Cf. 1.11.12; 
8. 75. 138. — és τὰ ἱερὰ ἔθνον ; short for 
és... τὰς θυσίας ἔφερον. Ci. ἐθεώρουν és 
τὰ Ἴσθμια 8.10.2; θύειν εἰς ταύτην τὴν 
πανήγυριν (Lys.) 6. 5. 

28. αὐτὴ ἡ πόλις: the state or citizens 
apart from the ὑγγδηίβ. --- 24. ἐπεμέ- 
λοντο: with inf. also Xen. Mem. 4. 7. 
1. Only the pres. stem of this verb 
seeins to have been used by Thuc. See 
St., Qu. Gr.? p. 66.—év ταῖς ἀρχαῖς: 
i.e. the offices of state, esp. the archon- 
ship. — 25. ᾿Αθηναίοις : dat. with ἦρξαν 
(of the ἐνιαυσία or κατ᾽ ἐνιαυτὸν ἀρχή), 38 
1.93.11; 2.2.6.—26. τοῦ τυραννεύσαν- 
ros: who had been tyrant. Cf. 55.11. 
— 27. ὅς: wrongly suspected by BK.; 
for the younger Peisistratus is men- 
tioned on account of his archonship, 
not for the altars dedicated by him, 
which are referred to only inciden- 
tally in a rel. clause. The year of his 



‘ > a 3» a FF > 4 ‘ \ Aa > 4 9 
τὸν ἐν TH ἀγορᾷ ἄρχων ἀνέθηκε καὶ τὸν τοῦ ᾿Απόλλωνος ἐν 

’ Ἁ ~ QA na 9 nw 9 
Πυθίον. καὶ τῷ μὲν ἐν TH ἀγορᾷ προσοικοδομήσας ὕστερον 

30 6 δῆμος ᾿Αθηναίων μεῖζον μῆκος [τοῦ βωμοῦ] ἠφάνισε τοὐ- 

πίγραμμα- τοῦ δ᾽ ἐν Πυθίου ἔτι καὶ νῦν δῆλόν ἐστιν ἀμυ- 

δροῖς γράμμασι λέγον τάδε: 

μνῆμα τόδ᾽ ἧς ἀρχῆς Πεισίστρατος Ἱππίου vids 

θῆκεν ᾿Απόλλωνος Πυθίου ἐν τεμένει. 

Ὅτι δὲ πρεσβύτατος ὧν Ἱππίας ἦρξεν, εἰδὼς μὲν καὶ 

9 ”~ 9 , ¥ > 4 a > »¥ Ν 
ἀκοῃ ἀκριβέστερον ἄλλων ἰσχυρίζομαι, γνοίη δ᾽ ἂν τις καὶ 

3 ἰδὲ ’ “A dS “A 4 ‘4 A 4 
αὐτῷ τούτῳ: παῖδες yap αὐτῷ μόνῳ φαίνονται τῶν γνησίων 

archonship is not definitely known. — 
τῶν δώδεκα θεῶν βωμόν : like the milia- 
rium aureum in Rome, starting-point 
for the roads leading out of Athens 
and with the distances inscribed on it 
(cf. Hdt. 2.7.5; C. I. 6. II, 1078); 
serving also as a place of refuge. See 
Curtius, Zur Gesch. des Wegebaues 
bei den Gr. (Abhandl. ἃ. Berl. Akad., 
1854, p. 247 f.; also collected works I, 
59 f.); Wachsmuth, die Stadt Athen 
II, 434 ff.; Milchhéferin Curtius, Stadt- 
gesch. von Athen, p. ix.—28. ἐν Πυθίον: 
sc. ἱερῷ or τεμένει (cf. 34). So ἐν Acow- 
gov 8.94.1. See 2.15. 28 (where the 
sanctuary is called τὸ Πύθιον) and Milch- 
héfer in Curtius, Stadtgesch. p. xiv. 
30. [rod βωμοῦ] : due, as Kr. saw, 
to some stupid reader seeking a modi- 
fier for μεῖζον. --- 31. δῆλόν ἐστιν : Sc. τὸ 
ἐπίγραμμα. --- ἀμυδροῖς γράμμασι: the 
stone with this inscription was found 
in the spring of 1877, on the banks of 
the Ilissus near the fountain Callirrhoe 
(C.1I.G.1V, 818 6). It isin two pieces 
and some letters are gone entirely (-rpa- 

τος Ἱππίου), others are much abraded. 

Otherwise the inscription is distinct, so 
that ἀμυδροῖς cannot refer to the tracing 
of the letters. Steup thinks the mean- 
ing is here, as in (Dem.) 59. 76, that 
the red color of the letters had faded. 
See H. Heydemann, Hermes XIV, 317. 
Cl. suggested that the injury to the in- 
scription may go back to the earliest 
period, and that ἀμυδροῖς possibly re- 
ferred to this injury. For still another 
view, see Szanto, Wiener Studien ITI, 
156 ff. 

55. Proofs that Hippias as eldest 
son succeeded his father Peisistratus 
in the tyranny. — 1. ἦρξεν : attained the 
sovereignty, = ἔσχε τὴν ἀρχήν 54. 7. --- 
εἰδὼς ἀκριβέστερον ἄλλων: knowing more 
accurately than others. Cf. 54.4; 5. 26. 
24. See on 91.2. The expression ἀκρι- 
βέστερον ἄλλων clearly points to a near 
relationship of the historian with the 
family of the Peisistratidae, so that 
more exact knowledge had come to him 
by word of mouth (καὶ ἀκοῇ). See on 
54.1.—2. ἰσχνυρίζομαι: affirm, as 8. 44. 
9; δ. 26.19.—3. αὐτῷ τούτῳ : Schol. 
τῷ ῥηθησομένῳ. --- μόνῳ : preferable to 




3 A , ε 9 \ a N e ’ ' 
ἀδελφῶν γενόμενοι, ὡς ὅ τε βωμὸς σημαίνει καὶ ἡ στήλη 

Q ΄Κὰ A , LO ’ e 3 A? θ ’ 9 aN 
5 πέρι Τῆς Των τυραννων αοικιας Ἴ εν TY) A YVaALwWV QK PpO7Tro ει 

A 4 a λ A Ν δ᾽ ε ’ "ὸ Q A 
σταθεῖσα, ἐν ἢ Θεσσαλον μεν ovd Ιππαρχον οὔϑδεις παις 

, ε ’ Ν ’ ἃ a 93 ’ “A 
γέγραπται, Ἵππίου δὲ πέντε, ot αὐτῷ ἐκ Μυρσίνης τῆς Καλ- 

’, ae (ὃ θ iN 9. 9 9 AN A ‘2 \ 
λίου τοῦ Ὑπεροχίδον ὕνγατρος ἐγένοντο' εἰκὸς yap ἣν τον 

, A a N93 A 9. oA , ω 
πρεσβύτατον πρῶτον γῆμαι. Kal ἐν TH αὐτῇ στήλῃ πρῶτος 2 

, . Ν , 90 Ν A 3 , SoA 
10 γέγβατπτται μέτα τον πατέρα, οὐδὲ ΤΟΥ͂ΤΟ ATELKOTWS διὰ ΤΟ 


, 9 9 9 A Q A 9 \ ΤΩΝ Ἃ 
πρεσβεύειν ΤΕ ἀπ αὕτον και τνυραννευσαι. OV μὴν OVO ἂν 

κατασχεῖν μοι δοκεῖ ποτε Ἱππίας τὸ παραχρῆμα ῥᾳδίως τὴν 

4 39 N > a 3 a NN 3 id > A 
τυραννίδα, εἰ Ἵππαρχος μὲν ἐν TH ἀρχῇ ὧν ἀπέθανεν, αὐτὸς 

δὲ αὐθημερὸν καθίστατο: ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τὸ πρότερον ξύνηθες 

A \ λί , 3 δὲ Ν 3 39 \ 
τοῖς μὲν πολίταις φοβερόν, ἐς O€ τοὺς ἐπικούρους ἀκριβὲς 

μόνον of the Mss. on account of the de- 
pendent gen. See on3.1.—4. ὁ βωμός: 
without doubt the altar ἐν Πυθίου (54. 
81, 34), whose inscription proved the 
existence of a son of Hippias.— στήλη 
περὶ τῆς xré.: without repeated art. 
(see on 1.51.11), which is here the 
more negligible since another art. fol- 
lows soon. The reference in τῶν τυράν- 
νων is to the Peisistratidae in general 
(cf. 54.4,19; 8.68. 27).—6. ἐν { @ec- 
σαλοῦ μὲν xré.: see App. — Θεσσαλοῦ 
μὲν οὐδ᾽ Ἱππάρχου: the neg. is to be 
understood also with Θεσσαλοῦ. Cf. αἱ 
Φοίνισσαι νῆες οὐδὲ ὁ Τισσαφέρνης ἧκον 8. 
99.4; and 5.47.9.—8. Ὑπεροχίδον: so 
with Laur. and Meineke (Hermes III, 
372), for ‘Tepe xl5ov, because only the 
name Ὑπέροχος, not ‘Trepex 7s, isknown. 
—9. πρῶτον γῆμαι : and consequently 
by implication γεννῆσαι. But as the mat- 
ter of childlessness is left out of con- 
sideration the proof is not quite clear. 
More positive is the second proof,in § 2. 

ἐν τῇ αὐτῃ στήλῃ : So all editors, fol- 
lowing the correction (manu sec.) of 

one Ms., for ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ of all the Mss. 
—10. ἀπεικότως : always with neg. Cf. 
1.78.9; 2.8.2; 8.68.25.—11. πρεσβεύ- 
ew: Schol. πρεσβύτατος εἶναι.--- ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ: 
= per αὐτόν. 

οὐ μὴν οὐδέ: nor yet again. See on 
1. 8. 17.— 14. καθίστατο : sc. és τὴν 
ἀρχήν (conative impf.).—@AAd καί: 
but (even) actually. xal is wanting in 
Laur.— 8d τὸ πρότερον... φοβερόν: 
on account of the hitherto usual fear on 
the part of the citizens. Cf. τὸ φοβερὸν 
τοῖς ὑπηκόοις 7.68.16. Thisfear inspired 
in the citizens (cf. also 54.12 φοβηθεὶς 
τὴν Ἱππάρχου δύναμιν xré.) is not incom- 
patible with the comparative mildness 
of the rule of the Peisistratidae empha- 
sized in 54.§ ὃ ἢ. For πρότερον adv., 
see Steup, Thuk. Stud. II, 22. For 
substantivized neut. adj. (φοβερόν, ἀκρι- 
Bés) with attrib. moqlifier ξύνηθες, see on 
ἐπικούρους ἀκρι- 
enforced upon the 
bodyguard. The δορυφόροι -are called 
here and 58. 6 ἐπἤκουροι because they 
were usually hired] foreigners. See on 




“A A , A 3 ~ a Q 9 ε 
πολλῷ τῷ περιόντι τοῦ ἀσφαλοῦς κατεκράτησε, καὶ οὐχ ὡς 
9 Ν ’ aA 3 4 3 e 9 ’ὔ A 
ἀδελφὸς νεώτερος ὧν ἠπόρησεν, ἐν @ οὐ πρότερον ξυνεχῶς 
ε ’ »ὉᾳἭ 9 “A ε ’ Ν 4 ων , ~ 
ὡὠμιλήκει TH ἀρχῇ. Ἱππάρχῳ δὲ ξυνέβη τοῦ πάθους τῇ 
δυστυχίᾳ ὀνομασθέντα. καὶ τὴν δόξαν τῆς τυραννίδος ἐς τὰ 

20 ἔπειτα προσλαβεῖν. 

Τὸν δ᾽ οὖν ᾿Αρμόδιον ἀπαρνηθέντα τὴν πείρασιν, ὥσπερ 
διενοεῖτο, προυπηλάκισεν: ἀδελφὴν γὰρ αὐτοῦ κόρην ἐπαγ- 
9 A A 
γείλαντες ἥκειν κανοῦν οἴσουσαν ἐν πομπῇ τινι ἀπήλασαν, 
4 Oe 9 A ἣν 9 \ ὃ Ν Ν YN 9427 > 
λέγοντες οὐδὲ ἐπαγγεῖλαι THY ἀρχὴν διὰ τὸ μὴ ἀξίαν εἶναι. 

1.118. 18.— 16. πολλῷ τῷ περιόντι... 
κατεκράτησε: with a great surplus of 
security (i.e. very easily) got the upper 
hand (of the conspirators). Cf. ὡς τῷ 
ἀσφαλεῖ περισχήσων 5.7.18, and xara- 
κρατεῖν πολλόν Hat. 7. 168. 16. τὸ περιόν 
= περιουσία from περιεῖναι, abUNCdare 
(diff. from 2. 79.30 περιεῖναι, reliqaum 
esse).—17. vo... τῇ ἀρχῇ: in which 
case he would not have been continuously 
used to the sovereignty. év (of hypo- 
thetical case, as in 8. 86. 22) refers only 
to ὡς ἀδελφὸς νεώτερος wy. For ὁμιλεῖν in 
this sense with dat., cf. 70.4. Cf. προσ- 
ομιλεῖν 1,122.6. For rare plpf. without 
ay, cf. Isae. 3.10 δῆλον γὰρ ὅτι ὁ ἀδελφὸς 
αὐτὴν. .. ἐκδεδώκει. 

18. τοῦ πάθονς τῇ δυστυχίᾳ: pleo- 
nastic; for δυστυχίᾳ one would have 
expected ξυντυχίᾳ (see on 54, 2).— 
19. ὀνομασθέντα: Schol. ὀνομαστὸν γενό- 
μενον. The accus, as in 1.58.1; 7. 14. 
6.— καὶ τὴν δόξαν τῆς τυραννίδος: i.e. 
as he was often mentioned, as it were 
by consequence he obtained also the 
credit of being ruler. — és τὰ ἔπειτα : in 
after times, for which is found else- 
where és τὸ ἔπειτα 4. 64.21; és ἔπειτα 
1. 180.10; és τὸν ἔπειτα χρόνον 3.114. 18; 
τὰ ἔπειτα 5.26.29; τὸ ἔπειτα 4. 107.2; 
ὅ. 11. 4; τὸν ἔπειτα χρόνον 4. 45. 9. 

δθ. After Hipparchus had shame- 
fully insulted the sister of Harmodius, 
Aristogeiton and Harmodius determine 
to carry out, with their fellow conspir- 
ators, at the great Panathenaea, their 
purpose to overthrow the tyranny. — 
1. δ᾽ οὖν: after the digression resumes 
the narrative interrupted at 54. § 4. 
See on 1.3. 19.— ἀπαρνηθέντα : cf. 54. 
§ 4. ὥσπερ διενοεῖτο: i.e. ἐν τρόπῳ τινὶ 
ἀφανεῖ (54. 10). --- 2. ἀδελφὴν κόρην: 
maiden sister. ΟἿ, θυγάτηρ παρθένος Xen. 
Mem. 1. ὅ. 2; Cyrop. 4. 6. 9.— émayyel- 
Aavres .. . ἀπήλασαν : transition from 
Hipparchus alone to himself and Hip- 
pias as arrangers of the procession. 
πομπή τις cannot refer to the Panathe- 
naea since some time elapsed before 
that: περιέμενον Παναθήναια τὰ μεγάλα 
(8). Aristotle (18. ὃ 21.) places both the 
insult to the maiden and the murder 
of Hipparchus at the Panathenaea. — 
3. κανοῦν οἴσονσαν : this service at a 
festival was a great distinction, so that 
the rejection of the maiden was re- 
garded as a bitter insult to the family. 
See E. Curtius, Arch. Zeitg., 1880, p.27, 
= Gesam. Abhandlungen II, 286. — 
4, οὐδὲ τὴν ἀρχήν : not at all. See on 
2.74.10. Schol. wrongly τοὺς ἄρχον- 
ras. — διὰ τὸ ph ἀξίαν εἶναι: αἱ γὰρ 



ὅ χαλεπῶς δὲ ἐνεγκόντος τοῦ “Appodiov πολλῷ δὴ μᾶλλον 2 
δι᾿ ἐκεῖνον καὶ ὁ ᾿Αριστογείτων παρωξύνετο. καὶ αὐτοῖς τὰ 
μὲν ἄλλα πρὸς τοὺς ξυνεπιθησομένους τῷ ἔργῳ ἐπέπρακτο, 
περιέμενον δὲ Παναθήναια τὰ μεγάλα, ἐν 7) μόνον ἡμέρᾳ 
οὐχ ὕποπτον ἐγίγνετο ἐν ὅπλοις τῶν πολιτῶν τοὺς τὴν 

10 πομπὴν πέμψοντας ἀθρόους γενέσθαι: καὶ ἔδει ἄρξαι μὲν 

αὐτούς, ξυνεπαμύνειν δὲ εὐθὺς τὰ πρὸς τοὺς δορυφόρους ἐκεί: 

νους. ἦσαν δὲ οὐ πολλοὶ οἱ ξυνομωμοκότες ἀσφαλείας ἕνεκα: 8 

ἤλπιζον γὰρ καὶ τοὺς μὴ προειδότας, εἰ καὶ ὁποσοιοῦν τολμή- 


3 ~ ~ » , 9 9 , i A 
σειαν, EK TOU repos τα ἔχοντάς ye ὅπλα, ἐθελήσειν σφᾶς 

3 A “A N ε 3 “A ε ε γ, ε ’ A 
αὐτοὺς Evvehevfepour.| καὶ ws ἐπῆλθεν ἡ ἑορτή, Ἱππίας μὲν 

κανηφόροι τῶν ἀστῶν καὶ τῶν εὐγενῶν ἦσαν, 
Phot. 8.v. κανηφόροι. 

5. πολλῷ δὴ μᾶλλον : as 8.89.8. Cf. 
61.3.—6. αὐτοῖς... ἐπέπρακτο: the 
other arrangements had been made by 
them with their fellow conspirators. For 
πρὸς τοὺς ξυνεπιθησομένους πράσσειν, SCC 
on 1.181. 7. For dat. with pass., see on 
1,125.6; 8. 64. 15.— 7. πρὸς τοὺς ξυν- 
ἐπιθησομένους τῷ ἔργῳ: cf. ἐπιθέσθαι τῇ 
πείρᾳ 7.42.33; τοῖς τοιούτοις τῶν ἔργων 
ἐπιτίθεσθαι Xen. Mem. 2. 8. 8.--- 8. IIav- 
αθήναια τὰ μεγάλα : celebrated in the 
last third of the month Hekatombaion 
(July-August) of the third year of the 
Olympiad. See A. Mommsen, Feste 

der Stadt Athen, pp. 47 ff., 148 ff.; A.. 

Willauer, Etude sur les Panathénées 
(Lausanne diss., 1899), pp. 20 ff.; Bu- 
solt, Gr. Gesch.? II, 344 ff. The fes- 
tival in question was that of Ol. 66, 
8 = 514 3.c.—& ἧ. . . ἡμέρᾳ: mani- 
festly the chief day of the several days’ 
festival, i.e. Hekatombaion 28, when 
the great procession occurred. This 
day is called ἡ ἑορτή in 57.1.—9. ἐν 
ὅπλοις : i.e. μετ᾽ ἀσπίδος καὶ δόρατος (58. 

8). For the expression, cf. 61. 18, 74.7; 
8. 69. 18. --- 10. πέμψοντας :. though of 
slight Mss. authority, required by the 
context for πέμψαντος. --- ἄρξαι μὲν ad- 
τούς: that they (i.e. Aristogeiton and 
Harmodius) begin the attack upon Hip- 
pias and the lifeguard. ἐκείνους = τοὺς 
ξυνεπιθησομένους τῷ ἔργῳ. --- 11. ξυνεπα- 
μύνειν : elsewhere only in late writers. 
— Ta πρὸς τοὺς δορνφόρους : as to mat- 
ters against the bodyguard. Schol. és τὰ 
πρὸς τοὺς Sopuddpous. Cf. 4. 85. 28. 

12. οὐ πολλοί: cf. Arist. 18. ὃ 2 ovr 
ἐβη. .. τὸν ᾿Αρμόδιον καὶ τὸν ᾿Αριστο- 
γείτονα πράττειν τὴν πρᾶξιν μετεχόντων 
πολλῶν, but Thuc.’s testimony is pref- 
erable. — ἕνεκα : the Mss. have οὕνεκα, 
found nowhere else in Thuc.— 13. εἰ 
καὶ ὁποσοιοῦν τολμήσειαν : if even ever 
so few dared the attack. Cf. ὁποσονοῦν 
4, 37. 2.—14. ἐκ τοῦ παραχρῆμα: at 
once, without long reflection or prep- 
aration. — ἐθελήσειν : will resolve. 

57. During the preparations for the 
procession, the two leaders, suspecting 
that their plot had been betrayed to the 
tyrant and without waiting for their 






ν > ”~ a “ id “ “A 4 4 

ew ἐν τῷ Κεραμεικῷ καλουμένῳ μετὰ τῶν δορυφόρων διεκό- 

σμει ὡς ἕκαστα ἐχρὴν τῆς πομπῆς προιέναι: ὁ δὲ ᾿Αρμόδιος 
a) e 3 wa » » Ν, 9 ’, 3 \, » 

καὶ ὁ ᾿Αριστογείτων ἔχοντες ἤδη τὰ ἐγχειρίδια ἐς τὸ ἔργον 

ἢ ὶ ὡς εἶδό ὧν & py σφίσι διαλεγό 
προῇσαν. καὶ ὡς εἶδόν τινα τῶν ξυνωμοτων σφίσι διαλεγόμε- 2 

> ’ a e¢ 4 εχ δὲ “A 9 4 ὃ e ¢ V4 
νον οἰκείως τῷ Ἱππίᾳ (ἣν δὲ πᾶσιν εὐπρόσοδος ὁ Ἱππίας), 

No -2 ΝΥ , “Ὁ > » 
ἔδεισαν καὶ ἐνόμισαν μεμηνῦσθαί τε καὶ ὅσον οὐκ ἤδη EvAAN- 

’ Ἁ ’ > “A Ἁ +9 a, 3 
φθήσεσθαι. τὸν λυπήσαντα οὖν σφᾶς καὶ δι᾿ ὄνπερ πάντα ἐκιν- 

4 3 , , > a ’ 
δύνευον ἐβούλοντο πρότερον, εἰ δύναιντο, προτιμωρήσασθαι, 

καὶ ὥσπερ εἶχον ὥρμησαν ἔσω τῶν πυλῶν, καὶ περιέτυχον 

accomplices, attack Hipparchus, who 
was some distance from his brother, and 
kill him. Harmodius is cut down im- 
mediately by Hipparchus’ attendants ; 
Aristogeiton escapes for the time, but 
later is captured and put to death. — 
1. καὶ ὡς: and when, vividly introduc- 
ing the execution of the plan.—2. ἔξω 
ἐν τῷ Κεραμεικῷ καλουμένῳ : see App. 
-- ἔξω : outside the city, as 49.12; 2. 
15.21, 18.17; 8.81.7; 4. 84. 6, 106. 4.— 
διεκόσμει, (5) προῇσαν : the two impfs. 
in paratactic relation to each other: 
while the one was occupied, the others 
proceeded to the execution of the plot. 
τροῇσαν perhaps intentionally repeated 
after προιέναι : there ἕκαστα τῆς πομπῆς; 
here ἐς τὸ ἔργον. 

5. τῶν ξυνωμοτῶν ὁ φίσι: = τῶν σφίσι 
ξυνομοσάντων. The const. of personal 
verbal substs. with the dat. is rarer 
than that of neuters (see Kr. Spr. 48, 
12,5; Kiihner-Gerth II, 1, 426f.), but 
not on that account to be rejected in 
Thuc. Cl. conjectures τῶν ξυνομωμο- 
κότων σφίσι, comparing 56. 12.— 6. ol- 
κείως : Schol. φιλικῶς. --- εὐπρόσοδος : as 
personal characteristic also Xen. Ages. 
9.2. Cf. δυσπρόσοδος 1. 180. 10.— 6 “Inr- 
alas: repeated perhaps to make clear 

that ris (5) is not subject. Van H. 
brackets.—7. ἔδεισαν: became frightened 
(aor.).— μεμηνῦσθαι: with pers. subj. 
as 53.5 μεμηνυμένων.---- ὅσον οὐκ : all but. 
See on 2.94.6. With ἤδη also 8. 96.18. 

8. τὸν λυπήσαντα σφᾶς: i.e. Hip- 
parchus. — 9. πρότερον προτιμωρήσα- 
σθαι: for similar pleonasms, see on 1. 
23.21. πρὶν ξυλληφθῆναι 870 be supplied 
in thought (cf. 1. 20. 12). For the aor., 
adopted by St., Hude, Bm., see on 6. 
8. All the Mss. except M read προτι- 
μωρήσεσθαι, Which Cl. (followed by 
Steup) would justify on the ground that 
through the intervening πρότερον, εἰ δύ- 
ναιντο (if in any way they could, before 
Hippias should seize them), ἐβούλοντο 
gets the force of ἤλπιζον. προτιμωρεῖν 
occurs also 1. 74.16; elsewhere only 
in late writers. 10. ὥσπερ εἶχον : just 
as they were. See on 1. 134. 14. — τῶν 
πυλῶν: see App. on 2.— περιέτυχον 
τῷ ἱππάρχῳ παρὰ τὸ Λεωκόριον καλού- 
μενον κτὲ.: for the Leocorium, see on 
1.20. 13. The statement there, τῷ ‘In- 
πάρχῳ περιτυχόντες περὶ τὸ Λεωκόριον 
καλούμενον τὴν Παναθηναϊκὴν πομπὴν δια- 
κοσμοῦντι ἀπέκτειναν (cf. Arist. Ath. 
Pol. 18. ὃ 8 τὸν μὲν Ἵππαρχον διακο- 
σμοῦντα τὴν πομπὴν παρὰ τὸ Λεωκόριον 



» lama a τὸ Λεωκόριον καλούμενο ἐξ ty εὐθὺ 
τῷ Ἱππάρχῳ παρ ρ ύμενον, (καὶ) εὐθὺς 

ἀπερισκέπτως προσπεσόντες καὶ ὡς ἂν μάλιστα δι᾽ ὀργῆς, 
ὁ μὲν ἐρωτικῆς, ὁ δὲ ὑβρισμένος, ἔτυπτον καὶ ἀποκτείνουσιν 
9 4 Xe \ δ. ὃ 4 Ν > Ὁ» ὃ ’ ε 
αὐτόν. καὶ ὁ μὲν τοὺς ὀορυφόρους τὸ αὐτίκα διαφεύγει, ὁ 
A 9 
15 ᾿Αριστογείτων, ξυνδραμόντος Tov ὄχλου, καὶ ὕστερον ληφθεὶς 
9 ε δί ὃ ’, ε “ὃ δὲ 9 “A ᾿ A 5... ἡ» 
οὐ ῥᾳδίως διετέθη: ᾿Αρμόδιος δὲ αὐτοῦ παραχρῆμα ἀπόλ- 
9 4 vc ’ > \ Ν > 9 NN N 
58 Auras. ἀγγελθέντος δὲ Ἱππίᾳ és τὸν Κεραμεικὸν οὐκ ἐπὶ τὸ 
4 9 9 95" δ. ’ Ν ε a 4 A 
γενόμενον ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ τοὺς πομπέας τοὺς ὁπλίτας, πρότερον ἢ 

ἀπέκτειναν), is prob. best brought into 
agreement with the opening of the 
present chapter (καὶ ws ἐπῆλθεν ἡ ἑορτή, 
Ἱππίας μὲν... διεκόσμει κτὲ.) by assum- 
ing that both brothers were arranging 
the procession, the one outside in the 
Ceramicus, the other in the region of 
the Agora. Aristotle (18. ὃ 8) makes 
Hippias await the procession on the 
Acropolis.—11. (nal) εὐθὺς xré.: καί, 
adopted by nearly all editors without 
Mss. authority, is necessary unless one 
accepts Badhain’s bold conjecture περι- 
τυχόντες. A third καί introducing the 
account of the actual assault accords 
well with the haste of Harmodius and 
Aristogeiton (ὥσπερ εἶχον ὥρμησαν, 
εὐθὺς ἀπερισκέπτως προσπεσόντες), Where- 
as by an adversative (εὐθὺς δ᾽), as Hude 
and Marchant write, after F. Portus, 
the separate occurrences, which are all 
the consequence of ἐβούλοντο πρότερον 
προτιμωρήσασθαι, are too much torn 
apart. Since xat occurs several times 
in quick succession and κα λούμενον im- 
mediately precedes, it might easily 
have dropped out. — 12. ἀπερισκέπτως: 
cf. ἡ ἀλόγιστος τόλμα 59.2. The word 
occurs also 65.4; 4. 10. 4, 108. 23; else- 
where only in late writers. — ὡς ἂν μά- 
λιστα δι᾽ ὀργῆς: (sc. προσπέσοιεν, cf. 1. 
33. 5) in extreme wrath, the cause of 

which in Aristogeiton is expressed by 

‘ the adj. ἐρωτικῆς, in Harmodius by the 

ptc. ὑβρισμένος. See on 59.1.—138. érv- 
awrov: the impf. indicating repeated 
blows, the pres. (ἀποκτείνουσιν) express- 
ing the result. 

14. τὸ αὐτίκα : for themoment. See 
on 4, 107. 2.— ὁ ᾿Αριστογείτων : added 
by way of explanation, as 2. 29. 12; 7. 
57. 28.— 15. Evv8papdvros τοῦ ὄχλου: 
not to assist him; but he availed him- 
self of the confusion to escape. — λη- 
els: i.e. by the pursuing δορυφόροι. ---- 
16. οὐ ῥᾳδίως διετέθη : was handled not 
softly, i.e. cruelly killed (οὐ ῥᾳδίως, κακῶς 
Hesych. and Phot.). He was tortured 
for the names of his accomplices, acc. 
to Arist. 18. § 4 ff., Polyaen. 1. 22, Jus- 
tin. 2. 9, etc. 

58. Hlippias, informed of what had 
occurred, promptly takes precautions 
for his own safety and for the punish- 
ment of the guilty.— 1. ἀγγελθέντος : 
one of the rare instances of the abs. 
impers. ptc. in gen. foracc. See on 1. 
74.1. GMT. 849. — ἐς τὸν Kepaperxdy : 
see App. on 57. 2.— οὐκ ἐπὶ τὸ γενόμε- 
vov: indicating his great self-control, 
as does also ἀδήλως τῇ ὄψει πλασάμενος 
πρὸς τὴν ξυμφοράν (4). ---- 2. τοὺς πομ- 
πέας : only here in the sense of τοὺς τὴν 
πομπὴν πέμψοντας (56.9). The words 




9 θέ θ 9 Ν ἐμέ θ ¥ Or 3 ’, Ἁ PD) ar 
αἰσθέσθαι αὐτοὺς ἄπωθεν ὄντας, εὐθὺς ἐχώρησε, Kai ἀδήλως 
nw 4 Ν Ἁ “\ 9 , 3 4 
τῇ ὄψει πλασάμενος πρὸς THY ξυμφορὰν ἐκέλευσεν αὐτούς, 

, , > aA 93 2 \ ȴ 2 Ve 

5 δείξας τι χωρίον, ἀπελθεῖν ἐς αὐτὸ ἄνευ τῶν ὅπλων. Kal ot 

μὲν ἀπεχώρησαν οἰόμενοί τυ ἐρεῖν αὐτόν, ὁ δὲ τοῖς ἐπικού- 
’ δ 9 ε ~ 3 , 9 ἈΝ ἃ 3 

pos φράσας τὰ ὅπλα ὑπολαβεῖν ἐξελέγετο εὐθὺς οὖς ἐπῃ- 

τιᾶτο καὶ εἴ τις ηὑρέθη ἐγχειρίδιον ἔχων - μετὰ γὰρ ἀσπίδος 

καὶ δόρατος εἰώθεσαν τὰς πομπὰς ποιεῖν. 
’ Ν 4 > 3 Ν 4 9 9 Ν A 
Τοιούτῳ μὲν τρόπῳ δι᾽ ἐρωτικὴν λύπην ἥ τε ἀρχὴ τῆς 

τοὺς ὁπλίτας (which v. H. brackets), 
added in explanation, give the essential 
motive for his subsequent action. — 
πρότερον ἤ: With aor. inf., as 1.69. 21; 
2.40.11; 8.45.29; ὕστερον ἢ 4. 11. --- 
8. ἄπωθεν: with εἶναι as 4. 67. 8. -- 
ἀδήλως... πρὸς τὴν ξυμφοράν: dis- 
sembling in look in the presence of the 
calamity so that no one observed (457\ws). 
For πρὸς τὴν ξυμφοράν, see on 40. 12. — 
5. δείξας τι χωρίον : as 1. 87. 8. 

6. ἀπεχώρησαν : Pp.’s correction of 
ἀνεχώρησαν, in accordance with éxé- 
λευσεν αὐτοὺς. . . ἀπελθεῖν. ---- oldpevol 
τι ἐρεῖν αὐτόν : they suspected nothing, 
for it was customary for soldiers to 
hear unarmed the address of the leader. 
Cf. Polyaen. 1. 21. 2.—7. φράσας: 
= κελεύσας, as 3. 15. 5. — ὑπολαβεῖν : to 
carry away secretly. See on 1.68. 18. 
— ἐξελέγετο : picked out, i.e. for execu- 
tion. Cf. 4. 74. 12.—ovs ἐπῃτιᾶτο: 
whom he held guilty, knowing their 
disaffection. —8. καὶ εἴ τις... ἔχων: 
and besides any one who was found with 
adagger; for shield and spear belonged 
to the procession. Hence the words 
μετὰ γὰρ ἀσπίδος. . . πομπὰς ποιεῖν, 
omitted by ν. H., St., and others, are 
well motived. ποιεῖν (for ποιεῖσθαι) is 
not ground for suspicion, since Thuc. 
uses the act. esp. of festal arrange- 

ments (see on 2. 15.17). Here, too, 
ποιεῖν is used of ordering and preparing, 
not of the execution of the procession. 
Doubtless in view of Thuc.’s represen- 

tation of Hippias’ bearing immediately 

after the murder of Hipparchus, Aris- 
totle says (18. ὃ 4) οὐ γὰρ ἐδύναντο παρα- 
χρῆμα λαβεῖν οὐδὲν ἴχνος τῆς πράξεως, 
ἀλλ᾽ ὁ λεγόμενος λόγος, ὡς ὁ Ἱππίας ἀπο- 
στήσας ἀπὸ τῶν ὅπλων τοὺς πομπεύον- 
τας ἐφώρασε τοὺς τὰ ἐγχειρίδια ἔχοντας, 
οὐκ ἀληθής ἐστιν" οὐ γὰρ ἔπεμπον τότε 
μεθ᾽ ὅπλων, ἀλλ᾽ ὕστερον τοῦτο κατεσκεύα- 
σεν ὁ δῆμος. But inspite of the definite- 
ness of this statement, it is prob. that 
Thuc. and not Aristotle is right. See 
Busolt, Gr. Gesch.? II, 58 and 382 ff., 
and K. Meyer, Gesch. d. Alt. II, 775, 

59. Hippias ruled three years longer, 
more harshly than before, until he was 
driven from Athens. He then betook 
himself to Sigeum and Lampsacus, and 
from there to King Darius. Later he 
accompanied the expedition of the 
Persians to Marathon. —1. δι᾿ ἐρωτικὴν 
λύπην: i.e. on account of pain occa- 
sioned by a love affair. The phrase 
forms, as St. rightly explains against 
Cl. and some others, together with 
“Appodly .. . ἐγένετο the pred. to both 
following subjects (η re dpxy}). .. τόλμα 


3 λε 3 ’ 4 9 A ῪΝᾺ 
ἐπιβουλῆς καὶ ἡ ἀλόγιστος τόλμα ἐκ τοῦ παραχρῆμα περι- 
δεοῦς Ἁρμοδίῳ καὶ ‘A ἴτονι eve ts δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίοις 2 
ς Ἁρμοδίῳ καὶ ᾿Αριστογείτονι ἐγένετο. τοῖς ηναίοις 
χαλεπωτέρα μετὰ τοῦτο ἡ τυραννὶς κατέστη, καὶ ὁ Ἱππίας 
5 διὰ φόβον ἤδη μᾶλλον ὧν τῶν τε πολιτῶν πολλοὺς ἔκτεινε καὶ 
4 .»ν»ν 9 A » 9 4 4 e 4 
πρὸς Ta ἔξω ἅμα διεσκοπεῖτο, εἴ ποθεν ἀσφάλειάν τινα ὁρῴη 
μεταβολῆς γενομένης ὑπάρχουσαν οἱ. Ἱππόκλον γοῦν τοῦ 8 
Λαμψακηνοῦ τυράννου Αἰαντίδῃ τῷ παιδὶ θυγατέρα ἑαυτοῦ 
μ ἢ τᾷ υγ 
Ἀ “A > , > ~ A A »Ὦ 
μετὰ ταῦτα ᾿Αρχεδίκην, ᾿Αθηναῖος ὧν Λαμψακηνῴῷ, ἔδωκεν, 

10 αἰσθανόμενος αὐτοὺς μέγα παρὰ βασιλεῖ Δαρείῳ δύνασθαι. 

ἐκ τοῦ... περιδεοῦς). With this view of 
the sentence we have here a conclusion 
in accordance with the introductory 
words (54.1 τὸ γὰρ ᾿Αριστογείτονος .. . 
ἐπεχειρήθη)η of the discussion of the 
undertaking of Harmodius and Aristo- 
geiton. St. points out further that in 
the account of the τόλμημα of Harmo- 
dius and Aristogeiton it is expressly 
stated (57. § 8) τὸν λυπήσαντα οὖν σφᾶς 
καὶ δι ὅνπερ πάντα ἐκινδύνενον ἐβούλοντο 
πρότερον, εἰ δύναιντο, προτιμωρήσασθαι. 
If one keeps these words in mind along 
with what is said about the concocting 
of the conspiracy (54. ὃ 3 ὁ δὲ ἐρωτικῶς 
περιαλγήσας... ἐπιβουλεύει εὐθὺς... 
κατάλυσιν τῇ τυραννίδι), there can be no 
doubt that Thuc., in this concluding 
and summarizing sentence, traces not 
only the concoction of the plot but 
the murder of Hipparchus to the pangs 
of love. ἐρωτικός is here used in a some- 
what more general sense than in 54. 11, 
where in contrast with the anger of 
Harmodius on account of insult men- 
tion is made of the ἐρωτικὴ ὀργή (i.e. 
rage inflamed by jealousy) of Aristo- 
geiton.— 2. ἣ ἀλόγιστος τόλμα: as 3. 
82.24.— ἐκ rod παραχρῆμα περιδεοῦς: to 
be closely connected with τόλμα though 

the art. is not repeated (see on 55. 4; 1. 
51.11). The phrase τὸ παραχρῆμα περι- 
δεές occurs also 8.1.29. As to Thuc.’s 
use of neut. ptcs. and adjs. for abstract 
nouns, see on 1. 86. 8, and C. F. Smith, 
Trans. Amer. Phil. Assoc. XXV, 75 ff. 

4. χαλεπωτέρα. .. κατέστη : became 
harsher, comparative as in 7. 28. 21. 
For pred. adj. in this const., see on 3. 
87.13. On the matter, cf. 58. §3; Hat. 
5. 55, 62; 6.123; Arist. Ath. Pol. 19. 
§1.—5. διὰ φόβον... av: see on 34. 
8.—6. διεσκοπεῖτο: rare mid. form, 
with more intensive meaning, as Plato, 
Phaed. 70c. Cf. the simple form σκο- 
πεῖσθαι 8. 48. 23, and see on 86. 6.— 
ἀσφάλειαν : means of security or pro- 
tection. Cf. 87.20; 1.40.7; 3.18.4. 
-- 7. μεταβολῆς γενομένης : hypotheti- 
cal, incase of arevolution (Schol. ἐάσαντι 
τὴν τυραννίδα). 

γοῦν: at any rate, introducing an in- 
stance (ἔδωκεν) in confirmation of the 
general διεσκοπεῖτο, i.e. '* among other 
things ’’ he concluded this alliance, al- 
though not esp. brilliant for a ruler 
of Athens (’A@nvaios ὧν Λαμψακηνῷ). 
—10. αἰσθανόμενος : with unusual de- 
pendent inf. for pte. Cf. 5. 4. 24. -- 
αὐτούς: i.e. Hippocles and Aeantides. 





Ὁ 9. κι A 3 , 3 Vo SF ¥ , 
καὶ αὐτῆς σῆμα ἐν Λαμψάκῳ ἐστὶν ἐπίγραμμα ἔχον τόδε: 

ἀνδρὸς ἀριστεύσαντος ἐν Ἕλλάδι τῶν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ 

Ἱππίου ᾿Αρχεδίκην noe κέκευθε κόνις" 

a , \ 39 Ν 3 A 9 εὰ ’, 
(4 πατρός τε καὶ ἀνδρὸς ἀδελφῶν τ᾽ οὖσα τυράννων 

, 9 9 ¥ a 3 3 ᾿ , 
παίδων τ᾽ οὐκ ἤρθη νοῦν és ἀτασθαλίην. 

\ *» , ε , ¥» 3 ’ Ἁ Ν, 
τυραννεύσας δὲ ἔτη τρία Ἱππίας ἔτι ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ παυθεὶς 4 

3 “ , ε ἐν , \ 3 δῶ A 
ἐν τῴ τετάρτῳ ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων καὶ ᾿Αλκμεωνιδῶν τῶν 

. 4 9 ’ ε ’ » ‘4 Ν 3 9 
φευγόντων ἐχώρει ὑπόσπονδος ἔς τε Σίγειον καὶ παρ᾽ Αἰαν- 
τίδην ἐς Λάμψακον, ἐκεῖθεν δὲ ὡς βασιλέα Δαρεῖον, ὅθεν καὶ 

20 ὁρμώμενος ἐς Μαραθῶνα ὕστερον ἔτει εἰκοστῷ ἤδη γέρων 


aA Ν “ὃ 3 , 
ὧν peta Μήδων ἐστρατευσεν. 

ὯΩν ἐνθυμούμενος ὁ δῆμος ὁ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ μιμνῃσκό- 1 

as A 4 N 
μενος ὅσα ἀκοῇ περὶ αὐτῶν ἠπίστατο, χαλεπὸς ἦν τότε Kal 

—péya παρὰ βασιλεῖ δύνασθαι: cf. 2. 
29. 3.—11. ἐπίγραμμα : from Simon- 
ides, acc. to Arist. Rhet. 1.9 (p. 32, 
24 Bk.), who cites the third verse. Cf. 
Bergk, Poet. Lyr. Gr. (Simon. frg. 
111). — 12. τῶν ἐφ᾽ ἑαντοῦ : of the men 
of his own time (with apioredoavros). — 
18. ἹἽππίον : sc. θυγατέρα. --- 14. ἀδελ- 
φῶν: of these only the Peisistratus 
mentioned 54.26 is known. Miiller- 
Striibing, Aristoph. p. 541 f., conjec- 
tures that the historian Thucydides was 
descended, on the father’s side, from 
this Archedice, daughter of Hippias. 
17. ἐν τῷ τετάρτῳ: 01. 67,3; 510 BA. 
—trd Λακεδαιμονίων καὶ ᾿Αλκμεωνιδῶν 
τῶν φευγόντων : the former led by Cle- 
omenes ; the latter had been in banish- 
ment since the secure establishment of 
the tyranny of Peisistratus (O01. 60, 1; 
540 B.c.). On the matter, see 53. ὃ 3; 
Hdt. 5. 62 ff.; Arist. 19.—18. ὑπό- 
σπονδος: under safe conduct, as 88. 50. 
Cf. Hat. 5. 65. — ἐς Σίγειον : which the 

Athenians had conquered under the 
rule of Peisistratus (Hdt. 5. 94) or ear- 
lier. — 1. ὅθεν : i.e. from the court of 
Darius. See on 21.11. 

60. Recalling what happened after 
the murder of Hipparchus and the 
manner of the expulsion of Hippias, 
the Demos of Athens was greatly ex- 
cited -and many arrests were made. 
One of the suspects made a confession 
about the mutilation of the Hermae. 
He was set free, but his alleged ac- 
complices were executed after a short 
trial.—1. dv ἐνθυμούμενος xré.: the 
rel. referring to the details given 59. 
§ 2 ff.; the narrative is resumed where 
it was broken off at 58.§ 8. Cf. similar 
transition at 1. 42. 1. ----2. ἀκοῇ ἢπί- 
στατο: repeated from 53. 15.— χαλε- 
wos ἣν: as 8.1.4.— καὶ ὑπόπτης és τοὺς 
.. . λαβόντας: cf. 538.10. ὑπόπτης is 
rare; cf. Soph. Phil. 186. The Schol. 
remarks τοὺς ἵππους φασὶ rods ταρασσο- 
μένους ὑπόπτας λέγεσθαι, and so Xen. De 




ε , 3 N Q a aA Q 9 9 ‘ , 
ὑπόπτης ἐς TOUS περὶ TOV μυστικῶν THY αἰτίαν λαβόντας, 

Ἁ 4 3 A > 4 95.ϑΝ ’ὔ 9 ~ A 
καὶ παντα AUTOLS ἐδόκει επι ξυνωμοσίᾳ ὀλιγαρχικῃ Και 

ΝᾺ A N e 3 ~ Ν Ν A 9 
TUPQVVLKY) πεπρᾶχθαι. καὶ ὡς AUTWV διὰ ΤΟ τοίοῦυτον Οργι- 

ζομένων πολλοί τε καὶ ἀξιόλογοι ἄνθρωποι ἤδη ἐν τῷ δεσμω- 

, * Ν 9 > , 9 , 9 \ > ὲ » 
τηρίῳ ἦσαν καὶ οὐκ ἐν παύλῃ ἐφαίνετο, ἀλλὰ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν 

ἐπεδίδοσαν μᾶλλον ἐς τὸ ἀγριώτερόν τε καὶ πλείους ἔτι ξυλ- 

λαμβάνειν, ἐνταῦθα ἀναπείθεται εἷς τῶν δεδεμένων, ὅσπερ ἐδό- 

9 , 3 ε oN A A ν ¥ N 
KEL ALTLWTATOS ELWAL, UTTO Τῶν ξυνδεσμωτῶν Τινος ELTE apa Και 

. » “A » N » > 9 3 ᾽ Ν 9 4 Ν 
τὰ OVTA μηνῦσαι ETE Καὶ οὐ" ἐπ᾿ ἀμφότερα γὰρ εἰκάζεται, τὸ 

A A 9 ‘ ¥ ’ὔ ¥ 4 » 9 A N A 
δὲ σαφὲς οὐδεὶς οὔτε τότε οὔτε ὕστερον ἔχει εἰπεῖν περὶ τῶν 

Re Equestri 3.9 τοὺς ὑπόπτας φύσει (ἴπ- 
πους) φυλακτέον. Steup thinks that 
Thuc. must have alluded here also to 
the processes for the mutilation of the 
Hermae (cf. 53. § 1f. and c. 60), hence 
that some words must have dropped out 
after μυστικῶν, prob. καὶ τοὺς περὶ τῶν 
Ἑρμῶν (cf. 53.9), or only καὶ τῶν Ἑρμῶν 
(Stein). — 4. πάντα αὐτοῖς... πεπρᾶ- 
χθαι: cf. 53.18 πάντα ὑπόπτως ἐλάμβανε, 
and 27. 10 ἐπὶ ξυνωμοσίᾳ νεωτέρων πραγμά- 
των καὶ δήμον καταλύσεως γεγενῆσθα. . --- 
ἐπὶ ξυνωμοσίᾳ : in consequence of α con- 
spiracy, as 27. 10. --- καὶ τυραννικῇ : for 
such fears on the part of the demos, and 
esp. with regard to Alcibiades, see 15. 
§ 4. 

7. οὐκὲν παύλῃ ἐφαίνετο: there seemed 
to be no end of it (the subj. τὸ πρᾶγμα to 
be supplied from the context; see on 
46.22). Cf. 4. 73. 12 οὐκ ἂν ἐν τύχῃ γί- 
γνεσθαι σφίσιν, and (of a person) 3. 33, 13 
οὐκέτι ἐν καταλήψει épalvero.— καθ᾽ ἣμέ- 
ραν ἐπεδίδοσαν : as 7.8.2 (of things and 
without μᾶλλον) .--- 8. ἐς τὸ ἀγριώτερον: 
i.e. to even greater rage and embitter- 
ment. Cf. ἐπὶ τὸ μεῖζον 8. 24. 22. --- καὶ 
πλείους ἔτι ξυλλαμβάνειν : and so thut 

even more persons were arrested. For ἐς 
τό with inf. after ἐπιδιδόναι, cf. 8. 83. 7. 
— 9. ἐνταῦθα: introducing the deci- 
sive result. Cf. 5.65. 28, 69.2; ἐνταῦθα 
δή 8.58.20; ἐνταῦθα ἤδη 4. 88. 4.— εἷς 
τῶν δεδεμένων : namely, the orator An- 
docides, who gives his account of the 
whole matter in his speech De Mys- 
teriis, esp. § 48 ff. The one who per- 
suaded him was, acc. to Aldocides, his 
cousiu Charmides; acc. to Plut. Alcib. 
21, it was Timacus. — 10. εἴτε ἄρα καὶ 
τὰ ὄντα εἴτε καὶ οὔ: whether after all 
true or nol, the words of the author not 
of the persuader, anticipating the con- 
fession ; and to these words refers the 
following remark ἐπ᾽ ἀμφότερα γὰρ elxd- 
tera: xré., for conjectures are divided. 
For the form of the expression, cf. 5. 
65.9. ἄρα emphasizes the doubt or un- 
certainty. Cf. Plato, Phaed. 70c σκε- 
ψώμεθα εἴτε ἄρα ἐν Αιδου εἰσὶν αἱ ψυχαὶ 
εἴτε καὶ οὔ (Kr.). For the force of καί, 
see Kr. Spr. 69, 82, 18. τὰ ὄντα = τὰ 
ἀληθῆ. ov, SC. τὰ ὄντα. --- 11. τὸ σαφές: 
ef. 1.19; 61.3; 3..20. 7.— 12. οὔτε τότε 
οὔτε ὕστερον ἔχει εἰπεῖν: for the zeugma, 
cf. 1. 80. 7; 8.40.5. Kr. Spr. 62, 4, 2. 


ὃ , , ¥ , δὲ » > A ε , > ‘ ‘ 
ρασάντων τὸ ἔργον. λέγων O€ ἔπεισεν αὐτὸν WS χρή, EL μὴ καὶ 8 
δέδρακεν, αὑτόν τε ἄδειαν ποιησάμενον σῶσαι καὶ τὴν πόλιν 

15 τῆς παρούσης ὑποψίας παῦσαι: βεβαιοτέραν γὰρ αὐτῷ σωτη- 

, 3 ε , 2 5 5 , a9 θέ 5 \ δ 
ρίαν εἶναι ὁμολογήσαντι μετ᾽ ἀδείας 7 ἀρνηθέντι διὰ δίκης 
> “ Ve ‘ Ε] ’ 2 e ~ Ν > ¥ ᾽ 
ἐλθεῖν. καὶ ὁ μὲν αὐτός τε καθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ καὶ κατ᾽ ἄλλων μηνύει 4 
τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν. ὁ δὲ δῆμος ὁ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἄσμενος λαβών, 
ὡς ᾧετο, τὸ σαφὲς καὶ δεινὸν ποιούμενοι πρότερον, εἶ τοὺς 
9 , A ~ , \ » Ν Ν ‘ 

20 ἐπιβουλεύοντας σφῶν τῷ πλήθει μὴ εἴσονται, TOY μὲν μηνυ- 
_ τὴν εὐθὺς καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ὅσων. μὴ κατηγορήκει 
ἔλυσαν, τοὺς δὲ καταιτιαθέντας κρίσεις ποιήσαντες τοὺς μὲν 
9 ’ 9 ’ ~ Ν ’ ’ 
ἀπέκτειναν ὅσοι ξυνελήφθησαν, τῶν δὲ διαφυγόντων θάνατον 
καταγνόντες ἐπανεῖπον ἀργύριον τῷ ἀποκτείναντι. κἀν τούτῳ ὅ 

e 4 , » > 9 0) 9 , e , 
25 οἱ μὲν παθόντες ἄδηλον ἦν εἰ ἀδίκως ἐτετιμώρηντο, ἡ μέντοι 

ἄλλη πόλις ἐν τῷ παρόντι περιφανῶς ὠφέλητο. 

18. λέγων δὲ ἔπεισεν αὐτὸν ὡς χρή, 
xré.: epexegetical of ἀναπείθεται κτὲ. 
(9), for he persuaded him, representing 
that, etc. — εἰ μὴ καὶ δέδρακεν : ifhe had 
not actually done it.. The order puts 
stronger emphasis on the word follow- 
ing καί, as in 2. 11. 27, εἰ μὴ καὶ νῦν ὡρ- 
μῆνται. --- 14. ἄδειαν ποιησάμενον : here 
of obtaining immunity, as ἄδειαν ποιεῖν 
τινι (8. 58.11; 8. 76. 34) of granting im- 
munity. Informers were assured of im- 
munity by the state. Cf. Andoc. § 20; 
Plut. Alcib. 21.—16. διὰ δίκης ἐλθεῖν : 
really opposed to ὁμολογήσαντι μετ᾽ ἀδεί- 
as, 80 that ἐλθόντι was to be expected. 
The irregularity is due to striving 
after parallelism of clauses. See Ein- 
leitung‘, p. lxviii.. For the idiom διὰ δί- 
κης ἐλθεῖν, to undergo trial, cf. Soph. Ant. 
742 ὦ παγκάκιστε διὰ δίκης ἰὼν πατρί. Cf. 
also διὰ μάχης ἰέναι (2.11.13; Hdt.6. 9. 
22), διὰ φιλίας ἰέναι (Xen. Anab. 3. 2. 8). 

17. καὶ ὁ μὲν... ὁ δὲ δῆμος: con- 

tinuance of the foregoing (καί, and the 
consequence was), with the usual transi- 
tion to the separate facts. Cf. 1.19.1. 
—18. ὁ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων : not necessary 
after 1. 1, but hardly to be bracketed, 
with Kr. — 19. ὡς @ero: referring to τὸ 
capés.— δεινὸν ποιούμενοι : (ptc. impf.) 
transition to pl.; cf. 53.17. The expres- 
sion in Thuc. only here and 1. 102. 17. 
See note there. — 20. σφῶν τῷ πλήθει: 
the pron. gen. thus placed with almost 
the effect of dat. of interest. See on 1.30. 
14.— 22. κρίσεις ποιήσαντες: after hold- 
ing some trials therefor. —24. ἔπανεῖπον 
ἀργύριον τῷ ἀποκτείναντι: i.e. besides 
sentence of death they offered a reward 
to the slayer. Cf. ἀνειπεῖν 2.2.26; 4.105. 
11. Thecompound israre. For the force 
of ἐπι--, cf. 1.70.8; 2.65.48; 3.57.6. 
25. οἱ μὲν παθόντες : placed for em- 
phasis before the conj. (εἰ) ; see on 14, 
10.5.— h μέντοι ἄλλη πόλις... ὠφέλητο: 
Schol. οὐ γὰρ ὑπώπτευον ἔτι ἀλλήλους. 




Περὶ δὲ τοῦ ᾿Αλκιβιάδου, ἐναγόντων τῶν ἐχθρῶν οἵπερ 1 

A ~ a) ’ 
καὶ πρὶν ἐκπλεῖν αὐτὸν ἐπέθεντο, χαλεπῶς οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐλάμ- 

‘ 9 Ἁ N A e A ΕΣ » Q 
Bavov - και ἐπειδὴ τὸ των Eppwv φοντο σαφὲς έχειν, πολυ 

Ν A δ ‘ , 4 9 , ΕῚ \ A 2 δ 
δὴ μᾶλλον καὶ τὰ μυστικά, ὧν ἐπαίτιος ἦν, μετὰ TOV αὐτοῦ 

’ Ἁ A ’ 95. UN »Ὺ» ὃ ’ > > 9» ’ 25 4 
λόγου Kat τῆς ξυνωμοσίας ἐπὶ τῷ δήμῳ aT ἐκείνον ἐδόκει 

An Q , Ά Ν ὃ ’ 9 we 9 
T Pax ναι. και yap τις Και στρατια Λακε αιμονιωὼων OU ΤΟΛΛΉ 

» Ν XN F N A 3 @ \ A 9 a 
eTUKE Κατα TOV καιβρον Τουτον. ἐν ῳ περι Ταῦτα ἐθορυβοῦντο, 

61. Against Alcibiades, however, 
there was the more suspicion about the 
profanation of the mysteries, as a Lace- 
daemonian army had drawn near the 
Attic frontier, and in Argos too there 
were suspicions of hostility to the 
Demos. Obeying the summons of the 
Salaminia he set off for Athens; but at 
Thurii he slipped away and betook 
himself to Peloponnesus, and in con- 
sequence was at Athens condemned 
to death in absentia.—1. évaydvrav: 
urging them on, obj. to be supplied, as 
in 7.18.3; 8. 26.4; obj. expressed 4. 
21. 8.—rév ἐχθρῶν : among whom Plut. 
Alcib. 19, 22, mentions esp. Androcles 
and Thessalus, son of Cimon. — 2. ἐπέ- 
θεντο: cf. Μέλητός μοι ἐπέθετο Plato, 
Apol. 28 Ε. For the matter, cf. 28. ὃ 2. 
The aor. here with force οὗ plpf. as in 
67. 11.— xadremrds . . . ἐλάμβανον : (sc. 
τὸ πρᾶγμα, aS 27.9), took the matter 
hard about Alcibiades, i.e. were full of 
anger and fear. For the idiom, cf. 27. 
9, 58. 18.—3. ἐπειδὴ rd... σαφὲς ἔχειν: 
cf. 60.19. For the free const. of the 
gen. τὸ τῶν Ἑ;“ρμῶν σαφές, the actual facts 
about the Hermae, cf. 4. 84. 5 rot κάρπον 
τὸ δέος. --- πολὺ δὴ μᾶλλον : vividly em- 
phasizing, a8 πολλῷ δὴ μᾶλλον δ6. 5; 8. 
89. 8. μᾶλλον, i.e. than before, when in 
reference to the mutilation of the Her- 
mae also they had only conjectures to 

goon. Cf. 60. 4 ἢ. --- 4. ὧν ἐπαίτιος ἦν: 
cf. 28. ὅ ὧν καὶ τὸν ᾿Αλκιβιάδην ἐπῃτιῶντο. 
Alcibiades was not accused of mutilat- ἢ 
ing the Hermae. — pera τοῦ αὐτοῦ Ad- 
you Kal τῆς ξννωμοσίας ἐπὶ τῷ δήμῳ: 
with the same intent, that is, of conspir- 
acy against the Demos. If xalisretained, 
it must be explanatory = τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι or 
δηλονότι (Kistemacher, Dobree); so Bl. 
and Heilmann render. Popposays, ‘'xal 
potest et quidem valere.’’ Steup 
renders, ‘' for the same reason and in 
consequence of the conspiracy against 
the Demos,’’ explaining that the reason 
consisted in the conspiracy, which is 
added with καί. This gets at the right 
sense, though it is doubtful if the Greek 
will bear that translation. Dobree, 
Kr., and Cl. are inclined to strike out 
καί. Stahl brackets καὶ τῆς ξυνωμοσίας, 
which Bm. approves. Van H. brackets 
καὶ τῆς ξυνωμοσίας ἐπὶ τῷ Shuy.—5. τῆς 
ξυνωμοσίας : the art. because of the 
mention in 60. 4.--- ἐπὶ τῷ δήμῳ: for 
ἐπί with dat. in hostile sense, cf. 79. 8, 
and see on 8. 68. 8. --- ἀπ᾽ éxelvov πρα- 
χθῆναι: so ἀπό freq. with πράσσεσθαι 
and λέγεσθαι. See on 1. 17. 4. 

6. καὶ γὰρ καί: for also, in further 
support οὗ πολὺ δὴ μᾶλλον (8). Cf. 108. 
18; 4.108. 18 : 8. 64. 18. ---- 7. ἐθορυβοῦν- 
το: were in great excitement. Cf. 8. 22. 
80; 4. 118. 2. --- 8. παρελθοῦσα: Hude 





, 9 “A A Ἁ , , 
μέχρι Ισθμοῦ παρελθοῦσα πρὸς Βοιωτοὺς τι πράσσοντες. 

2006 3 9 ’, ’ \ 9 “A σ 9 Ἁ 
ξόοκει Οουὖν EKELVOU πράξαντος Καὶ ου Βοιωτων ενεκα, ATO 

’ 9 \ 9 ᾽ν » Ν 9 Ν Ν Ἁ 
ξυνθήματος ἥκειν, καὶ εἰ μὴ ἔφθασαν δὴ αὐτοὶ κατὰ τὸ 

μήνυμα ξυλλαβόντες τοὺς ἄνδρας, προδοθῆναι ἂν ἡ πόλις. 

ἢ , , δ , 9 A , 
Και Τινα μιαν νυκτα, Και κατέδαρθον εν Θησείῳ Τῳ εν πόλει 

ἐν ὅπλοις. οἵ τε ξένοι τοῦ ᾿Αλκιβιάδον οἱ ἐνἴΑργει κατὰ τὸν 

9 ἃ ’ ε , ~ ’ 9 ’ Ν A 
αὐτὸν χρόνον ὑπωπτεύθησαν τῷ δήμῳ ἐπιτίθεσθαι. καὶ τοὺς 

ε 4 “ 9 ’ ‘ 3 A 4 , e > 
ὁμήρους τών ᾿Αργείων Tous ἐν Tats νήσοις κειμένους οἱ ᾿Αθη- 

A o , A? , 4 Ν ~ ’ 
ναῖοι τότε παρέδοσαν τῷ ᾿Αργείων δήμῳ διὰ ταῦτα διαχρήσα- 

σθαι. πανταχόθεν τε περιεστήκει ὑποψία ἐς τὸν ᾿Αλκιβιάδην. 4 

9 ’ 9. ἃ 9 ’ 9 ’ 9 A , 
wote βουλόμενοι αὐτὸν ἐς κρίσιν ἀγαγόντες ἀποκτεῖναι πέμ- 

ν A , 
πουσιν οὕτω THY Σαλαμινίαν 

unnecessarily changes, with Badham, 
ἰοπροελθοῦσα.----τρὸς Βοιωτούς τι πράσ- 
σοντες: in agreement with the Boeotians. 
Cf.1.181.7; 8.28.11. For pl. pte. after 
στρατιά, cf. 60.19. Nothing further is 
known about the matter. Andocides 
(§ 45) states that Boeotian troops had 
approached the Attic border, but puts 
this advance before his confession, 
whereas acc. to Thuc. it was after that 
(cf. 10 ef uh. . . rods ἄνδρα) .---- 9. exel- 
γον πράξαντος : at his instigation.— ἀπὸ 
ξυνθήματος: on agreement. Cf.4. 67.20; 
1.22. 4.---10. δή: in emphatic assur- 
ance, not without an ironical touch, as 
Thuc. does not conceal the exaggeration 
in the whole matter.— 11. τοὺς ἄνδρας: 
1.8. rods καταιτιαθέντας (60. 22).—12. καί 
τινα μίαν νύκτα xré.: doubtless also in 
the sense remarked at δή: extraordi- 
nary precautions were taken. For riva 
μίαν, cf. 84.11, 77. 9. ---- κατέδαρθον : of 
an unusual way of passing the night, 
see on 4.118. 4. — ἐν Θησείῳ τῷ ἐν πόλει: 
ἐν πόλει (Without art.) as ἔξω πόλεως 8. 
67.8. Andocides (§ 45) gives a different 

~ 9 ᾿ ’ 9 ’ 
ναῦν ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν ἐπί τε 

assignment of watch-posts: for ἐν ἄστει 
οἰκοῦντες the Agora, and for those ἐν 
μακρῷ τείχει the Theseum; but he refers 
to events of a somewhat earlier time. 

. The site of the Theseum in the city is 

notexactly known. It waslong wrongly 
supposed to be the so-called Theseum, 
still well preserved, north of the Areop- 
agus, but see C. Wachsmuth, ‘Athenai, 
in Pauly-Wissowa’s Realencyklopidie, 
Suppl. I, 181.— 13. ἐν ὅπλοις : see on 
56. 9. 

14. ὑπωπτεύθησαν : came under sus- 
picion (aor.).— τοὺς ὁμήρους τῶν ᾿Αρ- 
γείων : the 800 men mentioned 5. 84. 4. 
— 15. κειμένους : pf. ptc. οὗ κατέθεντο 
(5. 84.4). Cf. ὅ. 61. 19.---16. διὰ ταῦτα: 
Schol. ὡς οἰκείους ὄντας τῶν τοῦ ᾿Αλκιβιά- 
δου ξένων. --- διαχρήσασθαι : to destroy, 
as 1. 126.37; 3.36.15. For inf. οὗ pur- 
pose after παρέδοσαν, cf. 1.58.15; 3.36. 
23; 4. 36. 4. 

17. πανταχόθεντε: for re in résumé, 
Thuc.’s constant usage, see on 38. 40. 16. 
—19. οὕτω : referring to βουλόμενοι κτὲ. 
See on 1. 87.4; 8. 96. 8. --- ἐπ᾿ ἐκεῖνον 



2 A \ 4 , ¥ 2 , ¥ Ν A 
20 EKELVOV Και WY πέρι ἄλλων ἐμεμῆνυτο. ELPNTO δὲ προειτπειν 5 



αὐτῷ ἀπολογησομένῳ ἀκολουθεῖν, ξυλλαμβάνειν δὲ μή, θερα- 

πεύοντες τό τε πρὸς τοὺς ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ στρατιώτας τε σφε- 
, A 9 

τέρους καὶ πολεμίους μὴ θορυβεῖν καὶ οὐχ ἥκιστα τοὺς 

Μαντινέας καὶ ᾿Αῤγείους βουλόμενοι παραμεῖναι, du’ ἐκείνου 

’ ~ ’ ’ \ ε Ν ¥ 
νομίζοντες πεισθῆναι σφίσι ξυστρατεύειν. Kal ὁ μὲν ἔχων 6 

A e “A ~ ἃ e 4 3 ‘4 ‘ “~ 
τὴν ἑαντοῦ ναῦν καὶ ot ξυνδιαβεβλημένοι ἀπέπλεον μετὰ τῆς 
,’ 9 Ὁ , e 9 Ν 3 ’ \ 9» ‘ 
Σαλαμινίας ἐκ τῆς Σικελίας ws ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας καὶ ἐπειδὴ 
3 ,’ ? , 9 ’ ,’ 9 > 9 4 > N 
ἐγένοντο ἐν Θουρίοις, οὐκέτι ξυνείποντο, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπελθόντες ἀπὸ 

τῆς νεὼς οὐ φανεροὶ ἦσαν, δείσαντες τὸ ἐπὶ διαβολῇ ἐς δίκην 

“A e > 3 “~ ’ ’ N 9 ’ N 
καταπλεῦσαι. οἱ δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς Σαλαμινίας τέως μὲν ἐζήτουν Tov 7 

κτὲ.: cf. δ8. 51. For ἐκεῖνον after αὐτόν, 
cf. 35, 36.16; and see on 1. 182. 31.— 
20. καὶ ὧν πέρι ἄλλων : i.e. καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς 
ἄλλους περὶ ὧν. 

προειπεῖν : announce publicly. See on 
1.29. 8.---21. θεραπεύοντες : as if εἰρήκε- 

σαν, ποὺ εἴρητο, had preceded. ἘῸΓ simi- ΄ 

lar anacolutha, see on 2. 58. 13.—22. τό 
τε πρὸς TOUS ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ... μὴ θορυ- 

᾿βεῖν κτέ. : St.’s explanation seems best: 

curantes ne apud milites in Si- 
cilia suos et hostiles turbas excita- 
rent, i.e. curantes ne vehementer 
commoverent suorum animos ir- 
ritantes, hostium erigentes. On 
θεραπεύοντες depends τὸ μὴ θορυβεῖν, to 
which belongs πρὸς τοὺς. . . πολεμίους. 
re is placed as if not βουλόμενοι, but a 
second clausedependenton bepazrevorrtes, 
were tofollow. Forthe irregular order, 
cf. 15.6. With θεραπεύοντες Kr. con- 
strues τὸ πρὸς τοὺς ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ, to which 
στρατιώτας τε. .. πολεμίους is appos., 
and μὴ θορυβεῖν epexegetical. Steup 
cites 29. 10 (which all the above expla- 
nations overlook) 8 re δῆμος μὴ μαλακίζη- 
rat, θεραπεύων ὅτι dt’ ἐκεῖνον of τ᾿ ᾿Αργεῖοι 
ξυνεστράτευον καὶ τῶν Μαντινέων τινές, 

acc. to which θεραπεύοντες would betaken 
abs., meaning here conciliating him, and 
βουλόμενοι govern the first inf. clause as 
well as its own, with re in its proper 
place. — τοὺς ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ. . . πολε- 
μίους : for the single art. with the two 
very different substs., cf. 1.6.1; 2. 88. 
19; 3.56. 7.— 28. τοὺς Μαντινέας καὶ 
᾿Αργείους: cf. 29. ὃ 3and 43.—25. σφίσι: 
Lindau’s conjecture, adopted by BK., 
St., Hude, Bm., and others, for the 
impossible σφᾶς of the Mss. Cl. explains 
σφᾶς = αὐτούς ** with strong emphasis of 
the pron.,’’ as also 5. 49. 6. Steup sus- 
pects σφᾶς in both passages as an awk- 
ward gloss. 

26. τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ναῦν: cf. 50. 2.— 
27. ὡς ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας: as if for Athens. 
— 28. ἐν Θουρίοις : in the territory of the 
Thurians ; for Thuc. uses Θούριοι only of 
the inhabitants (104. 21; 7. 83.27, 35. 
2, 57.58; 8. 84.8). On the other hand 
the city is ἡ Θουρία (34, 88. 48, 104. 12; 
7. 88. 24, 80); and the district ἡ Θουριὰς 
γῆ (7. 35. 6). ---- 29. ἐπὶ διαβολῇ: on a 
false charge. Cf. 3. 67.33; 5. 90. 6. 

30. of ἐκ τῆς Σαλαμινίας : the usual 
prolepsis. See on 7. 18. --- τέως μέν : of 



᾿Αλκιβιάδην καὶ τοὺς per αὐτοῦ: ὡς δ᾽ οὐδαμοῦ φανεροὶ 

ἦσαν, ᾧχοντο ἀποπλέοντες. ὁ δὲ ᾿Αλκιβιάδης ἤδη φυγὰς ὧν 
3 , g& > A ’ 3 ’ > (4 3 

οὐ πολὺ ὕστερον ἐπὶ πλοίου ἐπεραιώθη ἐς Πελοπόννησον ἐκ 
ἊὉΝ ’ ε 3.5 A 3 ’ ’ ld 4 

τῆς Boupias: οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐρήμῃ δίκῃ θάνατον κατέγνωσαν 

9 A Ἁ A 9. ’ 
85 αὑτου TE και των μεῖ EKELVOV. 

A \ A 9 : ν 9 A 
Mera δὲ ταῦτα οἱ λοιποὶ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων στρατηγοὶ ἐν τῇ 

Σικελίᾳ, δύο μέρη ποιήσαντες τοῦ στρατεύματος καὶ λαχὼν 
ἐ , Ἂ ’ 2? AN A \ 9 4 
ἑκάτερος, ἔπλεον ξύμπαντι ἐπὶ Σελινοῦντος καὶ ᾿Ἐγέστης, 
’ A 9 ’ Ν ,’ 9 ’ ς«9 “A 
βουλόμενοι μὲν εἰδέναι τὰ χρήματα εἰ δώσουσιν οἱ ᾿Ἐγεσταῖοι, 
’ δὶ Ἁ οὶ 4 Ν ’ ἃ 
κατασκέψασθαι δὲ καὶ τῶν Σελινουντίων τὰ πράγματα καὶ 
A ld A Q A 3 ’ ’ > 3 
τὰ διάφορα μαθεῖν τὰ πρὸς ᾿Εγεσταίους. παραπλέοντες δ᾽ ἐν 
ἀριστερᾷ τὴν Σικελίαν, τὸ μέρος τὸ πρὸς τὸν Τυρσηνικὸν 
κόλπον, ἔσχον ἐς Ἱμέραν, ἥπερ μόνη ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει τῆς 

indefinite duration, as 5. 7. 1.—32. ἤδη: 
now, i.e. from this time on. Cf. 1.18. 
28. — 88. ἐπεραιώθη ἐς Πελοπόννησον: 
for the particulars, see 88. § 9, and for 
the first consequences of his recall, see 
4. 1. --- 34. ἐρήμῃ δίκῃ: in contu- 
maciam. Cf. Bk. Anecd. I, 245 ἐρήμη 
δίκη ἐστὶν ὅταν μὴ παρόντων ἀμφοτέρων 
τῶν προσόντων (ἀλλὰ τοῦ ἑτέρου μόνου) ὁ 
δικαστὴς τὴν ψῆφον ἐνέγκῃ κατὰ τοῦ ἀπόν- 
τος. ---- 35. ἐκείνου : see on 19. 

62. The other Athenian generals 
make a voyage along the north coast of 
Sicily, taking the Sicanian town Hyc- 
cara. Nicias visits Egesta. Fruitless 
attack of the Athenians upon the Gele- 
atic Hybla.—1. of λοιποί: Nicias and 
Lamachus.— 2. λαχὼν ἑκάτερος : 8c. ἕν, 
as expressed at 42. 5.—3. ξύμπαντι: 
(sc. τῷ στρατεύματι) so Kr. after one 
Ms. and old editions, for ξὺν παντί, which 
seems to be foreign to Thuc.’s usage. 
Cf. 3. 95. 9, and Nicias’ express ad- 
vice 47.2 πλεῖν ἐπὶ Σελινοῦντα πάσῃ τῇ 
στρατιᾷ. ---- ἐπὶ Σελινοῦντος kal Εἰγέστης: 

manifestly in prosecution of the plan of 
Nicias (c. 47). Selinus, though further 
off, is mentioned first as the main goal ; 
cf. 47. 2 πλεῖν ἐπὶ Σελινοῦντα... ἐφ᾽ ὅπερ 
μάλιστα ἐπέμφθησαν, and see on 2. 7. 16. 
Though the Athenians, on this voyage, 
did not come to Selinus, that was clearly 
their original intention (cf. 5 κατασκέ- 
ψασθαι δὲ καὶ τῶν Σελινουντίων τὰ πρά- 
Ὑματα), hence the words ἐπὶ Σελινοῦντος 
are not to be bracketed, with St.— 
4, τὰ χρήματα εἰ δώσουσιν οἱ 'EHye- 
σταῖοι: οἵ. 47. 3.— 6. τὰ διάφορα: the 
points of contention. See on 1. 56. 2. 
On the matter, cf. 6. § 2. 
παραπλέοντες... THY Σικελίαν : see 
on 47. 7. ---ν ἀριστερᾷ : without either 
ἔχοντες, Which v. H. inserts here (cf. 
3. 106.5; 8.101. 6), or λαβόντες (cf. 7. 
1.6). The voyage is first northward, 
then, after passing through the strait 
between Sicily and Italy, along the 
north coast of the island, here desig- 
nated as τὸ μέρος τὸ πρὸς τὸν Τυρσηνικὸν 
κόλπον (see on 13.11).— 8. ἐς Ἱμέραν: 



Σικελίας Ἑλλὰς πόλις ἐστί: καὶ ws οὐκ ἐδέχοντο αὐτούς, 

’ Ν 5 ax ’, ε A ν ’ 

10 παρεκομίζοντο. καὶ ἐν τῷ παράπλῳ αἱροῦσιν Ὕκκαρα, πό- 

λισμα Σικανικὸν μέν, ᾿Ἐγεσταίοις δὲ πολέμιον: ἦν δὲ παρα- 
’ Ἁ 3 ,’ A ’ 4 

θαλασσίδιον. καὶ ἀνδραποδίσαντες THY πόλιν παρέδοσαν 


3 4 ’ Q 3 ~ e ”~ 9 N Ἧ 4 
Ἐγεσταίοις (παρεγένοντο yap αὐτῶν ἱππῆς), αὐτοὶ δὲ πάλιν 
“A Ν lo 3 , ὃ Ν ῶ > edo 4 Lt 3 
τῷ μὲν πεζῷ ἐχώρουν διὰ τῶν Σικελῶν, ἕως ἀφίκοντο ἐς 

Κατάνην, αἱ δὲ νῆες περιέπλευσαν τὰ ἀνδράποδα ἄγουσαι. 

Νικίας δὲ εὐθὺς ἐξ Ὕκκάρων ἐπὶ ᾿Εγέστης παραπλεύσας καὶ 4 

Φ ’ ἃ Ν , ’ ἴω 9 
Tada χρηματίσας καὶ λαβὼν τάλαντα τριάκοντα παρὴν ἐς 

ἃ 4 Ἁ 3 4 9 ’ \. 3 ‘4 3 
τὸ στράτευμα. καὶ τἀνδράποδα ἀπέδοσαν καὶ ἐγένοντο ἐξ 

4 Ὅν » a4 e N , , 9 Q A A 
αὐτῶν εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατὸν τάλαντα. καὶ ἐς TOUS τῶν Σικελῶν 

οὗ, 5. § 1.—9. Ἑλλάς : as fem. adj. only 
here in Thuc.; freq. in Hdt. See on 
1.131. 6. On the matter, cf. 7. 58. § 2. 
-Οοὐκ ἐδέχοντο: sc. οἱ Ἱμεραῖοι.---10. πα- 
ρεκομίζοντο : they proceeded westerly 
along the coast. 

"Yxxapa: for its location; see Holm, 

Gesch. Siz. I, 60.—mdAtopa Σικανι-. 

Kév: acc. to 2. ὃ 5 the Sicanians were 
confined πρὸς τὰ μεσημβρινὰ καὶ ἑσπέρια. 
—11. παραθαλασσίδιον: elsewhere only 
in Dio Ὁ. 54. 9.— 18. παρεγένοντο ad- 
τῶν ἱππῆς: (i.e. τῶν ᾿Εγεσταίων) who had 
joined the Athenians before the attack 
on Hyccara.—atrot: i.e. all the Atheni- 
as (as opp. to the Egestaean cavalry), 
subdivided presently in τῷ μὲν πεζῷ, al 
δὲ νῆες. Laniachus was prob. the leader 
of the land troops through the interior. 
—15. al δὲ νῆες περιέπλευσαν: i.e. sailed 
on southwards round the island. 

16. Νικίας δὲ εὐθὺς... ἐς τὸ στρά- 
τευμα : parenthetical explanation. — 
17. τάλλα χρηματίσας : attending to the 
other matters (i.e. other than financial). 
For χρηματίζειν in this sense, see on 1. 
87. 17.— τάλαντα τριάκοντα: all the 
money on hand, acc. to 46.3. Cf. 47. 

8 ff. — παρῆν és τὸ στράτευμα: = παρε- 
γένετο ἐς τὸ στράτευμα. See on 3.3.19. 
The army had meanwhile united again 
at Catana. See App.—18. ἀπέδοσαν : 
sold, a meaning which is extremely 
rare in active, and prob. another of 
Thuc.’s poetical usages. Cf. Eur. Cycl. 
239 (St.); Ar. Ran. 1285 (Kock). The 
mid. occurs 1. 29. 23, 55.6; 7. 87.17. 
Cl. adopted Bk.’s conjecture ἀπέδοντο, 
and Madvig (Adv. I, 327) suggested 
ἀπεδόθησαν, but without citing parallels 
for the pass. in this sense. — ἐγένοντο: 
with neut. pl. subj., as 2.8.7; 5. 26. 
12, 75.7; here perhaps because of the 
definite number. 

19. ἐς τοὺς τῶν Σικελῶν ξυμμάχονς: lo 
those of the Sicels who were allies of theirs. 
Except the Sicels the Athenians had as 
allies only Egesta, Catana, and Naxos. 
Nicias had just been in Egesta, and 
Catana was their actual station. So it 
is quite natural that mention is made 
here only of the Sicels. It seems un- 
necessary then, with St., to bracket 
τῶν Σικελῶν. Nor is Kr.’s objection to 
the attrib. position of the part. gen. 
valid for Thuc. He so inserts the part. 



20 ξυμμάχους περιέπλευσαν, στρατιὰν κελεύοντες πέμπειν TH 
τε pec ely τῆς ἑαυτῶν ἦλθον ἐπὶ Ὕβλαν τὴν Γελεάτιν, πολε- 
μίαν οὖσαν, καὶ οὐχ εἷλον. καὶ τὸ θέρος ἐτελεύτα. 

Τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος εὐθὺς τὴν ἔφοδον οἱ ᾿Αθη: 

ναῖοι ἐπὶ Συρακούσας παρεσκευάζοντο, οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι καὶ. 

9 JN ε 9.9» , 929 > \ Ν 9 A ‘ γ 
αυήτοι ὡς ἐπ εκΚκεινοὺυς LOVTES. ἐπειδὴ yap QUTOLS προς TOV 

πρῶτον φόβον καὶ τὴν προσδοκίαν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι οὐκ εὐθὺς ἐπέ. 
κειντο, κατά τε τὴν ἡμέραν ἑκάστην προιοῦσαν ἀνεθάρσουν 

gen. not only often between the art. 
and ptc. (87. 8, 102.2; 1. 9. 4, 48. 12, 
126. 83; 3.22. 26, 86.19; 4.46.5, 111. 
6, 125. 20; 8.63.17, 78.4, 90.1), as 
sometimes between art. and adj. (1.25. 
18; 8. 65.14; 8. 78. 31), but even be- 
tween art. and subst., of τῶν ᾿Επιδα- 
μνίων φνγάδες 1. 26. 18; 
φυγάδες 4.52.3; οἱ ᾿Ορχομενίων φυγάδες 
4.76.13; τοὺς παρόντας Ἀρκάδων ξυμμά- 
xous 5. 64.20; τοὺς ᾿Αργείων φυγάδας 6. 
7.5; οἱ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων τριακόσιοι λογάδες 
6.101.21; οἱ ἐν τῇ Μιλήτῳ τῶν Πελοπον- 
νησίων .. 
νικῆσαν τῶν Πελοποννησίων μέρος 8. 105. 
15 (cf. also τὰ αὐτῆς τῆς Πύλον ἔξω τοῦ 
ἔσπλουν πρὸς τὸ πέλαγος 4. 8.35; and for 
the part. gen. in pred. position, 1.113. 
14; 8.85.4; 4.75.8; 6.7.17). Alsoin 
Hdt. the part. gen. occurs in attrib. 
position 1, 98. 21, 148. 8. See H. v. 
Kleist, Der eingesch. Gen. d. Ganzen 
b. Thuk. (N. Jhbb. f. Philol. CXLIIT, 
107 ff.).— 20. περιέπλευσαν : see App. 
—21. Ὕβλαν τὴν Γελεᾶτιν : the mod- 
ern Paterno at the foot of Aetna; see 
on 4. 7 and Holm I, 68, 363. 

68. While the Athenians are prepar- 
ing for a direct attack upon Syracuse, 
the Syracusans, in view of their delay, 
demand to be led against the camp 
at Catana.— 2. παρεσκενάζοντο: with 

οἱ Μυτιληναίων 

. στρατιῶται 8. 78.1; κατὰ τὸ 

varying const., first with acc. (as 1. δά. 
3; 4.30.11; 5.10.1), then verbal with 
ws and fut. pte. (as 2.7.3; 3.107. 10; 
4.18.18; 5.62.7). 

3. πρὸς τὸν πρῶτον φόβον... ἐπέ- 
κειντο: i.e. had not attacked immedi- 
ately as at first they had feared and 
expected. For rpés=secundun, cf. 
84. 44, 64.12, 85.11; 1. 140.4; 2. 54. 
9; 4. 39. 8, 106. 5. So most editors. 
Steup objects that the position of the 
neg. is against this, and renders πρός by 
entgegen. On the matter, cf. 45 (end), 
49. §2.—5. κατά τε τὴν ἡμέραν ἑκά- 
στην: ἕκαστος occurs both with the art. 
(cf. 31.19; 1.22.12; 2.24.10; 3. 50. 
10, 82.14; 4. 98. 6; 5. 47. 89, 49. 9) 
and without (cf. 67.18; 1. 56.9; 2.31. 
15, 85.16; 3.58.16; 4. 56.2, 66.2; 5. 
18.50). Gild., Syn. 661. Here isadded 

‘the pred. ptc. προιοῦσαν, as each day 

passed on. For the participial const., 
see App. on 4.63.2. re here, correl. 
to καί before ἐπειδή, marks the first stage 
of the gradually reviving self-confi- 
dence expressed by impf. ἀνεθάρσουν ; 
the decisive result of the weak under- 
takings (c. 62) of the Athenians (ἐπειδὴ 

. οὐχ εἷλον Bla) is expressed by the 
aor. κατεφρόνησαν, they came to despise 
still more. Cf. 49.5 τῇ γνώμῃ ἀναθαρ- 
σοῦντας ἀνθρώπους kal τῇ ὄψει καταφρονεῖν 





μᾶλλον, καὶ ἐπειδὴ πλέοντές τε τὰ ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνα τῆς Σικελίας 

ω ν 
πολὺ ἀπὸ σφῶν ἐφαίνοντο καὶ πρὸς τὴν Ὕβλαν ἐλθόντες 
N 4 > ’ ¥ ’ 4 Ν 
καὶ πειράσαντες οὐχ εἷλον βίᾳ, ἔτι πλέον κατεζρόνησαν καὶ 
9 ζ΄ ‘ ’ ® Ν ¥ A a 
ἠξίουν τοὺς στρατηγούς, οἷον δὴ ὄχλος φιλεῖ θαρσήσας 
A ¥ A 3." 4 > ‘ 9 9 a) > 39 ¢€ 
10 ποιεῖν, ἄγειν σφᾶς ἐπὶ Κατάνην, ἐπειδὴ οὐκ ἐκεῖνοι ἐφ᾽ ἑαυ- 

ΜΝ 2 A 4 A 
TOUS ἔρχονται. ἱππῆς TE προσελαύνοντες αἰεὶ κατάσκοποι τῶν 8 

, Ν \ , a 9% , 2)? 
Συρακοσίων πρὸς τὸ στράτευμα τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐφύβριζον 
¥ N 9 ’ ’ 4 A A 9 
ἄλλα τε καὶ εἰ ξυνοικήσοντες σφίσιν αὐτοῖς μᾶλλον ἥκοιεν 
ἐν τῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ ἢ Λεοντίνους ἐς τὴν οἰκείαν κατοικιοῦντες. 

“A γιγνώσκοντες οἱ στρατηγοὶ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ βουλό- ἵ 

¥ N “A 9 Ἁ 
μενοι αὐτοὺς ἄγειν πανδημεὶ ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ὅτι πλεῖστον, αὐτοὶ 

μᾶλλον.----6. πλέοντές τε τὰ ἐπ᾿ ἐκεῖνα τῆς 
Σικελίας: Kr. takes τὰ ἐπ ἐκεῖνα as 
construed with πλέοντες, like πλεῖν τὴν 
θάλασσαν : but it seems rather adv., on 
the opposite coast of Sicily. re τά, with 
St., for τά re of the Mss., so that both 
grounds of the recovered courage may 
stand out clearly. The sense of the 
passage is: ‘tSince they on their voy- 
age along the opposite coast of Sicily 
had shown themselves only at a dis- 
tance from Syracuse and in their at- 
tack upon Gela with land troops had 
not taken it.”’— 8. wepdoavres: cf. 1. 
61. 18 πειράσαντες τοῦ χωρίου. ---- εἷλον 
βίᾳ: of violent capture, as 1. 102. 7. 
Cf. 47.7; 1.11. 9.—9. οἷον δὴ ὄχλος 
φιλεῖ ποιεῖν : as 4.28.12. Cf. 2. 65. 12; 
8. 1. 30: — θαρσήσας : when it has got 

11. ἱππῆς te: the indispensable par- 
ticle is lacking in all Mss. — προσελαύ- 
vores... πρὸς TO στράτευμα: cf. 7. 73. 
24, and Tac. Annales 2.18 equo ad 
vallum acto.— 12. ἐφύβριζον : asked 
scornfully ; not found elsewhere in Att. 
prose. — 13. el: = πότερον (Schol.), and 


so Cl. Steup explains εἰ as whether not, 
with St., making 7 = than after μᾶλλον, 
which is more forcible. — ξυνοικήσοντες 
σφίσιν αὐτοῖς... ἐν τῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ : (].3 
and most editors unnecessarily adopt 
Bk.’s αὐτοί. The antithesis is perfect 
to Λεοντίνους és τὴν οἰκείαν κατοικιοῦντες 
(cf. 76. 6 δοκοῦσιν οὐ Λεοντίνους βούλεσθαι 
κατοικίσαι, ἀλλ᾽ ἡμᾶς μᾶλλον ἐξοικίσαι). 
For σφίσιν αὐτοῖς as indir. reflexive, cf. 
1.19.8, 128.5; 2.21.19. See Kr. Spr. 
51,2, 7. Plut. Nic. 16 (εἰ Karavalors 
συνοικήσοντες ἢ Λεοντίνους κατοικιοῦντες 
ἥκουσι) seems to have followed Thuc. 
inaccurately here. 

64, 65. The Athenian generals, by a 
false message sent through aCatanaean, 
induce the Syracusans to advance with 
their whole army upon Catana. Mean- 
while the Athenian force sails by night 
and lands in the Great Harbor at a suit- 
able point near the Olympieum. The 
Syracusans, becoming aware of the de- 
ception, return in haste.—2. ἄγειν: 
entice, draw off, in which sense Thuc. 
elsewhere uses ἀπάγειν (73. 8; 1. 109. 
6; 8. 86. 4).— re πλεῖστον : as far as 




δὲ ταῖς ναυσὶν ἐν τοσούτῳ ὑπὸ νύκτα παραπλεύσαντες στρα- 

, ; A 3 9 ’ . 49 Ε , 20 4 9 A 
τόπεδον καταλαβεῖν ἐν ἐπιτηδείῳ καθ ἡσυχίιαν, εἰδότες οὐκ ἂν 

ε ’ id ‘ 9 3 Ὃς “A N 
5 ὁμοίως δυνηθέντες [καὶ] εἰ ἐκ τῶν νεῶν πρὸς παρεσκευα- 
, 3 ’ A Ν ”~ 32.» “A “ ‘\ 
σμένους ἐκβιβάζοιεν ἢ κατὰ γὴν ἰόντες γνωσθεῖεν (τοὺς γὰρ 
Δ ‘ \ A νιν νΝ A 2 ᾿ 
ἂν ψιλοὺς [τοὺς] σφῶν καὶ τὸν ὄχλον τῶν Συρακοσίων τοὺς 
ε ,’ ᾽ν. ὃ ’ 3 9 4 e ’ , 
ἱππέας πολλοὺς ὄντας, σφίσι δ᾽ οὐ παρόντων ἱππέων, βλά- 
A ’ 9 ἃ ,’ ’ ν e \ ~~ 
Trev dv μεγάλα: οὕτω δὲ λήψεσθαι χωρίον ὅθεν ὑπὸ τῶν 
ἱππέων οὐ βλάψονται ἄξια λόγου: ἐδίδασκον δ᾽ αὐτοὺς περὶ 


A N “a 3 ’ ’ ν Ἁ ’ 
τοῦ πρὸς τῷ ᾿Ολυμπιείῳ χωρίου, ὅπερ καὶ κατέλαβον, Σνυ- 
, , a , " , > Ν ἃ 
ρακοσίων φυγάδες ot ξυνείποντο), τοιόνδε τι οὖν πρὸς ἃ 

possible. —3. ἐν τοσούτῳ: for ἐν τούτῳ, 
with a hint of the longer time they hoped 
to win. — ὑπὸ νύκτα : Cl. explained at 
nightfall; but as the journey from Cat- 
ana to Syracuse took considerable time, 
ὑπὸ νύκτα here, as well as in 65. 14, prob. 
means by night. This is the meaning 
also at 7.12; 8.35.16; and in the other 
cases of its occurrence in Thuc. (1. 115. 
19; 2.92.22; 3.80.7, 91.10; 4. 67.3; 
7,22.2; 8.33.10) there is nothing against 
its meaning simply by night. — wapa- 
πλεύσαντες : Cl. wrote unnecessarily 
προσπλεύσαντες. Cf. 50. 7, 9; 52. 8; 
94.3.—4. ἐν ἐπιτηδείῳ : αὐ a suitable 
place, as 2.81.17. Cf. 66.3 ἐς χωρίον 
ἐπιτήδειον.---εἰδότες.... γνωσθεῖεν: kKnow- 
ing that they would not in like manner 
be able, if from the ships against men pre- 

| pared they disembarked (the army) or 

Should be recognized going by land. For 
ἐκβιβάζειν with obj. (τὸ στράτευμα) to be 
supplied, St. compares Xen. Hell. 2.1. 
24 καὶ οὐ πρότερον éteBlBacev ἐκ τῶν νεῶν 
τρὶν αὗται ἧκον. For the text, see App. 
—6. τοὺς dots... kal τὸν ὄχλον: note 
the emphatic position of these obj. ac- 
cusatives before the subj. τῶν Συρακο- 

_ σίων τοὺς ἱππέας. --- τοὺς yap ἂν ψιλοὺς 

[τοὺς] σφῶν: Cl. explained the art. here 
as repeated to avoid misunderstanding, 
but it is against Thucydidean usage, 
and prob. rightly rejected by St., Bm., 
Steup.—7. τὸν ὄχλον : comprising, it 
seems, camp-followers and baggage- 
train. — 8. σφίσι ὃ οὐ παρόντων ἱππέων: 
δέ, which is not strictly necessary, em- 
phasizes the opposition to thepreceding, 

_ and for the same reason the repetition 

of ἱππέων, which St. brackets, seems 
justified. — βλάπτειν ἂν μεγάλα: note 
the repetition of ἄν. See on 1.36.15; 
4.18.17. GMT. 228; Gild., Syn. 467. 
μεγάλα is cogn. acc. See on 1. 81.8. 
G. 159, n.2; H. 716b; Kr. Spr. 69, 7, 
3.— 9. οὕτω δέ: but in that case, as 1. 
45. 8.— ὅθεν: sc. ἐπιχειροῦντες.---10. περὶ 
τοῦ πρὸς τῷ ᾿Ολυμπιείῳ χωρίον : see on 
65.15.—11. ὅπερ καὶ κατέλαβον: which 
they actually took. ΟἿ. 1.14. 14.---12. of 
ξυνείποντο: i.e. who had joined the 
Athenians.—rovdvbe tr. . . μηχανῶνται: 
the same phrase also 4.46.17; 5.46. 5. 
-- οὖν: indicating resumption after a 
parenthesis (see on 3.95.9; 7.6.7) with 
repetition of the subj. of στρατηγοί from 
1. 1.— πρὸς ἃ ἐβούλοντο : in accordance 
with what they wished. Cf. 1. 2. 




ἐβούλοντο οἱ στρατηγοὶ μηχανῶνται. πέμπουσιν ἄνδρα 3 

, Q , “Ὁ δὲ _A , A ~ ὃ 
σφίσι μὲν πιστόν, τοῖς δὲ τῶν Συρακοσίων στρατηγοῖς τῇ ὃο- 
, 3 @ 9 “δι ‘ δὲ A e > 2 \ 
15 κήσει οὐχ ἧσσον ἐπιτήδειον: ἦν δὲ Καταναῖος ὁ ἀνήρ, Kat 
9 3 9 A 3 A , 9 ν Φ > A \ >. 4 
ἀπ᾽ ἀνδρῶν ἐκ τῆς Κατάνης ἠκειν ἔφη ὧν ἐκεῖνοι τὰ ὀνόματα 
ἐγίγνωσκον καὶ ἠπίσταντο ἐν τῇ πόλει ἔτι ὑπολοίπους ὄντας 
τῶν σφίσιν εὔνων. ἔλεγε δὲ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους αὐλίζεσθαι ἀπὸ 
“A 4 3 ἰοὺ ’ Ἁ 9 ’ > A \ 9 
τῶν ὅπλων ἐν TH πόλει, καὶ εἰ βούλονται ἐκεῖνοι πανδημεὶ ἐν 
ε ’ ε Δ 4 > ἃ ‘N ’ 9 A 9 Ν A 9 
20 ἡμέρᾳ ῥητῇ ἅμα ἕῳ ἐπὶ τὸ στράτευμα ἐλθεῖν, αὐτοὶ μὲν ἀπο- 
κλήσειν τοὺς παρὰ σφίσι καὶ τὰς ναῦς ἐμπρήσειν, ἐκείνους 
δὲ ῥᾳδίως [τὸ στράτευμα] προσβαλόντας τῷ σταυρώματι 
ε ’ 9 δι A ‘ , \ 
αἱρήσειν: εἶναι δὲ ταῦτα τοὺς ξυνδράσοντας πολλοὺς Ka- 

’ Ἁ ε ’ ¥ > > Δ > oN 9 
ταναίων, καὶ ἡτοιμάσθαι ἤδη ad ὧν αὐτὸς ἥκειν. 

18. πέμπουσιν : after τοιόνδε without 
γάρ, see on 1. 89. 2.----14. σφίσι : = σφί- 

σιν αὐτοῖς, as 1. 21. See on 4. 28. 27. 

- τῇ δοκήσει: in their opinion. The 

word is common in Thuc., as in trag-. 

edy, but avoided in Attic prose. See 
on 8. 43.3.— 17. ἠπίσταντο. . . ὗπο- 
λοίπους ὄντας: οὖς (from ὧν |. 16) or 
αὐτούς to be supplied. See on 1.10. 20; 
8. 55.12.—18. eivev: for εὐνόων after 
the analogy of εὔνους 8. 58.9; εὔνοις 5. 

106. 8. 

αὐλίζεσθαι : were in the habit of pass- 
ing the night (pres. inf.); not to be un- 
derstood, of course, of all the Athenians, 
fora guard must have remained behind. 
Cf. 1.21 τοὺς παρὰ σφίσι. --- ἀπὸ τῶν 
ὅπλων : away from their arms or camp. 
For ἀπό in this sense, cf. 1.7.6. See 
Kitihn. 86,1, n. 1. For ὅπλα, see on 1. 
111.6; 8.1. 7.— 20. ἐπὶ τὸ στράτευμα: 
i.e. the whole Athenian army, includ- 
ing both τοὺς παρὰ σφίσι (21) and the 
guard at the camp. To bracket these 
words, with St., would leave ἐλθεῖν 
without goal.— αὐτοί : following ἔλεγε 

ot δὲ 

(ὁ Karavaios ἀνήρ). i.e. the friendly Cat- 
anaeans.— 21. τοὺς παρὰ σφίσι: (80 
correctly Laur., for αὐτοὺς παρὰ σφίσι) 
i.e. the main body of the Athenians 
who spent the night in the city. — καὶ 
Tas ναῦς ἐμπρήσειν : it is to be inferred 
that, though the camp was outside, the 
ships were drawn up inside the city. — 
22. [τὸ στράτευμα] : recognized as a 
glossby Β]. The meaning ‘‘army’’ does 
not suit the context, and there is no 
objection to indicating by σταυρώματι 
the camp, which is called τὸ orparére- 
δον in 51.14, 75. 9, 88.27. The neces- 
sity of supplying from σταυρώματι an 
obj. (αὐτό) for αἱρήσειν seems to have 
led to the gloss. — 23. ταῦτα τοὺς ξυν- 
Spdcovras: note the emphatie position 
of the dem. pron. for τοὺς ταῦτα ξυνδρά- 
govras. See on 77. 18. ξυνδρᾶν is not 
found elsewhere in Attic prose. ‘Cf. 
Liban. Orat. 736.— 24. καὶ ἡτοιμάσϑαι 
... ἥκειν : Schol. καὶ ἑτοίμους εἶναι sos 
ἄνδρας, wap ὧν αὐτὸς ἥκει. For the 

in rel. sent., see on 1.91.24. G 
755; Kin. 594,5; Kr. Spr. 55, 4, 9. 



ἃ ~ 4 μὴ ~ \ 9 a »¥ A 
στρατηγοὶ τῶν Συρακοσίων, μετὰ τοῦ καὶ ἐς τὰ ἄλλα θαρσεῖν 
> : i 

καὶ εἶναι ἐν διανοίᾳ καὶ ἄνευ τούτων ἰέναι [παρεσκευάσθαι] 

9 ἃ ’ 3 COA ’ Ὁ 3 4 a 59 , 
ἐπὶ Κατάνην, ἐπίστευσάν τε τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ πολλῷ ἀπερισικεπτό- 

ἃ 9 ‘ ε ’ ,’ ® ‘4 9 ’ 
5 τερον καὶ εὐθὺς ἡμέραν ξυνθέμενοι 7 παρέσονται ἀπέστειλαν 

9. 9 Ἁ 9 Ἁ ¥ A δ A 4 4 
αὐτόν, καὶ αὐτοὶ (ἤδη yap καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων Σελινούντιοι 

,. » Q A A Ἁ A > 4 
καὶ ἄλλοι τινὲς παρῆσαν) προεῖπον πανδημεὶ πᾶσιν ἐξιέναι 

Συρακοσίοις. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἑτοῖμα αὐτοῖς καὶ τὰ τῆς παρασκενῆς 

5 Q ee , 9 a 6 y 9 LY > , 
ἣν Και aL ἡμέραι ἐν als ξυνέθεντο ἥξειν έγγυς σαν, TOPEVO- 

> AN 4 9 , 9 AN » , ΄-ς 9 A 
10 μενοι ἐπὶ Κατάνης ηὐλίσαντο ἐπὶ τῷ Συμαίθῳ ποταμῷ ἐν TH 

65 2. μετὰ τοῦ. . . θαρσεῖν: in ac- 
cord with their confidence also in other 
respects. Cl, and Kr. explain μετὰ τοῦ 
=praeterquam quod, comparing 
Dem. 5.5 μετὰ τοῦ προσοφλεῖν alc χύνην 

. πάντες ἔγνωτε. But this does not 
suit the context. —3. εἶναι ἐν διανοίᾳ: 
= διανοεῖσθαι. Cf. ἐν ἐλπίδι εἶναι 4. 70. 
70. ---- καὶ ἄνεν τούτων: i.e. without this 
message. But Cl. prefers to take τού- 
των as masc., referring to the Catanae- 
ans. — [ἰπαρεσκενάσθαι] : bracketed by 
nearly all recent editors. It seems 
clearly a gloss of εἶναι ἐν διανοίᾳ, cer- 
tainly cannot as pf. inf. depend on 
that. Possible would be παρασκευάσα- 
σθαι of four Mss.—4. ἀπερισκεπτότερον: 
too incautiously. See on 57. 12. --- 
5. ἀπέστειλαν αὐτόν: sent him back, 
reckoning on the uprising of the Cata- 
naeans. In accordance with this ex- 
pectation they themselves begin to 
carry out the plan agreed upon: καὶ 
atrol... Συρακοσίοις, and they themselves 
made proclamation for the whole force of 
the Syracusans to go out. The paren- 
thesis ἤδη γὰρ... παρῆσαν, coming be- 
fore the repetitive and explanatory 
Statement in 67. §2 ἐβοήθησαν δὲ... ws 
“τεντήκοντα, Was suspected by Cl. But 

it probably explains why all the Syracu- 
sans could march out (Kr.). For allies 
to remain behind to protect the city 
(e.g. against the Sicels) would not be 
strange, since such a service was freq. 
rendered among the Hellenes for an 
allied state (5. 28.§ 1f., 47. ὃ 3f.). Cf. 
also 5.33.9 of Μαντινῆς τὴν πόλιν ’ Ap- 
γείοις φύλαξι παραδόντες αὐτοὶ τὴν ξυμμα- 
χίαν ἐφρούρουν. --- 7. πανδημεὶ πᾶσιν 
ἐξιέναι Συρακοσίοις : for like pleonasm, 
cf. 1.90. 22 τειχίζειν πάντας πανδημεὶ τοὺς 
ἐν τῇ πόλει. ---- 8. ἑτοῖμα αὐτοῖς : belongs 
only to the first of the foll. clauses and 
hence was to be expected after καί. For 
examples of like irregular order, see 
on 2. 40. 1.--- τὰ τῆς wapackevfis: cf. 
29. 8. --- 9. αἱ ἡμέραι ἐν αἷς... ἥξειν: 
pl. including the day of the march from 
Syracuse as well as that agreed upon 
for the attack (cf. 1.5). Steup puts a 
comma after ἐγγύς, construing the adv. 
with ἥξειν and taking ἦσαν as equiv. to 
épjjxov. But this view is not likely to 
receive support. — 10. ἐπὶ τῷ Συμαίθῳ : 
the chief stream of the plain of Catana, 
and largest of Sicily; now Simeto or 
Giaretta. It was in Leontine terri- 
tory, hence in the hands of the Syra- 
cusans. See Holm I, 27 f., 340. 





’ ε 3.9 A e ¥ 9 ‘ ’ 
Λεοντίνῃ. οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ὡς ἥἤσθοντο αὐτοὺς προσιόντας, 
9 A 
ἀναλαβόντες TO TE στράτευμα ἅπαν TO ἑαυτῶν καὶ ὅσοι Σικε- 
A A a » A 
λῶν αὐτοῖς ἡ ἄλλος τις προσεληλύθει καὶ ἐπιβιβάσαντες ἐπὶ 
Q\ ~ A ‘ “A e > ’ » 3. ON Ν ’ 
τὰς ναῦς καὶ τὰ πλοῖα ὑπὸ νύκτα ἔπλεον ἐπὶ τὰς Συρακούσας. 
\ 9 3 A ν 4 90 2 3 SN dS x 3 
καὶ ot τε ᾿Αθηναῖοι apa ew ἐξέβαινον ἐς τὸ κατὰ TO ᾿᾽Ολυμ- 8 
πιεῖον ὡς τὸ στρατόπεδον καταληψόμενοι, καὶ οἱ ἱππῆς οἱ 
A 4 
Συρακοσίων πρῶτοι προσελάσαντες ἐς τὴν Κατάνην καὶ 
’ 9 A 
αἰσθόμενοι ὅτι τὸ στράτευμα ἅπαν ἀνῆκται, ἀποστρέψαντες 
ἀγγέλλουσι τοῖς πεζοῖς, καὶ ξύμπαντες ἤδη ἀποτρεπόμενοι 
3 4 2 ἃ Ν 4 3 4 3 es a “A 
ἐβοήθουν ἐπὶ τὴν πόλιν. ἐν τούτῳ δ᾽ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, μακρᾶς 1 
ἴω aA ~ 9 ἴω 
οὔσης τῆς ὁδοῦ αὐτοῖς, καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν καθῖσαν τὸ στράτευμα 

12. τὸ στράτευμα ἅπαν : including 
the ψΨιλοί and ὄχλος of 64. ὃ 1. --- ὅσοι 
“Σικελῶν : who had been summoned 62. 
§ 5.—18. ἢ ἄλλος τις: included in ὅσοι, 
unless we should read ἢ εἰ ἄλλος τις. 
Non-Sicel allies of the Athenians were 
Egesta, Catana, and Naxos; besides, 
Leontine fugitives were doubtless with 
the Athenian army (cf. 8. § 2, 50. § 4). 

—14. τὰς ναῦς καὶ ra πλοῖα: cf. 4.- 

116. 4 rots re πλοίοις καὶ ταῖς ναυσί. With 
the πλοῖα are prob. included the ὁλκά- 
δες of 80. 3 and 44. 6.— ὑπὸ νύκτα : see 
on 64. 8. 

15. ἅμα ἕῳ: applying also to καὶ ol 
ἱππῆς ἀγγέλλουσι. The coincidence in 
time is emphasized by οἵ re ᾿Αθηναῖοι 
... καὶ ol ἱππῆς. --- ὃς τὸ κατὰ τὸ ᾽Ολυμ- 
πιεῖον : (nearly all Mss. have ἐς τὸν, 
80. χῶρον or τόπον) in the place opposite 
the Olympieum (cf. 64. 11): ** Whoever 
sailed [from the east] into the bay 
called the Great Harbor of Syracuse 
had directly before him a ridge crowned 
by the temple of Olympian Zeus, re- 
mains of which are still visible in the 
grainfield ᾽" (Holm 11, 26).— 16. ὡς τὸ 

στρατόπεδον καταληψόμενοι: as planned 
64.§ 1, hence the art., which Laur. 
wrongly omits.—17. πρῶτοι : in front. 
ΟΙ.6θ.12.--- προσελάσαντες és τὴν Κατά- 
vyv: one Ms. (M) omits és, and so Hude 
writes τῇ Κατάνῃ. Steup agrees that és 
Κατάνην, into Catana (whether city or 
territory), is out of place with προσελά- 
σαντες, riding up, and suggests προελά- 
cavres.— 18. ἀνῇκται: the pf. indicating 
that the army is gone and they are de- 
ceived. —amoorphpavres: aor. of the 
sudden turning back of the horsemen. 
—19. ἀποτρεπόμενοι ἐβοήθουν : of the 
longer return march of the whole army, 
Schol. ὀπίσω ἐπανερχόμενοι. 

66. The Athenians, however, had 
time to encamp and fortify on all sides. 
The Syracusans advanced against the 
camp, but withdrew without accom- 
plishing anything.—1. ἐν τούτῳ : while 
the Syracusans were hurrying back to 
the city, which required considerable 
time, μακρᾶς οὔσης τῆς ὁδοῦ αὐτοῖς (i.e. 
τοῖς Συρακοσίοι5γ. --- 2. καθῖσαν : (A ἐκά- 
θισαν, as 7.82.16 A and B) trans., as 
2.71.4; 4.90.5, 98. δ; 5.7.14; 7. 82. 



3 4 3 ’ \ 3 a , » ¥ ε ’ 
ἐς χωρίον ἐπιτήδειον καὶ ἐν ᾧ μάχης τε ἄρξειν ἔμελλον ὁπότε 

4 ἃ ee A “A 4 9 3 A 9 Ν 
βούλοιντο καὶ οἱ ἱππῆς τῶν Συρακοσίων neat [ἂν] αὐτοὺς 

Ν io A a 
5 καὶ ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ καὶ πρὸ αὐτοῦ λυπήσειν TH μὲν yap τειχία 

A > » 9 Ἁ ,’ Ν , Ν Ν 
τε καὶ οἰκίαι εἶργον καὶ δένδρα καὶ λίμνη, παρὰ δὲ τὸ κρη- 

᾽ὔ Α \ 9 A δέ ὃ ’ \ ’ > ἃ 
μνοι. Kal τὰ ἔγγυς O€vOpa κόψαντες καὶ κατενεγκόντες ἐπί 

Ἁ θ aN ’ Ν A , » Ἁ 
τὴν θὕϑαλασσαν παρὰ τε TAS ναῦς σταύρωμα ἔπηξαν καὶ 

> ἃ “~ A ’ » ’ Ka 9 ὃ , > A λ , 
ἐπὶ τῳ Δάσκωνι ἔρυμα TE, ἢ εὐεφοδώτατον HV τοῖς πολεμίοις, 

10 λίθοις λογάδην καὶ ξύλοις διὰ ταχέων ὥρθωσαν καὶ τὴν τοῦ 

16. See on 4. 98. 5.—3. ἐπιτήδειον καὶ 
ἐν ᾧ : attrib. adj. connected by copula 
with rel. clause (as in French).— 
4. ἥκιστ᾽ [Gv]... λυπήσειν : one of the 
five passages in Thuc. where the Mss. 
have the fut. inf. with ἄν (cf. 2. 80. 40; 
5.82.21; 8.25. 28, 71.4), a const. de- 
fended by Herbst (Ueber dy b. Fut. im 
Thuc., Progr. 1867, p. 29 ff.), rejected 
by St. (Qu. Gr.? p. 21sqq.). Cl. adopted 
Meineke’s conjecture (Hermes III, 372) 
λυπήσειαν, and is followed by Steup. 
— 5. ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ: in action, as 1. 105. 
24; 2.89.42; 4.25.9; 8.42.12; and 
freq.— τῇ μὲν γὰρ τειχία xré.: con- 
cerning the locality occupied by the 
Athenians, see B. Lupus, Die Stadt 
Syrakus im Altertum (revision of the 
Cavallari-Holm Topografia), p. 118 f. 
—raxla: prob. to fence in gardens and 
plots of ground.—6. λίμνη: not the 
Lysimeleia (which was too near the 
city), but either the swampy ground 
(now called Pantano) about the Cyane 
(a tributary of the Anapus), west of the 
Olympieum, or—if the camp of the 
Athenians cannot be thought of as ex- 
tending so far west —a swamp south 
of the mouth of the Anapus.— παρὰ 
δὲ τό: on the other side, however. The 
order as in 46. 5. 

9. ἐπὶ τῷ Adoxow: the ridge ex- 
tending northward from the present 
Punta Caderini (about the middle of 
the west shore of the Great Harbor). 
Thuc. reckons it up to the bridge over 
the Anapus. See Lupus, op. cit.— épupd 
τε: Kr.’s conjecture ἔρυμά ri, adopted 
by several editors, is intended to bring 
our passage into agreement with Diod. 
13. 18, where the Bay of Dascon, south 
of the Punta Caderini, is mentioned. 
But it is not prob. that the position of 
the Athenians extended so far south- 
ward, and Diodorus’ topographic state- 
ments are little trustworthy (see Lupus, 
pp. 83, 119).— ἡ εὐεφοδώτατον ἦν τοῖς 
πολεμίοις: cf. 101. 14 ἡ πηλῶδες ἣν. The 
Mss. read ἐφοδώτατον, but the Schol. 
reads as in the text, explaining by 
προσβῆναι δυνατόν, εὐπρόσιτον. No adj. 
compound of ὁδός with a prep. occurs, 
and for ἔφοδος Xen. Anab. 8. 4. 41 is 

wrongly cited. But εὐέφοδος is found in . 

Polybius, Diodorus, and Strabo, as well 
as Xen. Cyrop. 2.4.18. Bk.’s conjec- 
ture εὐοδώτατον means rather pervius 
and expeditus, than aditu facilis. 
— 10. λογάδην : closely connected with 
λίθοις. See on 1. 122. 15.— ὥρθωσαν : 
erected. Cf. 88. 28. --- τὴν rot ᾿Ανάπον 
γέφυραν : over which the road led from 



3 ’ ’ » , δὲ 9 A ΝᾺ 
Ανάπου γέφυραν ἔλυσαν. παρασκευαζομένων O€ ἐκ μὲν τῆς 8 
’ ϑ ‘ 3 Ν 9. + » δὲ εε a A 
πόλεως οὐδεὶς ἐξιὼν ἐκώλνε, πρῶτοι δὲ οἱ ἱππῆς τῶν Συρακο- 
’ 4 » , 9 ἃ Ν, A 9 
σίων προσεβοήθησαν, ἔπειτα δὲ ὕστερον καὶ τὸ πεζὸν ἅπαν 
ξυνελέγη. καὶ προσῆλθον μὲν ἐγγὺς τοῦ στρατεύματος τῶν 
16 ᾿Αθηναίων τὸ πρῶτον, ἔπειτα δέ, ὡς οὐκ ἀντιπροῇσαν αὐτοῖς, 
9 ’ Ἃ ὃ 4 A 9 λ ’ ὁδὸὴ λί 
ἀναχωρήσαντες καὶ διαβάντες τὴν Ἑλωρίνην ὁδὸν ηὐλίσαντο. 
Τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ ot ξύμμαχοι παρεσκευά- 
ζ e 3 , N , δ ὃ 5 ὃ δ \ , 
ovto ws ἐς μάχην καὶ ξυνετάξαντο ὦδε: δεξιὸν μὲν κέρας 
᾿Αργεῖοι εἶχον καὶ Μαντινῆς, ᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ τὸ μέσον, τὸ δὲ 
¥ e , e » ‘ ἃ δ᾽ 9 9. A A 
ἄλλο of ξύμμαχοι of ἄλλοι. καὶ TO μὲν ἡμισν αὐτοῖς TOU 

, 3 A , θ > , 253. Ν 9 a ον δὲ 
στρατευματος ἐν TM προσῦεέν ἣν, τεταγμένον €7L OKTW, TO OE 

4 9 

Α a A \ Ἁ Ν A 
ἡμισυ ἐπὶ ταῖς εὐναῖς ἐν πλαισίῳ, ἐπὶ ὀκτὼ καὶ τοῦτο τεταγ- 

¥ Δ ἃ A A 
μένον: οἷς εἴρητο, ἡ av τοῦ στρατεύματός τι πονῇ μάλιστα, 

Syracuse southward to the town of 
Elorus (or Helorus), ἡ Ελωρίνη ὁδός (16). 
The Syracusans doubtless restored the 
bridge after the withdrawal of the 
Athenians. Cf. 101. § 4. 

11. παρασκεναζομένων: sc. αὐτῶν, 
while they were making preparations. 
For gen. abs. with subj. easily supplied 
from the context, cf. 1.2.8; 4.3.6. 
GMT. 848; H. 972 a.—12. οἱ ἱππῆς 

. τὸ πεῖόν: as they had returned 
from the expedition against Catana 
(c. 65, end). —138. ἔπειτα ὕστερον : con- 
nected as in 88.49. See on 2.9. 7.— 
14. προσῆλθον ἐγγὺς τοῦ στρατεύματος 
τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων: cf. 4.93.4 προσέμειξεν 
. ἐγγὺς τοῦ στρατεύματος αὐτῶν. This must 
have happened after they had crossed 
the Anapus higher up. — 15. οὐκ ἀντι- 
προῇσαν αὐτοῖς : did not in turn advance 
against them. The compound occurs 
elsewhere only in postclassical authors. 
On the 41 compounds of ἀντι- in Thuc. 
see App. on 4. 80. 8. --- 16. διαβάντες 
τὴν ᾿Ελωρίνην: for the accent, not 

᾿Ελωρινήν, see Herodian 2. p. 867. They 
must have crossed this road before in 
the opp. direction (from west to east) 
as they marched out. See Lupus, p. 119. 

67. On the following day both ar- 
mies take position for battle. —2. δεξιὸν 
κέρας : for freq. omission of the art. 
with divisions of an army, see on 2. 81. 
11; 4.31.8.—5. ἐπὶ ὀκτώ : eight men 
deep, the usual depth of front of Athe- 
nians and Lacedaemonians at the time 
of the Peloponnesian War. The const. 
is usually ἐπί with gen., but for the acc., 
cf. Xen. Anab. 4.8.11. See on 2. 93. 22. 
— 6. ἐπὶ ταῖς εὐναῖς : near their sleeping- 
places, i.e. the tents in camp. Cf. ἐν 
ταῖς εὐναῖς 3.112.10; 4.82.2. For ἐπί 
with dat. as here, see on 4. 14. 28. --- ἐν 
πλαισίῳ: as 7.78.5. Schol. ἐν σχήματι 
τετραγώνῳ. A hollow square is called 
τετράγωνος τάξις 4.125. 16.—7. οἷς εἴ» 
pyro: cf. 61.20.— πονῇ μάλιστα : 881. 
49.18. πονεῖν of troops hard pressed 
also 4. 96. 21; 5.78.10. Cf. Sall. Jug. 
108 ac modo laborantibus suis 


> ~ 4 Ἁ Ἁ ’ 3 ᾿ 4 
ἐφορῶντας παραγίγνεσθαι. καὶ τοὺς σκενοφόρους ἐντὸς τού- 

A 3 , 9 ὔ ε δὲ 4 » 
T@V Τῶν ENTLTAKTWYV ETTOLNO AVTO. Ou € Συρακόσιοι ἔταξαν 

10 τοὺς μὲν ὁπλίτας ἐφ᾽ ἑκκαίδεκα, ὄντας πανδημεὶ Συρακο- 

’ Ἁ 9 ’ A 9 ’ Ν > ~ 
σίους καὶ ὅσοι ξύμμαχοι παρῆσαν (ἐβοήθησαν δὲ αὐτοῖς 

A δ᾽ , » b Ν ’ .- 6 ~ XN 
Σελινούντιοι μὲν μάλιστα, ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ Γελῴων ἱππῆς; τὸ 

᾽ 9 ’ Q v4 e A 9 Ψ 
ξύμπαν ες διακοσίους, Και Καμαριναίων ἱὑππὴς οσον ELKOOL 

N ’ ε ’ Ά x e l4 9 ’ s A 
καὶ τοξόται ὡς πεντήκοντα), τοὺς δὲ ἱππέας ἐπετάξαντο ἐπὶ 

A A 9 ¥ »” A ’ Ν ’ Ν 
16 τῷ δεξιῴ, οὐκ ἔλασσον ὄντας ἢ διακοσίους καὶ χιλίους, παρὰ 

3 3 Ἃ Ἁ “\ 9 4 ’ “ > 4 
δ᾽ αὐτοὺς καὶ τοὺς ἀκοντιστάς. μέλλουσι δὲ τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις 

’ 9 ’ ε Ν ’ὔ’ , “0 9 Ν 
πβοτέροις ἐπιχειρήσειν O LKLAS Κατα TE EUVY) ἐπιπαριων 

ν N 4 , 4 
ἕκαστα καὶ ξύμπασι τοιάδε παρεκελεύετο" 

succurrere.—8. ἐφορῶντας : looking 
on, keeping sharp watch, with impli- 
cation of removal at some distance. 
Cf. 8. 104. 4.— παραγίγνεσθαι : as 2. 83. 
28.—évrds . . . ἐποιήσαντο: cf. 2. 83. 
26; 4,125.17; 7.78.7.—9. τῶν ἐπιτά- 
xrov: i.e. those held in reserve, = τῶν 
ἐπιτεταγμένων 5.72.17 (cf. ἐπετάξαντο 
14). | 

οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι ἔταξαν xre.: it must 
be assumed that the Syracusans had 
again advanced eastward across the 
Elorine road (66. 16), for after being 
put to flight they again take post on 
this road and get together (70. § 4). — 
10. πανδημεὶ Συρακοσίους : cf. 65. 7.— 
12. Σελινούντιοι μὲν μάλιστα: with the 
other (less important) allies definite 
numbers are given, so that Cl. was in- 
clined to assume before μάλιστα the loss 
of some numeral perhaps ¢ (χίλιοι), and 
Stein approves. But Steup is doubtless 
right in rendering μὲν μάλιστα espe- 
cially, most of all, on which then follows 
naturally ἔπειτα δὲ καί (cf. 1.75.9; 2. 
54. 19; 6. 11. 14, 16. 28). With this 
view it is quite natural that no number 

should be given with Σελινούντιοι. ---- 
13. καὶ Kapapwvatov ἱππῆς xré.: on this 
aid from the Camarinaeans, cf. 75. § 8, 
88. § 1.--- ὅσον εἴκοσι: about twenty. Cf. 
7. 88. 14. — 14. ἐπετάξαντο ἐπὶ τῷ δεξιῷ: 
i.e. they stationed the cavalry on the 
right to strengthen it. See on 2. 90. 7. 
—16. τοὺς ἀκοντιστάς : acc. tol. 14and 
69. § 2 still other light troops were with 
the Syracusans, but these, as of less 
importance, seem to be disregarded in 
the account here of the battle array. 
17. προτέροις ἐπιχειρήσειν : cf. 69. 
11; 4. 73. 7.--- κατὰ ἔθνη ἐπιπαριὼν 
ἕκαστα: passing along the line of battle, 
as the contingents of the separate states 
were drawn up (1. 2 ff.). As Hippocra- | 
tes had done 4. 94. § 2, Nicias made 
addresses of similar purport to the 
separate divisions, and we have here 
doubtless a summary of the whole. 
68. With the excellent composition 
and military experience of our army 
we may have the strongest hope of 
victory. On the other hand, far from 
home and encompassed by enemies as 
we are, we should, in case of ccfeat, be 




“Πολλῇ μὲν παραινέσει, ὦ ἄνδρες, τί δεῖ χρῆσθαι, οἷ 1 

πάρεσμεν ἐπὶ τὸν αὐτὸν ἀγῶνα; αὐτὴ γὰρ ἡ παρασκευὴ ἱκα- 

? aA 4 , “ a A , 
νωτέρα μοι δοκεῖ εἶναι θάρσος παρασχεῖν ἡ καλῶς λεχθέν- 

4 Ν 3 A 4 9 A 3 A 
τες λόγοι μετὰ ἀσθενοῦς στρατοπέδου. ὅπου yap ᾿Αργεῖοι 

AY A , 9 A N A e A a) 
kat Μαντινὴς Kat Αθηναῖοι και νησιωτῶν οἱ TPWTOL ἐσμεν, 

πῶς οὐ χρὴ μετὰ τοιῶνδε καὶ τοσῶνδε ξυμμάχων πάντα τινὰ 

’ A 9 , A ᾽ » Ψ \ ΜΝ 
μεγάλην τὴν ἐλπίδα τῆς νίκης ἔχειν, ἄλλως τε καὶ πρὸς 

¥ ’ 9 ’ὔ A 9 9 ’ 9 

ἄνδρας πανδημεί τε ἀμυνομένους καὶ οὐκ ἀπολέκτους ὥσπερ 
A Ἁ Δ ~ A 

καὶ ἡμᾶς, καὶ προσέτι Σικελιώτας, Ol ὑπερφρονοῦσι μὲν ἡμᾶς, 

in evil plight. Think then in the im- 
pending conflict at once of your honor 
and of the seriousness of the situation. 
—1. of πάρεσμεν : as if ἡμᾶς preceded. 
The rel. has causal force (since we ; see 
on 1.68.15). So all recent editors ex- 
plain except Steup. He would connect 
of directly with ὦ ἄνδρες, the troops 
being addressed as comrades in battle 
(for first person, cf. 3.80.1), and τὸν 
αὐτὸν ἀγῶνα emphasizing the common 
danger of the many different ἔθνη (cf. 
4. 10. 1 ἄνδρες of ξυναράμενοι τοῦδε τοῦ κιν»- 
δύνου). Hude corrects to τοιοῦτον ἀγῶνα. 
— 2. αὐτὴ h παρασκευή : comprises all 
preparations and equipments for the 
expedition — selection, arming, drill- 
ing, payment, and maintenance of the 
army contingents — which now appear 
in the excellent condition of the whole 
army: ‘tthe composition and condition 
of our army alone’’ (see on 37. 8). -- 
8. καλῶς: ironical, of fine speeches 
without corresponding content. Cf. 1. 
84.16; 8. 87. 24, 38. 20, 82. 42; 5. 69. 
20. Itisasif the danger of encroaching 
rhetoric were hinted at. 

4. ὅπον: not local here, but refer- 
ring to the matters before them; cf. 8 

27.6, and, as here with foll. πῶς, 8. 96.4. 
- ᾿Αργεῖοι καὶ Μαντινῆς : cf. c. 43; 61. 
ὃ ὅ.---ὅ. νησιωτῶν οἱ πρῶτοι: esp. Rho- 
dians and Chians, c. 48. Under νησιῶται 
are to be understood islanders of the 
Aegean; cf. Steup, Rh. Mus. XXXV, 
328 n.— 6. πάντα τινά : every one, as 
comprehensive as possible. See on 2. 
41.21; 8. 18. 88. --- 7. μεγάλην τὴν ἐλ- 
πίδα: position and effect of the pred. 
adj. as 2. 49. 24, 63. 16, 67. 30.— πρός: 
as opposed to; cf. 9. 18. ---- 8. πανδημεὶ 
ἀμυνομένους: cf. 67.8 2. Meineke (Her- 
mes III, 359) conjectures ἀμυνον μένους. 
But it is by no means necessary to con- 
ceive of the ἀμύνεσθαι beginning only 
with the impending battle. — οὐκ ἀπο- 
Aéxrovs: the neg. side of the same 
thing, opposed, by means of re... καί, 
to πανδημεὶ ἀμυνομένους, NOt to πανδημεί 
alone. — ὥσπερ καὶ ἡμᾶς : attraction of 

‘case and prolepsis. Cf. 1. 69. 28; 5. 99. 

4, Kr. Spr. 62, 4, 3; Kitithn. 681, 3. 
καί, without reference to the preceding 
neg., merely for the sake of the com- 
parison; cf. 2.18.13.—9. ὑπερφρονοῦσι: 
cf. 16. 20, and, as here with acc., 8. 89. 
29. Here for the sake of the assonance 
(with ὑπομενοῦσι), for the more usual 


e A δὲ » ὃ δ N Ἁ 3 ’ ~ , ν 

10 ὑπομενοῦσι δὲ ov, διὰ τὸ τὴν ἐπιστήμην τῆς τόλμης ἥσσω 
ἔχειν. παραστήτω δέτινι καὶ τόδε, πολύ τε ἀπὸ τῆς ἡμετέρας 8 

[οὶ ; Ν a a 4 
αὐτῶν εἶναι καὶ πρὸς γῇ οὐδεμιᾷ φιλίᾳ ἥντινα μὴ αὐτοὶ μαχό- 
μενοι κτήσεσθε. καὶ τοὐναντίον ὑπομιμνήσκω ὑμᾶς ἢ OL πο-. 
A Ss 

λέμιοι σφίσιν αὐτοῖς εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι παρακελεύονται" οἱ μὲν yap 
4 Ν (ὃ Ν ε 5 , s AN δὲ ν 3 3 (ὃ 3 

16 OTL περὶ πατρίδος ἔσται ὁ ἄγων; ἐγὼ OE OTL οὐκ ἐν πατρίιὸι, ἐξ 
a A aA «ἃ Xe , 3 A e \ e A Ἁ 
ἧς κρατεῖν δεῖ ἣ μὴ ῥᾳδίως ἀποχωρεῖν - οἵ γὰρ ἱππῆς πολλοὶ 
ἐπικείσονται. τῆς τε οὖν ὑμετέρας αὐτῶν ἀξίας μνησθέντες 4 
ἐπέλθετε τοῖς ἐναντίοις προθύμως καὶ τὴν παροῦσαν ἀνάγκην 
καὶ ἀπορίαν φοβερωτέραν ἡγησάμενοι τῶν πολεμίων." 

689 Ὁ μὲν Νικίας τοιαῦτα παρακελευσάμενος ἐπῆγε τὸ στρα- 1 

4 ὃ Ne 4 e ὃ \ > 4, 3 ὃ ’ Ν 9 ~ 

τόπεδον εὐθύς- οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι ἀπροσδόκητοι μὲν ἐν TO 

καταφρονεῖν (84. 54, 35.5, 49. 6, 68. 8). 
—10. ἐπιστήμην: of military knowledge 
and experience, as 1. 49. 12; 3. 121. 

11. παραστήτω τινὶ καὶ τόδε : let this 
also be fixed in the mind of every one. 
ris in wider sense; cf. 34. 58.—12. εἶναι: 
SC. Huds. — Kal πρὸς γῇ οὐδεμιᾷ φιλίᾳ 
ἥντινα... κτήσεσθε: and near to no 
friendly land, unless you win such by 
your own arms.—138. τοὐναντίον ἤ : also 
7. 80. 6. See on 3. 22. 28.—14. εὖ 
οἶδ᾽ ὅτι : see on 84. 43.— of μὲν γάρ: 
80. παρακελεύονται.----Ἴὅ. ἐγὼ δέ : Sc. ὑπο- 
μιμνήσκω. See on 24. 8. --- οὐκ ἐν πα- 
τρίδι : for ἐν οὐ πατρίδι (see on 1. 78. 1) ΞΞ 
ἐν γῇ οὐ πατρίδι οὔσῃ. In the appended 
Tel. sent. (see on 4. 126. 10) ἐξ 7s belongs 
gram. only with the second clause (4 μὴ 
... ἀποχωρεῖν), the intervening clause 
(κρατεῖν Set), which breaks the const., 
serving as foil for the following. For 
similar cases, cf. 2.11.9, 88.7, 92. 5; 
3. 68.9. With the second clause supply 

perhaps μέλλετε from δεῖ, as if we had 
ἐξ ἧς, εἰ μὴ κρατεῖτε, μὴ ῥᾳδίως μέλλετε 
ἀποχωρεῖν. ---1θ0. μὴ ῥᾳδίως ἀποχωρεῖν : 
οὗ, 4.10.13. The neg. (μή) still under 
the influence of παραστήτω. --- πολλοί: 
pred., in large numbers; see on 1.10. 

17. ἀξίας : subst., as 7. 77. 4, 12.— 
18. ἐπέλθετε. . . προθύμως : placed be- 
tween the parallel clauses τῆςτε.. .. 
μνησθέντες and kal... ἡγησάμενοι κτὲ. 
Cf. 15. 16. 

69. The Athenians advance to the 
attack. The Syracusans, though not 
expecting this, enter into the battle 
with spirit. The different motives for 
the courageous bearing of the combat- 
ants. —1. ἐπῆγε: inchoative impf.— 
2. ἀπροσδόκητοι: active, as in 2. 33. 
14, 98.26; 4. 72.12; 7.29.14, 39.14 
(but in all these it is in the dat. of 
pers. reference); elsewhere with passive 
force (2. 5. 18, 61. 13, 91. 15; 8. 39. 
23; 4. 108. 21; 7. 46.1; 8. 28. 12).— 



καιρῷ τούτῳ ἦσαν ὡς ἤδη μαχούμενοι (Kai τινες αὐτοῖς ἐγγὺς 
A , » \ 9 , e \ Ἁ A A 
τῆς πόλεως οὔσης Kal ἀπεληλύθεσαν, οἱ δὲ καὶ διὰ σπουδῆς 

βοηθοῦντες δρόμῳ ὑστέριζον μέν, ὡς δὲ ἐκαστό τοῖ 
προσβοηθοῦντες δρόμᾳ ριζον μέν, ὡς ς πῃ τοῖς 

. πλείοσι προσμείξειε, καθίσταντο: οὐ γὰρ δὴ προθυμίᾳ ἐλλι- 


“Ὁ > Oe , » > 5» , A , ¥ > 3 aA 
TELS ἦσαν Ovde τόλμῃ OUT EV ταύτῃ TH μάχῃ OUT ἐν ταῖς 

Ἂν 3 N ‘a Ν 3 , 3 9 5 9 e 3 
ἄλλαις, ἀλλὰ TH μὲν ἀνδρείᾳ οὐχ ἥσσους ἐς ὁσον ἡ ἐπι- 

, > ’ “ Ν 3 ’ 9. A . Ἅ ’ 
στήμη ἀντέχοι, τῷ δὲ ἐλλείποντι αὐτῆς καὶ τὴν βούλησιν 
»ν ’ 9 , 9 A 9» 4 “ 
ἄκοντες προυδίδοσαν): ὅμως δέ, οὐκ ay οἰόμενοι σφίσι τοὺς 

᾿Αθηναίους προτέρους ἐπελθεῖν καὶ διὰ τάχους ἀναγκαζό- 

μενοι ἀμύνασθαι, ἀναλαβόντες τὰ ὅπλα εὐθὺς ἀντεπῇσαν. 

καὶ πρῶτον μὲν αὐτῶν ἑκατέρων οἵ τε λιθοβόλοι καὶ σφεν- 3 

A ἃ Α 4 ® 2 A 
δονῆται καὶ τοξόται προυμάχοντο καὶ τροπάς, οἷα εἰκὸς 

8. ὡς ἤδη μαχούμενοι: for on the day 
before the Athenians had not accepted 
the battle offered (66. § 3). The const. 
of a verb of expectation with ws and 
fut. ptc. is unusual; different is 7. 12. 
15 προσδοκίαν παρέχειν ὡς ἐπιπλεύσονται. 
-- καί τινες αὐτοῖς. . . προυδίδοσαν: 
parenthetical explanation, the regular 
narrative being resumed with ὅμως δέ 
(1. 10).—4. καὶ ἀπεληλύθεσαν : sc. és 
τὴν πόλιν: had even gone away (to the 
city). See App.— of δὲ kal διὰ σπουδῆς: 
and these indeed in haste. ol δέ = τινες, 
without change of subj., as in 1. 87. 2. 
— 5. ws δὲ... προσμείξειε, καθίσταντο: 
but as each everywhere reached the main 
body, they took their stand, i.e. without 
regard to the divisions they belonged 
to. The main body was just advancing 
against the Athenians (12) and was 
soon in conflict with these. —8. ἀλλὰ 
τῇ μὲν ἀνδρείᾳ... ἀντέχοι : but in brav- 
ery they were not inferior (to the Athe- 
nians) 80 far as their experience (in war) 
extended. ἦσαν is understood from the 
preceding clause. τῇ ἀνδρείᾳ repeats 

and strengthens τόλμῃ. -- 9. τῷ δὲ ἐλλεί- 
ποντι airs . . . προυδίδοσαν : but in 
the lack of it their wish also against their 
will they abandoned (lit. left in the lurch). 
τῷ ἐλλείποντι = τῇ ἐλλείψει (see-on 1. 
86. 8, and Trans. Amer. Phil. Assoc. 
XXV, 75 ff.). τὴν βούλησιν ἄκοντες is ἃ 
kind of oxymoron. —10. ὅμως δέ: an- 
tithetical to ἀπροσδόκητοι μὲν . . . μαχού- 
μενοι (2), but after the parenthesis 
virtually repeating in (the concessive 
clauses) οὐκ ἂν οἰόμενοι. . . ἀμύνασθαι what 
was said above. See App. 

13. of λιθοβόλοι: throwing stones 
without slings, = libratores or li- 
britores (Tac.). — σφενδονῆται : cf. 
43. 14.— 14. τοξόται: cf. 48. 18, 67.14. 
— pods... ἀλλήλων ἐποίουν : made 
routs of one another, put each other to 
flight. Cf. Hdt. 1.80.25; Xen. Hell. 
7. 2. 20. τροπή with ποιεῖν is verbal 
noun of the intr. τρέπεσθαι, whereas in 
τροπὴν ποιεῖσθαι (2.19.9; 7.54. 4) it an- 
swers to trans. τρέτειν or τρέπεσθαι. --- 
οἷα εἰκὸς ψιλούς : Sc. ποιεῖν. Mss. C and 
G read οἵας by reverse assimilation to 



15 ψιλούς, ἀλλήλων Eroiovy: ἔπειτα δὲ μάντεις τε σφάγια πρού- 
φερον τὰ νομιζόμενα καὶ σαλπιγκταὶ ξύνοδον ἐπώτρυνον τοῖς 


eQ> >. » , \ , , 
οι ὃ €X wWpovup, Συρακόσιοι μεν πέρι TE πατρίδος 

A y 
μαχούμενοι καὶ τῆς ἰδίας ἕκαστος τὸ μὲν αὐτίκα σωτηρίας, 
τὸ δὲ μέλλον ἐλευθερίας, τῶν δὲ ἐναντίων ᾿Αθηναῖοι. μὲν περί 
20 TE τῆς ἀλλοτρίας οἰκείαν σχεῖν καὶ τὴν οἰκείαν μὴ βλάψαι 
ἡσσώμενοι, ᾿Αργεῖοι δὲ καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων οἱ αὐτόνομοι 
ξυγκτήσασθαί τε ἐκείνοις ἐφ᾽ ἃ ἦλθον καὶ τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν 
4 ’ 4 4 3 A ἃ 9 ε ’ὔ ἴω 
σφίσι πατρίδα νικήσαντες πάλιν ἐπιδεῖν - τὸ δ᾽ ὑπήκοον τῶν 
ξυμμάχων μέγιστον μὲν περὶ τῆς αὐτίκα ἀνελπίστου σωτηρίας, 

tpords.—15. σφάγια προύφερον: Schol. 
ἔμπροσθεν τῆς στρατιᾶς ἐσφαγιάζοντο. --- 
16. τὰ νομιζόμενα : the custom is men- 
tioned also 5. 10. § 2.— ξύνοδον ἐπώ- 
tpuvov τοῖς ὁπλίταις: roused the hoplites 
to conflict; poetic const., lit. stirred up 
conflict for the hoplites. Cf. Hom. x 152 
νῶιν ἐποτρύνει πόλεμον κακόν, stirs up evil 
war against us, and Tac. Hist. 2. 24 
irritare proelium. 

17. of δ᾽ ἐχώρουν: they set off, the 
following clauses as far as ἐπιδεῖν (23) 
being appos.— 18. τῆς ἰδίας : modifying 
both σωτηρίας and ἐλευθερίας. Cf. 2. 44. 
4; 5.105. 2.— τὸ μὲν αὐτίκα. . . τὸ 
δὲ μέλλον: for the moment . . . for the 
Suture; adv. as 7.38.8. Cf. 4.107. 2 καὶ 
τὸ αὐτίκα. ... καὶ τὸ ἔπειτα. ---- 19. ᾿Αθη- 
γαῖοι: sc. μαχούμενοι, Which is more 
nearly explained by the epexegetical 
infs. σχεῖν and μὴ βλάψαι, just as ξυγ- 
κτήσασθαι and ἐπιδεῖν below. — 21. καὶ 
τῶν ξυμμάχων of αὐτόνομοι : among the 
independent allies of the Athenians 
are to be understood here only such 
ξύμμαχοι as did not come under the 
ἀρχή arising from the Delian Alliance, 
i.e. besides the Argives, esp. the Cor- 
cyraeans, Cephallenians, and Zacyn- 

thians. As opp. to these ἀπὸ ξυμμαχίας 
αὐτόνομοι (7.57.12), all subjects of the 
ἀρχή of the Athenians are compre- 
hended under the term τὸ ὑπήκοον τῶν 
ξυμμάχων᾽ (28), even the Chians and 
Methymnaeans, who under the ἀρχή 
enjoyed a certain independence and 
esp. were not liable to tribute (cf. 85. 
7f.; 7.57.17). That Thuc. included 
the Chians and Methymnaeans among 
the ὑπήκοοι is clear not only from 7.57. 
§4f., but also from 22. 2, where Nicias 
otherwise would have had to take into ᾿ 
consideration besides the ὑπήκοοι ξύμμα- 
χοι not merely Peloponnesian allies of 
the Athenians. See Stahl, De Socio- 
rum Atheniensium IJudiciis, Index lect., 
Miinster, 1881, p. 3f.— 22. ξυγκτήσα- 
σθαι ἐκείνοις ἐφ᾽ ἃ ἦλθον : to help those 
(the Athenians) acquire what they had 
come for. For ἐφ᾽ ἃ ἦλθον, cf. 9.17; 
7.15. 1.— 23. τὸ ὑπήκοον : neuter col- 
lective ; see on 35. 6. These belong also 
to the ἐνανεῖο (19), but owing to the 
distance from the leading clause (οἱ 
δ᾽ ἐχώρουν) anew finite verb is expressed 
(τὸ πρόθυμον εἶχον). -- 24. μέγιστον μέν: 
above all. See on 1. 142. 1.— ἀνελπί- 

orov: closely connected with ἣν μὴ 



aA AQ A AQ , 4 4 A 3 4 
25 ἣν μὴ κρατῶσι, TO πρόθυμον εἶχον, ἔπειτα δὲ ἐν παρέργῳ 
καὶ εἴ τι ἄλλο ξυγκαταστρεψάμενοι ῥᾷον αὐτοῖς ὑπακούσον- 
70 ται. γενομένης δ᾽ ἐν χερσὶ τῆς μάχης ἐπὶ πολὺ ἀντεῖχον 1 
9 2 Α , ,- ν᾽ N , \ 
ἀλλήλοις, καὶ ξυνέβη βροντάς τε apa τινὰς γενέσθαι καὶ 
ἀστραπὰς καὶ ὕδωρ πολύ, ὥστε τοῖς μὲν πρῶτον μαχομένοις 

\ 9 a , e ’ A wn ’ 
καὶ ἐλάχιστα πολέμῳ ὠμιληκόσι καὶ τοῦτο ξυνεπιλαβέσθαι 
τοῦ φόβου, τοῖς δ᾽ ἐμπειροτέροις τὰ μὲν γιγνόμενα καὶ wpa. 
» id ἴω. Ἁ A 9 “~ Ἁ ’ 
ἔτους περαίνεσθαι δοκεῖν, τοὺς δὲ ἀνθεστῶτας πολὺ μείζω 


» Ἃ ld a 3 ld A ων 9 
ἔκπληξιν μὴ νικωμένους παρέχειν. ὠσαμένων δὲ τῶν ᾽Αρ- 3 

γείων πρῶτον τὸ εὐώνυμον κέρας τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ μετ᾽ αὖ- 
δ A 3 ᾽ δ ‘ A 5». 2 , ¥ 

τοὺς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων τὸ κατὰ σφᾶς αὐτούς, παρερρήγνντο ἤδη 

ΑΝ» , A ram \ 3 \ , 

καὶ τὸ ἄλλο στράτευμα τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ ἐς φυγὴν κατέ 
5" Ἃ \ 9 3Q 7 e 3 A e ‘ ε “ 

στη. καὶ ἐπὶ πολὺ μὲν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι (οἱ γὰρ ἱππῆς 8 

κρατῶσι: above all they were zealous for 
the safety of their lives, for which there 
was no hope unless they should conquer. 
— 25. ἐν παρέργῳ : secondarily, by the 
way. Cf. ἐκ παρέργου 1. 142. 25; 7. 27. 
20.— 26. καὶ εἴ τι... ὑπακούσονται: 
after τὸ πρόθυμον εἶχον expressing the 
hope, whether after having helped (the 
Athenians) in some other conquest they 
Shall receive milder treatment from them. 
elasin2.12.3. Cf. Xen. Anab. 6. 4. 22 
ἐδεήθη προθυμεῖσθαι, εἴ τι xré. See App. 

70. After long and brave resistance 
the Syracusan army was routed, first 
by the Argives, then also by the Athe- 
nians; but the superior cavalry of the 
Syracusans prevented pursuit. —1. ye- 
νομένης ἐν χερσὶ τῆς μάχης: the battle 
had been begun by the λιθοβόλοι καὶ 
σφενδονῆται καὶ τοξόται 69.13. γίγνεσθαι 
ἐν χερσί is used of the combat (4. 48. 8, 
14) as well as of the combatants (3. 
108.1; 5.72.10; 7.5. 6).—2. ἅμα: at 
the same time (with the combat). Cf. 
7. 79. 9.— γενέσθαι: freq. used of natu- 

ral phenomena. See on 1. 54, 23.— 
3. ὕδωρ: cf. 2.5.5, 77.18; 7. 79.9.— 
4. πολέμῳ ὡμιληκόσι: see on 55. 17. 
— καὶ τοῦτο ξυνεπιλαβέσθαι τοῦ φόβον: 
this too (the storm) contributed to (in- . 
creased) their fear. Cf. 8. 26.5, and 
see on 1. 115. 9.— 5. καὶ ὥρᾳ ἔτους: 
even to the season of the year. The sense 
of the passage is: ‘‘ while to the more 
experienced the weather phenomena 
seemed to be due really to the season 
of the year”? (i.e. the χειμών 63.1). Cf. 
7. 79. §3.— 6. τοὺς δὲ ἀνθεστῶτας ... 
παρέχειν : the emphasis is on μὴ νικω- 
μένους : the fact that their antagonists 
were not conquered (i.e. after so long 
a conflict) caused far more consterna- 
tion. For the ptc. in pred. position 
with force of verbal subst., see App. 
on 4. 68. 2. 

7. ὠσαμένων: pushed back, routed. 
See on 4, 85. 11.—9. τὸ κατὰ σφᾶς 
αὐτούς: i.e. the center (67.3). — wapep- 
ρήγνντο: i.e. the line was broken; cf. 
4, 96.25; 5. 78. 8. 





A ld , ¥ \ 3 7 9 \ 9 
τῶν Συρακοσίων πολλοὶ ovTEs Kal ἀήσσητοι εἶργον καὶ ἐσβα- 
λόντες ἐς τοὺς ὁπλίτας αὐτῶν, εἴ τινας προδιώκοντας ἴδοιεν, 
ἀνέστελλον), ἐπακολουθήσαντες δὲ ἀθρόοι ὅσον ἀσφαλῶς 
εἶχε πάλιν ἐπανεχώρουν καὶ τροπαῖον ἵστασαν. οἱ δὲ Συρα- 
4 ¢ ld 3 Ἁ 3 ’ eQqn A ε 3 ~ 
κόσιοι ἀθροισθέντες ἐς τὴν “EXwpivyny ὁδὸν καὶ ws ἐκ τῶν 
ld 2? 4 \ 3 Ὁ ν ἰφ 3 
παρόντων ξυνταξάμενοι ἔς τε τὸ ᾿Ολυμπιεῖον ὅμως σφῶν αὐ- 
A ’ ’ , ᾿ e 3 A . A 
τῶν παρέπεμψαν φυλακήν, δείσαντες μὴ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τῶν 
χρημάτων ἃ ἣν αὐτόθι κινήσωσι, καὶ οἵ λοιποὶ ἐπανεχώρη- 
3 Ἁ 4 e \ 3 A ‘\ A ε N 9 4 
σαν ἐς τὴν πόλιν. οἱ δὲ ᾿Αθηναῖοι πρὸς μὲν τὸ ἱερὸν οὐκ ἦλ- 
- a \ δ ε a ‘ ΝΟ ΣΝ \ 
Gov, ξυγκομίσαντες δὲ τοὺς ἑαυτῶν νεκροὺς καὶ ἐπὶ πυρὰν 
ἐπιθέντες ηὐλίσαντο αὐτοῦ. τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ τοῖς μὲν Yupa- 
’ 3 ε ’ \ 4 > 4 δ 
κοσίοις ἀπέδοσαν ὑποσπόνδους τοὺς νεκρούς (ἀπέθανον δὲ 
αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων περὶ ἑξήκοντα καὶ διακοσίους), 
“A Q , N 9 A a, > 4 Ν 9. A 
τῶν δὲ σφετέρων τὰ ὀστᾶ ξυνέλεξαν (ἀπέθανον δὲ αὐτῶν 
καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων ὡς πεντήκοντα), καὶ τὰ τῶν πολεμίων 
σκῦλα ἔχοντες ἀπέπλευσαν ἐς Κατάνην. χειμών.τε γὰρ ἦν 
VA , 393 » A » 25 ’ ὃ ‘ 5 
καὶ τὸν πόλεμον αὐτόθεν ποιεῖσθαι οὕπω ἐδόκει δυνατὸν εἶναι, 

12. ἐσβαλόντες: cf. 101.25; 2. 100. 
22.— 13. προδιώκοντας : pushing for- 
ward in pursuit. Prob. elsewhere only 
in Xen. Anab. 3.3.10.— 14. ἀνέστελ- 
λον: they drove them back. Cf. 3. 98. 
8. --- 15. ἴστασαν : proceeded to set up. 
See on 5. 74. 6. 

16. ὡς ἐκ τῶν παρόντων : as well as 
possible under present circumstances ; 
also 4.17.4. Cf. ws ὧδ᾽ ἐχόντων Soph. 
Ant. 1179.—17. τὸ ᾿Ολυμπιεῖον : cf. 
64.11, 65. 15. — ὅμως : nevertheless, i.e. 
although beaten. — σφῶν αὐτῶν παρέ- 
πεμψαν : sent from themselves (part. 
gen.), i.e. from the main body that was 
retiring to the city. —18. τῶν χρημά- 
τῶν: part. gen., as 1. 148.2.— 19. καὶ 
οἱ λοιποὶ ἐπανεχώρησαν: correlated 

with ἔς τε τὸ ᾿Ολυμπιεῖον . . . παρέπεμψαν, 
although in the course of the narrative 
the subject has been restricted. 

71. The Athenians, after burning 
their own dead and giving up under 
truce those of the enemy, decide not 
to prosecute the attack, on account 
of the advanced season and other un- 
favorable circumstances. — 1. τὸ ἱερόν: 
τὸ Odupmcetov. — 2. ἐπὶ πυρὰν ἐπιθέντες: 
cf. 2.52.16.—3. αὐτοῦ : i.e. on the bat- 
tlefield. — 6. rd ὀστᾶ ξννέλεξαν : with a 
view to taking them home to Athens. 
Cf. 2.34.18 αἰεὶ ἐν αὐτῷ (τῷ δημοσίῳ 
σήματι) θάπτουσι τοὺς ἐκ τῶν πολέμων. 

8. χειμών: οὗ. 68. 1.---θ. αὐτόθεν : i.e. 
from where they had bivouacked. But 
below (11 and 12) αὐτόθεν = ἐκ τῆς 




: aA e ’ ’ 3 ~ > ~ Ἁ 3 ~ 
10 πρὶν ἄν ἱππέας τε μεταπέμψωσιν ἐκ τῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν καὶ ἐκ τῶν 
4 9 Ἁ 4 
αὐτόθεν ξυμμάχων ἀγείρωσιν, ὅπως μὴ παντάπασιν ἵππο- 

A Ν , νν 5. » i Ν 
κρατῶνται, καὶ χρήματα δὲ ἅμα αὐτόθεν τε ξυλλέξωνται καὶ 
9.» me ¥ A , , “ 
παρ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων ἔλθῃ, τῶν τε πόλεών τινας προσαγάγωνται, 
ἃ » δ Ἁ ’ “A A € 4 
as nAm lov pera THY μάχην μᾶλλον σφῶν ὑπακούσεσθαι, 
15 τά TE ἄλλα Kal σῖτον καὶ ὅσων δέοι παρασκενάσωνται, ws 

ἐς τὸ ἔαρ ἐπιχειρήσοντες ταῖς Συρακούσαις. 
Καὶ οἱ μὲ ITN τῇ γνώμῃ ἀπέπλ ἐς τὴν Νάξον καὶ 
ἱ μὲν ταύτῃ τῇ γνώμῃ ἀπέπλευσαν ἐς τὴν ον κα 
, ’ ’ Ν “ , 
Κατάνην διαχειμάσοντες: Συρακόσιοι δὲ τοὺς σφετέρους 
>. A Ἁ Ud > , 3 “ Ν 
αὐτῶν νεκροὺς θάψαντες ἐκκλησίαν ἐποίουν. καὶ παρελθὼν 
9 Ae , ey > A \ 3 = , 
αὐτοῖς Ἑρμοκράτης ὁ Ἕρμωνος, ἀνὴρ καὶ és τἄλλα ξύνεσιν 

Σικελίας. ---- 10. ἱππέας re: correlated 
with καὶ χρήματα δέ (12), the strength- 
ening of the second clause (with δέ) be- 
ing due to its remoteness. With τε in 
13 and 15 third and fourth members are 
added: (1) cavalry, (2) money, (8) al- 
lies, (4) provisions and other neces- 
saries.—peramépyworv: Thuc. uses act. 
and mid. apparently without distinc- 
tion; see on 1. 112. 6.—11. ἱπποκρα- 
τῶνται: be inferior in cavalry; elsewhere 
only in later writers. Cf. ναυκρατεῖν, to 
be superior in ships, 7.60. 7.— 12. χρή- 
para... ξνλλέξωνται καὶ... ἔλθῃ: ἃ 
rare example of the noun functioning as 
obj., then as subj. in the same clause. 
For freq. like const. of rel. pron., see 
on 4. 17. 2.— 14. ds ἤλπιζον... ὑπα- 
κούσεσθαι : cf. 49.§6.—15. ra ἄλλα: 
general obj. of παρασκενάσωνται ex- 
plained by καὶ σῖτον καὶ ὅσων δέοι, both 
food and whatever was needed. Cf. 88. 
33. — ὡς és τὸ ἔαρ : the Mss. have wore, 
but Valla translates tanquam sub 
vernumtempus. ésof the terminus 
in view. See on ‘16. 80. 

72. Wermocrates urges the Syracu- 
sans to improve their military organi- 

zation and equipment in accordance 

with their experience, and to commit 
the conduct of the war to a few men, 
assuring them full confidence and ready 
obedience. —1. ταύτῃ τῇ γνώμῃ : in ac- 
cordance with this determination (refer- 
ring to the reasons for sailing back 

to Catana 71.8). Cf. 1.45.1; 2.20.1; 

4, 32. 28. --- ἀπέπλευσαν ἐς τὴν Νάξον 
καὶ Κατάνην: both for temporal and 
geographical reasons Catana should 
have come first, but Naxos precedes 
because there first the fleet, after the 
attempt upon Messene, passed the 
greater part of the winter (74. § 2), and 
from there further undertakings pro- 
ceeded (88. ὃ 8). The sentence is a sort 
of caption for the whole following epi- 
sode (Boehme-Widmann). See App.— 
8. ἐκκλησίαν ἐποίουν : called an assem- 
bly. See on 1.67. 11. 

παρελθὼν αὐτοῖς : see on 15. 19.— 
4. ‘Eppoxpdérys: introduced already 
(4. 58ff.; 6. 82 ff.) as conspicuous states- 
man and orator; here, where he begins 
to influence decisively the course of the 
Sicilian war, properly honored with a 
characterization esp. emphasizing his 




ὃ N λ ’ N N . aN 3 ,’ ε \ 
5 OVOEVOS ELTTOPLEVOS καὶ Κατα TOV ΠΟ έεμον ἐμπειριᾳ TE ικανος 

’ V9 ὃ , 3 2 9.4 , \ 3 ν» A 
YEVOLEVOS KQL AV pera ἐπιφανής, € αβσυνε TE Καὶ Οὐκ ELA Τῳ 

γεγενημένῳ ἐνδιδόναι τὴν μὲν γὰρ γνώμην αὐτῶν οὐχ ἡσσῆ- 
σθαι, τὴν δὲ ἀταξίαν βλάψαι. οὐ μέντοι τοσοῦτόν γε λειφθῆ- 

4 > A 4 » ἃ “" , A έ 2 
᾿ POL OU OV εἰκὸς εἶναι, ἄλλως τε καὶ τοῖς πρώτοις τῶν Ἑλλήνων 


ἐμπειρίᾳ ἰδιώτας, ws εἰπεῖν, χειροτέχναις ἀνταγωνισαμένους. 
μέγα δὲ βλάψαι καὶ τὸ πλῆθος τῶν στρατηγῶν καὶ τὴν πο- 4 

, εχ N (ὃ ε Ἁ 9 aA wn 
λυαρχίαν (ἦσαν yap πεντεκαίδεκα οἱ στρατηγοὶ αὐτοῖς) τῶν 

already proved military capacity. — 
καὶ és τάλλα: cf. 15. 5.— ξύνεσιν : see 
ΒΚ. 1‘. Einl. p. xlviii. The determining 
acc. with λείπεσθαί τινος is less freq. 
than the dat.— 5. κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον 
... ἐπιφανής : referring prob. not so 
much to the present war between Sy- 
racuse and Athens, but, as in 91. 24 
and 2. 100. 7, in a wider sense to wars 
of the Syracusans before the second 
appearance of the Athenians in Sicily. 
- 6. οὐκ εἴα: protested. See on 1. 28. 
9.— 7. ἐνδιδόναι : give in, with dat. also 
8.37.6 (οἴκτῳ), 8. 86. 88, 89. 4 (τοῖς 

γνώμην : spirit, courage. See ΒΚ. 14. 
Einl. p. xlvii.—ovx ἧἡσσῆσθαι : cf. 8. 
66.18 ἡσσῶντο ταῖς γνώμαις. ---- 9. ὅσον 
εἰκὸς εἶναι: inf. in rel. sent. in indir. 
disc. See on 24.138; 1.91.24. GMT. 
755; Kiihn. 594, 5; Kr. Spr. 55, 4, 9; 53, 
2,9. St.’s bracketing of εἶναι cannot be 
right, as it would hardly have occurred 
to any one to add the verb if only ὅσον 
εἰκός had been written. — ἄλλως τε kal: 
although wanting in all the better Mss. 
καί is indispensable with the ptc. ἀντα- 
γωνισαμένους. ----10. ἰδιώτας, ὡς εἰπεῖν, 
χειροτέχναις : almost as tyros aguinst 
skilled handicraftsmen. For ἰδιώτης as 
antithesis to one who has become ex- 
pert by skill and practice, cf. 2. 48. 

11 ἰατρὸς καὶ ἰδιώτης. That the Syracu- 
sans were lacking in military experi- 
ence has been indicated already by 
Thuc. himself in 69.6 ff. ws εἰπεῖν, in 
qualification of a strong expression, 
often placed, as here, in the midst of 
the expression qualified. Cf. 3. 38. 29, 
89. 25, 82.8; 7. ὅ8. 22» 8.5.19. See 

11. μέγα βλάψαι: see on 64. 8. --- 
καὶ τὸ πλῆθος... Kal τὴν πολναρχίαν: 
also the multitude of generals and the 
distribution of command among many. 
With this interpretation there is no 
tautology in the text and hence no need, 
with Stahl, Hude, and others —fol- 
lowing Pluygers, Mnem. XI, 92 — to 
bracket τὸ πλῆθος τῶν στρατηγῶν καί. 
For πολυαρχία, οἷ. Xen. Anab. 6. 1. 18; 
Plut. Camill. 18; also Hom. Β 204 
οὐκ ἀγαθὴ πολυκοιρανίη .---- 12. τῶν τε πολ- 
λῶν τὴν ἀξύντακτον ἀναρχίαν: and the 
disorderly insubordination of the many. 
With studied paronomasia (cf. 76. § 2, 
4, 79. ὃ 2, 83) Hermocrates contrasts 
with the large number of nominal com- 
manders the-anarchy of the soldiers, 
i.e. the resultant insubordination of the 
mass accustomed to no order and disci- 
pline. For an example of this, cf. 69. 
§1. For the rare use of re to connect 
two single notions, see on 1.12. 15. 



“A “ 3 ’ 3 4 A δὲ BNL 

τε πολλῶν THY ἀξύντακτον ἀναρχίαν. ἣν ὃὲ ὀλίγοι TE στρα- 
τηγοὶ γένωνται ἔμπειροι καὶ ἐν τῷ χειμῶνι τούτῳ παρα- 
16 σκευάσωσι τὸ ὁπλιτικόν, οἷς τε ὅπλα μὴ ἔστιν ἐκπορίζοντες, 
ὅπως ὡς πλεῖστοι ἔσονται, καὶ τῇ ἄλλῃ μελέτῃ προσαναγκά- 
ζοντες, ἔφη κατὰ τὸ εἰκὸς κρατήσειν σφᾶς τῶν ἐναντίων, 
3 a δ ’ ε A 3 ’ δὲ 3 Ν » 
ἀνδρείας μὲν σφίσιν ὑπαρχούσης, εὐταξίας δὲ ἐς τὰ ἔργα 
προσγενομένης: ἐπιδώσειν γὰρ ἀμφότερα αὐτά, τὴν μὲν 

ἈΝ ὃ , ’ Ἁ δ᾽ 3 , oN e A 
20 μετὰ κινδύνων μελετωμένην, THY δ᾽ εὐψυχίαν αὐτὴν ἑαυτῆς 
μετὰ τοῦ πιστοῦ τῆς ἐπιστήμης θαρσαλεωτέραν ἔσεσθαι. 

τούς τε στρατηγοὺς καὶ ὀλίγους καὶ αὐτοκράτορας χρῆναι ἑλέ- 
A ¥ 
σθαι καὶ ὀμόσαι αὐτοῖς τὸ ὅρκιον 7 μὴν ἐάσειν ἄρχειν ὅπῃ ἂν 

— 14. παρασκευάσωσι τὸ ὁπλιτικόν: 
Schol. παιδεύσωσιν εἰς παρασκευήν, i.e. 
prepare the hoplite force for service. — 
16. τῇ ἄλλῃ μελέτῃ προσαναγκάζοντες : 
that to which it is to be compelled 
is to be inferred from the context 
elsewhere in Thuc. (88. 24, 91.17; 3. 
61.14; 4. 87.8; 5. 42.19; 7.18.31; 
8. 76. 32); here it is expressed with 
the dat., forcing them to exercise (drill) 
besides. For ἄλλῃ in this sense, cf. 1. 
2.12, 128.21; 2. 14. 8.---17. ἔφη: by 
its position emphasizing the certainty 
of success, the conditions of which have 
been stated. Kr. suspected the word 
on account of its emphatic position.— 
σφᾶς : as freq. referring to those repre- 
sented by the speaker. — 18. ἀνδρείας 
μὲν. . . προσγενομένης : the former is 
assumed as actual, the other is hypo- 
thetical: having courage, if discipline be 
added when it comes to action. For és τὰ 
ἔργα, cf. 2. 89. 6, 48. 10, and see on 1. 
105. 23.—19. ἀμφότερα αὐτά : for neut. 
after two fem. nouns, see on 3. 97. 19. 
Cl. understood αὐτά =sponte. But 
what follows is against this. ἀμφότερα 
αὐτά merely reiterates the foregoing 

ideas; cf. 5. 15. 1; Isoc. 6. 28. --- τὴν 
μέν : Sc. τὴν εὐταξίαν. ---- 20. μετὰ κιν- 
δύνων μελετωμένην: cf. 1. 18. 82 μετὰ 
κινδύνων τὰς μελέτας ποιούμενοι. ---- τὴν 
δ᾽ εὐψυχίαν : = ἀνδρείαν. The order is 
chiastic. For εὐψυχίαν, see ΒΚ. 1‘. Einl. 
p. xlix. — αὐτὴν ἑαυτῆς... θαρσαλεωτέ- 
ραν ἔσεσθαι : the comp. with gen. of the 
reflex. pron. measures progress in the 
subj. itself. See on 1.8.18; 7. 66. 14. 
Freq. in Hdt. H. 644; Kiihn. 541, 6. 
The sense of the passage is: δ ἰὴ pro- 
portion as (werd) confidence in their 
(nilitary) knowledge grows, their cour- 
age will be bolder than it was.’’ @ap- 
σαλεωτέραν ceo bac—where ἐσομένην Was 
to be expected — gives ἐπιδώσειν more 
definitely. Cf. Veget. 1.1 scientia 
rei bellicae dimicandi nutrit 
audaciam. Nemo facere metuit, 
quod se bene fecisse confidit. 
22. kal ὀλίγους καὶ αὐτοκράτορας: 
pred., not only few, but also with full 
powers. The first point has already 
been fully discussed in § 4, so that the 
second only is here emphasized. For 
the force of καί. .. καί, see on 16. 1.— 
23. τὸ ὅρκιον : sing., as freq. in Hdt. 




s 9 ν δ 9 a a A ry , 
ἐπίστωνται. οὕτω yap a τε κρύπτεσθαι δεῖ μᾶλλον av στέγε- 
iy 5 
25 σθαι καὶ τἄλλα κατὰ κόσμον καὶ ἀπροφασίστως παρασκευα- 
~ Ἁ e ‘4 3 a » 4 3 a ’᾽ 
73 σθῆναι. καὶ οἱ Συρακόσιοι αὐτοῦ ἀκούσαντες ἐψηφίσαντό τε 
πάντα ὡς ἐκέλευς καὶ στρατηγὸν αὐτόν τε εἵλοντο τὸν Ἕρμο- 
4 , ¢€ ζά Ν a “ N “ 
κράτην καὶ Ἡρακλείδην τὸν Λυσιμάχου καὶ Σικανὸν τὸν 
ϑ , , a \ 3 \ , V3 \ 
Εξηκέστου, τούτους τρεῖς, Kal ἐς τὴν Κόρινθον καὶ és τὴν 
, 4 > , 9 4 3 
5 Λακεδαίμονα πρέσβεις ἀπέστειλαν, ὅπως ξυμμαχία τε αὐ- 
A , NUN ν΄ 3 , , , 
τοῖς παραγένηται καὶ τὸν πρὸς ᾿Αθηναίους πόλεμον βεβαιό- 
τερον πείθωσι ποιεῖσθαι ἐκ τοῦ προφανοῦς ὑπὲρ σφῶν τοὺς 
, 9 A 9 . ~ , 9 4 9 
Λακεδαιμονίους, ἵνα ἢ ἀπὸ τῆς Σικελίας ἀπαγάγωσιν αὐὖ- 
N aA ἃ Ἃ 3 4 ’ εν 3 ’ 
τοὺς ἢ πρὸς τὸ ἐν Σικελίᾳ στράτευμα ἧσσον ὠφελίαν 

[0 ἄλλην ἐπιπέμπωσιν. 

4 Tod ἐν τῇ Κατάνῃ στράτευμα τῶν Ἀθηναίων ἔπλευσεν εὐθὺς 

—4 μήν: with indirect oath, as 4. 84. 
4,— 24. μᾶλλον ἂν στέγεσθαι : poetical 
form of expression. Cf. rl χρὴ στέγειν 
ἢ τί λέγειν; Soph. Phil. 186; κακόν re 
κεύθεις καὶ oréyes ὑπὸ σκότῳ Eur. Phoen. 
1214.—25. ἀπροφασίστως: without eva- 
sions. — παρασκενασθῆναι: ἄν of the 
first clause is understood here. Steup 
thinks not, the determining condition 
being sufficiently expressed by οὕτω. 
See App. on 2.3. 8. 

73. In consequence of this admoni- 
tion Hermocrates and two others are 
placed in command and ambassadors 
are sent to Corinth and Sparta to urge 
the pushing of the war. — 4. τούτους 
τρεῖς: emphasizing the limitation of the 
πεντεκαίδεκα Of 72.12. For absence of 
art., cf. ἑνὶ ἔργῳ τούτῳ 5.75.11; ἐπὶ 
μίαν πόλιν ταύτην 7. 56. 23.— 5. ξνμμα- 
xa: abstract for concrete, = ξύμμαχοι; 
cf. ὠφελία below (9).—6. τὸν πρὸς 
᾿Αθηναίους πόλεμον βεβαιότερον... ἐκ 
τοῦ προφανοῦς xré.: the two adverbs 

strengthen each other: ‘tto make the 
war more persistently and openly in 
their behalf.”’ Cf. 88. 44 τὸν αὐτοῦ πό- 
λεμον σαφέστερον ποιεῖσθαι πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθη- 
valovs and 91. 20 τὰ ἐνθάδε χρὴ dua 
φανερώτερον ἐκπολεμεῖν. ---- 7. ἐκ τοῦ προ- 
φανοῦς : ἃ5 8. 48.10. Cf. ἐκ τοῦ εὐθέος 1. 
84. 10; ἐκ τοῦ ἀφανοῦς 1. 5]. 8 : .ἐκ τοῦ 
φανεροῦ 4. 79. 10. --- ὑπὲρ σφῶν : in their 
behalf, carried out in the final clause 
Wa... ἐπιπέμπωσιν. ---- 8. ἀπαγάγωσιν : 
(sc. of Λακεδαιμόνιοι) draw off, as 1. 109. 
6; 3.36. 4; 5. 55.10. See on 64, 2. --- 
9. ὠφελίαν ἄλλην : other assistance, i.e. 
reénforcements. For this meaning, cf. 
88. 45, 98. 10, 108.13. — 10. ἐπιπέμπω- 
σιν: sc. οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι. The change of 
subj. is harsh. See on 1. 51. 16. 

74. The Athenians failing in their 
attempt to bring over Messene betake 
themselves to Naxos for winter quar- 
ters, and send to Athens for money 
and cavalry.—1. ἐν τῇ Κατάνῃ: cf. 
71.8, and see on 72. 1. — εὐθύς : i.e. 





9 ἃ l4 ε , VN ἁ QA 3 , 
ἐπὶ Μεσσήνην ὡς προδοθησομένην. καὶ ἃ μὲν ἐπράσσετο, 
9 3 2 9 ’ ' N yYy 5" 9 a 9 ~ 4 ΄»Ν yy 2 
οὐκ ἐγένετο: ᾿Αλκιβιάδης yap or ἀπήει ἐκ τῆς ἀρχῆς 757 
μετάπεμπτος, ἐπιστάμενος ὅτι φεύξοιτο, μηνύει τοῖς τῶν Lv 

, , A 3 A. , \ N , 
ρακοσίων φίλοις τοῖς ἐν τῇ Μεσσήνῃ ξυνειδὼς τὸ μέλλον. 

οἱ δὲ τούς τε ἄνδρας διέφθειραν πρότερον καὶ τότε στασιά- 

᾿ . 5 9 » 3 , Α , δ 
ζοντες Και ἐν ὄπλοις OVTES ἐπεκράτουν μη δέχεσθαι TOUS 

3 4 ε A 4 e ld \ , “ 

Αθηναίους of ταῦτα βουλόμενοι. ἡμέρας δὲ μείναντες περὶ 2 
A N , e 3 “A e 3 4 ‘N \ 3 9 

τρεῖς καὶ δέκα of ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ὡς ἐχειμάζοντο καὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια 

οὐκ εἶχον καὶ προυχώρει οὐδέν, ἀπελθόντες ἐς Νάξον καὶ 

immediately after the return to Catana. 
—2. ὡς προδοθησομένην : in the hope 
that it would be betrayed, i.e. that the ne- 
gotiations begun by Alcibiades (50. § 1), 
and probably continued secretly with 
the pro-Athenian faction, would naw 
be successful. —d@ μὲν ἐπράσσετο: the 
negotiations, Schol. τὰ τῆς προδοσίας. 
For πράσσειν of secret negotiations, cf. 
56. 7 and freq. For μέν the correl. is δέ 
in ]. 8. --- 8. οὐκ ἐγένετο : did not come to 
anything. Cf. 4.68.31; δ. 116. 8; and 
see on 8. 28. 26. ---ὀἤδη: Hude would 
transpose after émriordpevos, but it seems 
to be added to ὅτ᾽ ἀπήει ἐκ τῆς ἀρχῆς to 
emphasize the fact that the treachery 
of Alcibiades followed his recall when 
he had to give up his command. — 
4. ἐπιστάμενος ὅτι φεύξοιτο : knowing 
(i.e. having determined) that he would 
go into banishment. He had taken at 
once the resolution which he carried 
out at Thurii (61. § 6). The opt. of 
indir. disc., as 1. 88.4; 4. 108. 18.— 
μηνύει... τὸ μέλλον : cf. 4. 89. 10 μηνυ- 
θέντος τοῦ ἐπιβονλεύματος. --- θ. οἱ δέ: sc. 
οἱ τῶν Συρακοσίων φίλοι. --- τοὺς ἄνδρας : 
as may be understood from the context 
= τοὺς ὑπόπτους ws προδιδόντας Schol. — 
διέφθειραν : after the hist. pres. μηνύει 

not to be taken, with Cl., as plpf. (see 
on 46. 9), but as aor. narrandi.— 
πρότερον: i.e. immediately after the 
information given by Alcibiades; opp. 
to τότε, at that time, i.e. on the approach 
of the Athenian fleet. — στασιάζοντες 
Kal ἐν ὅπλοις ὄντες : since οἱ δέ (6) can 
refer only to the party friendly to the 
Syracusans, as likewise ἐπεκράτουν μὴ 
δέχεσθαι τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, and finally the 
particles re. . . καί seem clearly to in- 
dicate that two things are to be said of 
οἱ δέ, these participles cannot refer, as 
Cl. and St. think, to all the Messenians. 
For στασιάζειν of a party in insurrec- 
tion (not of a whole in dissension), cf. 
17.12; 1.126. 41; and στάσις 4. 71. 2; 
7.50. 4.—7. ἐν ὅπλοις : see on 56. 9. 
— ἐπεκράτουν : carried the point, with 
inf. expressing the result, as 5. 46. 265. 
—8. of ταῦτα βουλόμενοι: in epexe- 
getical apposition to οἱ δέ. Steup fol- 
lows v. H. in bracketing the words as 
a marginal explanation. 

ἡμέρας περὶ τρεῖς kal δέκα : περί in a 
numerical statement placed after the 
noun, as 1. 54.138, 117.6. Cf. 1. 100. 
6.— μείναντες : i.e. before Messene. — 
9. ἐχειμάζοντο : were storm-beaten, as 2. 
25. 19; 3. 69.4, and freq.—11. ὅρια 



ὅρια καὶ σταυρώματα περὶ TO στρατόπεδον ποιησάμενοι, 

ΕῚ [δὶ ’ ἃ - 3 ’ 3 “ > , 
αὐτοῦ διεχείμαζον: καὶ τριήρη ἀπέστειλαν ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας 

Ἁ ν ~ 

ἐπί TE χρήματα Kal ἱππέας, ὅπως ἅμα τῷ ἦρι παραγένωνται. 
3 \ Ν mae A ων A 
[ὃ ᾿Ἐχείχιζον δὲ καὶ οἱ Συρακόσϊοι ἐν τῷ χειμῶνι πρός TE TH 
πόλει, τὸν Τεμενίτην ἐντὸς ποιησάμενοι, τεῖχος παρὰ πᾶν τὸ 
A Q ΕῚ Ά e “A 9 Ἁ >’ 5 ’ 49 v4 
πρὸς Tas ᾿Επιπολὰς ὁρῶν, ὅπως μὴ du ἐλάσσονος εὐαποτεί- 

= - OK ν , Ν Ν , , 
χιστοι wow, ἣν apa σφάλλωνται, καὶ TA Μέγαρα φρούριον 
Q 9 A» vd ¥ XN Ἁ ’ : 4 
καὶ ἐν τῷ Odvpmetw ἄλλο: καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν προεσταύ- 

~ a 3 ’ S N δ. 9 ’ 
ρωσαν πανταχῇ ἡἣ ἀποβάσεις ἦσαν. καὶ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους 
3 4 > “A 4 4, 3 ’ : N 9. AN 
εἰδότες ἐν τῇ Νάξῳ χειμάζοντας ἐστράτευσαν πανδημεὶ ἐπὶ 


καὶ σταυρώματα περὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον 
ποιησάμενοι: having constructed dock- 
yards and stockades round the camp. 
σταυρώματα in pl., as 7,538.2. See App. 

75. The Syracusans utilize the lei- 
sure to build fortifications for the de- 
fense of the city. They make also an 
expedition against Catana and destroy 
the abandoned Athenian camp. On 
information that the Athenians had 
sent ambassadors to Camarina to win 
over that city, they too send thither 
Hermocrates and others for the same 
purpose. — 1. ἐτείχιζον : has double ob- 
ject πρός re τῇ πόλει... τεῖχος... ὁρῶν 
and (4) καὶ τὰ Μέγαρα φρούριον καὶ... 
ἄλλο. --- 2. τὸν Τεμενίτην : the temple 
of Apollo Temenites and the suburb 
which had grown up about it, the later 

" Neapolis.—évrds ποιησάμενοι : i.e. they 

brought the hitherto open suburb into 
the compass of the new wall. If it be 
true, as is highly probable, that the 
outer city (Achradina) was walled 
about, the new wall bent round the 
earlier one on the eastern declivity of 
Epipolae (παρὰ πᾶν τὸ πρὸς τὰς Επιπολὰς 
ὁρῶν), and led from there down toward 
the Great Harbor. For its probable 

course, see the map Siege of Syracuse. 
Cf. Holm, Gesch. Siziliens II, 384 f.; 
Lupus, Die Stadt Syrakus, p. 120 ff.; 
Freeman, Hist. of Sicily III, 656 ff.; 
W.E. Heitland, Jour. of Philol. XXIII, 
46 ff.; E. Lange, Philologus LVI, 677. 
— τὸ πρὸς τὰς ᾿Εἰπιπολὰς ὁρῶν : cf. 97. 
25, 101.2; 2.55.4, 98. 22; 7. 87. 6. -- 
8. ὅπως μὴ δι᾽ ἐλάσσονος εὐαποτείχιστοι 
ὦσιν : ἃ circumvallation on the part of 
the enemy (ἀποτείχισις) should in con- 
sequence of the greater circuit of their 
own wall not be practicable within a 
slighter distance from the city proper, 

. and so in smaller compass. — 4. τὰ Mé- 

yapa φρούριον : sc. ἐτείχιζον ; for const., 
cf. 2.32.1 ἐτειχίσθη Araddvrn... φρού- 
ριον. They fortified Megara (a ἣν ἐρῆμα 
49. 18) for a defense toward the north 
(see on 94. 6), as the Olympieum toward 
the south.—5. τὴν θάλασσαν προεσταύ- 
ρωσαν: they protected the shore by 
means of pales driven in along it. See 
on 4.9.4. Only the Great Harbor is 
meant, as 97. § 1 shows, and indeed the 
pales were driven down πρὸ τῶν παλαιῶν 
νεωσοίκων (7. 25. 20).—6. ἡ ἀποβάσεις 
ἧσαν : where landings were possible. See 
on 4. 18. 5. 






Ἁ ’ ‘ ~ ”~ 9 A » Ἁ Ν “ὉὋ ϑ 
τὴν Κατάνην, καὶ τῆς τε γῆς αὐτῶν ἔτεμον καὶ τὰς τῶν ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων σκηνὰς καὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον ἐμπρήσαντες ἀνεχώρησαν 

>> ȴ 

> . , 
Καὶ πυνθανόμενοι τοὺς ᾿Αθὴναίους ἐς τὴν Καμάριναν κατὰ 8 
τὴν ἐπὶ Λάχητος γενομένην ξυμμαχίαν mpeo Bever Oar, εἴ πως 

προσαγάγοιντο αὐτούς, ἀντεπρεσβεύοντο Kal αὐτοί: ἦσαν yap 
9 “A A 3 Ν 
ὕποπτοι αὐτοῖς οἱ Καμαριναῖοι μὴ προθύμως σφίσι μήτ᾽ ἐπὶ 
Ἁ , 4 , a » 4 “ . Ἁ 
τὴν πρώτην μάχην πέμψαι a ἔπεμψαν, ἔς τε τὸ λοιπὸν μὴ 
> , ’ 3 ’ ε ἊὉ ‘\ > , > A. 
οὐκέτι βούλωνται ἀμύνειν, ὁρῶντες τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἐν τῇ 

μάχῃ εὖ πράξαντας, προσχωρῶσι δ᾽ αὐτοῖς κατὰ τὴν προτέ- 
ραν φιλίαν πεισθέντες. ἀφικομένων οὖν ἐκ μὲν Συρακουσῶν 4 

Ἑρμοκράτους καὶ ἄλλων ἐς τὴν Καμάριναν, ἀπὸ δὲ τῶν 
᾿Αθηναίων Ἐὐφήμον μεθ᾽ ἑτέρων, ὁ “Ἑρμοκράτης ξυλλόγου 
γενομένου τῶν Καμαριναίων βουλόμενος προδιαβάλλειν τοὺς 

᾿Αθηναίους ἔλεγε τοιάδε. 

8. τῆς γῆς. .. ἔτεμον: part. gen. 
αὐτῶν -- τῶν Καταναίων .--- τὰς τῶν ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων σκηνὰς καὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον : cf. 
δ1. ὃ 8, 64. ὃ 8, 88. ὃ 5. 

11. ἐς τὴν Καμάριναν : cf. 52. ὃ 1.— 
12. τὴν ἐπὶ Λάχητος γενομένην ξυμμα- 
χίαν: cf. 3. 86. ὃ 2. See on 52. 6. -- εἴ 
πως : With opt., as 4. 11. 12 and freq. — 
13. ἀντεπρεσβεύοντο : elsewhere only 
in later writers. — καὶ αὐτοί : added to 
give additional force; see on 1. 50. 18. 
—14. ὕποπτοι : followed (1) by μή with 
inf., (2) by μή with subjv.— 15. a ἔπεμ- 
av: about 20 horsemen and 50 bow- 
men (67. ὃ 2).— μὴ οὐκέτι βούλωνται: 
the reference to the future in és τὸ λοιπόν 
induces (as opposed to μὴ πέμψαι of the 
past) the subjvs. dependent on ὕποπτοι 
in the sense of aroused anxiety; but 
the two clauses are closely correlated 
by μήτε... τε.---17. κατὰ τὴν προτέραν 

φιλίαν : belongs to πεισθέντες, not to 
προσχωρῶσι; with the latter it would be 

21. προδιαβάλλειν : i.e. to forestall 
the influence of the Athenians by a 
contrary representation; cf. 76.2 def- 

σαντες... τοὺς μέλλοντας ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν λό- 

- yous. For διαβάλλειν means here not so 

much to ‘slander,’ as to ‘ put in an un- 
favorable light,’ as also 88. 12. 

Speech of Hermocrates of Syracuse at 
Camarina (76-80) 

76. We are come because we feared 
you might give heed to what the am- 
bassadors will say. Not the restoration 
of Leontini, but the subjugation of the 
whole island is the object of the Athe- 
nians. They intend to proceed here 
just as at home, where the Hellenic 
cities, which accepted their leadership 


A »ὉὍἭ “ 
76 “Οὐ τὴν παροῦσαν δύναμιν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, ὦ Καμαριναῖοι, 1 
Ἁ 2 _N λ A ὃ , 3 , A ix ‘ 
μὴ αὐτὴν καταπλαγῆὴτε δείσαντες ἐπρεσβευσάμεθα, ἀλλὰ 
a ‘\ , 9.9 3s A , , ΠΝ e@ κα 
μᾶλλον τοὺς μέλλοντας ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν λόγους, πρίν τι καὶ ἡμῶν 
A A 9 
ἀκοῦσαι, μὴ ὑμᾶς πείσωσιν. NKovoL yap ἐς THY Σικελίαν 2 
’ \ Φ θ 4 θ ὃ ‘4 de a , e A 
5 προφάσει μὲν ἡ πυνθάνεσθε, διανοίᾳ δὲ ἣν πάντες ὑπονοοῦ- 
μεν" καί μοι δοκοῦσιν οὐ Λεοντίνους βούλεσθαι κατοικίσαι, 
3 > ὲ A A 3 , 3 Ν or, Ψ Ν Ν 2 A 
ἀλλ᾽ ἡμᾶς μᾶλλον ἐξοικίσαι. ov yap δὴ εὔλογον τὰς μὲν ἐκεῖ 
’ 9 ’ ~ δ δὲ 3 (ὃ ’ὔ ‘ 
πόλεις ἀναστάτους ποιεῖν, τὰς δὲ ἐνθάδε κατοικίζειν, καὶ 
Λεοντίνων μὲν Χαλκιδέων ὄντων κατὰ τὸ ξυγγενὲς κήδεσθαι, 
10 Χαλκιδέας δὲ τοὺς ἐν Εὐβοίᾳ, ὧν οἵδε ἀποικοί εἰσι, δουλωσα- 
, ¥- n δὲ TY ἰδέα ἐκεῖνά » ὶ τὰ ἐνθάδε 3 
μένους ἔχειν. τῇ δὲ αὐτῇ ἰδέᾳ ἐκεῖνά τε ἔσχον καὶ τὰ ἐνθάδε 

in the alliance concluded on the pretext 
of taking revenge on the Medes, have 
one after another been enslaved on 
trumped-up charges.—1. οὐ τὴν πα- 
ροῦσαν δύναμιν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων... 
ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον τοὺς... λόγους (8) : Objs. 
οὗ δείσαντες so construed that the for- 
mer recurs a8 Obj. (αὐτήν) of μὴ κατα- 
πλαγῆτε, While from the latter (τοὺς 
λόγους) a subj. is supplied for μὴ ὑμᾶς 
relswot. Thuc. freq. uses such prolep- 
tic consts. to make vivid important 
ideas. Cf. 77. 1, 88.5.—2. μὴ αὐτὴν 
καταπλαγῆτε: for accus., cf. ἡμᾶς... 
ἐκπεπληγμένοι elev 11.12. — 3. τοὺς μέλ- 
λοντας ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν λόγους : sc. λέγεσθαι, 
_ the words that are going to be said on 
their part. See on 28.1, 32.16; 3. 36. 
24. With τοὺς μέλλοντας λόγους, cf. τὰ 
μέλλοντα ἔργα 8. 38.17; τὸν μέλλοντα 
πόλεμον 1. 86. 8; 8.43.11; ὁ ἀγὼν ὁ μέλ- 
λων 7. 61. 2. --- πρίν τι καὶ ἡμῶν ἀκοῦ- 
σαι: put for emphasis before the μή 
clause. See on 80. 17. 
4. ἥκουσι γὰρ xré.: stating what is 
pointed to in πρίν τι καὶ ἡμῶν ἀκοῦσαι. 

For γάρ, see on 33. 7.—5. προφάσει 
μὲν... διανοίᾳ δέ: cf. Hdt. 2.100. 11 
τῷ λόγῳ, νόῳ δέ. The dat. προφάσει, as 
ὅ. 53.2; elsewhere accus., 33.8; 3.111. 
2; 5.80.17.—f πυνθάνεσθε : sc. ἥκειν. 
In the second clause the rel. is con- 
strued as dir. obj. with ὑπονοοῦμεν, as 
7. 78.1 ὑπονοήσας αὐτῶν τὴν διάνοιαν. 
On the matter, see 88. ὃ 2.— 6. Δεοντί- 
vous κατοικίσαι: cf. 33.9, 50.17, 68.14, 
77.6.—Karouloar.. . ἐξοικίσαι: parono- 
masia, freq. in Thuc., esp. in speeches. 
See on 72.12; 1. 88. 26.— 7. ob γὰρ 
δή: cf. 69. 6.— τὰς ἐκεῖ πόλεις : as Ae- 
gina, Scione, Melos. —8. ἀναστάτους 
ποιεῖν: as 8. 24. 15.—9. Λεοντίνων Xad- 
κιδέων: cf. 8. ὃ 8. --- κατὰ τὸ Evyyevés: 
cf. 6. 4, 71. θ.--- κήδεσθαι: always of 
especially thoughtful care or syim- 
pathy, here ironical. See on 14. 2.— 
10. SovAworapévous ἔχειν : see on 39. 10; 
1. 88. 15. 

11. τῇ αὐτῇ ἰδέᾳ: in the same way, 
as 3.62.4; 7.81.30. Cf. τοῦτο τὸ εἶδος 
77.13. For Thuc.’s use of the word, 
see on 1. 109. 2.— ἐκεῖνα : i.e. the Hel- 



νῦν πειρῶνται: ἡγεμόνες yap γενόμενοι ἑκόντων τῶν τε Ἰώ- 

λνσῪ > NS A 4 , ε 9 ἡ A , 
νων καὶ ὅσοι ἀπὸ σφῶν ἦσαν ξύμμαχοι ws ἐπὶ τοῦ My- 

ὃ Ἐς δ \ , \ . 3.9 9 , 
ov τιμωρίᾳ, τοὺς μὲν λιποστρατίαν, τοὺς δὲ ἐπ᾽ ἀλλήλους 

lenic cities in the east brought under 
their rule. —12. πειρῶνται : sc. σχεῖν. 
--- ἑκόντων : for the matter, cf. 1. 75. 

§ 2, 95.§ 1, 96.§ 1. — τῶν re ᾿Ιώνων καὶ. 

ὅσοι... τιμωρίᾳ: both of the Ionians 
(of Asia Minor) and all who, descended 
From them, were members of the alliance 
concluded for revenge upon the Mede. 
The original members of the Delian 
Confederation that were not tribally 
related to the Athenians, as the Les- 
bians, are disregarded here, because the 
orator would draw a parallel between 
the present conduct of the Athenians 
in Sicily and their attainment to power 
in the east, and has before spoken of 
the Athenian pretext of interference 
on behalf of their kinsmen, the Leon- 
tines. For both these reasons, mention 
of allies not tribally related to the 
Athenians, which Kr. misses here, 
would be out of place, and would be- 
sides be in open contradiction of 82. 
§3, where the Athenian speaker, with 
manifest reference to the present pas- 
sage, Says: és τὸ ἀκριβὲς εἰπεῖν οὐδὲ ἀδίκως 
καταστρεψάμενοι τούς τεὔΊωνας καὶ νησιώ- 
τας, οὗς ξυγγενεῖς φασιν ὄντας ἡμᾶς Συρα- 
κόσιοι δεδουλῶσθαι. ἦλθον γὰρ ἐπὶ τὴν 
μητρόπολιν ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς μετὰ τοῦ Μήδου. On 
the other hand, the mention of the Hel- 
lespontians in 77.8 proves nothing for 
Kr.’s view, since most of the dwellers 
on the Hellespont and the Propontis 
were of Ionic descent, and so, in Hat.’s 
phrase (1. 147.7), were ἀπ᾽ ᾿Αθηνέων ; 
besides 77.§ 1 need not refer merely 
to the time of the formation of the 
Delian Confederation. For the whole 

passage, esp. its importance for the 
history of the transition of the naval 
hegemony to Athens, its relation to 1. 
89. § 2 and 1. 95. ὃ 1, and its contradic- 
tion of Hdt. 9. 106 — acc. to which, of 
the Ionians of Asia Minor only the 
Chians and Samians at the time of the 
formation of the Delian alliance had 
belonged to the great Hellenic confed- 
eration, which also is irreconcilable 
with Arist. Ath. Pol. 23 —see Steup, 
Rh. Mus. XXV, 829 ff., and App. on 
1. 89. 8. — τῶν re ᾿Ιώνων καὶ ὅσοι : cor- 
relation of whole and part, as 16. 21, 
69. 21, 88.55; 1.5.18; 2.69.9; 3. 51. 
7; 4.5. 6.—13. ἀπὸ σφῶν ἦσαν: Schol. 
ἄποικοι ἦσαν αὐτῶν. Cf. 1. 12. 18 Ἴωνας 
᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ νησιωτῶν τοὺς πολλοὺς ᾧκι- 
σαν. Cf. also 2.15.25; 7. 57. 19. — ξύμ- 
paxor: here members of an alliance;.sec 
on 14. 48. 11.— ὡς ἐπὶ τοῦ Μήδον τιμω- 
pla: τιμωρία τινός, vengeance on some 
one, as 7. 68.4; 8.82.4; whereas in 3. 
63.3 ἐπὶ τῇ ἡμετέρᾳ τιμωρίᾳ Must Mean 
for your protection against us. The 
meaning vengeance here is supported 
by 1.96.4 πρόσχημα ἣν ἀμύνασθαι ὧν 
ἔπαθον δῃοῦντας τὴν βασιλέως χώραν, and 
the fact that in ὃ 4 of the present chap- 
ter the reference is to events of 480 and 
479 s.c. need not keep us from under- 
standing the present passage in agree- 
ment with the parallel one in Book I. 
—14. τοὺς μὲν. .. τοὺς δὲ. . . τοῖς 
δ᾽... ἐπενεγκόντες κατεστρέψαντο: for 
the matter, cf. 1. 98. ὃ 4, 99. In the 
first two clauses we have the accus. de- 
pending on κατεστρέψαντο, but in the 
third τοῖς δ᾽ by attraction to Ws ἑκάστοις 


15 στρατεύειν, τοῖς δ᾽ ws ἑκάστοις τινὰ εἶχον αἰτίαν εὐπρεπῆ 

ἐπενεγκόντες κατεστρέψαντο. καὶ οὐ περὶ τῆς ἐλευθερίας 

ve » . A A A 

ἄρα οὔτε οὗτοι τῶν Ἑλλήνων οὐθ᾽ οἵ Ἕλληνες τῆς ἑαυτῶν τῷ 

, 9 , Ν Ν e' AN ἢ 3 \ \ 3 , 
Μήδῳ ἀντέστησαν, περὶ δὲ οἱ μὲν σφίσιν ἀλλὰ μὴ ἐκείνῳ 
’ ε > > AN 4 a 3 3 

καταδουλώσεως, οἱ δ᾽ ἐπὶ δεσπότου μεταβολῇ οὐκ ἀξυνετω- 
20 τέρον, κακοξυνετωτέρου δέ. 

Ἴ “᾿Αλλ᾽ οὐ γὰρ δὴ τὴν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων εὐκατηγόρητον οὖσαν 

, A 9 9 fe) 3 3 ’ ν 9 A N A 

πόλιν νῦν ἤκομεν ἀποφανοῦντες ἐν εἰδόσιν ὅσα ἀδικεῖ, πολὺ δὲ 

μᾶλλον ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς αἰτιασόμενοι ὅτι ἔχοντες παραδείγματα 

τινὰ εἶχον αἰτίαν εὐπρεπῆ ἐπενεγκόντες, 
understanding αὐτοῖς with ἐπενεγκόντες 
in the first two clauses and αὐτούς with 
the verb in the third clause. See on 77. 
16. ----΄λιποστρατίαν : for the form, see 
on 1.99.3. — 16. ἐπενεγκόντες : has obj. 
first in accus. (λιποστρατίαν), then in 
inf. clause (ἐπ᾿ ἀλλήλους στρατεύειν, Te- 
ferring to Samos and Miletus, 1. 115. 
§ 2), and lastin rel. cl. (ws ἑκάστοις τινὰ 
εἶχον αἰτίαν εὐπρεπῆ, SC. ἐπιφέρειν). 

καὶ οὐ περὶ τῆς ἐλευθερίας ἄρα: ἄρα 
gives a tone of bitter scorn to the con- 
clusion that even in the preceding con- 
flicts the question was never one of 
Hellenic freedom.—17. οὔτε τῶν “EAAF- 
νων οὔθ᾽... τῆς ἑαυτῶν : for omission of 
art. (τῆς) in the first member, cf. 88. 
7, and see on θ. 27. ---- τῷ Μήδῳ ἀντέ- 
στησαν: not to be understood, with 
Cl., of the continuance of the war till 
449 ΒΟ. The Hellenes here mentioned 
were at the time of the formation of 
the Delian Confederation no longer 
under Persian rule, and the liberation 
of Hellenes was also not the object of 
thatalliance. Inthe reply of Euphemus, 
too (83. § 2), the struggle for freedom 
is put in the earlier period. — 18. περὶ 
δὲ of μὲν σφίσιν... kaxofuverwrépou δέ: 

for analysis of the passage, see App. 
- σφίσιν: = σφίσιν αὐτοῖς. See on 4. 
28. 27.—19. ἐπὶ δεσπότον μεταβολῇ: 
i.e. to change one master for another. 
Cf. 18. 839.—20. κακοξυνετωτέρου : (= 
κακοφρονεστέρου) coined for the sake of 
the paronomasia. 

77. It is high time that we, warned 
by these examples and not deceived by 
their false pretenses, show them by our 
united resistance that we are Dorians 
and of quite other spirit than the Hel- 
lenes subject to them. Or shall we let 
ourselves be subdued severally by 
them and believe ourselves safe until 
our turn comes?—1. ἀλλ᾽... γάρ: 
ἀλλά breaks off from the preceding, γάρ 
leads over to something else. Kr. Spr. 
69, 14, 4. — τὴν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων... πό- 
Aw... ὅσα ἀδικεῖ : proleptic const., as 
76. 1.—2. ἐν εἰδόσιν: as 2. 36.14; 4. 
59.5. Cf. 2. 48. ὅ. --- ὃ. παραδείγματα 
τῶν τ᾽ ἐκεῖ ᾿Ελλήνων : re— which is 
slightly misplaced, belonging after πα- 
padelypara —is correl. to καὶ νῦν. Cf. 
76.11. Most of the better Mss. have 
ἐκεῖσε, but this for ἐκεῖ is found only in 
late writers. Elsewhere Thuc. uses 
παράδειγμα, in sing. and pl., as predi- 
cate of persons or events which serve 



τῶν τ᾽ ἐκεὶ Ἑλλήνων ὡς ἐδουλώθησαν οὐκ ἀμύνοντες σφί- 
σιν αὐτοῖς, καὶ νῦν ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς ταὐτὰ παρόντα σοφίσματα, Ac 
οντίνων τε ξυγγενῶν κατοικίσεις καὶ ᾿Εγεσταίων ξυμμάχων 
ἐπικουρίας, οὐ ξυστραφέντες βουλόμεθα προθυμότερον δεῖξαι 

3 Ag” > Ὑ 4 9.ϑ 29 € , N A 
αὐτοῖς ὅτι οὐκ Ἴωνες τάδε εἰσὶν οὐδ᾽ Ἑλλησπόντιοι καὶ νησιῶ- 

ται, οἱ δεσπότην ἢ Μῆδον ἢ ἕνα γέ τινα αἰεὶ μεταβάλλοντες 

as examples (παράδειγμα αὐτοὶ ὄντες 2. 
37.2; παραδείγμασι τοῖς προγεγενημένοις 
χρώμενοι 3.10.19; παραδείγμασι χρώμε- 
vo. Tots ἐς τοὺς ἄλλους 8. 11]. 24: παρά- 
δειγμα ἔχομεν τοὺς ἀντιπέρας Εὐβοέας 4. 
92.18). Only here is it obj. with the 
gen. of persons serving as examples. 
So much the stronger is the emphasis 
upon the dependent clause ὡς ἐδουλώ- 
θησαν xré. (cf. 4.92. 20 ws αὐτοῖς διάκει- 
rat): having warning examples in the 
oversea Hellenes, how these have been 
enslaved because they did not defend one 
another.—4. σφίσιν αὐτοῖς: = ἀλλήλοις, 
as 5.69.17; 8.76.9. See on ἐν ἑαυτοῖς 
4,25.34. —5. καὶ viv ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς ταὐτὰ πα- 

ρόντα σοφίσματα: ταὐτὰ σοφίσματα is 

second obj. οὗ ἔχοντες with ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς πα- 
ρόντα as pred. For σοφίσματα, sophisms, 
only here in Thuc., cf. σοφιστής also 
occurring once only (8. 38.31). For 
ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς παρόντα, directed against us, 
cf. 8.92.45. See on 3.3.19. The ad- 
missibility of this const. can scarcely 
be doubted, considering Thuc.’s fond- 
ness for the periphrastic use of ἔχειν 
with pred. adjs. (see on 1. 120. 9), even 
if elsewhere only in 1. 144.19 (ἧσσον 
ἐγκεισομένους τοὺς ἐναντίους ἕξομεν) he 
adds δρῖίο. as pred. τοἔχειν. On account 
of the position of re (4), St. understands 
with this clause ἔχοντες παραδείγματα, 
but the slight misplacement of τε, which 
really belongs after παραδείγματα, need 

not be taken as a fatal objection to the 
explanation here adopted. See on 2. 
46.1.—6. karouloas . . . ἐπικουρίας: 
explan. appos. to σοφίσματα. The pl. 
by its general character indicates the 
unreality of the pretexts assigned. On 
the matter, cf. 6. 81, 8. § 2, 38. § 2, 50. 
§ 4, 68. § 3, 76. § 2.—’Eyeoralov ἐπικου- 
plas: obj. gen., as 7.43.12 τὴν ἐπιχεί- 
pnow τῶν Ἐπιπολῶν». ---- 7. ξυστραφέντες: 
uniting together, not merely in a military 
sense. Cf. 91.5; 8. 54. 17. — προθυμό- 
τερον: see on 6. 6.— δεῖξαι: cf. δῆλον 
ποιῆσαι 84. 21.—8. ὅτι οὐκ Ἴωνες τάδε 
εἰσίν: that this is not Ionians. The neut. 
τάδε with masc. pred. gives esp. em- 
phasis. Cf.’ Aré\\wy τάδ᾽ ἣν Soph. O.R. 
1829; οὐ γάρ ἐσθ᾽ Ἕκτωρ τάδε Eur. An- 
drom. 168. εἰσίν construed with pred., 
as 8.112.2; 4.102. 18. --- οὐκ Ἴωνες... 
οὐδ᾽ Ἑλλησπόντιοι καὶ νησιῶται: ἃ 
complete enumeration of the subjects 
of the Athenians is not intended, rather 
only chief groups are made prominent; 
e.g. the communities of the Thracian 
coast and the Aeolians of Asia Minor 
are not taken into account. See Steup, 
Rh. Mus. XXXV, 827 n.— νησιῶται : 
inhabitants of the Cyclades. See on 
3. 104. 11.— 9. ἕνα yé twa: any one who- 
ever. Cf. 34. 11, 61. 12.— μεταβάλλον- 
tes: changing to, adopting. Cf. μεταβολῇ 
76.19. — 10. dw αὐτονόμον τῆς Πελο- 
ποννήσον: cl. ἀπὸ σφῶν 76. 18. 



ivrat, ἀλλὰ Δωριῆς ἐλεύθεροι amr αὐτονόμον τῆς Πελο- 

AY , 3 A a , 9 A 9 

γον THY Σικελίαν οἰκοῦντες. ἢ μένομεν ἕως ἂν ἕκα- 
Ἁ “A > 9 

ara πόλεις χηφθῶμεν, εἰδότες ὅτι ταύτῃ μόνον adwrot 
Ἁ “A Ἀ Ἁ “ ΄ > 

Kal ὁρῶντες αὐτοὺς ἐπὶ ToUTO τὸ εἶδος τρεπομένους 

‘ N , e “ ’ Ν Ν ’ 
γοὺς μὲν λόγοις ἡμῶν διιστάναι, τοὺς δὲ ξυμμάχων 

ἐκπολεμοῦν πρὸς ἀλλήλους, τοῖς δὲ ὡς ἑκάστοις τι 

A ’ , A \ 99 A 
VES λέγοντες δύνανται Κακουργέεινν; Και, οἰόμεθα Του 

’ , 9 \ 93 9 ’ 9 
ν ξυνοίκου προαπολλυμένον OU και ἐς αὕτον τινα ἥξειν 

’ Ν Ν 9 A A Ν 4 3 een 
"»όν, πρὸ δὲ αὐτοῦ μᾶλλον τὸν πάσχοντα καθ᾽ αὑτὸν 


μένομεν ἕως : or are we waiting 
he indic. in the ironical ques- 
nore effective than the dub. 
ἕκαστοι κατὰ πόλεις : severally 
ἵν. ---- 12. ταύτῃ: in this way, 

isolated. — 18. ἐπὶ τοῦτο τὸ 
wopévous ὥστε κτὲ.: οἵ. 8. δ0.7 
ἐπὶ τοιόνδε εἶδος wore κτὲ. For 
εἶδος, οὗ. τῇ αὐτῇ ἰδέᾳ 76. 11. — 
δὲ ὡς ἑκάστοις... κακουργεῖν: 
assimilated to ἑκάστοις, which 
ued with λέγοντες. Jowett ex- 
᾿κακουργεῖν stands in a double 
rith δύνανται and with wore.” 
e of the passage is as if we had 
ικουργεῖν ws ἑκάστοις τι προσηνὲς 
δύνανται (SC. κακουργεῖν avrovs). 
5. But Steup, who adopts with 
fter Badham) τοὺς δέ, objects 
yove (Cl.’s) explanation, that, 
in 76. 15 rots δέ is connected 
y with a ptc. in the leading 
ἐπενεγκόντες), here it must be 
nt on a ptc. (λέγοντες) to be 
from the dependent clause. 
kets δύνανται, which relieves 
‘ulty, if we also read, with v. 
τας. Schiitz (Ztsch. f. d. Gym. 
, 101) would transpose δύνανται 

Aéyorres. — 16. προσηνές : not found 
elsewhere in Attic prose. —17. és αὐτόν 
τινα: to each one himself. See on 31. 25. 
és with ἥξειν as χωρεῖν ἔς τινα 4.35.2; 
καταφεύγειν ἔς τινα 4,118.10; πέμπειν ἔς 
τινα 4.93.8; 8.47.9. For the thought, 
cf. 1.120. 12 προσδέχεσθαι δέ wore, εἰ τὰ 
κάτω mpootvro, κἂν μέχρι σφῶν τὸ δεινὸν 
προελθεῖν. ---18. πρὸ αὐτοῦ : referring 
to αὐτόν τινα and put for esp. emphasis 
before τὸν πάσχοντα, to which it belongs. 
Cf. 64. 23 ταῦτα τοὺς ξυνδράσοντας, and 
see on 4.20.15. For position of μᾶλλον, 
cf. 4. 98.5. The sense of the passage 
is that rather whoever before him comes 
to grief suffers misfortune for himself 
alone. Madvig (Adv. I, 827) thinks 
that the word-order requires 7 after 

78. Let no one doubt that contend- 
ing for us he is defending himself. In- 
deed, whoever has heretofore feared or 
envied us should not for that hold aloof - 
from us; otherwise he will after our 
defeat wish too late for former con- 
ditions. Camarina, however, as our 
neighbor and next in danger has reason 
above all to give up her slothfulness 
and vigorously make common cause 



ee K Ἁ » ¥ ld ‘\ A > ’ ε N 1 
αἱ εἴ τῳ ἄρα παρέστηκε τὸν μὲν Συρακόσιον, ἑαντὸν 
> 9 la > Aa 9 , \ NX e ~ ε , 
δ᾽ ov πολέμιον εἶναι τῷ ᾿Αθηναΐῳ, καὶ δεινὸν ἡγεῖται ὑπέρ γε 
τῆς ἐμῆς κινδυνεύειν, ἐνθυμηθήτω οὐ περὶ τῆς ἐμῆς μᾶλ- 
3 » A ἃ » Ἃ ε “A 9 > ~ 3 “~ 4 
λον, ἐν iow δὲ καὶ Τῆς ἑαυτοῦ apa ἐν TH ἐμῇ paxovpe 
, A \ 9 , 9 9 , 
vos, τοσούτῳ δὲ καὶ ἀσφαλέστερον ὅσῳ οὐ προδιεφθαρμένου 
ἐμοῦ, ἔχων δὲ ξύμμαχον ἐμὲ καὶ οὐκ ἐρῆμος ἀγωνιεῖται, τόν 
9 A ‘ ‘ “A , ¥ , ” 
τε ᾿Αθηναῖον μὴ THY τοῦ Συρακοσίου ἔχθραν κολάσασθαι, τῇ 
>> A , Ἁ 2? , 3 Φ , 
δ᾽ ἐμῇ προφάσει τὴν ἐκείνου φιλίαν οὐχ ἧσσον βεβαιώσασθαι 

with us.—1. καὶ εἴ τῳ ἄρα παρέστηκε 
κτὲ.: thissame appeal for solidarity and 
warning against particularisticnarrow- 
ness Hermocrates had used in 424 B.c. 
at the peace congress in Gela, 4. 58-65, 
in part employing similar terms, esp. 
in 4. 60, 61.— παρέστηκε: see on 34. 53. 
- τὸν Συρακόσιον, τῷ ᾿Αθηναίῳ : the 
collective singular, being more famil- 
iar in tone, is more urgent. Cf. ὁ Χαλ- 
κιδεύς 84. 9. — éaurév: rare case of acc. 
of refl. pers. pron. as subj. of inf., due 
partly to the antithesis (cf. Hdt. 5. 86. 
18; 6. 187. 28, etc.), partly because ef 
τῳ παρέστηκε does not admit of a nom. 
—2. ὑπέρ ye τῆς ἐμῆς : note the change 
to περί in 8, such change of preps. being 
not infreq. in Thuc. where there are 
two clauses. Cf. 14. 1.14.— 4. ἐν ἴσφ: 
as 87.18; 1.188.11; 2. 53. 14.— καὶ 
τῆς ἑαντοῦ : without repetition of prep. 

(περί), a8 often. — 5. ὅσῳ : in 80 far as. 

See on 1. 68.11. — οὐ προδιεφθαρμένον 
ἐμοῦ: gen. abs., the speaker as represent- 
ative of his mother-city. Cf. 1. 187. 
24; 4.64. 1.— 6. otk ἐρῆμος : the read- 
ing of a few inferior Mss. preferred by 
Steup (with Bk., St., Hude, etc.) to 
ἐρῆμον of the better Mss., which Cl. and 
others retain. Not to emphasize the 
fact that ξύμμαχον ἐρῆμον, an isolated 
ally, is a contradiction in terms, the 

context is against a reference to the 
already existent allies of Syracuse. As 
the first three sections of 78 are in form 
general and apply to all the Siceliotes 
except the Syracusans, so there is in 
these nowhere reference to allies of 
Syracuse already existent ; and esp. οὐ 
προδιεφθαρμένου ἐμοῦ, Opp. to ἔχων δὲ 
ξύμμαχον ἐμὲ xré., is said only of the 
Syracusans. We have then the same 
idea expressed first positively and then 
negatively, as not infreq. in Thuc. Cf. 
2.2.19; 8.40.15; 7.85.17. For ἐρῆμος, 
isolated, cf. esp. 1. 82. 14. — τόν re’ Αθη- 
ναῖον... βούλεσθαι : transition from 
suppl. ptc. (μαχούμενος) With ἐνθυμηθήτω 
to accus. and inf. See on 4. 27. 4.— 
7. κολάσασθαι : the rarer mid., as 3. 
40. 22. See on διεσκοπεῖτο 59. 6.— τῇ 
ἐμῇ προφάσει: with me as a pretext.— 
8. τὴν ἐκείνου φιλίαν : referring to τῳ 
(1), which includes all the Siceliotes 
except the Syracusans, but esp. the 
Camarinaeans. The fate awaiting them 
is ironically indicated: ** that the Athe- 
nians while punishing the hostility of 
the Syracusans will know how none 
the less to secure their friendship,’’ i.e. 
by complete dependence. Several em- 
endations have been proposed (Reiske 
δουλείαν for φιλίαν, Pp. βιάσασθαι for Be- 
βαιώσασθαι, H. Stein δή after φιλίαν), 




βούλεσθαι. εἴ τέτις φθονεῖ μὲν ἢ καὶ φοβεῖται (ἀμφότερα yap 2 
10 τάδε πάσχει τὰ μείζω), διὰ δὲ αὐτὰ τὰς Συρακούσας κακωθῆ- 

, 9 “ , 4 , 9 
ναι μέν, ἵνα σωφρονισθῶμεν, βούλεται, περιγενέσθαι δὲ ἕνεκα 

τῆς αὑτοῦ ἀσφαλείας, οὐκ ἀνθρωπίνης δυνάμεως βούλησιν 

9 ’ 9 N @? 9 “A 9 , Ἁ ~ 4 
ἐλπίζει: ov yap οἷόν τε ἅμα τῆς τε ἐπιθυμίας Kal τῆς τύχης 

Ν 9. oN ε , 4 , “\ 9 ’ ε 4 
TOV QUTOV Ομοιὼς TALLAV γενέσθαι, Καὶ εἰ ὙνΩωμῃ ALAPTOL, 

A ε A A 9 ‘ ,3sKH Κ ἃ A > “ > 
τοῖς αὑτοῦ κακοῖς ὀλοφυρθεὶς τάχ᾽ ἀν ἴσως καὶ τοῖς ἐμοῖς aya- 
A ig > ~ > 4 \ ’ 
θοῖς ποτε βουληθείη αὖθις φθονῆσαι. ἀδύνατον δὲ προεμένῳ 

ν Ν Ἁ A 4 
καὶ μὴ τοὺς αὐτοὺς κινδύνους οὐ περὶ τῶν ὀνομάτων ἀλλὰ 
Ἁ ων »Ἤ > 4, A ’ Ν δ Ἁ 
περὶ τῶν ἔργων ἐθελήσαντι προσλαβεῖν - λόγῳ μὲν γὰρ τὴν 

but these only weaken the effect. — 
οὐχ ἧσσον: i.e. still more, as 88. 4. 

9. ἀμφότερα τάδε: referring, as αὐτά, 
toenvy and fear.—10. τὰ μείζω: greater 
things, here greater states.— 11. ἵνα 
σωφρονισθῶμεν : that we may receive a 
lesson in moderation. Cf. σωφροσύνη 1. 
82.15; τὸ σῶφρον 1. 37. 7. — περιγενέ- 
σθαι : maintain ourselves. See on 1. 55. 
11.— 12. οὐκ ἀνθρωπίνης δυνάμεως βού- 
λησιν ἐλπίζει : i.e. he hopes what he 
wishes, but his wish does not keep 
within the bounds of human power (or 
weakness). With βούλησιν ἐλπίζει cf. 

8.89. 18 ἐλπίσαντες μακρότερα μὲν τῆς δυ- 

γάμεως, ἐλάσσω δὲ τῆς βουλήσεως. 

18. οὐ γὰρ οἷόν re... ταμίαν γενέ- 
σθαι: gives the reason for the preced- 
ing: for it is impossible that the same 
person be in like measure the controller 
at once of his own desires and of fortune. 
For the thought, cf. 4. 64. 5. ταμίαν 
γενέσθαι is slightly different in force 
from ταμιεύεσθαι 18.18. Forre... καὶ 
ὁμοίως, cf. 2. 58. 7, and see on 2. 44. 6. 
—14. γνώμῃ ἁμάρτοι: i.e. that Syra- 
cuse will not be completely overthrown. 
Ci. γνώμῃ σφαλέντες 4. 18. 7; γνώμης 
ἁμαρτάνειν 92.3; 1.33.17; γνώμης σφα- 

λῆναι 4. 28. 27 . τῆς δόξης σφαλῆναι 4. 85. 
5.— 15. τοῖς αὑτοῦ κακοῖς ὀλοφυρθείς : 
brought to grief by his own ills. Thuc. 
uses elsewhere the aor. mid. of this 
verb (2.46.7; 7.30.21; 8.66.16, 81. 
21); in the pass. the sense is prob. not 
lamented, which does not suit the con- 
text here, but in lamentabilem 
statum abductus (St.). Cf. μεμφθῆ- 
vat (4. 85. 7) and μέμψασθαι (1. 148. 14; 
2. 60. 8, 64. 21; 3. 37. 25, 61. δ; 8. 
109. 9). — τάχ᾽ Gv ἴσως... αὖθις φθο- 
νῆσαι: he would perhaps sometime wish 
again to become envious of our good for- 
tune. The aor. φθονῆσαι is ingressive. 
For τάχ᾽ ἃν tows, see on 10. 18.—16. προ- 
ἐμένῳ : for one letting go (sc. ἐμέ, τοὺς 
Zupaxoglouvs).—17. καὶ μὴ τοὺς αὐτοὺς 
κινδύνους... προσλαβεῖν: and not 
consent to take up the same dangers not 
about names, but about facts. κινδύνους 
προσλαβεῖν, used by Hermocrates also 
in 4. 61. 3, followed here by the const. 
περί τινος, aS not seldom μάχεσθαι, dyw- 
νίζεσθαι, κινδυνεύειν. ---- 18. λόγῳ μὲν γὰρ 
... ἔργῳ δὲ... σωτηρίαν : explanation 
of the above οὐ περὶ τῶν ὀνομάτων. .. 
ἔργων, for nominally one might be pre- 
serving our power, but actually. his own 



e , ὃ 4 4 ¥ » δὲ ἣν ε A , 
ἡμετέραν δύναμιν σῴζοι αν τις, ἔργῳ O€ τὴν αὑτοῦ σωτηρίαν. 

“\ 4 9. 4 € “Ὁ εὺ A ε 4 »” 
20 καὶ μάλιστα εἰκὸς HY ὑμᾶς, ὦ Καμαριναῖοι, ὁμόρους οντας 4 

Ἁ Ν 4 UA ~ 9 δ Ν N 
καὶ Ta δεύτερα κινδυνεύσοντας προορᾶσθαι αὐτὰ καὶ μὴ 

A 9 vA ἴω ΕῚ Ἁ A N € “~ ~ 
μαλακῶς ὥσπερ νῦν ξυμμαχεῖν, αὐτοὺς δὲ πρὸς ἡμᾶς μᾶλ- 

9 » 9 > 93 ᾽ν 4 “ 3 , e 
λον ἰόντας, amep, εἰ ἐς THY Καμαριναίαν πρῶτον ἀφίκοντο ot 

3 ~ ’ Ἃ 3 A ~ 3 ma € [4 N 
Αθηναῖοι, δεόμενοι ἂν ἐπεκαλεῖσθε, ταῦτα ἐκ τοῦ ὁμοίου καὶ 

25 νῦν παρακελευομένους, ὅπως μηδὲν ἐνδώσομεν, φαίνεσθαι. 

ἀλλ᾽ οὔθ᾽ ὑμεῖς νῦν γέ πω οὔθ᾽ οἱ ἄλλοι ἐπὶ ταῦτα ὥρμησθε. 

ee ’ὕ , » N id 4 e€ “~ Ἁ N Ν 
Δειλίᾳ δὲ ἴσως τὸ δίκαιον πρός τε ἡμᾶς καὶ πρὸς τοὺς 

3 ’ 4 4 ’ ἷΦ e a Ν 
ἐπιόντας θεραπεύσετε, λέγοντες ξυμμαχίαν εἶναι ὑμῖν πρὸς 

safety. For σῴζειν σωτηρίαν Bl. com- 
pares Cic. ad Fam. 11. 7.2 conser- 
vare salutem populi Romani. 
21. τὰ δεύτερα κινδυνεύσοντας : will 
incur danger next (cogn. acc.). —avra: 
i.e. the state of affairs. Cf. 10.5, 40. 
11.—22. μαλακῶς ὥσπερ viv: cf. 75. § 8. 
--ὄ αὐτούς : yourselves, sponte. To 
this belongs not only πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἰόντας 
but also παρακελευνομένους φαίνεσθαι : but 
should of yourselves come to us, and as 
you, if the Athenians had first come 
against Camarina, would be calling us 
with the prayer not to yield an inch (ὅπως 
μηδὲν ἐνδώσομεν), 80 also now show your- 
selves (φαίνεσθαι), using in like manner 
the same exhortation. — 23. ἅπερ: be- 
longs only to δεόμενοι, a8 ταῦτα to παρα- 
κελευομένους, both explained by ὅπως 
μηδὲν évdwoouev.— 24. ἐκ τοῦ ὁμοίου: 
= ὁμοίως, as 87.28; 2.44.16; 4. 10. 19. 
Cf. ἐκ τοῦ ἴσου 2. 8.19.----26. ἀλλ᾽ οὔθ᾽... 
ὥρμησθε: but neither you, as yet at least, 
nor the rest have shown zeal for this. Cf. 
ὡρμῆσθαι és 2.65.5; 7.21.25; 8.40.19, 
47.17., ὡρμῆσθαι ἐπί τι 9.17 is slightly 
different. The verb is construed here 
with the more prominent subj. (ὑμεῖς). 
79, 80, §1,2. You cannot hold up 

to us your treaty of alliance with 
Athens, in cowardice urging the plea 
of justice. This treaty does not con- 


cern the present case, neither pledging ~ 

you to support the Athenians nor 
hindering your standing by us against 
them. Nor out of anxiety for your 
safety need you decide for neutrality. 
If we Siceliotes only hold together, the 
power of the Athenians is not at all to 
be dreaded; especially as we can reckon 
upon the assistance of the war-trained 
Peloponnesians. Besides, . neutrality 
toward us would not be equitable. — 
1. τὸ δίκαιον : the point of right, or legal 
obligation. Cf. 4.61.15 τὸ δίκαιον τῆς 
ξυνθήκης. --- πρός Te ἡμᾶς Kal πρὸς τοὺς 
ἐπιόντας : the emphasis is on the second 
member, as shown by λέγοντες... πρὸς 
᾿Αθηναίους. See on 16.1. The prep. is 
repeated and re placed as in 6.8 περί re 
γαμικῶν τινων καὶ περὶ γῆς ἀμφισβητήτου. 
The substitution of τοὺς ἐπιόντας (the 
aggressors) for rods ᾿Αθηναίους is pur- 
posely made, for acc. to what follows 
the alliance between Camarina and 
Athens was not for wars of aggression. 
— 2. θεραπεύσετε: will lay stress on. Cf. 
3.56.9 τὸ ξυμφέρον μᾶλλον θεραπεύοντες. 



᾿Αθηναίους: ἣν ye οὐκ ἐπὶ τοῖς φίλοις ἐποιήσασθε, τῶν δὲ 

ἐχθρῶν ἦν τις ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς ty, καὶ τοῖς γε ᾿Αθηναίοις βοηθεῖν, 

9 e > ¥ N XN > , 9 a) Ν 4 3 A 
5 ὅταν ὑπ᾽ ἄλλων, Kal μὴ αὐτοὶ ὠσπερ νῦν TOUS πέλας GOLKO- 


ἐπεὶ οὐδ᾽ οἱ Ῥηγῖνοι ὄντες Χαλκιδῆς Χαλκιδέας ὄντας 2 

Λεοντίνους ἐθέλουσι ξυγκατοικίζειν. καὶ δεινὸν εἰ ἐκεῖνοι 

μὲν τὸ ἔργον τοῦ καλοῦ δικαιώματος ὑποπτεύοντες ἀλόγως 

σωφρονοῦσιν, ὑμεῖς δ᾽ εὐλόγῳ προφάσει τοὺς μὲν φύσει πολε- 

10 μίους βούλεσθε ὠφελεῖν, τοὺς δὲ ἔτι μᾶλλον φύσει ξυγγενεῖς 

--- ξυμμαχίαν. : . πρὸς ᾿Αθηναίους: 
the orator assumes that the Camarinae- 
ans might seek to justify a cowardly 
neutrality in the present war by a plea 
that hostility to the Athenians would 
be a violation of the treaty made with 
the Athenians at the time of the com- 
mand of Laches (cf. 75. § 3; see on 52. 
6). But this treaty with Athens was 
directed, the orator argues, not against 
friends of the Camarinaeans, but 
against enemies attacking them; and 
the Camarinaeans were to support the 
Athenians in case these suffered injus- 
tice from others, but not if they them- 
selves were the aggressors. And this 
latter was really the case, even if the 
Athenians talked of helping in the res- 
toration of the city of the Leontines, 
their allies and kinsmen. The empti- 
ness of this pretext even the Rhegians 
had recognized, who, although being 
Chalcidians, like the Leontines, had 
held aloof from that Athenian enter- 
prise, in spite of their alliance with 
the Athenians. So the Camarinaeans 

should see that without violating their — 

alliance with Athens they could fulfill 
their treaty obligations to Syracuse. — 
3. ἦν ye: rel. with the force of a strong 
adversative conj., ‘ this alliance, how- 
ever.’’ See on 1.89. 2. With the fol- 

lowing exposition of the treaty, cf. 1. 
40. § 2.— ἐπὶ rots φίλοις : against your 
Friends. See on 61.5. — τῶν δὲ ἐχθρῶν : 
put before the conj. for the sake of the 
antithesis to rots φίλοις. ----4. καὶ τοῖς 
ye Ἀθηναίοις βοηθεῖν: dependent on ξυμ- 
μαχίαν ἐποιήσασθε, aS 1.44.8 ἐπιμαχίαν 
ἐποιήσαντο. . . βοηθεῖν. The ye prepares 
for the limiting ὅταν clause, to aid the 
Athenians only when. — ὃ. tw ἄλλων: 
sc. ἀδικῶνται. For ellipses, similar, 
though not so strong, cf. 1. 78.10; 2. 
11. 84, 86.14; 7. 69. 8. ---- τοὺς πέλας : 
= ἄλλους. See on 1. 82. 2. 

6. οὐδ᾽ οἱ ‘Pnytvor ὄντες Χαλκιδῆς: 
οἵ. 44.17, 46. 7. Note the chiastic ar- 
rangement.— 7. Λεοντίνους ξυγκατοι- 
κίζειν : cf. 8. 12. --- δεινόν εἰ. .. μὲν 
... δέ: parataxis, as 1. 35. 4, 121. 19. 
Cf. 76.5.—8. τὸ ἔργον τοῦ καλοῦ δι- 
καιώματος : the real meaning of the fine 
plea of right. καλοῦ (ironical) = εὐπρε- 
ποῦς. The same antithesis again 80. 7, 
— ἀλόγως σωφρονοῦσιν. . . ὠφελεῖν: 
against the letter of the agreement display 
prudence (obey policy), while you on the 
pretext of the letter wish to aid those who 
are your natural enemies. For σωφρονεῖν, 
cf. 78.11, 87.19. For the paronomasia, 
see on 72. 12.—9. εὐλόγῳ προφάσει: 
cf.8. 19 προφάσει βραχείᾳ καὶ evr pere?.— 
10. ἔτι μᾶλλον φύσει ξυγγενεῖς : i.e. as 




eTa τῶν ἐνθίστων διαφθεῖραι. ἀλλ᾽ ov δίκαιον. ἀμύνειν δὲ 3 
" Χ ρ 9 Ap 

ἃ ‘\ ‘a ‘ N > A, 3 , KA € ~ 
καὶ μὴ φοβεῖσθαι τὴν παρασκευὴν αὐτῶν" ov yap, ἣν ἡμεῖς 

A , 4 93 3 > » ν Φ , 
ξυστῶμεν πάντες, δεινή ἐστιν, ἀλλ᾽ ἤν, ὅπερ οὗτοι σπεύ- 

9 , A 9 N 299A Ν ε A , 
δουσι; ταναντια διαστῶμεν. E7TEL οὐδὲ TPOS μας μονοῦυς 

9 4 N ’ ’ » ἃ 3 a 
ἐλθόντες καὶ μάχῃ περιγενόμενοι ἔπραξαν ἃ ἐβούλοντο, 

ἀπῆλθον δὲ διὰ τάχους. ὥστε οὐχ ἁθρόους γε ὄντας εἰκὸς 1 

ἀθυμεῖν, ἰέναι δὲ ἐς τὴν ξυμμαχίαν προθυμότερον, ἄλλως 

ἃ 9 Ν ’ ’ 9 , ἃ “A 
τε Kal ἀπὸ Πελοποννήσον παρεσομένης ὠφέλίας, ot τῶνδε 

ld 2 UN ν᾿ ’ Ν ’ N \ 9 , Ἁ 
κρείσσους εἰσὶ τὸ παράπαν τὰ πολέμια' καὶ μὴ ἐκείνην τὴν 

προμηθίαν δοκεῖν τῳ ἡμῖν μὲν ἴσην εἶναι, ὑμῖν δὲ ἀσφαλῆ, 

Dorians and inhabitants of the same 
island. For φίλους, the logical antith- 
esis of πολεμίους, is substituted ξυγ- 
γενεῖς. Sameness of blood was the 
ground of natural friendship between 
Syracuse and Camarina, difference of 
blood the cause of natural hostility be- 
tween Athens and Camarina. 

11. ἀμύνειν δέ : (δίκαιον understood) 
but (it is right) to lend aid (sc. τοῖς φύσει 
Evyyevéor). — 12. μὴ φοβεῖσθαι τὴν πα- 
ρασκενὴν αὐτῶν: cf. Τό. 2. --- ἢν ἡμεῖς 
ξυστῶμεν: cf. 21. 4, 33. 26, 37. 15. -- 
18. ὅπερ οὗτοι σπεύδουσι: cf. 10. 14.— 
14. τἀναντία: adv. as 3.67.17; 4. 86. 
6; 7. 87. ὅ. --- διαστῶμεν : cf. 4. 61. 6. 
For the paronomasia, see on 72, 12. --- 
πρὸς ἡμᾶς μόνους : cf. 65 ff. The allied 
forces mentioned in 65. § 1 and 67. § 2 
are ignored by the orator. For such 
cases of inexactness in speeches, see 
App. on 12.4. Note πρός, for the usual 
ἐπί (which Cobet would substitute 
here), as with ἐπιέναι (31. 43; 1. 86.20; 
2.65.46; 4.92. 39). 

80 1. ἁθρόους ye ὄντας: sc. ἡμᾶς, 
about equiv. to nv ἡμεῖς ξυστῶμεν πάντες 
(79. 12).— 2. ἱέναι δὲ és τὴν ξυμμαχίαν 
προθυμότερον : (SC. ὑμᾶς) enter into the 

alliance more heartily ; here, as Jowett 
says, ‘Tin the sense, not of joining 
a new alliance, but of taking a more 
energetic part in an old one,”’’ as op- 
posed to μὴ μαλακῶς ὥσπερ νῦν ξυμμαχεῖν 
78.21. St.’s rendering of ἐς τὴν ξυμμα- 
χίαν, ad praestandum auxilium 
sociale, gets the same general sense, 
though in a different way. The mean- 
ing cannot be, of course, the ordinary 
one of entering into a (new) alliance (as 
in 5. 80. 29), for an alliance already 
existed (cf. 75. § 3) and the Athenian 
ambassadors had come to renew this 
(82.1). See App. —38. of: sc. Πελοπον- 
νήσιοι implied in the antecedent clause. 
Cf. 94.3 Μέγαρα ovs.— 4. τὰ πολέμια: 
as to matters of war. Cf. 1.18.32; 4. 
126. 7. --- ἐκεένην τὴν προμηθίαν : that 
prudent course, referring to the neutral- 
ity which the orator characterizes 79. 
4 by δειλίᾳ τὸ δίκαιον πρός τε ἡμᾶς καὶ 
πρὸς τοὺς ἐπιόντας. As to the form προ- 
μηθίαν, it seems better to follow that 
of the tragic poets, when the Mss. 
vary (between -6la and -6ea).— 5. δο- 
κεῖν τῳ: Duker’s correction for δοκεῖν 
τῷ of the Mss.; dependent on elxés. — 

ἡμῖν μὲν ἴσην εἶναι, ὑμῖν δὲ ἀσφαλῆ: 


Ἁ , N ε x 93 ’ » ’ 
τὸ μηδετέροις δὴ ὡς καὶ ἀμφοτέρων ὄντας ξυμμάχους βοη- 
θεῖν. οὐ γὰρ ἔργῳ ἴσον ὥσπερ τῷ δικαιώματί ἐστιν. εἰ γὰρ 2 
du ὑμᾶς μὴ ξυμμαχήσαντας 6 
ὁ κρατῶν περιέσται, τί ἄλλο ἢ τῇ αὐτῇ ἀπουσίᾳ τοῖς μὲν 

τε παθὼν σφαλήσεται καὶ 

9 9 , ~ Ἁ A > 3 , Ἁ , 

οὐκ ἠμύνατε σωθῆναι, τοὺς δὲ οὐκ ἐκωλύσατε κακοὺς γενέ. 
’ 4 A > a \ 9 vd 

σθαι; καΐτοι κάλλιον τοῖς ἀδικουμένοις καὶ ἅμα ξυγγενέσι 

προσθεμένους τήν τε κοινὴν ὠφελίαν τῇ Σικελίᾳ φυλάξαι καὶ 

N > ’ ’ , » ᾽ν 9 “ἡ ε A 
τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους φίλους δὴ ὄντας μὴ ἐᾶσαι ἁμαρτεῖν. 
εε 4 , ε 4 3 Ud A 
Ἐξυνελόντες τε λέγομεν οἱ Συρακόσιοι ἐκδιδάσκειν μὲν 

from what follows it is clear that the 
stress is to be laid upon the first clause 
—to be equitable to us, as safe for you 
—so that we have here the same rela- 
tion of the two clauses as with re... 
καί 1.8.1; 2.89.24; 3.38.27; 4. 81.3; 
with cal... καί 89.24; 3.58.10; with 
οὔτε... οὔτε 3. 46.1.—6. τὸ μηδετέροις 
δὴ... βοηθεῖν: to aid neither forsooth 
on the ground of being allies of both, 
explan. appos. to ἐκείνην τὴν προμηθίαν. 
δή is ironical as in 13; καί placed in 
the dependent clause though really 
emphasizing the leading one. Cf.18.3. 

7. οὐ γὰρ ἔργῳ ἴσον ὥσπερ TH δικαιό- 
ματί ἐστιν : for it is not in fact equitable 
as in the article of the law (i.e. in the 
abstract). Cf. 79.8.—8. 8v ὑμᾶς ph 
ξυμμαχήσαντας : on account of your not 
giving aid. For the const., see App. on 
4. 68. 1, and Gildersleeve, Amer. J. of 
Phil. XIII, 258f. — ὁ παθών : = ὁ Συρα- 
κόσιος, a8 6 κρατῶν = ὁ ᾿Αθηναῖος (Schol.). 
Both collectives are taken up below by 
plurals (rots μέν, rods 5¢).—9. τί ἄλλο 
4: as 3. 89. 10, 58. 24; 5.98.8. H. 
612; Kr. Spr. 62, 3, 7; Kiihn. 587, 
18.— 10. ἠμύνατε, ἐκωλύσατε : the im- 
pending results being vividly repre- 
sented as if they had already occurred, 

the assumed cases are treated as if 
facts. Cf. pf. κεκωλῦσθαι 2.8.17. — σω- 
θῆναι: inf. of purpose. See on 8. 17. 
- οὐκ ἐκωλύσατε κακοὺς γενέσθαι : re- 
mark here and below (18) καὶ τοὺς Ἀθη- 
valous . . . ἁμαρτεῖν the sarcasm, the 
sense being that if the Athenians are 
really their friends, it is the duty of 
the Camarinaeans to prevent the for- 
mer from being wicked (i.e. from en- 
slaving all Sicily). For δή, see on 6 
and 10. 21.—12. τὴν κοινὴν ὠφελίαν: 
τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῶν Σικελιωτῶν Schol. 
Cf. κοινὸς ὁ κίνδυνος 84. 4. 

80, § 3-5. We beg your support 
and we declare most emphatically that 
if you do not join us you will be 
betraying Dorian kinsmen who are 
threatened by Ionians. And if the 
Athenians win, you will be the prize of 
victory which they will take; but if 

we win, you will none the less be pun- , 

ished for the dangers occasioned to 
us. Choose then either slavery that is 
for the moment without risk, or, win- 
ning with us, escape from shameful 
serfdom to the Athenians and enmity 
from us.— 14. ξυνελόντες τε λέγομεν : 
in résumé, as freq. in Thuc. Cf. 87. 
17 and see on 8. 40. 16.— of Συρακόσιοι: 



a A 4Φ 
15 οὐδὲν ἔργον εἶναι σαφῶς οὔτε ὑμᾶς οὔτε τοὺς ἄλλους περὶ ὧν 


αὐτοὶ οὐδὲν χεῖρον γιγνώσκετε' δεόμεθα δὲ καὶ μαρτυρόμεθα 

9 3 N id 9 3 ’ \ ε N 319 oN 
ἅμα, εἰ μὴ πείσομεν, ὅτι ἐπιβονυλευόμεθα μὲν ὑπὸ ᾿Ιώνων αἰεὶ 

πολεμίων, προδιδόμεθα δὲ ὑπὸ ὑμῶν Δωριῆς Awpiov: καὶ εἰ 

, e A 9 a) A A ε , ’ 
καταστρέψονται μας Αθηναῖοι, ταῖς μὲν ὑμετέραις γνώμαις 

κρατήσουσι, τῷ δ᾽ αὑτῶν ὀνόματι τιμηθήσονται, καὶ τῆς νίκης 

οὐκ &XkXov τινὰ ἄθλον ἢ τὸν τὴν νίκην παρασχόντα λήψονται: 

N 9 ΑΔ, e “A ’ Ὁ > 9 ~ 4 e 9 Ἁ 
καὶ εἰ αὖ ἡμεῖς περιεσόμεθα, τῆς αἰτίας τῶν κινδύνων οἱ αὐτοὶ 

Ἁ ᾽’ ε , A " 4 \ e A θ “os KA N 
τὴν τιμωριαν ὑφέξετε. σκοπειτε OVY καὶ αιἱρεισῦε NON ἢ τὴν 

9. 9 9 4 a Ἁ A , > ε ~ 
αὐτίκα ἀκινδύνως δουλείαν ἢ κἂν περιγενόμενοι μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν 

for similar cases of appos. to the subj. 
contained in the verb, with a view to 
increase of effect, see Kr. Spr. 50, 7, 14. 
— 15. οὐδὲν ἔργον εἶναι : οὐ χαλεπὸν εἶναι 
Schol. Cf. Hdt. 1.17.12; 8,112. 18; 
and Caes. B. G. 2.17 neque esse 
quicquam negoti.— 16. δεόμεθα : 
sc. ὑμῶν, aS 3.59.9 αἰτούμεθα ὑμᾶς. --- 
μαρτυρόμεθα : we solemnly declare. For 
const. with ὅτι, cf. 29. ὃ 2 ἐπεμαρτύρετο 
... ὅτι σωφρονέστερον εἴη xré. Cl. rightly 
made all that follows down to ὑφέξετε 
(23) dependent on μαρτυρόμεθα ὅτι, punc- 
tuating with a colon only after Δωριῶν 
(18), as well as after λήψονται (21). For 
this view speaks the fact that εἰ μὴ πεί- 
σομεν must be supplied in thought also 
in the clauses of § 4.—17. εἰ μὴ πείσο- 
pev: placed for emphasis before ὅτι. 
Cf. 86. 3, and the position of πρίν τι 
καὶ ἡμῶν ἀκοῦσαι 76. 3.— ἐπιβουλενόμεθα 
μὲν. .. προδιδόμεθα δέ: the former is 
already occurring, while the latter is 
still in the future, but the orator, vividly 
expresses the latter also in the present. 
See on 34, 25. In the thought, the first 
clause is subord. to the second. See on 
9.11.— ὑπὸ Ἰώνων αἰεὶ πολεμίων : cf. 
82.4.— 18. προδιδόμεθα δέ: gets by its 

relation (anaphora) to ἐπιβουλευόμεθα 
μέν (i.e. by those from whom it was to 
be expected), as well as by the inter- 
locked order of the words ὑπὸ ὑμῶν 
Δωριῆς Δωριῶν, the chief odium of the 

19. rats μὲν ὑμετέραις γνώμαις: by 
your decisions.— 20. τιμηθήσονται : the 
fut. pass. form is found in Dem. 19. 
223 and freq. in Attic inscriptions. 
See Meisterhans, Gr. d. att. Inschrif- 
ten,? p. 198, and Kiihn. 1, 2,112. In 
2.87.85 the Mss. have the more usual 
fut. mid. τιμήσονται.----21. dOAov: (neut.) 
prize of victory, pred. to οὐκ ἄλλον τινά. 
—22. τῆς αἰτίας τῶν κινδύνων: for caus- 
ing the dangers which we have been sub- 
jected to.—ot αὐτοί: pred., as 2. 40. 
12; 8.47.18; 4.17.8. 

23. ἤδη: now, at the decisive mo- 
ment.— τὴν αὐτίκα ἀκινδύνως δουλείαν: 
for the adv. ἀκινδύνως in attrib. posi- 
tion modifying the verbal noun, cf. τὴν 
ἄντικρυς ἐλευθερίαν 8. 64.28; διὰ τὴν... 
οὐκέτι ἑπαναγωγήν 1. 84. 26.—24. ἢ κἄν: 
when two clauses are disjunctively 
connected, the second is freq. intro- 
duced, as here, by 7 καί (cf. 85. 14, 86. 
22; 2.13.7; Hom. 6 80). ἄν gives to 



25 τούσδε Te μὴ αἰσχρῶς δεσπότας λαβεῖν καὶ THY πρὸς ἡμᾶς 
ἔχθραν μὴ ἂν βραχεῖαν γενομένην διαφυγεῖν." 

Τοιαῦτα μὲν ὁ Ἑρμοκράτης εἶπεν: ὁ δ᾽ Εὔφημος ὁ τῶν 
᾿Αθηναίων πρεσβεντὴς μετ᾽ αὐτὸν τοιάδε: 




ees 4 A 3. ἃ ~ ’ » ,’ 9 
Αφικόμεθα μὲν ἐπὶ τῆς πρότερον οὔσης ξυμμαχίας ἀνα- 
νεώσει, τοῦ δὲ Συρακοσίου καθαψαμένου ἀνάγκη καὶ περὶ τῆς 

4 Νὰ 4 aA ε 9 ’ Ὦ»Ἤ 4 » 

ἀρχῆς εἰπεῖν ὡς εἰκότως ἔχομεν" τὸ μὲν οὖν μέγιστον μαρτύριον 
Ky ν » 9 ᾽ A ~ 

αὐτὸς εἶπεν, ὅτι οἱ Ἴωνες αἰεί ποτε πολέμιοι Tors Δωριεῦσίν 

9 » ἣ Ν 9 e ~ “\ »ν ¥ 
εἰσιν. ἔχει δὲ Kal οὕτως - ἡμεῖς yap Ἴωνες ὄντες Πελοπον- 

“A δ A , 4. \ A 
νησίοις Δωριεῦσι καὶ πλείοσιν οὖσι [καὶ] παροικοῦντες 

both infs., λαβεῖν and διαφυγεῖν, hypo- 
thetical character after περιγενόμενοι 
(= εἰ περιγένοισθε). ἄν below (26) be- 
longs only to γενομένην. --- 25. τούσδε 
τε μὴ αἰσχρῶς δεσπότας λαβεῖν: the 
neg. modifies both adv. and verb: not 
shamefully to get these as masters. — 
THY πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἔχθραν : hostility with us, 
where ἀφ᾽ ἡμῶν was to be expected. 
Cf. 1. 42.8 ἔχθραν... πρὸς Κορινθίους. 
— 26. μὴ ἂν βραχεῖαν γενομένην : = ἢ 
οὐκ ἂν βραχεῖα γένοιτο (i.e. εἰ μὴ μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν 
σταίητε). μή is due to the influence of 
the inf. Kr. Spr. 67, 8, 8. 

81. After Hermocrates, the Athe- 
hian ambassador Euphemus comes 
forward. — }. elwev: aor., as always in 
Thue. in referring back to a completed 
speech. See on 2. 71.6.—6 8 Εὔφη- 
pos: already mentioned 75. 20, hence 
the art. Nothing further is known 
of his personality. In the following 
speech the idea of the interest of his 
own state is dominant. 

Speech of Euphemus, Athenian 
ambassador (82-87) 

82. It is a fact that, against the con- 
stant menace of the superior strength 

of the Lacedaemonians, we have built 
a bulwark by bringing under our rule 
those Hellenic cities which sided with 
the Persians against us.— 1. ἀφικόμεθα: 
aor. instead of pf. of an event that has 
just occurred. Cf. 1.78.2; 2. 60. 8. --- 
ἐπὶ τῆς πρότερον οὔσης ξυμμαχίας dva- 
νεώσει: although the Athenian alliance 
made with Camarina at the time of the 
command of Laches (75. § 3) was still 
formally in effect (79. 2, 88. 12), it 
could be treated as belonging to the 
past. The preceding gen. supplies the 
place of the art. with dvavewoa, as 1. 
1.11, 8.1, 11.2, etc.—2. καθαψα- 
μένου: sc. ἡμῶν. Cf. 16. 2.— περὶ τῆς 
ἀρχῆς : because the attacks of Hermoc- 
rates were directed against the estab- 
lishment of this supremacy (76. § 8). 

3. τὸ μὲν οὖν μέγιστον μαρτύριον: sc. 
ὡς εἰκότως ἄρχομεν, i.e. that race hostil- 
ity forces us to defensive precautions. 
Cf. 1. 78. 25 τεκμήριον μέγιστον αὐτὸς 
ἐποίησε. --- 4. αἰεί ποτε πολέμιοι : invet- 
erate enemies. For the expression, see 
on 2.102.10; for the fact, cf. 80. § 8. 
—-5. ἔχει δὲ καὶ οὕτως : and it is even 
80, i.e. as Hermocrates has asserted. — 
ἡμεῖς γὰρ. . . ὑπακουσόμεθα: on the 



> 4 9 4 9 9. A ε 4 A 
ἐσκεψάμεθα ὅτῳ τρόπῳ ἥκιστα αὐτῶν ὑπακουσόμεθα: Kai 8 

μετὰ τὰ Μηδικὰ ναῦς κτησάμενοι τῆς μὲν Λακεδαιμονίων 

ἀρχῆς καὶ ἡγεμονίας ἀπηλλάγημεν, οὐδὲν προσῆκον μᾶλλόν 

3 ’ e a ἃ ν ε A 3 ’, 3 / ν 79 
10 TL ἐκείνους μιν ἢ KAL NUAS EKELVOLS ἐπιτάσσειν, πλὴν καθ᾽ ὅσον 


9 “~ ’ tC » 9 N de ων ε “N λ “A 
ἐν τῷ παρόντι μεῖζον ἰσχνον, αὐτοὶ ὃε τῶν ὑπὸ βασιλεῖ 

» , , A 
πρότερον ὄντων ἡγεμόνες καταστάντες οἰκοῦμεν, νομίσαντες 

9 2 ἃ e N ,ὔ 9 iy ’ὕ » 
ἠκιστ᾽ ἂν ὑπὸ Πελοποννησίοις οὕτως͵ εἶναι, δύναμιν ἔχοντες 

 » , ν 9 . 2 δ 5. A 9590 390. 
7 ἀμυνούμεθα, Kat ἐς TO ἄκριβες ειπειν οὐδὲ ἀδίκως Κατα" 

, 4 ¥ Ν ,’ a A 
στρεψάμενοι τούς τε Ἴωνας καὶ νησιώτας, οὕς ξυγγενεῖς 
- »¥ e “A ’ ~ » δ 95. ἃ 
φασιν ὄντας ἡμᾶς Συρακόσιοι δεδουλῶσθαι. ἦλθον γὰρ ἐπὶ 

text, see App.— 7. ὅτῳ τρόπῳ ἥκιστα 
αὐτῶν ὑπακονυσόμεθα: cf. 33.12; for the 
more usual ὅπως with fut. See on 1. 107. 
18. Thuc. construes ὑπακούειν, be subject 
to, generally with gen. (87.5; 2. 62. 22; 
3. 50.18; 4.56.16; 5.84.11; 8. 5.19), 
sometimes with dat. (69. 26; 2.61.3; 
4, 63. 12). | 

kal: = atque, and s0.— 8. peta ta 
Μηδικά : belongs not so much with the 
pte. as with ἀπηλλάγημεν. ---- 9. οὐδὲν 
προσῆκον μᾶλλόν τι: πού in any way 
more fitting. The accus. abs., as 84.1; 
3.40.21; 4.95.4. GMT. 851; Kr. Spr. 
He 9,5. For μᾶλλόν τι, cf. 1. 49. 9. --- 
10. ἐπιτάσσειν: give orders. See on 1. 
140. 18.— 11. αὐτοὶ δὲ. . . ἡγεμόνες 
καταστάντες οἰκοῦμεν: in sharp con- 
trast with τῆς μὲν Λακεδαιμονίων ἀρχῆς 
καὶ ἡγεμονίας ἀτηλλάγημεν. Chief stress 
is on ἡγεμόνες καταστάντες (οἴ. 1. 78. § 2, 
95. 81 ff.), not on the finite verb, so 
that καταστάντες οἰκοῦμεν is practically 
a fuller expression for καθέσταμεν. In 

' Thuc. οἰκεῖν is sometimes so used that 

the sense inhabit, dwell in, is weakened 
into find one’s self, be so situated, i.e. a 
more concrete ἐσμέν. In this sense 
οἰκεῖν is modified by an adv. in 18. 40, 

92.26; 1.124.19; here by a ptc. The 
pres. is quite in place here, rather than. 
impf. or aor., otherwise we should 
miss in the orator’s exposition a tran- 
sition to present conditions. So Steup 
explains, with a number of the best 
editors. Cl. and others take offense at 
οἰκοῦμεν and would either add ἀσφαλῶς 
or substitute ἰσχύομεν or ἠρκοῦμεν (Cl.), 
or. ἄρχομεν (v. H.), or οἰκειούμεθα 80. 
αὐτούς (St.).— 12. νομίσαντες : as below 
καταστρεψάμενοι (14), explanatory of 
αὐτοὶ τῶν... ὄντων ἡγεμόνες καταστάν- 
τες. --- 14, ἣ ἀμννούμεθα : cf. ὅτῳ τρόπῳ 
ὑπακουσόμεθα (7). ---- ἐς τὸ ἀκριβὲς εἰπεῖν : 
inf. abs., as τὸ ξύμπαν εἰπεῖν 1. 188. 18: 
7.49.18. GMT. 777. For ἐς τὸ ἀκριβές 
= ἀκριβῶς, cf. és τὸ φανερόν 1.6.17, 28. 
26; és τὰ πρῶτα 3.39.9, 56.22. Kr.’s 
emendation ws for és (cf. Dio C. 46. 88. 
2; 51. 22.6), approved by St., etc., is 
unnecessary, and not supported by the 
Schol. ἀντὶ τοῦ ws ἀληθῶς εἰπεῖν, since 
ὡς ἀληθῶς is adv., rendering és τὸ ἀκρι- 
βές.--- 16. δεδουλῶσθαι : (mid.) on the 
matter, cf. 76. §2f. 

ἐπὶ τὴν μητρόπολιν ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς: the prep. 
is repeated, as ἐπὶ τὴν μητρόπολιν is 
appos. put first for emphasis. Cf. 3. 58. 



‘\ ’ 9479 ε “ \ “A , Ν 9 > 9 
τὴν μητρόπολιν ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς μετὰ τοῦ Μήδου καὶ οὐκ ἐτόλμησαν 
ἀποστάντες τὰ οἰκεῖα φθεῖραι, ὥσπερ ἡμεῖς ἐκλιπόντες τὴν 

πόλιν, δουλείαν δὲ αὐτοί τε ἐβούλοντο καὶ ἡμῖν τὸ αὐτὸ ἐπε- 

20 A 3 θ᾽ Ἂν , ” 9 Ψ y Ν 


aA 4 Ἁ ’ 3 4 4 > 
πλεῖστόν TE καὶ προθυμίαν ἀπροφάσιστον παρεσχόμεθα ἐς 

9 ~ A A 
τοὺς Ἕλληνας, καὶ διότι καὶ τῷ Μήδῳ ἑτοίμως τοῦτο δρῶν- 

4 ε κι » 9 \ oA δ , 
τες οὗτοι ἡμᾶς ἔβλαπτον, ἅμα δὲ τῆς πρὸς Πελοποννησίους 

3 , 9 a ἃ 9 4 ε na \ , 
ἰσχύος ὀρεγόμενοι. καὶ ov καλλιεπούμεθα ws 4 τὸν βάρβα- 

ον μόνοι καθελόντες εἰκότως ἄρνομεν ἢ ἐπ᾽ ἐλευθερίᾳ τῇ 
pov μον ς ως ἀρχομέν ἢ pia TY 

A 5 “A A A , Ἁ “~ ε », 3. A 
τῶνδε μᾶλλον 4 τῶν ξυμπάντων τε Kal TH ἡμετέρᾳ αὐτῶν 

8, and see Herbst, Ueber Cobet, p. 31.— 
18. ἀποστάντες: Sc. τοῦ Μήδου .--- ὥσ πέρ 
ἡμεῖς : 50. τὰ οἰκεῖα φθεῖραι ἐτολμήσαμεν. 
-- ἐκλιπόντες τὴν πόλιν: as 1. 18. 19, 
91.21. Cf. 1. 74.13 ἐκλιπόντες τὴν πόλιν 
καὶ τὰ οἰκεῖα διαφθείραντες .---19. δονλείαν 
δὲ αὐτοί τε ἐβούλοντο καὶ ἡμῖν τὸ αὐτὸ 
ἐπενεγκεῖν : and both themselves wished 
slavery and to bring the same upon us. 
For subst. as obj. of ἐβούλοντο, cf. τὴν 
ἀπόβασιν αὐτὸν és τὴν νῆσον διανοεῖσθαι 4. 
29. ὅ, and τὴν αὐτὴν δύναται δούλωσιν 
1,141.5. See ΑΡΡ.---τὸ αὐτό: refer- 
ring to δουλείαν, as 3. 104. 48 8 after 
ἱπποδρομίας. Cf. 72.19. 

88. We rule both because we are 
worthy of it and for the sake of secur- 
ity against the Peloponnesians, and we 
make,in order to justify our supremacy, 
no fine speeches about our conduct in 
the Persian wars. In Sicily, too, we 
appear in the interest of our security, 
and our sole object is together with 
our friends so to order things that we 
shall be freed of all danger.—1. ἀνθ᾽ av 
ἄξιοί τε ὄντες ἅμα ἄρχομεν... dpeyd- 
μενοι : Athenian rule (ἄρχομεν) is based 
on the one hand upon worth (ἄξιοί re 
ὄντες ἄμα), onthe other, upon the desire 

for strength against the Peloponnesians 
(ἅμα δὲ κτὲ.). Again the claim of worth 
(ἄξιοι ὄντες) is based on two grounds (ὅτι 
. καὶ διότι... ἔβλαπτον). --- ἄξιοι 
ὄντες ἄρχομεν : cf. 1. 76. 81. --- ναντικὸν 
πλεῖστόν τε καὶ προθυμίαν... ἐς τοὺς 
Ἕλληνας: cf. 1. 14. ξ 1, 2. τε is placed 
after ναυτικὸν πλεῖστον as if it were a 
single word. —2. ἀπροφάσιστον : with- 
out pretexts or excuses, answering to the 
adv. in 72. 25.—8. καὶ τῷ Μήδῳ érol- 
pws τοῦτο δρῶντες : even for the Mede 
doing this willingly. The reproach is 
sharpened by καί as well as by ἑτοίμως. 
For τοῦτο δρῶντες, standing for ναυτικὸν 
παρεχόμενοι, 866 On 1. ὅ. 11. For the dat. 
with δρῶντες, cf. Plato, Legg. 713 » οἷον 
δρῶμεν τοῖς ποιμνίοις. Kr. Spr. 46, 12, 3. 

5. οὐ καλλιεπούμεθα κτὲ.: we do not 
say in fine phrases that etc. For a simi- 
lar frank admission of the policy of 
expediency, cf. 5. 89.—rdv βάρβαρον 
μόνοι καθελόντες : such a claim would 
have been correct at most for Mara- 
thon (cf. 1. 78. ὃ 4). καθελόντες, having 
overthrown, as 1.77.20; 8.18.82; 4. 
85. 7.— 6. εἰκότως ἄρχομεν : cf. 82.3.— 
ἐπ᾿ ἐλευθερίᾳ. . . κινδυνεύσαντες : refer- 
ring to 76.§4.—7. τῶνδε: i.e. τῶν τε 






, “A A 9 ,’ \ , 
κινδυνεύσαντες. πᾶσι δὲ ἀνεπίφθονον THY προσηκουσαν 

’ 9 [4 
σωτηρίαν ἐκπορίζεσθαι. 

ee VA “A ε , 9 , 9 \ 3 A (ὃ ’ 
Καὶ νῦν τῆς ἡμετέρας ἀσφαλείας ἐνεκα καὶ ἐνθάδε παρόν- 

ε ~ N e¢ “ἡ 9 N , > ‘4 \ 3 
TES ὁρῶμεν καὶ ὑμῖν ταὐτὰ ξυμφέροντα. ἀποφαίνομεν δὲ ἐξ 8 
ὧν οἵδε τε διαβάλλουσι καὶ ὑμεῖς μάλιστα ἐπὶ τὸ φοβερώτε- 
ρον ὑπονοεῖτε, εἰδότες τοὺς περιδεῶς ὑποπτεύοντάς τι λόγον 

A on 9 
μὲν ἡδονῇ τὸ παραντίκα τερπομένους, TH δ᾽ ἐγχειρήσει VOTE 
ρον τὰ ξυμφέροντα πράσσοντας. τήν τε γὰρ ἐκεῖ ἀρχὴν εἰρή- 

Ν ? » ἃ \ 3 ’ δ N > AN 9 \ 
καμεν διὰ δέος ἔχειν καὶ τὰ ἐνθάδε διὰ τὸ αὐτὸ ἥκειν μετὰ 

᾿Ιώνων καὶ τῶν νησιωτῶν. --- 8. πᾶσι δὲ 
ἀνεπίφθονον. .. ἐκπορίζεσθαι : no one 
however is to be blamed for providing for 
his own safety, as we have done by 
the subjugation of the Ionians and 
islanders. Cf. 1. 75. ὃ δ. 

10. καὶ viv: as 86.4,14; 89.10.— 
11. ὁρῶμεν καὶ ὑμῖν ταὐτὰ ξυμφέροντα: 
Cl. rightly follows Haacke in adopt- 

ing ταὐτά of E for ταῦτα of the other’ 

Mss. ταῦτα (τὸ ἡμᾶς παρεῖναι) is hardly 
satisfactory, because the presence of 
the Athenians in Sicily could not yet 
be represented as of itself advanta- 
geous to the Camarinaeans; that de- 
pended entirely on the motive of their 
coming. But the assertion of a mutual 
interest in hindering Syracusan su- 
premacy over all Sicily was from the 
standpoint of the Athenians quite 

ἀποφαίνομεν δέ: (sc. τοῦτο) and this 
we prove to you. — ἐξ ὧν οἵδε τε Sta BdA- 
λουσι κτὲ.: referring to the objects of 
the Athenians in their Sicilian enter- 
prise, which were discredited by the 
Syracusans and suspected in the high- 
est degree by the Camarinaeans (cf. 
88.§1), but if correctly conceived, acc. 
to the orator, must lead the Camari- 
naeans to recognize that their interests 

were the same as those of the Atheni- 
ans.— 12. οἵδε διαβάλλονσι: cf. 76. § 2; 
77.§1,2.— ἐπὶ τὸ φοβερώτερον : with 
exaggerated fear. Cf. ἐπὶ τὸ φοβερώτερον 
ἀγγέλλεσθαι Dion. H. Arch. 1.57; Dio 
C. 47.24.1. See on ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖον 84. 
48.---18, λόγον ἡδονῇ: cf. ἡδονῇ λό- 
γων 8. 40. 7; ἀκοῆς ἡδονῇ 8. 88. 31.—14. 
τὸ παραυτίκα τερπομένους : of the se- 
ductive effect of speech, as 2. 41. 14 τὸ 
αὐτίκα τέρπειν of poetry. — τῇ δ᾽ éy- 
χειρήσει : (temporal) when it comes to 

15. yap: refers to ἀποφαίνομεν (11). 
—etpfhxapev: cf. 82. §2.—16. καὶ τὰ 
ἐνθάδε. . . καταστησόμενοι : (86. λέγο- 
μενὴ and (we say) that we are come for 
the same reason, with our friends to place 
matters here on a safe footing, i.e. to 
secure the Siceliotes against the lust 
for rule on the part of the Syracusans. 
Cl. put a semicolon after πράσσοντας 
and explained the γάρ clause as taking 
up ἀποφαίνομεν (“ now then, as we have 
often said ...,so wedeclare’’). Butit 
seems hardly to be doubted that Thuc., 
if he had come to revise his work, 
would have inserted λέγομεν or φαμέν, 
and therefore it is unnecessary, with 
St., to change ἥκειν tO ἥκομεν. ---- διὰ τὸ 
αὐτό: i.e. διὰ δέος, not anxious fear, 








τῶν φίλων ἀσφαλῶς καταστησόμενοι, καὶ ov δουλωσόμενοι, 

μὴ παθεῖν δὲ μᾶλλον τοῦτο κωλύσοντες. 


Ὑπολάβῃ δὲ μηδεὶς ws οὐδὲν προσῆκον ὑμῶν κηδόμεθα, 

“ 9 A ἃ Ν ¥ 
γνοὺς ὅτι σῳζομένων ὑμῶν καὶ διὰ τὸ μὴ ἀσθενεῖς ὑμᾶς ov- 

9 , 4 4 a 4 4 “ 
TAS ἀντέχειν Συρακοσίοις σσον ἂν τούτων πεμψάντων τινὰ 

δύ ’ ε al λ 4 A N 9 ᾿ 
ὕύναμιν Πελοποννησίοις ἡμεῖς βλαπτοίμεθα. καὶ ἐν τούτῳ 

,’ » e an ‘N 4 ’᾽ ἃ Ἁ ’ 
προσήκετε ἤδη ἡμῖν τὰ μέγιστα. διόπερ καὶ τοὺς Λεοντίνους 
ν . A “~ 
εὔλογον κατοικίζειν μὴ ὑπηκόους ὥσπερ τοὺς ξυγγενεῖς αὐτῶν 
Ἂ 3 9 , 9 5 ε ’ 9 9 A , 
τοὺς ἐν Εὐβοίᾳ, ἀλλ᾽ ws δυνατωτάτους, ἵνα ἐκ τῆς σφετέρας 

9 »” A e ov e A \, Ν Ν 9 A 
ομοροι OVTES τοῖσδε ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν λυπηροὶ ὦσι. τὰ μὲν Yap €KEL 

N 9 ἃ 9 “Ὁ Ν, ‘\ ’ νε ’ 
καὶ αὐτοὶ ἀρκοῦμεν πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους, καὶ ὁ Χαλκιδεύς, 

ὃν ἀλόγως ἡμᾶς φησι δουλωσαμένους τοὺς ἐνθάδε ἐλευθε- 
ροῦν, ξύμφορος ἡμῖν ἀπαράσκενος ὧν καὶ χρήματα μόνον 

but well-grounded apprehension. — 

μετὰ τῶν φίλων : the real kernel of the 

argument: ‘‘we wish only common 
action.”> —17. καὶ οὐ δονυλωσόμενοι : 
sc. τὰ évOdde.— 18. ph παθεῖν τοῦτο: 
sc. ὑπὸ Συρακοσίων. τοῦτο, i.e. τὸ δου- 

84. We have great interest in the 
maintenance of your independence and 
power and in setting up again a strong 
Leontini. At home, on the contrary, 
it is to our advantage that our allies 
be weak. —1. ὑπολάβῃ μηδείς: order as 
in 8.13. 22; 4. 95. 8. ---οὐδὲν προσῆκον: 
see on 82. 9.—2. σῳζομένων ὑμῶν kal διὰ 
To... ἀντέχειν: gen. abs. and prep. 
clause correlated to give the grounds 
for 871... σσον avy... βλαπτοίμεθα. 
μή belongs only to ἀσθενεῖς ὄντας, not to 
ἀντέχειν. --- 8. ἧσσον: the less, minus, 
belongs to both ptc. and finite verb. 

4, καὶ ἐν τούτῳ προσήκετε ἤδη ἡμῖν 
τὰ μέγιστα : Opp. to οὐδὲν προσῆκον (1), 
and in this you become at once our chief 
concern. For τὰ μέγιστα, οἷ. τὰ δεύτερα 

78.21; τὰ κράτιστα 1.19.8. Thereisa 
play on the double sense of προσῆκον 
and προσήκετε, the orator assuming by 
the pers. const. a sort of relationship 
where there is no blood-kinship. — 
5. διόπερ: for this very reason, refer- 
ring to ἧσσον ἂν. . . βλαπτοίμεθα. --- 
6. εὔλογον : (sc. ἐστιν) answer to 76. 
7 ff. — μὴ ὑπηκόους : pred. (= wore μὴ 
ὑπηκόους εἶναι), aS also ὡς δυνατωτάτους. 
--- τοὺς ξυγγενεῖς: acc. by attraction 
to τοὺς Λεοντίνους, not connected with 
κατοικίζειν.---- 8. τοῖσδε: i.e. τοῖς Συρα- 
κοσίοις. ----᾿λνπηροὶ ὦσι: for expression 
and thought, cf. 18. δ. 

τὰ μὲν ἐκεῖ : as to matters there. Cf. 
τὰ δὲ ἐνθάδε below (12). — 9. καὶ αὐτοί : 
even ourselves, i.e. alone. Cf. 87. 3.— 
ὁ Χαλκιδεύς: see on 78. 1.—10. φησι: 
direct reference to 76.§2.—11. ξύμ- 
φορος (sc. ἐστιν). .. ov Kal... dé 
ρων: (pers. const.) for the structure 
of the sent., cf. 4. 44. 3 σαν... οἱ 
ἱππῆς ὠφέλιμοι ξυμμαχόμενοι, and see 
App. on 4. 68.2. --- ἀπαράσκενος ὧν καὶ 




φέρων, τὰ δὲ ἐνθάδε καὶ Λεοντῖνοι καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι φίλοι ὅτι 

μάλιστα αὐτονομούμενοι. 

“»Ανὸ ὶ δὲ , Ἅ aN 3 ἈΝ 9 , "δὲ 1X gy 1 
pt δὲ τυράννῳ ἡ πόλει ἀρχὴν ἐχούσῃ οὐδὲν ἄλογον ὅ 

, 9 (1.9 3 A 9 \ 4 N 9 \ ἰὴ 
τι ξυμφέρον οὐδ᾽ οἰκεῖον ὅ τι μὴ πιστόν: πρὸς ἕκαστα δὲ δεῖ 
Aa 9 Ν A ’ ἮΝ A , YN εκ “Ἀ 
ἢ ἐχθρὸν ἢ φίλον μετὰ καιροῦ γίγνεσθαι. καὶ ἡμᾶς τοῦτο 
ὠφελεῖ ἐνθάδε, οὐκ ἣν τοὺς φίλους κακώσωμεν, ἀλλ᾽ Hv ol 
3 Ν Ν Ν ‘a , ©? 2Q 7 s 9 A \ 
ἐχθροὶ διὰ THY τῶν φίλων ῥώμην ἀδύνατοι ὦσιν. ἀπιστεῖν δὲ 3 
οὐ χρή: καὶ γὰρ τοὺς ἐκεῖ ξυμμάχους ὡς ἕκαστοι χρήσιμοι 
ἐξηγούμεθα, Χίους μὲν καὶ Μηθυμναίους νεῶν παροκωχῇ 

χρήματα μόνον φέρων : cf. 1. 99. 11 χρή- 

ματα ἐτάξαντο ἀντὶ τῶν νεῶν τὸ ἱκνούμενον 
ἀνάλωμα φέρειν. In fact they were, 
however, in case of need, to furnish 
troops also (cf. 2.9.§5; 7.57. § 4).— 
12. καὶ Λεοντῖνοι xré.: sc. ξύμφοροι ἡμῖν 
εἰσι.---ὅτι μάλιστα αὐτονομούμενοι: Opp. 
ἴο ὑπηκόους (θ). 

85. Whoever has a supremacy to 
maintain must look solely to self- 
interest, and it is to our advantage to 
have our Sicilian friends so powerful 
that our enemies can undertake nothing 
against us. Mistrust of us is unwar- 
ranted ; for, as at home relations with 
our allies have been so shaped as in 
each case was most advantageous for 
us, so in Sicily we have been influenced 
solely by self-interest, that is, by fear 
of the designs of the Syracusans. — 
1. ἀνδρὶ δὲ «ré.: frank admission of 
the same kind of policy as guided the 
Athenians against the Melians 5. 85- 
118. Cf. esp. 5. 89. ----ἀνδρὶ τυράννῳ: 
for generic and specific term united, 
as often, see on 1. 115. 9. — πόλει ἀρχὴν 
ἐχούσῃ: as 2.65.45. For the connec- 
tion with ἀνδρὶ τυράννῳ, cf. τυραννίδα 
ἔχετε τὴν ἀρχήν 3.87.9 (and 2. 63. 8). 
— ἄλογον : inconsistent, i.e. contrary to 

a well-considered line of action, self- 
interest being recognized as the test 
(λόγος) in political life. —2. ξυμφέρον : 
without ἐστί, as in 3.44.5. So often 
ἄξιον, δεινόν, δίκαιον. ---- οἰκεῖον: of fam- 
ily or tribal relationship. In politics 
even kinship is of value only as it con- 
tributes to self-interest. — πρὸς txa- 
ora: in every case.—3. μετὰ καιροῦ: 
as 8.27.12, more significant than é» 
καιρῷ : “ἴῃ accord with opportunity,”’ 
i.e. according to circumstances, — τοῦ- 
το: looks forward, as in 55.8. Seeon _ 
4. 114. 19. 

6. τοὺς ἐκεῖ ξυμμάχους : this read- 
ing οὗ C is adopted by Steup (with 
Bk., Kr., Hude, Oxford text, etc.), on 
account of the following appositives 
(Χίους μὲν xré.). Pp., St., Cl., Bm., 
and M. keep the reading of all the 
other Mss. τοῖς ξυμμάχοις. Thuc. has 
ἐξηγεῖσθαι With accus. 1. 71.27, ἐξηγεῖ- 
σθαι with dat. 3. 55. 14.— ὡς ἕκαστοι 
χρήσιμοι: as they were severally useful 
to us. — 7, ἐξηγούμεθα :᾿ the manner of 
the leadership is defined more exactly 
in what follows, (1) by adj. (αὐτονόμου:), 
(2) by adv. (βιαιότερον), (3) by pte. 
(ἐλευθέρως Evppaxodyras). — Μηθυμναί- 
ovs: who alone of the Lesbians retained 



3 , δ ΝΝ ‘ , , A 
αὐτονόμους, τοὺς δὲ πολλοὺς χρημάτων βιαιότερον φορᾷ, 

¥ N Ἁ , 3 ’ὕ “~ ’ἤ 4 
ἄλλους δὲ καὶ πάνυ ἐλευθέρως ξυμμαχοῦντας, καίπερ νησιώ- 

3, Ἁ 3 ? , 3 ’ἤ 9 ’ 3 Ἁ 
10 τας ὄντας καὶ εὐλήπτους, διότι ἐν χωρίοις ἐπικαίροις εἰσὶ 


Ἁ \ , 9 δ 3 ’ > ON ‘ Ν 
περὶ τὴν Πελοπόννησον. ὥστε καὶ τἀνθάδε εἰκὸς πρὸς τὸ 

λυσιτελοῦν καί, ὃ λέγομεν, ἐς Συρακοσίους δέος καθίστασθαι. 

9 A \ 517 ε κα iN an 2 N A e , 
ἀρχῆς yap ἐφίενται ὑμῶν καὶ βούλονται ἐπὶ τῴ ἡμετέρῳ 

ξ ’ ε A“ ε A: ’ὕ a ἃ 9.» 4 9 4 
υστήσαντες ὑμᾶς ὑπόπτῳ, Bia ἡ Kal κατ᾽ ἐρημίαν, ἀπρά- 

ε “A 9 ’ 3 ἃ ¥ ~ ’ 3 , 
κτων ἡμῶν ἀπελθόντων, αὐτοὶ ἄρξαι τῆς Σικελίας. ἀνάγκη 

δέ a “A ‘ 9 , ¥ \ e a » ¥ > Ἁ 
é, ἣν ξυστῆτε πρὸς αὐτούς. οὔτε γὰρ ἡμῖν ἔτι ἔσται ἰσχὺς 

their autonomy after 427 B.c. Cf. 8. 
50. § 1, 2.— νεῶν παροκωχῇ: aS χρη- 
μάτων φορᾷ (8), dat. of attendant cir- 
cumstance. See on 12.6. παροκωχῇ for 
wapox7 of the Mss., acc. to analogy of 
dvoxwx and διοκωχή (8. 87. 8) and the 
express testimony of Photius (s.v.). 
See St., Qu. Gr.? p.44. Cf. 7.57. § 4 Χίοι 
φόρου οὐχ ὑποτελεῖς ὄντες, vais δὲ wapé- 
χοντες αὐτόνομοι. . -Μηθυμναῖοι ναυσὶ καὶ οὐ 
φόρῳ ὑπήκοοι.----ὅ8. χρημάτων βιαιότερον 
φορᾷ: referring to the φόρον ὑποτελεῖς 
ξύμμαχοι Of 1.19.1, 80.14; 7. 57.17. 
— 9. νησιώτας... Πελοπόννησον : the 
reference is to the Corcyraeans, Ceph- 
allenians, and Zacynthians. Cf. 7. 57. 
§7. The Argives are disregarded. 

11. πρός: secundum. Seeon 68. 8. 
— 12. 6 λέγομεν : cf. 83. § 4.— ἐς Συρα- 
κοσίονυς : with a view to fear of the Syra- 
cusans (πρὸς τό belonging to δέος as well 
as to λυσιτελοῦν). Cf. 8.14.1 τὰς τῶν 
Ἑλλήνων és ὑμᾶς ἐλπίδας, and 3.37.3 
διὰ τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν ἀδεὲς καὶ ἀνεπιβούλευτον 
πρὸς ἀλλήλους καὶ ἐς τοὺς ξυμμάχους 
τὸ αὐτὸ ἔχετε. --- καθίστασθαι : SC. ἡμᾶς. 
-- 18. ἀρχῆς γὰρ... πρὸς ὑμᾶς εἶεν: 
proof that Athenian fear of the Syra- 
cusans is well grounded. — ὑμῶν : in- 
cluding all the Siceliotes except the 

Syracusans, as ὑμᾶς in 14 and 18; so 
also ξυστῆτε in 16. --- ἐπὶ τῷ ἡμετέρῳ 
ὑπόπτῳ : on the ground of suspicion of 
us. For poss. pron. as obj. gen., cf. 1. 
83. 18, and see G. 999; H. 694; Kiihn. 
454, ~.11.—14. ξυστήσαντες ὑμᾶς: hav- 
ing united you. Cf. the intr. ξυστῆναι 
below (16).— βίᾳ ἢ καὶ κατ᾽ ἐρημίαν : 
(sc. τῶν κωλυσόντων) by force or in absence 
(of those who will hinder), referring to 
the Syracusans and to be taken with 
αὐτοὶ ἄρξαι τῆς Σικελίας. For κατ᾽ ἐρημίαν, 
** because they have a free field,”’ cf. 
Dem. 3. 27. The above is Cl.’s expla- 
nation, approved by St. Some editors 
refer the clause to the Camarinaeans, 
with the Schol. καὶ βούλονται... . ὑφ᾽ αὑ- 
τοῖς ποιήσασθαι τὴν Σικελίαν, ἤτοι Bla κρα- 
τήσαντες ὑμῶν, ἢ μόνους ἀπολαβόντες, ἡμῶν 
ἀπράκτων ἀπελθόντων. Steup refers it, 
with Haacke, to ἀπράκτων ἡμῶν ἀπελθόν- 
των (removing the comma after épy- 
μίαν), suggesting that in case of a union 
of all Siceliotes the withdrawal of the 
Athenians might have been due to de- 
feat or merely to lack of allies (cf. 86. 
22 ἢ ἄπρακτον ἀπελθεῖν ἢ καὶ σφαλεῖσαν). 
—15. ἀνάγκη δέ: τὸ ἄρξαι Συρακοσί- 
ous τῆς ὅλης Σικελίας Schol.—16. ξυ- 
στῆτε πρὸς αὐτούς : as 1.1.6, 15.10. — 




, > é ”~ 3 ’ y 9 ζω 
τοσαύτη ἐς ἐν ξυστᾶσα εὐμεταχείριστος, οὔθ᾽ οἵδ᾽ ἀσθενεῖς 

ἄν ἡμῶν μὴ παρόντων πρὸς ὑμᾶς εἶεν. 

ce K , g ἴω 4 ὃ a 9 ἃ ᾽ν 2 a, Ἁ ‘N 1 
αι OTM TAUTA [LN OOKEL, AUTO TO ἐργον ἐλέγχει. TO yap 

, e ἴω 9 ’ 9 ¥ δ a ld 
πρότερον ἡμᾶς ἐπηγάγεσθε οὐκ ἄλλον τινὰ προσείοντες φό- 

¥ 3 4 e ΄ ε “ 4 , 9 
Bov 7, εἰ περιοψόμεθα ὑμᾶς ὑπὸ Συρακοσίοις γενέσθαι, ὅτι 

4 9 . , 4 ~ 4 ? 4 \ e “A 
και QAuTOL κινδυνεύσ ομέεν. Και νυν OU δίκαιον, OT cp Και ημας 2 

ἠξιοῦτε λόγῳ πείθειν, τῷ αὐτῷ ἀπιστεῖν, οὐδ᾽ ὅτι δυνάμει 

’ » Ἁ “ 9 “ , ε 4 ‘ 
μείζονι πρὸς τὴν τῶνδε ἰσχὺν πάρεσμεν ὑποπτεύεσθαι, πολὺ 

11. ἐς ἐν ξυστᾶσα: i.e. by the union of 
the Syracusans with all of the Siceli- 
otes.— εὐμεταχείριστος : casy to handle. 
Cf. Xen. Anab. 2. 6. 20, and the appar- 
ent imitation of our passage in Xen. 
Hell. 5. 2. 15 εἰ τοσαύτη δύναμις προσγε- 
νήσεται τῇ Te Αθηναίων καὶ Θηβαίων ἰσχύι, 
ὁρᾶτε ὅπως μὴ οὐκέτι εὐμεταχείριστα 
ἔσται ἐκεῖνα ὑμῖν. Cf. δυσμεταχείριστος 
Hdt. 7. 236. 12.— οὔθ᾽ οἵδ᾽ ἀσθενεῖς ἂν 

. . πρὸς ὑμᾶς elev: litotes. οἵδε refers 
to the Syracusans. 

86. On your former summons you 
yourselves held before us the danger 
from the Syracusans threatening us as 
well as you; and will you now give no 
credence to assurances from us that 
agree with your former declarations ? 
Though we are here with an army 
superior to the Syracusan forces, we 
can never win in this contest without 
your help, and if we wished to make 
conquests here, we could not maintain 
them on account of the distance. We 
Athenians and you Siceliotes depend 
upon one another ; the danger is closer 
to you, and if you reject our aid, you 
will repent when it is too late.—1. αὐτὸ 
τὸ ἔργον: the fact itself. —+1d πρότε- 
pov: in 427 B.c., when Camarina stood 
with the Leontines and the rest of the 
Chalcidian cities against Syracuse (3. 

86. ὃ 2 ff.).— 2. ἔπηγάγεσθε : as in 85. 
§ 3, the Camarinaeans appear through- 
out c. 86 as representatives of all the 
Siceliotes except the Syracusans. So 
ὑμῶν also 817. 8. --- οὐκ ἄλλον τινὰ προ- 
σείοντες φόβον ἡ: shaking before us no 
other weapon of alarm than. The meta- 
phor seems to be derived from the 
brandishing of swords or spears before 
enemies to frighten them (cf. 4. 126. 22 
ἡ ἐπανάσεισις τῶν ὅπλων»), and is here per- 
haps a reminiscence of Homer’s (A 167) 
αὐτὸς ἐπισσείῃσιν ἐρεμνὴν αἰγίδα πᾶσιν. 
Cf. 5.17. 7 παρασκενὴ προεπανεσείσθη ἀπὸ 
τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων, and Eur. H. F. 1209 
τί μοι προσείων χεῖρα σημαίνεις φόνον; ; — 
8. ὅτι καὶ αὐτοὶ κινδυνεύσομεν : placed 
after the cond., as 80. 17. 

4. καὶ νῦν: see on 83. 10. — καὶ ἡμᾶς: 
such prolepsis is freq. in rel. sents. 
The underlying thought is τῷ λόγῳ ᾧπερ 
ἡμᾶς πείθειν ἠξιοῦτε, καὶ ὑμᾶς πείθεσθαι 
δίκαιον. ---- 5. ἠξιοῦτε πείθειν : emphati- 
cally connected also 87. 4.----δυνάμει μεί- 
ἴονι πρὸς τὴν τῶνδε ἰσχύν : with a force 
disproportioned to the strength of Syra- 
cuse. See on 31.48. Kr. and Jowett 
explain, ‘‘greater than before.’’— 
6. ὑποπτεύεσθαι : (pass.) the context 
requires ἡμᾶς to be understood here, 
though above with ἀπιστεῖν sc. ὑμᾶ:. 
Steup, contending that all three infs. 



Q A a) 9 A e A 4 ¥ 9 A 
δὲ μᾶλλον τοῖσδε ἀπιστεῖν. ἡμεῖς μέν ye οὔτε ἐμμεῖναι δυ- 8 

νατοὶ μὴ μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν, εἴ τε καὶ γενόμενοι κακοὶ κατεργασαΐί- 

θ ou a ὃ δ “»,ὕ Nas \ 3 , 
μέσχζα, AOVVATOL Κατασχέιν OLA μῆκος TE πλοῦν Και ATOPLa 

10 φυλακῆς πόλεων μεγάλων καὶ TH παρασκευῇ ἠπειρωτίδων ' 

οἵδε δὲ οὐ στρατοπέδῳ, πόλει δὲ μείζονι τῆς ἡμετέρας πα- 

, 3 “A e A > 7 3 ’ ’ ν 
ρουσίας ἐποικοῦντες ὑμῖν αἰεί τε ἐπιβουλεύουσι Kal, ὁταν 

καιρὸν λάβωσιν ἑκάστου, οὐκ ἀνιᾶσιν (ἔδειξαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλα 

0 Ἃ \ 93 ld Ἁ “ “ 2 AN Ἃ A 
non Kat τὰ ἐς Λεοντίνους), καὶ νῦν τολμῶσιν ἐπὶ TOUS ταῦτα 

must have the same subj. (ὑμᾶς), takes 
ὑποπτεύεσθαι as middle; but this is 
without parallel. 

7. ἡμεῖς μέν ye: we certainly. For 
the combination, see on 1. 40. 15.— 
ἐμμεῖναι : sc. ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ, to maintain 
ourselves in ϑιὲοϊϊψ. ---- 8. μὴ μεθ᾿ ὑμῶν: 
= dvev ὑμῶν. See on μὴ μετὰ νόμων 8. 
62.16. Kr. Spr. 67,9 and 10,4. See 
St., Symb. Phil. Bonn. p. 887. --- εἴ re 
Kal γενόμενοι κακοὶ κατεργασαίμεθα : Sc. 
τὴν Σικελίαν, mocking answer to the 
insinuations of Hermocrates, 80. 10. 
κατεργάσασθαι διηα κατασχεῖν in the same 
connection as in 11. 1.—9. ἀπορίᾳ 
φυλακῆς. . . ἠπειρωτίδων: Schol. οὐ 
δυνάμενοι φυλάττειν πόλεις μεγάλας καὶ 
παρασκευὴν ἠπειρωτικὴν παρεσκευασμένας, 
τοῦτ᾽ ἐστι ἱππεῦσι καὶ πεζῷ ἰσχνούσας, 
Cf. 1.35.21 ναντι- 
κῆς kal οὐκ ἠπειρώτιδος τῆς ξυμμαχίας δι- 
δομένης. ----11. οἵδε δὲ. . . ἐποικοῦντες 
ὑμῖν : and these not with a camp, but in 
hostile proximity to you with a city 
greater than our present force. For a 
similar comparison of an attack men- 
aced by a near-by city with one froma 
camp, cf. 37. § 2.---πόλει : with ἐποικοῦν- 
τες ὑμῖν. For this dat., cf. 3. 98. 7 φοβού- 
μενοι μὴ σφίσι μεγάλῃ ἰσχύι παροικῶσιν. 
- τῆς ἡμετέρας παρουσίας: abstract 
for concrete (ἡμῶν τῶν παρόντων). Cf, 7. 

αὐτοὶ ναυτικοὶ ὄντες. 

24. 14 ἡ ἐπαγωγὴ τῶν ἐπιτηδείων = τὰ 
ἐπαγόμενα ἐπιτήδεια. For Steup’s view 
of the passage, which he considers cor- 
rupt, see App. — 12. ἐποικοῦντες ὑμῖν: 
cf. 7. 27. 10 ὕστερον δὲ φρουραῖς ἀπὸ τῶν 
πόλεων κατὰ διαδοχὴν χρόνου ἐπιούσαις 
τῇ χώρᾳ ἐπῳκεῖτο. --- ἐπιβουλεύουσι 
καὶ... οὐκ ἀνιᾶσιν: cf. 18. 14 τοῖς μὲν 
ἐπιβουλεύειν, τοὺς δὲ μὴ ἀνιέναι. -- ὅταν 
καιρὸν λάβωσιν ἑκάστου : whenever they 
have got an opportunity against each of 
you. Some editors consider ἑκάστου 
neut., ‘each attack.” (cf. ἔργου καιρῷ 2. 
40.2); but the masc. agrees better with 
the foll. example from the Leontines. 
For the sing., cf. ὁ Χαλκιδεύς 84. 9. — 
18. (ἔδειξαν δὲ. . . καὶ τὰ és Acovri- 
vous): they have given both other examples 
already and especially that of the Leon- 
tines. ἄλλα cogn. acc. (=Fbeakav δείγματα 
ἄλλα). For ἤδη, see on 7.77.2. With 
τὰ és Λεοντίνους, cf. τὰ és Βοιωτούς 5. 39. 
16. Most editors make this remark 
parenthetical and punctuate the whole 
sent. as in this text; for Steup’s vari- 
ant arrangement, see App. 

14. καὶ viv τολμῶσιν : and now they 
make bold, characterizing the represen- 
tations of the Syracusans based, acc. 
to the Athenians, on a false charge, 
the falsity of which is emphasized esp. 
by ws ἀναισθήτους (‘as if you were 



15 κωλύοντας καὶ ἀνέχοντας τὴν Σικελίαν μέχρι τοῦδε μὴ 


e 3» 3 Ἁ 4 A e A € 9 , Ἁ 
ὑπ᾽ αὐτοὺς εἶναι παρακαλεῖν ὑμᾶς ὡς ἀναισθήτους. πολὺ 

\ 9 AN 3 ’ ’ ε A 9 ζω 
δὲ ἐπὶ ἀληθεστέραν γε σωτηρίαν ἡμεῖς ἀντιπαρακαλοῦμεν, 

δεόμενοι τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν ἀπ᾽ ἀλλήλων ἀμφοτέροις μὴ προ- 

᾿ ’ 4 A \ \ ¥ , aN 
διδόναι, νομίσαι τε τοῖσδε μὲν καὶ ἄνευ ξυμμάχων αἰεὶ 

ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἑτοίμην διὰ τὸ πλῆθος εἶναι ὁδόν, ὑμῖν δ᾽ οὐ πολ- 

λάκις παρασχήσειν μετὰ τοσῆσδε ἐπικουρίας ἀμύνασθαι: 

ἃ 3 A e ’ a » 9 9 3 λθ ΄“)λ A \ a) 
ὴν εἰ τῷ ὑπόπτῳ ἢ ἄπρακτον ἐάσετε ἀπελθεῖν ἡ Kal σφαλει- 

σαν, ἔτι βουλήσεσθε καὶ πολλοστὸν μόριον αὐτῆς ἰδεῖν, ὅτε 

οὐδὲν ἔτι περανεῖ παραγενόμενον ὑμῖν. 

foolish enough to believe them’’).— 
ἐπὶ τοὺς ταῦτα κωλύοντας : against those 
who prevented these things, i.e. what the 
Syracusans undertook against the Le- 
ontines. — 15. dvéxovras... μὴ ba av- 
τοὺς εἶναι: hindered Sicily up to this 
time from being under them. ἀνέχειν 
(abs.), hinder, hence μή with inf. Cf. 
Bekker, Anecd. Gr. p. 400, where this 
passage and one from Aristophanes 
are cited in proof that λέγεται ἀνέχειν 
καὶ τὸ κωλύειν. GMT. 815,1; Kr. Spr. 
67, 12, 3.— 16. ὑπ᾽ αὐτοὺς εἶναι : see on 
1.110. 4; and Herbst, Ueber Cobet, 
p. 27 ff. Van H. writes ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῖς. 
πολύ: modifying ἀληθεστέραν, but 
by its position before the prep. em- 
phasizing the antithesis. Cf. πολὺ δὲ ἐν 
πλέονι αἰτίᾳ 1. 85. 10. ---- 17. ἀντιπαρα- 
καλοῦμεν: one of Thuc.’s forty-one 
ἅπαξ εἰρημένα compounds with ἀντι--. 

See App. on 4. 80. 4. --- 18. τὴν ὑπάρ- . 

χουσαν ἀπ᾽ ἀλλήλων ἀμφοτέροις : sc. 
σωτηρίαν. --- προδιδόναι : strong expres- 
sion for ‘‘give up,’’ here τῷ “ΤΟΝ 
away.’’— 19. νομίσαι re: Hude writes 
δέ with Cod. M, on the ground that 
this clause must be adversative to the 

preceding, but unnecessarily.—20. διὰ 
τὸ πλῆθος : on account of their numeri- 
cal superiority. See on 2.11. 12.— 
21. παρασχήσειν : impers. of an oppor- 
tunity presenting itself. See on 1. 120. 
18.— 22. τῷ ὑπόπτῳ: causal dat. Cf. 
τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ὑπόπτῳ 85. 13.— ἄπρακτον 
ἀπελθεῖν: οἵ. 85.14 ἀπράκτων ἡμῶν dred- 
θόντων. --- ἢ καί : see on 80. 24. — 23. ἔτι 
βουλήσεσθε: you will yet wish, apod. of 
monitory cond. GMT. 447.—24. οὐδὲν 
ἔτι wepavet: will no longer accomplish 
anything, i.e. help will do no good after 
the Syracusans have subjugated all 
Sicily. In the conclusion of this chap- 
ter we have the rhetorical answer to 
Hermocrates’ words in 78. ὃ 8 καὶ εἰ 
γνώμῃ ἁμάρτοι, τοῖς αὑτοῦ κακοῖς ὀλοφυρ- 
θεὶς τάχ᾽ ἂν ἴσως καὶ τοῖς ἐμοῖς ἀγαθοῖς πο- 
τε βουληθείη αὖθις φθονῆσαι. 

87. From our policy, which for the 
maintenance of our supremacy must 
take precautions on all sides, you have 
nothing to fear; do not try, therefore, 
to direct it along other courses. Use 
rather our offered aid for your secur- 
ity, and oppose resolutely, both you 
and the rest, the Syracusan lust for 


a) 4 A A A A 
} “᾿Αλλὰ μήτε ὑμεῖς, ὦ Καμαριναῖοι, ταῖς τῶνδε διαβολαῖς 1 
3 ’ 4 e ¥ 3 , > ὁ an A \ 
ἀναπείθεσθε μήτε οἱ ἄλλοι: εἰρήκαμεν δ᾽ ὑμῖν πᾶσαν THY 
3 ’ ν 2 ε , \ »¥ 3 , ε 
ἀλήθειαν περὶ ὧν ὑποπτευνόμεθα, καὶ ἔτι ἐν κεφαλαίοις ὑὕπο- 
μνήσαντες ἀξιώσομεν πείθειν. φαμὲν γὰρ ἄρχειν μὲν τῶν 2 
2 τιν \ Ἢ , ¥ 2 A Se \ 3 , 
ὅ ἐκεῖ, ἵνα μὴ ὑπακούωμεν ἄλλου, ἐλευθεροῦν δὲ τὰ ἐνθάδε, 
ὅπως μὴ ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν βλαπτώμεθα, πολλὰ δ᾽ ἀναγκάζεσθαι 
4 , \ b 4, 4 Ν Ἁ 
πράσσειν, διότι καὶ πολλὰ φυλασσόμεθα, ξύμμαχοι δὲ καὶ 
νῦν καὶ πρότερον τοῖς ἐνθάδε ὑμῶν ἀδικουμένοις οὐκ ἄκλητοι, 
l4 , g XN e A 25 ¢€ Ν ’ 
παρακληθέντες δὲ ἥκειν. καὶ ὑμεῖς μήθ᾽ ὡς δικασταὶ γενό- 8 
10 μενοι τῶν ἡμῖν ποιουμένων μήθ᾽ ὡς σωφρονισταί, ὃ χαλε- 
Tov ἤδη, ἀποτρέπειν πειρᾶσθε, καθ᾽ ὅσον δέ τι ὑμῖν τῆς. 
ἡμετέρας πολυπραγμοσύνης καὶ τρόπον τὸ αὐτὸ ξυμφέρει, 

ΤΌ]Θ. -- 1, ταῖς τῶνδε διαβολαῖς : cf. 88. 
12 ἐξ ὧν οἵδε διαβάλλουσι. ---- 2. μήτε οἱ 
ἄλλοι: here isdefinitely expressed what 
elsewhere in the admonitions to the 
Camarinaeans wasimplied. See below 
on 8 and on 85. 18 and 86. 2.— πᾶσαν 
τὴν ἀλήθειαν : a stock phrase in Greek 
from Homer down, as in English. — 
ὃ. ὑποπτενόμεθα : cf. 88.18; 85.14; 86. 
6, 22.—év κεφαλαίοις: in the chief points. 
Cf. 6.14; 1. 86.14; 4. 50.8.— 4. ἀξιώ- 
σομεν πείθειν : see on 86. 5. 

φαμὲν yap: we say, namely. See on 
88, 7.— ἄρχειν μὲν xré.: cf. 82. § 2,3; 
83. ὃ 4.— ὃ. ὑπακούωμεν ἄλλον : see on 
82.7.—6. ὅπως μὴ ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν βλαπτόώ- 
μεθα: cf. 84. 8. --- πολλὰ πράσσειν : as 
πολυπραγμοσύνη below (12), in a good 
sense, characterizing the policy of the 
Athenians at their acnie, as described 
by Pericles in the funeral oration 2. 
40,41; its antithesis ἀπραγμοσύνη, τὸ 
ἄπραγμον in 2. 63. 7,12. Cf. 18. 39. — 
7. πολλὰ φυλασσόμεθα : we are on guard 
at many points. Strictly cogn. accus. 
—8. τοῦς ἐνθάδε ὑμῶν ἀδικουμένοις : 

ὑμῶν including all the Siceliotes ex- 
cept the Syracusans. For the part. 
gen. in attrib. position, see on 62. 19. 
-- οὐκ ἄκλητοι, παρακληθέντες δέ: cf. 
καὶ παρακαλούμενος καὶ ἄκλητος 1. 118. 
28. For emphasis by both negation 
and affirmation, cf. 76.19, and see on 
2.98.10. On the matter, cf. 19.§1; 
8. 86. 8 3. | 
10. τῶν. ἡμῖν ποιουμένων : for dat. 
of agent with pass., see on 8. 64. 15, 
and C. F. Smith, Trans. Amer. Phil. 
Assoc. XXV, p. 71. — ὡς σωφρονισταί: 
as moderators, i.e. schooling us to mod- 
eration, as 3. 65.16; 8.48.43. Cf. σω- 
φρονίζειν 78. 11; 8.1. 21.--- χαλεπὸν ἤδη: 
referring to ἀποτρέπειν. ----11. καθ᾽ ὅσον 
δέτι... τὸ αὐτὸ ξυμφέρει : in propor- 
tion as anything of our busy activity and 
character (way of acting) is profitable 
alike to you (as to us). Cf. 88.101. The 
specific word and the general (τρόπου) 
with asingle article, though of different 
genders. Cf. 1. 102.21; 3.61.5. πολυ- 
πραγμοσύνη only herein Thuc. Cf. Ar. 
Acharn. 788. τὸ αὐτό pred. appos. to τι. 




4 9 λ 4 4 θ Α 4 N a, 9 ¥ 
τούτῳ ἀπολαβόντες χρήσασθε, καὶ νομίσατε μὴ πάντας ἐν ἴσῳ 

βλάπτειν αὐτά, πολὺ δὲ πλείους τῶν Ἑλλήνων καὶ ὠφελεῖν. 

ἐν παντὶ γὰρ πᾶς χωρίῳ καὶ ᾧ μὴ ὑπάρχομεν, ὅ τε οἰόμενος 4 
9 , Ne 9 , ‘\ VN € 2s € a 3 
ἀδικήσεσθαι καὶ ὁ ἐπιβουλεύων διὰ τὸ ἑτοίμην ὑπεῖναι ἐλ- 
, mA rao A 9 , 2,2 € A AQ’ » 9 
πίδα τῷ μὲν ἀντιτυχεῖν ἐπικουρίας ad ἡμῶν, τῷ δέ, εἰ ἥξο- 
Ἁ iO \ > ὃ 4 > , 9 , ε 
μεν, μὴ ἀδεὲς εἶναι κινδυνεύειν, ἀμφότεροι ἀναγκάζονται ὁ 

Cf. 3. 47. 18; 4. 28. 8.---18. τούτῳ ἀπο- 
λαβόντες χρήσασθε: take this out and 
use it. Cf. Plato, Rep. 420 ὁ τὴν evdal- 
μονα (πόλιν) πλάττομεν οὐκ ἀπολαβόν- 
res, ὀλίγους ἐν αὐτῇ τοιούτους τινὰς θέντες, 
GAN ὅλην. ---14. αὐτά: i.e. πολυπραγμο- 
σύνη καὶ τρόπος. 

15. ἐν παντὶ γὰρ πᾶς χωρίῳ: πᾶς in- 
serted for the sake of the paronomasia. 
Cf. a ἐν τῷ παντὶ χρόνῳ ὀλίγοις δὴ ἅμα 
πάντα ξυνέβη 1.33.18; ἐπεσέρχεται.. 
ἐκ πάσης γῆς τὰ πάντα 2. 88. 4; κατὰ 
πάντα γὰρ πάντως νικηθέντες 7. 81. 28. 
πάντα δὲ πανταχόθεν αὐτοὺς ἐλύπει 8. 1. 
9.— καὶ ᾧ : prep. not repeated, as freq., 
in the second clause. Cf. 1.6.20f., and 
see on 4. 46.1. Kr.’s conjecture κἀν ᾧ 
is unnecessary. — 16. ὑπεῖναι ἐλπίδα: 
subesse spem. ἐλπίδα, hope in the 
first case (τῷ μέν), anticipation in the 
second (τῷ 6é).—17. ἀντιτυχεῖν ἐπι- 
κουρίας ἀφ᾽ ἡμῶν: i.e. to get redress 
(ἀντι--}) through our aid, as Haacke ex- 
plains. — 18. μὴ ἀδεὲς εἶναι κινδυνεύειν : 
that ἐξ is not without danger to take up 
the conflict. ἀδεεῖς is the reading of the 
Mss., which Jowett retains, explaining, 
** ἀδεεῖς, though in the plural, refers to 
τῷ δέ preceding.’’? But all recent edi- 
tors emend. ἀδεές is Reiske’s conjec- 
ture, adopted also by St., who brackets 
Cf. Dem. 16. 22 οὐ γὰρ 
ἔγωγ᾽ ἀδεὲς τοῦθ᾽ ὑπολαμβάνω τῇ πόλει. 
But Steup contends that κινδυνεύειν as 
subj. inf. makes no difficulty. For 


ἀδεές in the rare pass. sense, cf. 1. 86. 
5; Plato, Sympos. 198 a. For κινδυνεύειν 
meaning take up the conflict without 
esp. emphasis on the danger involved, 
ef. 1. 74.15; 3.5.11; 4.91.10; 5.9.6; 
1. 48. 80. Cl. adopted Kr.’s conjecture 
ἀδεεῖ, making κινδυνεύειν depend on μὴ 
ἀδεεῖ εἶναι (cf. 1. 186. 8; 4. 110.18; 5. 
105. 12), and rendering: ‘* because there 
is to the aggressor the anticipation 
that, if we come, he has to fear coming 
into dangerous conflict with us.’’ But 
Steup, with St., wants proof of this 
pregnant meaning of κινδυνεύειν, and 
doubts that not only he who does not 
fear, but also he who does not need to 
fear, can be called dde%s.— ἀμφότεροι 
ἀναγκάζονται. . . σῴζεσθαι : dvayxd- 
govra is really applicable only to ἄκων 
σωφρονεῖν, but the emphatic position of 
ἀμφότεροι Seems to show that the struc- 
ture of the sent. was intentional, and 
we may render with Jowett, must both 
alike submit, the one to learn moderation 
against his will, the other to receive at our 
hands a. deliverance which costs him 
nothing. Some, like Kr., think dvayxd- 
ζονται has a milder sense with σῴζεσθαι 
(‘f are placed in the way to be saved ’’); 
Cl., that οἷός τέ ἐστι or the like must be 
supplied.— ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ: the former = 
ὁ ἐπιβουλεύων, the latter = ὁ οἰόμενος ἀδι- 
κήσεσθαι, in chiastic order. —19. ἄκων 
σωφρονεῖν : cf. 79. 9.— ἀπραγμόνως: 
Schol. χωρὶς πόνον. Cf. 4. 61. 27. 



" A e 2 9 , , , 
ἄκων σωφρονεῖν, 6 δ᾽ ἀπραγμόνως σῴζεσθαι. ταύτην 5 

Ἁ Ἁ “ , νλε A “A ~ 9 4 
THY κοινὴν τῷ τε δεομένῳ καὶ ὑμῖν νῦν παροῦσαν ἀσφά- 

ν μὴ ἀπώσησθε, add’ ἐξισώσαντες τοῖς ἄλλοις μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν 

, 9 Ν a 9." 4 > 9 ἃ 
Συρακοσίοις, ἀντὶ τοῦ αἰεὶ φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτούς, καὶ 

ἴω] ? 3 ω ε ,’ , 93 
πιβουλεῦσαΐ ποτε ἐκ τοῦ ὁμοίου μεταλάβετε. 

την οὖν τὴν κοινὴν... ἀσφάλειαν 
πώσησθε: reject not, then, this 
on safely now present for you, as 
ts for the one that asks you. For 
opévp referring, as Cl. explains, 
» Athenians, cf. 86.18 δεόμενοι τὴν 
ουσαν ἀπ᾽ ἀλλήλων ἀμφοτέροις σω- 
"μὴ προδιδόναι. Most editors under- 
“τῷ δεομένῳ, ‘any one that asks.” 
) objects that the context here is 
different from that at 86. 18 and 
sed to Cl.’s view of τῷ δεομένῳ, 
| κοινήν is Opposed to τῷ δεομένῳ, 
senting, collectively, any or all 
isk. Assuming that the passage is 
pt, he substitutes ἑτοίμην for κοι- 
2xplaining ἑτοίμην τῷ τε δεομένῳ 
καὶ ὑμῖν νῦν παροῦσαν as parallel 
fiers οὗ ταύτην τὴν ἀσφάλειαν, i.e. 
ssafety ready for all that ask and 
at hand for the Camarinaeans.”’ 
osition of re, with this view, see 
46.1.—21. GAN ἐξισώσαντες τοῖς 
ς κτὲ.: but putting yourselves on an 
ity with the rest, along with us, in- 
of always being on guard against 
yracusans, take a different course 
vyour turn at last plot against them 
2 manner, i.e. as they have plotted 
st you (51. ὃ 2).----ἐξισώσαντες τοῖς 
s: i.e. the Leontines, Egestaeans, 
Catanaeans (51. ὃ 2). The verb 
as 6.71.17 and Soph. El. 1194 
δ᾽ οὐδὲν ἐξισοῖ. SoC]. St. explains, 
ώσαντες, 80. τὴν ἀσφάλειαν τῷ TE 

δεομένῳ καὶ ὑμῖν: postquam eam 
utrisque aequalem (communem) 
reddidistis, i.e. postquam nobis 
pariter atque vobis tutum prae- 
sidium societate nobiscum re- 
novata paravistis.” Taking τοῖς 
ἄλλοις = τοῖς Συρακοσίοις, St. brackets 
the latter words. So Bm. and M., see 
App. — 28. ἀντεπιβονυλεῦσαι : to plot in 
turn against. The compound is coined 
by Thuc. See App. on 4. 80. 4. — pera- 
λάβετε: take a different course. See on 
18.18; 1.120.16. For const. with de- 
pendent inf., cf. 1. 44.4 μετέγνωσαν 
«ν΄. μὴ ποιήσασθαι. 

88. The Camarinaeans answered 
that as allies to both parties in the war 
it seemed their duty to help neither. 
The Athenians now sought as much as 
possible to win the Sicels for them- 
selves and by ambassadors to get help 
in Carthage and Tyrrhenia. They 
transferred their naval station from 
Naxos to Catana and made prepara- 
tions for an attack upon Syracuse in 

‘the spring. Meanwhile Syracusan am- 

bassadors, who had found great zeal 
for their cause at Corinth, proceeded 
in company with Corinthian ambassa- 
dors to Lacedaemon, and met there 
Alcibiades, who had come on the invi- 
tation of the Lacedaemonians from Cyl- 
lene, whither he had betaken himself 
from Thurii. Alcibiades joined them 
in persuading the Lacedaemonians to 


88 Τοιαῦτα δὲ ὁ Εὔφημος εἶπεν. οἱ δὲ Καμαριναῖοι ἐπεπόνθε- 1 
σαν τοιόνδε: τοῖς μὲν ᾿Αθηναίοις εὗνοι ἦσαν, πλὴν καθ᾽ ὅσον 
[<i] τὴν Σικελίαν ᾧοντο αὐτοὺς δουλώσεσθαι, τοῖς δὲ Yupa- 
, 2 N \ . 9g , , > 9 a 
κοσίοις αἰεὶ κατὰ τὸ ὅμορον διάφοροι: δεδιότες δ᾽ οὐχ ἧσσον 
5 τοὺς Συρακοσίους ἐγγὺς ὄντας μὴ καὶ ἄνευ σφῶν περιγένων- 
ται, τό τε πρῶτον αὐτοῖς τοὺς ὀλίγους ἱππέας ἔπεμψαν καὶ 
τὸ λοιπὸν ἐδόκει αὐτοῖς ὑπουργεῖν μὲν τοῖς Συρακοσίοις 
μᾶλλον ἔργῳ, ὡς ἂν δύνωνται μετριώτατα, ἐν δὲ τῷ παρόντι, 
2 Q A > ld » ἰω aA 3 Ἁ Ἃ 
ἵνα μηδὲ τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἔλασσον δοκῶσι νεῖμαι, ἐπειδὴ καὶ 
10 ἐπικρατέστεροι τῇ μάχῃ ἐγένοντο, λόγῳ ἀποκρίνασθαι ἴσα 
ἀμφοτέροις. καὶ οὕτω βουλευσάμενοι ἀπεκρίναντο, ἐπειδὴ 5 
, 9 , 5 , A Ν 9 , 
τυγχάνει ἀμφοτέροις οὖσι ξυμμάχοις σφῶν πρὸς ἀλλήλους 
, ¥ » A 9 ’ 3 ™ , 
πόλεμος WY, εὔορκον δοκεῖν εἶναι σφίσιν ἐν τῷ παρόντι μηδε- 

, 9 , a e ’ ε ’ 9 ~ 
τέροις ἀμύνειν. καὶ οἱ πρέσβεις ἑκατέρων ἀπῆλθον. 

renew the war with ΑΥὮΘΠΗΕ. --- 1. τοι- 
atra δέ: see on 19. 1. — ἐπεπόνθε- 
σαν τοιόνδε: had been thus affected, i.e. 
already (plpf.), not merely in conse- 
quence of the opposing speeches. — 
2. rots μὲν ᾿Αθηναίοις κτὲ.: after τοιόνδε 
without conj., as freq. in Thuc. See 
on 1.89.2. — καθ᾽ ὅσον [el] xré.: Steup, 
following Reiske, brackets εἰ, with 
nearly all recent editors. The part. is 
not more in place hete with πλὴν 
καθ᾽ ὅσον, except in so far as, than it 
would be at 54. 24, 82.10. Cl., who 
retained εἰ, thought Thuc. could not 
have meant to say that the Camari- 
naeans really ascribed to the Atheni- 
ans intentions of conquest. But in 
various passages of the speech of Eu- 
phemus are intimations of mistrust on 
the part of the Camarinaeans and the 
rest of the Siceliotes as to the inten- 
tions of the Athenians (cf. 83.13; 85. 
14; 86. 6, 22).—4. κατὰ τὸ ὅμορον: 
cf. Tac. Hist. 5.1 solito inter ac- 

colas odio.—5. τοὺς Συρακοσίους 
«νον μὴ περιγένωνται : prolepsis, as in 
2.67. 28. --- 6. τοὺς ὀλίγους ἱππέας ἔπεμ- 
Wav: acc. to 67. ὃ 2 the Camarinaeans 
had sent 20 horsemen and 50 bowmen, 
hence Kr. suspects that καὶ τοξότας has 
dropped out here.—xKal τὸ λοιπόν: 
answering to τό τε πρῶτον. --- 8. ἔργῳ: 
in fact, opp. to λόγῳ (10), in word. — 
as ἂν δύνωνται μετριώτατα: as moder- 
ately as they can. Abresch would insert 
δ᾽.--- 9. ἵνα μηδὲ... ἔλασσον δοκῶσι 
νεῖμαι: that they may not seem to be less 
favorable to the Athenians. νεῖμαι is 
Valckenaer’s excellent emendation for 
εἶναι. Cf. μεῖζον μέρος νέμοντες 8. 3. 5; 
πλέον νείμαντες 8. 48. 2. ----Ἠ10. ἐπικρατέ- 
στεροι: elsewhere only in late writers; 
the adv. éwixparéws occurs several times 
in the Iliad. 

11. οὕτω βουλευσάμενοι: after these 
deliberations.—12. ἀμφοτέροις οὖσι ξυμ- 
μάχοις σφῶν : cf. 80. 6. --- 18. εὔορκον: 
in accordance with their oath, as 5.18.58. 




\ e Ἁ 4 Ν θ᾽ ε Ἁ 3 4 9 Ν , 
Kat οἱ μὲν Συρακόσιοι τὰ καθ᾽ ἑαυτοὺς ἐξηρτύοντο ἐς τὸν πό- 8 

e 93 “" 3 ΜᾺ , 3 v4 Ν, 
λεμον, οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐν τῇ Νάξῳ ἐστρατοπεδευμένοι τὰ πρὸς 

4 δ » 9g 9 A e A 
τοὺς Σικελοὺς ἔπρασσον, ὅπως αὐτοῖς ὡς πλεῖστοι προσ- 

,’ \ e XN Ν ‘N a ΝᾺ ἴω “A 
χωρήσονται. καὶ οἱ μὲν πρὸς τὰ πεδία μᾶλλον τῶν Σικελῶν, 


ε 9 » ΜᾺ , 9 \ 3 ’ 
ὑπήκοοι ὄντες τῶν Συρακοσίων, οὐ πολλοὶ ἀφειστήκεσαν" 

κι 5 \ 
20 τῶν δὲ THY μεσόγειαν ἐχόντων αὐτόνομοι οὖσαι καὶ πρότε- 


pov αἰεὶ (ai) οἰκήσεις εὐθύς, πλὴν ὀλίγοι, μετὰ τῶν ᾿Αθη- 

ναΐων ἦσαν, καὶ σῖτόν τε κατεκόμιζον τῷ στρατεύματι καὶ 
εἰσὶν οὗ καὶ χρήματα. ἐπὶ δὲ τοὺς μὴ προσχωροῦντας οἱ 
᾿Αθηναῖοι στρατεύοντες τοὺς μὲν προσηνάγκαζον, τοὺς δὲ 
καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν Συρακοσίων φρουρούς τε πεμπόντων καὶ βοη- 

θούντων ἀπεκωλύοντο. τόν τε. χειμῶνα μεθορμισάμενοι ἐκ 

15. τὰ καθ᾽ ἑαυτοὺς ἐξηρτύοντο : cf. 
1. 82.5 τὰ ἡμέτερα αὐτῶν ἐξαρτύεσθα.. ---- 
16. ἐν τῇ Νάξῳ ἐστρατοπεδευμένοι : οἵ. 
14. 10. ---τὰ πρὸς τοὺς Σικελοὺς κτέ.: 
cf. 48, 62. ὃ 5, 65. ὃ 2. 

19. ὑπήκοοι ὄντες τῶν Συρακοσίων: 
ef. 84. § 1, 45, 48; 8. 108. § 1. --- οὐ 
πολλοί: Canter’s correction for οἱ πολ- 
dol, Opp. to πλὴν ὀλίγοι (21).— 20. με- 
σόγειαν : the correct form, not -Ύαιαν. 
Cf. 1.100. 15, 120.8; 2. 102.4; 3.95. 
19; 7.80. 22.— trav... ἐχόντων. .. 
dal) οἰκήσεις: Bk. inserted the art. and 
has been followed by most editors; but 
Cl. and Steup consider the art. unneces- 
sary after the preceding gen. (see on 1. 
1.11) notwithstanding the interven- 
ing words (αὐτόνομοι... αἰεί). Jowett 
would govern τῶν ἐχόντων by πλὴν ὀλίγοι 
(= most, πάντες πλὴν ὀλίγοι), making 
αὐτόνομοι... οἰκήσεις appos. to the main 
subj. (πλὴν ὀλίγοι). For οἰκήσεις, settle- 
ments (= κῶμαι), cf. 1.6.2.—21. πλὴν 
ὀλίγοι: πλήν adv., not prep., as 2. 21. 
18, 34.14; 4.28.12. For the rather 
harsh transition to the inhabitants of 

the οἰκήσεις, cf. 80. 8, 94. 8. ---- 22. κα- 
τεκόμιζον : brought down, i.e. from the 
interior to the coast. Cf. 4.67.14 and 
κατακομιδή 1.120. 10.— 28. εἰσὶν οἵ: as 
10. 10; 1. 28. 7; 2. 49. 39; 7. 18. 16, 
44,46, 57.12; 8.101.16; but ἔστιν ὧν 
πόλεων below (80) and 7. 11. 7; τοῖς 
βαρβάροις ἔστιν οἷς 1.6.21; ἔστι wap ols 
(masc.) 1. 28. 15; ἔστιν οὕς 5. 72. 25. 
See F. Haase, Lucubr. Thuc. p. 72 f. 
26. ἀπεκωλύοντο: (for ἀπεκώλυον, 
with all recent editors, following Doe- 
derlein and BK.) sc. προσαναγκάζειν. Cf. 
102. ὃ and 7. 56. 6, where after διεκώλυ- 
σεν and κωλύσωσι infs. are supplied 
from what preceded. — τόν τε χειμῶνα 
.. . διεχείμαζον : Steup finds this state- 
ment somewhat inexact; for in the win- 
ter of 415-414 8.c. the Athenians make 
the first attack upon Syracuse (63-71); 
then attempt to bring Messene over 
to their side, spending thereby some 
thirteen days in the territory of Mes- 
sene (74. §1, 2); then proceed to Naxos 
and spend some time there (74. § 2, 75. 
§ 2). He suggests that τελευτῶντα after 





A , 3 4 , VLAN , ὃ a 50 
τῆς Νάξου ἐς τὴν Κατάνην καὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον, ὃ κατεκαύθη 
“A Ἁ 
ὑπὸ τῶν Συρακοσίων, αὖθις ἀνορθώσαντες διεχείμαζον. καὶ 6 
» N 3 ’ ,’ “ , 9 , , 
ἔπεμψαν μὲν ἐς Καρχηδόνα τριήρη περὶ φιλίας, εἰ δύναιντό 
9 A ¥ \ \ 93 , » Φ , 
τι ὠφελεῖσθαι, ἔπεμψαν δὲ καὶ ἐς Tuponviay, ἔστιν ὧν πό- 
λεων ἐπαγγελλομένων καὶ αὐτῶν ξυμπολεμεῖν. περιήγγελλον 
Α ἃ “- A \ 3 , » , 9. 929 
δὲ καὶ τοῖς Σικελοῖς καὶ ἐς τὴν Ἔγεσταν πέμψαντες ἐκέλευον 
9 , ε , , Ἁ Φ 3 ν 
ἵππους σφίσιν ὡς πλείστους πέμπειν, καὶ τάλλα ἐς τὸν περι- 
’ 4 Ἁ 4 e , , g 4 ε 
τειχισμόν, πλινθία καὶ σίδηρον, ἡτοίμαζον, καὶ ὅσα ἔδει, ὡς 
ἅμα τῷ ἦρι ἑξόμενοι τοῦ πολέμου. | 
Oi δ᾽ és τὴν Κόρινθον καὶ Λακεδαίμονα τῶν Συρακοσίων 1 
9 id ,’ 4 3 4 9 , 
ἀποσταλέντες πρέσβεις τούς τε ᾿Ιταλιώτας ἅμα παραπλέον- 
τες ἐπειρῶντο πείθειν μὴ περιορᾶν τὰ γιγνόμενα ὑπὸ τῶν 
3 ’ [4 \ 9 ’ ε ,’ 9 ’ \ 9 ‘ 
Αθηναίων, ὡς καὶ ἐκείνοις ὁμοίως ἐπιβουλευόμενα, Kat ἐπειδὴ 
9 Ὁ ’ὔ 3 ’ , 3 ~ > ~ [4 
ἐν τῇ Κορίνθῳ ἐγένοντο, λόγους ἐποιοῦντο ἀξιοῦντες σφίσι 
κατὰ τὸ ξυγγενὲς βοηθεῖν. καὶ οἱ Κορίνθιοι εὐθὺς ψηφισάμε- 8 
νοι αὐτοὶ πρῶτοι ὦστε πάσῃ προθυμίᾳ ἀμύνειν καὶ ἐς τὴν Λα- 
, 4 9 A , 9 \ 93 , 
κεδαίμονα ξυναπέστελλον αὐτοῖς πρέσβεις, ὅπως καὶ ἐκείνους 

χειμῶνα may have dropped out (cf. ἐν 
τῷ αὐτῷ θέρει τελευτῶντι 7. 9. 1).— 
27. ὃ κατεκαύθη : cf. 76. ὃ 2.----28. ἀνορ- 
θώσαντες : referring to ὥρθωσαν 66. 10. 
Cf. ἐπανορθώσοντες 1. 771. 89. 

29. ἔπεμψαν μέν, ἔπεμψαν δέ: epa- 
naphora, as 1. 85. 6. --- 31. καὶ αὐτῶν: 
cven themselves, i.e. of their own accord, 
with ἐπαγγελλομένων. On the matter, 
cf. 108. ὃ 2; 7. 58. ὃ 2, 57. 8 11.— 
περιήγγελλον : as ἐκέλευον below, limited 
by ἵππους... πέμπειν. 
There is no reason to suspect (with 
Kr.) ἐκέλενον, or to bracket (with v. H.) 
πέμψαντες ἐκέλευον. ---- 32. πέμψαντες ἐκέ- 
λευον... πέμπειν: cf. 62.20 περιέπλευσαν, 
στρατιὰν κελεύοντες πέμπειν.---88. τἄλλα: 
with πλινθία καὶ σίδηρον, καὶ ὅσα ἔδει in 
appos., as 71. 15. —34. πλινθία: Hude 

Cf. 1. 116. 5.. 

writes πλινθεῖα With the Schol. of Pat- 
mos (πλινθεῖα, τὰ ἐν τύποις ξύλα, ols τὰς 
πλίνθους κατεσκεύαζον). ---- σἴδηρον : sc. 
λιθουργόν, as 4.69.6. ΟἿ. σιδήρια λιθουργά 
4.4, ὅ.-- ὡς... τοῦ πολέμου : cf. 8. 8. 
17 ὡς εὐθὺς πρὸς τὸ ἔαρ ἑξόμενοι τοῦ 

86. οἱ δ᾽... ἀποσταλέντες : cf. 73. 
§ 2.—39. ἐπιβουλευόμενα : pass. with 
neut. subj., as 3. 96.11 (often with 
pers. subj., as 33. 27, 80.17). See on 
8. 109. 21. 

41. εὐθὺς ψηφισάμενοι αὐτοὶ πρῶτοι 
xré.: οἵ. 8.101. 6 αὐτοὶ πρῶτοι δόντες ὁμή- 
ρους καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ἔπεισαν δοῦναι φοβου- 
μένους κτὲ. Hude’s bracketing οὗ πρῶτοι 
is quite unnecessary. —42. ὥστε: after 
ψηφισάμενοι, aS 5.17.20. See on 8. 25. 
10.— 43. αὐτοῖς : sc. τοῖς τῶν Συρακοσίων 



; , 39. κα , , A 
ξυναναπείθοιεν τόν TE αὐτοῦ πόλεμον σαφέστερον ποιεῖσθαι 

45 πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους καὶ ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν ὠφελίαν τινὰ 

, \ 9 3 “Ἂ 4 , ”~ > 
πέμπειν. καὶ οἵ τε ἐκ τῆς Κορίνθου πρέσβεις παρῆσαν és 9 

τὴν Λακεδαίμονα καὶ ᾿Αλκιβιάδης μετὰ τῶν ξυμφυγάδων, 

Ἁ 4 3 9 ‘N 9 ἃ ’ 9 ~ ‘4 3 
περαιωθεὶς τότ᾽ εὐθὺς ἐπὶ πλοίου φορτικοῦ ἐκ τῆς Θουρίας ἐς 
Κυλλήνην τῆς Ἠλείας πρῶτον, ἔπειτα ὕστερον ἐς τὴν Λακεδαΐί- 

4 A “A ’ 4 ε ’ 
ὅ0 μονα αὐτῶν τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων μεταπεμψάντων ὑπόσπονδος 

ἐλθών. ἐφοβεῖτο γὰρ αὐτοὺς διὰ τὴν περὶ τῶν Μαντινικῶν 

A \ , 3 “a 3» ,’ ~ ’ 4 
πρᾶξιν. καὶ ξυνέβη ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων τούς 

, Ἁ Ἁ ’ὕ ἃ 2 AN Ἁ Ν 3 
τε Κορινθίους καὶ τοὺς Συρακοσίους τὰ αὐτὰ καὶ τὸν ᾿Αλκι- 

βιάδην δεομένους πείθειν τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους. καὶ διανοου- 

, A 351. NN As , » ' , , 
55 μένων τῶν TE ἐφόρων καὶ τῶν ἐν τέλει ὄντων πρέσβεις πέμπειν 
ἐς Συρακούσας κωλύοντας μὴ ξυμβαίνειν ᾿Αθηναίοις, βοηθεῖν 

δὲ οὐ προθύμων ὄντων, παρελθὼν ὁ ᾿Αλκιβιάδης παρώξυνέ 

4 ’ \ 93 ’ 4 4 
τε Tous Λακεδαιμονίους καὶ ἐξώρμησε λέγων τοιάδε: 

πρέσβεσι. ----44. τὸν αὐτοῦ πόλεμον : see 
on 84. 1. ----σαφέστερον : = βεβαιότερον 
ἐκ τοῦ προφανοῦς 78. 6, or φανερώτερον 
91.20.—45. ὠφελίαν τινά : see on 78.9. 

46. παρῆσαν ἐς: see on 77. 5.— 
47. μετὰ τῶν ξυμφνγάδων: cf. 61. ὃ 6. 
—48. τότε: referring to 61. § 7.— ἐκ 
τῆς Gouplas : see on 61. 28. — 49. ἔπειτα 
ὕστερον : as 66. 13.— 50. μεταπεμψάν- 
twv: used in act. by Thuc. with appar- 
ently the same force as the usual 
middle. See on 1. 112. 6.— ὑπόσπον- 
δος: under free conduct, as 59. 18, ex- 
plained by the following γάρ clause.— 
δ]. τὴν περὶ τῶν Μαντινικῶν: cf. 89. 
ὃ 8 and 5. 48 ff. On the Mantinean 
matters, see 5. 29-81. 

52. ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τῶν Λακεδαιμο- 
γίων : which all Spartans of 80 years of 
age and over were entitled to attend. — 
58. τὰ αὐτά : obj. of πείθειν, placed em- 
phatically in the midst of the subjects 

connected by re... καὶ... καί. πεί- 
θειν is conative, as the context shows. 
— 55. τῶν ἐν τέλει ὄντων: = τῶν ἄλλων 
τῶν ἐν τέλει ὄντων, for the ephors also 
belonged to these.— 56. κωλύονταφ: 
pres. ptc. with the better Mss., as in 
3.62.11; 7.3.4, 25.40. A few inferior 
Mss. read κωλύσοντας. ---ὃ7. παρώξυνε: 
egged on, by working on the feelings 
or passions of the Lacedaemonians. 
Bl. cites Shakespeare, ‘‘Oh whet not 
on those two too furious peers.” — 
58. ἐξώρμησε : goaded on to action. 

Speech of Alcibiades in the Popular 
Assembly at Sparta (89-92) 

89. I was endeavoring by friendly 
acts to acquire again the relation of 
proxenus to you which my forefathers 
possessed, and only when you had be- 
gun to favor my enemies did I seek by 
the alliance with Argos and Mantinea 




A ‘ “A > A ὃ A A 9 af ea 9 
Avaykatov περὶ τῆς ἐμῆς διαβολῆς πρῶτον ἐς ὑμᾶς El- 1 

“A Ν ~ 4 9 , 
πεῖν, ἵνα μὴ χεῖρον τὰ κοινὰ τῷ ὑπόπτῳ μου ἀκροάσησθε. 

A κι »ἤ 
τῶν δ᾽ ἐμῶν προγόνων τὴν προξενίαν ὑμῶν κατά τι ἔγκλημα 2 
ἀπειπόντων αὐτὸς ἐγὼ πάλιν ἀναλαμβάνων ἐθεράπευον ὑμᾶς 

ἄλλα τε καὶ περὶ τὴν ἐκ Πύλου ξυμφοράν. καὶ διατελοῦντός 

μου προθύμου ὑμεῖς πρὸς ᾿Αθηναίους καταλλασσόμενοι τοῖς 

μὲν ἐμοῖς ἐχθροῖς δύναμιν, δι’ ἐκείνων πράξαντες, ἐμοὶ δὲ 

9 ’ 6 Ν ὃ Ν ἴω ὃ ’ὔ ε 95 A , 
ATLALAV TTEPLeE €TE. Και OLA Ταῦτα OLKALWS VT έεμου προς TE 8 

Q ’ x 9 , 4 , g ¥ 9 
Ta Μαντινέων και Αργείων τβαπομένου Kal οσα ᾶλλα ἡναν- 

,ὕ εκ 9 , δ A » \ , 9 A 
τιούμην ὑμῖν ἐβλάπτεσθε. καὶ νῦν, εἴ τις καὶ τότε ἐν τῷ 

4 9 9 9 ’ ’ Ν “a 9 ΝᾺ ΜᾺ 
πάσχειν οὐκ εἰκότως ὠργίζετό μοι, μετὰ τοῦ ἀληθοῦς σκοπῶν 

ἀναπειθέσθω. ἢ εἴτις, διότι καὶ τῷ δήμῳ προσεκείμην μᾶλλον, 

to injure you. For that you cannot 
be angry at me, nor, when you have 
considered all the circumstances, be- 

cause I have favored the cause of the 

Demos. —1. ἐς ὑμᾶς elwetv: cf. 1. 72. 
18; 4. 58.9; 5. 45. 3.—2. τὰ κοινά: 
public matters, opp. to personal impu- 
tations (τῆς ἐμῆς διαβολῇ») .---- τῷ ὑπόπτῳ 
μου: οὗ, τῷ ἡμετέρῳ ὑπόπτῳ 85. 18. 

8. τῶν δ᾽ ἐμῶν : Haacke’s conjecture, 
adopted by most editors for τῶν δ᾽ ἡμῶν 
of the Mss., which offends both by 
plural number and by position of the 
pron. Reiske’s τῶν δὴ ἐμῶν, adopted 
by Kr. and Hude, would be most ac- 
ceptable if any good reason for δή 
could be assigned here. δέ marks tran- 
sition from general to particular, as 1. 
37.7.— τὴν προξενίαν ὑμῶν κτὲ.: cf. 5. 
48. ὃ 2.---4. πάλιν ἀναλαμβάνων : con- 
ative; cf. ὅ. 43. 18 διενοεῖτο ἀνανεώσα- 
σθαι. πάλιν pleonastic, as 4. 75. 14. --- 
ἐθεράπενον ὑμᾶς... περὶ τὴν ἐκ Πύλον 
ξυμφοράν : cf. ὕ, 43.12 τοὺς ἐκ τῆς νήσου 
αὐτῶν αἰχμαλώτους θεραπεύων. With τὴν 
ἐκ Πύλου ξυμφοράν, οἷ. τὴν περὶ Πύλον 

ξυμφοράν 7.18. 17.—5. διατελοῦντος: 
without ὄντος, as 1.34.12. Kiihn. 488¢; 
Kr. Spr. 56, 5, 4.—6. rots ἐμοῖς ἐχθροῖς: 
i.e. Niclas and Laches. Cf. 5. 43. § 2. 
— 8. περιέθετε: here in bad sense, as 
8.43.21; in 4. 87. 26 in good sense. 

9. καὶ ὅσα ἄλλα ἠναντιούμην ὑμῖν: 
loosely correlated with πρός τε... τρα- 
πομένον, as well as by all the opposition 
that I made to you. For the facts, cf. 
5. 53 ff. — 10. καὶ νῦν: cf. 83. 10. --- εἰ 

.. kal: cf. 33.15; 8.46.5; 4.22.11. 
- ἐν τῷ πάσχειν: = ἐν τῷ βλάπτεσθαι. 
- 11. οὐκ εἰκότως : unreasonably, as 1. 
37. 8, 76.21; 2. 00. 26; 3.56.6. The 
expression corresponds to the preced- 
ing δικαίως ἐβλάπτεσθε and the following 
μηδ᾽ οὕτως ἡγήσηται ὀρθῶς ἄχθεσθαι. The 
neg. belongs to εἰκότως alone, not to 
the prot., hence οὐ. Cl. conjectured 

οὐκ ἀπεικότως, '' with good reason,’’ as 

demanded by the context; but this 
has been almost universally rejected. 
— μετὰ τοῦ ἀληθοῦς : in the light of 
truth, i.c. in connection with the rea- 
sons stated.— 12. ἀναπειθέσθω: Schol. 



χείρω με ἐνόμιζε, μηδ᾽ οὕτως ἡγήσηται ὀρθῶς ἄχθεσθαι. 

na Q , > 9 ὃ ’ »» 9 a δὲ 9 
τοῖς γὰρ τυράννοις altel ποτε διάφοροι ἐσμεν, πᾶν δὲ τὸ ἐναν- 4 

A ἰοὺ 3 Ἁ 
15 τιούμενον τῷ δυναστεύοντι δῆμος ὠνόμασται. καὶ ἀπ᾽ ἐκεί. 

’ ε ’ ε A ~ , 9 A 
vou ξυμπαρέμεινεν ἡ προστασία ἡμῖν Tov πλήθους. ἅμα δὲ 

A ’ ’ Ν ‘\ 9 ’ » A 
τῆς πόλεως δημοκρατουμένης τὰ πολλὰ ἀνάγκη ἦν τοῖς πα- 

ροῦσιν ἕπεσθαι. τῆς δὲ ὑπαρχούσης ἀκολασίας ἐπειρώμεθα 

¥ A 
μετριώτεροι ἐς τὰ πολιτικὰ εἶναι. ἄλλοι δ᾽ ἦσαν Kal ἐπὶ τῶν 

’ ἃ A a 3_N Ν ’ 9 Ὁ Ν 3 ν 
20 πάλαι καὶ νῦν οἱ ἐπὶ τὰ πονηρότερα ἐξῆγον τὸν ὄχλον οἵπερ 

μεταπειθέσθω..---- διότι καί: i.e. not merely 
because I was against you, but also be- 
cause etc. — τῷ δήμῳ προσεκείμην par- 
λον: was more inclined to the cause of 
the Demos, i.e. than to that of the ὀλίγοι. 
προσκεῖσθαι as 1.98.26; 7.50.31; 8.89. 
22.—13. μηδ᾽ οὕτως : not even for this 
reason. Alcibiades justifies his political 
attitude, first by the tradition of his 
family, the Alcmeonids, who had always 
led in the contest with the τυραννίς, and 
second by the dominant form of gov- 
ernment, which it was the duty of the 
individual citizen to support. 

14. αἰεί ποτε: freq. used to empha- 
size a friendly or hostile relation. See 
on 2. 102. 10. --- διάφοροί ἐσμεν : the 
Alcmeonids had shown their hostility 
to the τυραννίς esp. against Cylon (1. 
126) and the Peisistratids (59. § 4). 
This point would be effective with the 
tyrant-hating Spartans (1.18.§1, 122. 
§3).— 15. τῷ δυναστεύοντι : neuter. — 
᾿ δῆμος ὠνόμασται: cf. 89. 4. --- da’ ἐκεί- 
τυράννοις. --- 16. ξυμπαρέμεινεν : con- 
tinued along with it, i.e. with their 
hatred of tyrants remained to the Alc- 
meonids the leadership of the people. 
— προστασία τοῦ πλήθους : cf. ἡ τοῦ 
δήμου προστασία 2. 65. 49; τοῦ δήμου 

ice. τοῦ διαφόρους εἶναι ἡμᾶς τοῖς 

προεστάναι 28. 7: 8. 70.12; 8. 65. 6. τοῦ 
πλήθους, as Well as τοῦ ξύμπαντος (21), 
selected by Alcibiades in order to rep- 
resent himself not as a mere party- 
leader. He would be the head of the 
whole state; democracy, as the tradi- 
tional form of Attic government he 
would endure, but seek to check its 
extravagances; toward the rule of the 
δῆμος, meaning that of one part of the 
citizens over the other, he is bitterly 
hostile. His expressions are cleverly 
chosen with a view to their effect upon 
the assembly of aristocratic Sparta. — 
ἅμα δέ: as 88.4; 1.44.15; 3.115. 14; 
4.6. 4, 108. 24, 180. 19, 182. 9; 7. 5. 
8, 68. 5, 84. 8; 8. 1. 18, 47. 3, 100. 11. 
Hude writes, with Laur., ἅμα δὲ καί, as 
1, 25. 18, 92. 8, 97. 18; 2. 20. 10; 3. 
22. 8, 112.15; 4.1.11, 88. 18, 108. 
20; 5. 88. 4.— 17. τὰ πολλά : adv. with 
τοῖς παροῦσιν ἕπεσθαι, in most respects to 
conform to existing conditions. 

18. τῆς δὲ ὑπαρχούσης ἀκολασίας: 
the gen. in the sense of ἢ ὥστε τῇ ὑπαρ- 
χούσῃ ἀκολασίᾳ χρῆσθαι. Cf. 1. 84. 18 
ἀμαθέστερον τῶν νόμων τῆς ὑπεροψίας. ---- 
19. ἐπὶ τῶν πάλαι: in the times of our 
forefathers. — 20. ἐξῆγον : = παρῆγον. 
See on 3. 45. 19. --- οἵπερ... ἐξήλασαν : 
among these, Androcles (8. 65. 6). 






Ἁ 9 A 9 ‘4 ε “A N ~ 4 , 
καὶ ἐμὲ ἐξήλασαν. ἡμεῖς δὲ τοῦ ξύμπαντος προέστημεν, 6 
δικαιοῦντες ἐν ᾧ σχήματι μεγίστη ἡ πόλις ἐτύγχανε καὶ 
ἐλευθερωτάτη οὖσα καὶ ὅπερ ἐδέξατό τις, τοῦτο ξυνδιασῴ- 
ρ TH οὐ ρ Sy ν ¢ 
\ ‘ A 

ζειν: ἐπεὶ δημοκρατίαν ye καὶ ἐγιγνώσκομεν οἱ φρονοῦντές 
Ἁ > oN 3 “ A A ν . , > A 
25 τι καὶ αὐτὸς οὐδενὸς ἂν χεῖρον, ὅσῳ Kail, λοιδορήσαιμι: ἀλλὰ 
Ve 4 9 ,’ 9 Q A Ν ’ Ἁ Ἁ 
περὶ ὁμολογουμένης ἀνοίας οὐδὲν av καινὸν λέγοιτο: καὶ τὸ 

θ 4 9 ἃ 9 25 , en 9 λὲ 4 ε A λ 
μεθιστάναι αὐτὴν οὐκ ἐδόκει ἡμῖν ἀσφαλὲς εἶναι ὑμῶν πολε- 

μίων προσκαθημένων. 

“Kat τὰ μὲν ἐς τὰς ἐμὰς διαβολὰς τοιρμῦτα ξυνέβη" περὶ 1 
δὲ Φ e A λ ὔ \ 3 , ¥ λέ Τὸ bd 
€ ὧν ὑμῖν τε βουλευτέον καὶ ἐμοΐῖ, εἴ TL πλέον οἶδα, EONYT- 
» , ¥ 9 A 3 , ΜᾺ , 3 
τέον, μάθετε ἤδη: ἐπλεύσαμεν ἐς Σικελίαν πρῶτον μέν, εἰ 
, , , 1 Q9 >. 9 5 
δυναίμεθα, Σικελιώτας καταστρεψόμενοι, μετὰ δ᾽ ἐκείνους at- 
θις καὶ ᾿Ιταλιώτας, ἔπειτα καὶ τῆς Καρχηδονίων ἀρχῆς καὶ 
αὐτῶν ἀποπειράσοντες. εἰ δὲ προχωρήσειε ταῦτα ἢ πάντα 3 

22. σχήματι: οἵ. σχῆμα πολιτικόν 8. 
89. 21. --- 28. καὶ ὅπερ ἐδέξατό ris: and 
which had come down to us. Cf. 2. 86, 
7, 62. 24, The rel. is repeated after 
καί because a dem. clause follows. Cf. 
4. 18.—24. δημοκρατίαν: rule of the 
Demos.— ot Φρονοῦντές τι: pregnant 
force, those who had any sense. Cf. 5. 
7.10.—25. καὶ αὐτὸς... ὅσῳ kali, λοι- 
δορήσαιμι : the lacuna after ὅσῳ καί is 
most prob. due to the dropping out of 
μέγιστ᾽ ἠδίκημαι, and I myself could find 
fault as much as any, inasmuch as I 
have been most injured. See App. — 
ἀλλὰ... λέγοιτο: but about an admitted 
folly nothing new could be said. ὁμολο- 
γουμένης aS 2. 37.18; 4. 62.3; Xen. 

Mem. 4. 6. 15.— 26. καὶ τὸ μεθιστάναι 

αὐτὴν... προσκαθημένων : καί goes 
back to τοῦτο ξυνδιασῴ ζειν, hence all the 
intervening words (ἐπεὶ. . . λέγοιτο) 
must be considered parenthetical, or 
out of their place owing to a copyist’s 
slip (see on 11. 15).— τὸ μεθιστάναι 

αὐτήν: the pron. refers to πόλις (22). 
The verb is freq. used of political 
changes; cf. μεταστῆσαι τὸν κόσμον 4. 
76.6; τὴν πόλιν μεταστῆσαι 8. 48. 24, 66. 
2; τὰ ἐν τῷ Σάμῳ μεταστῆσαι 8. 75. 7. 

90. But the Athenians are planning 
to subdue not only the Siceliotes, but 
also the Italiotes and Carthage, and 
then with their resources thus increased 
to make themselves masters of the 
whole Hellenic world. — 2. εἴ τι πλέον 
οἶδα: cf. 5. 29.12; 7. 49. 22. — ἐσηγη- 
téov: a8 99.6; 3.20.7; 4. 76.8; 7. 73. 
5.— 8. ἤδη : followed by explanation 
without γάρ, while 91.5 has γάρ. So 
explanations indicated by τοιόσδε and 
ὅδε sometimes have and sometimes omit 
γάρ. See on 1. 89. 2. 

4, Σικελιώτας καταστρεψόμενοι κτέ.: 
cf. 15. §2.— αὖθις : further. See on 52. 
5. — 5. τῆς Καρχηδονίων ἀρχῆς : prob. 
referring esp. to Sardinia and Corsica. 
— 6. ἀποπειράσοντες : to make an at- 
tempt on. See on 4, 24. 7. 



ἢ καὶ τὰ πλείω, ἤδη TH Πελοποννήσῳ ἐμέλλομεν ἐπιχειρήσειν, 
κομίσαντες ξύμπασαν μὲν τὴν ἐκεῖθεν προσγενομένην δύνα- 
μιν τῶν Ἑλλήνων, πολλοὺς δὲ βαρβάρους μισθωσάμενοι 

10 καὶ Ἴβηρας καὶ ἀλλοὺς τῶν ἐκεῖ ὁμολογουμένως νῦν βαρβά- 
ρων μαχιμωτάτους, τριήρεις τε πρὸς ταῖς ἡμετέραις πολλὰς 
, 3 , a 3 , ¥ δ 
ναυπηγησάμενοι, ἐχούσης τῆς Ἰταλίας ξύλα ἀφθονα, αἷς 
τὴν Πελοπόννησον πέριξ πολιορκοῦντες καὶ τῷ πεζῷ ἅμα ἐκ 
A 9 A A 4 N \ , , 4 >» > 
γῆς ἐφορμαῖς τῶν πόλεων Tas μὲν Bia λαβόντες, τὰς δ᾽ ἐν- 
18 τειχισάμενοι ῥᾳδίως ἠλπίζομεν καταπολεμήσειν καὶ μετὰ 
ω N A a ε ; A »¥ , Ν 
ταῦτα καὶ τοῦ ξύμπαντος Ἑλληνικοῦ ἄρξειν. χρήματα δὲ 
καὶ σῖτον, ὦστε εὐπορώτερον γίγνεσθαί τι αὐτῶν, αὐτὰ τὰ 

7. ἢ καὶ τὰ πλείω: or at least the 
greater part. καί asin 1.1.7.—9. τῶν 
Ἑλλήνων : i.e. τῶν τε Σικελιωτῶν καὶ τῶν 
᾿Ιταλιωτῶν.---10. καὶ Ἴβηρας καὶ ἄλλους: 
epexegetical appos. to πολλοὺς βαρβά- 
pous. — BapBapwv: bracketed unneces- 
sarily by Bk.,St.,and v. H. It modifies 
μαχιμωτάτους to which ὁμολογουμένως viv 
belongs, and the repetition after Bap- 
βάρους (9) is not stranger than that in 
3.116. 4 or 4. 122. 2. ---11. τριήρεις τε: 
third particular after" Ἕλληνες and βάρ- 
Bapor.—12. alg: Duker’s conjecture for 
οἷς, generally accepted. With πέριξ πο- 
λιορκοῦντες the reference can only be to 
the triremes; besides transition to th 
land forces is emphasized by καὶ ἅμα. ---- 
13. τὴν Πελοπόννησον πέριξ πολιορκοῦν- 
τες: Cf. 2.7.18 πέριξ τὴν Πελοπόννησον 
καταπολεμήσοντες. --- ἐκ γῆς ἐφορμαῖς : by 
attacks from the land side. ἐφορμή ex- 
cept here and Hom. x 130 is found only 
in late poets; see Steph. Thes.s.v. The 
verb ἐφορμᾶν is found in the classical 
period only in the poets; see App. on 
49.18.—14. ἐντειχισάμενοι : (mid. else- 
where prob. only in late authors; see 
App. on 14. 142.8) having walled in. 

The Schol. explains: περιτειχίσαντες ἢ 
φρούρια ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ αὐτῶν ἐπιτειχίσαντες. 
4]. approved the latter explanation ; 
but Steup argues that the proper an- 
tithesis to βίᾳ λαμβάνειν πόλεις (cf. 4. 5. 
8, 69. 8) was not capture by an ἐπιτει- 
χισμὸς τῇ χώρᾳ (see on 1. 122. 3), but by 
a regular siege, to which belonged 
above all a circumvallation (cf. 2. 77. 
§1f.). For ἐντειχίζεσθαι, surround with 
walls or fortifications, cf. Dio C. 42. 
88 ἐκράτει τῆς μὲν ἠπείρου ὁ ᾿Αχιλλᾶς, 
χωρὶς ὧν ὁ Καῖσαρ ἐνετετείχιστο (where, 
however, not siege works but works of 
defense are meant). Cf. Plut. Pomp. 
28 παρέδωκαν ἑαυτοὺς καὶ πόλεις Kal νή- 
gous, ὧν ἐπεκράτουν ἐντειχισάμενοι (=hav- 
ing built fortifications). —15. καταπο- ὁ 
λεμήσειν: Sc. τὴν Πελοπόννησον. The 
compound = debellare, as 16. 7.— 
16. rot ξύμπαντος ‘EAAnHviKod: the whole 
Hellenic world. Cf. τὸ Ἑλληνικόν 1. 1. 
6; 8. 82. 3. 

17. εὐπορώτερον : more practicable. 
Cf. οὐκ εὔπορον ἣν 4.78.10; εὐπόρως 8. 
86. 2. ---τι αὐτῶν: i.e. something of 
these plans, as 92.1; not, with Cl., 
referring to χρήματα καὶ σῖτον. --- αὐτὰ 




προσγενόμενα ἐκεῖθεν χωρία ἔμελλε διαρκῆ ἄνευ Τῇ: ἐνθένδε 
προσόδου παρέξειν. 

“Τοιαῦτα μὲν περὶ τοῦ νῦν οἰχομένου στόλον παρὰ τοῦ τὰ 1 
9 4 9 , ε ’ 5 9 ’ 
ἀκριβέστατα εἰδότος ὡς διενοήθημεν ἀκηκόατε: 
ὑπόλοιποι στρατηγοί, ἣν δύνωνται, ὁμοίως αὐτὰ πράξουσιν. 

ν. 9 
Καὶ οσοι 

ὡς δέ, εἰ μὴ βοηθήσετε, οὐ περιέσται τἀκεῖ, μάθετε ἤδη. Yr 2 
κελιῶται γὰρ ἀπειρότεροι μέν εἰσιν, ὅμως δ᾽ av ξυστραφέν- 
τες ἀθρόοι καὶ νῦν ἔτι περιγένοιντο. Συρακόσιοι δὲ μόνοι 
μάχῃ τε ἤδη πανδημεὶ ἡσσημένοι καὶ ναυσὶν ἅμα κατειργό- 
μενοι ἀδύνατοι ἔσονται τῇ νῦν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐκεῖ παρασκενῇ 
δ 9 ν ε la , μ᾿ Ἁ ε 
καὶ εἰ αὐτὴ ἡ πόλις ληφθήσεται, ἔχεται καὶ ἡ 8 
A ’ A 954 \ 9 , , @& ¥ , 
πᾶσα Σικελία, καὶ εὐθὺς καὶ ᾿Ιταλία: καὶ ὃν ἄρτι κίνδυνον 


9 A “A 9 A ὃ Ν A ean 9 , 9 \ 
ἐκεῖθεν ΤροΟοξειτοΟν, ουΚ αν OLA ak pou υμιν ETMTLITEC OL. WOTE μη 4 

τὰ προσγενόμενα ἐκεῖθεν. . . παρέξειν : 
the places added from that quarter were 
going to furnish enough (money and 
food) of themselves without our home 
revenue. ἐκεῖθεν asin 8 above. Cf. προσ- 

γεγενημένας ναῦς ἐκ τῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν 1. 52. - 

7; προσεγένοντο ἐκ τοῦ Ἑλλησπόντου τινὲς 
δύο νῆες 8. 100. 26. 

91, 92, 81. Against this impending 
danger you must give vigorous support 
to the Syracusans, who cannot alone 
withstand the Athenians, and espe- 
cially must you send them an experi- 
enced general. At the same time you 
must openly renew the war with the 
Athenians, and, what they themselves 
fear most, you must occupy Decelea in 
Attica, whence you can cut off their 
chief sources of supply.—1. περὶ rot 
viv οἰχομένου στόλον: concerning the 
expedition that is gone. Of the same 
expedition we read 2.65.47 of ἐκπέμ- 
ψαντες οὐ τὰ πρόσφορα τοῖς οἰχομένοις 
ἐπιγιγνώσκοντες. --- τὰ ἀκριβέστατα εἰδό- 
τος: has the most accurate knowledge. 

Cf. ἀκριβές τι εἴσομαι 5. 26. 24; τὸ σαφὲς 
εἰδέναι 3.29.7. The accus. is cognate, 
but does not differ practically from the 
adv. ἀκριβέστατα in 27 below.—2. ὅσοι: 
referring to two only, Nicias and Lam- 
achus. Pal. reads ws oi, but Alcibiades 
has said nothing as yet of what the other 
generals will do.— 3. ὑπόλοιποι : as 4.2. 
7. of λοιποί of the same in 62. 1.— 4. οὐ 
περιέσται : Schol. οὐ σωθήσεται. Cf. repi- 
γένοιντο below (6).— ἤδη: now, as 90. 8. 

5. ξυστραφέντες ἀθρόοι : as 4. 68. 25. 
Cf. 77. 7.—7. πανδημεί: cf. 67. 10, 
68. 8. — ἡἧσσημένοι καὶ. . . κατειργό- 

μένοι: ptcs. pf. and pres. expressing 
the present situation. 

9. ἔχεται : pres. vividly anticipating 
the result, then all Sicily is theirs. Cf. 
34.25. The cond. is monitory, as in 4 
above. GMT. 447.— 10. ἄρτι... προ- 
εἶπον : 90. § 3.— 11. οὐ διὰ μακροῦ : see 
on 15. 18. 

ὥστε: With imv., as 7. 68. 17.— μὴ 
περὶ τῆς Σικελίας... βουλεύειν : for the 
thought, cf. 1. 86. 6, 120. 14. βουλεύειν, 




περὶ τῆς Σικελίας τις οἰέσθω μόνον βουλεύειν, ἀλλὰ καὶ 
περὶ τῆς Πελοποννήσου, εἰ μὴ ποιήσετε τάδε ἐν τάχει, στρα- 
τιάν τε ἐπὶ νεῶν πέμψετε τοιαύτην ἐκεῖσε οἵτινες αὐτερέται 
κομισθέντες καὶ ὁπλιτεύσουσιν εὐθύς, καὶ ὃ τῆς στρατιᾶς ἔτι 
χρησιμώτερον εἶναι νομίζω, ἄνδρα Σπαρτιάτην ἄρχοντα, ὡς 
ἂν τούς τε παρόντας ξυντάξῃ καὶ τοὺς μὴ θέλοντας προσα- 
ναγκάσῃ" οὕτω γὰρ oi τε ὑπάρχοντες ὑμῖν φίλοι θαρσή- 
σουσι μᾶλλον καὶ οἱ ἐνδοιάζοντες ἀδεέστερον προσίασι. καὶ 

\ 3 4 , 9 , 3 “A ν , ’ 
τὰ ἐνθάδε χρὴ ἅμα φανερώτερον ἐκπολεμεῖν, ἵνα Συρακόσιοί 

4 e “A 3 4 ~ 9 4 x 3 

τε νομίζοντες ὑμᾶς ἐπιμέλεσθαι μᾶλλον ἀντέχωσι καὶ ᾿Αθη- 
ναῖοι τοῖς ἑαυτῶν ἧσσον ἄλλην ἐπικουρίαν πέμπωσι. τειχί- 
ζειν δὲ χρὴ Δεκέλειαν τῆς ᾿Αττικῆς, ὅπερ ᾿Αθηναῖοι μάλιστα 

αἰεὶ φοβοῦνται, καὶ μόνον αὐτοῦ νομίζουσι τῶν ἐν τῷ πολέ 
) μ μ f μῳ.. 

asfreq., = βουλεύεσθαι. ---- 18. εἰ μὴ ποιή- 
σετε τάδε ἐν τάχει : this prot. depends, 
as Kr. and St. explain, on something 
implied but not expressed in the pre- 
ceding, i.e. also about the Peloponnesus 
(which is in danger) unless you will do 
the following things quickly. Steup sug- 
gests the loss of some words before εἰ 
μὴ ποιήσετε, perhaps εἴπερ καὶ αὕτη τὰ 
μέγιστα βλάψεται. --- στρατιάν τε... 
καὶ... ἄνδρα Σπαρτιάτην : τε and καί 
correlate the double obj. of πέμψετε, 
which still depends upon εἰ and ex- 
plains τάδε. Cf. 2.77.22 τόδε ξυμβῆναι 
followed by epexegetical inf. without 
connective. See on 1. 89. 2.— 14. otr- 
veg: pl. rel. referring to the collective 
στρατιάν͵ aS 8.67.12; 7.1. 9.— αὐτερέ- 
ται: fighting men serving at the oar. 
Cf. 1.10.26; 8. 18. 16.— 16. ὡς ἂν τούς 
τεπαρόντας... προσαναγκάσῃ : cf. the 
advice οὗ Hermocrates 72. ὃ 4. For 
ws ἄν with subjv., found only here in 
Thuc., but not infreq. in tragedy, see 
Stahl, Qu. Gr.225.— 17. θέλοντας : for 

the form, see on 34. 18.—19. ἐνδοιά- 
ἴοντες : also 1.36.9, 122.15. Not else- 
where in Attic. 
καὶ τὰ ἐνθάδε χρὴ. . . ἐκπολεμεῖν : 
and here you must at the same time prose- 

‘cute the war more openly. Cf. 78. 61. 

and 88.44f. τὰ ἐνθάδε is adv. here, as 
in 84.12. φανερώτερον is enforced by 
ἐκ in ἐκπολεμεῖν. Though the intr. form 
seems appropriate here, St. and others 
adopt against all Mss. the trans. ἐκπο- 
λεμοῦν. See App.—21. ἐπιμέλεσθαι: see 
on 54. 24, — 22. rots ἑαυτῶν ἧσσον ἄλ.- 
Anv ἐπικουρίαν πέμπωσι: may be less 
likely to send to their allies further assist- 
ance. Cf. 78. 9f. For rots ἑαυτῶν, their 
allies, cf. 4. 126. 4 τὴν ἀπόλειψιν τῶν 
ἡμετέρων, the withdrawal of our allies. 
τειχίζειν δὲ χρὴ Δεκέλειαν : this ad-’ 
vice, fateful for Athens, was later car- 
ried out, 7.19.—24. αὐτοῦ : pers. for 
rel., acc. to Greek usage in a second 
clause of a rel. sent. See on 1. 42. 2. 
G. 1040; H. 1005; Kr. Spr. 60, 6, 2. 
--- τῶν ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ: 1.6. War in general, 






9 a , > ¥ ν δ , 
ov διαπεπειρᾶσθαι. βεβαιότατα δ᾽ av τις οὕτω τοὺς πολεμίους 
βλάπτοι, εἰ, ἃ μάλιστα δεδιότας αὐτοὺς αἰσθάνοιτο, ταῦτα 
~ 4 9 ’ > AN “\ 9 “\ 9 l4 
σαφῶς πυνθανόμενος ἐπιφέροι: εἰκὸς yap αὐτοὺς ἀκριβέ 
στατα ἑκάστους τὰ σφέτερα αὐτῶν δεινὰ ἐπισταμένους φοβεῖ: 
ἃ > 3 A 3 ’ 9 Ν 3 ’ Ν 9 4 
σθαι. ad ἐν τῇ ἐπιτειχίσει αὐτοὶ ὠφελούμενοι τοὺς ἐναντίους 1 
’ \ Ἁ Ν 4 ’ Φ' ‘ 
κωλύσετε, πολλὰ παρεὶς τὰ μέγιστα κεφαλαιώσω: οἷς TE γὰρ 
ἡ χώρα κατεσκεύασται, τὰ πολλὰ πρὸς ὑμᾶς τὰ μὲν λη- 
Yd \ 3 9. 9 9 Ν δ A , A 
φθέντα, τὰ δ᾽ αὐτόματα ἥξει: καὶ τὰς τοῦ Λαυρείον τῶν 
9 4 ’ , \, g 3 μν ~ Ἁ 
ἀργυρείων μετάλλων προσόδους καὶ ὅσα ἀπὸ γῆς καὶ δικα- 
στηρίων νῦν ὠφελοῦνται εὐθὺς ἀποστερήσονται, μάλιστα δὲ 
τῆς ἀπὸ τῶν ξυμμάχων προσόδον ἧσσον διαφορουμένης, 
οἱ τὰ παρ᾽ ὑμῶν νομίσαντες ἤδη κατὰ κράτος πολεμεῖσθαι 
ὀλιγωρήσουσι. γίγνεσθαι δέ τι αὐτῶν καὶ ἐν τάχει καὶ 

not this particular war. Cf. 72.5; 2. 
100. 7.— 25. διαπεπειρᾶσθαι : only here 
in Thuc.— 27. σαφῶς πυνθανόμενος: the 
vague αἰσθάνοιτο becomes here clearly 
learning. —atrots: ipsos, pred. to 

29. &: cogn. accus. with ὠφελούμενοι. 
— τῇ ἐπιτειχίσει : a hostile stronghold 
on the border or in the territory of an 
enemy. See on 1. 122. 3.— 30. κωλύ- 
σετε: SC. ὠφελεῖσθαι. ---- κεφαλαιώσω: 
found also 3.67.32; 8.53.3.—31. κα- 
τεσκεύασται : applied to every kind of 
structure and domestic equipment. Cf. 
8. 24. 18 τὴν χώραν καλῶς κατεσκευασμέ- 
νην. Τὸ this kind of property belong 
also slaves, and to these applies τὰ 
δ᾽ αὐτόματα ἥξει (32). Cf. 7.27.22 ἀν- 
δραπόδων πλέον ἢ δύο μυριάδες ηὐτομολή- 
κεσαν. --- 82. Λαυρείον : so (for Λαυρίου) 
some of the best Mss. here and 2. 55. 
2, in agreement with Steph. Thes. s.v. 
Zéeppecov.— 33. δικαστηρίων : ‘from the 
courts, since in case of a war at home 
a cessation of the courts occurs” 

(Boeckh, Staatshaushaltung I®, 415). 
Cf. also Schol. ταύτης οὖν τῆς πάσης προσ- 
ὀδον στερήσεσθαι ἔμελλον οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, 
πολεμίων αὐτοῖς ἱδρυμένων ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ καὶ 
σχολὴν οὐ παρεχόντων δικάζεσθαι. The 
expression ἀπὸ δικαστηρίων ὠφελοῦνται 
prob. includes also the μισθὸς δικαστικός 
received by individuals. See App. — 
35. τῆς. . . προσόδου: added, with 
change of censt., to ἀποστερήσονται, 
with ἧσσον διαφορουμένης in explan. ad- 
dition, as the tribute is less regularly 
brought in. διαφορεῖν, as 100. 24, but 
not elsewhere found in this sense. BI. 
cites, as nearest parallel, Dio Ὁ. 34. 6, 
where it means remit. The pres. ptc. 
used of wont or custom. See App. — 
36. ot: referring to ξυμμάχων, in the 
sense of ἐπεὶ ἐκεῖνοι.---- κατὰ κράτος πολε- 
μεῖσϑαι: neut. pass. with τὰ παρ᾽ ὑμῶν 
ἴη) δᾶν. force.—37. ὀλιγωρήσουσι: they 
will take their tribute obligations lightly. 

92, ξ 1. 1. τι αὐτῶν : see on 90. 17. 
The reference is to the proposals devel- 
oped in 91. § 4 ff.—2. προθυμότερον : 



of 9 9 ean 3 5 A ὃ , 9 νΝ 9 
TPOUVILOTEPOV ἐν υμιν ἐστιν, ὦ Λακεόαιμονιοι, ἔπει WS YE 

δυνατά, (καὶ οὐχ ἁμαρτήσεσθαι οἶμαι γνώμης) πάνυ θαρσῶ. 
ce κ᾿ , 9 ν. 95 A mA εκ 5 > AS A 
Kat χείρων οὐδενὶ ἀξιῶ δοκεῖν ὑμῶν εἶναι, εἰ TH ἐμαντοῦ 

+. A , ~ > A 
5 μετὰ TOV πολεμιωτάτων, φιλόπολίς ποτε δοκῶν εἶναι, νῦν 

3 ΝᾺ 9 4 9 A e ’ 4 3 ‘\ 
ἐγκρατῶς ἐπέρχομαι, οὐδὲ ὑποπτεύεσθαΐί μον ἐς THY φυγα- 

δικὴν προθυμίαν τὸν λόγον. 

φυγάς τε γάρ εἶμι τῆς τῶν 

3 , , Ν > Ἂ ε ’ a , , 
ἐξελασάντων πονηρίας καὶ ov τῆς ὑμετέρας, ἣν πείθησθέ 

9 ’ Ἁ ’ 9 ε ‘ 4 
μοι, ὠφελίας, Kal πολεμιώτεροι οὐχ οἱ TOUS πολεμίους πον 

10 βλάψαντες ὑμεῖς ἡ οἱ τοὺς φίλους ἀναγκάσαντες πολεμίους 

used with reference to περαίνεσθαι im- 
plied in ylyver@ar.—év ὑμῖν ἐστιν: de- 
pends upon you. — ws ye Suvarad . . . πάνν 
θαρσῶ: Alcibiades intimates that the 
Athenians would not be able to prevent 
the Spartans from bringing aid to the 
Syracusans and fortifying Decelea, — 
8. ἁμαρτήσεσθαι γνώμης : cf. 1. 33. 23. 

92, §§ 2-5. Do ndt mistrust me be- 
cause I am an Athenian exile and urge 
you to war against my fatherland. Use 
me rather without fear for every dan- 
ger and difficulty; shrink not from 
proceeding against Sicily and Attica, 
in order to rescue the Siceliotes, to 
break the power of the Athenians, and 
to have security for yourselves and 
the hegemony over all Hellas with its 
free consent. — 4. καὶ xelpov.. . εἶναι: 
cf. 8. 9. 11 μηδέ τῳ χείρους δόξωμεν εἶναι. 
The orator is led by the consideration 
that his proposals might be distrusted 
in Sparta, as coming from an Athenian 
exile, again to go into his personal rela- 
tions, as in c. 89 he had sought to show 
that his former political conduct should 
not prevent the Spartans from giving 
him an unprejudiced hearing. —rq 
ἐμαντοῦ : sc. y7.—6. ἐγκρατῶς : (Schol. 
καρτερῶς) a8 1. 70. 6. --- pov: dependent 

on τὸν λόγον, but gets by its position the 
force of dat. incommodi.— és τὴν φυ- 
γαδικὴν προθυμίαν : on the score of (with 
reference to) the exile’s zeal, i.e. as if 
only the zeal that characterizes exiles 
were beneath my proposal. For és, cf. 
8.88.8 βουλόμενος αὐτὸν és Thy... φι- 
Mav... διαβάλλειν. φυγαδικός also in 
Isocr. 9. 28; elsewhere only in late 

7. φυγάς τε γάρ εἰμι κτέ.: ** The fol- 
lowing definitions are doubtless so ar- 
ranged by Thuc. that by ingenious 
paradox and forced sophistry may be 
revealed the insincerity and unsteadi- 
nessof Alcibiades’’(Bm.). Theanswers 
to the possible reproaches are given in 
chiastic order: for I am a fugitive from 
the villainy of those that expelled me, and 
yet not banished from benefiting you, if 
you hearken tome. With the word-play 
on φυγάς, cf. ξύμμαχοι 8. 10. 10, and ἀπο- 
στήσεσθαι ἀπόστασιν 3.13. 8.—9. καὶ 
πολεμιώτεροι κτὲ.: this καί, not the pre- 
ceding, correl. to re. The predicate 
applied above (5) to enemies in war, 
the Lacedaemonians, is here trans- 
ferred to his enemies in Athens, and 
the word is put forward for empha- 
sis where we should naturally have 




γενέσθαι: τό τε φιλόπολι οὐκ ἐν ᾧ ἀδικοῦμαι ἔχω, GAN’ ἐν ᾧ 9 

ἀσφαλῶς ἐπολιτεύθην οὐδ᾽ ἐπὶ πατρίδα οὖσαν ἔτι ἡγοῦμαι 

A 4 9 QA 
νῦν ἰέναι, πολὺ δὲ μᾶλλον τὴν οὐκ οὖσαν ἀνακτᾶσθαι" καὶ 

φιλόπολις οὗτος ὀρθῶς, οὐχ ὃς av τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀδίκως ἀπολέ 

ὴ ἐπίῃ. ἀλλ᾽ ὃς ἂν ἐ ὃς τρό διὰ τὸ ἐπιθυμεῖ 
σας μὴ ἐπίῃ, ἀλλ᾽ ὃς ἂν ἐκ παντὸς τρόπον υμεῖν 

A > A 9 A 9 9 , 9 A ea N93 
πειραθῇ αὐτὴν ἀναλαβεῖν. οὕτως ἐμοί Te ἀξιῶ ὑμᾶς Kal és ὃ 

A a) 
κίνδυνον καὶ ἐς ταλαιπωρίαν πᾶσαν ἀδεῶς χρῆσθαι, ὦ Λακε- 

ὃ ᾽ ᾽ A ὃ QA 4 ε 3 ε ‘4 λλ 9 
αιμόνιοι, γνόντας τοῦτον δὴ τὸν Ud ἁπάντων προβαλλόμε- 

νον λόγον, ws, εἰ πολέμιός γε ὧν σφόδρα ἔβλαπτον, κἀν 

οὐ πολεμιώτεροι: and more hostile are 
not those who, like you, have injured 
foes, but those who have forced friends 
to become foes. 

11. τό τε φιλόπολι κτέ.: τε introduc- 
ing third rejoinder. The Schol. re- 
marks: φιλόπολις, φησίν, οὐ viv εἰμί, ἡνίκα 
ἀδικοῦμαι, ἀλλὰ τότε ὅτε ἀσφαλῶς ἐπολι- 
τευόμην. But ἐν ᾧ is not merely tem- 
poral, but circumstantial: and patriotism 
I cherish not where I am wronged, but 
where my political rights were secure. 
Sc. efyov; see on 1. 86. 7.—12. ἐπολι- 
τεύθην: lived as a citizen. This (aor. 
pass.) form occurs also in Lys. 26. 5; 
Isocr. 7.15; Aeschin. 2.176; but éro- 
λιτευσάμην Dem. 18. 207. Veitch re- 
marks that of classical authors only 
Thuc. and Xen. use the active πολι- 
τεύειν. ---- οὐδ᾽ ἐπὶ πατρίδα... viv ἱέναι: 
and it is not against a land that is still 
my country that I consider I am now 
going, referring to (4) εἰ τῇ ἐμαντοῦ... 
ἐπέρχομαι. ---- 18, τὴν οὐκ οὖσαν ἀνακτᾶ- 
σθαι: sc. πατρίδα. From the whole con- 
text only Athens can be thought of. 
bc ἑτέρων ζητεῖν τὴν κάθοδον, as Isocr. 
9. 28 expresses it, was something com- 
mon enough in Hellenicantiquity. Van 
H. wishes to write τὴν οὐκέτ᾽ οὖσαν or τὴν 

οὐκ οὖσαν ἔτι, but after ἔτι in 12 this is 
unnecessary.—kal φιλόπολις x7 é.: tran- 
sition from the personal to the general, 
with a reference also to the assumed 
reproach (δ) φιλόπολίς ποτε δοκῶν εἶναι: 
and the true patriot is not that one who, 
having unjustly lost his fatherland, re- 
Frains from going against it, but who on 
account of longing for it tries in every way 
to get it back. Such a definition would 
not seem as strange to the Hellenes of 
the fifth and fourth centuries as to us. 
Cf. Isocr. 16. 12 ff. and A. Fokke, Ret- 
tungen des Alkibiades II, 76 ff.— 
16. πειραθῇ : in act. sense, as in 2. 5. 20, 
33. 9 (elsewhere πειρᾶσαι or πειράσα- 
σθαι); in pass. sense 54, 9. 

οὕτως : drawing the conclusion from 
the preceding, as 1. 76.6; 4. 86. 23. — 
ἐμοί re ἀξιῶ... . ὠφελοίην : clearly imi- 
tated in the conclusion of the speech 
of Coriolanus in Dion. H. Antiq. 8. 8. 
— ἐμοί re: (BK.’s correction for ἔμοιγε) 
opp. to καὶ αὐτούς (21).—17. πᾶσαν: 
though agreeing in gender with the 
nearer noun, affecting also κίνδυνον. 
—18. τοῦτον : looks forward. See on 
85. 3.— προβαλλόμενον : advanced. — 
19. εἰ... ἔβλαπτον : actual case more 
vividly presented in hypothetical form. 



20 φίλος ὧν ἱκανῶς whedoinv, ὅσῳ τὰ μὲν ᾿Αθηναίων οἶδα, τὰ 
δ᾽ ὑμέτερα ἤἥκαζον, καὶ αὐτοὺς νῦν, νομίσαντας περὶ μεγί- 

στων δὴ τῶν διαφερόντων βουλεύεσθαι, μὴ ἀποκνεῖν τὴν ἐς 
Ν , ‘ 9 Ἁ 3 A 4 ν ’ 
τὴν Σικελίαν τε καὶ ἐς τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν στρατείαν, ἵνα τά τε 
ἐκεὶ βραχεῖ μορίῳ ξυμπαραγενόμενοι μεγάλα σώσητε καὶ 
3 4 ’ Ψ QA “\ 4 , ’ 
25 ᾿Αθηναίων τήν τε οὖσαν καὶ τὴν μέλλουσαν δύναμιν καθέ-: 

XN XN ἴω 9 ’ 9 ~ 3: A ‘ ~ ε , 
ANTE, καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα αὐτοί TE ἀσφαλῶς οἰκῆτε καὶ τῆς απα- 
Ἑλλάδος ἑκούσης καὶ οὐ βίᾳ, κατ᾽ εὔνοιαν δὲ ἡγῆσθε." 
σης ς ns καὶ οὐ Bia, ν δὲ ἡγῆσθε. 
ε 9 4 A 
O μὲν ᾿Αλκιβιάδης τοσαῦτα εἶπεν: οἱ δὲ Λακεδαιμόνιοι 

A . A \ δ 
διανοούμενοι μὲν καὶ αὐτοὶ πρότερον στρατεύειν ἐπὶ τὰς 

᾿Αθήνας, μέλλοντες δ᾽ ἔτι καὶ περιορώμενοι, πολλῷ μᾶλλον 

See on 1. 88. 8. --- 20. ὅσῳ: in 80 far as, 
without comp. ΟΥ ΒῈΡ. See on 1. 68. 11. 
-- τὰ δ᾽ ὑμέτερα ἤἥκαζον: while I could 
only conjecture yours. Note the modest 
impf. as contrasted with the self-con- 
scious pres. — 21. αὐτοὺς... ph ἀπο- 
kvetv: dependent on ἀξιῶ (16).— 22. τῶν 
διαφερόντων : the interests at stake, as 
1.70.8, and τὰ διάφορα 1. 68.8; 2. 87. 
5; 4.86.23; 5.115. 8. Cf. ἰδίᾳ τι αὐτῷ 
διαφέρει. The pred. μεγίστων δή, is em- 
phafically put forward, as all impor- 
tant. — 28. τε καί: connecting the two 
divergent goals of the στρατεία, as 
inseparable if the object is to be 
reached.— 24. βραχεῖ μορίῳ : of a divi- 
sion of troops, as 2. 89. 17.— μεγάλα 
σώσητε: keep great, preserve in their 
greatness. The adj. is pred., containing 
the effect of the verb. Cf. 1. 90.20. 
Steup connects, with Portusand Haase, 
τὰ ἐκεῖ μεγάλα, Notwithstanding the in- 
tervening words, urging that we have 
thus (i.e. in the great Sicilian cities) a 
better antithesis to βραχεῖ poply.— 
25. τήν τεοὖσαν καὶ τὴν μέλλουσαν Siva- 
μιν: the power which they now possess 

and that for which they hope. τὴν μέλλου- 
σαν the increased power on which they - 
might reckon after the subjugation of. 
Sicily and with which Alcibiades 
threatens them in 90. ὃ 3.— καθέλητε: 
pull down, overthrow, as 11.12; 5. 14. 
14. See on 1. 77. 20.—26. καὶ pera 
ταῦτα... ἡγῆσθε: parody, with inten- 
tional optimistic coloring, of Alcibi- 
ades’ own description, in 90. ὃ 8 (end), 
of the hopes of the Athenians. Against 
ἄρξειν there appears here the mild éxov- 
ons καὶ οὐ Bla, κατ᾽ εὔνοιαν δὲ ἡγῆσθε. ---- 
27. ἡγῆσθε: so with Vat., in preference 
to ἡγήσησθε Or ἡγήσεσθε Of other Mss., 
to express continuance, as in οἰκῆτε (26). 
93. In consequence of this speech 
the Lacedaemonians determine to for- 
tify Decelea, and send Gylippus to 
Syracuse, with orders to see that aid 
is brought as soon as possible to Sicily. 
In Athens it is voted to comply with the 
request of the generals and send money 
and cavalry to Sicily.—1. τοσαῦτα: 
Vat. reads, perhaps more correctly, 
τοιαῦτα. Seeon 88. 1.—2. αὐτοί: sua 
sponte, as 3.65. 4.—3. περιορώμενοι : 




3 ’ a “A 4 9 ~ Ἁ , 
ἐπερρώσθησαν διδάξαντος ταντα εκαστα αὕτου Kal νομισαν- 

ἴων 2 ἴω 
τες παρὰ τοῦ σαφέστατα εἰδότος ἀκηκοέναι: ὥστε τῇ ἐπιτει- 2 

’ aA 4 A γὃ \ A \ \ , 
χίσει TNS Δεκελείας προσειχον NOY τον νουν και TO παραντικα 

Ἁ A 9 ἴω ’ ’ \ ’ A ᾽ὔ 
και τοις ἐν Τ Σικελίᾳ πέμπειν τινὰ τιμωρίαν. καὶ Γύλιππον 

τὸν Κλεανδρίδον προστάξαντες ἄρχοντα τοῖς Συρακοσίοις 

3 ld 9 93 4 \ ~ , ao A 
ἐκέλευον μετ᾽ ἐκείνων Kat τῶν Κορινθίων βουλευόμενον ποιεῖν 

[-} 4 “A , a Ἁ ᾽ὔ ᾽’ 9 a ν 
ὅπῃ ἐκ τῶν παρόντων μάλιστα καὶ τάχιστά τις ὠφελία NEE 

τοῖς ἐκεῖ. ὁ δὲ δύο μὲν ναῦς τοὺς Κορινθίους ἤδη ἐκέλευέν 3 

ε ’, 3 9 ’ Ν δὲ Ν Ud θ 9 
οἱ πέμπειν ἐς ᾿Ασίνην, τὰς 0€ λοιπὰς παρασκευάζεσθαι ὅσας 

A 9” \ gS e , 3 A 
διανοοῦνται πέμπειν, Kai, ὅταν καιρὸς ἡ, ἑτοίμας εἶναι πλεῖν. 

ταῦτα δὲ ξυνθέμενοι ἀνεχώρουν ἐκ τῆς Λακεδαίμονος. 

circumspectantes. Cf. 108. 9; 7. 
33.9. So Cic. Tusc.1.30.73 dubitans, 
circumspectans, haesitans.— 
4, διδάξαντος... αὐτοῦ καὶ νομίσαντες : 
for similar coupling of gen. abs. and 
nom., see on 1.65.2.—5. παρὰ τοῦ oa- 
φέστατα εἰδότος ἀκηκοέναι: cf. 91. § 1. 

6. προσεῖχον τὸν νοῦν: more freq. 
τὴν γνώμην (1.95.7; 2.11.10; 5. 26. 
23; 7.15.15, 23.3). With dat. here, as 
in 7. 28. 8. --- καὶ τὸ παραντίκα kal... 
τιμωρίαν: and in particular to sending 
immediately to the Sicilians some assist- 
ance. Compare herewith the feeling of 
the Spartan authorities before the 
speech of Alcibiades, 88. 54 ff. The inf. 
follows προσεῖχον τὸν νοῦν as if ἐν νῷ εἶχον 
had preceded. Stahl compares the inf. 
after νοῦν ἔχειν Soph. El.1014. τὸ rapav- 
τίκα a8 1.27.4, 1384.10; 3.4.8; 4.121. 7. 
—8. προστάξαντες ἄρχοντα: see App. 
on 8.26.3. Gylippus, whose general- 
ship in Sicily was so fateful for Athens, 
first appears here. His father Clean- 
dridas was implicated in the charge of 
bribery on which King Pleistoanax was 
banished in 446 n.c. (1. 114. §2; 2. 21. 


81; ὅ. 16. ὃ 8), and he had to go into 
exile himself. Cf. 104.§2; Plut. Pericl. 
22; Nic. 28.—9. per ἐκείνων καὶ τῶν 
Κορινθίων: i.e. with the ambassadors 
of the Syracusans and Corinthians. — 
ποιεῖν ὅπῃ: Operam dare quomodo. 
Ci. πράσσειν ἡ 26. 3.—10. μάλιστα: 
best, most certainly. Steup alone of the 
editors adopts from Vat. κάλλιστα. But 
that attractive reading looks like a 
margipal explanation of μάλιστα. --- τις 
ὠφελία: cf. 88.45; 1.31.10. 

11. ἤδη: without delay, as 25. 8. --- 
12. ἐς ᾿Ασίνην : prob. the harbor in 
Messenia (4. 18. 3). See on 4. 54. 20. 
— παρασκενάζεσθαι : prob. pass.; or τὰς 
λοιπάς Must be at once its obj. and the 
subj. of ἑτοίμας εἶναι. ----14, ταῦτα δὲ 
ξυνθέμενοι ἀνεχώρουν : i.e. the ambassa- 
dors of Syracuse and Corinth, as all 
recent editors, except Steup, explain. 
The latter thinks the words ol Kopi» 
θιοι must have fallen out here, because 
only the Corinthian ambassadors would 
have part in an agreement to send 
Corinthian ships in aid. — ἀνεχώρουν : 
set off on the return. 



#01.91.2; 414, Spring GYLIPPUS SENT TO SYRACUSE 

᾿Αφίκετο δὲ καὶ ἡ ἐκ τῆς Σικελίας τριήρης τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, 4 


ἃ Ν ’ 4 \ 

nv ἀπέστειλαν οἵ στρατηγοὶ ἐπί τε χρήματα καὶ ἱππέας. καὶ 
ε5 A 9 ’ 3 ’ 4 \ , 

οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀκούσαντες ἐψηφίσαντο τήν τε τροφὴν πέμπειν 
“A A N “ ’, Ἁ ‘ 

τῇ στρατιᾷ καὶ τοὺς ἱππέας. Kal ὁ χειμὼν ἐτελεύτα, Kal 

ἕβδομον καὶ δέκατον ἔτος τῷ πολέμῳ ἐτελεύτα τῷδε ὃν Θου- 

κυδίδης ξυνέγραψεν. 

*"Apa δὲ τῷ ἦρι εὐθὺς ἀρχομένῳ τοῦ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέ. 
ρους οἱ ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἄραντες ἐκ τῆς Κατάνης παρ- 

έπλευσαν ἐπὶ Μεγάρων τῶν ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ, οὗς ἐπὶ Γέλωνος 

τοῦ τυράννου, ὥσπερ καὶ πρότερόν μοι εἴρηται, ἀναστήσαντες 
Συρακόσιοι αὐτοὶ ἔχουσι τὴν γῆν. ἀποβάντες δὲ ἐδήωσαν 

15. ἣ ἐκ τῆς Σικελίας τριήρης : οἷ. 74. 
12.—17. τὴν τροφήν : not provisions, 
but pay or money for maintenance, as 
is shown by 94.19. This is the usual 
meaning of τροφή in military matters ; 
cf. 4. 88.24; 8.57. 88. σιτηρέσιον first 
occurs Xen. Anab. 5. 10. 4 (Kr.).— 
19. τῷ πολέμῳ ἐτελεύτα τῷδε: Vat. 
offers here and in 7. 18. 33, against the 
other Mss., the rarer word-order ére- 
Netra τῷ πολέμῳ τῷδε (cf. 7.22; 2. 70. 
5), whereas it alone has in 8. 60.17 τῷ 
πολέμῳ ἐτελεύτα τῷδε. See on 2.17.2. 

The Eighteenth Year of the War 

94. The Athenians make from Cat- 
ana forays into the territory of Megara 
Hyblaea and to the river Terias, also 
against the Sicel town of Centoripa, 
which they induce to jointhem. From 
Athens 250 cavalrymen — but with- 
out horses— and 30 mounted bowmen, 
along with 300 talents of money, 
arrive at Catana.—2. ἄραντες ἐκ τῆς 
Kardvns: cf. 88. ὃ 5.—3. Μεγάρων: 
Megara Hyblaea; see on 4. 7. — τῶν ἐν 
τῇ Σικελίᾳ: bracketed by Stahl and 

others, following Kr. It might easily 
be spared, but without it ἐπὶ τῶν Meyd- 
ρων must be expected, acc. to 49. 18, 
75. 4, 97.25; 7.25.15. The reading 
of Vat. ἐπὶ Μεγαρέων τῶν κτὲ. is not ac- 
ceptable, as ἐπί takes gen. only of names 
of places, and the Megarians at that 
time had been driven from town and 
territory (4. ὃ 2).— ols: per synesin re- 
ferring to Μεγάρων. Cf. 80.38, 91.14. 
— 4. πρότερον: 4. ὃ 2. 

5. ἐδήωσαν τοὺς ἀγροὺς κτὲ.: SO with 
Vat., for τούς τε ἀγρούς of the Mss., 
which most editors accept. The posi- 
tion of re is not ground for rejection 
(see on 2. 46.1); but not only is the 
coupling of aor. and impf. of the same 
verb by re... καί objectionable, but 
it is hardly to be supposed that Thue. 
would thus correlate the devastation of 
the fields and the plain, with the unsuc- 
cessful attack on the fort and the ad- 
vance along the shore to the Terias 
river thrown in between. L. Herbst 
(Zu Thuk. IT, 109f.) would bracket not 
only τε, but also τοὺς ἀγρούς, because in 
8. 79.12 Thuc. writes πορθεῖν ἀγρούς. 





δ 9 Α ν 3 ,ὕ .ι͵λν ,ὕ A ᾿ , Ν 
τοὺς ἀγροὺς καὶ ἐλθόντες ἐπὶ ἔρυμά τι τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ 

9 εχ 7 > ‘ ee Ν Ν , 2_N 
οὐχ ἑλόντες αὖθις καὶ πεζῇ Kal ναυσὶ παρακομισθέντες ἐπὶ 

Ν [4 Ν ’ δί > , 25 4 ἃ Ν 
τὸν Τηρίαν ποταμὸν τό τε πεδίον ἀναβάντες ἐδῇουν καὶ τὸν 

σῖτον ἐνεπίμπρασαν, καὶ τῶν Συρακοσίων περιτυχόντες 

Α A Ἁ 9 iA ’ Q ry 
τισὶν οὐ πολλοῖς καὶ ἀποκτείναντές TE τινας καὶ τροπαῖον 

: Ν δ A Ν 
στήσαντες ἀνεχώρησαν ἐπὶ τὰς ναῦς. καὶ ἀποπλεύσαντες ἐς 3 

, 2 A . 2 , , A a 2 + 
Karavyp, ἐκεῖθεν δὲ ἐπισιτισάμενοι TAa0N ΤΉ στβατιᾳ έχω- 

ρουν ἐπὶ Κεντόριπα, Σικελικὸν πόλισμα, καὶ προσαγαγόμε- 

νοι ὁμολογίᾳ ἀπῇσαν, ἐμπιπράντες ἅμα τὸν σῖτον τῶν τε 

\ A e ’ δ 
Ἰνησσαίων καὶ τῶν Ὑβλαίων. καὶ ἀφικόμενοι ἐς Κατάνην, 

, 4 e / ν 9 A 9 A 
καταλαμβάνουσι τούς τε ἱππέας ἥκοντας ἐκ τῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν 

But cf. δηοῦν ἀγρούς 2. 18. 7,12.—6. ἐπὶ 
ἔρυμά τι τῶν Συρακοσίων: acc. to 75. 
§ 1 the Syracusans had turned the de- 
populated Megara into a fort, which 
prob. is here designated by ἔρυμά re, as 
it is not likely that they would have 
fortified two points in the district of 
Megara. The historian prob. did not 
recall that he had already spoken more 
definitely at 75. ὃ 1 about the ἔρυμα. ---- 
7. αὖθις... παρακομισθέντες : Stahl 
rightly explains that αὖθις refers to 
παρα- in παρέπλευσαν (2). The Atheni- 
ans advanced again along the coast, 
the movement being made this time 
not only by sea, but καὶ πεζῇ καὶ ναυσίν. 
As Hat. (5. 98. 26), so also Thuc. some- 
times uses κομίζεσθαι of land-marches 
(cf. 3. 114. 24; 8. 80. 15, 100. 20). Not 
observing this, Cl. understood πεζῇ to 
refer to the return-march from the 
ἔρυμα to the coast and corrected (8) 
ἀναβάντες (going up, i.e. inland) into 
ἀποβάντες (disembarking).—8. Typlav: 
about this river, see on 50. 12.—10. τι- 
σὶν οὐ πολλοῖς : see on 1. 5. 

12. ἐπισιτισάμενοι: having supplied 
themselves with provisions. Cf. 8. 95.17, 

101. 2.—18. Κεντόριπα : now Centorbi. 
See Holm I, 68. Cf. Strabo 272 c κεῖται 
ὑπὲρ Κατάνης ra Κεντόριπα συνάπτοντα 
τοῖς Αἰτναίοις ὄρεσι καὶ τῳ Συμαίθῳ πο- 
ταμῷ ῥέοντι εἰς τὴν Καταναίαν». --- Σικελι- 
κὸν πόλισμα: the reading οὗ Vat., the 
other better Mss, having Σικελόν. Most 
editors write Σικελῶν with the inferior 
Codex G. Cf."Yxxapa, πόλισμα Σικανι- 
κόν 62.10 ; “Ivnocay, τὸ Σικελικὸν πόλισμα 
3. 103. 5.— προσαγαγόμενοι : having 
brought over; see on 2. 30.7; 3. 91. 7. 
— 14. ἐμπιπράντες : Vat. has ἐμπιπρῶ»- 
res, the other Mss. πιμπράντες or πιπρά»- 
res. The compound is necessary (with 
v. H.), as the simple verb seems to be 
quite foreign to Attic prose. The com- 
pound occurs above (9) and elsewhere in 
Thac. fourteen times.—rév re Ἰνησσαί- 
wv kal τῶν ‘YBAalwv: Inessa and Hybla 
Geleatis were Sicel towns, the former 
mentioned 3. 103. 5, the latter 62. 21. 

16. τούς re ἱππέας xré.: cf. 98. 18. — 
17. avev τῶν ἵππων : without the neces- 
sary horses, hence the article. — μετὰ 
σκευῆς: as elsewhere of equipment of 
men (see on 1. 2. 12), so here of horses. 

—as ... πορισθησομένων : for the 



ἃ Ἂ A 9 ~ ε 
πεντήκοντα καὶ διακοσίους ἄνεν τῶν ἵππων μετὰ σκευῆς, ὡς 
ν ld δ 

αὐτόθεν ἵππων πορισθησομένων, καὶ ἱπποτοξότας τριάκοντα 

\ ’ 
καὶ τάλαντα ἀργυρίου τριακόσια. 

“A 9 9 “A 3 Ἁ 3 > ¥ 4 
Tov δ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἦρος καὶ ἐπ᾽ "Apyos στρατεύσαντες Λακε- 

δαιμόνιοι μέχρι μὲν Κλεωνῶν ἦλθον, σεισμοῦ δὲ γενομένου 

3 ’ \ 9 A Ν A 3 4 3 ᾽ν 
ἀνεχώρησαν. καὶ ᾿Αργεῖοι μετὰ ταῦτα ἐσβαλόντες ἐς τὴν 

Θυρεᾶτιν ὅμορον οὖσαν λείαν τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων πολλὴν ἔλα- 

ad 3 Ud : Ud 9 ¥ , Ἁ » Ἁ 
βον, ἡ ἐπράθη ταλάντων οὐκ ἔλασσον πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι. καὶ 

ε a A 9 A 4 oA , "9 . ¢ 9 , 
O Θεσπιων δῆμος εν Τῳ αυτῳ θέρει ου πολυ VOTEPOV ἐπιθέμε- 

A XN “ Ν » 9 4 > \ , 
νος τοῖς τὰς ἀρχὰς ἔχουσιν οὐ κατέσχεν, ἀλλὰ βοηθησάντων 
Θηβαίων οἱ μὲν ξυνελήφθησαν, οἱ δ᾽ ἐξέπεσον ᾿Αθήναζε. 

matter, cf. 87. 81, 98. ὃ 1. --- 18. ἱππο- 
τοξότας: cf. 2.13.54; 5.84.9.—19. τά- 
Aavra dpyvplov τριακόσια: the pay- 
ment of this sum to the ships, which 
carried it to Sicily, is mentioned in 
Inscr. Gr. I, 188, 11 ff. = Sylloge Inscr. 
Gr. ed. Dittenberger 12, 37, p. 64. 

95. Hostilities between the Lace- 
daemonians and Argives. A demo- 
cratic uprising in Thessaly miscarries. 
—1. dr "Ἄργος: the last hostilities 
between Lacedaemonians and Argives 
᾿ had occurred in the sixteenth year of 
the war (7. §§ 1, 2).— 2. μέχρι Κλεωνῶν: 
see on 5. 67.16. Apparently the Lace- 
daemonians had taken the way through 
Arcadia and the territory of Phlius. — 
σεισμοῦ yevouévov: the same reason for 
the turning back of the Lacedaemoni- 
ans as in 3. 89.§1.—3. ἀνεχώρησαν: 
so with Vat.; with the usual reading 
ἀπεχώρησαν one would expect ἐπ᾿ οἴκου 
(cf. 7.9; 2.68.31; 4.44.5) or πάλιν 
(cf. 1,107.11; 2. 94. 18). — ἐς τὴν Oupe- 
Grw: cf. 2. 27. 11 ἡ Θυρεᾶτις, γῇ μεθορία 
τῆς Ἀργείας καὶ Λακωνικῆς. It was in 
the possession of the Lacedaemonians. 
— δ. οὐκ ἔλασσον : for 7 omitted, cf. 4. 
44, 28, and see O. Schwab, Hist. Syntax 

d. gr. Komparation (Schanz, Beitr. 
IV), p. 212 ff. 

6. Θεσπιῶν: which, belonging un- 
willingly to the Theban alliance under 
the supremacy of Thebes, was deprived 
of its walls in 423 B.c. (4. 188. ὃ 1), be- 
cause the Thebans feared its leaning 
toward Athens; hence the attempt of 
the Demos to throw off at once their 
own oligarchic rule and the supremacy 
of Thebes.—7. τὰς ἀρχὰς ἔχουσιν: 
(cf. ὅ. 84. 11) = ἐν ἀρχῇ or ἀρχαῖς εἶναι 
(54. 24; 2.37.16; 4. 74. 11). --- οὐ κατέ- 
σχεν: did not get the upper hand. For 
this abs. use of κατασχεῖν, correspond- 
ing to the trans. in 9. 16, Stahl compares 
Lys. 8. 42. — βοηθησάντων Θηβαίων : so 
only Vat. correctly. The reading of the 
other Mss., βοηθησάντων ᾿Αθηναίων, even 
if the gen. abs. be taken, with Heilmann, 
as concessive (although the Athenians 
lent aid), gives no satisfactory sense ; 
for in case of a real interference on the 
part of the Athenians, which would 
have meant an infraction of existing 
peace relations with the Boeotians (cf. 
5. 82. ὃ 5), more exact information was 
tu be expected.—8. ξυνελήφθησαν : and 
doubtless executed later. — ἐξέπεσον : 




K N e > , A 9 A θέ ε 3 30 , 
Qt Ot upaKoo tot Του auTovu epous, ως ETVVOVTO TOVS TE 1 

ἱππέας ἥκοντας τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις καὶ μέλλοντας ἤδη ἐπὶ σφᾶς 

3.9 4 3A ᾽ν “~ 3 ων 4 ε 
ἰέναι, νομίσαντες, ἐᾶν μὴ τῶν Ἐπιπολῶν κρατήσωσιν οἱ 

9 A ’ 9 ’ XV e Ν ~ a -93f7\ 
Αθηναῖοι, χωρίου ἀποκρήμνον TE Kal ὑπὲρ τῆς πόλεως ἐὐθὺς 
κειμένου, οὐκ ἂν ῥᾳδίως σφᾶς, οὐδ᾽ εἰ κρατοῖντο μάχῃ, ἀπο- 
τειχισθῆναι, διενοοῦντο τὰς προσβάσεις αὐτῶν φυλάσσειν, 
ὅπως μὴ κατὰ ταύτας λάθωσι σφᾶς ἀναβάντξς ot πολέμιοι" 
9 Ν A ¥ 9 ἈΝ a 3¢ 9 ‘ Q 
ov yap ἂν ἄλλῃ ye αὐτοὺς δυνηθῆναι. ἐξήρτηται yap τὸ 
¥ 4 A ld ~ 4, 3 4 4 3 A 
ἄλλο χωρίον, καὶ μέχρι τῆς πόλεως ἐπικλινές TE ἐστι Kal 

not passive here, were driven out (as 
e.g. 1.2.28; 2.27.7; 3.68.17), but fled 
for refuge; cf. 7.71.31. , 

96. The Syracusans, expecting a re- 
newal of the attack of the Athenians, 
held a review of their forces in a 
meadow onthe Anapus, and designated 
600 picked hoplites to guard the ap- 
proaches to Epipolae. — 1. re: omitted 
by three Mss. (Vat., Pal., Paris.), and 
bracketed by Stahl and Classen; but 
it is indispensable, for μέλλοντας refers 
unquestionably not to ἱππέας, but ’A6n- 
vatous to be supplied from τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις. 
—2. τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις : dat. with ἥκειν, 
(also 1.91.11; 5.10.12, 84. 1). as with 
ἐλθεῖν (See on 1. 18. 12) and ἀφικνεῖσθαι 
(8. 5. 12). See C. F. Smith, Trans. 
Amer. Philol. Assoc. XXXV, 69 f. — 
3. τῶν ᾿Εἰπιπολῶν : the triangular pla- 
teau extending westward from the base 
of Achradina for about five kilometers 
to the point of Euryelus, for the most 
part with steep declivities north and 
south ; from this anenemy could make 
the most dangerous attack upon the 
city.— 4. εὐθύς : directly (see on 4. 48. 
6) above, i.e. to the west of the city. 
See Holm II, 31, 32.—5. σφᾶς: on 
account of the distance of νομίσαντες, 

for σφεῖς that was to be expected (see 
on 49. 8).— 6. τὰς προσβάσεις αὐτῶν: 
the approaches to it (Epipolae), which 
were κατὰ τὸν Εὐρύηλον (97.11; 7.2.14, 
43. 21).—7. κατὰ ταύτας : so rightly 
read Bk., Cl., and others, with Vat., 
for κατὰ ταῦτα of the rest of the Mss. 
Since the following ἄλλῃ is opp. to the 
approaches of Epipolae, it was neces- 
sary that there should be in the pur- 
pose clause a definite reference to the 
προσβάσεις αὐτῶν, hence κατὰ ταῦτα, in 
these places, for which 2. 69. 7 has been 
cited, is not so good.— 8, δυνηθῆναι: 
sc. ἀναβῆναι. Supply ἐνόμιζον from διε- 
νοοῦντο (cf. 4. 8. 34, 108. 8). 

ἐξήρτηται τὸ ἄλλο xwplov: Schol. τὸ 
ἄλλο χωρίον, πλὴν τῶν προσβάσεων. The 
meaning here οὗ ἐξηρτῆσθαι is suspen- 
sum esse, which though not found 
in other early authors, is sufficiently 
confirmed by the imitation of Strabo 
290 c ἐξήρτηται ἡ χώρα πρὸς νότον. Vir- 
gil’s saxis suspensa rupes (Aen. 
8. 190) depends upon the same point 
of view. On the contrary Plut. Anton. 
46 τὰ μεγάλα πεδία τῶν λόφων τούτων 
ἐξήρτηται is not parallel. Stahl adopts 
Casaubon’s conjecture ἐξῆρται, which 
Kr. too prefers in spite of the caution 


10 ἐπιφανὲς πᾶν ἔσω. 



διὰ TO ἐπιπολῆς τοῦ ἄλλον εἶναι ᾽᾿Ἐπιπολαΐί. 


ἃ 9 ’ 2 Α ~ 4 
Kal ὠνόμασται ὑπὸ τῶν Συρακοσίων 

καὶ οἱ μὲν ἐξελ- 

θόντες πανδημεὶ ἐς τὸν λειμῶνα παρὰ τὸν Αναπον ποταμὸν 
ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ (ἐτύγχανον γὰρ αὐτοῖς καὶ οἱ περὶ τὸν Ἕρμο- 
κράτην στρατηγοὶ ἄρτι παρειληφότες τὴν ἀρχήν) ἐξέτασίν 
16 τε ὅπλων ἐποιοῦντο καὶ ἑξακοσίους λογάδας τῶν ὁπλιτῶν 
ἐξέκριναν πρότερον, ὧν ἦρχε Διόμιλος, φυγὰς ἐξ “Avdpov, 
ὅπως τῶν τε Ἐπιπολῶν εἶεν φύλακες καί, ἣν ἐς ἄλλο τι δέῃ, 

ταχὺ ξυνεστῶτες παραγίγνωνται. 

οἱ δὲ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ταύτης 

τῆς νυκτός, (ἦ) τῇ ἐπιγιγνομένῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐξητάζοντο ἐκεῖνοι, 

of the Schol. μὴ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἐξῆρθαι καὶ μετε- 
ὡρίσθαι ἀκονέσθω. See App.—10. ἐπι- 
davis πᾶν ἔσω: in full view within the 
city. The Schol. explains καταφανὲς 
ἔσωθεν, which is the same thing from 
the reverse (our) point of view. Epipo- 
lae clear to the top is still visible from 
the lower town. — 11. ἐπιπολῆς : above 
(really elliptical gen. of ἐπιπολή), adv. 

Ξ- ἐπάνω. Cf. Hdt.1.187.4; Ar. Plut. 
1207 (Schol. érippnua τοπικόν). See Lo- 
beck ad Phryn. p. 126. 

_ 12. παρὰ τὸν ΓΑναπον ποταμόν : i.e. 
along the left bank of the river, not 
far from its mouth. Most recent edi- 
tors think, with Kr., that τόν must be 
inserted before παρά. But cf. 40. 14 
τοὺς λόγους ἀφ᾿ ὑμῶν, and see on 1.51. 
11; 8. 91. 10; 4. 9. 5.—13. αὐτοῖς: 
ethical dat. Cf. 1.89.14; 5.3. 21. --- 
οἱ περὶ τὸν “Eppoxpdrny στρατηγοί: 
who, chosen in the winter (78. § 1), had 
prob. in the spring entered upon their 
office. — 14. ἐξέτασιν ὅπλων : see on 41. 
10.— 16. πρότερον : the choice of the 
600 (the Mss. have wrongly ἑπτακοσίους, 
cf. 97.15; 7. 43. 29) was the first meas- 
ure taken before the general review, 
with which the arrangement of the 

separate divisions was connected. On 
these 600, see Holm 11, 418. --- 17. elev 
. kal... παραγίγνωνται : the same 
shane of mood, in reverse order, as in 
3.22.37; 7.17.15; 8. 87. 14,17. GMT. 
321; Kr. Spr. 54, 8,2; Kiihn. 553, 6. 
97. The Athenians, however, had 
already landed the night before with 
their whole army at Leon at the foot 
of Epipolae and ascended this height 
by way of Euryelus before the Syra- 
cusans could lend aid from the Anapus 
meadow. The 600 picked men and the 
rest of the Syracusans rush in dis- 
order against the Athenians, but are 
repulsed with great loss. Next day the 
Athenians advance against the city; 
but as the Syracusans do not come out, 
they turn back and build at Labdalum, 
the northernmost point of Epipolae, 
a fort to serve as a base and a deposi- 
tory of military supplies.—1. οἱ δὲ 

᾿Αθηναῖοι ταύτης τῆς νυκτός, (ἢ) τῇ 

ἐπιγιγνομένῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐξητάζοντο ἐκεῖνοι, 
ἔλαθον αὐτοὺς. .. κατὰ τὸν Adovra 
καλούμενον: the Athenians during that 
night, on the day after which the Syra- 
cusans held their review, came from Cat- 
ana with their whole force and landed 





»¥ θ 9 Q ‘ 4S A , 9 A , 
ἔλαθον αὐτοὺς παντὶ ἤδη τῷ στρατεύματι ἐκ τῆς Κατάνης 
a A 
σχόντες κατὰ τὸν Λέοντα καλούμενον, ὃς ἀπέχει τῶν Enviro 
~ ἃ A ε δ ’ NX Ἁ Ἁ 9 ’ A 
5 λῶν ἐξ ἡ ἑπτὰ σταδίους, καὶ τοὺς πεζοὺς ἀποβιβάσαντες ταῖς 
A 3 A 4 Ud » b 4 
τε ναυσὶν és THY Θάψον καθορμισάμενοι: ἔστι δὲ χερσόνη- 
σος μὲν ἐν στενῷ ἰσθμῷ προύχουσα ἐς τὸ πέλαγος, τῆς δὲ 

, , ¥ A ¥ eQs \ 9. 2 
Συρακοσίων πόλεως οὔτε πλοῦν οὔτε ὁδὸν πολλὴν ἀπέχει. 

καὶ ὁ μὲν ναντικὸς στρατὸς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐν τῇ Θάψῳ δια- 2 

, Ν > \ e , ε A \ 9 ’ 
σταυρωσάμενος τὸν ἰσθμὸν ἡσύχαζεν: ὁ δὲ πεζὸς ἐχώρει 

εὐθὺς δρόμῳ πρὸς tas ᾿Επιπολάς, καὶ φθάνει ἀναβὰς κατὰ 

Ἃ > , Ν XN 4 3 ld 9 A 
Tov Εὐρύηλον πρὶν τοὺς Συρακοσίους αἰσθομένους ἐκ τοῦ 

λειμῶνος καὶ τῆς ἐξετάσεως παραγενέσθαι. ἐβοήθουν δὲ οἵ 8 

¥ ε ν > Ν ε \ δ ’ 
τε ἄλλοι ὡς ἕκαστος τάχους εἶχε καὶ οἱ περὶ τὸν Διόμιλον 

ε ’ ’ A Ν “ 3 “Ὁ ~ > 9 
ἑξακόσιοι: στάδιοι δὲ πρὶν προσμεῖξαι ἐκ τοῦ λειμῶνος eyi- 

A Ἅ ν»ν» 
γνοντο αὐτοῖς οὐκ ἔλασσον ἢ πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι. προσπεσόντες 4 

unobserved at the place called Leon. The 
general situation was this: the Athe- 
nians use the same ruse as in their first 
attack upon Syracuse (64-66), that is, 
they avail themselves of a time to as- 
cend Epipolae when the main force of 
the Syracusans is engaged outside of 
the city in the opposite direction. This 
time they had doubtless information 
of the intended great review and hence 
sail during the night preceding the day 
set therefor from Catana to the point 
Leon, distant six or seven stades from 
Epipolae (as 65. 14 ὑπὸ νύκτα ἔπλεον ἐπὶ 
τὰς Συρακούσας), land the troops, and 
ascend Euryelus, while the Syracusans 
are still on the meadow by the Anapus. 
On the text, see App.— 4. σχόντες: 
condensed expression for παραπλεύσα»- 
res kal σχόντες. For const. σχεῖν κατά, 
see on 1.110. 11.— τὸν Adovra: Leon 
was near the modern Casa della Finanza 
south of Thapsus. See Holm II, 385f.; 

Freeman, Hist. of Sic. ITI, 211.—6. é 
τὴν Θάψον: the peninsula northwest of 
Leon with a roomy harbor for ships. 
See on 4.5.—7. ἐν στενῷ ἰσθμῷ. .. 
πέλαγος : with a narrow isthmys, ex- 
tending into the sea.—8. πλοῦν : under- 
stand πολύν from πολλήν. Cf. 92.17. 
Measure of distance, as in 2. 38, 
49. 19. 

9. διαστανρωσάμενος: = σταυροῖς ἀπο- 
λαβών (cf. 4. 102. 18). The middle δια- 
σταυροῦσθαι is found nowhere else, the 
act. only in Dio C. 41. 50.—11. κατὰ 
τὸν Evpindov: not far from the west- 
ernmost point of Epipolae, near the 
present Belvedere. See Holm II, 82, 
886; Freeman III, 211f. 

14. ws ἕκαστος τάχους εἶχε: asin 2. 
90.19. See on 1. 22.18; 7.2.2.— οἱ 
περὶ τὸν Διόμιλον: cf. 96. 16.—15. προσ- 
μεῖξαι : of approach (1. 46. 8), προσπε- 
σόντες (16) of attack. —éylyvovro: (to 
which belongs ἐκ τοῦ χειμῶνος) with 


A Ἁ 
οὖν αὐτοῖς τοιούτῳ τρόπῳ ἀτακτότερον καὶ μάχῃ νικη- 
Ἁ A > , A 
θέντες οἱ Συρακόσιοι ἐπὶ ταῖς ᾿Επιπολαῖς ἀνεχώρησαν ἐς 
‘ ’ XN 4 4 9 θ 4 Ἁ A 4 
τὴν πόλιν: καὶ ὁ τε Διόμιλος atobynoKe καὶ τῶν ἄλλων 
Ἁ A > ~ A 
20 ὡς τριακόσιοι. καὶ μετὰ τοῦτο οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, τροπαῖόν τε 5 
A A 
στήσαντες Kal τοὺς νεκροὺς ὑποσπόνδους ἀποδόντες τοῖς 
‘ δ ἿΝ A 
Συρακοσίοις, πρὸς THY πόλιν αὐτὴν TH ὑστεραίᾳ ἐπικατα- 
βάντες, ὡς οὐκ ἐπεξῇσαν αὐτοῖς, ἐπαναχωρήσαντες φρού- 
9. N “A ὃ ’, 3 ὃ , 9.3 ¥ A A 
ριον ἐπὶ τῷ Λαβόάλῳ ῳκοδόμησαν ἐπ᾿ ἄκροις τοῖς κρημνοῖς 
~ 9 A e “A Ν Ν ,’ 9 ¥ 9 Ἂ € ’ 
25 τῶν ᾿ΕΞατιπολῶν ὁρῶν πρὸς τὰ Μέγαρα, ὁπως εἴη αὐτοῖς, ὁπότε 
aA a A A 
προίοιεν ἢ μαχούμενοι ἢ τειχιοῦντες, τοῖς TE σκεύεσι Kal 
98 A , 3 θ , Ν ϑ λλ Δ 9 A λθ 1 
τοῖς χρήμασιν ἀποθήκη. καὶ οὐ πολλῷ ὕστερον αὐτοῖς ἦλθον 
» 9 ’ ε »“ ’ὔ Ἁ “A Ἁ , 
ἔκ τε Ἐγέστης ἱππῆς τριακόσιοι καὶ Σικελῶν καὶ Ναξίων 
Q ΕΣ A e e ᾽ , 3 a e “A 4 
καὶ ἄλλων τινῶν ws ἑκατόν. καὶ ᾿Αθηναίων ὑπῆρχον πεντή- 
Ἁ , 4 9 ᾽ν Q 95 ’ Ἁ 
κοντα καὶ διακόσιοι, οἷς ἵππους τοὺς μὲν παρ᾽ Ἐγεσταίων καὶ 
4 ὅλ δ δ᾽ 3 4 Ἁ ’ ’ 
δ Καταναίων ἔλαβον, τοὺς δ᾽ ἐπρίαντο- καὶ ξύμπαντες πεντή- 
Ἁ “ ’ ‘ 
κοντα καὶ ἑξακόσιοι ἱππῆς ξυνελέγησαν. καὶ καταστήσαντες 3 

numerals, as in 1. 87.10, 107.24; 2. 
18.27, 20.11, 98.14; 3.75.22; 4.9.10. 

17. αὐτοῖς : τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις.---- τοιούτῳ 
«τρόπῳ: With ἀτακτότερον. Against the 
reading of Vat. ἀτακτότεροι might be 
cited ἀτάκτως καὶ οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ προσπί- 
πτοντες 3.108.15; ἀτάκτως προσφερομένους 
7. δ8.8. Cf. however ἀπροσδόκητος προσ- 
πεσών 4. 108. 21, and προσπίπτειν ἀπροσ- 
δοκήτως 4. 29. 17. 

20. τροπαῖόν τε στήσαντες : τε is 
wanting in Vat. — 28, ὡς οὐκ ἐπεξῇσαν 
αὐτοῖς : Cl. would read, unnecessarily, 
ὡς δ᾽ οὐκ ἐπεξῇσαν. --- 24. τῷ Λαβδάλῳ: 
(cf. 98. 82; 7. 8. ὃ 4) on the extreme 
north ridge (as ἐπ᾽ ἄκροις τοῖς κρημνοῖς 
means; not on the highest ridge, against 
which would be 7.3. ὃ 4), a point at 
once splendid and dominant (Holm 
II, 88. 887). Οἵ, Freeman III, 213. — 
25. ὁρῶν πρός: see on 2.55.4. It be- 

longs to φρούριον, but might have been 
as well ὁρῶσι with κρημνοῖς. ---- τὰ Μέ- 
yapa: see on 4. 7. --- 26. προίοιεν : for 
the inappropriate προσίοιεν of the Mss., 

‘conjecture of F. Portus universally ac- 
. cepted. —27. rots χρήμασιν: see on 

49. 18. --- ἀποθήκη : apparently not 
found elsewhere in Attic writers. 

98. After increasing their cavalry 
to 650 men they establish at a point 
called Syké a circular fort. The Syra- 
cusans seek to prevent this, but avoid 
a general engagement and meet with 
defeat with a part of their cavalry. — 
1. αὐτοῖς ἦλθον : see on 96. 2.— 2. ἱππῆς 
τριακόσιοι xré.: the somewhat variant 
nunbers given by Diod. 18.7 have no 
authority against Thuc.— 38. ᾿Αθηναίων 
ὑπῆρχον : cf. 94.§4.—5. ἔλαβον: i.e. 
with consent (not by force).—6. ξυνελέ- 
γησαν: i.e. from the different divisions. 



ἐν τῷ Λαβδάλῳ φυλακὴν ἐχώρουν πρὸς τὴν Συκὴῆν oi 

᾿Αθηναῖοι, ἵναπερ καθεζόμενοι ἐτείχισαν τὸν κύκλον διὰ τά- 

χους. καὶ ἔκπληξιν τοῖς Συρακοσίοις παρέσχον τῷ τάχει 

10 τῆς οἰκοδομίας: καὶ ἐπεξελθόντες μάχην διενοοῦντο ποιεῖ- 


σθαι καὶ μὴ περιορᾶν. καὶ ἤδη ἀντιπαρατασσομένων ἀλλή- 

λοις οἵ τῶν Συρακοσίων στρατηγοὶ ὡς ἑώρων σφίσι τὸ 

: ’ 
στράτευμα διεσπασμένον τε καὶ οὐ ῥᾳδίως ξυντασσόμενον, 

9 » ld 9 Ἂ ’ \ ? \ “Ὁ e a 
ἀνήγαγον πάλιν ἐς τὴν πόλιν πλὴν μέρους τινὸς τῶν ἱππέων" 

οὗτοι δὲ ὑπομένοντες ἐκώλνον τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους λιθοφορεῖν τε 

7. ἐν τῷ Λαβδάλῳ: Vat. reads ἐπὶ 
τῷ Λαβδάλῳ (cf. 97. 24). --- πρὸς τὴν 
Συκῆν : the view maintained by some, 
esp. Letronne, that Συκῇ is another 
name for Τύχη, the suburb to the west- 
ward adjoining Achradina (a suburb 
unknown to Thuc.), is generally re- 
jected by recent authorities, esp. Holm 
(II, 387). Syké (i.e. a place set with 
fig-trees; see Steph. s.v. Zuxal) is 
** prob. to be located in the middle of 
the plateau of Epipolae.’’ Here the 
Athenians built first a circular fort, 

which later was the starting-point for: 
the wall of circumvallation extending | 

northward toward Trogilus, southward 
to the Great Harbor. The words ἕναπερ 
(cf. 4.48.27, 74.3) καθεζόμενοι ἐτείχισαν 
τὸν κύκλον διὰ τάχους prove the reference 
cannot be to the circumvallation, for 
the aor. ἐτείχισαν indicates coinple- 
tion, whereas this was never finished. 
The art. τὸν κύκλον seems to refer, from 
the point of view of the historian, to the 
wall as if known to the reader, though 
just then constructed. Cl. compares 
ἄνευ τῶν ἵππων 94.17, and Holm (II, 
387) παρὰ τὴν πυλίδα 100.17; ἐπὶ τὴν 
χηλήν 7. δ8. ὅ. Stahl and Boehme- 
Widmann, following Arnold, explain 

it as ** the usual circle,”’ ὁ κύκλος being 
a part of the circumvallation, but itself 
the kind of fortified enclosure and cen- 
tral point of the whole line from which 
the walls to right and left usually 
commenced. But Steup urges that the 
passages cited by Cl. and Bm.-W. do 
not refer, as here, to something before 
nonexistent, and he would prefer the 
conjecture first suggested by Stahl, 
later by Gertz, ἐτειχίσαντο κύκλον (cf. 
for middle 1.11.5; 8.106. 6; 4.3.8). 
This circular fort is mentioned also 99. 
2,14; 101.1; 102. 5, 8, 14, and possibly 
7. 2.20. See Freeman III, 662 ff. — 
10. ἐπεξελθόντες : sc. of Συρακόσιοι. ---- 
11. μὴ περιορᾶν : sc. τὸν κύκλον olxodo- 
μούμενον. ΟἿ. 7. 6.8. 

ἤδη ἀντιπαρατασσομένων ἀλλήλοις: 
when they were already being drawn up 
against each other. The alignment of 
the Syracusans was not completed, be- 
cause their troops on marching out had 
not kept ranks and hence could not 
readily be brought into line (hence 
pres. ptc. ξυντασσόμενον).---1δ. ἐκώλνον: 
conative. This attempt to hinder the 
Athenians was interrupted by (16) xa 

. ἐτρέψαντο. --- λιθοφο- 
ρεῖν τε καὶ ἀποσκίδνασθαι: i.e. for work 

τῶν A@nvalwy.. 





kat ἀποσκίδνασθαι μακροτέραν: καὶ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων φυλὴ 4 

μία τῶν ὁπλιτῶν καὶ οἱ ἱππῆς μετ᾽ αὐτῶν πάντες ἐτρέψαντο 

‘ ~ 4 e 4 , Ν 3 ’ ’ 
τοὺς τῶν Συρακοσίων ἱππέας προσβαλόντες, καὶ ἀπέκτεινάν 

Ἁ A A 
TE τινας καὶ τροπαῖον τῆς ἱππομαχίας ἔστησαν. 

Καὶ τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ οἱ μὲν ἐτείχιζον τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων τὸ πρὸς 1 

βορέαν τοῦ κύκλον τεῖχος, οἱ δὲ λίθους καὶ ξύλα ξυμφοροῦν- 
, 9. ἃ Ν ld , > », * 

τες παρέβαλλον ἐπὶ τὸν Τρωγίλον καλούμενον αἰεί, ἧπερ 

βραχύτατον ἐγίγνετο αὐτοῖς ἐκ τοῦ μεγάλον λιμένος ἐπὶ 

᾿ ε» 4 N > a e Ν 4 

τὴν ἑτέραν θάλασσαν τὸ ἀποτείχισμα. οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι 2 

οὐχ ἥκιστα Ἑρμοκράτους τῶν στρατηγῶν ἐσηγησαμένου μά- 
Ν ‘N Ν > 4 9 ’ 3 ’ 

χαις μὲν πανδημεὶ πρὸς ᾿Αθηναίους οὐκέτι ἐβούλοντο διακιν- 

ὃ a e ’ δὲ Ν 25 4 Ὄ 3 A » 
υνεύειν, ὑποτειχίζειν δὲ ἀμεινον ἐδόκει εἶναι, 7 ἐκεῖνοι ἔμελλον 

᾿Οἢ the not yet finished κύκλος. λιθοφο- 

ρεῖν is found only here. — 16. paxporé- 
pav: comp. of μακράν (3.13. 23, 55. δ). 
Cf. Xen. Anab. 7.8.20; Plato, Rep. 
263 a. Kr. Spr. 43, 3, 9. 

φυλὴ pla: (borrowed by the military 
from the civil classification) = τάξις. 
See on 8. 90. 10.— 19. τῆς ἱππομαχίας: 
for const. with τροπαῖον, cf. 2. 82. 8; 4. 
12.8; 7.41.12, 54.1. Kr. Spr. 47, 7, 3. 

99. Hereupon the Athenians com- 
mence work on the wall of circumval- 
lation on the north side; but the 
Syracusans, giving up the combat in 
open field, begin on the south side a 
cross-wall starting from the city. — 
1. ἐτείχιζον. . . τὸ πρὸς βορέαν τοῦ 
κύκλον τεῖχος : began to build on the wall 
north of the circular fort. So generally 
explained ; but Steup, objecting that 
this wall has not been mentioned before 
and could not have been assumed by 
Thuc. to be known to his readers, takes 
τὸ πρὸς βορέαν τοῦ κύκλου adv. (see 2. 12). 
— 8. παρέβαλλον .... αἰεί: (impf. with 

Vat. for παρέβαλον of the other better 

Mss.) wood and stones were being laid 
along the course by the second division 
of Athenians. —éml τὸν Τρωγίλον xa- 
Aovpevov: for more exact designation 
of the direction taken by the wall they 
were building. Trogilus was a small 
harbor on the north side of Epipolae. 
— ἧπερ: in which direction.— 4. βραχύ- 
τατον xré.: the shortest line for the 
proposed wall of circumvallation went, 
to northward, by Trogilus. For like 
const., cf. 101. 8, on the southern por- 
tion of the circumvallation. — éyl- 
yvero: Schol. ἔμελλεν ἔσεσθαι. ---- 5. τὴν 
ἑτέραν θάλασσαν : the sea by Trogilus. 
— τὸ ἀποτείχισμα : cf. 101.5 τὸ περιτεί- 
χισμα for the same wall. 

6. τῶν στρατηγῶν : construed by Cl. 
and Kr. with Ἑρμοκράτους (cf. 8. 5); 
but better taken with οὐχ ἥκιστα. Cf. 
μάλιστα πάντων 1,189.5; 4.27.10, 86. 
12.— éonynoapévov: see on 90. 2.— 
7. πανδημεί: used almost as adj. with 
μάχαις, in battle with their whole force. 
Cf. ξυσταδὸν μάχαις 7. 81. 25.— 8. ὑπο- 
τειχίζειν δὲ. . . τὸ τεῖχος: it seemed 





» N ~ ’ 9 ’ 9 4 a 
ἄξειν τὸ τεῖχος, Kai, εἰ φθάσειαν, ἀποκλήσεις γίγνεσθαι, 

. 9 4 > 4 > 3 “Ὁ , 9 , 9 
και αμα Και, ἐν TOUT®@ ει ἐπιβοηθοῖεν, μέβος αντιπέμέπειν αν- 

τοὺς τῆς στρατιᾶς: καὶ φθάνειν ἂν τοῖς σταυροῖς προκατα- 

A A 
λαμβάνοντες τὰς ἐφόδους, ἐκείνους δὲ dv πανομένους τοῦ ἔργου 

πάντας ἂν πρὸς σφᾶς τρέπεσθαι. ἐτείχιζον οὖν ἐξελθόντες 8 

> δ ”~ 4 4 > 4 , “A 4 
ἀπὸ τῆς σφετέρας πόλεως ἀρξάμενοι, κάτωθεν τοῦ κύκλον 

“A 9 ’ 9 ’ A ¥ , 9 4 9 4 
τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐγκάρσιον τεῖχος ἄγοντες, τάς TE ἐλάας EKKO- 

A Ἁ Ud 
πτοντες TOU τεμένους καὶ πύργους ξυλίνους καθιστάντες. ai 

better to build across the line where the 
Athenians were likely to build their 
wall. ὑποτειχίζειν (lit. to build an under- 
wall, cf. κάτωθεν τοῦ κύκλου τῶν ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων in 14) found elsewhere only in 
late authors. —9. καί, εἰ φθάσειαν, ἀπο- 
κλήσεις γίγνεσθαι: and, in case they 
(i.e. the Syracusans) anticipated them, 
a shutting out would be effected. The 
inf. depends upon ἄμεινον ἐδόκει εἶναι. 
ἀπόκλῃσις also 4. 85.9; elsewhere only 
in late authors. See App.—10. καὶ 
ἅμα καί, ἐν τούτῳ εἰ ἐπιβοηθοῖεν : and 
at the same time also, if they (the Athe- 
nians) should attack them thereby (i.e. 
while at this work). Only ἐν τούτῳ, not 
(with Cl.) καὶ ἐν τούτῳ, belongs with εἰ 
ἐπκιβοηθοῖεν. For emphatic position of 
ἐν τούτῳ, see on 1*.10.5. Kr. Spr. 54, 
17,7; Kthn. 606, 6.— μέρος τῆς orpa- 
mids: Opp. tO μάχαις πανδημεί (6) and 
πάντας dy... τρέπεσθαι (13). — ἀντιπέμ.- 
πεῖν αὐτούς : dependent on ἄμεινον ἐδόκει 
εἶναι. --- 11. καὶ φθάνειν ἄν... τρέπε- 
σθαι : the const. changes and continues 
as if ἡγοῦντο or ἤλπιζον had gone before: 
and they expected that they would be 
beforehand in fencing off the approaches 
with palisades, and that those ceasing 
From the work would all turn against 
themselves. For text, see App. — 04- 
vay... προκαταλαμβάνοντες : for the 

pleonasm and for pres. ptc. see 2. 91. 
δ; 3.83. 11.— 12. τὰς ἐφόδους : Schol. 
τὰ βάσιμα λέγει. Grote renders ἐφόδους 
attacks and is followed by Bl. and 
Stahl. But σταυροῖς προκαταλαμβάνειν 
ἐφόδους, vallis impetus praever- 
tere is too strange an expression, for 
which προκαταλαμβάνειν τῶν πόλεων τὰς 
ἀποστάσεις 1.57.14 is not a parallel. 
--- 18. πάντας ἄν : for repetition of ἄν, 
οὗ, 10. 14: 11. 6; 18. 10, 88; 37. 13; 
64. 9, and see on 4. 18.17. 

14, ἀπὸ τῆς σφετέρας πόλεως ἀρξά- 
μένοι: i.e. from the wall by which the 
Syracusans the preceding winter had 
included the Temenites (the later Ne- 
apolis). Cf. 75.§ 1. See Holm II, 888. 
---κάτωθεν τοῦ κύκλον τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων : 
lit. from below the circular fort of the 
Athenians, i.e. from the point of the 
city wall nearest to the circular fort 
(98. 8).— 15. ἐγκάρσιον τεῖχος ἄγοντες : 
(cf. 7. 4. 8, 7.5) i.e. ἃ cross-wall in- 
tended to cut off the proposed circum- 
vallation of the Athenians and prevent 
its completion. See App.— 16. τοῦ 
τεμένους : the sanctuary of Apollo Tem- 
enites (see on 75.2). Cf. Steph. Byz. 
Téuevos τόπος Σικελίας ὑπὸ τὰς ᾿Επιπολὰς 
πρὸς ταῖς Συρακούσαις. Some editors write 
τοῦ Τεμένους.----τύργονς ξυλίνονς : on top 
of the wall, to facilitate its defense. 



4 A A 9 » A 
δὲ νῆες τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων οὔπω ἐκ τῆς Θάψου περιεπεπλεύκεσαν 

3 Ν 4 , > > » e , 9 , ω 
ἐς τὸν μέγαν λιμένα, ἀλλ᾽ ἔτι οἱ Συρακόσιοι ἐκράτουν τῶν 

περὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, κατὰ γὴν δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς Θάψου οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι 

20 κν 9 “Ὁ > “ > δ) δὰ A , 9 , 
100 Τα ΕΠΙΤΊ) εια, eT ΎΟνΝΤΟ. E€7TEL Ἴ € TOU Συρακοσίοις αρκουν- 

ϑὼ » ad 9 9 a Ἁ 9 ’ aA e 
τως ἐδόκει ἔχειν ὅσα TE ἐσταυρώθη καὶ φκοδομήθη τοῦ ὑπο- 

τειχίσματος, καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι [ αὐτοὺς] οὐκ ἦλθον κωλύσοντες, 
φοβούμενοι μὴ σφίσι δίχα γιγνομένοις ῥᾷον μάχωνται, καὶ 
5 ἅμα τὴν καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς περιτείχισιν ἐπειγόμενοι, οἱ μὲν Συρα- 
’ Ἁ ’ j ’ ’ ~ 9 , 
κόσιοι φυλὴν μίαν καταλιπόντες φύλακα τοῦ οἰκοδομήματος 

ἀνεχώρησαν ἐς τὴν πόλιν. οἱ δὲ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τούς τε ὀχετοὺς 

αἱ δὲ vijes . . . ἐπήγοντο : explaining 
why the Syracusans in building their 
counter-wall had nothing to fear from 
the Athenian fleet. On the matter, cf. 
97.§1,2; 101.8 8 ; 102.§3.—18. ἐκρά- 
τοὺυν τῶν περὶ τὴν θάλασσαν: (cf. 2. 
88. 8; 4. 54. 21) i.e. the Syracusans 
were still masters of their harbors and 
of the entrances to them. 

100. The Syracusan counter-wall is 
completed, but a little later is stormed 
by the Athenians, who destroy also the 
pipes which brought water into the city. 
The Athenians, pushing forward after 
the fleeing Syracusans into the outer 
city-wall enclosing Temenites, are 
driven back; but they destroy the 
counter-wall of the Syracusans.—1. ἀρ- 
κούντως ἐδόκει ἔχειν κτὲ.: clearly indi- 
cating that the Syracusan counter-wall 
got across the line of the proposed 
Athenian circumvallation.— 2. ὅσα re 
ἐσταυρώθη καὶ φὠκοδομήθη τοῦ ὑποτει- 
χίσματος : τε should come after ἐσταυ- 
ρώθη. There wasprobably on both sides 
of the counter-wall a row of palisades 
for greater security: the protected 
space behind these palisades is called 

σταύρωμα, and of the whole extension a 
definite part might be designated by the 
words τὸ rapa τὴν πυλίδα (16). ὑποτείχι- 
σμα (οἷ. ὑποτειχίζειν 99. 8) designates 
the whole Syracusan counter-wall. 
This word, as well as ὑποτείχισις (238), 
is found only here.—3. [αὐτούς] : 
wanting in Vat. and Par. (B, H), and 
κωλύσοντες is even more forcible with- 
out it. — 4, δίχα γιγνομένοις : cf. 1. 64. 
θ.---ὅ. τὴν καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς περιτείχισιν: i.e. 
the part of the circumvallation now 
building northward. Cf. 99. §1.—éme- 
yopevor: trans., as 3.2.14; 4.5.9; 8. 
9.2.—6. φυλήν: of a military division, 
as with the Athenians 98.16. Holm 
(II, 418) makes prob. for Syracuse the 
Doric division into three φυλαί. From 
what follows the division left behind 
must have been pretty large. — φύ- 
Aaxa: pred. after fem. noun, as 8. 61. 
10, 73.29 φύλακες with vijes.— τοῦ οἶκο- 
Sopfparos: as ὑποτείχισμα (2) of the 
whole counter-wall. — 7. τοὺς ὀχετούς : 
with modifier ποτοῦ ὕδατος in the rel. 
clause. See on 4.12.8. Of the course 
of these water-pipes nothing certain 
is known, except that they ran from 




ὑτῶν, OL ἐς THY πόλιν ὑπονομηδὸν ποτοῦ ὕδατος ἠγμένοι 
αὐτῶν, οἱ ἐς τὴν πόλιν ὑπονομηδὸν π ὕδατος ἦγμ 
> ὃ , θ ld ’ , χλλ Σ ’ 
ἦσαν, διέφθειραν Kai, τηρήσαντες τούς τε ἄλλους Συρακοσί. 
ους κατὰ σκηνὰς ὄντας ἐν μεσημβρίᾳ καί τινας καὶ ἐς τὴν 
πόλιν ἀποκεχωρηκότας καὶ τοὺς ἐν τῷ σταυρώματι ἀμελῶς 
φυλάσσοντας, τριακοσίους μὲν σφῶν αὐτῶν λογάδας καὶ τῶν 
A 3 Ν ε , , θ A ὃ ’, 
ψιλῶν τινας ἐκλεκτοὺς ὡπλισμένους προύταξαν θεῖν δρόμῳ 
9 a a x € ’ ε δ᾽ ¥ Ν δί ε 
ἐξαπιναίως πρὸς τὸ ὑποτείχισμα, ἡ δ᾽ ἄλλη στρατιὰ δίχα, ἡ 
μὲν μετὰ τοῦ ἑτέρου στρατηγοῦ πρὸς τὴν πόλιν, εἰ ἐπιβοη- 
θοῖεν, ἐχώρουν, ἡ δὲ μετὰ τοῦ ἑτέρον πρὸς τὸ σταύρωμα τὸ 
᾿ (ὃ Ἁ ’ ε ’ ε “A 
παρὰ τὴν πυλίδα. καὶ προσβαλόντες οἱ τριακόσιοι αἱροῦσι 
Ν ’ N e 4 2 AN 3 ’ ’ > 
TO σταύρωμα: καὶ οἱ φύλακες αὐτὸ ἐκλιπόντες κατέφυγον ἐς 

Epipolae into the city. See Lupus, Die 
Stadt Syrakus, pp. 259 ff.—8. ὑπονομη- 
δόν: Schol. διὰ ὑπονόμων καὶ σωλήνων 
(pipes; cf. Hdt. 8. 60.8).—9. τηρήσαν- 
τες... φυλάσσοντας: there are three ob- 
jects with participial modifiers, but the 
guard consisted really of only two divi- 
sions (τούς re ἄχλους and τοὺς ἐν τῷ σταυ- 
ρώματι), the τινας. .. ἀποκεχωρηκότας 
being only ἃ subdivision of τοὺς ἄλλους. 
Of the one division the greater part had 
betaken themselves at midday to the 
tents for rest; somehad even, manifestly 
because of lack of discipline, gone off to 
the city (cf. 69. 4).— 12. σφῶν αὐτῶν: 
i.e. of the Athenian hoplites, whereas 
the ψιλοὶ ἐκλεκτοί for this attack were 
equipped with hoplite armor (ὠπλι- 
opévous). ἐκλεκτός only here in Thuc.; 
ἀπόλεκτος Only 68.8; ἐπίλεκτος not at 
all.—13. θεῖν δρόμῳ : see on 3. 111.8. 
For the inf. after προύταξαν, see on 50. 
14,— 15. εἰ ἐπιβοηθοῖεν : i.e. to oppose 
any troops that might come to the 
rescue from the city.—16. πρὸς τὸ 
σταύρωμα τὸ παρὰ τὴν πυλίδα : to that 
part of the palisade by the postern gate, 

i.e. a part thus designated of the Syra- 
cusan counter-wall (ὑποτείχισμα in 14), 
doubtless a part nearer to the city, as 
Cl. suggested. Just where this postern 
gate was is not indicated. Cl. suggests 
that its purpose might have been to 
connect the σταύρωμα with the προτεί- 
χισμα περὶ τὸν Ἰεμενίτην (19). Thisseems 
clearly right. The 300 picked men 
with those selected from the ψιλοί make 
in advance a sudden attack on the Syra- 
cusan counter-wall ; of the main body 
half advance toward the city to ward off 
any rescuing force, half go against the 
part of the stockade or counter-wall 
near the postern gate in the mporel- 
χισμα τὸ περὶ τὸν Tenevlrny—the object 
of these last being to cut off the fugi- 
tives in case the attack of the 300 was 
successful. See App. 

17. ot τριακόσιοι αἱροῦσι τὸ σταύ- 
ρωμα : ΠΘΥ τὸ σταύρωμα = τὸ ὑποτείχισμα 
(14).—18. οἱ φύλακες : prob. to be 
understood of rods ἐν τῷ σταυρώματι 
ἀμελῶς φυλάσσοντας (11), for of those 
that were in the tents at the time of 
the attack (10) many could hardly have 



δ , Ν NLA , \ 2 A , 
TO TT POTEL\ LO La TO πέρι TOV Τεμενιτην. Και QAUTOLS ξυνεσέπε- 

ε 4 \ 3 Ν ᾽ ’ > 4 : 
20 σον οἱ διώκοντες, καὶ ἐντὸς γενόμενοι βίᾳ ἐξεκρούσθησαν 

A “A 9 
πάλιν ὑπὸ τῶν Συρακοσίων, καὶ τῶν ᾿Αργείων τινὲς αὐτόθι 

καὶ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων οὐ πολλοὶ διεφθάρησαν. καὶ ἐπαναχω- 

ρήσασα ἡ πᾶσα στρατιὰ τὴν τε ὑποτείχισιν καθεῖλον καὶ 

τὸ σταύρωμα ἀνέσπασαν καὶ διεφόρησαν τοὺς σταυροὺς 

3 A 
% Tap ἑαυτούς, καὶ τροπαῖον ἔστησαν. 

Τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἀπὸ τοῦ κύκλου ἐτείχιζον οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τὸν 

Ν Ν ε Ν A “\ ἃ A ay hw , Q 
ΚρΉμνον TOV UTrep Του EAOVUS, OS Τῶν TLTON@V TQAUT?) προς 

Ν ’ , ε a \ @ 3 a , > Ὁ 
Tov μέγαν λιμένα ὁρᾷ, καὶ ἥπερ αὐτοῖς βραχύτατον ἐγίγνετο 

A Ν A ε A N Aa 9 Ν 4 ν᾿ 
καταβᾶσι διὰ τοῦ ὁμαλοῦ καὶ τοῦ ἕλους ἐς τὸν λιμένα τὸ 

taken part in the defense of the σταύ- 
ρωμα. ---- 10. τὸ προτείχισμα τὸ περὶ τὸν 
Ἰεμενίτην : i.e. the lately erected city- 
wall that took in the Temenites (75. 
$1). The word occurs elsewhere only 
in later writers. — 20. of διώκοντες : not 
only the 300, but also the part of the 
Athenian army that had proceeded 
πρὸς τὸ σταύρωμα τὸ παρὰ τὴν πυλίδα, for 
among the fallen some Argives are 
mentioned (21). 

23. τὴν trorelxiow ... καὶ τὸ σταύ- 
ρωμα: the two parts of the Syracusan 
fortification comprehended in ὅσα τε 
ἐσταυρώθη καὶ φκοδομήθη τοῦ ὑποτειχί- 
σματος (2), hence τὸ σταύρωμα (the pali- 
sade) is used here in a narrower sense 
thanin lland 18. On the different parts 
of the Syracusan fortifications, see 
Holm 11, 389 ff. — 24. διεφόρησαν : see 
on 91. 35. — 25. wap ἑαντούς : i.e. to be 
used for their own:circumvallation. 

101, Hereupon the Athenians build 
the southern part of their wall of cir- 
cumvallation from the circular fort to 
the bluff of Epipolae which is near- 
est to the Great Harbor. A second 

counter-wall entirely in the low 
grounds, which the Syracusans mean- 
while had begun to construct, is at- 
tacked by the Athenians and taken; 
in the stubborn conflicts that occur 
thereby Lamachus is killed.—1. οἱ 
᾿Αθηναῖοι κτὲ.: the Athenians stop work 
for the present on the north section of 
the circumvallation (99. §1, 100. 5), 
and turning to the south side fortify 
next the steep bluff above the marsh 
looking toward the Great Harbor, at 
the point nearest to this harbor. It 
seems clear from the context (9) that 
the wall now built extended southward 
from the κύκλος to the edge of the bluff, 
but the statement is general, and it 
seems hardly necessary to insert a 
prep. (és or πρός ortérl) before τὸν κρη- 
μνόν. See App.— 2. τοῦ ἕλονς : see on 
99. 15. ---8. ὁρᾷ: see on 75. 2.— καὶ 
ἥπερ. .. τὸ περιτείχισμα : cf. 99. 4. --- 
ἥπερ: where. For rel. continuation of 
sent., cf. 4.18, 89. 293. --- 4. καταβᾶσι: 
i.e. when they had come with their 
wall down from Epipolae.— τὸ περι- 
τείχισμα: the same wall, regarded from 


a ‘ e a 9 ’ 9 , \ 
δ περιτείχισμα. καὶ οἵ Συρακόσιοι ἐν τούτῳ ἐξελθόντες Kal 2 




“ 9 \ 9 4 » 9 ’ 9 Ν “ oN ἃ Ν ’ 
αὐτοὶ ἀπεσταύρουν αὖθις ἀρξάμενοι ἀπὸ τῆς πόλεως διὰ μέ 
A @ 
σον τοῦ ἕλους: Kal τάφρον apa παρώρυσσον, ὅπως μὴ οἷόν 
Φ A 9 ’ i ~ , 9 ’ e 
τε ἡ τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις μέχρι τῆς θαλάσσης ἀποτειχίσαι. οἱ 
δ᾽, ἐπειδὴ τὸ πρὸς τὸν κρημνὸν αὐτοῖς ἐξείργαστο, ἐπιχει- 
A A A Ἁ 
ροῦσιν αὖθις τῷ τῶν Συρακοσίων σταυρώματι καὶ τάφρῳ, 
τὰς μὲν ναῦς κελεύσαντες περιπλεῦσαι ἐκ τῆς Θάψου ἐς τὸν 
’, , Ν ~ 4 > Ἁ δὲ Ἁ »¥ θ 
μέγαν λιμένα τὸν τῶν Συρακοσίων, αὐτοὶ δὲ περὶ ὄρθρον 
4 > N ~ b A 9 “\ e 4 “\ “ ΝᾺ 
καταβάντες ἀπὸ τῶν ᾿Ἐπιπολῶν ἐς τὸ ὁμαλόν. καὶ διὰ τοῦ 
ἕλους ἢ πηλῶδες ἣν καὶ στεριφώτατον θύρας καὶ ξύλα πλα- 
ld 3 ’ Ἁ 9 95 9 A ’ ε A 9 9 
τέα ἐπιθέντες καὶ ew αὐτῶν διαβαδίσαντες αἱροῦσιν apa ἕῳ 
, , Ν 2\ 9 »" ἣν , . & 
TO TE σταύρωμα πλὴν ὀλίγον Kal THY τάφρον, Kal ὕστερον 
ἃ δ ε Ν @ Ἁ ,’ 3 , Ἁ ϑ >. A 
καὶ τὸ ὑπολειφθὲν εἷλον. καὶ μάχη ἐγένετο, καὶ [ἐν αὐτῃ] 
> 9» e "5" A Ν A ’ ε A ‘\ “\ 
ἐνίκων ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι: καὶ τῶν Συρακοσίων οἱ μὲν τὸ δεξιὸν 
’ » Ν ᾿ ’ » ε δ᾽ > AN ~ 9 4 
κέρας ἔχοντες πρὸς τὴν πόλιν ἔφευγον, οἱ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τῷ εὐωνύμῳ 
παρὰ τὸν ποταμόν. καὶ αὐτοὺς βουλόμενοι ἀποκλήσασθαι 

a different point of view, is called in 99. 
5 τὸ ἀποτείχισμα. 

5. ἐν τούτῳ: i.e. while the Atheni- 
ans were thus occupied. — ἐξελθόντες 
καὶ αὐτοί: coming out themselves also. 
Cf. 99. 18 (of the Syracusans).— 6. ἀρ- 
ξάμενοι ἀπὸ τῆς πόλεως : as 99. 14, 
though here from a point of the city- 
wall nearer to the Great Harbor. — 
7. καὶ τάφρον παρώρυσσον: and dug a 
ditch alongside, as was easy to do in the 
low ground. \ 

9. τὸ πρὸς τὸν κρημνόν : the stretch 
of wall to the edge of the bluff above; 
see on 1.— 10. αὖθις : i.e. as they had 
attacked the ὑποτείχισμα in 100. 9 ff.— 
11. ἐκ τῆς Θάψου : cf. 99.§ 4; the exe- 
cution of the order 102. §3.— 12. περὶ 
ὄρθρον : see on 3. 112. 9. --- 13. διὰ rod 
ἕλους : to be connected with ἐπιθέντες. 

— 14. ἡ πηλῶδες ἦν: see on 66.9; 1. 
63. 10.—15. διαβαδίσαντες : elsewhere 
only in later writers.— 16. καὶ ὕστερον: 
these indispensable words found only 
in Vat. 

17. [ἐν αὐτῇ]: not in Pal.; in Vat. 
misplaced before καί. The idiom is 
contrary to Thuc.’s usage (1. 29. 19, 
105. 2,8, 116.7; 3.74.1). νικᾶν ἐν μάχῃ 
does not occur in Thuc., who has regu- 
larly οὐκ ἔλασσον ἔχειν ἐν μάχῃ (cf. 1. 
105. 28; 2.22.12; 3.5.7; 4.25. 20; 8. 
61.17), and once ἐν μάχῃ εὖ πρᾶξαι (75. 
16).— 19. ἔφενγον : so better with Vat. 
(for ἔφυγον), indicating the beginning 
of the flight, whose further course is 
stated below. — 20. παρὰ τὸν ποταμόν : 
i.e. along the left bank of the Anapus, 
**in order to escape across the bridge 
to the Olympieum”’ (Holm II, 36). The 




A 4 e A 9 ’ ’ ’ ’ 
τῆς διαβάσεως οἱ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων τριακόσιοι λογάδες δρόμῳ 

9 ’ ‘ N , ἃ ’ δὲ ε 4 
ἠπείγοντο πρὸς τὴν γέφυραν. δείσαντες ὃὲ οἱ Συρακόσιοι 

> δ \ Ae , 2 OA ε N93 A εν» 
(ἦσαν γὰρ καὶ τῶν ἱππέων αὐτοῖς οἱ πολλοὶ ἐνταῦθα) ὁμόσε 

“A A . 
χωροῦσι τοῖς τριακοσίοις τούτοις, καὶ τρέπουσί TE αὐτοὺς 

% καὶ ἐσβάλλουσιν ἐς τὸ δεξιὸν κέρας τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων. καὶ 

προσπεσόντων αὐτῶν ξυνεφοβήθη καὶ ἡ πρώτη φυλὴ τοῦ 
’ > Ν ἣ ε 4 ? 9 Ν ~ 3 , 
κέρως. ἰδὼν δὲ ὁ Λάμαχος παρεβοήθει ἀπὸ τοῦ εὐωνύμου 

A“ e “Ὁ Ν ΄ 9 - A ἃ Ἁ 3 ’ 
τοῦ ἑαυτῶν μετὰ τοξοτῶν τε οὐ πολλῶν καὶ τοὺς ᾿Αργείους 

παραλαβών, καὶ ἐπιδιαβὰς τάφρον τινὰ καὶ μονωθεὶς μετ᾽ ὀλί- 

80 γων τῶν ξυνδιαβάντων ἀποθνήσκει αὐτός τε καὶ πέντε ἢ EE 

A > 9 A \ , \ ε , : Ax \ 
TOV PET AUTOV. KAL TOUTOUVS MEV οι Συρακόσιοι ευσυς κατα 

’ , 9 4 Ν ’ , 
τάχος φθάνουσιν ἀναρπάσαντες καὶ διαβιβάσαντες πέραν 

bridge (cf. 66.11) had been repaired 
by the Syracusans. They were pre- 
vented from crossing by the 300 doyd- 
des, who reached the bridge before 
them (22 ἠπείγοντο πρὸς τὴν γέφυραν). 
-- 21. οἱ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων τριακόσιοι λο- 
γάδες : for position of the part. gen., 
see on 62.19. These 300 λογάδες are 
clearly identical with those mentioned 
100. 12. 

23. (ἦσαν γὰρ. .. ἐνταῦθα): giving 
the reason for the following ὁμόσε χω- 
ροῦσι (cf. 1.31.7, 72.2; 4. 116.6); the 
presence of the cavalry gave them 
courage to halt and attack the Atheni- 
ans, ἐσβάλλουσιν referring esp. to the 
codperation of the cavalry.— 25. τὸ 
δεξιὸν κέρας : which the 300 λογάδες, in 
pursuing the enemy’s left wing, had got 
ahead of. — 26. ξυνεφοβήθη : (pass.) the 
first division (φυλή for φυλακή correctly 
restored by Duker, cf. 98.16) of the 
Athenian right wing was swept into 
the flight along with the 300 (τρέπουσιν 
αὐτούς). Cf. 8. 108. ὅ. The compound 
found elsewhere only in late writers. 

28. rod ἑαυτῶν: the pl. in view of 
the Athenians commanded by Lama- 
chus; cf. 7.3.12, 58.7.— «al... πα- 
ραλαβών: note the correlation with 
prepositional phrase, μετὰ... τε; cf. 
1, 26.19. Kr. Spr. 59, 2,3.—29. ἐπι- 
διαβὰς τάφρον τινά : advancing across 
a ditch (not that of the Syracusan forti- 
fication, but prob. one for draining the 
marsh).— μονωθεὶς per ὀλίγων τῶν ξυν- 
διαβάντων: cf. Hdt. 6.15.9 μετ᾽ ὀλίγων 
ξυμμάχων μεμοννωμένοι. ---- 80. ἀποθνη- 
σκει: acc. to an unlikely statement of 
Plutarch’s (Nic. 18) in single eombat 
with a certain Callicrates, who had 
challenged him to single combat and 
who likewise fell. —32. φθάνουσιν ἀν- 
αρπάσαντες Kal διαβιβάσαντες : this 
reading of two Mss. (B, H), for φθάνου- 
ow ἁρπάσαντες of the rest of the Mss., 
Cl. adopts (also Boehme- Widmann), on 
account of the great authority of Vat. 


in the later books of Thuc. The only ἡ 

objection that could be made to this 
form of expression is διαβιβάσαντες ap- 
plied to corpses, for which διακομίσαντες 



~ A 3 Ν, 9 ’ 9 Ἁ δὲ 9 4 ro ἃ A 
τοῦ ποταμοῦ ἐς TO ἀσφαλές, αὐτοὶ O€ ἐπιόντος YON Kal τοῦ 

102 ἄλλον στρατεύματος τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἀπεχώρουν. ἐν τούτῳ δὲ 

ε λ ᾿ ’ >. A ‘ “Ὁ , ε es 
οἱ πρὸς τὴν πόλιν αὐτῶν τὸ πρῶτον καταφυγόντες WS EWPwY 

φῳ , 9 4 ’ > Ν ~ , 9 θ , 
ταῦτα γιγνόμενα, αὐτοί τε πάλιν ἀπὸ τῆς πόλεως ἀναθαρσὴης- 

9 ’ Ν ᾿. “ “A > , Ν 
σαντες ἀντετάξαντο πρὸς τοὺς κατὰ σφᾶς ᾿Αθηναίους, καὶ 

4 e A 4 39. ἃ , 4 Ν 2 A ~ 3 
ὅ μέρος τι αὑτῶν πέμπουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν κύκλον τὸν ἐπὶ ταῖς Ene 


χα 3 , 2 A e » SoA \ 5 , λ θ 
πολαις, Ἴγουμενοι ἐρῃμον αιρήησειν. και TO μὲν EKQATAEU POV 

id 7 A e A Ἁ , 9 oN δὲ \ 
TT POTELYlLO La QAUTWYV αιβρουσι και διεπόρθησαν, QuTOV OE TOV 

κύκλον Νικίας διεκώλυσεν (ἔτυχε yap ἐν αὐτῷ δι᾽ ἀσθένειαν 
ε ld x N N A ’ 9 Ν 
ὑπολελειμμένος)- τὰς γὰρ μηχανὰς καὶ ξύλα, ὅσα πρὸ 
τοῦ τείχους Hv καταβεβλημένα, ἐμπρῆσαι τοὺς ὑπηρέτας 

was to be expected. Stahl defends the 
vulgate as breviloquentia; and Steup 
considers the reading of Vat. a not 
altogether successful explanation of 
ἁρπάσαντες, which Thuc. might have 
used to express at once a hasty taking 
up (ἀναιρεῖσθαι, 1.54.5 and freq.) and 
carrying off.—33. αὐτοὶ δέ: though 
referring to the subj. οἱ Συρακόσιοι, ex- 
pressed because in the first clause at- 
tention has been centered on the bodies 
of the fallen. — τοῦ ἄλλον στρατεύμα- 
τος: from 102. 4 it is clear that a part 
of the Athenians had been arrayed 
against the Syracusan right wing that 
fled to the city. 

102. Meanwhile the Syracusans with 

part of their army attack the Athenian 
circular fort on Epipolae, in which 
Nicias had been left sick on this day; 
they take the outworks, but are obliged 
towithdraw before the fire which Nicias 
has kindled from the wood heaped up 
before the main fort. As the Athenian 
fleet at this very time runs into the 
Great Harbor, the Syracusans find 
themselves put upon the defensive. — 
2. οἱ πρὸς τὴν πόλιν... καταφυγόντες: 

i.e. the right wing of the Syracusans, 
who (τὸ πρῶτον) after the capture of 
their stockade had retreated within 
the city-walls (101. 19).— αὐτῶν : part. 
gen. with οἱ καταφνγόντες. See on 62. 
19.— 8. ταῦτα γιγνόμενα : i.e. the suc- 
cesses of the Syracusans described in 
101. 26 ff. 4. ἀντετάξαντο πρὸς τοὺς 
... ᾿Αθηναίους : i.e. against a part of 
the left wing of the Athenians. See on 
101. 33.— 5. ἐπὶ τὸν κύκλον : see on 98.7. 

6. τὸ... προτείχισμα : an Outwork 
of the κύκλος (10 plethra, 1000 feet in 
extent).— 8. διεκώλυσεν : sc. ἑλεῖν. ---- 
δι᾿ ἀσθένειαν: Nicias was suffering from 
nephritis 7. 15.9.—9. τὰς γὰρ pnxa- 
vas xré.: stating, after the parenthesis, 
how it was prevented (διεκώλυσεν). At 
this middle point of the Athenian siege 
wascollected all the apparatus intended 
therefor (e.g. ladders, scaffolding), as 
well as the stakes and other wood for 
the circumvallation (e.g. the cravupol 
taken from the Syracusan ὑποτείχισμα, 
100. 24).— 10. ἦν καταβεβλημένα: pe- 
riphrasis of ptc. with εἶναι. See App. on 
1.1. 5. — robs ὑπηρέτας: i.e. the attend- 
ants of the hoplites (see on 3.17.10). 




ἐκέλευσεν, Ws ἔγνω ἀδυνάτους ἐσομένους ἐρημίᾳ ἀνδρῶν ἄλλῳ 

; 2 cy ; μ PUP t p ¢ 
4 Ἁ », ν A 4 A 

τρόπῳ περιγενέσθαι. καὶ ξυνέβη οὕτως - ov yap ἔτι προσὴλ- 

ε ’ Ν λ “A > N 9 ’ 4 “\ 

Dov ot Συρακόσιοι Sia τὸ πῦρ, ἀλλὰ ἀπεχώρουν πάλιν. καὶ 

γὰρ πρός τε τὸν κύκλον βοήθεια ἤδη κάτωθεν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων 

15 ἀποδιωξάντων τοὺς ἐκεῖ ἐπανήει, καὶ ai νῆες ἅμα αὐτῶν ἐκ 
A , 9 » 4 > Ν ig , 

τῆς Θάψον, ὠσπερ εἰρητο, κατέπλεον ἐς τὸν μέγαν λιμένα. 

ἃ ὁρῶντες οἱ ἄνωθεν κατὰ τάχος ἀπῇσαν καὶ ἡ ξύμπασα 

A \. ’ A 
στρατιὰ τῶν Συρακοσίων ἐς τὴν πόλιν, νομίσαντες μὴ ἂν ETL 

A , \ A 
ἀπὸ τῆς παρούσης σφίσι δυνάμεως ἱκανοὶ γενέσθαι κωλῦσαι 
20 τὸν ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν τειχισμόν. 

) A A e 3 “~ A » Ἁ Q 
Mera δὲ τοῦτο οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τροπαῖον ἔστησαν καὶ τοὺς 

‘The guard of soldiers was evidently 
slight.—11. ἀδυνάτους ἐσομένους : Steup 
adopted Cobet’s conjecture ἀδύνατος 
ἐσόμενος, approved by v. H.— ἐρημίᾳ 
ἀνδρῶν : through lack of (armed) men. 
Cf. τὸν Πειραιᾶ ἐρῆμον ὄντα νεῶν 8. 96. 
12; ἐν ἐρημίᾳ φίλων Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 14. 

12. καὶ ξυνέβη οὕτως : 80. περιγενέ- 
σθαι. Cf. 8.3.15 ἣν ξυμβῇ ἡ πεῖρα. ---- 
18. καὶ γάρ: giving the two grounds 
besides the fire for the retreat of the 
Syracusans. — 14. τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἀπο- 
διωξάντων τοὺς ἐκεῖ: of the main body 
of the Athenians, before which the 
Syracusan left wing had given way (101. 
34), a part had, after the pursuit ended 
(ἀποδιωξάντων), returned from below to 
bring aid to the threatened fortifica- 
tion. Cl. and others understood the 
reference here to be to the Athenians 
mentioned in 1. 4. But it is clear from 
101. §6 that the Athenians mentioned 
above (4) were only a small part of 
the army ; besides, the omission of fur- 
ther mention of the main body would 
be strange.—15. τοὺς ἐκεῖ: sc. τοὺς 
κάτω, i.e. the Syracusan left wing. — 

16. ὥσπερ εἴρητο: i.e. as orders had 
been given 101.11. See on 30. 4. 

17. of ἄνωθεν: i.e. the Syracusans 
who had attacked the κύκλος. --- κατὰ 
τάχος ἀπῇσαν: resumes, after the de- 
tails given in καὶ γὰρ. . . λιμένα, the 
ἀπεχώρουν πάλιν above (18). --- 18. vo- 
μίσαντες μὴ ἂν ἔτι... ἱκανοὶ γενέσθαι : 
the idea of fear implied in νομέζειν in- 
duces the particle of subjective nega- 
tion (μή for the more usual ov). For 
similar const. of μή after voultey, cf. 4. 
18.18. GMT. 685; Kr. Spr. 67, 7, 4. 
- 10. ἀπὸ τῆς παρούσης σφίσι δυνά- 
pews: with the force at their disposal. 
For force of ἀπό, see on 19.5; 1.91. 28. 

108. The Athenians now push for- 
ward unopposed their circumvallation, 
in the form of a double wall, from 
Epipolae to the Great Harbor. They 
receive also supplies from Italy, as well 
as new Sicel allies, and even ships sent 
to their aid from Etruria. The Syra- 
cusans on the other hand, as no help 
comes to them from Peloponnesus, 
begin negotiations with Nicias, and 
choose three new generals in place of 



N e ’ 9 ’ A ’᾽ A \ 
νεκροὺς ὑποσπόνδους ἀπέδοσαν τοῖς Συρακοσίοις καὶ τοὺς 
Q id Q 4 A 3 a Q 4 » 
pera Λαμάχου καὶ αὐτὸν ἐκομίσαντο. καὶ παρόντος non 
σφίσι παντὸς τοῦ στρατεύματος, καὶ τοῦ ναυτικοῦ καὶ τοῦ 
Aw 9 Q “~ 9 ~ A ~~ id 9 ya 
5 πεζοῦ, ἀπὸ τῶν Ἐπιπολῶν καὶ τοῦ κρημνώδους ἀρξάμενοι 
9 , , A , , A \ 
ἀπετείχιζον μέχρι τῆς θαλάσσης τείχει διπλῷ τοὺς Συρακο- 
σίους. τὰ δ᾽ ἐπιτήδεια τῇ στρατιᾷ ἐσήγετο ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιταλίας 3 
πανταχόθεν. ἦλθον δὲ καὶ τῶν Σικελῶν πολλοὶ ξύμμαχοι 
τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, ot πρότερον περιεωρῶντο, καὶ ἐκ τῆς Τυρση- 
10 νίας νῆες πεντηκόντοροι τρεῖς. καὶ πάντα προυχώρει αὐτοῖς 
9 9 a Ἁ Ἁ e ’ »’ A 9 »’ 9 ‘4 
és ἐλπίδας. καὶ yap οἱ Συρακόσιοι πολέμῳ μὲν οὐκέτι ἐνό- 8 
a , θ ε 9 κ᾿ "δὲ > 8 A λ , 
μιζον av περιγενέσθαι, ws αὐτοῖς ovde ἀπὸ τῆς Πελοποννή- 
9 a 9 ’ i>) Q A ᾽ 2 Ta 9 La) 
σον ὠφελία οὐδεμία NKE, τοὺς δὲ λόγους ἕν TE σφίσιν αὑτοῖς 

the former ones, to whose fault they 
ascribe their ill success. —2. τοὺς μετὰ 
Λαμάχου καὶ αὐτόν: cf. 101.32. The 
order is unusual for Λάμαχον καὶ τοὺς 
per αὐτοῦ. Kr. would bracket καὶ αὐτόν 
and Hude adopts the corrected reading 
of one Ms. (F) καὶ αὐτοί. --- 8. éxopl- 
σαντο: as 2. 79. 29, 82.4; 3.7.18; 7. 
45.4. See on 1.113. 14.— 5. καὶ τοῦ 
κρημνώδους: and indeed from the cliff, 
defining nore exactly τῶν ᾿Επιπολῶν. 
This work continued south or south- 
east the wall mentioned 101. ὃ 1.— 
6. amere(xiLov: still the impf., because, 
with all their energy in building, the 
goal—the water’s edge of the Great 
Harbor — was not reached ; cf. 7.2.§ 4. 

1. τὰ δ᾽ ἐπιτήδεια... πεντηκόντοροι 
τρεῖς : the three points most important 
for the Athenians: abundant oppor- 
tunity for provisioning, increase of 
their allies in Sicily, and reénforce- 
ments from a distance; after that fol- 
lows more naturally καὶ πάντα (as 
Vat. reads) than the vulgate καὶ τἄλλα 
προυχώρει, Since with the favorable posi- 

tion taken up for the land army as 
well as for the fleet not much more 
was to be desired: and 80 (καί) all went 
JSorward according to their hopes. There- 
to is added in confirmation (καὶ γάρ) the 
report of the mood prevailing in Syra- 
cuse. — ἐκ τῆς Ἰταλίας πανταχόθεν : cf. 
Plato, Phaedo 67c πανταχόθεν ἐκ τοῦ 
owpatos.—9. οἵ πρότερον περιεωρῶντο: 
for the expression, cf. 93.3; on the 
matter, cf. 88.§3 ff.— ἐκ τῆς Tuponvias: 
cf. 88. ὃ 6.—10. νῆες πεντηκόντοροι: 
cf. πεντηκόντοροι, Without νῆες, 48.5; 1. 
14, 4,12. Cf. ἱππαγωγοὶ vijes 2.56.5; 4. 
42.4, and ἱππαγωγῷ alone 43. 16.— 
11. ἐς ἐλπίδας : according to their hopes. 
Cf. the imitation of Dexippus, ws οὐδὲν 
προυχώρει és ἐλπίδας (in L. Dindorf’s 
Hist. Gr. Min. I, p. 190; cf. v. H. 
Mnem. N.S. VIII, 166). ἐς asin és δύνα- 
pu 4,118.6; 8.27.6. Cl. adopted from 
Vat. and Lond. és ἐλπίδα, and, com- 
paring és καιρόν, és καλόν, és κέρδος (Soph. 
Phil. 111), rendered: all went so well 
as to justify the best hope. 

13. ὠφελία οὐδεμία: see on 78. 9. 



9 A δ᾿ Ἁ Ν \ ’ὔ * Ν \ 
ἐποιοῦντο ξυμβατικοὺς καὶ πρὸς τὸν Νικίαν. οὗτος yap δὴ 
, YY , A δ 9 , δ , ‘ 
15 μόνος εἶχε Λαμάχου τεθνεῶτος τὴν ἀρχήν. καὶ κύρωσις μὲν 4 
,’ \ > A > 4 > 
οὐδεμία ἐγίγνετο, οἷα δὲ εἰκὸς ἀνθρώπων ἀπορούντων Kai 

μᾶλλον ἢ πρὶν πολιορκουμένων, πολλὰ ἐλέγετο πρός τε 

3 (a) A ? » Ν ‘N 4 Ν ’ \ ε 
ἐκεῖνον καὶ πλείω ETL κατὰ τὴν πόλιν. καὶ yap τινα καὶ ὑπο- 

’ e A ”~ , “A 3 > , > Ν ‘ 
ψίαν ὑπὸ τῶν παρόντων κακῶν ἐς ἀλλήλους εἴχον, καὶ TOUS 

’ 943 @ 9 A A 4 » ε “A 

20 στρατηγούς τε ἐφ᾽ ὧν αὐτοῖς ταῦτα ξυνέβη ἔπαυσαν, ws ἢ 
’ a 4 ‘ ~ ,’ ’ Ν ¥ 

δυστυχίᾳ ἢ προδοσίᾳ τῇ ἐκείνων βλαπτόμενοι, Kat ἄλλους 

ἀνθείλοντο, Ἡρακλείδην καὶ Εὐκλέα καὶ Τελλίαν. 

— τοὺς δὲ Adyous . . . καὶ πρὸς τὸν Ni- 
xlav: and discussions looking to an 
agreement were begun among themselves 
and with Nicias.— év σφίσιν αὐτοῖς: = ἐν 
ἀλλήλοις, a8 5. 69.17; 8. 76.8.— 14. Evp- 
βατικούς : which occurs also 8. 71. 7, 
91.3 (= EvpBarnplovs 5.76.4, 17), is 
pred. — otros γὰρ δή: Steup would 
adopt, with v. H., from Vat. 757. 

15. κύρωσις μὲν οὐδεμία ἐγίγνετο : no 
conclusion was reached. κύρωσις, ἃ rare 
word, is found only here in Thuc.; the 
verb κυροῦν, 4.125.5; 8.69.1.—16. ola 
Seeluds : 8c. ἣν γίγνεσθαι. Cf. 2.54.3. — 
17. μᾶλλον ἢ πρὶν πολιορκουμένων: more 
than before pressed by the sieye. Hude 
follows Laur. in omitting πρίν. But 
nothing further happened to the Syra- 
cusans than to be besieged ; they were, 
however, besieged now in quite other 
style than before, when the circumval- 
lation of the Athenians was only just 
begun. — 18. καὶ yap: referring esp. to 
πλείω ἔτι κατὰ τὴν «όλιν: Increasing 
suspicion led to much talk. For καὶ γὰρ 
καί, see on 61.6.— 19. ὑπὸ τῶν παρόν- 
των κακῶν: for ὑπό, by reason of, cf. 1. 
49.8; 4.84.17, 80.14. — καὶ rots orpa- 
τηγούς te: Cl. understood re and, καί 

104 ἘἜν δὲ τούτῳ Γύλιππος ὁ Λακεδαιμόνιος καὶ αἱ ἀπὸ τῆς 

also (see on 44.17), holding that only 
thus is τοὺς στρατηγούς properly em- 
phasized, and that καὶ ἄλλους ἀνθείλοντο 
is an independent addition; but Stahl 
and Steup are clearly right in explain- 
ing re as correlated with καί before 
ἄλλους (21). As to these generals, cf. 
73.§1, 96.14. — 20. ἐφ᾽ dv: under whose 
lead. — 21. τῇ ἐκείνων : belonging to 
δυστυχίᾳ, as well as to προδοσίᾳ. For 
the order, see 1. 1.6.— 22. Ἡρακλεί- 
Synv: not the son of Lysimachus (78. 
3), but apparently the son of Aristoge- 
nes (Xen. Hell. 1.2.8). Thuc.’s fail- 
ure to distinguish this Heraclides from 
the one mentioned in 73.8, who was 
deposed, is prob. due to lack of final 
revision on the part of the author. 
— Εὐκλέα: Vat. reads Εὐρυκλέα. Xen. 
(Hell. 1. 2. 8) mentions Eucles, along 
with Heraclides, as Syracusan gen- 

104. Meanwhile Gylippus, with two 
Laconian and two Corinthian ships, 
had reached Tarentum. His attempt 
to sail further failed in consequence of 
stormy weather. Nicias paid no atten- 
tion to the approach of so small a fleet. 
—1. Γύλιππος: cf. 98. ὃ 2f.— ai ἀπὸ 


Κορίνθου νῆες περὶ Λευκάδα ἤδη ἦσαν, βουλόμενοι ἐς τὴν 

’ δ ’ “ Ν ε ΕῚ “A ε 9 v4 
Σικελίαν dua τάχους βοηθῆσαι. καὶ ws αὐτοῖς ai ἀγγελίαι 
> 4 ὃ Ἁ Ἁ A 9. ἃ Ν x AN 9 ’ ε γὃ 
ἐφοίτων Seat καὶ πᾶσαι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ἐψευσμέναι ὡς ἤδη 
ὅ παντελῶς ἀποτετειχισμέναι al Συράκουσαί εἰσι, τῆς μὲν Σι- 
κελίας οὐκέτι ἐλπίδα οὐδεμίαν εἶχεν ὁ Γύλιππος, τὴν δὲ Ἴτα- 
λίαν βουλόμενος περιποιῆσαι αὐτὸς μὲν καὶ Πυθὴν ὁ Κορίνθιος 

Ν A Ν “A ~ \ , 4 , 

ναυσὶ δυοῖν μὲν Λακωνικαῖν, δνοῖν δὲ Κορινθίαιν ὅτι τάχιστα 

9 ’ Ν Sy 7 3 , e A », νὴ 
ἐπεραιώθησαν τὸν Ἰόνιον ἐς Τάραντα, οἱ δὲ Κορίνθιοι πρὸς 
A ? ’ ’ ’ \ 3 ee 4 A 
10 ταῖς σφετέραις δέκα Λευκαδίας δύο καὶ ᾿Αμπρακιώτιδας τρεῖς 


προσπληρώσαντες ὕστερον ἔμελλον πλεύσεσθαι. καὶ ὁ μὲν 
Γύλιππος ἐκ τοῦ Τάραντος ἐς τὴν Θουρίαν πρῶτον πρεσβευ- 
σάμενος καὶ τὴν τοῦ πατρὸς ἀνανεωσάμενος πολιτείαν καὶ οὐ 

τῆς Κορίνθου νῆες : 93. § 3. — 2. περὶ 
Λευκάδα: near the city Leucas, which 
also at 2. 80. § 2 appears as a collecting 
point for a fleet.— 4. ἐφοίτων : mostly 
personal; here of ἀγγελίαι, as 8.18.5 
of χρήματα .--- δειναὶ kal... ἐψευσμέναι: 
as pred. more forcible. — ἤδη παντελῶς: 
as was not the case, acc. to 7.2. § 4.— 
6. τὴν δὲ Ἰταλίαν. . . περιποιῆσαι: 
since at Sparta information was given 
through Alcibiades of the plans of the 
Athenians; cf. 90. §§ 2, 3.— 7. Πυθήν: 
ef. 7.1.1, 70.8; Diodorus (18. 7. 2) 
writes incorrectly Πύθης. --- 8. δυοῖν δὲ 
ἹΚορινθίαιν : apparently the two Corin- 
thian ships which Gylippus, acc. to 93. 
§ 3, had first ordered to Asine. —9. τὸν 
᾿Ιόνιον: see on 80. 5.—és Τάραντα: 
apparently directly across the open sea. 
— 11. mpoomAnpdcavres: for the ple- 
onasm (προσ-) after πρὸς ταῖς σφετέραις, 
cf. προσπληρώσαντες ἔτι 7. 34.5; ἄλλας 
προσπληρώσαντες 8. 10. 18. 

12. ἐς τὴν Θουρίαν : see on 61. 38. --- 
πρεσβευσάμενος : sending ambassadors, 
hardly ‘* going as ambassador,’’ assome 

explain. If Gylippus had gone as am- 
bassador to Thurii, there could hardly 
have been, after speaking of the em- 
bassy, ἃ mere mention of the departure 
from Tarentum (with ἄρας must cer- 
tainly be supplied ἐκ τοῦ Tdpavros). 
— 13. καὶ τὴν τοῦ πατρὸς ἀνανεωσά- 
μένος πολιτείαν : this reading of Vat. 
and Par. (followed also by Valla) gives 
welcome light on this matter known 
in general only from Plut. Pericl. 22. 
Cleandridas, father of Gylippus (98. 
§ 2), had after his banishment from 
Sparta, 444 B.c., joined the colony sent 
at this time from Athens to Thurii; the 
right of citizenship obtained by him 
Gylippus now claims, and bases thereon 
his unsuccessful demands upon his os- 
tensible mother-city. So Cl. reads with 
Bk., Kr., Bm., Stahl, Miiller, and the 
Oxford text; but Steup, with Hude, 
Marchant, and Spratt, follows the rest 
of the Mss., κατὰ τὴν τοῦ πατρός ποτε 
πολιτείαν, justifying the form οὗ expres- 
sion as Thucydidean by comparing 75. 
11 πυνθανόμενοι τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους és τὴν 



δυνάμενος αὐτοὺς προσαγαγέσθαι ἄρας παρέπλει τὴν Ἴτα- 
15 λίαν, καὶ ἁρπασθεὶς ὑπ᾽ ἀνέμου Ϊ κατὰ τὸν Τεριναῖον κόλπονΊ, 
ὃς ἐκπνεῖ ταύτῃ μέγας κατὰ βορέαν ἑστηκώς, ἀποφέρεται ἐς 

‘\ V4 A 4 ἃ > Ν ’ ~ , 
τὸ πέλαγος, καὶ πάλιν χειμασθεὶς ἐς τὰ μάλιστα τῷ Ta- 

‘N dS 4 A 
ραντι προσμίσγει: Kal τὰς ναῦς ὁσαι ἐπόνησαν ὑπὸ τοῦ 

χειμῶνος ἀνελκύσας ἐπεσκεύαζεν. ὁ δὲ Νικίας πυθόμενος 

4 δ v4 ε τὸ Q “~ ἴω a 4 Ἁ 
αὐτὸν προσπλέοντα ὑπερεῖδε τὸ πλῆθος τῶν νεῶν, ὅπερ καὶ 

Καμάριναν κατὰ τὴν ἐπὶ Λάχητος γενομένην 
ξυμμαχίαν πρεσβεύεσθαι, εἴ πως προσαγά- 
yowro αὐτούς. Headdsthatrhy πολιτείαν 
ἀνανεωσάμενος means not claiming, but 
actually renewing, citizenship, and with 
the reading of Vat. the sent. must con- 
tinue not copulative (καὶ οὐ δυνάμενοΞ), 
but adversative; further that this is 
not in accord with ὃ 8 ὁ δὲ Νικίας. .. 
ὅπερ καὶ οἱ Θούριοι ἔπαθον. --- 14. προσα- 
γαγέσθαι : to bring over, as 2.30.7; 8. 
91.7; 4.86.3; 7. 7. 8.— παρέπλει τὴν 
Ἰταλίαν : see on 47.7. “For ᾿Ιταλία as 
used in Thuc., see on 2.19. — 15. [κατὰ 
τὸν Teptvatov κόλπον]: the gulf of Te- 
rina is on the west coast of Bruttium 
(Ἰταλία in Thuc.), which Gylippus 
could reach only by sailing round 
through the strait. As that is out of 
the question, most editors, following 
Goeller, rightly regard the words as a 
gloss to ταύτῃ. But Steup objects that 
such a gloss is improbable, since this 
gulf is rarely mentioned by the ancients 
(elsewhere only in Pliny, N.H. 3. 5. 
10, 10. 15); further that bracketing 
the words makes unintelligible the fol- 
lowing ἐκπνεῖ (cf. 2. 84.8 εἰ ἐκπνεύσειεν 
ἐκ τοῦ κόλπον τὸ πνεῦμα), unless, with 
Badham and v. H., that be changed to 
πνεῖ. So Steup adopts Pp.’s conjecture 
Ταραντῖνον, as quite in accord with the 
fact that Gylippus, after the storm, 

returned to Tarentum, whence he had 
started. —16. ταύτῃ: in that quarter, 
for one sailing from Tarentum along 
the west coast of the gulf.—péyas: 
violently, pred., as 1. 23. 4.— xara Bo- 
ρέαν ἑστηκώς: standing in the north, i.e. 
blowing steadily from the north. Cf. 
ἣν αἰεὶ κατὰ πρύμναν ἱστῆται τὸ πνεῦμα 
2.97. 4: οἱ ἐτήσιοι ἄνεμοι τῇ ὥρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 
κατὰ νότον μάλιστα ἄνεμον ἵστανται ΑΤΥ. 
Anab. 6. 21.1.--- 17. πάλιν χειμασθεὶς 
ἐς τὰ μάλιστα: and driven by a most 
violent storm back, i.e. in the opposite 
direction. So Cl. and Stahl explain; 
but Steup says, before all the return to 
Tarentum is to be expressed, and to 
connect πάλιν with τῷ Tdpavre προσ- 
ployee has the further advantage that 
with ἀποφέρεσθαι és τὸ πέλαγος, which 
was the effect of a steadily blowing 
wind acc. to Thuc., we do not have to 
think also of a sudden storm. For és 
τὰ μάλιστα, Cf. πατρικὸς és τὰ μάλιστα 
ξένος ὧν 8.6.17, and ἐς τὰ μακρότατα 
81. 24.--- 18. ἐπόνησαν : of ships, as 7. 
38.11. Vat. has ὅσαι μάλιστα ἐπόνησαν. 
- 10. ἐπεσκεύαζεν : set to repairing 
(impf.); the completion (aor.) is men- 
tioned 7.1.1. 

20. rpoomAdovra: so Vat.; the rest 
of the Mss. wrongly πλέοντα. --- τὸ πλῆ- 
Qos: of the small number, as 4. 10. 22, 
and likewise with ὑπερορᾶν 5.6. 15.— 



e 4 » \ , Ἣν 4 
οἱ Θούριοι ἔπαθον, καὶ λῃστικώτερον ἔδοξε παρεσκευασμέ 

~ N 9 ,’ 4 3 ~ 
vous πλεῖν καὶ οὐδεμίαν φυλακήν πω ἐποιεῖτο. 

‘ ἴω A 
Kara. δὲ τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρόνους τούτον τοῦ θέρους καὶ Λακε- 

δαιμόνιοι ἐς τὸ ἼΑργος ἐσέβαλον αὐτοί τε καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι 
\ “Ὁ “Ὁ ᾿ Ἁ 3 ’ \ 3 ”~ > a 
καὶ τῆς γῆς THY πολλὴν ἐδήωσαν. Kat ᾿Αθηναῖοι ᾿Αργείοις 

’ ἃ 9 10 ν Ν ὃ Ν 4 
τριάκοντα ναυσὶν ἐβοήθησαν, αἵπερ τὰς σπονδᾶς φανερώ- 

Ν \ N ὃ ’ 9 a » , 
Tata Tas πρὸς τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους αὕτοις ἔλυσαν. προ- 

τερον μὲν γὰρ λῃστείαις ἐκ Πύλον καὶ περὶ τὴν ἄλλην 

Πελοπόννησον μᾶλλον ἢ ἐς τὴν Λακωνικὴν ἀποβαίνοντες 

μετά τε ᾿Αργείων καὶ Μαντινέων ξυνεπολέμουν, καὶ πολλάκις 

21. λῃστικώτερον : rather in a piratical 
fashion. See on 1.10.32. Kiihn. 540, 
nN. 7.— of: arbitratus est; seeon 
4.62. 4.— παρεσκενασμένους : referring 
to the whole expedition of the four 
ships and their crews. Cf. 1. 110.11, 
12. Hude’s παρεσκευασμένος would be 
worthy of consideration if Nicias were 
not again subject in the last clause. — 
22. οὐδεμίαν φυλακήν πω ἐποιεῖτο : has 
reference to the later dispatch of four 
Attic ships (7.1.§2). Vat. has οὐδεμίαν 
πως φυλακὴν ἐποιοῦντο. But πως is out 
of place here, and that Nicias alone 
can be meant is clear from the fore- 
going and from 7. 1. ὃ 2. 

105. About the same time the Lace- 
daemonians again invade Argos; the 
Athenians, who come with 80 ships 
to the aid of the Argives, for the first 
time since the conclusion of the peace 
make an unmistakable attack upon 
Laconian territory. —1. Λακεδαιμόνιοι 
és τὸ “Apyos ἐσέβαλον xré.: repetition 
of the unsuccessful campaign of 95. 81. 
— 2. ἐς τὸ “Apyos: into the territory of 
Argos. Cf. ἐκ τοῦ Ἄργους 16; ἐξ Ἄργους 
δ. 68. 1, 65.7; ἐν Ἄργει 4. 188, δ; ἐς 
᾿Επίδαυρον 12. See on 2.18.2; 3.91.11; 

4,118. 25. — 3. τῆς γῆς τὴν πολλήν : for 
assimilation of the articular adj. to the 
gender of the part. gen., see on 1.3. 
12; 7.38.15. G. 1090; H. 7806; Kr. 
Spr. 47, 28,9; Kiihn. 405, 5c.—4. αἵπερ 
...€Avoav: on this breach of the peace 
on the part of the Athenians, cf. 7. 18. 
§2f., and see App. on 5. 25.11. Be- 
sides, the Athenians, acc. to 5. 56. § 8, 
in the winter of 419-418 had already 
had inscribed at the bottom of the 
Laconian pillar of peace: ὅτι οὐκ évé- 
μειναν ol Λακεδαιμόνιοι τοῖς ὅρκοις.---ὅ. τὰς 
πρὸς τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους : so Vat.; all 
the rest of the Mss. omit rds, most τούς. 
But rds is necessary, and τούς doubtless 
correct, as on the third and fourth (18, 
16) mention of the Lacedaemonians the 
art. is added. —avrots: dat. in free 
relation, as 1.6.8.—€&voav: broke. See 
on 14. 35.1. 

6. λῃστείαις ἐκ Πύλον : as related 5. 
115. §2. Cf. also 5. 56.§3.— Kal... 
ἀποβαίνοντες: second modifier after the 
dat. λῃστείαις ἐκ Πύλον. Cf. 1. 80. 4: 4. 
36.18. Such landings, not mentioned 
by Thuc., had prob. occurred in the 
Epidaurian war (δ. 58 ff.).— 8. μετά re 
᾿Αργείων καὶ Μαντινέων ξυνεπολέμουν: 




> a , 9 , 4 ‘ 4 3 ᾿ 
Αργείων κελευόντων ὅσον σχόντας μόνον ξὺν ὅπλοις ἐς τὴν 
\ Y _n 3) 7A \ a ὃ , 3 

10 Λακωνικὴν καὶ τὸ ἐλάχιστον μετὰ σφῶν δῃώσαντας ἀπελ- 

θεῖν οὐκ ἤθελον: τότε δὲ Πυθοδώρου καὶ Λαισποδίον καὶ 
a 3 ’ 9 ’ > > 4 ἣν Ν 

Δημαράτου ἀρχόντων ἀποβάντες ἐς Ἐπίδαυρον τὴν Λιμηρὰν 

\ ν᾿ \, » ἐμέ 3 ’ ~ ~ N A 

καὶ Πρασιὰς καὶ ἄλλα ἄττα ἐδήωσαν τῆς γῆς, καὶ τοῖς Λακε- 
’ ¥ 9 , ~ N > »Ὃ 9 “ 

δαιμονίοις ἤδη εὐπροφάσιστον μᾶλλον THY αἰτίαν ἐς τοὺς 

9 ’ ἴω 9 ’ 3 4 
Αθηναίους τοῦ ἀμύνεσθαι ἐποίησαν. 

ϑ ’ A 
ἀναχωρησάντων δὲ 

A > ’ 3 a» A Ν Ἁ A 
τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐκ τοῦ “Apyous ταῖς ναυσὶ καὶ τῶν Λακεδαυ- 
’ e 3 “ 3 4 3 ‘\ ’ ~ ~ 
poviwy οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι ἐσβαλόντες ἐς τὴν Φλειασίαν τῆς TE γῆς 
A Ν ’ Ἁ ἰοὺ 
αὐτῶν ἔτεμον καὶ ἀπέκτεινάν τινας, καὶ ἀπῆλθον ἐπ᾽ οἴκου. 

(only Vat. has gvy-) indicating doubt- 
less both the alliance and the partici- 
pation in the hostilities; see on 2. 67. 
33. — 9. ὅσον σχόντας μόνον... ἀπελ- 
θεῖν : (dependent on κελευόντων) only so 
much as to land with arms in Laconian 
territory, devastate with them ever 80 
small a part, and then go away. For the 
restrictive force of ὅσον μόνον with ptc., 
cf. ὅσα μή With ptc., 1.111.5; 4.16.12. 
Cf. Ar. Vesp. 1288; Lys. 732. The 
chief stress is on the ptc.; see on 82. 
11; 1. 82. 10. --- σχόντας és: see on 7. 
1, 14.— -ξὺν ὅπλοις : see on 5. 50. 9. 
This was an unmistakable breach of 
the stipulation of the treaty: ὅπλα δὲ 
μὴ ἐξέστω ἐπιφέρειν ἐπὶ πημονῇ κτὲ. (5. 
18. ὃ 4).---11. Πυθοδώρου... . ἀρχόν- 
των: of the generals Pythodorus, Cl. 
thinks, was prob. the one mentioned 
3.115.6; 4.2.7, 65.11; but see Busolt, 
Gr. Gesch. III, p. 1851. Laespodias 
is mentioned again 8.86.44. For him, 
see J. Kirchner, Prosopographia Attica 
II, 1, and Busolt, ibid. 1850. Of Dem- 
aratus nothing further is known. — 
12. és’ Εἰπίδανρον τὴν Λιμηράν: see on 4. 
56. 10.— 13. on the same east 

coast of Laconia; cf. 2. δ6. 16. --- ἄλλα 
ἄττα: with Vat. (cf. ἄλλα ἅττα χωρία 
1,113.3; 2. 100. 12) for ὅσα ἄλλα of the 
rest of the Mss., which most recent 
editors prefer. Cf. 7.18.20. — τῆς γῆς: 
part. gen. with δηῃοῦν, as with τέμνειν 
below (17) and freq. See on 1. 30.8. 
G. 1097, 1; H. 736; Kiihn. 416, n. 2. 
- καὶ τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις... ἐποίη- 
σαν: and they brought it about that the 
Lacedaemonians with so much better pre- 
text now had cause to defend themselves 
against the Athenians, Deceleais hinted 
at. εὐπροφάσιστον found elsewhere only 
in late writers. τοῦ ἀμύνεσθαι depends 
on γὴν αἰτίαν. és τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους for és 
σφᾶς, as if expressing a complaint of 
the Lacedaemonians. Stahl brackets 
the words, but comparison with 1. 55. 
13; 66. 2,5 makes likely the designa- 
tion of the state against which there 
is αἰτία τοῦ ἀμύνεσθαι. 

16. ἐκ τοῦ Ἄργους : (Vat. ἐξ "Αργους) 
would have been expected after Λακε- 
δαιμονίων, for the Athenian fleet was 
last mentioned on the Laconian coast 
(12).— 17. ἐς τὴν Φλειασίαν : as 5. 88. 
11, 115. 2. 

ABBREVIATIONS OF Epirors’ NAMES: Arn., Arnold; Bk., Bekker; Bm., Boehme- 
Widmann; Cl., Classen; Kr., Krueger; M., F. Mueller; Pp., Poppo; St., Stahl; 
V.H., Van Herwerden 


19 διείργεται τὸ μὴ ἤπειρος εἶναι: Sh., Badham, v. H., and Mueller- 
Striibing (Polem. Beitr. z. Kritik ἃ. Thuk. p. 26 = Ztschr. f. d. dstr. Gymn. 
1879, p. 586) consider the correct reading to be not ἤπειρος εἶναι, as Demetrius 
(περὶ ἑρμην. p. 279, 5 Sp.) cites from our passage, and Polyaenus (cf. 2. 2. 4) 
and Procopius (who imitates this passage four times) read, but ἠπειροῦσθαι. CL 
remarked that acc. to 2. 102. 21 it must have been in that case at least ἠπειρῶσθαι. 
But neither ‘* to become mainland ”’ nor “ἢ to have become mainland,”’ but only 
"to be mainland,” suits the context. L. Herbst (Zu Thuk. 2. 64 ff.) defends 
ἥπειρος οὖσα, here too (see App. on 4. 63.2) accepting τό without influence on 
the const. But, apart from the fact that Herbst’s theory of this τό is impossible, 
we should not, even omitting the τό of nearly all Mss., have a text which could 
be ascribed to Thuc. Greek usage does not justify διείργεται with ptc., and if 
one should take μὴ ἤπειρος οὖσα simply as modifier of the subj., the sent. would 
be ambiguous. Besides, as Marchant rightly observes, οὐ, not μή with the ptc., 
would be expected. J.S. 

2-5 Ed. Wolfflin, in his monograph “ἢ Antiochus von Syrakus und Coelius 
Antipater ’’ (Winterthur, 1872), has by a careful examination confirmed and 
amplified Niebuhr’s conjecture that Thuc. in his survey of the ancient history 
of Sicily followed mainly his older contemporary Antiochus of Syracuse. He 
assumes with good reason that not only in the statements of the above chapters 
about the ethnographic and colonial relations of the island, but also in his geo- 
graphical data (3. 88, 116; 4. 24), and in his narrative of earlier military events 
in Sicily (3. 86, 88, 90, 103, 115; 4. 1, 24, 25, 46-48, 58-65), Thuc. used the Σικε- 
λιῶτις συγγραφή (Paus. 10.2) of Antiochus, which reached from the earliest period 
to the Peace of Gela, 424 n.c. (Thuc. 4. 65). To the influence of Antiochus he 
rightly attributes especially the fact that Thuc. several times dates from the 
founding of Syracuse (3.10; 4.16; 5.8.10), without further determination ; as 
also the mention of constitutional relations in the newly founded Hellenic cities 
(4.§4; 5.§1), since Dion. H. expressly testifies to the interest of Antiochus in 
such matters, namely, 1. 12 ὃν τρόπον ἐπολιτεύοντο. 

It is more difficult to determine how far WoOlfflin is right in his argument 
that the traces of the influence, possibly unconscious, of his Ionic source are to 
be found even in the language of Thuc. in the passages, esp. 2-5, where Antio- 
chus was followed. Especially noteworthy in this respect is 8. 8 βωμόν, ὅστις 
νῦν ἔξω τῆς πόλεώς ἐστιν, for it isthe only place in all Thuc. where ὅστις introduces 



an attributive modification of a concrete noun,! and remarkably enough we 
find in a fragment of the ᾿Ιταλίας οἰκισμός of Antiochus (cited by Dion. H. 
ibid.) the same const.: τὴν γῆν ταύτην, ἥτις νῦν ᾿Ιταλία καλεῖται. It is quite pos- 
sible then that the remark about the Apollo altar in Naxos is taken from Anti- 
ochus; and in 2.31 βορρᾶν as in 2.34 ἕνεκεν (of all the Mss.) may be due to the 
Ionic. It is noteworthy, further, as Wélfflin observes, that Thuc. only in these 
chapters uses with a date ἐγγύς or ἐγγύτατα, about (2. 29; 4.19; 5. 8, 10), every- 
where else μάλιστα. This is hardly Ionic influence, however, since Hdt. never 
uses ἐγγύς, but only the corresponding ἀγχοῦ, ἄγχιστα, and ἀγχοτάτω, and even 
these never in temporal but only in local or qualitatively comparative meaning. 
The same is true of 8. 5 τοῦ ἐχομένου ἔτους (= ἐπιγιγνομένου ~rovs), not found else- 
where in Thuc., for this too is at least foreign to Hdt. The form παλαιότατος 
(2. 8), for radalraros, cannot be considered unusual, since Thuc. varies elsewhere 
in the comparison of this word (see on 1.1.11). The twice occurring κληθείς is, 
however, not the same as καλούμενος (of the usual name of a person or place), 
but always implies, in accordance with the character of the aorist, a name given 
under definite conditions; so 4. 8 rods ‘TBralous κληθέντας, who received in Sicily 
the surname Hyblaean; 4. 28 ὄνομα τὸ μὲν πρῶτον Ζάγκλη ἣν ὑπὸ τῶν Σικελῶν κλη- 
θεῖσα, which name the Sicels had given, ὅτι δρεπανοειδὲς τὴν ἰδέαν τὸ χωρίον ἐστί" τὸ 
δὲ δρέπανον οἱ Σικελοὶ ξάγκλον καλοῦσι. Just so we have in 1. 8. 19 οἱ ὡς ἕκαστοι. .. 
καὶ ξύμπαντες ὕστερον Ἕλληνες κληθέντες, of the gradual spread of the name; and 
4. 24.17 ἡ Χάρυβδις κληθεῖσα means the part of the strait (τοῦτο) which received 
the name of Charybdis. 

If we now on the other hand consider that Thuc. in matters of fact does not 
always agree with Antiochus (e.g. in the account about the immigration of the 
Sicels, cf. Dion. H. 1.22; and in the history of the settlement of Zancle-Messene, 
cf. Holm I, 391), while agreeing with W6olfflin’s conclusion ‘‘that the summary 
in cc. 2-5 is to be regarded as a free excerpt from the work of the Syracusan 
historian’? (p. 7), we shall still acknowledge in Thucydides in details that inde- 
pendence which was to be expected not only from his character as historian 
but from his personal knowledge of land and people. 

So far Classen; Steup adds: W6lfflin’s views have found wide acceptance, 
but also much opposition, cf. e.g. Busolt, Griech. Gesch.? I, 866 ν. Fora would-be 
exhaustive refutation, see O. Boehm, Fontes rerum Sicularum quibus Thuc. 
usus sit examinantur, Rostock diss., Ludwigslust, 1875. It is not improbable 
that Antiochus was for Thuc. in Sicilian matters a chief source, but con- 
vincing proof therefor has so far not been given and with our defective knowl- 
edge of the earlier literature about Sicily cannot be given. ᾿Απόλλωνος βωμόν, 
ὅστις in Thuc. fits not ill to τὴν γῆν ταύτην, ἥτις, but in reality it points only to 
an Ionic source, which, as has been rightly observed, might also have been 

1In 2.48.12; 8. 88. 16, 57.18; 4.18.2, 120.15 ὅστις or οἵτινες, though refer- 
ring to definite nouns, has always a causal or qualitatively defining force. 


Hippias of Rhegium or Hellanicus of Mytilene. Some further linguistic pecu- 
liarities only make more likely the assumption, even without this scarcely to 
be doubted, that Thuc. in Sicilian matters used written sources. This applies 
to ἐγγύς, ἐγγύτατα, and ἐχόμενος. As to κληθείς, it seems beyond doubt that indeed 
κληθείς in 4. 20, as in 1.3.20, means received a name, whereas in 4. 8 and 4, 24. 
17 it is κληθείς and not καλούμενος because Thuc. would signify that it was a 
matter of designations belonging to the past; for the settlement of the Hy- 
blaean Megarians had disappeared long before Thuc. wrote, and the Sicilian 
strait, whose terrors were no longer deemed so fearful, was not then generally 
called Charybdis. Further the forms βορρᾶν (2.31) and ἕνεκεν (2.34) are not 
Ionic. Considering without prejudice, one can hardly doubt that v. H. has 
rightly restored βορέαν and ἕνεκα. Both forms are foreign to the Attic of the fifth 
century, acc. to inscr. (cf. Meisterhans, Gram. der att. Inschr.® pp. 100, 124, 
216), and the tradition of Thucydidean Mss. is elsewhere only in 1. 68.8 de- 
cidedly for ἕνεκεν, and nowhere else for βορρᾶς (cf. 99.2, 104.16; 2.96.19, 101. 
11; 8.4.17, 28.24). Finally, the fact that Thuc. has not more exactly deter- 
mined the time of the founding of Syracuse, from which he freq. dates, does 
not justify any inferences as td the source used by him., He reckons also from 
the capture of Troy (1. 12. ὃ 8) and from the thirty years’ truce (1.87. ὃ 6) without ᾿ 
fixing these events chronologically — he simply assumed certain chief dates as 
known. For the use of Antiochus by Thuc. there is then only the general con- 
sideration that the former was one of the chief historians who before Thuc. 
wrote about Sicily. On the paper of H. Stein, Zur Quellenkritik des Thukydi- 
des (Rh. Mus. N.S. LV, 531 ff.), whose conclusions are by no means to be ac- 
cepted, see Steup, Thukydides, Antiochus, und die angebliche Biographie des 
Hermokrates (Rh. Mus. LVI, 448 ff.). J.S. 

21 φκίσθη δὲ ὧδε τὸ ἀρχαῖον κτέ.: ὧδε, which is Bk.’s conjecture, — the better 
Mss. reading nde, 75e, or 75e, — has been adopted by most editors and is supported 
by οὕτως at the end of the chapter. Steup follows Haack in writing ἤδη for the 
following reasons: ‘'As Cl. showed, βάρβαροι τοσοίδε does not answer to τοσάδε 
ἔθνη τὰ ξύμπαντα ; not till 6.1 is the latter resumed in τοσαῦτα ἔθνη Ἑλλήνων καὶ 
βαρβάρων. Further τὸ ἀρχαῖον (see on 4. 8. 18) makes it unlikely that Thuc. would 
have announced the following account by both ὧδε and τοσάδε in successive 
members of the same sentence. τὸ ἀρχαῖον cannot belong also to the second 
member ; for if Thuc. had meant to emphasize that the settlements mentioned 
had all been made in olden times, he must have made clear that only in olden 
times had settlements been made in Sicily. Acc. to 1. ὃ 1 and 6. § 1 his real object 
was to give information about the Hellenes and barbarians who occupied the 
island when the Athenians began anew to lust after the conquest of Italy. But if τὸ 
ἀρχαῖον be taken only with the first member, with the reading ὧδε, the universal 
ἔθνη τὰ ξύμπαντα is not a suitable antithesis to τὸ ἀρχαῖον. Nor in what follows 
is there a question of an earlier and a later period, but of first barbarian, then 
Hellenic settlements. The objections to ὧδε apply also to Cl.’s conjecture τῇδε, 


which, moreover, Thuc. uses as adv. elsewhere only in 21. 10, and there in 
local sense, which is here inadmissible. Acc. to H. J. Miiller (Ztschr. f.d. Gymun. 
XXXVIII, 355f.) and Widmann, the Mss. readings are due to dittography from 
φκίσθη δὲ. But the statement, ‘It was settled however in olden times,’ says too 
little ; and not less easy than dittography would be the assumption that the sec- 
ond ἡ of ἤδη was carelessly copied after φκίσθη δὲ into ε.᾽" J.S. 

27 ἐνοικισάμενοι: Wolfflin (ibid. 5f.) favors ἐνοικησάμενοι, because ** Thuc. 
uses of barbarians only οἰκεῖν, allowing only the Greeks to claim the glory of 
olkifey.’’ Ullrich had already (in his Beitrége zur Kritik des Thuk. III, 10f.) 
made the same distinction, but remarks on our passage that ‘'the settlement of 
the Sicanians following immigration is indicated by the certainly genuine ἐνοικι- 
σάμενοι." St. remarks, without doubt correctly (Adn. Crit. 1. 8.3), ‘Cum in 
aoristis οἰκίσαι et οἰκῆσαι propter itacismum nulla fere codicum sit 
auctoritas, quid quoque loco scribendum sit, totum ex senten- 
tia pendet.’’ But the decision as to what sententia calls for in every par- 
ticular case depends always on the fundamental meaning of οἰκεῖν, dwell, and 
οἰκίζειν, make a dwelling, colonize, with object now of people (4.8; 1. 12. 14), now 
of places (1.18.31; 4.102. 19; 5. 116. 15, etc.), or whole regions (1. 12. 8, 98. 4). 
The aor. οἰκῆσαι might, it is true, be ingressive, make an abode, settle, and so not 
far in meaning from οἰκίσαι, found an abode, colonize ; as, however, with the latter 
meaning usually a state establishment is connected, there can seldom be a doubt 
as to the form required; see on 1.8.3, 98.4. Just herein lies the reason why 
οἰκίσαι is esp. applied to the state-founding advance of Hellenic colonization. 
That, however, this is not unconditionally the case is shown by φκίσθη 2.1, which 
includes the barbarian as well as the Hellenic settlements in Sicily. For ἐνοικι- 
σάμενοι here, however, probably only the usage indicated in the note on the text 
can decide. ; 

4 11 οἰκῆσαι: Cod. Laur. reads οἰκίσαι, which is preferred by Ullrich (Beitr. 
z. Krit. III, 10), Stahl, and others. But it seems strange, in order to get an obj. 
for οἰκίσαι, to find the subj. of κτέζουσι still in of ἄλλοι of |. 6, and then either 
to understand αὐτούς (as obj. accus.) of the Hyblaean Megarians, or as obj. of 
αὐτοὺς οἰκίσαι to supply Μεγαρέας τοὺς Ὑβλαίους κληθέντας. 

6 11 τὴν γενομένην ἐπὶ Λάχητος καὶ τοῦ προτέρου πολέμον Λεοντίνων... Eup- 
μαχίαν : Cl. bracketed Λεοντίνων, with the approval of most recent editors. His 
chief ground was that it made impossible the correct understanding of γενομένη 
... ξυμμαχία, besides being awkwardly placed. St. too urges the position, against 
many commentators who connect Λεοντίνων with ξυμμαχίαν. But separation of 
related words is not so uncommon in Thuc., and ξυμμαχία esp. we find away from 
its gen., e.g. 8. 68, 8, 86.8. Cl. thought ξυμμαχία indicated here not a formal 
compact concluded on certain conditions, but an allied relation continuing for 
the whole duration of the compact, and that the alliance between Athens and 
those Siceliote cities which had joined the Leontines against Syracuse (8. 86. § 2) 
was esp. meant. But as in the remaining passages of Thuc. where ξυμμαχία 


γίγνεται occurs (75.12; 1.102.19; 2.68.24; 8.10.7, 68.8; 5.22.14, 24.9, 27. 
2, 40.4, 48.1, 6, 80.1; 8.17.18, 19.1) the question is of the conclusion of a 
formal alliance, so must it be here of an alliance concluded at the time of Laches’ 
command. It is further clear from the context that the Egestaeans, in order to 
lay claim to the help of the Athenians, must speak here of their own connections 
and relations, and not merely emphasize former interference of the Athenians 
in Sicilian affairs. For the argument beginning with εἰ Συρακόσιοι in 15 is intel- 
ligible only if the Egestaeans are included in τοὺς λοιποὺς ἔτι ξυμμάχους αὐτῶν (16); 
and this they can be only if they have already been mentioned as of these ξύμμαχοι. 
Acc. to the traditional text, then, the alliance here spoken of must be an 
alliance of the Egestaeans with the Leontines, and αὐτῶν (16) must refer to the 
Leontines. These things are, however, by no means in disagreement with the 
rest of c. 6 and what Thuc. elsewhere communicates about Egesta. That in 
Thuc.’s account of the πρότερος πόλεμος Of the Athenians in Sicily no mention is 
made of an alliance of the Egestaeans and the chief opponents of the Syracusans, 
i.e. the Leontines (8. 86. ὃ 2f.; 4.25.§9f.), is not strange, when one considers 
the conciseness of that narrative in general and esp. as to purely Sicilian affairs 
(cf. esp. 3.90.§1; 4.25.§12). Nor can objection be made to the emphasis, with 
which, acc. to the traditional text, the Egestaean ambassadors assert that the de- 
struction of Egesta and other allies of the Leontines — some former allies of the 
Leontines might very well meanwhile have already lost likewise their independ- 
ence — would be dangerous for Athens, since then Syracuse, which was Dorian 
and colonized from Corinth, would be at the head of all Sicily. On the other hand, 
the rest of c. 6 is full of difficulties if, Λεοντίνων being omitted, the question must 
be here of an alliance of Egesta with Athens, as St. rightly observes. If the Eges- 
taeans refer to an alliance of their state with Athens, αὐτῶν (16) must mean the 
Athenians. Whether or not in this case one would miss in καὶ rods λοιποὺς ἔτι 
ξυμμάχους αὐτῶν διαφθείροντες some mention of Sicily, certainly the destruction of 
the remaining Sicilian allies of the Athenians would form a very strange contrast 
for the καὶ τὴν ἐκείνων (τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων) δύναμιν ξυγκαθελεῖν to be feared later. Did 
not the Sicilian allies of the Athenians belong also to this δύναμις ἢ Further, is 
the language of the ambassadors, considered in general, in accord with the 
assumption of an existing alliance between Egesta and Athens? If such an alli- 
ance existed, the Egestaeans could hardly have indicated (by the words ἀτιμώ- 
pyro γενήσονται in 15) only the action of Syracuse against Leontini as a wrong 
done to the Athenians; and surely they would then, as do the Λεοντίνων φνγάδες 
in 19.§ 1, have referred to the oath sworn in confirmation of the alliance. 
From the fragments of two inscriptions (IG. IV, 22k, p. 58, and IV, 20, 
p. 189; cf. Busolt, Gr. Gesch. ITI, 1, 521, and v. Scala, Die Staatsvertrage ἃ. Altert. 
I, 41f.) we know that in the year 454-453 a treaty was made between Egesta 
and Athens; but we do not know its contents, nor anything of its practical 
results, We have neither in Thuc. nor elsewhere definite authority for an Eges- 
taean and Athenian alliance concluded at the time of the first Sicilian war and 


still standing in 416-415. If Nicias in c. 10. § 5 names the Egestaeans as allies 
—adding, it is true, an ironical δή ---- of the Athenians, this might be when strictly 
the Egestaeans were only allies of the Leontines, who unquestionably belonged, 
as also the Camarinaeans (88. § 2), to the alliance of the Athenians. For real 
allies the answer which Nicias wishes given (18. ὃ 2) to the Egestaeans — of 
Leontines he does not speak distinctively in his whole first speech — is little ap- 
propriate. Then, too, that Alcibiades in 18. § 1 speaks of Sicilian allies and these 
sworn oaths, may be explained by the fact that the Leontines too came into 
consideration in connection with the Sicilian expedition. Nor for the actual 
state of the relations of Egesta to Athens before the great Sicilian expedition can 
anything more be inferred from the fact that Hermocrates makes the Athenians 
come πρόφασιν ᾿Εγεσταίων ξυμμαχίᾳ (see on 33.9) and names as an object of theirs 
᾿Εγεσταίων ξυμμάχων ἐπικουρίας (77.6). It was natural that the Athenians, after 
once concluding to support the Egestaeans, should represent them as their allies. 

8 12 ξυγκατοικίσαι δὲ kal Λεοντίνους, ἤν τι περιγένηται αὐτοῖς τοῦ πολέμον: 
Steup substitutes περιγένηται for περιγίγνηται, and renders: but also to join in 
restoring the city of the Leontines, in case any part of these shall have survived the 
war (with the Syracusans). He understands αὐτοῖς of the Leontines, whereas 
hitherto commentators have referred it to the Athenian commanders. To Cl.’s 
rendering: ‘‘if anything from the war (the course of the war) should be of ad- 
vantage to them,”’ he objects that περιγίγνεσθαι does not mean “ὍΘ of advantage.”’ 
Against Pp.’s explanation, si quid ex bello commodi nacti essent, he 
remarks that this would require ἐκ τοῦ πολέμου, as v. H. proposed. Against the 
rendering of others — ‘tin case the war to be waged for Egesta should leave 
them time and means ’’ — he insists that τι rod πολέμον περιγίγνεται can mean only 
‘ta part of the war remains.”’ 

In a material sense, then, all explanations proposed make the Athenians too 
little confident as to the prospects of the proposed undertaking. Besides, in 
the further account the restoration of Leontini is nowhere represented as depend- 
ent on the war to be waged for the Egestaeans. Indeed, as in c. 47, in agree- 
ment with the present passage, the undertaking against Selinus is designated 
as the first task of the generals, so in other passages the restoration of Leontini 
appears equally with the support of Egesta as the aim of the Athenian expedi- 
tion (88. ὃ 2, 48, 77. § 1), and repeatedly it is mentioned even alone as purposed 
(44. ὃ 8, 50.§ 4, 68. ὃ 8, 76.§ 2). Further, with the ordinary interpretation there 
is no indication of the force of ξἕυν-. After the remark in 6.15 ef Συρακόσιοι 
Λεοντίνους ἀναστήσαντες ἀτιμώρητοι γενήσονται, Thuc. could hardly regard an ex- 
planation as superfluous here, if he meant ξυν- to refer to that part of the Leon- 
tines which acc. to 5. 4. § 4 had returned to the territory of the city. Besides, this 
part of the Leontines seems meanwhile to have waged war unhappily against the 
Syracusans (ἐκ τῶν τειχῶν ἐπολέμουν 5. 4. 16), for in 19. 2 mention is made only 
of Λεοντίνων φνγάδων, and support of the Athenian expedition by Leontines is 
not mentioned anywhere later. 


Steup thinks his view not only explains ξνγ κατοικίσαι, but confirms the unfor- 
tunate end of the war waged by the Leontines from Phocaea and Bricinniae 
against the Syracusans (5. 4. ὃ 4). For the slight textual change (περιγένηται), 
cf. 8. 86. 10, where all Mss. except C offer for γένοιτο a pres. form, and 8. 98. 8, 
where C has γινομένην for γενομένην. 

9 12 οὔτε viv, ἀλλὰ 4 ἂν γιγνώσκω βέλτιστα ἐρῶ : most editors retain the Mss. 
reading here, supplying with οὔτε νῦν either λέγω, as Cl. does, or παρὰ γνώμην 
ἐρῶ, with Pp. But Steup, Stahl, and Hude adopt Reiske’s and Madvig’s conjec- 
tural reading of the passage: οὔτε viv ἄλλα ἢ ἃ ἂν γιγνώσκω βέλτιστα ἐρῶ. Steup: 
doubts that a parallel could be found in Thuc. for supplying the verb in the 
second member of a sent. of this kind, and agrees with Stahl that to supply λέγω 
- fits ill with the following ἐρῶ. 

11 5 Σικελιῶται δ᾽ ἄν μοι δοκοῦσιν, ws ye viv ἔχουσι, καὶ ἔτι ἂν ἧσσον δεινοὶ 
ἡμῖν γενέσθαι, εἰ ἄρξειαν αὐτῶν Συρακόσιοι : the Schiol. seems to have had about 
the same view as Valla: οὔ τε νῦν εἶσι δεινοί, καὶ ἔτι ἧσσον ἔσονται δεινοί, ἂν ὑπὸ 
Συρακοσίοις πάντες «γένωνται, ἢ ὡς διάκεινται ὑπὸ τοῦ πολέμου. There is then an 
ellipsis after ἔχουσι of certain words, which must be supplied in thought, or 
which may have dropped out of the text. Cl. thought the ellipsis — οὐ δεινοὶ εἶναι 
—might be supplied in thought and this view is supported by L. Herbst, Zu 
Thuk. II, 81 ff. Steup accepts Cl.’s view that ws γε viv ἔχουσι is opp. to εἰ ἄρξειαν 
αὐτῶν Συρακόσιοι, but objects that no certain examples have been adduced of such 
ellipses to be supplied in thought as Cl. assumes; and he does not accept St.’s 
rendering of ὡς... ἔχουσι, ‘tin comparison at least with their present condi- 
tion,’? which would relieve the necessity of assuming either an ellipse or a 
lacuna. As ἄν is a fatal objection to supplying οὐ δεινοὶ elvac—the thought 
demanding not ‘ they would not be formidable,”’ but '* they are not formidable ”’ 
—Steup thinks the const. of the words to be supplied participial and for the 
lacuna after ἔχουσι he conjectures οὐ δεινοὶ ὄντες ἡμῖν ἡσυχάζουσι. Thus ἄν would 
be construed only with γενέσθαι. For a different view of this passage, see 
Marchant, Cl. Rev. IX, 809f. 

12 4 δίκαιον ἐνθάδε εἶναι : Cl.’s rendering of ἐνθάδε εἶναι is innerhalb der Gren- 
zen unsrer Machisphdre, Steup’s im hiesigen Gesichtskreise, and the latter com- 
ments: ‘‘The apparently pleonastic εἶναι, which indicates the sphere under 
consideration (see on ws παλαιὰ εἶπαι 1.21.8; ὡς ἑκὼν εἶναι 2. 89.29; τὸ ἐπὶ σφᾶς 
εἶναι 4. 28. 5), is in an unusual manner connected with a nonarticular adv. Cf. 
τὴν πρώτην εἶναι Hdt. 1. 153.18; κατὰ δύναμιν εἶναι Isae. 2.32; els δύναμιν εἶναι 
Plato, Polit. 800 α; κατὰ τοῦτο εἶναι Plato, Prot. 817. a. The omission of εἶναι in 
Laur. can be due only to a copyist’s slip.’’ Cl. has, further, the following critical 
note: "Ἢ. Usener, N. Jahrbb. CV, p. 744 f., having learnedly and acutely proved 
for Attic prose a contract ptc. δεῖν for δέον, as πλεῖν for πλέον, thinks that neglect 
of this fact has led to a copyist’s mistake, so that Thuc.’s ἔνθα δεῖν (i.e. δέον) has 
become the vulg. ἐνθάδε εἶναι. Tempting as this conjecture is, it is not necessary. 
Against Usener’s doubt about ἐνθάδε after ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, is to be considered that 


ἐνθάδε by no means refers only to Athens and the immediate vicinity, but to the 
whole sphere of the Attic hegemony, and hence gives to ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν a very approp. 
expansion. On the other hand ἔνθα δεῖν = δέον after δίκαιον would be weak tau- 
tology: ‘It is right to expand our means there where it is right.’ Besides it 
would be hard to explain why Thuc. out of a number of passages where δέον 
occurs (4.17.8; 5.53.38, 66.12; 6.28.9; 7.15.7; 8.6.32, 94.11) should have 
preferred δεῖν only in this one passage.”’ 

12 4 καὶ μὴ ὑπὲρ ἀνδρῶν φνγάδων τῶνδε ἐπικουρίας δεομένων xré.: Usener (ibid. 
745) objected to φυγάδων and proposed φοιτάδων, tramps. Now it is indisputable 
that the Egestaean ambassadors, who are here designated in the traditional text 
as φυγάδες, in reality were not fugitives. But the question is whether Thuc. may 
not have let them be so called. In the foll. rel. sent. the words τῷ τοῦ πέλας 
κινδύνῳ, αὑτῶν λόγους μόνον παρασχομένους indicate that the Egestaeans, in case 
the Athenians should go to Sicily, would themselves run no risk and contribute 
nothing to the war. These statements were in so far not confirmed by the later 
actual events as described by Thuc., as we read in 62.13, 98.2 of Egestaean 
cavalry whojoined the Athenians, in 7. 57. 60 of Egestaeans among the allies of 
the Athenians before Syracuse, in 62.17 of 30 talents received by Nicias in 
Sicily from the Egestaeans. But the words of Nicias are also in conflict with a 
fact known at the time. Acc. to 8. 8 the Egestaean ambassadors had appeared 
at Athens with 60 talents, and this sum was doubtless present not merely λόγῳ. 
If then Nicias in the rel. sent., with regard to the Egestaeans, purposely 
omitted reference to an undoubted fact, he might have called the Egestaeans 
_here, in spite of the truth, φυγάδες. For both deviations from the truth occasion 
was offered by the presence, otherwise surely unwelcome to Nicias, of Leontine 
φυγάδες (19 2), of which no direct’mention is made anywhere in the speech. 
Besides, for Thucydidean orators to allow themselves prevarications is by no 
means unheard of. See the false assertions of Brasidas 4. 85. § 7, to which 
St. refers, and cf. the untrue statement of the Corinthians about Epidamnus 
1. 88. § 6. So we need neither doubt the correctness of the traditional reading 
here, nor see, with Cl., in gvydéwy a reminder of the Trojan origin of the Ely- 
mians (2.13 τῶν Τρώων τινὲς διαφυγόντες ᾿Αχαιούς). J.S. 

16 16 καὶ δημοσίᾳ κράτιστα διαθέντι τὰ τοῦ πολέμου ἰδίᾳ ἕκαστοι τοῖς ἐπιτηδεύ- 
μασιν αὐτοῦ ἀχθεσθέντες xré.: Cl. suggested- διαθέντος (gen. abs.) for διαθέντα. 
Schiitz and others have suggested the loss after τὰ τοῦ πολέμου of a pte. or fin. 
verb (e.g. ἀγασθέντες, καταπαύσαντες τῆς ἀρχῆς; ἀφελόμενοι, κατέπαυσαν) governing 
διαθέντα, but this is unlikely. How easily διαθέντι τὰ τοῦ πολέμου could be mis- 
copied as διαθέντα τὰ τοῦ rodéuov, and how little need there was by the side of 
πολέμιοι καθέστασαν and ἄλλοις ἐπιτρέψαντες τὴν πόλιν for express mention of the 
deposition of Alcibiades, scarcely requires remark. 

H. Schtitz (Ztschr. f.d. Gymn. XX XIII, 88) was the first to recognize that τὴν 
πόλιν, not (with the Schol.) τὰ rod πολέμου, must be understood as object with 
ἄλλοις ἐπιτρέψαντες. Besides the difficulty in the separation of τὰ τοῦ πολέμου from 


ἐπιτρέψαντες, to supply that object would limit ἄλλοις to the other generals in 
Sicily. J.S. _ 

171 καὶ ταῦτα ἡ ἐμὴ νεότης. . . ὠμίλησε καὶ... ἔπεισε: Steup substitutes 
κἀνταῦθα for καὶ ταῦτα and in ἃ critical note expresses himself substantially as 
follows: It is now generally agreed that καὶ ταῦτα... ὠμίλησε cannot be taken, 
with Arn., a8 = καὶ ταῦτα ὁμιλήσασα ἔπραξε. Against St.’s view ταῦτα wuldyoe = 
ταύτην τὴν ὁμιλίαν ὡμίλησε there is no gram. objection, and the addition of the 
instrum, dat. λόγοις πρέπουσιν would be permissible. But in a sent. containing a 
summary of what Alcibiades had accomplished — and ταῦτα ἔπεισε could mean 
only: hereto, i.e. to this alliance with you and this hostility to Sparta, has per- 
suaded, induced — the codrdination of ὁμιλεῖν with the far more important πείθειν 
is incredible. Cl. was inclined to strike out ὠμίλησε, as was also L. Herbst (Zu 
Thuk. 11, 86 ff.). But besides the fact that in Bekker’s Anecd. I, 110 (Θουκυδίδης 

ἕκτῳ - καὶ λόγοις ὠμίλησα τρέπουσιν (sic) ἀντὶ τοῦ συνεγενόμην) there is a manifest 
' reference to our passage, it would be hard to explain how ὡμίλησε got into the 
text. Besides és τὴν Πελοποννησίων δύναμιν, which taken with ὡμίλησε offers no 
difficulty, could hardly be explained without it, for ‘‘ against the power of the 
Peloponnesians’’ could hardly be expressed by simple és. Nor would it be easy 
to show why Alcibiades should use about his activity πείθειν and not some gen- 
eral expression like πράσσειν or διαπράσσεσθαι. 

Bearing in mind that Thuc. uses here the aor. of ὁμιλεῖν, we have, Steup 
thinks, choice only between changing (with v. H., following Badham’s conjec- 
ture) ὠμίλησε into ὁμιλήσασα, ΟΥ καὶ ταῦτα into κἀνταῦθα. The latter is the more 
prob. The former corruption is not so simple a matter, whereas κἀνταῦθα was 
miscopied into xai ταῦτα in 3. 66. 14, as κἀν τούτῳ into καὶ τοῦτο 3. 45. 14. Besides, 
by restoring κἀνταῦθα we get the advantage that Alcibiades then in our sent. 
merely speaks of his deportment in securing the aforementioned results without 
referring thereto by the strange expression ταῦτα ἔπεισε. The Athenians acc. to 
16. 28 should test the matter whether the orator manages τὰ δημόσιά του χεῖρον. 
It is therefore quite proper that Alcibiades goes into the matter of his action 
against the states within the jurisdiction of Sparta and emphasizes the fact that 
in spite of his youth and the folly ascribed to him he has known how to negotiate 
"λόγοις πρέπουσιν With these states and to bring them ὀργῇ πίστιν παρασχομένῃ 
over to the Athenians. . 

1711 6 τι δὲ ἕκαστος ... ταῦτα ἑτοιμάζεται: H. Usener (Rh. Mus. XXV, 587) 
conjectures ὅτι for 8 τι and σχεδιάζξεται for ἑτοιμάξεται. For σχεδιάζεται he cites 
Photius, Lex. 1. p. 219 Nab. écxedlatov: ἡτοίμαζον. ταῦτα in his view is the 
“apparatus belli pacisque”’ of the preceding sent. Cl. and St. both accept 
ὅτι, and the former thinks ταῦτα should be changed to τοῦτο. See Herbst, Zu 
Thuk. II, 88 ff. J.S. 

17 17-21 καὶ μὴν... ὠπλίσθη : besides Cl.’s chief reason for suspecting this 
passage, namely that μόλις ἐν τῷδε τῷ πολέμῳ is out of place in a speech of the 
youthful Alcibiades, Steup would emphasize the foll. three additional points: 


(1) That to call the land of the ἄλλοι Ἕλληνες as contrasted with the Siceliotes, 
i.e. the Hellenic mother country, ἡ Ἑλλάς, is against Thucydidean usage, with 
whom ἡ Ἑλλάς elsewhere means the territory occupied by Hellenes (see on 14. 2. 
1). (2) Even if Thuc. from a certain period (see Einl zu B. 14. p. xxxii) on re- 
garded the ten years’ war, the succeeding interval, the Sicilian expedition, and the 
Decelean war as a single great war, it was impossible, though elsewhere he might 
let a speaker say τὰ δέοντα (1. 22.6), here to put into Alcib.’s mouth ἐν τῷδε τῷ 
πολέμῳ. In the spring of 415 no one could speak of a continuance of the ‘* war 
of the Peloponnesians and Athenians.’’ See Ullrich, Beitr. 57f. (8) After the 
words in § 8 καὶ οὐδεὶς... ovre τὰ περὶ τὸ σῶμα ὅπλοις ἐξήρτνται and in ὃ 4 καὶ οὐκ 
εἰκὸς τὸν τοιοῦτον ὅμιλον κτὲ., it is strange to find again in § 5 the hoplites of 
the Siceliotes discussed, and indeed in a less derogatory manner. — Besides this 
use of ἡ Ἑλλάς, the language of the passage offers other peculiarities, though 
these are of less moment for the question of genuineness. κομπεῖν is not found 
elsewhere in Attic prose; the transition from οὔτ᾽ ἐκείνοις (ὁπλῖταί εἰσιν) to οὔτε οἱ 
ἄλλοι Ἕλληνες τοσοῦτοι (ὁπλῖται) ὄντες is strange (Badham conjectured οὔτ᾽ ἐκεῖνοι); 
for ὁπλίτας ψεύδεσθαι, falsified hoplites, the qnly parallel cited is Xen. Anab. 5. 
6.35; and finally the expression ἡ Ἑλλὰς ἱκανῶς ὠπλίσθη, Hellas was sufficiently 
provided with hoplites, is unusual. The reading of the Mss. ὅσοι ἕκαστοι σφᾶς 
αὐτοὺς ἠρίθμουν, not ὅσους xré., is doubtless a slip due to the preceding ὅσοιπερ, and 
not, with Cl., to be attributed to the imperfect expression of the interpolator. 
The occasion for the interpolation Cl. prob. rightly found in the remark 5. 68. 
§ 2 about the uncertainty of numerical statements διὰ τὸ ἀνθρώπειον κομπῶδες. J.S. 

18 15 διὰ τὸ ἀρχθῆναι ἂν ὑφ᾽ ἑτέρων [αὐτοῖς κίνδυνον εἶναι], εἰ μὴ αὐτοὶ ἄλλων 
ἄρχοιμεν : against Cl., Steup follows Usener.(Rh. Mus. ΧΧΥ, 587), with St. and 
others, in bracketing αὐτοῖς κίνδυνον εἶναι. Cl. made ἀρχθῆναι ἄν depend on κίν- 
duvoy εἶναι, but there is no parallel for this const., since the inf. with ἄν can 
thus depend only on verba dicendi vel putandi. See St., Qu. Gr.? p. 4. The 
position is very much against taking ἄν with κίνδυνον εἶναι, rather than with 
ἀρχθῆναι. Besides, as St. shows, Thuc. nowhere else has κίνδυνον εἶναί τισι for 
κινδυνεύειν. Further, the juxtaposition of αὐτοῖς κίνδυνον εἶναι and εἰ μὴ αὐτοὶ 
ἄλλων ἄρχοιμεν is scarcely to be paralleled elsewhere. 

19 2 καὶ Λεοντίνων φυγάδων, of xré.: in favor of construing Acovrlywy as gen. - 
dependent on φυγάδων is the fact that Thuc. puts names of peoples regularly in 
the gen. with φυγάδες and φεύγοντες (7.5,17, 64.12; 1.26.18, 118.9, 10,14; 8. 
85.4; 4.52.3, 75.8, 76.13; 7. 57.42; 8.100. 18). The only exception to this 
rule, 48.15 καὶ Μεγαρεῦσι ψιλοῖς φυγάσιν εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατόν, and with 120 light-armed 
Sugitive Megarians (for φυγάς as adj., cf. 12.4; 4. 76. 7), is easy to explain, if one 
assumes that Thuc. had in mind at first to speak only of light-armed Megarians 
and then added as an afterthought a further epithet (φυγάσιν). At any rate 
43.15, by reason of its exceptional character (in the added ψιλοῖξ), proves nothing 
against the thirteen passages cited. Hence we must here, as well as in 1. 113.1 
and 4.1.12, make the gentile names depend on φυγάδων and τῶν φευγόντων, and 


in 59.17, where we have a patronymic instead of a gentile, the const. is the 
same, That Thuc. did not avoid the juxtaposition of gens. in different const. is 
clear from the examples cited by Steup, Rh. Mus. LVI, 450 (1. 45. 8, 50.9, 58. 
16, 100. 16, 141.15; 3.109. 12). Stahl suggests the insertion of τινῶν after Acovri- 
voy, but there is no τινῶν in 64.12 or 4.1.12. J.S. 

19 7 παρελθὼν αὐτοῖς αὖθις ἔλεγε τοιάδε: A. Weidner (Parerga Din. et Thuc. 
p. 14) commends, with Bk., the bracketing of αὐτοῖς. But all the better Mss. read 
αὐτοῖς, and it is in no wise objectionable, even though not necessary. αὖθις is 
placed after for emphasis. For αὐτοῖς with παρελθών, see on 15.19. Cl. called 
attention to the fact that Thuc. introduces direct speeches with ἔλεξε, ἔλεγε, εἶπε, 
etc. (see on 2. 71.6) without dat., the only exception being 3.29.11. Also 
modifying prep. phrases (with ἐν or és) are exceptional, e.g. only 1. 85.15; 4. 58. 
9. παραινεῖν Thuc. uses, in introducing direct speeches, with dat. in 8.21, without 
dat. 15.19, 82.20; 1.189. 25; 2.10.11; παρακελεύεσθαι with dat. 67.18; 4.125. 
28; without dat. 4.9.24. J.S. 

20 7 τό τε πλῆθος, ὡς ἐν μιᾷ νήσῳ, πολλὰς τὰς “EAAnvidas: Steup’s critical note 
is as follows: It is strange that Kr.’s rejection of τὰς Ἑλληνίδας has not been ac- 
cepted by a single editor or commentator, though there are grave objections to 
the traditional reading. That Nicias, as has been supposed, has had occasion to 
emphasize esp. the Hellenism of the Sicilian cities with which Athens would have 
to contend, cannot be admitted. Alcibiades had found no fault on this point, cer- 
tainly not in 17. 7 ὄχλοις ξυμμείκτοις πολνανδροῦσιν ai πόλεις, for nothing is against 
holding that in these words he referred solely to the mixture of population in 
the Sicilian cities out of various Hellenic components. Certainly in passages like 
4.33 ᾿Αναξίλας. .. τὴν πόλιν αὐτὸς ξυμμείκτων ἀνθρώπων οἰκίσας Μεσσήνην ἀντωνό- 
μασεν and 4. 106. 8 βραχὺ μὲν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐμπολιτεῦον (ἐν τῇ ᾿Αμφιπόλει), τὸ δὲ πλεῖον 
ξύμμεικτον no one thinks of barbarian constituents. Besides if Nicias had really 
wanted to emphasize Hellenism among the characteristics of the Sicilian cities 
he must have done this by means of a further epithet (as μεγάλας etc.), not by 
@ supplementary restrictive appositive. 

In the traditional text τὰς Ἑλληνίδας can signify gram. only ‘the Greek 
(cities), namely.’’? With this interpretation L. Herbst (Philol. X VI, 388 ff.) main- 
tains that our whole sentence, as far as the thought is concerned, means: ‘* for 
the Hellenic cities, against which we purpose marching, are large, internally 
quiet, and numerous.’’ But Herbst does not explain why Thuc did not say simply 
that, why he put τὰς ‘EAAnvidas as appos. at the very end. To assert that τὰς ‘EX- 
Anvldas at the beginning of the sentence would be misplaced is only an attempt to 
slip out of the difficulty, and the further view that these words at the end form a 
transition to καὶ παρεσκευασμέναι τοῖς πᾶσιν ὁμοιοτρόπως μάλιστα τῇ ἡμετέρᾳ δυνάμει 
cannot be accepted. Even without τὰς Ἑλληνίδας nobody would think here of 
other cities than Hellenic. There would be no sense, therefore, in a transition to 
the words cited, which, further, do not follow immediately. The Athenians had 
no other than Hellenic opponents to expect in Sicily, nor could Nicias represent 



others as to be reckoned with; for the Sicilian subjects of the Syracusans did 
not enter seriously into consideration, in fact Nicias actually mentions them 
only incidentally (16) Συρακοσίοις δὲ καὶ ἀπὸ βαρβάρων τινῶν dw ἀρχῆς χρήματα pépe- 
ται. There is, then, as little discrimination between Hellenic and non-Hellenic 
races as stressing the Hellenism of the Sicilian cities. 

Impossible, finally, is Pp.’s view, namely, ras Ἑλληνίδας : Graecas dico, i.e. 
quamvis solas Graecas, quae in illa insula sunt, civitates hic 
spectemus. Not only gram. is it inadmissible to tack τὰς Ἑλληνίδας on to the 
last member of our sent. τότε πλῆθος... πολλάς, but in a material point of view 
it must be again emphasized here that Nicias thinks only of Hellenic antagonists 
of the Athenians, and hence stress upon this circumstance, even in mentioning 
the large number of Sicilian cities, must seem strange. A reader or commentator, 
however, might well feel called upon to note expressly that Nicias had in mind 
only the Hellenic cities of Sicily. J.S. 

20 16. Συρακοσίοις δὲ kal ἀπὸ βαρβάρων τινῶν ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς φέρεται : this reading 
of Ms. α --- ἀπαρχῆς the reading of ABCEFM being prob. a slip for ἀπ᾽ ἀρ- 
xfs —is accepted by Pp., Bm., Jowett, and adopted in Hude’s text. 

Bk., Kr., Bl., St., Cl. retain the vulg.— ἀπὸ βαρβάρων τινῶν ἀπαρχὴ ἐσφέρεται 
— which has the support of none of the best Mss. St. explains: “ἀπαρχὴ ἐσφέ- 
pera, 80. τῶν ἐκ τῆς γῆς. Cf. Plato, Legg. 806 pv yewpylar δὲ ἐκδεδομέναι δούλοις 
ἀπαρχὴν τῶν ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἀποτελοῦσιν, Where the question is about the Helots. And 
so the Syracusans had permitted the land of some region of which they had 
become possessed to be held and enjoyed by the Sicels on condition that for 
revenue they pay in a certain proportion of the products. The passage of Plato 
shows that there is no reference to first fruits offered to gods or ancestors. ἐσφέ- 
pew has the general sense of bring in, as 8. 45. 81.᾽" Cl. further suggests making 
ἀπαρχῆς depend on ἀπό: ‘Sand to the Syracusans a tax is paid out of the first 
fruits of some barbarians.’’ Steup brackets the first ἀπό and renders, ‘*to the 
Syracusans, however, money is paid also in consequence of their rule over certain 
barbarians.” For the order βαρβάρων τινῶν ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς, the misunderstanding of 
which he thinks led to the interpolation of the first ἀπό, he compares τῆς Ποτειδαίας 
ἕνεκα ἀποστάσεως 1.57.10; τῶν ἹΡηγίνων κατὰ ἔχθραν 4.24.5; τοῦ ἀφανοῦς τούτου διὰ 
τὸ ἀτέκμαρτον δέος 4.63.1. For ἀπό, in consequence of, cf. 1.68.8; 2.49.4, 68.1. 

As against the unsupported vulgate reading Steup adds that, apart from 
ἐσ φέρειν not being usual of revenues paid in by subjects, the mention of ἀπαρχή 
accruing to the Syracusans does not fit the context, since ἀπαρχή means only a 
tribute in kind, i.e. first fruits from the field (cf. the passage cited above from 
Plato), whereas here the question is still of the χρήματα, not yet of the σῖτος (18). 
That ἀπαρχή never = φόρος, but always designates a part taken from a whole, and 
so with reference to tribute can only mean ‘' tribute quota ’? — which would not 
suit here —is shown by Boeckh, Stsh. 118, 382 ff. 

21 10 καὶ οὐκ ἐν τῷ ὁμοίῳ στρατευσόμενοι καὶ ὅτε τοῖς τῇδε ὑπηκόοις ξύμμαχοι 
ἤλθετε ἐπί τινα: after στρατευσόμενοι the Mss. read καὶ οὐκ ἐν. That this makes no 


sense and is a case of dittography after the preceding καὶ οὐκ ἐν is generally 
recognized, but the remedies proposed differ widely. G. Hermann (Zu Vigerus¢, 
p. 772), Bk., and Bm. would add nothing after striking out οὐκ ἐν, but no parallel 
has been cited to support καί alone in such a const. Cl. adopted Goeller’s con- 
jecture καὶ εἰ (omitting évy, which Goeller retained); but Stahl is prob. right in 
his objection that ἤλθετε is historical, not hypothetical, since in a condition we 
should expect impf., not aor. οὗ, proposed by L. Herbst (Philol. XVI, 337 ff., and 
Zu Thuk. IT, 98 ff.), is objectionable as a local designation by the side of τοῖς τῇδε 
ὑπηκόοις ξύμμαχοι. For these reasons Steup adopts, with Stahl and Hude, Portus’ 
conjecture ὅτε, omitting οὐκ ἐν. His objection to ἐν τοῖς τῇδε ὑπηκόοις is that this 
would mean ‘‘in the territory of your allies here”? (cf. διὰ τούτων, through (the 
territory of) these, 3.101. 8, and see on 8. 92. 2); for Stahl’s view that τοῖς ὑπη- 
κόοις is neut. is without support in Thucydidean usage. By the const. assumed 
in the text rots τῇδε ὑπηκόοις gives sufficient support to ξύμμαχοι, which would 
otherwise stand too much alone, and all ground is removed for Stahl’s contention 
that ξύμμαχοι is a gloss to ὑπηκόοις. Nicias could, however, hardly expressly op- 
pose to the Sicilian expedition help sent by the Athenians in the territory of their 
near-by dependents ; there would be no object in entirely excluding attacks upon 
the territory of enemies of subjects of the Athenians. What Nicias would set 
against each other is manifestly, on the one hand, help for subject-states at 
points whence all that was found further requisite for warfare could be got easily 
out of friendly territory, and, on the other ‘hand, the expedition planned in the 
interest of the Egestaeans into a strange country, from which the procuring of 
further necessaries would be incomparably more difficult. The parallels cited in 
the text note for ὅθεν referring to τινα are sufficient, so that there is no need 
here to render ὅθεν *‘from a point where,’’ though 1. 89.15 (διεκομίξζοντο ὅθεν 
ὑπεξέθεντο παῖδας καὶ γυναῖκας) shows that sense to be possible. 

21 13 ἐξ ἧς μηνῶν οὐδὲ τεσσάρων τῶν χειμερινῶν ἄγγελον ῥᾷδιον ἐλθεῖν : besides 
the fact that the position of οὐδέ is opp. to taking it with ἄγγελον (see text note), 
Steup approves the objection-of W. E. Heitland (Jour. of Philol. XXIV, 4 f.) to 
the thought thus yielded. It is hard to see why in winter it should have been 
so much less possible for reénforcements to reach Sicily from Athens, than for 
a messenger to come from Sicily to Athens, Steup thinks the commentators 
have generally construed οὐδέ not with μηνῶν τεσσάρων, but with ἄγγελον because 
they have universally taken τῶν χειμερινῶν as epexegetical, which const. he holds 
to be impossible if οὐδέ is taken with μηνῶν τῶν χειμερινῶν. He formerly (see 
Thuk. Stud. 78 ff.) thought the passage corrupt, but now regards the difficulty 
removed by taking τῶν χειμερινῶν as part. gen., ‘‘from which not even in four 
months of the winter (months, i.e. in winter not even in four months),”’ supplying 
μηνῶν with the adj., as 1. 10. 9 (τῶν πέντε τὰς δύο μοίρας); 4.57.5 (φρουρὰ μία τῶν 
περὶ τὴν χώραν); 5.60.5 (ἑνὶ ἀνδρὶ τῶν ἐν τέλει ξυστρατευομένων). For juxtaposition 
of gens. in different const., see App. on 19.2. Steup argues that the passage 
cited from Hdt. (2.68.1) implies that there were more than four χειμέριοι μῆνες 


and that his (part. gen.) const. removes all contradiction of our passage with 
5. 20. § 8, from which latter passage he is convinced that Thuc. treated summer 
and winter as half years. See Thuk. Stud. Il, 76 ff. and Einl.‘ p. lv f. 

While the part. gen. const. is possible here, it seems neither necessary nor 
natural; on the other hand there seems to be no impossibility in taking τῶν χει- 
μερινῶν as epexegetical even if οὐδέ is read just where it stands, 

23 2 πλήν ye πρὸς τὸ μάχιμον αὐτῶν, τὸ ὁπλιτικόν : Jowett’s explanation is 
satisfactory: ‘' It is better to suppose the words, though where they stand they 
may be rhetorically faulty, to be a qualification introduced somewhat out of place 
by Nicias, aud in harmony with the general spirit of hisspeech. ‘ Except indeed 
as regards the number of hoplites which they can put into the field.’ ‘For in 
that respect equality is impossible’ is the suppressed premise. While exhorting 
the Athenians, he is secretly discouraging them. ‘You must do all you can to 
be a match for your opponents’ is the general drift of the previous chapter, and 
yet he throws in by the way, ‘but in the great arm of war you cannot be a 
match for them.’ This explanation is in some degree confirmed by the parallel 
sentiment uttered from the Syracusan point of view, 6. 37. 5, ols γ᾽ ἐπίσταμαι 
οὔθ᾽ ἵππους ἀκολουθήσοντας... οὔθ᾽ ὁπλίτας ἰσοπλήθεις Tots ἡμετέροις."" 

Cl. also retained the Mss. reading, explaining, ‘*there can be no question 
of our opposing to their whole fighting force an equally numerous body of 
hoplites’’; and he understands with τὸ ὁπλιτικόν, from the context, ἀντίπαλον 
παρασκευάζεσθαι οὐχ οἷόν τέ ἐστιν. 

Steup considers the traditional text incapable of satisfactory explanation, 
and adopts with Stahl the conjecture of Urlichs (Philol. XVII, 347) τὸ ἱππικόν. 
He urges esp. that Nicias cannot possibly have admitted, ‘tof course we cannot 
hope to rival them in the number of their hoplites”; for Nicias had spoken 
before (20.13) merely of πολλοὶ ὁπλῖται of the Siceliotes, not of superiority in 
this respect, and the necessity of πεζὸς πολύς (21. 2) was based not on the many 
hoplites, but on the numerous cavalry of the Siceliotes. If now in addition to the 
unquestioned superiority of the Siceliotes in cavalry (20. ὃ 4, 21.§ 1) were added 
also superiority in hoplites, the expressions μὴ ἀντίπαλον μόνον and ὑπερβάλλοντες 
τοῖς πᾶσι would be simply unintelligible. ΄ 

The objection that has been urged against τὸ ἱππικόν for τὸ ὁπλιτικόν, Namely 
that Nicias advised (22. 4) taking along τοξότας πολλοὺς καὶ σφενδονήτας, ὅπως πρὸς 
τὸ ἐκείνων ἱππικὸν ἀντέχωσι, Steup thinks unwarranted. For thereby the Atheni- 
ans would by no means necessarily be ἀντίπαλοι πρὸς τὸ ἐκείνων ἱππικόν, eSp. as 
the Siceliotes too had many archers (20. 13). But as μάχιμον is unsatisfactory on 
formal grounds with τὸ ἱππικόν as well as with τὸ ὁπλιτικόν, Steup proposes the 
sup. τὸ μαχιμώτατον αὐτῶν, τὸ ἱππικόν, ‘their best fighting branch, the cavalry.”’ 
For similar change of positive (in the Mss.) to superlative, cf. 14. 18. 22. 

~ 81 8 ὅμως δὲ τῇ παρούσῃ ῥώμῃ διὰ τὸ πλῆθος ἑκάστων ὧν ἑώρων τῇ ὄψει ἀγεθάρ- 
σουν: Cl. thought the traditional text, which was first decidedly objected to by 
St., could be retained if we rendered: ‘‘still in the feeling of superiority due to 


the multitude of all that they saw before their eyes they recovered courage.”’ 
In support of his rendering of ῥώμῃ Cl. maintained that the noun, like the 
corresponding verb (2. 8.1,14; 4. 72.5; 8.78.5), never means in Thue. organic 
strength alone, but courage or confidence (4.29.9; 7.18.8, 42.14; even 1. 49. 12; 
2.48.30; and 5.15.7; 6.85.5; 7. 68. 28, 77. δ). But Steup perhaps rightly 
holds that such a meaning is forced in passages like 4. 18. 9 and the last four of 
those cited immediately above. Steup, however, objects chiefly to the intoler- 
able circumstantiality of expression in τῇ ῥώμῃ ἀνεθάρσουν, with Cl.’s interpreta- 
tion. To St.’s change in the text — namely to bracket διὰ τὸ πλῆθος... ἑώρων 
and change τῇ παρούσῃ ῥώμῃ to τῆς παρούσης ῥώμης --- he objects that the meaning 
military force or army, which must be assumed for ῥώμη under these circum- 
stances, occurs nowhere else in Thuc. Steup would bracket τῇ παρούσῃ ῥώμῃ 
as a marginal explanation of διὰ τὸ πλῆθος ὄψει. With Classen, he takes τῇ ὄψει 
with ἑώρων as emphasizing the actuality of the causes of the ἀναθαρσεῖν in the 
face of vague fears. Against St.’s objections to this form of expression, Steup 
cites 3.112. 15 οὐ καθορωμένους τῇ ὄψει and 4. 34.22 ἀποκεκλῃμένοι τῇ ὄψει τοῦ 

81 6 παρασκενὴ γὰρ αὕτη [πρώτη] ἐκπλεύσασα μιᾶς πόλεως δυνάμει Ἑλληνικῇ 
πολυτελεστάτη δὴ καὶ εὐπρεπεστάτη τῶν ἐς ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον ἐγένετο : the passage 
is probably corrupt. Cl. suspected not only πρώτη but πρώτη... Ἑλληνικῇ, all 
which v. H. brackets. But the words ἐκπλεύσασα μιᾶς πόλεως δυνάμει Ἑλληνικῇ fit 
in, materially, with 30. 6 αὐτοὶ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι... ἐπλήρουν τὰς ναῦς, and the restric- 
tion of the main thought which they contain seems even necessary when we 
think of the Persian wars and the fleet of Xerxes. Nor is there any serious 
formal objection to the addition of these words to παρασκευή. But it is little 
probable that Thuc. should have called this παρασκευή, as compared with that 
which later sailed for Sicily under Demosthenes (7. 20. ὃ 2), ἡ πρώτη. He uses 
ἡ πρώτη παρασκευή in 44.1 of the total: of forces which united at Corcyra, 
whereas here παρασκευή, while designating the most important part, was still 
only a part of the forces. Hence we must not insert ἡ before πρώτη, but bracket 
πρώτη, With A. Hauvette (Extraits de Thucydide, Paris, 1898). 

Further it is to be observed that in the words πολυτελεστάτη δὴ καὶ εὐπρεπε- 
στάτη τῶν ἐς ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον, Thuc. has in mind, as is shown by what follows, 
the whole armament, and not exclusively the. number of triremes and hoplites. 
The following sentences are to show that the assertion made is valid even in 
spite of the ἀριθμῷ νεῶν καὶ ὁπλιτῶν οὐκ ἐλάσσων παρασκευή, With which once 
Pericles had sailed against Epidaurus and Hagnon against Potidaea. Possibly 
the expedition in question is cited in comparison esp. for the large number of 
Athenian hoplites then levied; at any rate this was its chief distinction as 
against the παρασκεσή of 2.23. § 2, 25.§1. Unfortunately Thuc. has not entered 
into details of the Athenian παρασκευαί of the period before the Peloponnesian 
war, and esp. not of the fleet fitted out by them for war with Xerxes (1.74. §1; 
cf. 1. 14. ὃ 8). J.S. ) 


82 15 ἀλλὰ καὶ γενομένης ἐκκλησίας ἐλέχθησαν τοιοίδε λόγοι ἀπό τε ἄλλων [τῶν 
μὲν πιστευόντων τὰ περὶ τῆς στρατείας τῆς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, τῶν δὲ τὰ ἐναντία 
λεγόντων] καὶ “Eppoxparys κτὲ.: against the common view that τοιοίδε λόγοι re- 
fers to the speeches of Hermocrates and Athenagoras, Steup argues: not only 
does Thuc. nowhere else unite two speeches thus in one announcement, but also 
we get in this way no proper connection of our sent. with the preceding, and 
no proper antithesis between ἀπό re ἄλλων κτὲ. and καὶ ‘Epuoxpdrns xré. Further 
with this view of τοιοίδε λόγοι the transition in c. 35 from the speech of Hermoc- 
rates to that of Athenagoras is unsatisfactory; for the circumstance that 
speeches like those of Hermocrates and Athenagoras were made could not 
possibly be opposed by means of ἀλλά to the remark that the reports coming into 
Syracuse about the expedition of the Athenians were discredited (cf. 45. 4 
οὐκέτι ἠπίστουν), since Athenagoras belonged to the incredulous majority. If 
τοιοίδε λόγοι had the meaning assumed, to the contrary speeches of others must 
be opposed not the one speech of Hermocrates, but also that of Athenagoras. 
Besides, if the speech also of Athenagoras were included under τοιοίδε λόγοι, we 
should have expected in c. 35 after the words καὶ ὁ μὲν Ἑρμοκράτης τοσαῦτα εἶπε 
an immediate transition to the speech of Athenagoras (cf. 1. 36. §4; 6.81), and 
not that there would be first several sentences about the effect of Hermocrates’ 

Cl. explained τοιοίδε λόγοι, “88 indicated in the intervening clause τῶν μὲν 
πιστευόντων... τῶν δὲ τὰ ἐναντία λεγόντων." But such a reference of τοιοίδε seems 
hardly possible and a proper connection of our sent. with the preceding is not 
won thereby. Also with St.’s bracketing of τοιοίδε the lack of connection with 
the preceding sent. remains. That speeches were made in a mass meeting by 
others as well as by Hermocrates cannot be regarded as a proper antithesis to 
what is said before. There is a further difficulty, hitherto unremarked it seems, 
not touched by St.’s conjecture. It is strange that after the statement concern- 
ing the rumors reaching Syracuse, οὐ μέντοι ἐπιστεύετο ἐπὶ πολὺν χρόνον οὐδέν, 
the credulous Syracusans and the incredulous are both mentioned just alike. 
Consideration of this point leads to the conclusion that the trouble is not with 
τοιοίδε, but with τῶν μὲν πιστευόντων... λεγόντων, as a gloss due to a misinter- 
pretation of τοιοίδε. These words being bracketed, we understand under τοιοίδε 
λόγοι Speeches which like that of Hermocrates are opposed to the dominant 
sentiment of the Syracusans. . 

34 5 ξυμμαχίαν ποιώμεθα [ἡμῖν]: St., followed by Bm., brackets ἡμῖν, on the 
ground that procure an alliance for ourselves would be ξυμμαχίαν προσποιώμεθα OF 
ξυμμαχίαν ποιώμεθα αὐτοῖς. He thinks ἡμῖν a copyist’s error induced by the follow- 
ing ἢ μή, ora marginal explanation to ws κοινὸς ὁ κίνδυνος, that crept into the text 
at the wrong place. Cl. regarding ποιώμεθα as assimilated by a copyist to repw- 
μεθα (8) wrote with Stephanus ποιῶνται, on account of the intolerable ἡμῖν (for 
ἡμῖν abrots) — which, however, Pp., Bl., and Kr. retain— and to avoid change of 
subject. Steup,who adopts, with Hude, the conjecture of Koraes, ξυμμαχίδα ποιώμεθα 



ἡμῖν, that the reference to Italy may be quite clear, cites 2. 7. 7 πόλεις ξυμμαχίδας 
ποιούμενοι. For ἡμῖν (added as antithesis to ᾿Αθηναίους) = ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς, he compares 
2.71.8 ὑμῶν = ὑμῶν αὐτῶν, and refers to the corresponding use of σφίσι, σφῶν, 
and σφᾶς (see his note on 4.28.27). With all the changes proposed the general 
sense reached is the same, so that we are at any rate sure of Thuc.’s meaning. 

34 21 περὶ τῆς Σικελίας xcré.: Steup reads ὅτι οὐ περὶ τῇ Σικελίᾳ πρότερον ἔσται 
ὁ ἀγὼν ἣ [τοῦ] ἐκείνους περαιωθῆναι τὸν ᾿Ιόνιον and renders, that not on the coasts of 
Sicily will the contest be before they have crossed the Ionian sea, i.e. they cannot 
show themselves on our coasts until they have effected the passage of the Ionian 
sea, in which they will meet with resistance. For περί with dat. in a local sense, 
ef. Hom. Σ 453 μάρναντο περὶ Σκαιῇσι πύλῃσιν. For πρότερον 7 with inf., cf. 1. 69. 
21; 2.40.11; 6.58.2; 8. 45. 29. 

Steup contends that from the manner in which the orator has begun to 
explain his plan and in which he continues (note esp. καταπλαγέντας τῷ ἀδοκήτῳ 
ὃ 6, and εἰ δ᾽ ἴδοιεν παρὰ γνώμην τολμήσαντας § 8), it is clear that in the sent. before 
us Hermocrates does not refer to the sequence of two combats, but means that 
the Athenians must fight for the passage of the Ionian sea, for the way to Sicily. 
But to get this thought, he contends that rod, which hinders the connection of 
ἢ With περαιωθῆναι, must be removed. Bauer had already suggested bracketing 
either rod or 7, but it can only be τοῦ, since the const. οὐ πρότερον τοῦ does not 
occur in Thuc. The remark of the Schol. on πρότερον... 7 in 1. 69. 21 --- τὸ ἢ 
ἀντὶ τοῦ ἤπερ --- Shows that it might have occurred to a commentator to add 
something to explain 7 here. The rod being removed, there is no longer any 
need to write περὶ τῆς Σικελίας. For the thought indeed it is better if even in 
the first member the question is of the place of conflict. The fate of Sicily could 
be decided even at the Iapygian promontory, so that the mention here of a prize 
of conflict would be inappropriate. As to περὶ Σικελίᾳ (local), see for other 
peculiarities of speech in orations of Hermocrates notes on 79. 14 and 4. 59. 8. 

36 6 οἱ yap δεδιότες ἰδίᾳ τι βούλονται τὴν πόλιν és ἔκπληξιν καθιστάναι, ὅπως TH 
κοινῷ φόβῳ τὸ σφέτερον ἐπηλυγάζωνται " καὶ νῦν αὗται αἱ ἀγγεχίαι τοῦτο δύνανται: 
Steup recognizes that Cl.’s τὸν σφέτερον gives a formally correct text, but argues 
that the material difficulty is not touched, since neither here nor in the further 
course of the speech is the slightest explanation given as to the nature of the 
personal fear on the part of the spreaders of the reports. So, considering that 
there are repeated references further on in the speech to plans of these people 
that menace the state, esp. 38. ὃ 2, where the very form of expression recalls 
- our passage (obs ἐγὼ νῦν πρῶτον, ἀλλ᾽ αἰεὶ ἐπίσταμαι... βουλομένους καταπλήξαντας 
τὸ ὑμέτερον πλῆθος αὐτοὺς τῆς πόλεως ἄρχειν), he suggests that the trouble comes 
from the puzzling expression δεδιότες, which the copyists miswrote for διώκοντες 
Or διανοηθέντες. With this change the difficulty